Z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User's Guide Vol II User S Volume 2

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 548

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)

User’s Guide Volume II
z/OS Version 1 Release 7.0

SC34-4823-04

Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)

User’s Guide Volume II
z/OS Version 1 Release 7.0

SC34-4823-04

Note
Before using this document, read the general information under “Notices” on page 505.

Fifth Edition (September 2005)
This edition applies to ISPF for Version 1 Release 7.0 of the licensed program z/OS (program number 5694-A01)
and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.
IBM welcomes your comments. A form for comments appears at the back of this publication. If the form has been
removed and you have ISPF-specific comments, address your comments to:
IBM Corporation
Department J87/D325
555 Bailey Avenue
San Jose, CA 95141-1003
U.S.A.
Internet: comments@us.ibm.com
If you would like a reply, be sure to include your name and your address, telephone number, e-mail address, or
FAX number.
Make sure to include the following in your comment or note:
v Title and order number of this document
v Page number or topic related to your comment
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
The ISPF development team maintains a site on the World Wide Web. The URL for the site is:
http://www.ibm.com/software/awdtools/ispf/
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1980, 2005. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.

Contents
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
About this document . . . . . . . . .
Who should use this document . . . . .
What is in this document . . . . . . .
Using LookAt to look up message explanations
Using IBM Health Checker for z/OS . . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

xiii
xiii
xiii
xiv
. xv

What’s in the z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF
library? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Part 1. ISPF Options . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

The Primary Option Menu panel . . . . . . . 5
ISPF Primary Options . . . . . . . . . . 5
Primary Option Menu Action Bar Choices . . . 6
Status Area on the Primary Option Menu . . . . . 8
Status Pull-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Defining the Status Area . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0) . . . . . 25

|
|

ISPF Settings Panel Fields . . . . . . . . .
Select Options . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Characteristics . . . . . . . . .
Print Graphics Parms . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Settings Panel Action Bar . . . . . . . .
Specifying Log and List Defaults and
Characteristics (The Log/List Action Bar Choice) .
Working with Function Keys and Keylists (The
Function Keys Action Bar Choice) . . . . . .
The Function Keys Pull-Down . . . . . . .
Changing Default Colors (The Colors Action Bar
Choice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying ISPF ENVIRON Settings (The Environ
Action Bar Choice) . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Workstation Parameters (The
Workstation Action Bar Choice) . . . . . . .
Displaying Message, System, User, Panel, and
Screen IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26
26
30
31
33
33
35
41
56
57
64
64
78

Chapter 3. View (Option 1) . . . . . . 83
View Entry Panel Action Bar .
View Entry Panel Fields . . .
Browsing a data set . . . . .
Ending Browse . . . . .
Browse Primary Commands .

.
.
.
.
.

84
84
85
86
87

Chapter 4. Edit (Option 2) . . . . . . 101
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2005

Editing a Data Set . . . . .
Edit Entry Panel Action Bar
Edit Entry Panel Fields . .

.
.
.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

.
.
.

. 102
. 102
. 103

. . . . 107

Utility Selection Panel Action Bar . . . . . .
Library Utility (Option 3.1) . . . . . . . .
Library Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . .
Library Utility Panel Fields . . . . . . .
Library Utility Options for Data Sets . . .
Library Utility Options for Members . . .
Data Set Utility (Option 3.2) . . . . . . .
Data Set Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . .
Data Set Utility Panel Fields . . . . . .
Data Set Utility Options . . . . . . . .
Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3) . . . . . .
Move/Copy Utility Panel Action Bar . . .
Move/Copy Utility Panel Fields . . . . .
Move/Copy Utility Options . . . . . .
Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4) . . . . . .
Data Set List Utility Panel Action Bar . . .
Data Set List Utility Panel Fields . . . . .
Data Set List Utility Options . . . . . .
Data Set List Utility Line Commands . . .
Data Set List Utility Primary Commands . .
Reset ISPF Statistics Utility (Option 3.5) . . .
Reset ISPF Statistics Panel Action Bar . . .
Reset ISPF Statistics Panel Fields . . . . .
Reset ISPF Statistics Utility Options . . . .
Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6) . . . . . . .
Hardcopy Utility Panel Action Bar . . . .
Hardcopy Utility Panel Fields . . . . . .
Generating and Submitting JCL . . . . .
Additional Batch Printing Information . . .
Using the TSO/E Information Center Facility
Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option
3.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download ISPF C/S component . . . . .
Download/upload data set . . . . . . .
Outlist Utility (Option 3.8) . . . . . . . .
Outlist Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . .
Outlist Utility Panel Fields . . . . . . .
Outlist Utility Options . . . . . . . .
Command Table Utility (Option 3.9) . . . . .
Command Table Utility Panel Fields . . . .
Scrolling a Command Table . . . . . .
Saving a Command Table . . . . . . .
Canceling a Command Table . . . . . .
Using Command Table Line Commands . .
Format Specifications Utility (Option 3.11) . . .
Format Specifications Panel Action Bar . . .
Format Specifications Panel Fields . . . .
Format Specifications Panel Options . . . .
Format Selection List Commands . . . . .
SuperC Utility (Option 3.12) . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

107
107
108
109
109
118
119
120
120
121
138
138
139
139
145
145
146
151
164
171
178
179
179
180
182
182
183
183
185
185

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

187
187
191
192
193
193
194
195
196
198
198
198
198
199
200
200
201
204
205

iii

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

SuperC Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . .
SuperC Utility Panel Fields . . . . . . .
SuperC Member Lists. . . . . . . . .
Submitting a SuperC Job in Batch Mode . .
Using the NOLIST Listing Type in Batch Mode
SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13) . . . . . . .
SuperCE Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . .
SuperCE Utility Panel Fields . . . . . .
SuperCE Utility Options . . . . . . . .
Search-For Utility (Option 3.14) . . . . . .
Search-For Utility Panel Action Bar . . . .
Search-For Utility Panel Fields . . . . . .
Specifying Additional Search Strings . . .
Search-For Strings and Keywords. . . . .
Search-For Member Lists . . . . . . .
Submitting a Search-For Job in Batch Mode .
Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15) . . . . . .
Search-ForE Utility Panel Action Bar . . .
Search-ForE Utility Panel Fields . . . . .
ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16) . . . . . .
Table Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . . .
Table Utility Panel Fields . . . . . . .
Table Utility Entry Panel Options . . . . .
Table Data Set Selection List . . . . . .
Table DD Selection List . . . . . . . .
Edit/Browse Table Panel . . . . . . .
Table Output Data Set Selection . . . . .
Table Utility Options . . . . . . . . .
Table Export Report Options . . . . . .
Export Data Set Attributes . . . . . . .
Importing Data into a Table . . . . . .
Exporting Data from a Table . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

206
207
211
212
214
215
216
216
220
228
229
229
231
232
233
234
234
235
235
241
242
243
243
244
245
246
258
259
260
262
263
263

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4) . . . 265
Foreground Selection Panel Action Bar . . . . .
Foreground Processing Sequence . . . . . . .
Expanding Packed Data . . . . . . . . . .
Member Expansion (ISRLEMX) . . . . . . .
Restrictions on Member Expansion and Member
Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member Expansion ISRLEMX Return Codes . .
Trigger Statement Errors . . . . . . . . .
Input Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreground—TSO/E Information Center Facility
Assembler (Option 4.1) . . . . . . . . . .
COBOL (Option 4.2) . . . . . . . . . . .
VS FORTRAN Compile (Option 4.3) . . . . . .
PL/I (Option 4.5) . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS Pascal Compile (Option 4.6) . . . . . . .
Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 4.7) . . . . . .
Linkage Editor Concatenation Sequence . . .
SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9) . . . . . .
SCRIPT/VS Processing Sequence . . . . . .
Selecting a Formatting Style . . . . . . .
Changing Style Options . . . . . . . . .
Using SCRIPT/VS with the TSO/E Information
Center Facility . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS COBOL II Interactive Debug (Option 4.10) . .

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

265
266
269
270
270
272
272
272
273
274
274
275
275
276
277
278
279
280
282
282
283
287
287
288
289

OS/VS COBOL Debug (Option 4.10A) .
COBOL Debug Processing Sequence .
Symbolic Debug Data Sets . . . .
Print Output Data Sets . . . . .
FORTRAN Debug (Option 4.11) . . .
Member Parts List (Option 4.12) . . .
Member Not Found . . . . . .
C/370 Compile (Option 4.13) . . . .
REXX/370 Compile (Option 4.14). . .
Ada/370 Compile (Option 4.15) . . .
AD/Cycle C/370 Compile (Option 4.16)
ISPDTLC (Option 4.18) . . . . . .
OS/390 C/C++ Compile (Option 4.19) .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

289
290
291
291
292
293
297
297
297
297
298
298
298

Chapter 7. Batch (Option 5) . . . . . 299
Batch Selection Panel Action Bar . . . . . .
Batch Processing Sequence . . . . . . . .
JCL Generation—Compilers . . . . . . .
JCL Generation—Assemblers and Linkage Editor
Assembler (Option 5.1) . . . . . . . . .
COBOL Compile (Option 5.2) . . . . . . .
VS FORTRAN Compile (Option 5.3) . . . . .
PL/I Compile (Option 5.5) . . . . . . . .
VS Pascal Compile (Option 5.6) . . . . . .
Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 5.7) . . . . .
VS COBOL II Interactive Debug (Option 5.10) .
Member Parts List (Option 5.12) . . . . . .
C/370 Compile (Option 5.13) . . . . . . .
REXX/370 Compile (Option 5.14) . . . . . .
Ada/370 Compile (Option 5.15) . . . . . .
AD/Cycle C/370 Compile (Option 5.16) . . .
ISPDTLC Compile (Option 5.18) . . . . . .
OS/390 C/C++ Compile (Option 5.19) . . . .

. 299
. 300
. 302
303
. 304
. 305
. 306
. 306
. 307
. 308
. 310
. 311
. 311
. 311
. 312
. 312
. 312
. 312

Chapter 8. Command (Option 6) . . . 313
ISPF Command Shell Panel Action Bar . . .
The Saved Command Area . . . . . . .
Entering TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX
EXECs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rules for Entering TSO Commands . . .
Rules for Entering CLISTs and REXX EXECs
Using the Session Manager . . . . . . .

.
.

. 313
. 315

.
.

. 315
. 316
316
. 316

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7) . . . 319
The Dialog Test Environment . . . . . . .
Dialog Test Primary Option Panel Action Bar
Using Variables . . . . . . . . . . . .
Severe Error Handling . . . . . . . . .
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending the Current Option without Saving
Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . .
Finding a Character String . . . . . . .
Displaying Breakpoint Qualification Data . .
Restoring the Format of the Breakpoints Panel
Dialog Test Line Commands . . . . . .
Setting a Keylist for Dialog Test . . . . .
Functions (Option 7.1) . . . . . . . . .
Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel Action
Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 319
321
. 322
. 322
. 323
.
.
.
.

325
325
325
325
325
. 325
. 326
. 327

. 328

Invoke Dialog Panel Fields . . . . .
Panels (Option 7.2) . . . . . . . .
Display Panel Action Bar . . . . .
Display Panel Fields . . . . . . .
Variables (Option 7.3) . . . . . . .
Variables Panel Action Bar . . . . .
Variables Panel Fields . . . . . .
Variables Commands . . . . . . .
Manipulating Variables . . . . . .
Variables Usage Notes . . . . . .
Tables (Option 7.4) . . . . . . . .
Tables Panel Action Bar . . . . . .
Tables Panel Fields . . . . . . .
Tables Panel Options . . . . . . .
Log (Option 7.5) . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Transaction Log Not Available . .
Trace Output in ISPF Log . . . . .
Dialog Services (Option 7.6) . . . . .
Invoke Dialog Service Panel Action Bar.
Special Display Panel . . . . . . .
Traces (Option 7.7) . . . . . . . .
1—Function Traces . . . . . . .
2—Variable Traces . . . . . . . .
Breakpoints (Option 7.8) . . . . . . .
Specifying Breakpoints . . . . . .
Breakpoints Panel Action Bar . . . .
Breakpoints Panel Fields. . . . . .
Qualification Parameter Values . . .
Finding a Breakpoint . . . . . . .
Tutorial (Option 7.T) . . . . . . . .
Exit (Option 7.X) . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Chapter 10. IBM Products (Option 9)

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

328
330
331
331
333
334
335
335
336
336
338
338
339
340
350
351
351
352
353
354
355
356
358
359
360
360
361
361
363
366
366

367

Chapter 11. SCLM (Option 10) . . . . 369
SCLM Main Menu Action Bar .
SCLM Overview . . . . .

.
.

. 369
. 370

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action
Workplace (Option 11) . . . . . . . 371
Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . .
Workplace Entry Panel . . . . . . .
Specifying Actions . . . . . . . . . .
Choices on the Workplace Action Bar . .
Actions That Require Prompt Windows for
More Information . . . . . . . . .
Commands . . . . . . . . . . .
Default CUA Function Key Settings . . .
Changing Workplace Settings . . . . .
Workplace Example Scenario . . . . .

.
.
.
.

371
371
374
374

.
.
.
.
.

385
393
394
395
399

Part 2. Appendixes . . . . . . . . 403
Appendix A. SuperC Reference . . . . 405
Utility Differences . .
Standard Utilities .
Extended Utilities .
Program Description .
SuperC Features for the

. .
. .
. .
. .
Year

. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
2000 Transition

.
.
.
.
.

405
405
405
406
407

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SuperC Compare Process Options . . . . .
SuperC Compare Process Statements . . . .
Process Statement Notation Conventions . .
CHNGV - CHNG (Compare Type) Line Value
CMPBOFS - Compare Byte Offsets . . . .
CMPCOLM, CMPCOLMN, CMPCOLMO Compare Columns . . . . . . . . .
CMPLINE - Compare Lines . . . . . .
CMPSECT - Compare Sections . . . . .
COLHEAD—Define Column Headings . . .
DPLINE, DPLINEC - Don’t Process Lines . .
LNCT - Line Count . . . . . . . . .
LSTCOLM - List Columns . . . . . . .
NCHGT, OCHGT - Change Text . . . . .
NEXCLUDE, OEXCLUDE —Exclude Data: .
NFOCUS, OFOCUS— Focus on Data . . .
NTITLE, OTITLE - Alternate Listing Title . .
NY2AGE, OY2AGE —Year 2000 Aging Option
NY2C, NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C, OY2Z,
OY2D, OY2P —Year 2000 Date Definitions .
REVREF—Revision Code Reference . . . .
SELECT - Select PDS Members . . . . .
SLIST - Statements File Listing Control . . .
Y2PAST—Year 2000 Global Date Option . .
* and .* - Comment Lines (SuperC Listing)
SuperC Search-For Process Options . . . . .
SuperC Search-For Process Statements . . . .
Process Statement Notation Conventions . .
CMPCOLM - Compare (Search) Columns . .
CMPLINE - Compare (Search-For) Lines . .
DPLINE, DPLINEC - Don’t Process Lines . .
LNCT - Line Count . . . . . . . . .
LPSFV - LPSF Count Value . . . . . . .
LSTCOLM - List Columns . . . . . . .
NCHGT - Change Text of New (Search) Text
String . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NTITLE - Alternate Listing Title . . . . .
SELECT - Select PDS Members . . . . .
SLIST - Statements File Listing Control . . .
SRCHFOR, SRCHFORC - Search for Strings in
the Input Files . . . . . . . . . . .
* and .* - Comment Lines (Search-For
Listing) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . .
SuperC and Search-For Technical Overview . .
How SuperC and Search-For Filter Input File
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How SuperC Matches Input Files . . . . .
How SuperC Partitions and Processes Large
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Compare Types May Produce Different
Comparison Results . . . . . . . . .
Comparing and Searching Alias Members . .
Comparing Load Modules . . . . . . .
Comparing CSECTs . . . . . . . . .
How to Directly Invoke SuperC and Search-For

Appendix B. SuperC Listings
SuperC Listing Title Lines .
Listing Output Section . .

.
.

.
.
.
.

407
409
419
419
422
. 423

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

424
425
427
429
431
433
434
435
437
438
439
440

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

441
444
445
446
447
448
449
452
453
454
455
456
458
459
460

.
.
.
.

461
463
464
465

. 466
. 468
. 469
. 470
. 470
. 471
. 472
.
.
.
.

473
473
474
474
474

. . . . 477
.
.

.
.

. 481
. 481

Contents

Listing Prefix Codes . . . . . . . . .
Type-of-Difference Codes . . . . . . .
Member Summary Listing . . . . . . . .
Summary and Statistics/PDS Overall Totals .
Bottom-of-Listing Information . . . . . . .
Y2K Comparison . . . . . . . . . . .
Side-By-Side Listings . . . . . . . . . .
Effect of File Compare Type on SuperC Listings
File Comparison of a Sequential Data Set or
Membered PDS . . . . . . . . . . .
File Comparison of a Complete PDS . . . .
Search-For Listings . . . . . . . . . .
Update Data Set Control Output Examples . .
APNDUPD—Append Update Data Set . . .
UPDCMS8—Update CMS Sequenced 8 . . .
UPDCNTL—Update Control . . . . . .
UPDMVS8—Update MVS Sequenced 8 . . .
UPDLDEL—Update Long Source and Delta
Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . .

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

482
482
484
484
485
486
486
487
488
488
489
490
490
491
491
495

. 495

UPDPDEL—Prefixed Delta Lines . .
UPDREV—Update Revision . . .
UPDREV2 - Update Revision (2) . .
UPDSEQ0—Update Sequenced 0 . .
UPDSUMO—Update Summary Only

.
.
.
.
.

496
497
499
499
500

Appendix C. Accessibility . . . . . . 503
Using assistive technologies . . . . .
Keyboard navigation of the user interface .
z/OS information . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.

. 503
. 503
. 503

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Programming Interface Information .
Trademarks . . . . . . . . .

.
.

. 506
. 507

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Figures
1. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM) . . . 5
2. Status pull-down on the ISPF Primary Option
Menu (ISR@PRIM) . . . . . . . . . . 9
3. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area –
Session View . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4. System Information pop-up . . . . . . . 11
5. Environment pop-up (Release information)
12
6. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area –
Function Keys View . . . . . . . . . . 13
7. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area –
Calendar View . . . . . . . . . . . 13
8. Julian Date pop-up . . . . . . . . . . 14
9. Standard Date pop-up . . . . . . . . . 15
10. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area – User
Status View . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
11. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area – User
Point-And-Shoot View . . . . . . . . . 16
12. ISPF Status pop-up (ISPSAMMN) . . . . . 17
13. Status pull-down in ISPF Status pop-up
18
14. Options pull-down in ISPF Status pop-up
19
15. Calendar Month pop-up window . . . . . 20
16. Calendar Year pop-up window . . . . . . 20
17. Calendar Start pop-up window . . . . . . 21
18. Calendar Time Format pop-up window
21
19. Calendar Colors Panel (ISPCALGC) . . . . 22
20. User View Customization Panel (ISPSAMUS)
23
21. User Point-And-Shoot panel (ISPSAMUP)
24
22. ISPF Settings Panel (ISPISMMN) . . . . . 26
23. Screen Containing Graphics to Be Printed
Using PRINTG . . . . . . . . . . . 32
24. Example of Using Aspect Ratio Parameter 0
32
25. Example of Using Aspect Ratio Parameter 1
33
26. Log/List Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings Panel
Action Bar (ISPISMMN) . . . . . . . . 36
27. Log Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPISML1)
36
28. List Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPISML2)
38
29. List Data Set Characteristics Panel (ISPISML3) 40
30. Log and List JCL Panel (ISPISMLJ) . . . . . 41
31. Function Keys Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings
Panel Action Bar (ISPISMMN) . . . . . . 43
32. PF Key Definitions and Labels Panel
(ISPOPT3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
33. Using the PF Key Definitions and Labels Panel
(ISPOPT3E) . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
34. Example Screen with Function Key Definition
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
35. Keylist Utility Panel (ISPKLUP) . . . . . . 47
36. Keylist Utility with File Action Bar Pull-Down
(ISPKLUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
37. Keylist Create Panel (ISPKLUCR) . . . . . 49
38. Keylist Change Panel (ISPKLUCH) . . . . . 50
39. Keylist Utility View Panel (ISPKLUB) . . . . 52
40. Keylist Utility with Delete Keylist
Confirmation Pop-Up (ISPKLUP) . . . . . 53
41. Keylist Utility with View Action Bar
Pull-Down (ISPKLUP) . . . . . . . . . 54
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2005

|
|
|

42. Tailor Function Key Definition Display Panel
(ISPOPFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
43. Colors Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings Panel
Action Bar (ISPISMMN) . . . . . . . . 58
44. Global Color Change Utility Panel (ISPOPT10) 59
45. Global GUI Color Change Utility Panel
(ISPOPTG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
46. Color Change Panel With Drop-Down List
61
47. CUA Attribute Change Utility Panel
(ISPOPT11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
48. CUA Attribute Change Utility Panel Positioned
on the Point-and-Shoot Panel Element
(ISPOPT1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
49. ISPF ENVIRON Settings Panel (ISPENVA)
64
50. Workstation Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings
Panel Action Bar (ISPISMMN) . . . . . . 65
51. The Workstation Agent window. . . . . . 65
52. Initiate Workstation Connection Panel
(ISPISMGI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
53. WSA Connection Panel. . . . . . . . . 70
54. Client/Server Component Update Panel
(ISPDTVD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
55. Client/Server Component Install Program
Panel (ISPWSD0A) . . . . . . . . . . 72
56. GUI Settings Pop-Up Window (ISPISMGS)
73
57. ISPF Workstation Tool Integration panel
75
58. Modify Tool Configuration Window . . . . 76
59. Extension Mapping Dialog Window . . . . 77
60. Identifier Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings
Panel Action Bar (ISPISMMN) . . . . . . 78
61. Panel Displayed with the Message Identifier
Set to On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
62. Panel Displayed with the System Name Set to
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
63. Panel Displayed with the User ID Set to On
80
64. Panel Displayed with the Panel Identifier Set
to On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
65. Panel Displayed with the Screen Identifier Set
to On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
66. View Entry Panel (ISRBRO01) . . . . . . 83
67. Browse - Data Display (ISRBROBA) . . . . 86
68. Browse - Column-Identification Line
(ISRBROBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
69. Browse Hexadecimal Display - Vertical
(ISRBROBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
70. Browse Hexadecimal Display - Data
(ISRBROBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
71. Edit Entry Panel (ISREDM01) . . . . . . 102
72. Utility Selection Panel (ISRUTIL) . . . . . 107
73. Library Utility Panel (ISRUDA1) . . . . . 108
74. Member List Commands Pop-Up Window
(ISRCMLEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
75. Data Set Information (ISRUAIP) . . . . . 112
76. Volume Information for a Multivolume Data
Set (ISRUAMVI) . . . . . . . . . . 112

vii

77. Data Set Information for Managed Data Sets
(ISRUAISE) . . . . . . . . . . . .
78. Volume Information for a Managed
Multivolume Data Set (ISRUAMVI) . . . .
79. Data Set Information for PDSE Managed Data
Sets (ISRUAISE) . . . . . . . . . . .
80. Short Data Set Information (ISRUAIP)
81. Data Set Information (Short) for Managed
Data Sets (ISRUAISE) . . . . . . . . .
82. Data Set Information (Short) for a PDSE
(ISRUAISE) . . . . . . . . . . . .
83. Data Set Utility Panel (ISRUDA2S) . . . .
84. Allocate New Data Set Panel (ISRUAAP2)
85. Allocate New Data Set —Managed Data Set
Support Panel (ISRUAASE) . . . . . . .
86. Multivolume Allocation Panel (ISRUAMV)
87. Allocation Error Panel (ISRUADCS) . . . .
88. Confirm Delete Panel (ISRUADC1) . . . .
89. Confirm Purge Panel (ISRUADC3) . . . .
90. VSAM Utilities Panel (ISRUVSAM) . . . .
91. Define Cluster Panel (ISRUVPC3) . . . . .
92. Editing the IDCAMS Command (ISRUVEDT)
93. Browsing IDCAMS Errors (ISRUVBRO)
94. Using a VSAM Profile Data Set (ISRVMLGT)
95. Panel for Changing the Name of the VSAM
Profile Data Set (ISRUVGET) . . . . . .
96. Move/Copy Utility Panel (ISRUMC1)
97. Move/Copy Utility - “To” Panel for Copying
(ISRUMC2B) . . . . . . . . . . . .
98. Move/Copy Utility - “To” Panel for Moving
(ISRUMC2B) . . . . . . . . . . . .
99. Data Set List Utility Panel (ISRUDLP)
100. Sequence of Data Set List Display Views
101. Confirm Member Delete Panel (ISRUDELC)
102. Data Set List - Volume View (ISRUDSL0)
103. Data Set List - Space View (ISRUDSL0)
104. Data Set List - Attributes View (ISRUDSL0)
105. Data Set List - Total View (ISRUDSL0)
106. Data Set List - Total View with Catalog Name
(ISRUDSL0) . . . . . . . . . . . .
107. VTOC Summary Information Panel
(ISRUDSLV) . . . . . . . . . . . .
108. Data Set List Commands Pop-Up
(ISRUDABC) . . . . . . . . . . . .
109. Member List Display - Expanded Line
Command Field (ISRUDSM) . . . . . .
110. Load Module Library Display - Expanded
Line Command Field (ISRUDSM) . . . . .
111. Data Set List Color Change Utility Panel
(ISRDLCP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
112. Data Set List Utility - SHOWCMD Panel
(ISRUDSLS) . . . . . . . . . . . .
113. Reset ISPF Statistics Panel (ISRURSP)
114. Hardcopy Utility Panel - before JCL
Generation (ISRUHCP) . . . . . . . .
115. Hardcopy Utility Panel - after JCL Generation
(ISRUHCJP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
116. Hardcopy Utility Panel - with the TSO/E
Information Center Facility Installed
(ISRUHCPI) . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

113
114
115
116
117
118
120
122
122
126
127
130
131
133
135
136
136
137
138
138
140
142
145
149
151
152
154
154
155
155
163
165
167
168
173
176
179
182
184

186

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

117. Download Data Set to Workstation Utility
Panel (ISPUDL) . . . . . . . . . . .
118. ISPF Client/Server Component Download
Panel (ISPWSD01) . . . . . . . . . .
119. ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice
(ISPWSD03) . . . . . . . . . . . .
120. ISPF Client/Server Component Install
Program Panel (ISPWSD06) . . . . . . .
121. ISPF Data Set Panel (ISPUDLDS) . . . . .
122. Outlist Utility Panel (ISRUOLP1) . . . . .
123. Command Table Utility Panel (ISPUCMA)
124. Command Table Editing Panel (ISPUCMD)
125. Format Specifications Panel (ISRFM01)
126. Format Definition Panel (ISRFM02) . . . .
127. Copy Format Selection List Panel (ISRFM04)
128. Format Selection List Panel (ISRFM03)
129. SuperC Utility Panel (ISRSSNEW) . . . .
130. SuperC Utility - Old Data Set Panel
(ISRSSOLD) . . . . . . . . . . . .
131. SuperC Member List Panel (ISRSSML)
132. SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs Panel
(ISRSCSUB) . . . . . . . . . . . .
133. SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs Panel
using NOLIST (ISRSCSB1) . . . . . . .
134. SuperCE Utility Panel (ISRSEPRI) . . . . .
135. SuperCE - Concatenation Interactive Entry
Panel (ISRSECAT) . . . . . . . . . .
136. SuperCE - Concatenation Batch Entry Panel
(ISRSECAT) . . . . . . . . . . . .
137. SuperC Process Statements Panel (ISRSEPRS)
138. Browse A SuperCE Profile . . . . . . .
139. SuperCE - Profile Manager Panel
(ISRSEPMG) . . . . . . . . . . . .
140. SuperC - Defaults Panel (ISRSDFLT) . . . .
141. Search-For Utility Panel (ISRSFSPR) . . . .
142. Additional Search Strings Panel (ISRSFSST)
143. Search Member List Panel (ISRSSML)
144. Search-For Utility - Submit Batch Jobs Panel
(ISRSFSUB) . . . . . . . . . . . .
145. Extended Search-For Utility Panel (ISRSFPRI)
146. Extended Search-For - Concatenation Data Set
Entry Panel (ISRSFCON) . . . . . . . .
147. Extended Search-For - Concatenation Batch
Entry Panel (ISRSFCON) . . . . . . . .
148. Search-For Process Statements Panel
(ISRSFPRS) . . . . . . . . . . . .
149. ISPF Table Utility Panel (ISRUTBP0) . . . .
150. Table Data Set Selection List Panel
(ISRUTBP1) . . . . . . . . . . . .
151. Table DD Selection List Panel (ISRUTBP2)
152. Table Display Panel, EDIT mode (ISRUTBP3)
153. Extension Variables Panel (ISRUTBP4)
154. Table Export Layout Panel (ISRUTBP7)
155. Table Sort Specification Panel (ISRUTBP8)
156. Table Statistics Panel (ISRUTBP6) . . . . .
157. Table Structure Panel (ISRUTBP5) . . . . .
158. Table Output Data Set Selection Panel
(ISRUTBP9) . . . . . . . . . . . .
159. Table Export Report Options Panel
(ISRUTBO2) . . . . . . . . . . . .

187
188
190
191
192
193
196
197
200
201
203
204
206
208
211
212
215
216
221
222
224
225
226
228
229
231
233
234
235
238
239
241
242
244
245
247
249
251
255
256
257
259
261

| 160. Table Export Data Set Attributes Panel
(ISRUTBO3) . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
|
| 161. Export report example . . . . . . . . 264
162. Foreground Selection Panel (ISRFPA)
163. Foreground Print Options Panel (ISRFPPRT)
164. Foreground Print Options Panel With TSO/E
Information Center Facility (ISRFPPRI) . . .
165. Foreground Assembler Panel (ISRFP01)
166. Foreground COBOL Compile Panel (ISRFP02)
167. Foreground VS FORTRAN Compile Panel
(ISRFP03) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168. Foreground PL/I Optimizing Compile Panel
(ISRFP05) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169. Foreground VS Pascal Compile Panel
(ISRFP06) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170. Foreground Binder/Linkage Editor Panel
(ISRFP07B) . . . . . . . . . . . .
171. SCRIPT/VS Processor Panel (ISRFP09)
172. Foreground Print Options for Style Panel
(ISRFP09P) . . . . . . . . . . . .
173. Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style Panel
(ISRFP09T) . . . . . . . . . . . .
174. SCRIPT/VS Options for Style: DRAFT Panel
(ISRFP09O) . . . . . . . . . . . .
175. Foreground Print Options for Style Panel
with the TSO/E Information Center Facility
(ISRFP09I) . . . . . . . . . . . .
176. COBOL Debug Panel (ISRFP10A) . . . . .
177. FORTRAN Debug Panel (ISRFP11) . . . .
178. Foreground Member Parts List Panel
(ISRFP12) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179. Member Parts List Display (ISRFP12B)
180. Foreground ISPDTLC Compile Panel
(ISPCP01) Screen 1 . . . . . . . . . .
181. Batch Selection Panel (ISRJPA) . . . . . .
182. Batch Selection Panel with JCL Generated
(ISRJPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183. Batch Assembler Panel (ISRJP01) . . . . .
184. Batch COBOL Compile Panel (ISRJP02)
185. Batch VS FORTRAN Compile Panel (ISRJP03)
186. Batch PL/I Compile Panel (ISRJP05) . . . .
187. Batch VS Pascal Compile Panel (ISRJP06)
188. Batch Binder Linkage/Editor Panel
(ISRJP07B) . . . . . . . . . . . .
189. VS COBOL II Interactive Debug Panel
(ISRJP10) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
190. Batch Member Parts List Panel (ISRJP12)
191. ISPF Command Shell Panel (ISRTSO)
192. ISPF Command Shell Panel with Saved
Commands (ISRTSO) . . . . . . . . .
193. Dialog Test Primary Option Panel (ISPYXD1)
194. Keylist Change Panel (ISPKLUCH) . . . .
195. Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel
(ISPYFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196. Display Panel (ISPYP1) . . . . . . . .
197. Message Display Panel (ISPYP2) . . . . .
198. Variables Panel (ISPYVPN) . . . . . . .
199. Tables Panel (ISPYTPI) . . . . . . . .
200. Display Row Panel (ISPYTPD) . . . . . .
201. Confirm Table Row Delete Panel (ISPYTPCD)
202. Modify Row Panel (ISPYTPM) . . . . . .

265
268
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
283
286
287
288

289
290
293
294
296
298
299
302
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
313
315
320
326
327
331
333
334
338
341
342
343

203. Add Row Panel (ISPYTPA) . . . . . . .
204. Structure of Table Panel (ISPYTPSR) . . . .
205. Status of Table Panel with Table Not Open
(ISPYTPS1) . . . . . . . . . . . .
206. Status of Table Panel with Table Open
(ISPYTPS1) . . . . . . . . . . . .
207. ISPF Transaction Log (ISPYLP1) . . . . .
208. Invoke Dialog Service Panel (ISPYS1)
209. Special Display Panel (ISPYS2) . . . . . .
210. Traces Panel (ISPYRI1) . . . . . . . .
211. Function Traces Panel (ISPYRFP) . . . . .
212. Variable Traces Panel (ISPYRVP) . . . . .
213. Breakpoints Panel (ISPYBP1) . . . . . .
214. Breakpoints Panel with Qualification
Parameter Values (ISPYBP2) . . . . . .
215. Breakpoint Primary Option Panel (ISPYXM1)
216. Dialog Test Tutorial - First Panel (ISP70000)
217. Additional IBM Program Development
Products Panel (ISRDIIS) . . . . . . . .
218. SCLM Main Menu (FLMDMN) . . . . .
219. Workplace Entry Panel - Library View
(ISRWORK1) . . . . . . . . . . . .
220. Workplace Entry Panel - Data Set View
(ISRWORK) . . . . . . . . . . . .
221. Reset Statistics panel (ISRURSET) . . . . .
222. TSO Command panel (ISRUTCES) . . . .
223. WS Command panel (ISRUWCES) . . . .
224. ISPF Command Shell panel (ISRTSO)
225. Move panel (ISRUMVC) . . . . . . . .
226. Rename prompt panel (ISRURNAM)
227. Rename data set panel (ISRUARP1) . . . .
228. Rename member panel (ISRUREN) . . . .
229. Workplace Settings panel (ISRUSETM)
230. Priority for Filtering Input Lines . . . . .
231. Find Match Example . . . . . . . . .
232. Split Screen Showing Source Data for SuperC
Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233. OVSUM Listing of a LINE Comparison of
Two PDS Members. . . . . . . . . .
234. DELTA Listing of a LINE Comparison of Two
PDSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235. LONG Listing of a Word Comparison of Two
PDSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
236. Comparison Listing with Column Headings
(Using COLHEAD) . . . . . . . . .
237. Word Comparison of Two PDSs Using
Change Bar to Show Differences . . . . .
238. Comparison Listing with Y2000 Dates Being
Compared . . . . . . . . . . . .
239. Side-By-Side LINE Comparison Using the
NARROW Process Option . . . . . . .
240. File Comparison of a Membered PDS
241. File Comparison of a Complete PDS . . . .
242. Search-For Listing . . . . . . . . . .
243. UPDCMS8 Update Data Set . . . . . . .
244. UPDCNTL Data Set Using Line Compare
245. UPDCNTL Listing Using Word Compare
246. UPDCNTL Listing Using Byte Compare
247. UPDMVS8 Update Data Set Listing . . . .
248. UPDLDEL Update Control Data Set . . . .
249. UPDPDEL Update Data Set Listing . . . .
Figures

345
347
348
349
350
353
355
356
357
358
360
362
364
366
367
369
372
373
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
392
396
470
471
478
478
479
480
481
483
486
487
488
489
489
491
492
493
494
495
496
497

250. Example of a UPDREV Update File for
SCRIPT/VS Documents . . . . . . . . 498
251. Example of a UPDREV Update Data Set for
BookMaster Documents . . . . . . . . 498

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

252.
253.
254.
255.

UPDSEQ0 Update Data Set . . . . . .
UPDSUMO Data Set Using Line Compare
UPDSUMO Data Set Using Word Compare
UPDSUMO Data Set Using Byte Compare

. 499
500
501
502

Tables
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

CUA Mode Effect on Panel Display . . . . 28
CUA Mode Effect on Top-Row-Displayed
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Terminal Types . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Log Data Set Defaults . . . . . . . . . 37
List Data Set Defaults . . . . . . . . . 38
ISPKYLST Key Settings . . . . . . . . 42
ISPHELP Key Settings . . . . . . . . . 43
Default Key Settings . . . . . . . . . 49
Displaying Forms of the Function Keys
56
Valid CUA Attribute Change Values . . . . 62
Valid Point-and-Shoot Change Values . . . . 63
TSO Command/CLIST/REXX EXEC
Variables (Output) . . . . . . . . . . 160
TSO Command/CLIST/REXX EXEC
Variables (Input) . . . . . . . . . . 161
Sort Fields for Source Libraries. . . . . . 177
SRCHFOR Command Search String Examples 178
Reset Mod Level and Reset Sequence
Numbers Combinations . . . . . . . . 181
SuperCE Process Options . . . . . . . 223

18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.

Search-For Process Options . . . . . . .
Expansion Triggers and Syntax. . . . . .
ISRSCAN and ISRLEMX Return Codes
Foreground Member Parts List Record
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISRSCAN and ISRLEMX Return Codes
Workstation Commands . . . . . . . .
Workplace Function Key Settings . . . . .
Summary of Process Options for Search and
Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of Process Statements for Compare
and Search . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search-For Process Options . . . . . . .
Summary of Search-For Process Statements
UPDCNTL Format Using Line Compare
UPDCNTL Format Using Word Compare
UPDCNTL Format Using Byte Compare
UPDSUMO Format Using Line Compare
UPDSUMO Format Using Word Compare
UPDSUMO Format Using Byte Compare

240
270
272
296
303
393
394
409
420
449
452
492
493
495
500
501
502

xii

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Preface
This document provides reference and usage information for programmers who
develop applications with ISPF. It also provides conceptual and functional
descriptions of ISPF.

About this document
This document contains two parts.
The first part provides information about using ISPF options 0–11.
The second part contains the appendixes and provides:
v Descriptions of the SuperC and Search-For programs
v Descriptions and examples of the SuperC output listing formats.

Who should use this document
This document is for application programmers using ISPF. Users should be familiar
with coding CLISTs, REXX EXECs, or programs in the MVS environment.

What is in this document
Chapter 1, “Primary Option Menu (POM),” describes the ISPF Primary Option
menu, including the main menu options and the status area.
Chapter 2, “Settings (Option 0),” describes the ISPF Settings panel and related
pop-up windows.
Chapter 3, “View (Option 1),” describes how Browse (Option 1) allows you to
display source data and listings stored in ISPF libraries or other partitioned or
sequential data sets.
Chapter 4, “Edit (Option 2),” describes how Edit (Option 2) allows you to create,
display, and change data stored in ISPF libraries or other partitioned or sequential
data sets.
Chapter 5, “Utilities (Option 3),” describes the different functions for library, data
set, and catalog maintenance.
Chapter 6, “Foreground (Option 4),” describes how Foreground (Option 4) allows
ISPF to run the foreground processors.
Chapter 7, “Batch (Option 5),” describes how Batch (Option 5) allows ISPF to run
the batch processors.
Chapter 8, “Command (Option 6),” describes Command (Option 6), and how ISPF
allows you to enter TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs on the Command
line of any panel and in the Line Command field on data set list displays.

xiii

Chapter 9, “Dialog Test (Option 7),” describes how to use Dialog Test (Option 7)
for testing both complete ISPF applications and ISPF dialog parts, including
functions, panels, variables, messages, tables, and skeletons.
Chapter 10, “IBM Products (Option 9),” describes the other IBM products that are
supported as ISPF dialogs.
Chapter 11, “SCLM (Option 10),” provides an overview of the SCLM product.
Chapter 12, “ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11),” describes the Workplace
option (Option 11).
Appendix A, “SuperC Reference,” provides information about the SuperC return
codes, process options, update data set control options, and process statements.
Appendix B, “SuperC Listings,” describes and explains the kinds of listings you
can produce using SuperC.

Using LookAt to look up message explanations
LookAt is an online facility that lets you look up explanations for most of the
IBM® messages you encounter, as well as for some system abends and codes.
Using LookAt to find information is faster than a conventional search because in
most cases LookAt goes directly to the message explanation.
You can use LookAt from these locations to find IBM message explanations for
z/OS® elements and features, z/VM®, VSE/ESA™, and Clusters for AIX® and
Linux™:
v The Internet. You can access IBM message explanations directly from the LookAt
Web site at http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/lookat/.
v Your z/OS TSO/E host system. You can install code on your z/OS or z/OS.e
systems to access IBM message explanations using LookAt from a TSO/E
command line (for example: TSO/E prompt, ISPF, or z/OS UNIX® System
Services).
v Your Microsoft® Windows® workstation. You can install LookAt directly from
the z/OS Collection (SK3T-4269) or the z/OS and Software Products DVD Collection
(SK3T4271) and use it from the resulting Windows graphical user interface
(GUI). The command prompt (also known as the DOS > command line) version
can still be used from the directory in which you install the Windows version of
LookAt.
v Your wireless handheld device. You can use the LookAt Mobile Edition from
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/lookat/lookatm.html
with a handheld device that has wireless access and an Internet browser (for
example: Internet Explorer for Pocket PCs, Blazer or Eudora for Palm OS, or
Opera for Linux handheld devices).
You can obtain code to install LookAt on your host system or Microsoft Windows
workstation from:
v A CD-ROM in the z/OS Collection (SK3T-4269).
v The z/OS and Software Products DVD Collection (SK3T4271).
v The LookAt Web site (click Download and then select the platform, release,
collection, and location that suit your needs). More information is available in
the LOOKAT.ME files available during the download process.

xiv

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Using IBM Health Checker for z/OS
IBM Health Checker for z/OS is a z/OS component that installations can use to
gather information about their system environment and system parameters to help
identify potential configuration problems before they impact availability or cause
outages. Individual products, z/OS components, or ISV software can provide
checks that take advantage of the IBM Health Checker for z/OS framework. This
book refers to checks or messages associated with this component.
For additional information about checks and about IBM Health Checker for z/OS,
see IBM Health Checker for z/OS and Sysplex: User’s Guide. z/OS V1R4, V1R5, and
V1R6 users can obtain the IBM Health Checker for z/OS from the z/OS
Downloads page at
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/downloads/.
SDSF also provides functions to simplify the management of checks. See z/OS
SDSF Operation and Customization for additional information.

Preface

xvi

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

What’s in the z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF library?
You can order the ISPF books using the numbers provided below.
Title

Order Number

z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference

SC34-4821–04

z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference

SC34-4824–04

z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros

SC34-4820–04

z/OS ISPF Messages and Codes

SC34-4815–04

z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing

GC34-4814–04

z/OS ISPF Reference Summary

SC34-4816–04

z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Project Manager’s
and Developer’s Guide

SC34-4817–04

z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Reference

SC34-4818–04

z/OS ISPF Services Guide

SC34-4819–04

z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I

SC34-4822–04

z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SC34-4823–04

xvii

xviii

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Part 1. ISPF Options
Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM) . . .
The Primary Option Menu panel . . . . . .
ISPF Primary Options . . . . . . . . .
Primary Option Menu Action Bar Choices . .
Status Area on the Primary Option Menu . . . .
Status Pull-Down . . . . . . . . . . .
Session . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . .
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Status . . . . . . . . . . .
User Point and Shoot . . . . . . . .
None . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the Status Area . . . . . . . .
Customizing the Calendar . . . . . .
Customizing the user status area . . . .
Customizing the user point-and-shoot status
area . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 5
. 5
. 5
. 6
. 8
. 9
. 9
. 12
. 13
. 15
. 15
. 16
. 16
. 19
. 22
. 23

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0) . . . . . . .
ISPF Settings Panel Fields . . . . . . . . .
Select Options . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Characteristics . . . . . . . . .
Print Graphics Parms . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Settings Panel Action Bar . . . . . . . .
Specifying Log and List Defaults and
Characteristics (The Log/List Action Bar Choice) .
Log Data Set Defaults . . . . . . . . .
List Data Set Defaults . . . . . . . . .
List Data Set Characteristics . . . . . . .
JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Function Keys and Keylists (The
Function Keys Action Bar Choice) . . . . . .
ISPF Default Keylist . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Default Keylist for Help Panels . . . .
Non-Keylist PF Key Settings . . . . . . .
Keylist Settings . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailor Function Key Definition Display . . .
The Function Keys Pull-Down . . . . . . .
Choices For Changing PF Key Definitions . .
Choices For Showing PF Keys on the Display
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choices for Determining Who Can Use Your
PF Keylist . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choices for Enabling Keylists . . . . . .
Changing Default Colors (The Colors Action Bar
Choice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Global Colors . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUA Attributes . . . . . . . . . . .
Point-and-Shoot . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying ISPF ENVIRON Settings (The Environ
Action Bar Choice) . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Workstation Parameters (The
Workstation Action Bar Choice) . . . . . . .
Workstation Connection . . . . . . . .
GUI Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2005

25
26
26
30
31
33
33
35
36
38
39
41
41
42
42
43
46
54
56
56
56
57
57
57
58
61
63
64
64
66
72

|
|
|
|

Workstation Tool Integration . . . .
Download ISPF C/S Component . .
Disconnect from the Workstation . .
Displaying Message, System, User, Panel,
Screen IDs . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Identifier . . . . . . .
System Name . . . . . . . . .
User ID . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Identifier . . . . . . . .
Screen Name . . . . . . . . .

. .
. .
. .
and
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. 74
. 78
. 78
.
.
.
.
.
.

78
78
79
80
80
81

Chapter 3. View (Option 1) . . . . . . . . .
View Entry Panel Action Bar . . . . . . . .
View Entry Panel Fields . . . . . . . . . .
Browsing a data set . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending Browse . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browse Primary Commands . . . . . . . .
BROWSE—Browse recursively . . . . . .
COLUMNS—Identify columns . . . . . .
DISPLAY—Control the display . . . . . .
EDIT—Edit a member . . . . . . . . .
FIND—Find character strings . . . . . .
HEX—Display data in hexadecimal format . .
LOCATE—Locate lines . . . . . . . .
RESET—Remove the column-identification
line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUBMIT—Submit a job stream for background
execution . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VIEW—View a member . . . . . . . .

83
84
84
85
86
87
87
88
88
90
91
95
97
98
98
98

Chapter 4. Edit (Option 2) . . . . . . . . 101
Editing a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Edit Entry Panel Action Bar . . . . . . . 102
Edit Entry Panel Fields . . . . . . . . . 103
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3) . . .
Utility Selection Panel Action Bar . . .
Library Utility (Option 3.1) . . . . .
Library Utility Panel Action Bar . .
Library Utility Panel Fields . . . .
Library Utility Options for Data Sets
Blank — (Display Member List) .
C — Compress Data Set . . . .
X — Print Index Listing . . . .
L — Print Entire Data Set . . .
I — Data Set Information . . .
S — Short Data Set Information .
Library Utility Options for Members
B — Browse Member . . . . .
C — Copy Member . . . . .
D — Delete Members . . . . .
E — Edit Member . . . . . .
G — Reset Member . . . . .
M — Move Member . . . . .
P — Print Member . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 107
. 107
. 107
. 108
. 109
. 109
. 109
. 110
. 110
. 111
. 111
. 115
. 118
. 118
. 118
. 118
. 119
. 119
. 119
. 119

R — Rename Member . . . . . .
T — TSO Command for Member . . .
V — View Member . . . . . . .
W — WS Command for Member . . .
Data Set Utility (Option 3.2) . . . . . .
Data Set Utility Panel Action Bar . . . .
Data Set Utility Panel Fields . . . . .
Data Set Utility Options . . . . . . .
A — Allocate New Data Set . . . .
Allocation Errors . . . . . . . .
C — Catalog Data Set . . . . . .
R — Rename Entire Data Set . . . .
U — Uncatalog Data Set. . . . . .
D — Delete Entire Data Set . . . . .
S — Data Set Information (Short) . . .
Blank — (Data Set Information) . . .
V — VSAM Utilities . . . . . . .
Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3) . . . . .
Move/Copy Utility Panel Action Bar . .
Move/Copy Utility Panel Fields . . . .
Move/Copy Utility Options . . . . .
C and CP — Copying Data Sets . . .
M and MP — Moving Data Sets . . .
Using the Move/Copy Utility with Load
Modules . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving or Copying Alias Entries . . .
Member List Processing When Using
IEBCOPY . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4) . . . . .
Data Set List Utility Panel Action Bar . .
Data Set List Utility Panel Fields . . . .
Dsname Level . . . . . . . . .
Volume Serial . . . . . . . . .
Initial View . . . . . . . . . .
Data Set List Utility Options . . . . .
Blank — Display Data Set List . . . .
P — Print Data Set List . . . . . .
V — Display VTOC Information . . .
PV — Print VTOC Information . . .
Data Set List Utility Line Commands . .
E — Edit Data Set . . . . . . . .
V — View Data Set . . . . . . .
B — Browse Data Set . . . . . . .
M — Display Member List . . . . .
D — Delete Data Set . . . . . . .
R — Rename Data Set . . . . . .
I — Data Set Information . . . . .
S — Information (Short) . . . . . .
P — Print Data Set . . . . . . .
C — Catalog Data Set . . . . . .
U — Uncatalog Data Set. . . . . .
Z — Compress Data Set . . . . . .
F — Free Unused Space . . . . . .
PX — Print Index Listing . . . . .
RS — Reset . . . . . . . . . .
MO — Move . . . . . . . . .
CO — Copy . . . . . . . . . .
RA — RefAdd . . . . . . . . .
X — Exclude Data Set . . . . . .
NX — Unexclude Data Set . . . . .
NXF — Unexclude First Data Set . . .

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

119
119
119
119
119
120
120
121
121
127
128
128
129
130
132
132
133
138
138
139
139
139
141

.
.

. 143
. 144

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

144
145
145
146
146
148
149
151
151
162
162
164
164
165
166
166
166
168
168
168
169
169
169
169
169
170
170
170
170
170
170
170
170
170

NXL — Unexclude Last Data Set . . . . .
= — Repeat Last Command . . . . . .
Data Set List Utility Primary Commands . . .
APPEND Command . . . . . . . . .
CONFIRM Command . . . . . . . .
EXCLUDE Command . . . . . . . .
FIND and RFIND Commands . . . . . .
LC Command . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCATE Command . . . . . . . . .
MEMBER Command . . . . . . . . .
REFRESH Command . . . . . . . . .
RESET Command . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE Command . . . . . . . . . .
SHOWCMD Command . . . . . . . .
SORT Command . . . . . . . . . .
SRCHFOR Command . . . . . . . .
VA, VS, VT, and VV Commands . . . . .
Reset ISPF Statistics Utility (Option 3.5) . . . .
Reset ISPF Statistics Panel Action Bar . . . .
Reset ISPF Statistics Panel Fields . . . . . .
Reset ISPF Statistics Utility Options . . . . .
R — Reset (Create/Update) ISPF Statistics
D — Delete ISPF Statistics . . . . . . .
Results of Resetting Statistics . . . . . .
Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6) . . . . . . . .
Hardcopy Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . .
Hardcopy Utility Panel Fields . . . . . . .
Generating and Submitting JCL . . . . . .
Additional Batch Printing Information . . . .
Using the TSO/E Information Center Facility
Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option
3.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download ISPF C/S component . . . . . .
Client/Server Component Download panel
ISPF Client/Server (C/S) Download . . . .
Running the Installation Program (ISPFINST)
Download/upload data set . . . . . . . .
Outlist Utility (Option 3.8) . . . . . . . . .
Outlist Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . . .
Outlist Utility Panel Fields . . . . . . . .
Outlist Utility Options . . . . . . . . .
L — List Job Names/ID(s) via the TSO
STATUS Command . . . . . . . . .
D — Delete Job Output from SYSOUT Hold
Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P — Print Job Output and Delete from
SYSOUT Hold Queue . . . . . . . .
R — Requeue Job Output to a New Output
Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blank — Display Job Output . . . . . .
Command Table Utility (Option 3.9) . . . . . .
Command Table Utility Panel Fields . . . . .
Scrolling a Command Table . . . . . . .
Saving a Command Table . . . . . . . .
Canceling a Command Table . . . . . . .
Using Command Table Line Commands . . .
D — Deleting Lines . . . . . . . . .
E — Editing Lines . . . . . . . . . .
I — Inserting Lines . . . . . . . . .
R — Repeating Lines . . . . . . . . .
V — Viewing Lines . . . . . . . . .

171
171
171
171
172
172
172
173
173
174
174
174
174
175
176
177
178
178
179
179
180
181
181
181
182
182
183
183
185
185
187
187
188
189
191
191
192
193
193
194
194
194
194
195
195
195
196
198
198
198
198
199
199
199
199
199

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Format Specifications Utility (Option 3.11) . . .
Format Specifications Panel Action Bar . . .
Format Specifications Panel Fields . . . .
Format Specifications Panel Options . . . .
A — Add a New Format . . . . . .
C — Copy Formats . . . . . . . .
D — Delete a Format . . . . . . . .
U — Update a Format . . . . . . .
L or BLANK — Display Format List . . .
Format Selection List Commands . . . . .
Deleting a Format . . . . . . . . .
Locating Format Names . . . . . . .
Renaming a Format . . . . . . . .
Sorting Format Names . . . . . . .
Updating or Selecting a Format . . . .
SuperC Utility (Option 3.12) . . . . . . .
SuperC Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . .
SuperC Utility Panel Fields . . . . . . .
SuperC Member Lists. . . . . . . . .
Submitting a SuperC Job in Batch Mode . .
Using the NOLIST Listing Type in Batch Mode
SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13) . . . . . . .
SuperCE Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . .
SuperCE Utility Panel Fields . . . . . .
SuperCE Utility Options . . . . . . . .
Foreground Compare Data Sets . . . .
Batch Submit Batch Data Set Compare . .
Process Options - Select Process Options .
Edit Statements - Edit Statements Data Set
Profiles and Defaults - Activate Profiles and
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search-For Utility (Option 3.14) . . . . . .
Search-For Utility Panel Action Bar . . . .
Search-For Utility Panel Fields . . . . . .
Specifying Additional Search Strings . . .
Search-For Strings and Keywords. . . . .
Entering Search Strings . . . . . . .
Using Keywords . . . . . . . . .
Search-For Member Lists . . . . . . .
Submitting a Search-For Job in Batch Mode .
Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15) . . . . . .
Search-ForE Utility Panel Action Bar . . .
Search-ForE Utility Panel Fields . . . . .
Select Search-For Process Options . . .
Edit Search-For Statements Data Set . . .
ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16) . . . . . .
Table Utility Panel Action Bar . . . . . .
Table Utility Panel Fields . . . . . . .
Table Utility Entry Panel Options . . . . .
Table Data Set Selection List . . . . . .
Table DD Selection List . . . . . . . .
Edit/Browse Table Panel . . . . . . .
Line Commands . . . . . . . . .
Primary Commands . . . . . . . .
Table Output Data Set Selection . . . . .
Table Utility Options . . . . . . . . .
Table Export Report Options . . . . . .
Export Data Set Attributes . . . . . . .
Importing Data into a Table . . . . . .
Exporting Data from a Table . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

199
200
200
201
201
202
203
203
203
204
204
204
205
205
205
205
206
207
211
212
214
215
216
216
220
220
221
222
223
224
228
229
229
231
232
232
232
233
234
234
235
235
240
240
241
242
243
243
244
245
246
248
250
258
259
260
262
263
263

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4) . . . . . .
Foreground Selection Panel Action Bar . . . . .
Foreground Processing Sequence . . . . . . .
Expanding Packed Data . . . . . . . . . .
Member Expansion (ISRLEMX) . . . . . . .
Restrictions on Member Expansion and Member
Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member Expansion ISRLEMX Return Codes . .
Trigger Statement Errors . . . . . . . . .
Input Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreground—TSO/E Information Center Facility
Assembler (Option 4.1) . . . . . . . . . .
COBOL (Option 4.2) . . . . . . . . . . .
VS FORTRAN Compile (Option 4.3) . . . . . .
PL/I (Option 4.5) . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS Pascal Compile (Option 4.6) . . . . . . .
Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 4.7) . . . . . .
Linkage Editor Concatenation Sequence . . .
SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9) . . . . . .
SCRIPT/VS Processing Sequence . . . . . .
Selecting a Formatting Style . . . . . . .
Changing Style Options . . . . . . . . .
Using SCRIPT/VS with the TSO/E Information
Center Facility . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS COBOL II Interactive Debug (Option 4.10) . .
OS/VS COBOL Debug (Option 4.10A) . . . . .
COBOL Debug Processing Sequence . . . . .
Symbolic Debug Data Sets . . . . . . . .
Print Output Data Sets . . . . . . . . .
FORTRAN Debug (Option 4.11) . . . . . . .
Member Parts List (Option 4.12) . . . . . . .
Member Not Found . . . . . . . . . .
C/370 Compile (Option 4.13) . . . . . . . .
REXX/370 Compile (Option 4.14). . . . . . .
Ada/370 Compile (Option 4.15) . . . . . . .
AD/Cycle C/370 Compile (Option 4.16) . . . .
ISPDTLC (Option 4.18) . . . . . . . . . .
OS/390 C/C++ Compile (Option 4.19) . . . . .

265
265
266
269
270
270
272
272
272
273
274
274
275
275
276
277
278
279
280
282
282
283
287
287
288
289
289
290
291
291
292
293
297
297
297
297
298
298
298

Chapter 7. Batch (Option 5) . . . . . . . . 299
Batch Selection Panel Action Bar . . . . . . . 299
Batch Processing Sequence . . . . . . . . . 300
JCL Generation—Compilers . . . . . . . . 302
JCL Generation—Assemblers and Linkage Editor
303
Assembler (Option 5.1) . . . . . . . . . . 304
COBOL Compile (Option 5.2) . . . . . . . . 305
VS FORTRAN Compile (Option 5.3) . . . . . . 306
PL/I Compile (Option 5.5) . . . . . . . . . 306
VS Pascal Compile (Option 5.6) . . . . . . . 307
Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 5.7) . . . . . . 308
VS COBOL II Interactive Debug (Option 5.10) . . 310
Member Parts List (Option 5.12) . . . . . . . 311
C/370 Compile (Option 5.13) . . . . . . . . 311
REXX/370 Compile (Option 5.14) . . . . . . . 311
Ada/370 Compile (Option 5.15) . . . . . . . 312
AD/Cycle C/370 Compile (Option 5.16) . . . . 312
ISPDTLC Compile (Option 5.18) . . . . . . . 312
OS/390 C/C++ Compile (Option 5.19) . . . . . 312
Part 1. ISPF Options

Chapter 8. Command (Option 6) . . . . . . 313
ISPF Command Shell Panel Action Bar . . . . . 313
The Saved Command Area . . . . . . . . . 315
Entering TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX
EXECs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Rules for Entering TSO Commands . . . . . 316
Rules for Entering CLISTs and REXX EXECs
316
Using the Session Manager . . . . . . . . . 316
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7) . . . . . .
The Dialog Test Environment . . . . . . . .
Dialog Test Primary Option Panel Action Bar
Using Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Severe Error Handling . . . . . . . . . .
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending the Current Option without Saving
Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding a Character String . . . . . . . .
Displaying Breakpoint Qualification Data . . .
Restoring the Format of the Breakpoints Panel
Dialog Test Line Commands . . . . . . .
D – Deleting Lines . . . . . . . . .
I – Inserting Lines . . . . . . . . . .
R – Repeating Lines . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Keylist for Dialog Test . . . . . .
Functions (Option 7.1) . . . . . . . . . .
Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel Action
Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoke Dialog Panel Fields . . . . . . . .
Panels (Option 7.2) . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Panel Action Bar . . . . . . . .
Display Panel Fields . . . . . . . . . .
Variables (Option 7.3) . . . . . . . . . .
Variables Panel Action Bar . . . . . . . .
Variables Panel Fields . . . . . . . . .
Variables Commands . . . . . . . . . .
Manipulating Variables . . . . . . . . .
Creating New Variables . . . . . . . .
Deleting Variables . . . . . . . . . .
Variables Usage Notes . . . . . . . . .
Tables (Option 7.4) . . . . . . . . . . .
Tables Panel Action Bar . . . . . . . . .
Tables Panel Fields . . . . . . . . . .
Tables Panel Options . . . . . . . . . .
1—Display row . . . . . . . . . . .
2—Delete row . . . . . . . . . . .
3—Modify row . . . . . . . . . . .
4—Add row . . . . . . . . . . . .
5—Display structure . . . . . . . . .
6—Display status . . . . . . . . . .
Log (Option 7.5) . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISPF Transaction Log Not Available . . . . .
Trace Output in ISPF Log . . . . . . . .
Trace Header Entries . . . . . . . . .
Function Trace Entries . . . . . . . .
Variable Trace Entries . . . . . . . .
Dialog Services (Option 7.6) . . . . . . . .
Invoke Dialog Service Panel Action Bar. . . .
Special Display Panel . . . . . . . . . .
Traces (Option 7.7) . . . . . . . . . . .

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

319
319
321
322
322
323
325
325
325
325
325
325
325
326
326
326
327
328
328
330
331
331
333
334
335
335
336
336
336
336
338
338
339
340
340
341
342
344
346
347
350
351
351
351
351
352
352
353
354
355

1—Function Traces . . . .
Function Traces Commands
2—Variable Traces . . . . .
Variable Traces Commands .
Breakpoints (Option 7.8) . . . .
Specifying Breakpoints . . .
Breakpoints Panel Action Bar .
Breakpoints Panel Fields. . .
Breakpoints Commands . .
Qualification Parameter Values
Finding a Breakpoint . . . .
Tutorial (Option 7.T) . . . . .
Exit (Option 7.X) . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

356
358
358
359
359
360
360
361
361
361
363
366
366

Chapter 10. IBM Products (Option 9) .

. 367

Chapter 11. SCLM (Option 10) . . . . . . . 369
SCLM Main Menu Action Bar . . . . . . . . 369
SCLM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace
(Option 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Workplace Entry Panel . . . . . . . . . 371
Library View . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Data Set View . . . . . . . . . . . 372
ISPF Referral Lists for Object Retrieval . . . 373
Specifying Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Choices on the Workplace Action Bar . . . . 374
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
SuperC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Actions That Require Prompt Windows for
More Information . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Resetting Member Statistics. . . . . . . 385
TSO Command . . . . . . . . . . . 386
WS Command . . . . . . . . . . . 387
ISPF Command Shell . . . . . . . . . 388
Move or Copy . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Default CUA Function Key Settings . . . . . 394
Changing Workplace Settings . . . . . . . 395
Workplace Settings Panel Action Bar . . . 397
Workplace Example Scenario . . . . . . . 399
Subtask 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Subtask 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Subtask 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Subtask 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)
The Primary Option Menu panel
The Primary Option Menu panel, shown in Figure 1, is the first panel that displays
when you start ISPF.
2 Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
1
3
0 Settings
Terminal and user parameters
User ID . : USERID
1 View
Display source data or listings
Time. . . : 13:54
2 Edit
Create or change source data
Terminal. : 3278
3 Utilities
Perform utility functions
Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground
Interactive language processing
Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch
Submit job for language processing
Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command
Enter TSO or Workstation commands
TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
System ID : ISD1
10 SCLM
SW Configuration Library Manager
MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace
ISPF Object/Action Workplace
Release . : ISPF 5.5
Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
1
2
3

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Primary Options.
Action bar choices.
Dynamic status area.

Figure 1. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM)

ISPF Primary Options
When you select one of these options, ISPF displays the selected panel. These
options are described in detail in other chapters within this book. Brief descriptions
follow:
Option Description
0

Settings displays and changes selected ISPF parameters, such as terminal
characteristics and function keys. See the Chapter 2, “Settings (Option 0),”
on page 25 chapter for more information.

View displays data (you cannot change it) using the View or Browse
function. Use View or Browse to look at large data sets, such as compiler
listings. You can scroll the data up, down, left, or right. If you are using
Browse, a FIND command, entered on the command line, allows you to
search the data and find a character string. If you are using View, you can
use all the commands and macros available to you in the Edit function. See
Chapter 3, “View (Option 1)” for more information.

The Primary Option Menu panel
2

You can use Edit to create or change source data, such as program code
and documentation, using the ISPF full-screen editor. You can scroll the
data up, down, left, or right. You can change the data by using Edit line
commands, which are entered directly on a line number, and primary
commands, which are entered on the command line. See Chapter 3, “View
(Option 1)” and refer to z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros for more
information.

Utilities perform library and data set maintenance tasks, such as moving
or copying library or data set members, displaying or printing data set
names and volume table of contents (VTOC) information, comparing data
sets, and searching for strings of data. See Chapter 5, “Utilities (Option 3)”
for more information.

Foreground calls IBM language processing programs in the foreground.
See Chapter 6, “Foreground (Option 4)” for more information.

Batch calls IBM language processing programs as batch jobs. ISPF
generates Job Control Language (JCL) based on information you enter and
submits the job for processing. See Chapter 7, “Batch (Option 5)” for more
information.

Command calls TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs under ISPF. See
Chapter 8, “Command (Option 6)” for more information.

Dialog Test tests individual ISPF dialog components, such as panels,
messages, and dialog functions (programs, commands, menus). See
Chapter 9, “Dialog Test (Option 7)” for more information.

You can use the IBM Products option to select other installed IBM
program development products on your system. Products supported are:
v Cross System Product/Application Development (CSP/AD)
v Cross System Product/Application Execution (CSP/AE)
v Information/System (INFO/SYS)
v COBOL Structuring Facility foreground dialog (COBOL/SF-F)
v COBOL Structuring Facility background dialog (COBOL/SF-B)
v Screen Definition Facility II (SDF II) licensed program
v Screen Definition Facility II-P (SDF II-P) licensed program.
See Chapter 10, “IBM Products (Option 9)” for more information.

SCLM controls, maintains, and tracks all of the software components of an
application. See Chapter 11, “SCLM (Option 10)” and refer to z/OS ISPF
Software Configuration and Library Manager Project Manager’s and Developer’s
Guide for more information.

Workplace gives you access to the ISPF Workplace, which combines many
of the ISPF functions onto one object-action panel. See Chapter 12, “ISPF
Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)” for more information.

EXIT leaves ISPF using the log and list defaults. You can change these
defaults from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action
bar.

Primary Option Menu Action Bar Choices
The Primary Option Menu action bar offers a quick way of accessing many of the
panels within ISPF.
Menu This choice is available from most panels within ISPF and displays many
of the options listed on the Primary Option Menu panel. The following
choices are available from the Menu pull-down:

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

The Primary Option Menu panel
Settings

Displays the ISPF Settings panel.

View

Displays the View Entry panel.

Edit

Displays the Edit Entry panel.

ISPF Command Shell

Displays the ISPF Command Shell panel.

Dialog Test

Displays the Dialog Test Primary Option
panel.

Other IBM Products

Displays the Additional IBM Program
Development Products panel.

SCLM

Displays the SCLM Main Menu.

ISPF Workplace

Displays the Workplace entry panel.

Status Area

Displays the ISPF Status panel.

Exit

Exits ISPF.

Utilities
This choice is available from many panels within ISPF and displays the
options listed on the Utility Selection panel. The following choices are
available from the Utilities pull-down:

Library

Displays the Library Utility panel.

Data Set

Displays the Data Set Utility panel.

Move/Copy

Displays the Move/Copy Utility panel.

Data Set List

Displays the Data Set List Options panel.

Reset Statistics

Displays the Reset ISPF Statistics panel.

Hardcopy

Displays the Hardcopy Utility panel.

Download

Displays the panel that enables you to
download workstation clients and other
files from the host.

Outlist

Displays the Outlist Utility panel.

Commands

Displays the Command Table Utility panel.

Reserved

Reserved for future use by ISPF; an
unavailable choice.

Format

Displays the Format Specification panel.

SuperC

Displays the SuperC Utility panel.

SuperCE

Displays the SuperCE Utility panel.

Search-for

Displays the Search-For Utility panel.

Search-forE

Displays the Search-ForE Utility panel.

Table Utility

Displays the ISPF Table Utility panel.

Compilers
The Compilers pull-down offers the following choices:
1

Foreground Compilers Displays the Foreground Selection Panel.

Background Compilers Displays the Batch Selection Panel.

ISPPREP Panel Utility Displays the Preprocessed Panel Utility panel.

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

The Primary Option Menu panel
4

DTL Compiler Displays the ISPF Dialog Tag Language Conversion
Utility panel.

Options
The Options pull-down offers the following choices:
1

General Settings Displays the ISPF Settings panel.

CUA Attributes Displays the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel.

Keylists Displays the Keylist Utility panel.

Point-and-Shoot Displays the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel,
positioned on the Point-and-Shoot panel element.

Colors Displays the Global Color Change Utility panel.

Dialog Test appl ID Displays the Dialog Test Application ID pop-up
to allow you to change the application ID for Dialog test so that you
can look at variables in the application profile for an application that
runs under a different application ID than the one under which ISPF
was started (by default, ISR).

Status The
1
2
3
4
5
6

Status pull-down offers the following choices:
Session
Function keys
Calendar
User status
User point and shoot
None

See “Status Area on the Primary Option Menu” for more information about
using these choices to tailor the status area.
Help

The Help pull-down provides general information about ISPF topics and
the changes in the current release, as well as information about each of the
options and areas on the Primary Option Menu.

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu
The status area on the ISPF Primary Option Menu is a 21-column dynamic area
that is composed of a 12-character description field, one attribute byte, and an
8-character field to display the value of the selected variable. The status area is
limited to eleven description fields and their values. It can be manipulated from
two places:
v The Status choice on the ISPF Primary Option Menu action bar. Use this
pull-down to specify what you want to display in the status area. See “Status
Pull-Down” on page 9 for additional information and examples.
v The ISPF Status panel, which displays when you select Status Area from the
Menu pull-down available on most action bars throughout ISPF. Use this facility
to define the contents of the status area. See “Defining the Status Area” on page
16 for additional information and examples.
Note: The ISPF Status panel also contains an action bar choice called ″Status″.
This does not affect which Status option displays on the Primary Option
Menu panel. It determines which Status option displays within the ISPF
Status panel.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu
The first five logical screens, created by a SPLIT or related command, each have
their own status view. For each screen after that, the view defaults to the setting of
the first screen.

Status Pull-Down
When you select one of the choices in the Status pull-down on the ISPF Primary
Option Menu action bar (shown in Figure 2), you specify what you want to display
in the status area on the Primary Option Menu panel.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────── ┌────────────────────────────┐ ──────────
ISPF Prim │
*. Session
│
│
2. Function keys
│
0 Settings
Terminal and user p │
3. Calendar
│ USERID
1 View
Display source data │
4. User status
│ 16:04
2 Edit
Create or change so │
5. User point and shoot │ 3278
3 Utilities
Perform utility fun │
6. None
│ 1
4 Foreground
Interactive languag └────────────────────────────┘ ENGLISH
5 Batch
Submit job for language processing
Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command
Enter TSO or Workstation commands
TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
System ID : ISD1
10 SCLM
SW Configuration Library Manager
MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace
ISPF Object/Action Workplace
Release . : ISPF 5.5
Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 2. Status pull-down on the ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM)

Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, displays in
blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number.
If you are running in GUI mode the choice is grayed.

Session
The Session view, shown in Figure 3 on page 10, displays the following
information in the status area:
v User ID
v Time
v Terminal
v Screen
v Language
v Application ID
v TSO logon
v TSO prefix
v System ID
v MVS account
v Release.

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11

Settings
View
Edit
Utilities
Foreground
Batch
Command
Dialog Test
IBM Products
SCLM
Workplace

Terminal and user parameters
Display source data or listings
Create or change source data
Perform utility functions
Interactive language processing
Submit job for language processing
Enter TSO or Workstation commands
Perform dialog testing
IBM program development products
SW Configuration Library Manager
ISPF Object/Action Workplace

User ID . :
Time. . . :
Terminal. :
Screen. . :
Language. :
Appl ID . :
TSO logon :
TSO prefix:
System ID :
MVS acct. :
Release . :

USERID
16:23
3278
1
ENGLISH
ISR
ISPF
USERID
ISD1
IBMGSA
ISPF 5.5

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 3. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area – Session View

System ID is a point-and-shoot field. MVS Acct and Release are point-and-shoot
fields if over 8 characters long. Select these fields to display pop-up windows that
contain additional information about the MVS account number and the ISPF
environment.
MVS Acct
The account number identifying this MVS user.
System ID
Shows the SYSPLEX and SYSNODE.
SYSPLEX
The MVS sysplex name as found in the COUPLExx or LOADxx
member of SYS1.PARMLIB.
SYSNODE
The network node name of your installation’s JES.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌─────── System Information ────────┐ ──────────────────────────────────────
│
│ Option Menu
│ SYSPLEX = SYSPLEXD
│
0 │ SYSNODE = PTHAPD$
│ eters
User ID . : SUEBURN
1 │ F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
│ listings
Time. . . : 16:49
2 │ F9=Swap F12=Cancel
│ data
Terminal. : 3278
3 └───────────────────────────────────┘ ns
Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground
Interactive language processing
Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch
Submit job for language processing
Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command
Enter TSO or Workstation commands
TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
TSO prefix: SUEBURN
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
System ID : ISD1
10 SCLM
SW Configuration Library Manager
MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace
ISPF Object/Action Workplace
Release . : ISPF 5.5
Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 4. System Information pop-up

Release
Displays the following variables:
v ZOS390RL— The z/OS Release running on your system.
v ZISPFOS— The level of ISPF code that is running as part of z/OS on
your system. This might or might not match ZOS390RL.
v ZENVIR— The ISPF Environment description. Refer to the table of
system variables in the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference
for a complete explanation.

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌───────────────────────────── Environment ─────────────────────────────┐ ──
│
│
│ ZOS390RL = z/OS 01.04.00
│
0 │
The z/OS release running on your system.
│
1 │
│
2 │ ZISPFOS = ISPF FOR z/OS 01.05.00
│
3 │
The level of ISPF code that is running as part of z/OS on your
│
4 │
system. This might or might not match ZOS390RL.
│
5 │
│
6 │ ZENVIR = ISPF 5.5 MVS
TSO
│
7 │
The ISPF Environment description used by IBM personnel for
│
9 │
internal purposes. The x.y numbers DO NOT directly correlate to │
1 │
an ISPF release number in all cases. Refer to the Dialog
│
1 │
Developer’s Guide for a complete explanation.
│ 5
1 │
│
1 │ F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F9=Swap F12=Cancel
│
1 └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 5. Environment pop-up (Release information)

Function Keys
The Function Keys view, shown in Figure 6 on page 13, displays the following
information in the status area:
v Number of keys
v Keys displayed per line
v Primary range (lower or upper)
v Display set (primary or alternate)
v List name (name of the currently active keylist)
v List applid (application ID for the currently active keylist)
v List type (private or shared)
v Keylists (on or off).
Note: See “Working with Function Keys and Keylists (The Function Keys Action
Bar Choice)” on page 41 for information about changing these settings.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Settings
View
Edit
Utilities
Foreground
Batch
Command
Dialog Test
IBM Products
SCLM
Workplace

No. of keys:
Keys / line:
Primary set:
Display set:
List name. :
List applid:
List type. :
Keylists . :

24
SIX
LOW
PRI
ISRSAB
ISR
SHARED
PRIVATE

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 6. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area – Function Keys View

Calendar
The Calendar view, shown in Figure 7, displays the calendar for the current month
in the status area.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11

Settings
View
Edit
Utilities
Foreground
Batch
Command
Dialog Test
IBM Products
SCLM
Workplace

<
Su
5
12
19
26

Calendar
January 2003
Mo Tu We Th Fr
1 2 3
6 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17
20 21 22 23 24
27 28 29 30 31

>
Sa
4
11
18
25

Time . . . . : 05:00
Day of year. : 023

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 7. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area – Calendar View

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu
All of the fields on the calendar are point-and-shoot fields that function as follows:
If you select

ISPF displays

the previous month.

calendar

the current month.

the next month.

Month, e.g. July
the Calendar Month pop-up. Allows you to specify the month. See
“Customizing the Calendar” on page 19 for details.
Year, e.g. 2003 the Calendar Year pop-up. Allows you to specify the year. See
“Customizing the Calendar” on page 19 for details.
Day

the Calendar Start Day pop-up. Allows you to specify Saturday,
Sunday, or Monday as the start day for the calendar. See
“Customizing the Calendar” on page 19 for details.

Date

the Julian Date pop-up. Provides the Julian date for the date
selected.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌──────────────── Julian Date ────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────
│
│ u
│
│
0 │ 2003/01/24 is day 024 of year 2003
│
<
Calendar
>
1 │
│
January 2003
2 │
│
Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
3 │ F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F9=Swap │
1 2 3 4 5
4 │ F12=Cancel
│
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 └─────────────────────────────────────────────┘ g
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
6 Command
Enter TSO or Workstation commands
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
27 28 29 30 31
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
10 SCLM
SW Configuration Library Manager
Time . . . . : 13:42
11 Workplace
ISPF Object/Action Workplace
Day of year. : 024
Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 8. Julian Date pop-up

Time

the Calendar Time Format pop-up. Allows you to specify a 12-hour
or 24-hour time format for the calendar. See “Customizing the
Calendar” on page 19 for details.

Day of year

the Standard Date pop-up. Provides the standard date for the day
specified in the popup (defaults to the date selected in the
calendar).

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌───────────────────────── Standard Date ──────────────────────────┐
│
│
│
│
0 │ Enter the day and year below:
│
1 │
│
2 │ Day . . . . 024 (Between 1 and 365 or 366 if leap year)
│
3 │ Year . . . 2003 (Between 1801 and 2099)
│
4 │
│
5 │ Day 024 of year 2003 is Friday
, 2003/01/24
│
6 │
│
7 │
│
9 │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
1 │ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
1 └──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

───────
>
003
Sa
4
11
18
25

Su
5
12
19
26

13:47
024

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 9. Standard Date pop-up

User Status
The User Status view, shown in Figure 10, displays the status information that you
have defined in the Status Area panel.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11

Settings
View
Edit
Utilities
Foreground
Batch
Command
Dialog Test
IBM Products
SCLM
Workplace

User ID:
Date:
Time:

USERID
24/01/03
14:57

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 10. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area – User Status View

User Point and Shoot
The User Point-and-Shoot view, shown in Figure 11 on page 16, displays the
point-and-shoot function you have defined in the Status Area panel.

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu
Note: If you are running in GUI mode, this function will be displayed as a push
button.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11

Settings
View
Edit
Utilities
Foreground
Batch
Command
Dialog Test
IBM Products
SCLM
Workplace

Dialog Test
Edit
Edit Recovery Table

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 11. ISPF Primary Option Menu Status Area – User Point-And-Shoot View

None
If you select None from the Status pull-down, nothing will be displayed in the
status area.

Defining the Status Area
When you select Status Area from the Menu pull-down, ISPF displays the ISPF
Status pop-up window (shown in Figure 12 on page 17), with an independent view
of the status area. This panel is used to define the contents of the status area
choices. You can change the choice displayed in this window by using the Status
pull-down on the action bar.
Note: Changing the status area viewed in this panel will not affect the choice
selected on the ISPF Primary Option Menu panel.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers
─ ┌─────────────────────────┐
│ Status Options
│
│ ────────────────────── │
0 │
ISPF Status
│
1 │
│
2 │
│
3 │ <
Calendar
> │
4 │
January 2003
│
5 │ Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa │
6 │
1 2 3 4 │
7 │ 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 │
9 │ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 │
1 │ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 │
1 │ 26 27 28 29 30 31
│
│
│
│ Time . . . . : 11:10 │
│ Day of year. : 024 │
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split │
O │ F3=Exit
│
└─────────────────────────┘
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Options Status Help
────────────────────────────────────────────────
F Primary Option Menu
user parameters
e data or listings
nge source data
ty functions
anguage processing
r language processing
Workstation commands
g testing
evelopment products
ion Library Manager
ction Workplace

User ID . :
Time. . . :
Terminal. :
Screen. . :
Language. :
Appl ID . :
TSO logon :
TSO prefix:
System ID :
MVS acct. :
Release . :

USERID
11:10
3278
1
ENGLISH
ISR
ISPF
USERID
ISD1
IBMGSA
ISPF 5.5

g Log/List defaults

Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 12. ISPF Status pop-up (ISPSAMMN)

Status

The Status pull-down, shown in Figure 13 on page 18, offers the
following choices:
1

Session

Function keys

Calendar

User status

User point and shoot

None

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌─────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────────────────────
I │ Status Options
│ F Primary Option Menu
│ ┌────────────────────────────┐
0 │ │
1. Session
│ parameters
<
Calendar
>
1 │ │
2. Function keys
│ a or listings
January 2003
2 │ │
*. Calendar
│ ource data
Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
3 │ │
4. User status
│ nctions
1 2 3 4
4 │ │
5. User point and shoot │ ge processing
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 │ │
6. None
│ guage processing
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
6 │ │
7. Exit
│ tation commands
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
7 │ └────────────────────────────┘ ting
26 27 28 29 30 31
9 │ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 │ evelopment products
1 │ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 │ ion Library Manager
Time . . . . : 11:38
1 │ 26 27 28 29 30 31
│ ction Workplace
Day of year. : 024
│
│
│ Time . . . . : 11:38 │ g Log/List defaults
│ Day of year. : 024 │
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split │
O │ F3=Exit
│
└─────────────────────────┘ Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 13. Status pull-down in ISPF Status pop-up

Options

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

The Options pull-down, shown in Figure 14 on page 19, offers the
following choices:
1

Calendar start day Displays the Calendar Start Day pop-up,
where you can specify Saturday, Sunday, or Monday as the
start day for the calendar.

Calendar colors Displays the Calendar Colors pop-up, where
you can change the colors on the calendar.

User status customization Displays the User View
Customization pop-up, where you can define what you want
displayed in the status area.

User point and shoot customization Displays the User Point
and Shoot Customization pop-up, where you can define
point-and-shoot fields to be displayed in the status area.

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌─────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────────────────────
I │ Status Options
│ F Primary Option Menu
│ ─────── ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────┐
0 │
IS │
1. Calendar Start day...
│
Calendar
>
1 │
│
2. Calendar Colors...
│ January 2003
2 │
│
3. User status customization...
│ Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
3 │ <
│
4. User point and shoot customization... │
1 2 3 4
4 │
Jan └─────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 │ Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa │ r language processing
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
6 │
1 2 3 4 │ Workstation commands
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
7 │ 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 │ g testing
26 27 28 29 30 31
9 │ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 │ evelopment products
1 │ 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 │ ion Library Manager
Time . . . . : 11:38
1 │ 26 27 28 29 30 31
│ ction Workplace
Day of year. : 024
│
│
│ Time . . . . : 11:38 │ g Log/List defaults
│ Day of year. : 024 │
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split │
O │ F3=Exit
│
└─────────────────────────┘ Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 14. Options pull-down in ISPF Status pop-up

Customizing the Calendar
You can customize the calendar to show a different month, year or starting day.
You can set the time display to a 12 or 24 hour clock. You can also customize the
colors used to display the calendar.
Notes:
1. Changes to the month or year display will last for the current session only.
Changes to the starting day and time format will be saved between sessions.
2. You can use the point-and-shoot fields on the calendar displayed on the
Primary Option Menu panel or in the Status Area pop-up. Changes made in
either location will affect the display in both locations.
Changing the month display: You can change the month that displays in the
calendar in a number of ways:
v Click the < or > symbols to display the previous or next month.
v Click the Calendar point-and-shoot field to display the current month.
v Set the month display to a particular month by selecting the month name
point-and-shoot field and entering a number in the Calendar Month pop-up
window:

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌────────── Calendar Month ──────────┐ ─────────────────────────────────────
│
│ ption Menu
│
│
0 │ Month . . . 01 1. January
│ ters
<
Calendar
>
1 │
2. February
│ istings
January 2003
2 │
3. March
│ data
Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
3 │
4. April
│ s
1 2 3 4
4 │
5. May
│ cessing
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 │
6. June
│ processing
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
6 │
7. July
│ commands
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
7 │
8. August
│
26 27 28 29 30 31
9 │
9. September
│ products
1 │
10. October
│ Manager
Time . . . . : 10:13
1 │
11. November
│ lace
Day of year. : 024
│
12. December
│
│
│ g Log/List defaults
│ Select a choice and press ENTER
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
│
│ F3=Exit
F7=Backward
│
└────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 15. Calendar Month pop-up window

Changing the year display: You can change the year that displays in the calendar
by selecting the year point-and-shoot field and entering the required year (between
1801 and 2099) in the Calendar Year pop-up window.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌────────────────── Calendar Year ──────────────────┐
│
│
│
│
0 │ Year . . .
│
1 │
│
2 │ Enter the year to display between 1801 and 2099 │
3 │
│
4 │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│
5 │ F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
│
6 └───────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing
9 IBM Products IBM program development products
10 SCLM
SW Configuration Library Manager
11 Workplace
ISPF Object/Action Workplace

──────────────────────
<
Mo
6
13
20
27

Calendar
January 2003
Tu We Th Fr Sa
1 2 3 4
7 8 9 10 11
14 15 16 17 18
21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31

>
Su
5
12
19
26

Time . . . . : 13:57
Day of year. : 024

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 16. Calendar Year pop-up window

Changing the starting day: You can change the calendar display so that the
weeks begin on a Saturday, Sunday or Monday. To do this:
1. Select any day name point-and-shoot field (e.g. Mo or Tu).
OR

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu
2. From the ISPF Status action bar, choose Options and then 1. Calendar start
day... The Calendar Start Day pop-up is displayed.
3. Enter option 1. Sunday, 2. Monday or 3. Saturday.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status
─ ┌────────── Calendar Start Day ───────────┐
│
│
│
│
0 │ Current start date : 2
│
1 │
│
2 │ New start date . . . 2 1. Sunday
│
3 │
2. Monday
│
4 │
3. Saturday
│
5 │
│
6 │ Select a choice and press ENTER
│
7 │
│
9 │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│
1 │ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
│
1 └─────────────────────────────────────────┘

Help
────────────────────────────────
Menu
<
gs
Mo
ng
ssing
ands
cts
ger

6
13
20
27

Calendar
January 2003
Tu We Th Fr Sa
1 2 3 4
7 8 9 10 11
14 15 16 17 18
21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31

>
Su
5
12
19
26

Time . . . . : 14:02
Day of year. : 024

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 17. Calendar Start pop-up window

Changing the time format: You can change the time format to a 12-hour or
24-hour clock. To do this, select the Time point-and-shoot field and enter option 1
or 2 in the Calendar Time Format pop-up window.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌─────────── Calendar Time Format ──────────────┐ ──────────────────────────
│
│
│
│
0 │ Current time format : 2
│
<
Calendar
>
1 │
│
January 2003
2 │ New time format . . . 2 1. 12 hour format
│
Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
3 │
2. 24 hour format
│
1 2 3 4 5
4 │
│
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 │ Select a choice and press ENTER to continue. │
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
6 │
│
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
7 │
│
27 28 29 30 31
9 │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│
1 │ F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
│
Time . . . . : 14:18
1 └───────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Day of year. : 024
Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 18. Calendar Time Format pop-up window

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu
Changing the calendar colors: To change the colors on the calendar:
1. From the ISPF Status action bar, select Options and then 2. Calendar colors...
The Calendar Colors pop-up, Figure 19, is displayed.
2. Type a valid color number in the field next to each calendar element to be
changed and press Enter. The color will change immediately in the Sample
area.
To restore a default color, clear the element field and press Enter.
3. Press EXIT (F3) or END to exit and save the changes. Press CANCEL (F12) to
exit without saving the changes.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌─────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌───────────────────────── Calendar Colors ──────────────────────────┐
│ ─ │
Defaults │
0 │ │
│
1 │ │ Change one or more of the Calendar colors and press enter to
│
2 │ │ immediately see the effect. Clearing a field restores defaults. │
3 │ N │
│
4 │ K │ Field:
Color:
Valid Colors:
Sample:
│
5 │ P │ Scroll Button . . . 8
1. White
<
Calendar
> │
6 │ D │ Heading Date . . . 8
2. Red
July
1995
│
7 │ L │ Heading Text . . . 8
3. Blue
Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa │
9 │ L │ Weekday . . . . . . 8
4. Green
1 │
1 │ L │ Saturday/Sunday . . 8
5. Pink
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 │
1 │ K │ Current Day . . . . 8
6. Yellow
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 │
│ │
7. Turq
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 │
│ │
8. CUA default 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 │
│ │
30 31
│
│ │
Time . . . . : 10:10 │
│ C │
Day of year. : 202 │
│ │
│
O │ │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
└── │ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
F10=A └────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 19. Calendar Colors Panel (ISPCALGC)

Customizing the user status area
To define the contents of this area:
1. From the ISPF Status action bar, select Options and then 3. User status
customization... The User View Customization panel, Figure 20 on page 23, is
displayed.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌── ┌───────────── User View Customization ─────────────┐
│ │
│
│ ─ │
│
0 │ │ Enter a description and variable name below:
│
1 │ │
│
2 │ │
Description:
Variable name:
│
3 │ │
│
4 │ │
│
5 │ │
│
6 │ │
│
7 │ │
│
9 │ │
│
1 │ │
│
1 │ │
│
│ │
│
│ │
│
│ │
│
│ │
│
│ C │ Press EXIT or END to exit and save the changes. │
│ │ Press CANCEL to exit without saving the changes. │
O │ │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│
└── │ F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
│
F10=A └───────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

──────────────────
Calendar
January 2003
Tu We Th Fr Sa
1 2 3 4
7 8 9 10 11
14 15 16 17 18
21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31

>
Su
5
12
19
26

e . . . . : 14:33
of year. : 024

ard

F9=Swap

Figure 20. User View Customization Panel (ISPSAMUS)

2. Enter a heading in the Description field and the name of a System variable or
site-defined variable in the Variable name field. See the z/OS ISPF Dialog
Developer’s Guide and Reference for a list of System Variable names.
3. Press EXIT (F3) or END to exit and save the changes. Press CANCEL (F12) to
exit without saving the changes.
For example, entering the following:
Description:
User ID:
Date:
Time:

Variable name:
ZUSER
ZDATE
ZTIME

would result in the display shown in Figure 10 on page 15.

Customizing the user point-and-shoot status area
You can define up to nine point-and-shoot fields, which you can set to any
SELECT service parameter. To do this:
1. From the ISPF Status action bar, select Options and then 4. User point and
shoot customization... The User Point-and-Shoot panel, Figure 21 on page 24, is
displayed.

Chapter 1. Primary Option Menu (POM)

Status Area on the Primary Option Menu

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌ ┌───────────────────────── User Point-and-Shoot ──────────────────────────┐
│ │
│
│ │
│
0 │ │ Press EXIT or END to exit and save the changes.
│
1 │ │ Press CANCEL to exit without saving the changes.
│
2 │ │
│
3 │ │ Enter Point-and-shoot text and SELECT keywords.
│
4 │ │
│
5 │ │ Point-and-shoot text: SELECT service parameters:
│
6 │ │
More:
+ │
7 │ │ ___________________ ________________________________________________ │
9 │ │
________________________________________________ │
1 │ │
________________________________________________ │
1 │ │
________________________________________________ │
│ │
________________________________________________ │
│ │ ___________________ ________________________________________________ │
│ │
________________________________________________ │
│ │
________________________________________________ │
│ │
________________________________________________ │
│ │
________________________________________________ │
O │ │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
└ e F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
F10 └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 21. User Point-And-Shoot panel (ISPSAMUP)

2. Enter the text to appear in the status area, in the field on the left of the panel.
3. Enter the Service parameters to be invoked in the lines on the right of the
panel. Refer to z/OS ISPF Services Guide for information about these parameters.
4. Press EXIT (F3) or END to exit and save the changes. Press CANCEL (F12) to
exit without saving the changes.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)
The Settings option allows you to display and change a variety of ISPF parameters
at any time during the ISPF session. Changes remain in effect until you change the
parameter again, and ISPF saves them from session to session.
This chapter explains how to use the fields on the ISPF Settings panel and the
action bar choices. Some of the things you can specify are:
v Terminal characteristics
v Default options for processing the ISPF list and log data sets
v Function key assignments
v Placement of command lines
v List data set characteristics
v GDDM® graphic print parameters
v Keylist modifications
v Dialog Test option
v Default colors
v Values of CUA panel elements
v Point-and-shoot color and highlight changes
v ENVIRON command options.
This facility can be started from any command line with the SETTINGS command,
from the Settings choice on the Menu pull-down on any action bar where it is
available, or by selecting option 0 on the ISPF Primary Option Menu. Typically, the
Settings facility should be included as an option on an application’s primary
option menu or as a choice on a pull-down on an application’s primary option
menu.
If you select option 0 on the ISPF Primary Option Menu, the panel shown in
Figure 22 is displayed.

Settings (Option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Settings
Options
Enter "/" to select option
/ Command line at bottom
/ Panel display CUA mode
Long message in pop-up
Tab to action bar choices
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options
Session Manager mode
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list
Allow empty member list
Allow empty member list (nomatch)
/ Empty member list for edit only
Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data
Terminal Type

2. Std

Print Graphics
Family printer type 2
Device name . . . . ________
Aspect ratio . . . 0
General
Input field pad . . B
Command delimiter . ;

3. Max

4. Part

1. 3277
2. 3277A
3. 3278
4. 3278A
5. 3290A
6. 3278T
7. 3278CF
8. 3277KN
9. 3278KN
10. 3278AR
11. 3278CY
12. 3278HN
13. 3278HO
14. 3278IS
15. 3278L2
16. BE163
17. BE190
18. 3278TH
19. 3278CU
20. DEU78
21. DEU78A
22. DEU78T
23. DEU90A
24. SW116
25. SW131
26. SW500
27. 3278GR
Command ===> ________________________________________________________________
F1=HELP
F2=SPLIT
F3=END
F4=RETURN
F5=RFIND
F6=RCHANGE
F7=UP
F8=DOWN
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=RETRIEVE
Figure 22. ISPF Settings Panel (ISPISMMN)

ISPF Settings Panel Fields
Figure 22 shows the initial default ISPF Settings. The display or the field-level help
indicates the allowable alternatives for these defaults. The values shown in
Figure 22 are for an ISPF session in the English language. The corresponding panel
displayed for a non-English session is similar, but the accepted terminal types can
be different.

Select Options
Use a slash to select the following options:
v Command line at bottom
v Panel display CUA mode
v Long message in pop-up
v Tab to action bar choices
v Tab to point-and-shoot fields
v Restore TEST/TRACE options
v Session Manager mode
v Jump from leader dots
v Edit PRINTDS Command
v Always show split line

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
v
v
v
v
v

Enable EURO sign (currency symbol)
Scroll member list
Allow empty member list
Allow empty member list (nomatch)
Empty member list for edit only

Blank out the slash to deselect an option; each option is described below.
Command line at bottom
Specifies that the command line is to appear at the bottom of each logical
screen. If you have specified that the panel should be displayed in CUA
mode, the command line placement defaults to the bottom.
Notes:
1. The default is to have the command line placement at the bottom.
However, if your current application profile table specifies ASIS, the
default does not override it.
2. If you deselect this field, the command line appears as specified in the
panel definition statements. Unless indicated in the panel definition, it
appears at the top of the panel.
When you select the Command line at bottom option, the following
changes take place:
v The command line moves to the last line of the logical screen or the line
above the function keys depending on the CUA mode setting (see
Table 1 on page 28).
v Each line that follows the command line shifts up one line.
v The long message overlays the line above the new command line
location.
If the command line for a table display panel has been moved to the
bottom and if no alternate placement has been specified for the long
message line, the line directly above the repositioned command line is
reserved (left blank) for the display of long messages. Otherwise, if you
enter erroneous data on that line, a long message could overlay that
data.
v In general, the display location of the function key definitions depends
on several variables.
– If the panel display mode CUA option is not selected, and the
KEYLIST option is set to OFF, the function key definitions display on
the lines immediately above the long message line.
– If the panel display mode CUA option is on, and the KEYLIST option
is set to OFF, the function key definitions display below the long
message line.
– If the KEYLIST option is set to ON, and the panel definition does not
contain a )PANEL statement, the positioning of the function keys
depends on the CUA mode setting.
– If the KEYLIST option is set to ON, and the panel definition contains
a )PANEL statement, the positioning of the function keys is below the
long message line.
If the Panel display CUA mode option is not selected, an exception to
this situation occurs when an alternate placement for the long message
line has been specified using the LMSG keyword on the )BODY header
statement. Under these circumstances, the function key definitions
display immediately above the command line.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
If a conflict occurs between the placement of the function key definition
lines and those that are to display long messages, short messages, and
commands, the function keys will not overlay the command line, the line
containing the long or short message field, or any line above one of these
fields. Because of this condition, function key definition lines cannot
appear at all on some screens.
When using the GDDM interface to display panels, the position of a
graphics field does not change if the command line moves to the bottom of
the screen.
In split-screen mode, if the top screen specifies the Command line at
bottom option, the command line is moved to the line directly above the
split line, and the long message line overlays the line above the command
line. Because the placement setting is stored in the application profile pool,
the setting for each logical screen is the same unless a user is running
different applications in each screen.
Panel display CUA mode
Specifies that panels be displayed in CUA mode. This selection affects how
the long message line, command line, and function keys are displayed, as
described in Table 1.
Table 1 summarizes how the command, long message, and function key
area appear on the panel depending on whether you select the Panel
display in CUA mode option. Note that the table uses the system default
to position the long message field. An alternate long message field is not
defined using the LMSG keyword on the )BODY header statement.
Table 1. CUA Mode Effect on Panel Display
Panel Characteristic

CUA mode selected

CUA mode not selected

Command line at bottom

Long message line
Command line Fn=name

PF n=name Long message
line Command line

Command line at bottom
deselected

Title/short message
Command line Long
message line
.
.
.
Fn=name

Title/short message
Command line Long
message line
.
.
.
PF n=name

Table 2 summarizes the effect of CUA mode on the top-row-displayed
indicator.
Table 2. CUA Mode Effect on Top-Row-Displayed Indicator
CUA Mode

Rows

Top-Row-Displayed Message

Message ID

YES

ALL

Row x to z of y

ISPZZ102

YES

SCAN

Row x From y

ISPZZ103

ALL

Row x of y

ISPZZ100

SCAN

Row x of y

ISPZZ100

Long message in pop-up
Specifies that long messages will be displayed in a pop-up window,
regardless of the .WINDOW setting in the message source.
Tab to action bar choices
Specifies that you want to use the Tab key to move the cursor among the
action bar choices.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
Note: You cannot use the Tab key for this purpose if you are running in
GUI mode.
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
Specifies that you want to use the Tab key to move the cursor through the
point-and-shoot fields on a panel.
Note: You cannot use the Tab key for this purpose if you are running in
GUI mode.
Restore TEST/TRACE options
When you select Dialog Test facility (option 7), certain TEST and TRACE
options are established that can be different than those specified during
ISPF start up. If you select Restore TEST/TRACE options, the TEST or
TRACE values are restored to the ISPF call values when you exit dialog
test. If you deselect the field, the TEST or TRACE values are not restored
when you exit dialog test.
For more information about dialog test, see Chapter 9, “Dialog Test (Option
7).”
Session Manager mode
Enter a slash to indicate that the Session Manager should handle any line
mode output from the processing program.
Jump from leader dots
Enter a slash to enable the ISPF jump function from field prompts that
have leader dots ( . . or ... ). Field prompts that have the ==> will always
have the jump function enabled.
If the application developer defines the NOJUMP(ON) attribute keyword
on a specific input field, this disables the ″Jump from leader dots″ and
takes precedence over the selected Settings ″Jump from leader dots″ or the
configuration table setting of ″YES″ for ″Jump from leader dots″.
Edit PRINTDS Command
Enter a slash to intercept the local print request to allow you to modify the
statement before the PRINTDS command begins. For more information on
editing the PRINTDS command, see the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Always show split line
Specifies that the split line in split screen mode, as seen on a 3270 display,
should always be shown. The default for this option is that the option is
selected. By deselecting this option, the split line does not display when
the screen is split at the top or the bottom of the screen.
Enable EURO Sign
Enter a slash to enable the EURO sign (currency symbol). Your terminal or
emulator must support the EURO sign for this option to work.
Scroll member list
Enter a slash to specify that ISPF should scroll to the first member selected
in the member list after processing. If the Option field is deselected,
automatic member list scrolling is disabled and the cursor is placed in
front of the last member selected.
Allow empty member list
Specifies whether an empty member list will be displayed for a PDS that
contains no members.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
Allow empty member list (nomatch)
If the ’Allow empty member list’ option is set, this field specifies whether
an empty list that results from a nonmatching pattern will be displayed.
Empty member list for edit only
Specifies whether empty member list options apply to non-edit functions
such as View and Browse.

Terminal Characteristics
The Terminal Characteristics portion of the ISPF Settings panel allows you to
specify values for the screen format and terminal type. Each of these characteristics
is described below.
Screen format
Specification of screen format applies only to 327x and 3290 terminals (or a
terminal emulator set to a mode that emulates a 327x or 3290 terminal).
ISPF ignores screen format for other types of terminal.
Data Format is based on data width.
Std
Format is always 24 x 80 characters.
Max
Format is determined by the maximum data width and height of
the terminal or emulator.
Part
Format uses hardware partitions (3279 only)
Notes:
1. ISPF supports screen sizes from 24 x 80 characters to 62 x 160
characters.
2. If you are in an Edit session or you are using the EDIT service, ISPF
will not allow you to change the screen format.
Terminal type
Specify a valid terminal type. If you are using a terminal emulator, select
the type of terminal that is being emulated (more than likely, a 3278 or
3278x).
Specification of a terminal type allows ISPF to recognize valid (displayable)
characters. You should keep in mind that the terminal type value that you
specify to ISPF might not be the actual terminal type. For example, if your
terminal is a 3279, you specify 3278 because a 3279 terminal has the same
character set as a 3278. The keyboard character sets for the specified
terminal and the actual terminal are always compatible.
The terminal type designations in the text of this document are often the
value to be specified to ISPF rather than the actual terminal type.
For a list of ISPF-supported terminal types, refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and
Customizing. For specific information about the type value to specify to
ISPF for each supported terminal, start Help from the ISPF Settings panel.
You can also select a terminal type by using the ISPTTDEF program, as
described in z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference.
This panel can also include one or more installation-dependent options for
terminal type, for example:
3277KN
3277 Katakana terminals
3278CF
3278 Canadian French terminals
3278KN
3278 Katakana terminals.
A 5550-3270 Kanji emulation Version 3 terminal has the same character set
as a 3278 Katakana terminal, so you should specify 3278KN as the terminal
type. Also, because the 5550 running with the Japanese 3270PC/G Version

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
3 or 3270 PC Version 5 has the same character set as a 3278 Katakana
terminal, in either case you should specify 3278KN as the terminal type.
If the selected terminal type seems to be incompatible with the current
ISPF language setting, a ’Terminal Type Warning’ Message will be
displayed, but the terminal type will be accepted nevertheless. The
specified terminal type must be one of the following:
Table 3. Terminal Types
1. 3277

2. 3277A

3. 3278

4. 3278A

5. 3290A

6. 3278T

7. 3278CF

8. 3277KN

9. 3278KN

10. 3278AR

11. 3278CY

12. 3278HN

13. 3278HO

14. 3278IS

15. 3278L2

16. BE163

17. BE190

18. 3278TH

19. 3278CU

20. DEU78

21. DEU78A

22. DEU78T

23. DEU90A

24. SW116

25. SW131

26. SW500

27. 3278GR

Note: The 5550 is run with the Japanese 3270PC V5 or 3270PC/G V3
emulation program. The terminal type, set by the ISPF Settings
panel, is set to 3278KN.

Print Graphics Parms
The Print Graphics Parms portion of the ISPF Settings panel allows you to specify
to GDDM the family printer type, device name, and aspect ratio. These parameters
are described below:
Family printer type
This parameter has a default value of 2, which cannot be changed.
Device name
VTAM® node name of the physical printer to which graphic display output
is to be routed. This name is supplied by the installation’s system
programmer.
Aspect ratio
How the graphics aspect ratio (relationship to displayed screen image) is to
appear on the printed output. Aspect ratio can be either of the following:
0

Preserves the aspect ratio of the graphic area as displayed
(Figure 23 on page 32). In other words, the ratio of the graphic area
width to its height is the same on the printed document (Figure 24
on page 32) as in the displayed view. Zero is the default value.
Figure 24 shows how the graphic in Figure 23 would appear if the
PRINTG command were issued with an aspect ratio of 0.

Preserves the positional relationship between the graphic and the
alphanumeric characters outside the graphics area. In other words,
the printed graphic (Figure 25 on page 33) aligns horizontally with
characters outside the graphics area the same as it (the printed
graphic) aligns in the displayed image.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

Figure 23. Screen Containing Graphics to Be Printed Using PRINTG

Figure 24. Example of Using Aspect Ratio Parameter 0

Figure 25 shows how the graphic in Figure 23 would appear if the PRINTG
command were issued with an aspect ratio of 1.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

Figure 25. Example of Using Aspect Ratio Parameter 1

General
The General portion of the ISPF Settings panel allows you to specify values for the
input field pad and command delimiter.
Input field pad
Specifies a pad character that controls the initial padding of blank
(unfilled) panel input fields, including the selection panels, but not the
data portion, of an Edit display. Within Edit, you control null or blank
padding with Edit commands.
The pad character specified can be a B (blank), N (nulls), or any special
(non-alphanumeric) character.
Note: When you are running in GUI mode, blank pad characters will be
displayed as nulls in order to avoid the need to delete blank
characters when replace mode is not available.
Command delimiter
You can stack commands on the command line by separating them with a
delimiter. The default delimiter, the semicolon, can be changed using this
option. Alphanumeric characters, the period (.), and the equal sign (=) are
not valid command delimiters. Stacking allows you to enter, for example:
===> FIND DEPT;HEX ON

which finds the characters DEPT and then displays the file at that point in
hexadecimal mode.
The system variable for the delimiter is ZDEL. For more information about
ZDEL, refer to the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference.

ISPF Settings Panel Action Bar
The ISPF Settings panel action bar choices function as follows:

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
Log/List
The Log/List pull-down offers you the following choices (see “Specifying
Log and List Defaults and Characteristics (The Log/List Action Bar Choice)”
on page 35 for more information):
1

Log Data set defaults. Displays the Log Data Set Defaults panel.

List Data set defaults. Displays the List Data Set Defaults panel.

List Data set characteristics. Displays the List Data Set Characteristics
panel.

JCL... Displays the Log and List JCL pop-up.

Function keys
The Function keys pull-down offers you the following choices (see “Working
with Function Keys and Keylists (The Function Keys Action Bar Choice)” on
page 41 for more information):
1

Non-Keylist PF Key settings. Displays the PF Key Definitions and
Labels panel.

Keylist settings... Displays the Keylist Utility for ISP pop-up.

Tailor function key display. Displays the Tailor Function Key
Definition Display panel.

Show all function keys. Changes the function key display. This will be
an unavailable choice if you are currently showing all function keys.

Show partial function keys. Changes the function key display. This
will be an unavailable choice if you are currently showing a partial list
of function keys.

Remove function key display. Removes function keys from your
screen. This will be an unavailable choice if you are currently not
showing function keys.

Use private and shared. Equivalent to using the KEYLIST PRIVATE
command.

Use only shared. Equivalent to using the KEYLIST SHARED command.

Disable keylists. Disables keylists. This choice is not available if you
are currently running with keylists disabled.

Enable keylists. Enables keylists. This choice is not available if you are
currently running with keylists enabled.

Colors
The Colors pull-down offers you the following choices (see “Changing
Default Colors (The Colors Action Bar Choice)” on page 57 for more
information):
1

Global colors... Displays the Global Color Change Utility panel.

CUA Attributes... Displays the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel.

Point-and-Shoot... Displays the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel,
positioned on the Point-and-Shoot panel element.

Environ
The Environ pull-down offers you the following choices (see “Specifying ISPF
ENVIRON Settings (The Environ Action Bar Choice)” on page 64 for more
information):

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
1

Environ settings... Displays the ISPF ENVIRON Command Settings
panel.

Workstation
The Workstation pull-down offers you the following choices (see “Specifying
Workstation Parameters (The Workstation Action Bar Choice)” on page 64 for
more information):
1
Workstation connection... Displays the Initiate GUI Session panel.
2
GUI panel settings... Displays the GUI Settings panel.
3
Workstation Tool Integration... Displays the tool integration panel.
4
Download ISPF C/S Component... Displays the download panel.
5
Disconnect from the Workstation... Disconnects from the workstation.
Identifier
The Identifier pull-down offers you the following choices (see “Displaying
Message, System, User, Panel, and Screen IDs” on page 78 for more
information):
1
Message identifier... Displays the Message Identifier pop-up.
2
Panel identifier... Displays the Panel Identifier pop-up.
3
Screen Name... Displays the Screen Name pop-up.
Help
The
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
Settings
Options
Terminal characteristics
Print Graphics parameters
General
Log/List action bar
Function keys action bar
Color action bar
Environ action bar
Workstation action bar
Identifier action bar

Specifying Log and List Defaults and Characteristics (The
Log/List Action Bar Choice)
The Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar (see Figure 26 on
page 36) allows you to specify the log and list data set defaults that are used when
you terminate ISPF by issuing the RETURN or END command or by entering an X
on the ISPF Primary Option Menu command line.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
┌─────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────────────────────────────────
│
1. Log Data set defaults
│ tings
│
2. List Data set defaults
│
More:
+
│
3. List Data set characteristics │ Print Graphics
│
4. JCL...
│
Family printer type 2
└─────────────────────────────────────┘
Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode
Aspect ratio . . . 0
Long message in pop-up
Tab to action bar choices
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
General
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options
Input field pad . . B
Session Manager mode
Command delimiter . ;
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list
Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data
2. Std
3. Max
Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=SPLIT
F3=END
F4=RETURN
F7=UP
F8=DOWN
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT

4. Part
F5=RFIND
F11=RIGHT

F6=RCHANGE
F12=RETRIEVE

Figure 26. Log/List Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings Panel Action Bar (ISPISMMN)

The defaults can also be used when you issue the LOG or LIST command. You
may specify the characteristics of the records to be contained in the list data set
when it is defined.

Log Data Set Defaults
When you select Log Data set defaults... from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF
Settings panel action bar, the panel shown in Figure 27 is displayed.
Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
─ ┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐ ──
│
Log Data Set Defaults
│
│
More:
+ │ +
O │ Process option . . . .
1. Print data set and delete
│
│
2. Delete data set (without printing)
│
│
3. Keep data set (append subsequent
│
│
information to same data set)
│
│
4. Keep data set and allocate new data set │
│ Batch SYSOUT class . .
│
│ Local printer ID or
│
│ writer-name . . . . .
│
│ Local SYSOUT class . .
│
│ Lines per page . . . . 60
│
│ Primary pages . . . . 10
│
│ Secondary pages . . . 10
│
│ Log Message ID . . . .
(/ = Yes)
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
T │ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Command ===> LOGDSD
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

Figure 27. Log Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPISML1)

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

F9=Swap

Settings (Option 0)
The initial defaults are listed in Table 4.
Table 4. Log Data Set Defaults
Parameter
Local printer ID . . . .

Log Data Set
none

Lines per page . . .

Primary pages . . .

Secondary pages . .

Local printer ID or writer name
Enter the name that your installation has assigned to an IBM 328x type of
printer or the name of the external writer program. The default is blank. If
you enter a name in this field, be sure to leave the Batch SYSOUT class
field empty.
Lines per page
Normal values for lines per page are:
60
When printing 6 lines per inch
80
When printing 8 lines per inch.
Lines per page can range from 1–999. ISPF uses this value to determine
when to cause a page eject if the eject control is not provided by the
dialog; for example, when the dialog issues a LIST service request without
the CC keyword specified.
Primary/Secondary pages
Primary/secondary allocation parameters are specified in terms of the
anticipated number of pages of printout. These values are automatically
converted by ISPF to the appropriate number of blocks before allocating
space for the log data set.
If you modify the primary/secondary allocation parameters after the data
set has been allocated, the new values take effect the next time you start
ISPF. The log data set is allocated the first time you perform some action
that results in a log message, such as saving edited data or submitting a
batch job.
Note: Specify a primary allocation of zero to prevent allocation and
generation of the log.
Log Message ID
If you select the Log Message ID option, the message ID is automatically
added to the long message text written in the LOG data set.
If you request default processing options for the log data set, the following rules
apply:
v If you specify Print data set and delete (1), you must also specify a Batch
SYSOUT class and job statement information. If you specify Print data set and
delete for both log and list, you can specify different Batch SYSOUT classes, but
only one job is submitted for printing both data sets.
v If you specify routing to a local printer, you must specify a Local printer ID or
writer name, and Batch SYSOUT must be blank. You can also enter a Local
SYSOUT class if one is defined.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
If you do not follow these rules or do not specify default processing options,
primary option X or the RETURN command causes the final termination panel to
be displayed.

List Data Set Defaults
When you select List Data set defaults... from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF
Settings panel action bar, the pop-up shown in Figure 28 is displayed.
Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
─ ┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐ ──
│
List Data Set Defaults
│
│
│ +
O │ Process option . . . .
1. Print data set and delete
│
│
2. Delete data set (without printing)
│
│
3. Keep data set (append subsequent
│
│
information to same data set)
│
│
4. Keep data set and allocate new data set │
│ Batch SYSOUT class . .
│
│ Local printer ID or
│
│ writer-name . . . . .
│
│ Local SYSOUT class . .
│
│ Lines per page . . . . 60
│
│ Primary pages . . . . 100
│
│ Secondary pages . . . 200
│
│
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
T │ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Command ===> LISTDSD
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 28. List Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPISML2)

The initial defaults are listed in Table 5.
Table 5. List Data Set Defaults
Parameter
Local printer ID . . . .

List Data Set
none

Lines per page . . .

Primary pages . . .

100

Secondary pages . .

200

Local printer ID
Enter the name that your installation has assigned to an IBM 328x type of
printer or the name of the external writer program. The default is blank. If
you enter a name in this field, be sure to leave the Batch SYSOUT class
field empty.
Lines per page
Normal values for lines per page are:
60
When printing 6 lines per inch
80
When printing 8 lines per inch.
Lines per page can range from 1–999. ISPF uses this value to determine
when to cause a page eject if the eject control is not provided by the
dialog; for example, when the dialog issues a LIST service request without
the CC keyword specified.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
Primary/Secondary pages
Primary/secondary allocation parameters are specified in terms of the
anticipated number of pages of printout. These values are automatically
converted by ISPF to the appropriate number of blocks before allocating
space for the list data set.
If you modify the primary/secondary allocation parameters after the data
set has been allocated, the new values take effect the next time you enter
ISPF. The list data set is allocated the first time you request a print function
or a dialog issues a LIST service request.
If you request default processing options for the list data set, the following rules
apply:
v If you specify Print data set and delete (1), you must also specify a Batch
SYSOUT class and job statement information. If you specify Print data set and
delete for both log and list, you can specify different Batch SYSOUT classes, but
only one job is submitted for printing both data sets.
v If you specify routing to a local printer, you must specify a Local printer ID or
writer name, and Batch SYSOUT must be blank.
If you do not follow these rules or do not specify default processing options,
primary option X or the RETURN command causes the final termination panel to
be displayed.
After reviewing or changing the parameters on this panel, enter the END
command to return to the previous menu.

List Data Set Characteristics
When you select List Data set characteristics... from the Log/List pull-down on the
ISPF Settings panel action bar, the panel shown in Figure 29 on page 40 is
displayed to allow you to specify the characteristics of the records to be contained
in the list data set when it is defined. You can specify the record format, the logical
record length, and the line length to be printed. When the characteristics are reset,
their new values take effect at once unless the list data set has already been
allocated. In that case, the new values are used for the next list data set allocation.
These values are saved in your user profile, which ISPF automatically builds and
maintains across sessions.
Specifications for logical record length and line length values can affect truncation
of lines written to the list data set by a LIST service request. See the description of
the LIST service in z/OS ISPF Services Guide for more information.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
─ ┌───────────── ISPF Settings ─────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────
│
List Data Set Characteristics
│
│
│
More:
+
O │ Record Format . . . . . . 1 1. FBA
│ t Graphics
│
2. VBA
│ mily printer type 2
│ Logical record length . . 121
│ vice name . . . .
│ Line length . . . . . . . 120
│ pect ratio . . . 0
│
│
│
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│ ral
│ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
│ put field pad . . B
└─────────────────────────────────────────┘ mmand delimiter . ;
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list
Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data
2. Std
3. Max
4. Part
Command ===> LISTDSC
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F9=Swap

Figure 29. List Data Set Characteristics Panel (ISPISML3)

The fields on this panel are described below:
Record Format
The record format specifies the format and characteristics of the records in
the list data set. The allowable record formats are:
FBA
Fixed-length records that contain ANSI-defined printer control
characters
VBA Variable-length records that contain ANSI-defined printer control
characters.
The default setting is FBA.
Logical Record Length
The logical record length specifies the length, in bytes, of fixed-length
records or the maximum length allowed for variable-length records. The
default value is 121. This value represents one ANSI-defined control
character and 120 bytes of data to be printed.
Line Length
The line length specifies the length of the logical line to be printed. If the
specified line length is greater than the logical record length of the list data
set, data is truncated. The range of allowable lengths is from 80 bytes to
160 bytes. The default value is 120.
The information supplied by the parameters allows for the printing of
panels whose line lengths would not otherwise be supported by the
available printing facilities.
For example:
v If a panel to be printed is 160 bytes wide but printing capabilities allow
only 132 bytes, you should specify:
RECFM
FBA or VBA
Line Length
130
LRECL
132 (allows for two ANSI-defined control characters).

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
The first page of output would contain the first 130 bytes of the panel.
The second page would contain the last 30 bytes. This technique is
referred to as the cut and paste method of printing.
v If a panel to be printed is 132 bytes wide and the printer supports this
line length, you should specify:
RECFM
FBA or VBA
Line Length
132
LRECL
133 (allows for one ANSI-defined control character).
The entire panel would be printed on one page of output.
v If a panel to be printed is 80 bytes wide, ISPF uses the default values for
the LIST parameters. The entire panel would be printed on one page of
output.

JCL
When you select JCL... from the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel
action bar, the pop-up shown in Figure 30 is displayed to allow you to specify up
to four default job statements to be used for printing a log or list data set.
Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
┌─────────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ───────────────────────────────┐
│
Log and List JCL
│
│
│
│ Job statement information:
(Required for system printer)
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Session Manager mode
Command delimiter . ;
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list
Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data
2. Std
3. Max
4. Part
Command ===> LLJCL
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F9=Swap

Figure 30. Log and List JCL Panel (ISPISMLJ)

Working with Function Keys and Keylists (The Function Keys
Action Bar Choice)
The Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar (see Figure 31
on page 43) allows you to define function keys and to create, edit, delete, and view
keylists.
Nearly all panels in ISPF have associated keylists, although specific keylists
typically serve numerous panels. There are several keylists used in the ISPF
product panels. These keylists all start with the characters ISR. In addition, ISPF
contains some keylists that start with the characters ISP. They are not used in any
ISPF product panels, but can be used by an application if needed. Keylists are used
when an application panel contains a )PANEL statement.
Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
To accommodate both users who require CUA-compliant keylists and those who
prefer to use the traditional ISPF function key assignments, F1–F12 are assigned
CUA-compliant values, and F13–F24 are assigned traditional ISPF values.
Therefore, the user who runs in default mode (ZPRIKEYS set to UPP; also see
“Tailor Function Key Definition Display” on page 54) can retain the traditional key
settings.
Note: Function keys in Edit are documented in z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros.
They are not CUA-compliant.
The KEYS and KEYLIST commands have been modified to benefit the user as well.
When KEYS is issued from a panel that is not using a keylist, the PF Key
Definitions and Labels panel is displayed, which allows you to change the ZPF
variable settings, as in previous versions of ISPF. However, if the keys command is
issued from a panel with an active keylist, the associated Keylist Utility panel
Change panel is displayed.
The user can also control the use of keylists associated with panels using the
KEYLIST command. Specifying KEYLIST OFF causes ISPF to ignore the keylist in
all logical screens running under the application ID from which the KEYLIST OFF
command was issued, and to use the ZPF variables for controlling function keys.
The KEYLIST ON command (the default) causes ISPF to recognize the preeminence
of keylists again. KEYLIST ON and OFF are equivalent to the Enable and Disable
keylist choices on the Function keys pull-downs discussed in “Keylist Settings” on
page 46.

ISPF Default Keylist
ISPKYLST is the ISPF default keylist. If you do not specify a keylist to be
associated with a panel using the KEYLIST attribute on the PANEL tag (DTL) or
using the )PANEL statement, ISPF uses the keys defined for ISPKYLST to display
in the function area of the panel when it is displayed. The key settings and forms
for ISPKYLST are as shown in Table 6.
Table 6. ISPKYLST Key Settings
Key

Command

Form

F1
F2
F3
F9
F12
F13
F14
F15
F21
F24

HELP
SPLIT
EXIT
SWAP
CANCEL
HELP
SPLIT
EXIT
SWAP
CANCEL

Short
Long
Short
Long
Short
Short
Long
Short
Long
Short

ISPF Default Keylist for Help Panels
You can specify a keylist to be associated with a help panel by using the keylist
attribute on the HELP tag (DTL) or by using a )PANEL statement in your panel
definition. If you do not specify a keylist, ISPF uses the keys defined for ISPHELP
to display in the function area of the help panel when it is displayed. The key
settings and forms for ISPHELP are shown in Table 7 on page 43.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
Table 7. ISPHELP Key Settings
Key

Command

Form

F1
F2
F3
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12

HELP
SPLIT
EXIT
EXHELP
KEYSHELP
UP
DOWN
SWAP
LEFT
RIGHT
CANCEL

Short
Long
Short
Short
Short
Long
Long
Long
Long
Long
Short

Figure 31 shows the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar.
Each pull-down choice is described following the panel.
Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
───────── ┌───────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────────────────────────
│
1. Non-Keylist PF Key settings │
│
2. Keylist settings...
│
More:
+
Options │
3. Tailor function key display │ Graphics
Enter " │
*. Show all function keys
│ ly printer type 2
/ Comm │
5. Show partial function keys │ ce name . . . .
/ Pane │
6. Remove function key display │ ct ratio . . . 0
/ Long │
*. Use private and shared
│
/ Tab │
8. Use only shared
│
Tab │
9. Disable keylists
│ l
/ Rest │ *0. Enable keylists
│ t field pad . . B
Sess └───────────────────────────────────┘ and delimiter . ;
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list
Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data
2. Std
3. Max
4. Part
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F9=Swap

Figure 31. Function Keys Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings Panel Action Bar (ISPISMMN)

Non-Keylist PF Key Settings
When you select Non-Keylist PF key settings from the Function keys pull-down on
the ISPF Settings panel action bar, the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel shown
in Figure 32 on page 44 is displayed. If you enter the KEYS command on the
command line of any panel, the system displays one of two panels:
v If you are not using keylists (that is, keylists are disabled) or if there is no keylist
associated with the panel from which you enter the KEYS command, the PF Key
Definitions and Labels panel shown in Figure 32 on page 44 is displayed.
v If you are using keylists (that is, keylists are enabled) and there is a keylist
associated with the panel from which you enter the KEYS command, the Keylist
Change panel shown in Figure 38 on page 50 is displayed.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
If you define your application panels using panel definition statements, use the PF
Key Definitions and Labels - Primary Keys panel shown in Figure 32 to assign
function keys and associated labels to ISPF commands.
Note: See “Keylist Settings” on page 46 to find out how to assign function keys
that are associated with a keylist.
PF Key Definitions and Labels
More:
Terminal type . : 3278

Number of PF Keys . . . 12
PF1 .
PF2 .
PF3 .
PF4 .
PF5 .
PF6 .
PF7 .
PF8 .
PF9 .
PF10
PF11
PF12
PF1
PF4
PF7
PF10

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

HELP
SPLIT
END
RETURN
RFIND
RCHANGE
UP
DOWN
SWAP
LEFT
RIGHT
RETRIEVE

label
label
label
label

.
.
.
.

PF2
PF5
PF8
PF11

label
label
label
label

.
.
.
.

PF3
PF6
PF9
PF12

label
label
label
label

.
.
.
.

Press ENTER key to display alternate keys. Enter END command to exit.
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
Figure 32. PF Key Definitions and Labels Panel (ISPOPT3D)

Note: The panel in Figure 32 is displayed for terminals with 12 function keys. For
terminals with 24 function keys, the first panel displayed shows the primary
keys (F1–F12). When you press the Enter key, ISPF displays a panel showing
the alternate keys (F13–F24). To alternate between the two panels, press the
Enter key.
You can assign function keys to system commands, such as HELP or END, to
commands that are meaningful within a particular function or environment, such
as the Edit FIND and CHANGE commands, and to line commands, such as the
Edit or dialog test I or D commands.
Before changing function key assignments, verify the terminal type selected on the
ISPF settings panel and the number of function keys (12 or 24). For a list of valid
terminal types refer to Table 3 on page 31.
You can define or change a function key function simply by equating the key to a
command. For example:
PF9 . . . CHANGE ALL ABC XYZ
PF12 . . PRINT

In the example, F9 has been equated to an Edit command, and F12 has been
equated to the system-defined PRINT command.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
If you enter a blank for any function key definition, the key is restored to its ISPF
default.
A function key definition beginning with a colon (:) is treated as a special case. The
colon is stripped off, and the command to which the key is equated is inserted in
the first input field on the line at which the cursor is currently positioned.
A function key definition beginning with a greater-than sign (>) is another special
case. It causes the command to be passed to the dialog, regardless of whether the
command appears in the command tables. This feature provides compatibility with
SPF, in which Edit and Browse commands were defined with a greater-than sign.
When an ISPF function is executing, do not press the RESET key and then attempt
to enter information or use a function key, because the results are unpredictable.
The label fields shown in Figure 32 on page 44 allow you to specify user-defined
labels for the displayed representations of function key definitions. This provides
for displaying meaningful words of eight characters or fewer, rather than the first
eight, possibly meaningless, characters of a lengthy function key definition.
If a label is not assigned, the definitions displayed for that function key consist of
the first eight characters of the function key definition.
If the label value is BLANK, the function key number and the equal sign display,
but the value portion of that function key definition displays as actual blanks. This
label might be used if, for example, a function key is not defined or if it is
meaningless to the user, but the dialog developer wants each function key number
to appear sequentially in the function key definition lines.
No function key information, not even the number, appears if the label value for
that key is NOSHOW.
Figure 33 on page 46 shows how the function key panel can be used to assign
definitions and labels. In this example, F4 has been equated to a TSO data
management command, while F12 has been equated to a command that requests
job submission. Labels for several function keys are defined as well.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

PF Key Definitions and Labels
More:
Terminal type . : 3278

Number of PF Keys . . . 24
PF1 .
PF2 .
PF3 .
PF4 .
PF5 .
PF6 .
PF7 .
PF8 .
PF9 .
PF10
PF11
PF12
PF1
PF4
PF7
PF10

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

HELP
SPLIT
END
TSO LISTALC ST
RFIND
RCHANGE
UP
DOWN
SWAP
LEFT
RIGHT
TSO SUBMIT NOTIFY

label
label
label
label

.
.
.
.

.
. DATASETS
. NOSHOW
.

PF2
PF5
PF8
PF11

label
label
label
label

.
.
.
.

. BLANK
. FIND
. NOSHOW
.

PF3
PF6
PF9
PF12

label
label
label
label

.
.
.
.

.
. CHANGE
.
. SUBMIT

Press ENTER key to display alternate keys. Enter END command to exit.
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
Figure 33. Using the PF Key Definitions and Labels Panel (ISPOPT3E)

Figure 34 shows the function key settings that are displayed on a panel when
defined using the key definitions and labels in Figure 33.
------------------------ EMPLOYEE SERIAL -------------- DUPLICATE NUMBER
COMMAND ===>
ENTER EMPLOYEE SERIAL BELOW:

EMPLOYEE SERIAL ==> 598304

(MUST BE 6 NUMERIC DIGITS)

PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN FOR ENTRY OF EMPLOYEE DATA.
PRESS END KEY (PF3) TO END THIS SESSION.

F1=HELP
F9=SWAP

F2=
F10=LEFT

F3=END
F11=RIGHT

F4=DATASETS
F12=SUBMIT

F5=FIND

F6=CHANGE

Figure 34. Example Screen with Function Key Definition Lines

Keylist Settings
To create or change a keylist associated with your panels, or to refer to or delete a
keylist help panel from your keylist, select the Keylist settings... choice from the
Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar, or enter the

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
KEYLIST command. The first panel displayed is similar to Figure 35. If you Enter
the KEYS command from a panel that uses a keylist, the keylist change panel for
the keylist active on the original panel is displayed.
┌─────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ───────────────────────────┐
─ │ File View
│ ──
│ ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Keylist Utility for ISR
Row 1 to 11 of 16 │ +
O │
│
│ Actions: N=New E=Edit V=View D=Delete /=None
│
│
│
│
Keylist Type
│
│
ISRHELP SHARED
│
│
ISRHLP2 SHARED
│
│
ISRNAB
SHARED
│
│
ISRNSAB SHARED
│
│
ISRREFL SHARED
│
│
ISRREFO SHARED
│
│
ISRSAB
SHARED
*** Currently active keylist ***
│
│
ISRSCRVT SHARED
│
│
ISRSLAPP SHARED
│
│
ISRSNAB SHARED
│
T │
ISRSPBC SHARED
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
C │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 35. Keylist Utility Panel (ISPKLUP)

In Figure 35, ISPHELP, ISPHLP2, ISPNAB, ISPSAB, ISPSNAB, ISPTEST, ISRHELP,
ISRNAB, and ISRNSAB have already been created for application ISR. ISPSAB, the
currently active keylist, and ISPSNAB are keylists for the keylist utility panels.
ISPKYLST is the ISPF default keylist for any DTL application panel or any panel
defined with a )PANEL section that does not have a keylist defined. ISPHELP is
the ISPF keylist for help panels created using DTL or using a )PANEL section.
The application ID is shown on the title line of the panel (ISR in Figure 35) and
defaults to the application ID of the keys table in which the keylist was found
when the KEYLIST command was entered. You can specify the keylist application
ID on the )PANEL statement, or, if using DTL, it can be specified when you call
the ISPF conversion utility using the KEYLAPPL option on the ISPDTLC
command. If the panel does not specify an application ID, ISPF searches the
currently executing application’s keys table for a keylist that has the same name as
the name specified on the PANEL tag. If the keylist is not found, and the current
application ID is not ISP, ISPF searches the ISP application.
The column marked Type indicates whether a keylist is shared or is a private copy.
For information about the KEYLIST SHARED and KEYLIST PRIVATE system
commands, see the chapter on Using Commands, Function Keys, and Light Pen or
Cursor Selection in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I. Shared keylists are created by
the ISPF DTL Conversion Utility. They cannot be deleted by the keylist utility. If a
shared keylist is modified by the keylist utility, it is saved as a private keylist copy
in a table named xxxxPROF, where xxxx is the application ID. The keylist utility
now shows the keylist as a private copy. If you have issued the KEYLIST SHARED
command, you can still modify a keylist, but you cannot see the changes reflected
in the function keys until the KEYLIST PRIVATE command is issued.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
Note: The keylist utility is meant for users to modify function keys for their own
use. To define function keys for all users of an application or for site-wide
use, the definitions in the Dialog Tag Language should be modified and a
new xxxxKEYS table should be generated.
The Keylist Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
File

Allows you to create, edit, view, or delete keylists, or exit the keylist utility.
When you select File, the pull-down shown in Figure 36 is displayed.

View

Enables you to display another set of keylists. When you select View, the
pull-down shown in Figure 41 on page 54 is displayed.

File Pull-Down: To create, edit, view, or delete a keylist:
v Use a slash in the Select column to select a keylist from those displayed, then
select the appropriate choice from the File pull-down.
OR
v Select a keylist from those displayed using one of the following actions: N(New),
E(Edit), V(View), or D(Delete). If you use N(New), you are prompted for the
name of the keylist you are about to create.

┌─────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ───────────────────────────┐
─ │ File View
│ ──
│ ┌─────────────────┐ ──────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ │
1. New...
│ Keylist Utility for ISR
Row 1 to 11 of 16 │ +
O │ │
2. Edit... │
│
│ │
3. View... │ Edit V=View D=Delete /=None
│
│ │
4. Delete... │
│
│ │
5. Exit
│
│
│ └─────────────────┘
│
│
ISRHLP2 SHARED
│
│
ISRNAB
SHARED
│
│
ISRNSAB SHARED
│
│
ISRREFL SHARED
│
│
ISRREFO SHARED
│
│
ISRSAB
SHARED
*** Currently active keylist ***
│
│
ISRSCRVT SHARED
│
│
ISRSLAPP SHARED
│
│
ISRSNAB SHARED
│
T │
ISRSPBC SHARED
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
C │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 36. Keylist Utility with File Action Bar Pull-Down (ISPKLUP)

The choices on the File pull-down function as follows:
New

To create a keylist, enter the keylist name when prompted. You are
prompted after selecting New from the File pull-down, or after typing N
next to any displayed keylist and pressing Enter. The screen shown in
Figure 37 on page 49 is displayed.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

┌────────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ──────────────────────────────┐
│ File Defaults
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
ISR Keylist SAMPLE1 Create
Row 1 to 9 of 24 │
│
│
│ Make changes and then select File action bar choice.
│
│
│
│ Keylist Help Panel Name . . .
│
│
│
│ Key
Definition
Format Label
│
│ F1 . . .
│
│ F2 . . .
│
│ F3 . . .
│
│ F4 . . .
│
│ F5 . . .
│
│ F6 . . .
│
│ F7 . . .
│
│ F8 . . .
│
│ F9 . . .
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 37. Keylist Create Panel (ISPKLUCR)

The Keylist Create panel action bar choices function as follows:
File

The File pull-down offers the following choices:
1

Cancel. Cancels the creation of this keylist and returns to
the Keylist Utility panel.

Save and Exit. Saves the keylist and returns to the Keylist
Utility panel.

Defaults
The Defaults pull-down offers you the choice of the five default
key settings described in Table 8.
Table 8. Default Key Settings
Condition

Key Setting

No defaults

No values are filled in.

Non-scrollable, no action bar

The following values are set:
F1 HELP
F2 SPLIT
F3 EXIT
F9 SWAP
F12 CANCEL

Scrollable, no action bar

The following values are set:
F1 HELP
F2 SPLIT
F3 EXIT
F7 BACKWARD
F8 FORWARD
F9 SWAP
F12 CANCEL

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
Table 8. Default Key Settings (continued)
Condition

Key Setting

Non-scrollable, with action bar

The following values are set:
F1 HELP
F2 SPLIT
F3 EXIT
F9 SWAP
F10 ACTIONS
F12 CANCEL

Scrollable, with action bar

The following values are set:
F1 HELP
F2 SPLIT
F3 EXIT
F7 BACKWARD
F8 FORWARD
F9 SWAP
F10 ACTIONS
F12 CANCEL

If you are creating a keylist on a terminal defined to have 24 keys,
the 13–24 keys are set the same as the 1–12 keys. For example, F13
is automatically set the same as F1. HELP, EXIT, ACTIONS, and
CANCEL all have display format SHORT. SPLIT, UP, DOWN, and
SWAP have display format LONG.
Edit

To edit the key definitions, display formats, and labels for a keylist, enter
the keylist name when prompted. Select a keylist with a slash and select
Edit from the File pull-down, or type E next to a keylist name and press
Enter. The screen shown in Figure 38 is displayed, showing the existing
values.

┌────────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ──────────────────────────────┐
│ File
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ SHARED
ISR Keylist SAMPLE1 Change
Row 1 to 9 of 24 │
│
│
│ Make changes and then select File action bar.
│
│
│
│ Keylist Help Panel Name . . .
│
│
│
│ Key
Definition
Format Label
│
│ F1 . . . HELP
SHORT Help
│
│ F2 . . . SPLIT
LONG
Split
│
│ F3 . . . EXIT
SHORT Exit
│
│ F4 . . .
│
│ F5 . . .
│
│ F6 . . .
│
│ F7 . . . UP
LONG
Backward
│
│ F8 . . . DOWN
LONG
Forward
│
│ F9 . . . SWAP
LONG
Swap
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 38. Keylist Change Panel (ISPKLUCH)

The Keylist Change panel action bar choice functions as follows:

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
File

The File pull-down offers the following choices:
1
Cancel. Cancels the changes to this keylist and returns to
the Keylist Utility panel.
2
Save and Exit. Saves the changes to this keylist and returns
to the Keylist Utility panel or the panel from which you
issued the KEYS command.

The following fields appear on the Keylist Utility Change panel:
Row x to x of xx
Indicates that you must scroll the panel to access the remaining
label definitions.
Keylist Help Panel Name
To refer to a help panel from this keylist, enter the help panel
name in this field in the following format:
v Must be 1-8 characters
v First, or only, character must be A–Z or a–z
v Remaining characters, if any, must be A–Z, a–z, 0–9
To remove a help panel name from a keylist, replace the help panel
name with blanks.
Definition
If a display format or a label is specified, a definition must also be
specified. Any definition is valid.
Format
The only valid display formats are:

Label

View

LONG

The default. Indicates that the key label should be
displayed in the function key area when the FKA
command is toggled to the first cycle after OFF.

SHORT

Indicates that the key label should be displayed in
the function key area when the FKA command is
toggled to the first or second cycle after OFF. A key
will display more often in the function key area if
it is given the SHORT display format.

Indicates that the key label should never be
displayed in the function key area, regardless of
the FKA command toggle cycle.

Any label is valid. If the Label field is left blank, it will default to
the definition. This will happen only if the field is blank. If the
Label field is not blank and the definition is changed, the Label
field will not change automatically.

To view a keylist, but not modify it, enter the keylist name when
prompted. Select the keylist with a slash, then select View from the File
pull-down, or type V next to the keylist name displayed and press Enter.
The screen shown in Figure 39 on page 52 is displayed.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

┌────────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ──────────────────────────────┐
│ SHARED
ISR Keylist SAMPLE1 View
Row 1 to 11 of 24 │
│
│
│ The definition of the SAMPLE1 keylist is below.
│
│
│
│ Keylist Help Panel Name . . : ISPSAB
│
│
│
│ Key
Definition
Format Label
│
│ F1 . . . HELP
SHORT Help
│
│ F2 . . . SPLIT
LONG
Split
│
│ F3 . . . EXIT
SHORT Exit
│
│ F4 . . .
│
│ F5 . . .
│
│ F6 . . .
│
│ F7 . . . UP
LONG
Backward
│
│ F8 . . . DOWN
LONG
Forward
│
│ F9 . . . SWAP
LONG
Swap
│
│ F10 . .
│
│ F11 . .
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 39. Keylist Utility View Panel (ISPKLUB)

If you select View, the help panel name, key definitions, display formats,
and labels are displayed but cannot be changed.
Delete To delete a private copy of a keylist, enter the keylist name when
prompted. Select the keylist with a slash, then select Delete from the File
pull-down, or type D next to the keylist name displayed and press Enter.
The Delete Keylist Confirmation pop-up shown in Figure 40 on page 53 is
displayed.
Note: Shared keylists can only be deleted using the Dialog Tag Language.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

┌─────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ───────────────────────────┐
─ │ File View
│ ──
│ ─ ┌───────── Keylist Utility ──────────┐ ─────────────────────────── │
│ │
Delete Keylist Confirmation
│ SR
Row 2 to 12 of 17 │ +
O │ │
│
│
│ A │ Enter "/" to select option
│ e /=View
│
│ │
Confirm Delete of SAMPLE1
│
│
│ │
│
│
│ │
│
│
│ │ F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
│
│
│ │ F9=Swap F12=Cancel
│
│
│ └────────────────────────────────────┘
│
│ ┌────────────────┐
│
│ │ Delete Warning │
│
│ └────────────────┘ *** Currently active keylist ***
│
│
ISRSCRVT SHARED
│
│
ISRSLAPP SHARED
│
│
ISRSNAB SHARED
│
T │
ISRSPBC SHARED
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
C │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 40. Keylist Utility with Delete Keylist Confirmation Pop-Up (ISPKLUP)

Use caution when deleting a keylist from an application that is currently
running. If you delete a keylist that is required by a panel in the
application, an error message appears and the panel does not display.
Exit

Select Exit from the File pull-down to exit the keylist utility.

View Pull-Down: To display another set of keys on the Keylist Utility panel,
select View on the action bar. An example of the View pull-down is shown in
Figure 41 on page 54.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

┌─────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ───────────────────────────┐
─ │ File View
│ ──
│ ───── ┌───────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────────── │
│
│
1. By current panel keylist
│ Row 2 to 12 of 17 │ +
O │
│
2. By current dialog keylist
│
│
│ Actio │
3. Specify a keylist application ID... │
│
│
└───────────────────────────────────────────┘
│
│
Keylist Type
│
│
ISRHELP SHARED
│
│
ISRHLP2 SHARED
│
│
ISRNAB
SHARED
│
│
ISRNSAB SHARED
│
│
ISRREFL SHARED
│
│
ISRREFO SHARED
│
│
ISRSAB
SHARED
*** Currently active keylist ***
│
│
ISRSCRVT SHARED
│
│
ISRSLAPP SHARED
│
│
ISRSNAB SHARED
│
T │
ISRSPBC SHARED
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
C │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 41. Keylist Utility with View Action Bar Pull-Down (ISPKLUP)

The View pull-down choices function as follows:
By current panel keylist
Displays the list of keys related to the current panel.
By current dialog keylist
Displays the list of keys related to the dialog currently running.
Specify keylist
Displays the list of keys for another application.

Tailor Function Key Definition Display
The Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel (shown in Figure 42 on page 55)
allows you to change the format of the function key definition lines that are
displayed at the bottom of the screen. To display this panel, do one of the
following:
v Select the Tailor function key display... choice from the Function keys pull-down.
v Issue the PFSHOW TAILOR command from any command line.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

┌───────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ─────────────────────────────┐
─ │
Tailor Function Key Definition Display
│
│
│
│ For all terminals:
│
O │ Number of keys . . 2 1. 12
│
│
2. 24
│
│
│
│ Keys per line . . . 1 1. Six
│
│
2. Maximum possible
│
│
│
│ Primary range . . . 1 1. Lower - 1 to 12
│
│
2. Upper - 13 to 24
│
│
│
│ For terminals with 24 PF keys:
│
│ Display set . . . . 1 1. Primary - display keys 1 to 12
│
│
2. Alternate - display keys 13 to 24
│
│
3. All - display all keys
│
│
│
T │ Press ENTER key to save changes. Enter END to save changes and exit. │
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
C │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
F └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 42. Tailor Function Key Definition Display Panel (ISPOPFA)

From the Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel you can set the following
function key parameters:
Number of keys
The number of function keys you specify controls the particular set of
function key definitions currently in use.
ISPF automatically determines the terminal type, screen size, and number
of function keys:
v If the screen size is greater than 24 lines, but the terminal type specified
implies a maximum of 24 screen lines, ISPF sets the terminal type to
3278.
v If you press a function key higher than 12, but the value specified for
the number of function keys on your terminal is 12, ISPF sets the
terminal type to 3278 and the number of function keys to 24.
ISPF cannot determine the terminal type or number of function keys in the
following cases:
v If you switched between a 3277 and 3278 Model 2, both of which are
24-line terminals
v If you switched from a terminal with 24 function keys to a terminal with
12 function keys.
In these cases, you must inform ISPF of the terminal type and number of
function keys you are using. Otherwise, ISPF uses an incorrect character
set and invalid function key definitions.
ISPF automatically sets, or changes, the number of function keys in the
following cases:
v If you specify 3277, ISPF initializes the number of keys to 12.
v If you specify 3278, ISPF initializes the number of keys to whatever was
stored from the user’s last ISPF session. If no number is stored from a
prior session, the number of keys is initialized to 12.
Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
v If you press a function key higher than 12, ISPF sets the number of keys
to 24. ISPF cannot set the number of keys to 24 for the 3278T terminal.
Keys per line
You can specify the number of keys per line to be displayed on the
function key definition lines. Six or Maximum possible can be specified,
indicating either six keys or the maximum possible keys. Six ensures
consistency across all panels. Maximum possible can save space on
crowded panels. The Maximum possible option is forced when you select
the Panel display CUA mode option on the ISPF Settings panel.
Primary range
You can specify that the primary key range be:
Lower Primary keys are F1–F12.
Upper Primary Keys are F13–F24.
The default value is lower.
Display set
For terminals with 24 function keys, you can choose to display only the
primary set of function keys (F1–F12, the default range), the alternate set of
function keys (F13–24), or all 24 keys. Your display choices depend on
which range you specify for the Primary range option. For terminals with
12 function keys, this setting is ignored.

The Function Keys Pull-Down
The Function keys pull-down provides choices that enable you to display the
function keys in various forms.

Choices For Changing PF Key Definitions
You can change the PF Keys that you have defined by using one of the first three
choices on the Function Keys pull-down. Choosing Non-keylist PF Key settings
calls the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel, where you can assign PF keys to
ISPF commands, and label them. This choice is like using the KEYS command.
Choosing Keylist settings... from the pull-down is like using the KEYLIST
command, and the Tailor Function Key Display choice calls up the Tailor Function
Key Definition Display panel.

Choices For Showing PF Keys on the Display Screen
By selecting Show all function keys, Show partial function keys, or Remove
function key display , you can specify that ISPF use the long form of function key
display, the short form of function key display, or no function keys, respectively.
Each of these pull-down choices has an equivalent PFSHOW and FKA command
associated with it. The commands operate as toggles; the pull-down choices
become unavailable if they are the current setting.
Table 9 on page 56 explains the relationship between the pull-down choices and
their related command combinations.
Table 9. Displaying Forms of the Function Keys

Pull-down Choice

Command Equivalent

Show all function keys

PFSHOW PFSHOW ON FKA Long setting; all available
FKA ON
function keys displayed. This
is the default setting.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Result

Settings (Option 0)
Table 9. Displaying Forms of the Function Keys (continued)
Pull-down Choice

Command Equivalent

Result

Show partial function keys

PFSHOW (2nd time issued)
FKA (2nd time issued) FKA
SHORT*

Short setting; a partial listing
of the function keys
displayed.

Remove function key display PFSHOW (3rd time issued)
No function keys displayed.
PFSHOW OFF FKA (3rd time If PFSHOW or FKA is issued
issued) FKA OFF
for a 4th time, the display
returns to the long, or ON,
setting.
Note: * The FKA SHORT command can be issued at any time to invoke the short setting.

Choices for Determining Who Can Use Your PF Keylist
The Function keys pull-down has two choices that are equivalent to the KEYLIST
PRIVATE and KEYLIST SHARED commands:
Use private and shared
Causes ISPF to use the keylist defined as private (equivalent to the
KEYLIST PRIVATE command). Private is the default. It is unavailable if it
is the current setting.
Use only shared
Causes ISPF to use the keylist defined as shared (equivalent to KEYLIST
SHARED). It is unavailable if it is the current setting.

Choices for Enabling Keylists
The Function keys pull-down has two choices that are equivalent to the KEYLIST
ON and KEYLIST OFF commands:
Enable keylists
Causes ISPF to use the keylist defined with the panel (equivalent to the
KEYLIST ON command). Enable keylists is the default. It is unavailable if
it is the current setting.
Disable keylists
Causes ISPF to ignore the keylist defined with the panel (equivalent to
KEYLIST OFF). It is unavailable if it is the current setting.

Changing Default Colors (The Colors Action Bar Choice)
The Colors pull-down on the ISPF Settings action bar provides access to the Global
Color Change Utility and the ISPF CUA Attribute Change Utility, respectively,
along with the Point-and-shoot Color Change panel. When in GUI mode, the
choice starts the Global GUI Color Change Utility.
Figure 43 on page 58 shows the Colors pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action
bar. Each pull-down choice is described following the panel.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
──────────────────────── ┌──────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────
│
1. Global colors... │
│
2. CUA attributes... │
More:
+
Options
│
3. Point-and-Shoot... │ cs
Enter "/" to select op └──────────────────────────┘ nter type 2
/ Command line at bottom
Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode
Aspect ratio . . . 0
/ Long message in pop-up
/ Tab to action bar choices
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
General
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options
Input field pad . . B
Session Manager mode
Command delimiter . ;
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list
Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data
2. Std
3. Max
4. Part
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F9=Swap

Figure 43. Colors Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings Panel Action Bar (ISPISMMN)

Global Colors
For ISPF-supported seven-color terminals, ISPF provides the Global Color Change
Utility (on the host) and the Global GUI Color Change Utility (on the workstation)
to allow you to globally change the current colors ISPF uses for display.
To invoke the utility appropriate for your environment, do one of the following:
v Select the Global colors... choice from the Colors pull-down.
v Issue the ISPF system command COLOR from any ISPF command line.
ISPF displays the Global Color Change Utility panel shown in Figure 44 on page 59
if you are running in host mode; it displays the Global GUI Color Change Utility
panel shown in Figure 45 on page 60 if you are running in GUI mode.
Global Color Change Utility: From the panel shown in Figure 44 on page 59, you
can change the ISPF-defined default colors.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

┌─────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────┐ Help
─ │
Global Color Change Utility
│ ───────────
│
│
│ Globally change one or more of the ISPF default colors and │ More:
+
O │ press ENTER to immediately see the effect. Clearing a color │
│ field and pressing ENTER restores the default color or
│
│ selecting the Defaults point-and-shoot field restores all
│
│ default colors.
│
│
│
│ Enter the EXIT command to save changes or enter the CANCEL │
│ command to exit without saving.
│
│
│
│ ISPF Default Color
│
│ Blue . . . . _______
│
│ Red . . . . . _______
│
│ Pink . . . . _______
│
│ Green . . . . _______
│
│ Turquoise . . _______
│
T │ Yellow . . . _______
│
│ White . . . . _______
│
│ Command ===> ____________________________________ Defaults │
C │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
│
│ F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│ 9=Swap
F └──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 44. Global Color Change Utility Panel (ISPOPT10)

Enter a new value in the color field beside the ISPF-defined default color to be
changed. The valid color choices are RED, PINK, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE, TURQ,
and WHITE.
Color changes are reflected on the panel display immediately after you press Enter.
For example, if you type BLUE in the field next to RED and press Enter, any panel
element attributes defined as red change to blue.
You can restore an ISPF-defined color to its default value by setting its field to
blank and pressing Enter. To restore all the ISPF-defined colors to their default
values, select the Defaults point-and-shoot field at the end of the command line.
The EXIT command ends the Global Color Change Utility function and saves
global color changes in the ISPSPROF system profile table. The CANCEL command
ends the Global Color Change Utility function and restores the global color
definitions as they were before the utility was invoked.
Changes to the globally defined colors affect all logical screens whether they are
displayed directly by ISPF or whether ISPF has requested that GDDM perform the
display. Line mode output, fields, and graphics that the dialog has placed on the
screen using direct calls to GDDM are not affected by global color changes.
Global GUI Color Change Utility: If you have set up the GUI interface, you can
change its colors. From the Global GUI Color Change Utility panel shown in
Figure 45 on page 60, you can map each of the seven host colors to one of 16
workstation colors:
Host Colors
Red
Pink
Green
Yellow
Blue

Workstation Colors
Black
Dark blue
Dark green
Dark cyan
Dark red
Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
Turq (turquoise)
White

Dark magenta
Brown
Light gray
Dark gray
Light blue
Light green
Light cyan
Light red
Light magenta
Yellow
White

Choose colors that contrast with the panel background so that the text can be read
easily.

Figure 45. Global GUI Color Change Utility Panel (ISPOPTG1)

This panel provides three options for mapping host colors:
1

Host colors for all panel fields. Any colors that you remap affect all panel
fields.

Host colors for non-CUA attributes only. Any colors that you remap affect
only panel fields with non-CUA attributes.

Workstation default colors for all panel fields. Remapping colors will have
no effect.

The display will reflect any color changes made immediately when you press
Enter.
Note: If a field uses a non-CUA attribute without a color specified, ISPF does not
specify a color for the field and the field defaults to the 3270 default color
on the host. That same field defaults to the workstation default color when
it is displayed on the workstation, even if Host colors for all panel fields is
selected.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
Remapping Host Colors: From the Global GUI Color Change Utility panel, select a
drop-down list button corresponding to one of the seven host colors, and ISPF
displays the drop-down list on the panel, as shown in Figure 46.

Figure 46. Color Change Panel With Drop-Down List

From the drop-down list, select one of the 16 workstation colors to map to the host
color you selected. For example, if you select the workstation color light magenta
to map to the host color red, any panel element attributes defined as red change to
light magenta on the next display.
The EXIT command terminates the Global GUI Color Change Utility and saves any
global color changes in the ISPSPROF system profile table. The CANCEL command
terminates the Global GUI Color Change Utility and restores the global color
definitions to the values that were in effect before the utility was invoked.
Changes to the globally defined colors affect all logical screens. Background panels
and split screen panels are not immediately affected; the color change does not
occur until the panels are redisplayed.

CUA Attributes
ISPF provides the CUA Attribute Change Utility to allow you to change the default
values of panel colors, intensities, and highlights for panel element attributes. See
the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for a description of TYPE
values for CUA panel element attributes.
To invoke the ISPF CUA Attribute Change Utility, do one of the following:
v Select the CUA attributes... choice from the Colors pull-down.
v Issue the ISPF system command CUAATTR from any ISPF command line.
The CUA Attribute Change Utility panel shown in Figure 47 on page 62 is
displayed. This is a scrollable panel that contains the current values for CUA panel
element attribute colors, intensities, and highlights.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

┌─────────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ───────────────────────────────┐
│
CUA Attribute Change Utility
│
│
│
│ Change colors, intensities, or highlights for panel attribute elements.
│
│ Enter the EXIT command to save changes or enter the CANCEL command to exit │
│ without saving. To restore the defaults for a type, clear the field and
│
│ press Enter or select the Defaults point-and-shoot field to restore all
│
│ default settings for all types.
│
│
│
│ Panel Element
Color
Intensity Highlight
│
│
More:
+ │
│ AB Selected Choice . . . . . . YELLOW
LOW
NONE
│
│ AB Separator Line . . . . . . BLUE
LOW
NONE
│
│ AB Unselected Choice . . . . . WHITE
HIGH
NONE
│
│ Action Message Text . . . . . RED
HIGH
NONE
│
│ Active Window Frame . . . . . BLUE
HIGH
│
│ Caution Text . . . . . . . . . YELLOW
HIGH
NONE
│
│ Choice Entry Field . . . . . . TURQ
LOW
USCORE
│
│ Column Heading . . . . . . . . BLUE
HIGH
NONE
│
│ Descriptive Text . . . . . . . GREEN
LOW
NONE
│
│ Command ===>
Defaults │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 47. CUA Attribute Change Utility Panel (ISPOPT11)

You can change the default values by typing over the existing values in the table
with new values. Table 10 on page 62 shows valid change values:
You can restore an attribute to its default value by setting its field to blank and
pressing Enter. To restore all the attributes to their default values, select the
Defaults point-and-shoot field at the end of the command line.
Table 10. Valid CUA Attribute Change Values
Color Choices

Intensity Choices

Highlight Choices

RED
PINK
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
TURQ
WHITE

HIGH
LOW

NONE
BLINK
REVERSE
USCORE

In the CUA Attribute Change Utility table, if a field is left blank and Enter is
pressed, the field defaults to the ISPF provided CUA-defined default value.
Changes made to AB Selected Choice, AB Unselected Choice, Action Message Text,
Function Keys, Informational Message Text, and Warning Message Text take effect
immediately. Changes to other panel elements are reflected in the next panel
display. The values of the panel colors, intensities, and highlights are saved across
ISPF invocations in your ISPF system profile table, ISPSPROF. The changes to the
panel element values affect all logical screens.
The CUA Attribute Change Utility affects only ISPF’s CUA-defined attribute
keywords. For example, the CUA Attribute Change Utility does not override the
following panel element attribute:
% TYPE(OUTPUT) COLOR(RED)

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
Color changes made using the ISPF Global Color Change Utility override changes
made using the ISPF CUA Attribute Change Utility. For example, you can use the
Global Color Change Utility and change red to blue. You might then use the CUA
Attribute Change Utility and change normal text to red. Normal text will display
as blue.
The ISPF-supported CUA-defined default values for the panel element attributes
are listed in z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference.

Point-and-Shoot
The Point-and-Shoot panel element on the CUA Attribute Change Utility panel
(shown in Figure 48) allows you to adjust the color, intensity and highlighting of
point-and-shoot fields.
See the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for
information on the point-and-shoot feature.
To display this panel, positioned on the Point-and-Shoot panel element, do one of
the following:
v Select the Point-and-Shoot... choice from the Colors pull-down.
v Issue the ISPF system command PSCOLOR from any ISPF command line.

┌─────────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ───────────────────────────────┐
│
CUA Attribute Change Utility
│
│
│
│ Change colors, intensities, or highlights for panel attribute elements.
│
│ Enter the EXIT command to save changes or enter the CANCEL command to exit │
│ without saving. To restore the defaults for a type, clear the field and
│
│ press Enter or select the Defaults point-and-shoot field to restore all
│
│ default settings for all types.
│
│
│
│ Panel Element
Color
Intensity Highlight
│
│
More: │
│ PD Unavailable Choices . . . . BLUE
LOW
NONE
│
│ Reference Phrase . . . . . . . WHITE
HIGH
NONE
│
│ Scroll Information . . . . . . WHITE
HIGH
NONE
│
│ Sel. Available Choices . . . . WHITE
LOW
NONE
│
│ Sel. Unavailable Choices . . . BLUE
LOW
NONE
│
│ Variable Output Info. . . . . TURQ
LOW
NONE
│
│ Warning Message Text . . . . . YELLOW
HIGH
NONE
│
│ Warning Text . . . . . . . . . RED
HIGH
NONE
│
│ Work Area Separator Line . . . BLUE
LOW
NONE
│
│ Command ===>
Defaults │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 48. CUA Attribute Change Utility Panel Positioned on the Point-and-Shoot Panel
Element (ISPOPT1X)

To change any of the three attributes, type over the existing values. The changes
are reflected on the next panel displayed after you exit this panel. Table 11 shows
valid change values:
Table 11. Valid Point-and-Shoot Change Values
Color Choices

Intensity Choices

Highlight Choices

RED
PINK

HIGH
LOW

NONE
BLINK
Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
Table 11. Valid Point-and-Shoot Change Values (continued)
Color Choices

Intensity Choices

GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
TURQ
WHITE

Highlight Choices
REVERSE
USCORE

Specifying ISPF ENVIRON Settings (The Environ Action Bar
Choice)
Figure 49 shows the ISPF ENVIRON Command Settings panel from which you can
choose parameter options for the ENVIRON command. To display this panel, do
one of the following:
v Select the Environ choice on the ISPF Settings panel action bar.
v Issue the ISPF system command ENVIRON from any ISPF command line.

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
┌─────────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ───────────────────────────────┐
│
ISPF ENVIRON Command Settings
│
│
│
│ Enter "/" to select option
│
│
Enable a dump for a subtask abend when not in ISPF TEST mode
│
│
│
│ Terminal Tracing (TERMTRAC)
│
│ Enable . . . 3 1. Enable terminal tracing (ON)
│
│
2. Enable terminal tracing when a terminal error is
│
│
encountered (ERROR)
│
│
3. Disable terminal tracing (OFF)
│
│ DDNAME . . . ISPSNAP (DDNAME for TERMTRAC ON, ERROR, or DUMP.)
│
│
│
│ Terminal Status (TERMSTAT)
│
│ Enable . . . 3 1. Yes, invoke TERMSTAT immediately
│
│
2. Query terminal information
│
│
3. No
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 49. ISPF ENVIRON Settings Panel (ISPENVA)

The panel text provides an overview of the command and its parameters. For a
complete description of the ENVIRON command and its parameters, see z/OS ISPF
Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference.

Specifying Workstation Parameters (The Workstation Action
Bar Choice)
Figure 50 on page 65 shows the Workstation pull-down menu on the ISPF Settings
panel action bar.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
───────────────────────────────────── ┌───────────────────────────────────────┐
ISPF │
1. Workstation connection...
│
│
2. GUI panel settings...
│
Options
│
*. Workstation Tool Integration... │
Enter "/" to select option
│
4. Download ISPF C/S component... │
/ Command line at bottom
│
*. Disconnect from the workstation │
/ Panel display CUA mode
└───────────────────────────────────────┘
/ Long message in pop-up
/ Tab to action bar choices
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
General
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options
Input field pad . . B
Session Manager mode
Command delimiter . ;
/ Jump from leader dots
Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
Enable EURO sign
/ Scroll member list
Terminal Characteristics
Screen format 2 1. Data
2. Std
3. Max
4. Part
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F9=Swap

Figure 50. Workstation Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings Panel Action Bar (ISPISMMN)

From this pull-down you can start a workstation session, specify GUI panel
settings, configure the Workstation Tool Integration dialog, download the ISPF C/S
component, and disconnect from the workstation.
Before you can perform these tasks, you must have completed the following:
v Successful installation and initialization of TCP/IP or APPC.
’Appendix B: Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server’, in the
z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I, contains procedures to help you to test whether
you have satisfied this requirement.
v Successful installation of the ISPF Workstation Agent component.
See ’Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server component’, in the z/OS ISPF
User’s Guide Vol I for additional information.
v Initialization of the ISPF WSA component.
To initialize the WSA:
– If you have created a shortcut on your desktop that automatically launches
the WSA, double-click the icon.
If you do not have a shortcut icon:
1. Go to a command line in your operating system (Windows or Unix).
2. Change to the directory that contains your WSA executable file.
3. Enter WSA.
The Workstation Agent window is displayed on your workstation.

Figure 51. The Workstation Agent window

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
This window represents the executing ISPF C/S workstation program. For
more information about this window, see ’Appendix A: Installing the
Client/Server component’, in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I. You can
minimize this window but you cannot close it while ISPF is running in GUI
mode.
Note: If you do not close the WSA window after you end an ISPF C/S
session, you will not have to repeat this step to start another ISPF C/S
session; that is, as long as the ISPF C/S component has been started,
you can start a workstation session.
Note: You can specify the GUI panel settings without having established a
workstation connection and without running in GUI mode. However, your
changes will not be seen until you next run GUI mode.

Workstation Connection
When you select “Workstation connection” from the Workstation pull-down, one of
two events can occur. Either the Initiate Workstation Session panel is displayed, or
ISPF tells you that a newer version of the Workstation Agent code is available (if
your system programmer has not disabled this feature).
Initiate the Workstation connection: If you select “Workstation connection” and
your Workstation Agent code matches the latest level available, the Initiate
Workstation Connection panel appears, as shown in Figure 52 on page 67.
Note: If your WSA is not running, this panel will appear but you will not be able
to establish a connection.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐
─ │
Initiate Workstation Connection
│ ──
│
│
│ / Save values in system profile? (/=Yes)
│ +
O │
│
│ Workstation Connection
GUI Network Protocol
│
│ 1 1. With GUI display
1 1. TCP/IP
│
│
2. Without GUI display
2. APPC
│
│
3. Use ISPDTPRF file
│
│
│
│ GUI Title
│
│
│
│ TCP/IP Address
│
│
│
│ APPC Address
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
T │ Host Codepage . . .
Host Character Set . . .
│
│
│
│ GUI Window Frame
Default Window Background Color
│
│ 1 1. Standard (STD)
1 1. Dialog (DLG)
│
│
2. Fixed (FIX)
2. Standard (STD)
│
│
3. Dialog (DLG)
│
│
│
T │ Press ENTER to initiate a session. Press EXIT or CANCEL to return
│
│ without initiating a session.
│
│ Command ===>
│
C │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 52. Initiate Workstation Connection Panel (ISPISMGI)

The Initiate Workstation Session panel allows you to specify that you want to start
a GUI session. Starting a GUI session from this panel if you are in split screen
mode or 3290 partition mode is not supported. If you select Workstation
connection, you must specify the information in the following fields, as
appropriate:
Save values in system profile?
The default for this setting is YES. Any changes to this field are saved in
the user’s system profile.
Workstation connection
Allows you to specify one of the following types of connections for your
workstation session:
With GUI display
A GUI interface is provided for this session.
Without GUI display
A standard ISPF type of interface is provided for this session.
GUI Network Protocol
The type of network you use to connect the workstation to the
host: TCP/IP or APPC.
You can also select the third option Use ISPDTPRF file, to specify that
ISPF get your network address from the file allocated to DD ISPDTPRF.
The file can be sequential or a member of a PDS, and it can be fixed

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
blocked (FB) or variable blocked (VB). Each line of the file should be
formatted as follows: userid WORKSTAT protocol_id:network_address,
where:
userid
user’s TSO userid
protocol_id
network protocol identifier, either ip for TCP/IP or lu for APPC.
network_address
workstation address
For example, KEENE WORKSTAT ip:9.45.202.69.
GUI Title
The title you want displayed in the window frame of your GUI session.
This value will be used if dialog variable ZWINTTL or ZAPPTTL is not
found.
TCP/IP Address
The workstation’s IP address. Required if you specified TCP/IP in the GUI
Network Protocol field. TCP/IP address prompt is point-and-shoot text. If
selected, a pop-up window is displayed containing the last five addresses
saved in the system profile.
A TCP/IP address can be in dotted decimal format or in domain name
format. Dotted decimal format is a sequence of decimal numbers separated
by periods, for example, 9.87.654.321.
A TCP/IP address in domain name format consists of one or more domain
qualifiers separated by periods. The minimum specification for addresses
within the same domain is a TCP/IP host name, for example, jsmith. The
fully-qualified domain name for jsmith is formed by appending the
appropriate subdomain name and root domain name to jsmith, such as
jsmith.raleigh.ibm.com. To use domain naming, a domain name server
must be active and providing domain name resolution for domain names
within your TCP/IP network. The domain name server address is
determined by the value of the NSINTERADDR statement in the TCP/IP
configuration data set. ISPF must be able to locate the TCP/IP
configuration data set as described in the section on configuring TCP/IP
connections in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
APPC Address
The workstation’s APPC network name. Required if you specified APPC in
the GUI Network Protocol field. APPC address prompt is point-and-shoot
text. If selected, a pop-up window is displayed containing the last five
addresses saved in the system profile.
An APPC address can be in fully-qualified LU name format or in symbolic
destination name format. A fully-qualified LU name format consists of a
network identifier and an LU name, separated by a period. For example,
USIBMNR.NRI98X00 is a fully-qualified LU name.
An APPC address in symbolic destination name format consists of a 1- to
8-character name such as JSMITH. The symbolic destination name must be
defined as a DESTNAME and the corresponding fully-qualified LU name
must be defined as the associated PARTNER_LU in the APPC/MVS side
information.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
Host Codepage
The host codepage value used in translating data from the host to the
workstation. This value must be specified with a Host Character Set value if
it is to be used. If only one, or neither, of these values is specified, the
values from the terminal query are used. If your terminal or emulator does
not support codepages, the CODEPAGE and CHARSET parameter values
on the ISPSTART command are used. If the ISPSTART values are not
specified, the default codepage and character set is ENGLISH.
Host Character Set
The host character set value used in translating data from the host to the
workstation. This value must be specified with a Host Codepage value if it
is to be used. If only one, or neither, of these values is specified, the values
from the terminal query are used. If your terminal or emulator does not
support codepages, the CODEPAGE and CHARSET parameter values on
the ISPSTART command are used. If the ISPSTART values are not
specified, the default codepage and character set is ENGLISH.
GUI Window Frame
Allows you to specify one of the following types of window frames for
your GUI session:
1

Standard (STD). A GUI window frame that can be resized and that
has max/min buttons.

Fixed (FIX). A GUI window frame that has a min button but
cannot be resized.

Dialog (DLG). A GUI window frame that cannot be resized and
that does not have max/min buttons.

Note: Pop-up panels will always be displayed in dialog window frames.
Default window background color
Select the background color:
Dialog (DLG)
Standard (STD)
When you complete the fields shown in Figure 52 on page 67 and press Enter, the
WSA connection panel is displayed in a separate window (unless your system has
been set up to bypass it - see the section on the System Register panel in
“Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server component”, in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I for details).

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

Figure 53. WSA Connection Panel

This panel indicates the requestor and the type of connection requested. Click on
Yes to accept the connection as described, or No to reject the connection.
If you accept the connection, the ISPF Settings panel is displayed. This will be in
standard or GUI mode, depending on the option selected in the With GUI display
field.
Client/Server component update: If you select “Workstation connection” but the
WSA code does not match the latest level available, the Client/Server Component
Update panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 54 on page 71.
Note: If you have not started the WSA, the Initiate Workstation Connection panel
displays, but you will not be able to establish a connection.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐
─ │
Client/Server Component Update
│ ──
│
│
│ Your workstation agent is level . . . . . . . . : 439
│ +
O │
│
│ It is recommended that you download level . . . : 505
│
│
│
│ Download New Agent?
│
│ 1 1. Download now
│
│
2. Do not download
│
│
3. Cease warnings
│
│
│
│ Directory to copy file to:
│
│
│
│
│
│ Data Set to copy file from:
│
│ ’ISP.SISPGUI’
│
│
│
T │ Enter "/" to select option
│
│
Create directory to which the file is to be copied.
│
│ Command ===>
│
C │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 54. Client/Server Component Update Panel (ISPDTVD1)

From this panel, you can download the latest WSA or continue to use your current
WSA, and even tell ISPF not to notify you again if your WSA does not match the
latest available. In the Download New Agent? field, you can specify one of three
choices:
Download now
The download copies an installation program for the latest level of the
WSA. You must specify the target directory in the “Directory to copy file
to:” field. To create a new directory (one that does not already exist on
your workstation) for the file, enter a slash mark (/) in the “Create
directory to which the file is to be copied” field. The “Data Set to copy file
from:” field should already be initialized by your system programmer. If it
is not, you must specify the host data set that holds the latest WSA
installation program. For example, ’SYS1.ISP.SISPGUI’.
After downloading the installation program for the WSA, end your
ISPF/GUI connection, terminate your old Workstation Agent, and run the
installation program to install the new one.
Do not download
You might want to download the new WSA later. If so, select “Do not
download”. ISPF does not download the new installation program at this
time, but will prompt you again the next time you start a GUI session. Of
course, you can always download the agent yourself with the
Client/Server Component download function of the ISPF Utilities panel at
any time. See “Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)” on
page 187 for more information.
Cease warnings
ISPF does not download the agent installation program and you will not be
notified again that your current WSA does not match the latest available
on the host until an even higher level is available. That is, if you currently
run level 433 and you have asked to Cease warnings at level 440, ISPF will
not notify you again until at least level 441 is available.
Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
Upon successful download of the new agent, the panel in Figure 55 appears. This
panel gives you the option to end your GUI session and begin the installation
immediately (by choosing option 1), or continuing your present session and
installing the new Workstation Agent at a later time. See “Download Data Set to
Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)” on page 187 for more information.
┌──────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ────────────────────────────┐
─ │
ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program
│ ──
│
│
│ The ISPF Client/Server Component workstation install program has been │ +
O │ copied to your workstation in the current working directory of your │
│ current workstation agent.
│
│
│
│ End your workstation connection and resume the installation by running│
│ the install program ISPFINST on your workstation in the working
│
│ directory of your active workstation agent. The program is a self
│
│ extracting executable that will result in additional files being
│
│ generated on your workstation.
│
│
│
│ Do you wish to end your workstation connection now?
│
│
1. Yes, end workstation connection now
│
│
2. No, do not end workstation connection now
│
│
│
│
│
T │
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
C │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 55. Client/Server Component Install Program Panel (ISPWSD0A)

GUI Panel Settings
When you select “GUI panel settings” from the Workstation pull-down, the GUI
Settings pop-up window is displayed, as shown in Figure 56 on page 73.
Note: You do not need to have a Workstation connection running, or to be in GUI
mode, to change these settings.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier
─ ┌───────────────────────── ISPF Settings ─────────────────────────┐
│
GUI Settings
│
│
More:
+ │
O │ Close Window
│
│ 1 1. Cancel
│
│
2. End
│
│
3. Exit
│
│
4. Return
│
│
│
│ Enter "/" to select option
│
│ / Display ENTER Key
│
│ / Accelerator Support
│
│ / Continue 3270 Mode After Losing Workstation Connection
│
│ / Download Images
│
│
Make Path for Images
│
│
│
│ Path for Images:
│
T │
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
│
C │ F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Help
────────
e:

wap

Figure 56. GUI Settings Pop-Up Window (ISPISMGS)

The GUI Settings pop-up window allows you to specify the following GUI
parameters:
Close Window
Allows you to specify that one of the following commands be processed
when you close a GUI window:
v CANCEL
v END
v EXIT
v RETURN.
Display Enter Key
Select this field to display an Enter push button at the bottom of all GUI
panels.
Accelerator Support
Select this field to use accelerator keys in this session.
3270 mode after losing workstation connection
Select this field if you want the ISPF session to continue in the 3270
emulator session rather than abend with code 989 when the workstation
connection is lost while running in GUI mode.
Download Images
Select this field to download images from the host library defined to
ddname ISPILIB, to the workstation image path. If you are not running
ISPF in GUI mode, this setting is ignored.
Make Path for Images
Select this field to have ISPF create the image path you specify, when the
image path you specify does not already exist on the workstation.
Path for images
In GUI mode, this field enables you to specify a workstation path for
images. The image path can be 244 characters long with no embedded
blanks. The image path you specify must follow the accepted path notation
Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
for whichever operating system you are using. If you do not specify an
image path, ISPF puts the image requested into the workstation’s working
directory.

Workstation Tool Integration
ISPF enables you to edit host data on the workstation, and workstation data on the
host. ISPF calls this function distributed editing.
The ISPF Workstation Tool Integration dialog, or tool integrator, is a workstation
customization tool that enables any workstation application to use data from an
MVS host system. After setting up the tool integrator, your workstation-installed
applications can interact with the ISPF View and Edit functions and services. Data
flow goes both ways with the tool integrator connection. You can work with
workstation files on the host or with host files on the workstation.
Overall, the tool integrator enables MVS-based users to use workstation
applications and then share data through MVS. MVS, its file system, and RACF®,
provide data integrity, security, and distribution capabilities beyond the
workstation. Sharing data this way can reduce your installation’s dependence on
complex LANs, off-load CPU cycles to your workstation, and take advantage of
workstation tools.
Starting the Tool Integration Dialog: Before you can use the tool integrator, the
Workstation Agent must have been installed and configured. See “Workstation
Connection” on page 66 for details on these prerequisite tasks.
You can run the tool integrator in either GUI mode or the standard ISPF mode. For
information about running ISPF in GUI mode, see the chapter on the ISPF user
interface in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Note: You cannot issue a WSDISCON command or service call while running the
workstation tool integration dialog.
You can display the Workstation Tool Integration Configuration panel, shown in
Figure 57 on page 75, using any of the following methods:
v Select Workstation Tool Integration from the Workstation pull-down.
v Select the Workstation choice on the action bars found on the Edit or View
panels, then choose Workstation Tool Integration.
v Type INT on any ISPF command or action line and press Enter.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ File Map Help
│
│ ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Workstation Tool Integration Configuration
│
│
│
│ Press EXIT to save tool configuration to connected workstation hard drive. │
│ Press CANCEL to temporarily update tool configuration for this session.
│
│
│
│ Action: E=Edit V=View
│
│
│
│
Description Code Data
Mode
Command
│
│
View
V
TEXT
MODELESS e
│
│
Edit
E
TEXT
MODAL
e
│
│
**End**
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions
F12=Cancel
│
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Screen format 2 1. Data
2. Std
3. Max
4. Part
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 57. ISPF Workstation Tool Integration panel

The information contained on this panel is defined as follows:
- Line command field
Enter v (view) or e (edit) to display the Tool Configuration panel in
View or Edit mode.
Description

Text explaining the ISPF action.

Code

The ISPF action code assigned to this workstation application.

Data

The format used for the object file during download and upload to
the host.

Mode

The processing mode for this action.

Command

The workstation invocation command string or name.

You use this panel to begin to define how the ISPF actions interact with the
workstation applications, or just to look at the actions you have already defined.
The Tool Integrator Action Bar Choices: The following action bar choices are
available on the Workstation Tool Integration panel:
File
Edit

Calls the edit function to update the parameters of a
workstation action.

View

Displays the parameters of a particular action.

Cancel changes
Exit edit without updating the workstation action.
Exit and Save Exit edit and save changes made to the workstation action
parameters.
Map

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
Extension
Starts the Extension Mapping dialog. See “Extension Mapping” on
page 77 for more information.
Updating an Action: To update the configuration of an action:
v Type e (edit) in the line command field next to View or Edit, and press Enter.
OR
v Type / in the line command field next to View or Edit, then choose File > Edit
from the action bars in the panel
After you choose to edit an action, the screen shown in Figure 58 is displayed.
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│
Modify Tool Configuration
│
│
More:
+ │
│ Description . : View
Code . : V
│
│
│
│ Options
│
│ Data . . 1 1. Text
Invocation 2 1. Modal
│
│
2. Binary
2. Modeless
│
│
│
│ Workstation command
│
│ e
│
│
│
│ Additional parameters
│
│
│
│
│
│ Working directory
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

ier Help
──────────────
More:

2
1

B
;

F9=Swap

Figure 58. Modify Tool Configuration Window

The fields found on this panel are as follows:
Description
Text explaining the ISPF action.
Code

The ISPF action code assigned to this workstation application.

Data

The format used for the object file during download and upload to the
host. Use Binary for data that you want to leave unchanged on the host,
for example, image files such as bitmaps.

Invocation
The processing mode for this action. Use Modal to ensure that an action is
completed before your application moves on to another task. For example,
if you want to upload and replace an object on the host, specify Modal.
Modeless means that the action can continue while your application
performs other tasks, effectively running in parallel with the application.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
Workstation Command
The workstation invocation command string or name. This can be the
actual command name of the workstation application, or a workstation
path and command name.
Additional Parameters
Additional parameters that are recognized by the workstation command.
Working Directory
The directory on the workstation in which files used by Workstation Edit
are stored. These include saved copies of workstation files and temporary
copies of host files that are being processed by Edit or View on the
workstation.
If you do not specify a location, a default directory is used. On Windows,
the default is the directory where the ISPF WSA was started. On UNIX
systems, the default is the user’s home directory.
Extension Mapping: The Map choice on the tool integrator action bar enables you
to associate a workstation file extension of up to 3 characters with a host data set
type. The host data set type is the last qualifier of the data set. These are frequently
longer than 3 characters, while most workstation file extensions are 3 or less. The
Extension Mapping dialog panel, shown in Figure 59, shows how certain host data
set types map to their workstation file extension counterparts.
Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
┌─────────────────────────────────────────┐───────────────────────────────────
│ Workstation Tool Extension Mapping
│ gs
│
│
More:
+
│ Action: I=Insert D=Delete R=Repeat │ rint Graphics
│
│ Family printer type 2
│
Host Type
Workstation Extension │ Device name . . . .
│
│ Aspect ratio . . . 1
│
**End**
│
│
│
│
│ eneral
│
│ Input field pad . . B
│
│ Command delimiter . ;
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│ 3. Max
4. Part
│ F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────┘ Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 59. Extension Mapping Dialog Window

To map a host to workstation pair, perform one of the following:
1. in the Action field, type R to repeat a previous mapping, I to insert a new
mapping, or D to delete a current mapping
2. in the Host Type field, type the last qualifier of the host data set to be mapped
3. in the Workstation Extension field, type the extension name to be used for the
temporary workstation file created
4. press Enter.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)
If you attempt to use a host data set on a workstation and you have not mapped
the data set type to one on your workstation, the first 3 characters of the data set
type are used by default.

Download ISPF C/S Component
When you select “Download ISPF C/S Component” from the Workstation
pull-down, the Client/Server component dialog starts. See “Download Data Set to
Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)” on page 187 for more information.

Disconnect from the Workstation
When you select “Disconnect from the workstation” from the Workstation
pull-down, the Workstation Disconnect Confirmation dialog starts. From the dialog
you have the choice of YES to disconnect, or NO which cancels the disconnect
request.

Displaying Message, System, User, Panel, and Screen IDs

The Identifier action bar choice allows you to display message IDs with the
message text, and to display system, user, panel, and screen identifiers at the start
of the Title line.

|
|
|

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
─────────────────────────────────────────────── ┌─────────────────────────────┐
ISPF Settings │
1. Message identifier... │
│
2. Panel identifier... │
Options
Print │
3. Screen name...
│
Enter "/" to select option
Fam │
4. System name...
│
/ Command line at bottom
Dev │
5. User ID...
│
/ Panel display CUA mode
Asp └─────────────────────────────┘
/ Long message in pop-up
/ Tab to action bar choices
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
General
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options
Input field pad . . B
Session Manager mode
Command delimiter . ;

.
.
.
Figure 60. Identifier Pull-Down on the ISPF Settings Panel Action Bar (ISPISMMN)

Message Identifier
You can specify that you want to display message identifiers in one of two ways:
v Select the “Message identifier” choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF
Settings panel action bar, as shown in Figure 60.
OR
v Issue the ISPF system command MSGID ON.
When you select “Message identifier” from the Identifier pull-down, the Message
Identifier panel is displayed.
If you select the “Display message identifier” option, the message identifier is set
to On. The identifier will now display within the message text whenever a long
message option is accessed (that is, when you enter the HELP command). Deselect
this choice (or issue the MSGID OFF command) to set the message identifier to
Off.
This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across
ISPF sessions, select “Default setting for message identifier”.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
Figure 61 shows an error message on the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the
message identifier set to on.
Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Settings
Invalid value
More:
+
Options
Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option
Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom
Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode
Aspect ratio . . . 8
/ Long message in pop-up
┌────────────────────┐
/ Tab to action bar choices
│ ISPG213 Valid
│
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
General
│ values are: 0 or 1 │
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options
Input field └────────────────────┘
Session Manager mode
Command delimiter . ;
.
.
.
Figure 61. Panel Displayed with the Message Identifier Set to On

|
|
|
|
|

System Name

You can specify that you want to display the system name in one of two ways:
v Select the “System name” choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF
Settings panel action bar.
OR
v Issue the ISPF system command SYSNAME ON.

|
|

When you select “System name” from the Identifier pull-down, the System Name
Identifier panel is displayed.

|
|
|
|

If you select the “Display system name identifier” option, the system name
identifier is set to On. The identifier will now display in the panelid area. Deselect
this choice (or issue the SYSNAME OFF command) to set the system name
identifier to Off.

|
|

This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across
ISPF sessions, select “Default setting for system name”.

|
|
|

Figure 62 shows the top portion of the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the
screen identifier set to On.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
||
||
|
|

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ZISD10
ISPF Settings
Invalid value
More:
+
Options
Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option
Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom
Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode
Aspect ratio . . . 8
/ Long message in pop-up
┌────────────────────┐
.
.
.
Figure 62. Panel Displayed with the System Name Set to On

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Note: The commands SYSNAME, USERID, PANELID, and SCRNAME share the
same 17-character area at the start of the Title line. If more than one of these
commands are specified, ISPF displays as many as will fit, in the following
order of priority: SYSNAME, if specified, is always displayed. Then, as long
as there is enough room, USERID is displayed, then PANELID, then
SCRNAME.

|
|
|
|
|

User ID
You can specify that you want to display the user ID in one of two ways:

v Select the “User ID” choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF Settings
panel action bar.
OR
v Issue the ISPF system command USERID ON.

|
|

When you select “User ID” from the Identifier pull-down, the User Identifier panel
is displayed.

|
|
|

If you select the “Display user identifier” option, the user identifier is set to On.
The identifier will now display in the panelid area. Deselect this choice (or issue
the USERID OFF command) to set the user identifier to Off.

|
|

This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across
ISPF sessions, select “Default setting for user identifier”.

|
|
|

Figure 63 shows the top portion of the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the user
identifier (and the system name) set to On.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
||
||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ZISD10 MBURNS
ISPF Settings
Invalid value
More:
+
Options
Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option
Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom
Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode
Aspect ratio . . . 8
/ Long message in pop-up
┌────────────────────┐
.
.
.
Figure 63. Panel Displayed with the User ID Set to On

Panel Identifier
You can specify that you want to display panel identifiers in one of two ways:
v Select the “Panel identifier” choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF
Settings panel action bar, as shown in Figure 60 on page 78.
OR
v Issue the ISPF system command PANELID ON.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Settings (Option 0)
When you select “Panel identifier” from the Identifier pull-down, the Panel
Identifier panel is displayed.
If you select the “Display panel identifier” option, the panel identifier is set to On.
The identifier will now display in the panelid area. Deselect this choice (or issue
the PANELID OFF command) to set the panel identifier to Off.
This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across
ISPF sessions, select “Default setting for panel identifier”.
Figure 64 shows the top portion of the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the
panel identifier set to On.
Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPISMMN
ISPF Settings
More:
+
Options
Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option
Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom
Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode
Aspect ratio . . . 1
/ Long message in pop-up
.
.
.
Figure 64. Panel Displayed with the Panel Identifier Set to On

|
|
|
|
|
|

Screen Name
You can specify that you want to display the screen name in one of two ways:
v Select the “Screen name” choice from the Identifier pull-down on the ISPF
Settings panel action bar.
OR
v Issue the ISPF system command SCRNAME ON.
When you select “Screen name” from the Identifier pull-down, the Screen Name
Identifier panel is displayed.
If you select the “Display screen identifier” option, the screen identifier is set to
On. The identifier will now display in the panelid area. Deselect this choice (or
issue the SCRNAME OFF command) to set the screen identifier to Off.
This setting only applies to the current ISPF session. To retain the setting across
ISPF sessions, select “Default setting for screen identifier”.
Figure 65 shows the top portion of the ISPF Settings panel displayed with the
screen identifier set to On.

Chapter 2. Settings (Option 0)

Settings (Option 0)

Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SETTINGS
ISPF Settings
Invalid value
More:
+
Options
Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option
Family printer type 2
/ Command line at bottom
Device name . . . .
/ Panel display CUA mode
Aspect ratio . . . 8
/ Long message in pop-up
┌────────────────────┐
.
.
.
Figure 65. Panel Displayed with the Screen Identifier Set to On

|
|
|
|
|
|

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 3. View (Option 1)
The View option (1) displays the View Entry Panel shown in Figure 66.
Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Workstation Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
View Entry Panel
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Workstation File:
File Name . . . . .
Initial Macro . . . .
Profile Name . . . . .
Format Name . . . . .
Data Set Password . .
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Options
Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
Browse Mode
View on Workstation
/ Warn on First Data Change
F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 66. View Entry Panel (ISRBRO01)

This option enables you to view or browse source data and listings stored in ISPF
libraries or other partitioned or single-volume or multivolume sequential data sets.
View

Allows you to use all Edit line commands, primary commands,
and macros to manipulate the data. View functions exactly like
Edit, with the exception of the following primary commands:
SAVE When you enter the SAVE command, ISPF issues a
message that you must use the CREATE command to save
any data you have changed.
END

Browse

When you enter the END command, ISPF terminates the
View function; no data changes are saved.

Allows you to use the Browse primary commands described in
“Browse Primary Commands” on page 87 to manipulate data.

ISPF is shipped with View enabled. You can disable View, thus allowing only
Browse, by modifying the ISPF Configuration Table. You must set the keyword
IS_VIEW_SUPPORTED to NO. For more information, see the section on the ISPF
Configuration Table in z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing.
You can view or browse data that has the following characteristics:
v Record Format (RECFM):
– Fixed, variable (non-spanned), or undefined

View (Option 1)
Note: If you try to view a data set with RECFM=U, the Browse function is
substituted.
– Blocked or unblocked
– With or without printer control characters
v Logical Record Length (LRECL):
– For fixed-length records, up to 32 760 characters. For view only, the minimum
record length is 1 character.
– For variable-length records, up to 32 756 characters. For view only, the
minimum record length is 5 characters.
v VSAM data
– VSAM data can be browsed if the ISPF Configuration table has been
customized to enable VSAM support.
Note: When the ISPF Configuration table is customized to enable VSAM
support (that is, VSAM_BROWSE_ENABLED or
VSAM_VIEW_ENABLED is set to ″YES″), the default value for
VSAM_BROWSE_COMMAND or VSAM_VIEW_COMMAND is
″DITTO VB /″.

View Entry Panel Action Bar
The View Entry Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

See the Menu Action Bar Choice section of the ISPF User Interface
chapter in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for information about
the Menu pull-down.

RefList

See the Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for information about referral lists.

RefMode

See the Personal List Modes section of the Using Personal Data Set
Lists and Library Lists chapter in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
for information about referral list modes.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Workstation

The Workstation pull-down offers you one choice:
1. Workstation Tool Integration
See the ISPF Workstation Tool Integration Program section
of the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I for more information.

Help

The Help pull-down provides general information about the
options and commands available in View, as well as information
about each available choice on the View Entry Panel.

View Entry Panel Fields
The Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I contains
information about all the fields on the View Entry Panel except the following:
Initial Macro
You can specify an Edit macro to be processed before you begin viewing
your sequential data set or any member of a partitioned data set. This
initial macro enables you to set up a particular environment for the View
session you are beginning.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

View (Option 1)
If you leave the Initial Macro field blank and your Edit profile includes an
initial macro specification, the initial macro from your Edit profile is
processed.
If you want to suppress the processing of an initial macro in your Edit
profile, enter NONE in the Initial Macro field.
Profile Name
You can specify a profile name to override the default Edit profile.
Format Name
Contains the name of a format definition, which is used to view or browse
a formatted data set.
Browse Mode
Specifies that you want to browse the data set using the Browse function.
This function is useful for large data sets and data sets that are formatted
RECFM=U.
Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
Specifies that you want ISPF to display a confirmation panel whenever you
issue a Cancel, Move, or Replace command.
Mixed Mode
Specifies that you want to view or browse unformatted data that contains
both EBCDIC and DBCS characters.
View on Workstation
Specifies that you want to view the data on your workstation. This option
requires a workstation connection to be used.
Warn on First Data Change
Specifies that you want ISPF to warn you that changes cannot be saved in
View. The warning is displayed when the first data change is made.

Browsing a data set
If you select Browse Mode on the View Entry Panel, ISPF displays either a member
selection list or a Browse data display. For information about displaying a member
list, see the section on Using Member Selection Lists in the Libraries and Data Sets
chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Note: If you specify a volume serial on the View Entry Panel, you can browse a
single volume of a non-SMS multivolume data set.
A Browse data display is shown in Figure 67 on page 86.

Chapter 3. View (Option 1)

Browsing a data set

Menu Utilities Compilers Help
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BROWSE
ISPFDEMO.XXX.COBOL(CBLMAIN) - 01.01
Line 00000000 Col 001 080
********************************* Top of Data **********************************
IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
PROGRAM-ID. ’F20D1000’.
DATE-COMPILED. OCT. 20, 1985
ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
CONFIGURATION SECTION.
SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-370.
OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-370.
INPUT-OUTPUT SECTION.
FILE-CONTROL.
SELECT OLD-COMREC ASSIGN TO DA-S-DD1.
SELECT D1-REPORTS ASSIGN TO UR-S-D1OUT.
SELECT OPTION-CARD-FILE ASSIGN TO UR-S-SYSIN.
DATA DIVISION.
FILE SECTION.
FD OLD-COMREC
LABEL RECORD IS STANDARD
RECORDING MODE IS F
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 67. Browse - Data Display (ISRBROBA)

Each character in the data that cannot be displayed is changed on the display to
either a period or a character that you have specified. Using the DISPLAY
command, you can specify whether printer carriage-control characters are to be
treated as part of the data, and thus displayed.
You can browse data that is stored in a Unicode format. MVS Conversion Services
must first be set up for the appropriate conversions. See z/OS ISPF Planning and
Customizing.

|
|
|

During Browse, four-way scrolling is available through the scroll commands. You
can also use the FIND and LOCATE commands to scroll to a particular character
string, line number, or symbolic label.
Whenever you enter a command, such as FIND or one of the scroll commands,
that puts the cursor under a character string in the data set, ISPF highlights that
character string. This highlighting occurs whether you type the command on the
command line and press Enter or press a function key that the command is
assigned to.

Ending Browse
To end a Browse data display, use the END command. This returns you to the
previous panel, which is either a member list display or the View Entry panel. If a
member list is displayed, the name of the member you just browsed is at the top
of the list. You can select another member from the list or enter the END command
again to return to the View Entry Panel.
When the View Entry Panel is displayed again, you can select another data set or
member, or you can use the END command to return to the ISPF Primary Option
menu.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Browsing a data set

Browse Primary Commands
You can prefix any BROWSE command with an ampersand to keep the command
displayed on the command line after the command has been processed. This
technique allows you to repeat similar commands without reentering the data. For
example, if you enter:
Command ===> &FIND ABCD

the command is displayed after the string has been found, which allows you to
then change the operand and issue another FIND command.
Browse provides the functions described in the following sections, each of which is
controlled by a command that you can type on the command line.
BROWSE—Browse recursively
COLUMNS—Identify columns
DISPLAY—Control the display
EDIT—Edit a member
FIND—Find character strings
HEX—Display data in hexadecimal format
LOCATE—Locate lines
RESET—Remove the column-identification line
SUBMIT—Submit a job stream for background execution
VIEW—View a member

BROWSE—Browse recursively
The BROWSE command allows you to browse another member of the same data
set. It also allows you to browse any other data set without ending your current
Browse session.
The BROWSE command has the following syntax:
BROWSE

member

where:
member

An optional member of the ISPF library or other partitioned data
set that you are currently browsing. You may enter a member
pattern to generate a member list.

For example, if you were browsing a member of library ISPFDEMO.XXX.COBOL,
you could enter the following command to display the panel shown in Figure 67
on page 86:
BROWSE CBLMAIN

If you do not specify a member name, the Browse Command - Entry Panel is
displayed.
You end a nested Browse session the same way you would a normal one. When
you end the nested Browse session, the current Browse session resumes.

Chapter 3. View (Option 1)

Browsing a data set

COLUMNS—Identify columns
You can use the COLUMNS command to provide a temporary indication of where
columns occur on the panel. This command displays a column-identification line
on the first line of the data area. The command has the following syntax:
ON
COLUMNS

OFF

where:
ON

The default. Displays the column-identification line.

OFF

Removes the column-identification line from the display.

Note: You can also remove the column-identification line by entering the RESET
command.
An example of the column-identification line is shown in Figure 68. The digits on
the identification line show the tens positions: 1 shows column 10, 2 shows column
20, and so forth. The plus signs (+) show the fives positions (columns 5, 15, 25, and
so forth.)

Menu Utilities Compilers Help
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BROWSE -- ISPFDEMO.XXX.COBOL(CBL) - 01.01 ---------- Line 00000022 Col 001 080
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8
002200 FD D1-REPORTS
002300
LABEL RECORD IS OMITTED
002400
RECORDING MODE IS F
002500
BLOCK CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS
002600
DATA RECORD IS D1-LINE.
002700 01 D1-LINE.
002800
02 COLUMNS
PICTURE X(133).
002900 FD OPTION-CARD-FILE
003000
LABEL RECORD IS OMITTED
003100
BLOCK CONTAINS 1 RECORDS
003200
RECORDING MODE IS F
003300
DATA RECORD IS O-C.
003400 01 O-C.
003500
02 DUMMY
PICTURE X(80).

Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 68. Browse - Column-Identification Line (ISRBROBA)

DISPLAY—Control the display
|
|
|
|

The DISPLAY command allows you to view data that would not normally be
displayed, such as carriage control characters and Unicode data. For other
nondisplayable data you can specify a character to represent each character that
cannot be displayed.

|
|

The DISPLAY command has two formats. The first is used to display
carriage-control characters and other nondisplay characters. The second allows

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Browsing a data set
|
|

data stored using a Unicode CCSID (Coded Character Set Identifier) to be
displayed using the CCSID of the terminal.
Carriage-control characters and other nondisplay characters
NOCC
DISPLAY

char

You must enter at least one operand, but you can enter them in any order. If you
enter only one operand, the other operand retains its current value.
where:
char

The character you want to use to represent characters that cannot
be displayed on the screen. It can be a single character, or a single
character enclosed in apostrophes (’) or quotation marks ("). If you
specify a blank as the character, you must enclose it in apostrophes
or quotation marks.

Shows that carriage control characters are to be displayed and are
to be considered part of the data.

NOCC

Shows that carriage control characters are not to be displayed and
are not to be considered part of the data.

Both operands are stored in your user profile and are in effect whenever you are
using Browse. You need to reenter the DISPLAY command only if you want to
change one of the operands.
The first settings for display mode are period (.) and NOCC, but the carriage
control character status has no effect if the data that you are browsing has no
carriage control characters.
|

Unicode data

DISPLAY
LINE

COLS
start_line end_line

start_col end_col

CCSID ccsid_number
ASCII
USASCII
EBCDIC
UCS2
UTF8
UTF16
UTF32

RESET

|
|

where:

|
|
|
|
|

LINE start_line end_line
Specifies the number of the first and last lines within which Unicode data is
displayed. If the LINE keyword is not specified, the DISPLAY command
applies to the all lines in the data. If only one value is specified, the DISPLAY
command only applies to that line.

|
|
|
|
|

COLS start_col end_col
Specifies the number of the first and last column within which Unicode data is
displayed. If the COLS keyword is not specified, the DISPLAY command
applies to the full range of columns in the data. If only one value is specified,
the DISPLAY command only applies to that column.

Chapter 3. View (Option 1)

Browsing a data set
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|

RESET
This format of the command resets all definitions made with the DISPLAY
command as described above. All data is displayed as though it had been
stored using the terminal CCSID.

|
|

LINE and COLS are optional. LINE, COLS, and CCSID can be specified in any
order.

|
|
|
|
|
|

You can issue multiple DISPLAY commands, in which case the specifications are
merged. If a range of data is specified more than once, later specifications take
precedence over earlier specifications. For example, if you specify one CCSID that
applies to rows 3 to 10, then specify another CCSID that applies to columns 30 to
60, the second CCSID takes effect in the area where the DISPLAY commands
overlap—that is, columns 30 to 60 in rows 3 to 10.

|
|

When you exit the current Browse session, all definitions are reset (as though you
had entered DISPLAY RESET).
Examples:
v To use blanks to represent characters that cannot be displayed, enter:
DISPLAY " "

v To use a vertical bar (|) to represent characters that cannot be displayed, enter:
DISPLAY |

v To suppress the display of carriage control characters, enter:
DISPLAY NOCC

v To display columns 20 through 30 of lines 5 through 15 as though the data had
been stored using a CCSID of UTF16:

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

DISPLAY LINE 5 15 COLS 20 30 CCSID 1200

v To display lines 4 through 18 as though the data had been stored using a CCSID
of UTF16, except for column 72 in lines 12 through 18, which should be
displayed as though the data had been stored using a CCSID of ASCII:
DISPLAY LINE 4 18 UTF16
DISPLAY LINE 12 18 COLS 72 ASCII

v To revert to displaying the data as though it had been stored using the CCSID of
the terminal:
DISPLAY RESET

EDIT—Edit a member
The EDIT command allows you to edit another member of the same data set. It
also allows you to edit any other data set without ending your current Browse
session.
The EDIT command has the following syntax:
EDIT

member

where:

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Browsing a data set
member

An optional member of the ISPF library or other partitioned data
set that you are currently browsing. You may enter a member
pattern to generate a member list.

For example, if you were browsing a member of library ISPFDEMO.XXX.COBOL,
you could enter the following command to display the panel shown in Figure 67
on page 86:
EDIT CBLMAIN

If you do not specify a member name, the Edit Command - Entry Panel is
displayed.
You end a nested Edit session the same way you would a normal one. When you
end the nested Edit session, the current Browse session resumes.

FIND—Find character strings
The FIND command allows you to find a specified character string. The syntax of
the FIND command is:
|

CHARS

ALL
FIRST
LAST
PREV

PREFIX
SUFFIX
WORD

FIND string

UTF8
ASCII
USASCII

left_col right_col

Note: FIND as a Browse command, shown here, has the same syntax as FIND as
an Edit command, except the optional X/NX/EX and line range operands
are not included.
where:
string Required operand. The character string you want to find.
NEXT | ALL | FIRST | LAST | PREV
Optional operands that define the starting point, direction, and extent of
the search. NEXT is the default.
CHARS | PREFIX | SUFFIX | WORD
Optional operand. Operands that set the conditions for a character string
match. CHARS is the default.
|
|
|
|
|

UTF8 | ASCII | USASCII
Optional operand which specifies that the FIND string is either a UTF8,
ASCII, or USASCII character string. This form of the FIND command is
only available for the character FIND command, and only for UTF8, ASCII,
or USASCII strings.
left_col and right_col
Optional operands. Numbers that identify the columns the FIND command
is to search.
You can separate the operands with blanks or commas and you can type them in
any order, but right_col, if typed, must follow left_col.
Specifying find strings: The string operand specifies the characters to be found.
For examples of different string formats, refer to the description of the FIND
command in z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros.
Chapter 3. View (Option 1)

Browsing a data set
The default is not to differentiate between uppercase and lowercase characters
when searching. Except for the character (C) string, differences between uppercase
and lowercase strings are ignored. For example, this command:
FIND ALL ’CONDITION NO. 1’

successfully finds any of the following:
CONDITION
Condition
condition
condition

NO.
No.
No.
no.

1
1
1
1

Omitting string delimiters:
Generally, you enter the strings without delimiters. For example, to find all
occurrences of ABC, enter:
FIND ALL ABC

Using string delimiters: You must use delimiters if a string contains embedded
blanks or commas, or if a string is the same as a command keyword. You delimit
strings with either apostrophes (’) or quotation marks ("). For example, to find the
next occurrence of every one, enter:
FIND ’every one’

The FIND command does not find the apostrophe or quotation mark string
delimiters.
Note: The Browse FIND command does not work with a search argument that
contains the command delimiter, even if string delimiters are used. You can
specify a hexadecimal search string or use ISPF Option 0 to change the
command delimiter to a different character.
Starting point, direction, and extent of search: You can control the starting point,
direction, and extent of the search by using one of the following operands:
NEXT The scan starts at the first position after the current cursor location and
searches ahead to find the next occurrence of the string. NEXT is the
default.
ALL

The scan starts at the top of the data and searches ahead to find all
occurrences of the string. A message in the upper-right corner of the screen
shows the number of occurrences found. The second-level message that is
displayed when you enter the HELP command shows which columns were
searched.

FIRST The scan starts at the top of the data and searches ahead to find the first
occurrence of the string.
LAST The scan starts at the bottom of the data and searches backward to find the
last occurrence of the string.
PREV The scan starts at the first position before the current cursor location and
searches backward to find the previous occurrence of the string.
If you specify FIRST, ALL, or NEXT, the direction of the search is forward; pressing
the RFIND function key (F5/17) finds the next occurrence of the designated string.
If you specify LAST or PREV, the direction of the search is backward; pressing the
RFIND function key finds the previous occurrence of the string. The other optional
operands remain in effect, as specified in the last FIND command. These operands
include CHARS, WORD, PREFIX, SUFFIX, and left_col, right_col.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Browsing a data set
The search proceeds until one or all occurrences of the string are found, or until
the end of data is found. If the string is not found, one of the following actions
takes place:
v If the FIND command was entered on the Command line, a NO string FOUND
message is displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen.
v If the FIND command was repeated using the RFIND command, either a BOTTOM
OF DATA REACHED message or a TOP OF DATA REACHED message is displayed,
depending on the direction of the search. When these messages appear, you can
press the RFIND function key again to continue the search by wrapping to the
top or bottom of the data. If the string is still not found anywhere in the data, a
NO string FOUND message is displayed.
Conditions for character string matches: The operands CHARS, PREFIX, SUFFIX,
and WORD control the conditions for a successful match with the string based on
whether the data string begins and/or ends with a non-alphanumeric character;
that is, a special character or a blank. You can abbreviate PREFIX, SUFFIX, and
CHARS to PRE, SUF, and CHAR, respectively.
In the following illustration, the underscored strings would be found and the
strings that are not underscored would be ignored:
CHARS ’DO’ - DO DONT ADO ADOPT ’DO’ +ADO (DONT) ADOPREFIX ’DO’ - DO DONT ADO ADOPT ’DO’ +ADO (DONT) ADOSUFFIX ’DO’ - DO DONT ADO ADOPT ’DO’ +ADO (DONT) ADOWORD ’DO’

- DO DONT ADO ADOPT ’DO’ +ADO (DONT) ADO-

If you do not specify an operand, the default is CHARS.
Using text strings: Text strings are processed exactly the same as delimited
strings. They are provided for compatibility with prior versions of the product.
Using character strings: A character string, which may be used as a string
operand in a FIND command, requires that the search be satisfied by an exact
character-by-character match. Lowercase alphabetic characters match only with
lowercase alphabetic characters and uppercase alphabetic characters match only
with uppercase.
If you specify a text string that contains any SO or SI characters, the string is
considered a character string.
|
|
|

Specifying the keyword UTF8, ASCII, or USASCII with this form of the FIND
command will find occurrences of ’string’ within the data being browsed, where
’string’ has been stored in the corresponding CCSID format.
Examples:
To find the next occurrence of the characters XYZ only if they are in uppercase:
FIND C’XYZ’

To find the next occurrence of the characters xyz only if they are in lowercase:
FIND C’xyz’

|
|

To find the next occurrence of the UTF8 string ’Found’ (but not ’FOUND’, ’found’,
or ’FoUnD’):
Chapter 3. View (Option 1)

Browsing a data set
|

FIND C’Found’ UTF8

Using picture strings: A picture string used as a string operand in a FIND
command allows you to search for a particular type of character, without regard
for the specific character involved. You can use special characters within the
picture string to represent the type of character to be found, as follows:
String
P’=’
P’¬’
P’.’
P’#’
P’-’
P’@’

Meaning
Any character
Any nonblank character
Any nondisplayable (invalid) character
Any numeric character (0–9)
Any nonnumeric character
Any alphabetic character (uppercase or lowercase).

String
P’<’
P’>’
P’$’

Meaning
Any lowercase alphabetic character
Any uppercase alphabetic character
Any special character (not alphabetic or numeric).

If an APL or TEXT keyboard is being used, the following additional character can
be used in a picture string:
P’ ’
Any APL-specific or TEXT-specific character
P’_’
Any underscored alphabetic APL character and delta.
Only the special characters listed above are valid within a picture string, but the
string can include alphabetic or numeric characters that represent themselves.
A DBCS subfield cannot be specified as the subject of a picture string for the FIND
command.
Examples of picture strings:
P’###’
A string of 3 numeric characters
P’¬ ¬’
Any 2 nonblank characters separated by a blank
P’.’
Any nondisplayable character
P’ #’
A blank followed by a numeric character
P’#AB’
A numeric character followed by ’AB’.
Examples of FIND commands using picture strings:
FIND P’.’

Find next nondisplayable character

FIND P’¬’ 72
Find next nonblank character in column 72
F P’ ¬’ 1

Find the next line with a blank in column 1 followed by a
nonblank.

When you use the special characters ’=’ or ’.’ and a nondisplayable character is
found, a hexadecimal representation is used in the confirmation message that
appears in the upper-right corner of the screen. For example:
FIND P’..’

could result in the message CHARS X’0205’ FOUND.
Column limitations: The left_col and right_col operands allow you to search only
a portion of each line, rather than the complete line. These operands, which are
integers separated by a comma or by at least one blank, show the starting and
ending columns for the search. The following rules apply:

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Browsing a data set
v If you specify neither left_col nor right_col, the search continues across all
columns within the current boundary columns.
v If you specify left_col without right_col, the string is found only if it starts in the
specified column.
v If you specify both left_col and right_col, the complete string, not just part of it,
must be within the specified columns.
Using RFIND: The RFIND command, which is usually assigned to the F5/17 key,
allows you to repeat the previous FIND command without retyping it. Therefore,
you can use this command to find successive occurrences of the string specified in
the last FIND command. You can also use the RFIND command to return to the
top of your data and continue searching when the BOTTOM OF DATA REACHED
message appears. If you enter the RFIND command on the Command line instead
of using a function key, you must position the cursor to the desired starting
location before pressing Enter.
If you specify a 1-byte hexadecimal string as the FIND string and the string is
found at the second byte of a double-byte character set (DBCS) character, hardware
sets the cursor to the first byte of the character. If you then request RFIND, the
same data is found again. To find the next occurrence of the string, you must move
the cursor to the next character position before requesting RFIND again.

HEX—Display data in hexadecimal format
The HEX command causes data to be displayed in hexadecimal format. The syntax
of the command is:
VERT
HEX

DATA

VERT
DATA
OFF

You can specify the operands in any order:
where:
ON

Turns hexadecimal mode on. This is the default.

OFF

Turns hexadecimal mode off.

VERT Valid only when hexadecimal mode is ON. This is the default. Figure 69
shows how VERT causes the hexadecimal representation to be displayed
vertically, two rows per byte, under each character.
DATA Valid only when hexadecimal mode is ON. Figure 70 on page 97 shows
how DATA causes the hexadecimal representations to be displayed as a
string of hexadecimal characters, two per byte. Because the hexadecimal
string is twice the length of the data string, it occupies two rows. If you
omit this operand, VERT is assumed.
When using browse and placing the cursor anywhere within the record, SCROLL
UP positions the data where the cursor is located as the last complete line record
on the display. A complete line record consists of the standard character form line,
two hexadecimal character lines, and a separator line.

Chapter 3. View (Option 1)

Browsing a data set
For example, the following command would display the hexadecimal notation
vertically:
HEX VERT

Three lines are displayed for each source line. The first line shows the data in
standard character form. Figure 69 shows the next two lines with the same data in
vertical hexadecimal representation. A separator line is displayed between the two
representations to make it easier for you to read the data.

Menu Utilities Compilers Help
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BROWSE -- USERID.PRIVATE.SCRIPT(BHEX) - 01.00 ------ Line 00000000 Col 001 076
********************************* Top of Data *********************************
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------:H3 ID=BRHEX SUBJECT=’BROWSE COMMANDS - HEX’.
7CF4CC7CDCCE4EECDCCE77CDDEEC4CDDDCDCE464CCE74
A83094E2985702421533ED296625036441542000857DB
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------HEX - DISPLAYING DATA IN HEXADECIMAL FORMAT
CCE464CCEDDCECDC4CCEC4CD4CCECCCCCDCD4CDDDCE
8570004927318957041310950857145394130669413
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------:P.THE DISPLAY OF DATA IN HEXADECIMAL NOTATION IS CONTROLLED BY THE HEX
7D4ECC4CCEDDCE4DC4CCEC4CD4CCECCCCCDCD4DDECECDD4CE4CDDEDDDDCC4CE4ECC4CCE
A7B38504927318066041310950857145394130563139650920365396335402803850857
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 69. Browse Hexadecimal Display - Vertical (ISRBROBA)

To display the hexadecimal notation horizontally, use this command:
HEX DATA

Figure 70 on page 97 shows the next two lines with the same data in DATA
hexadecimal representation.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Browsing a data set

Menu Utilities Compilers Help
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BROWSE -- USERID.PRIVATE.SCRIPT(BHEX) - 01.00 ------ Line 00000000 Col 001 076
********************************* Top of Data *********************************
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------:H3 ID=BRHEX SUBJECT=’BROWSE COMMANDS - HEX’.
7AC8F340C9C47EC2D9C8C5E740E2E4C2D1C5C3E37E7DC2D9D6E6E2C540C3D6D4D4C1D5C4E2406040
C8C5E77D4B
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------HEX - DISPLAYING DATA IN HEXADECIMAL FORMAT
C8C5E7406040C4C9E2D7D3C1E8C9D5C740C4C1E3C140C9D540C8C5E7C1C4C5C3C9D4C1D340C6D6D9
D4C1E3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------:P.THE DISPLAY OF DATA IN HEXADECIMAL NOTATION IS CONTROLLED BY THE HEX
7AD74BE3C8C540C4C9E2D7D3C1E840D6C640C4C1E3C140C9D540C8C5E7C1C4C5C3C9D4C1D340D5D6
E3C1E3C9D6D540C9E240C3D6D5E3D9D6D3D3C5C440C2E840E3C8C540C8C5E7
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 70. Browse Hexadecimal Display - Data (ISRBROBA)

You can use the FIND command to find invalid characters or any specific
hexadecimal character regardless of the setting of hexadecimal mode. Refer to the
syntax for picture strings and hexadecimal strings under the description of the
FIND command in z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros.

LOCATE—Locate lines
Use the LOCATE command to bring a particular line to the top of the display. You
can identify the line by either its relative line number or a previously defined label.
During Browse, the current position of the screen window is shown by the
line/column numbers in the upper-right corner of the screen. The line number
refers to the first line of data following the two header lines, and shows the
relative position of that line in the data. The Top of Data message is treated as
relative line zero. You must enter either a line number or a label as an operand.
LOCATE

line-number
label

where:
line-number

A numeric value of up to 8 digits that shows the position of the
line from the beginning of the data. The line number is displayed
in the upper-right corner.

label

Defined by scrolling to the top of the screen the line with which
you want to associate the label. You then type the label on the
command line in the form:
.ccccccc

For example, to find line 18463, you could enter the following command:
LOCATE 18463

Chapter 3. View (Option 1)

Browsing a data set
ISPF then moves line 18463 to the top of the screen. You can assign a label to it by
entering:
.label

The label is a period followed by up to seven characters that can be displayed,
except the comma and the space. It is treated as an internal symbol and is equated
to the top line on the screen. You are required to specify the period when you
define the label. The next time you want to find this line, you can enter:
LOCATE .label

The period is usually optional when you use it as an operand in a LOCATE
command. However, if the first character in the label is a number, you must
specify the period to distinguish the label from a line number.
The latest assignment of a label overrides any previous assignments. You can
assign several labels to the same line. Labels are not retained when you leave the
Browse option.

RESET—Remove the column-identification line
The RESET command removes the column-identification line that you can display
by using the COLUMNS command. This command has no operands. An example
of the column-identification line is shown in Figure 68 on page 88.

SUBMIT—Submit a job stream for background execution
The SUBMIT command is used to submit a job stream that is being browsed. If the
data set being browsed is modified and saved by another user or by the same user
on another screen, the SUBMIT command will submit the updated data set, not the
copy being browsed. The TSO SUBMIT command is invoked directly to submit the
job stream, so the data set has to be fixed-record format with a record length of 80.
Note: The Browse SUBMIT command is not supported if the underlying data is
packed.

VIEW—View a member
The VIEW command allows you to view another member of the same data set. It
also allows you to view any other data set without ending your current Browse
session.
The VIEW command has the following syntax:
VIEW

member

where:
member

An optional member of the ISPF library or other partitioned data
set that you are currently browsing. You may enter a member
pattern to generate a member list.

For example, if you were browsing a member of library ISPFDEMO.XXX.COBOL,
you could enter the following command to display the panel shown in Figure 67
on page 86:
VIEW CBLMAIN

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Browsing a data set
If you do not specify a member name, the View Command - Entry Panel is
displayed.
You end a nested View session the same way you would a normal one. When you
end the nested View session, the current Browse session resumes.

Chapter 3. View (Option 1)

100

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 4. Edit (Option 2)
The Edit option (2) allows you to create, display, and change data stored in ISPF
libraries or other partitioned or single-volume or multivolume sequential data sets
with the following characteristics:
v Record Format (RECFM):
– Fixed or variable (non-spanned)
– Blocked or unblocked
– With or without printer control characters
v Logical Record Length (LRECL):
– From 1 to 32 760, inclusive, for fixed-length records
– From 5 to 32 756, inclusive, for variable-length records.
v VSAM data
– VSAM data can be edited if the ISPF Configuration table has been customized
to enable VSAM support.
Note: When the ISPF Configuration table is customized to enable VSAM
support (that is, VSAM_EDIT_ENABLED is set to ″YES″), the default
value for VSAM_EDIT_COMMAND is ″DITTO VE /″.
If you have made a connection to the workstation, you can also specify a
workstation file name, for example C: \AUTOEXEC.BAT, on the Edit Entry Panel.
Or you can specify which environment (host or workstation) should be used to
edit a data set. With these options, one of four editing situations can occur:
v Edit a host data set on the host
v Edit a host data set on the workstation
v Edit a workstation file on the host
v Edit a workstation file on the workstation.
Note: Some file names are reserved or restricted depending on the workstation
operating system. An attempt to edit a file name that is reserved or
restricted by your operating system might cause your workstation operating
system or host system to hang. See your workstation operating system
documentation to learn restricted or reserved file names.
Edit a Host Data Set on the Host
The editor searches the ISPF libraries in the designated order to find the
member and copy it into working storage. If you specified a nonexistent
member of an ISPF library, a new member is created with the specified
name.
When you save the edited member, the editor places or replaces it in the
first ISPF library in the concatenation sequence, regardless of which library
it was copied from.
Edit a Host Data Set on the Workstation
The editor searches the ISPF libraries in the designated order to find the
member and copy it into working storage. The data set name is converted
to a workstation file name, and that name is appended to the workstation’s
current working directory. The host data set is transferred to the
workstation, and the working file is then passed to the user’s chosen edit
program.

101

Edit (Option 2)
When you finish the edit session, the working file is transferred back to the
host and stored in the first ISPF library in the concatenation sequence.
Edit a Workstation File on the Host
The editor searches the workstation files to find the desired file and copy it
into working storage. The workstation file name is converted to a host data
set name, and, if greater than 44 characters, it is truncated to be 44. The
workstation file is transferred to the host, where you can edit it.
When you finish the edit session, the working file is transferred back to the
workstation and stored.
Edit a Workstation File on the Workstation
This edit proceeds as it normally does on your workstation.

Editing a Data Set
When you select the Edit option, the Edit Entry Panel shown in Figure 71 is
displayed.
Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Workstation Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Edit Entry Panel
ISPF Library:
Project . .
Group . . .
Type . . .
Member . .

. MYPROJ
. DEV
. SOURCE
.

. . .

(Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Workstation File:
File Name . . . . .
Initial Macro . . . .
Profile Name . . . . .
Format Name . . . . .
Data Set Password . .
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Options
/ Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
Mixed Mode
Edit on Workstation
Preserve VB record length
F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 71. Edit Entry Panel (ISREDM01)

Edit Entry Panel Action Bar
The Edit Entry Panel action bar choices function as follows:

102

See the Menu Action Bar Choice section of the ISPF User Interface
chapter in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for information about
the Menu pull-down.

RefList

See the Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for information about referral lists.

RefMode

See the Personal List Modes section of the Using Personal Data Set
Lists and Library Lists chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I
for information about referral list modes.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Edit (Option 2)
Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Workstation

Configure ISPF workstation tool integration.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
Type of Data Sets
3
Edit entry panel
4
Member selection list
5
Display screen format
6
Scrolling data
7
Sequence numbering
8
Display modes
9
Tabbing
10
Automatic recovery
11
Edit profiles
12
Edit line commands
13
Edit primary commands
14
Labels and line ranges
15
Ending an edit session
16
Appendices
17
Index

Edit Entry Panel Fields
You can specify a concatenated sequence of up to four ISPF libraries, but the
libraries must have been previously allocated to ISPF with the Data Set utility (3.2).
The fields on this panel are:
Project

The common identifier for all ISPF libraries belonging to the same
programming project.

Group

The identifier for the particular set of ISPF libraries; that is, the
level of the libraries within the library hierarchy.
You can specify a concatenated sequence of up to four existing
ISPF libraries.
The editor searches the ISPF libraries in the designated order to
find the member and copies it into working storage. If the editor
does not find the member in the library, it creates a new member
with the specified name.
When you save the edited member, the editor places or replaces it
in the first ISPF library in the concatenation sequence, regardless of
which library it was copied from.

Type

The identifier for the type of information in the ISPF library.

Member

The name of an ISPF library or other partitioned data set member.
Leaving this field blank or entering a pattern causes PDF to
display a member list. Refer to z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I if you
need information about entering patterns.

Data Set Name
Any fully qualified data set name, such as
‘USERID.SYS1.MACLIB’, or VSAM data set name. If you include
your TSO user prefix (defaults to user ID), you must enclose the
Chapter 4. Edit (Option 2)

103

Edit (Option 2)
data set name in apostrophes. However, if you omit the TSO user
prefix and apostrophes, your TSO user prefix is automatically
added to the beginning of the data set name.
If you specify a VSAM data set name, ISPF checks the
Configuration table to see if VSAM support is enabled. If so, the
specified tool is invoked. If VSAM support is not enabled, an error
message is displayed.
Volume Serial A real DASD volume or a virtual volume residing on an IBM 3850
Mass Storage System. To access 3850 virtual volumes, you must
also have MOUNT authority, which is acquired through the TSO
ACCOUNT command.
Workstation File:
If you have made a connection to the workstation, you can specify
a workstation file name, for example C: \AUTOEXEC.BAT, in this
field.
Initial Macro

You can specify a macro to be processed before you begin editing
your sequential data set or any member of a partitioned data set.
This initial macro allows you to set up a particular editing
environment for the Edit session you are beginning. This initial
macro overrides any IMACRO value in your profile.
If you leave the Initial Macro field blank and your edit profile
includes an initial macro specification, the initial macro from your
edit profile is processed.
If you want to suppress an initial macro in your edit profile, type
NONE in the Initial Macro field. See the sections on Initial Macros
and the IMACRO primary command in the z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit
Macros manual for more details.

Profile Name

The name of an edit profile, which you can use to override the
default edit profile. See the sections on Edit Profiles and the edit
environment in the z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros manual.

Format Name The name of a format definition or blank if no format is to be
used.
Data Set Password
The password for OS password-protected data sets. This is not
your RACF password.
Confirm Cancel/Move/Replace
When you select this field with a ″/″, a confirmation panel
displays when you request one of these actions, and the execution
of that action would result in data changes being lost or existing
data being overwritten.
v For MOVE, the confirm panel is displayed if the data to be
moved exists. Otherwise, an error message is displayed.
v For REPLACE, the confirm panel is displayed if the data to be
replaced exists. Otherwise, the REPLACE command functions
like the edit CREATE command, and no confirmation panel is
displayed.
v For CANCEL, the confirmation panel is displayed if any data
changes have been made, whether through primary commands,
line commands, or typing.

104

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Edit (Option 2)
Note: Any commands or data changes pending at the time the
CANCEL command is issued are ignored. Data changes
are ″pending″ if changes have been made to the displayed
edit data, but no interaction with the host (ENTER, PF
key, or command other than CANCEL) has occurred. If no
other changes have been made during the edit session up
to that point, the confirmation panel is not displayed.
Preserve VB record length
When you select this field with a ″/″, it specifies that the editor
store the original length of each record in variable length data sets
and when a record is saved, the original record length is used as
the minimum length for the record. The minimum length can be
changed using the SAVE_LENGTH edit macro command. The
editor always includes a blank at the end of a line if the length of
the record is zero or eight.
Mixed Mode

When you select this field with a ″/″, it specifies that the editor
look for shift-out and shift-in delimiters surrounding DBCS data. If
you do not select it, the editor does not look for mixed data.

Edit on Workstation
You can select this option to use your workstation as the editing
environment for whichever host data set or workstation file you
want to edit.
Note: Double-Byte Character Set Support
The ISPF editor supports DBCS alphabets in two ways:
v Formatted data where DBCS characters are in the column positions
specified in the format definition created with the Format Utility (option
3.11)
v Mixed characters delimited with the special shift-out and shift-in
characters.
If you are using mixed mode and the record length of a data set is greater
than 72 bytes, there is a possibility that a DBCS character might encroach
on the display boundary. Here, PDF attempts to display the other
characters by replacing an unpaired DBCS character byte with an SO or SI
character. If there is a possibility that the replaced SO or SI character was
erased, the line number of the line is highlighted. If you change the
position of the SO and SI characters on the panel, or if you delete the SO
and SI characters entirely, the DBCS character on the boundary is
removed to keep the rest of the data intact.

Chapter 4. Edit (Option 2)

105

Edit (Option 2)

106

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)
The Utilities option (3) provides a variety of functions for library, data set, and
catalog maintenance, each of which is described in this chapter. The Utility
Selection Panel is shown in Figure 72.
Menu Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Utility Selection Panel
1 Library

Compress or print data set. Print index listing. Print,
rename, delete, browse, edit or view members
2 Data Set
Allocate, rename, delete, catalog, uncatalog, or display
information of an entire data set
3 Move/Copy Move, or copy members or data sets
4 Dslist
Print or display (to process) list of data set names.
Print or display VTOC information
5 Reset
Reset statistics for members of ISPF library
6 Hardcopy
Initiate hardcopy output
7 Transfer
Download ISPF Client/Server or Transfer data set
8 Outlist
Display, delete, or print held job output
9 Commands
Create/change an application command table
11 Format
Format definition for formatted data Edit/Browse
12 SuperC
Compare data sets
(Standard Dialog)
13 SuperCE
Compare data sets Extended
(Extended Dialog)
14 Search-For Search data sets for strings of data
(Standard Dialog)
15 Search-ForE Search data sets for strings of data Extended (Extended Dialog)
16 Tables
ISPF Table Utility
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 72. Utility Selection Panel (ISRUTIL)

Utility Selection Panel Action Bar
The Utility Selection Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Help

The Help pull-down provides information about each available choice on
the Utilities Menu.

Library Utility (Option 3.1)
When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 73 on page 108) that
allows you to specify a data set and an action to be performed. The Library utility
is intended primarily for maintenance of partitioned data sets. However, the print
index listing (X), print entire data set (L), data set information (I), and short data
set information (S) functions also apply to sequential data sets.

107

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Library Utility
More:
+
blank Display member list
I Data set information
B Browse member
C Compress data set
S Short data set information
D Delete member
X Print index listing
E Edit member
R Rename member
L Print entire data set
V View member
P Print member
ISPF Library:
Project . .
Group . . .
Type . . .
Member . .
New name .

. MYPROJ
. DEV
. SOURCE
.
.

. . .

Enter "/" to select option
/ Confirm Member Delete
Enhanced Member List
. . .
. . .

(If B, D, E, P, R, V, or blank selected)
(If R selected)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 73. Library Utility Panel (ISRUDA1)

Library Utility Panel Action Bar
The Library Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the chapter on Using Personal Data
Set Lists and Library Lists in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Help

108

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
Compressing a partitioned Data Set
2
Printing an Index listing
3
Printing an entire Data Set
4
Printing a member of a partitioned Data Set
5
Renaming a member of a partitioned Data Set
6
Deleting a member of a partitioned Data Set
7
Browsing a member of a partitioned Data Set
8
Editing a member of a partitioned Data Set
9
Viewing a member of a partitioned Data Set
10
Displaying a member list
11
Displaying Data Set Information
12
Appendices
13
Index

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

Library Utility Panel Fields
All the fields on the Library Utility panel, with the exception of the “New name”
field, are discussed in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I. The “New name” field is required when option R (rename member) is
chosen; the field must contain the new member name. See “R — Rename Member”
on page 119 for more information about this option.

Library Utility Options for Data Sets
The following sections describe the options shown on the left side of the Library
Utility panel shown in Figure 73 on page 108. These options are used to work with
data sets.

Blank — (Display Member List)
If you leave the Option field blank, you must specify a partitioned data set. ISPF
displays a member list when you press Enter. For more information, see the
sections on Using Member Selection Lists and Library and Data Set List Utility
Line Commands in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.
Notes:
1. The column headers on a member list display (with the exception of Rename)
are point-and-shoot sort fields.
2. If you enter a slash in the 1-character or 9-character command field, the
Member List Commands pop-up window shown in Figure 74 on page 110 is
displayed so that you can select the command you want to use.
3. The 1-character or 9-character line command field is a point-and-shoot field. If
you select the line command field beside a member name, the Member List
Commands pop-up window shown in Figure 74 on page 110 is displayed so
that you can select the command you want to use. In addition, you can enter
commands (for example, TSO) directly in the 9-character field.
4. You can chain the P, R, D, V, E, and B commands; that is, you can select
multiple members from a member list for various processing tasks. Use the
CANCEL command (from a View, Browse, or Edit session) to break the chain
and return to the member list.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

109

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────────────────
│ ISRCMLEP
Action for Member TEST
│
Row 00001 of 00001
│
│ anged
ID
/ │ Member Action
│ 08 13:32:15
GRAHAMP
│
1. Edit
8. Copy
│
│
2. View
9. Reset
│
│
3. Browse
10. Open Edit
│
│
4. Delete
11. Submit
│
│
5. Rename
12. TSO Cmd
│
│
6. Print
13. WS Cmd
│
│
7. Move
14. Select **None**
│
│
│
│ Prompt Action . .
(For prompt field)
│
│
│
│ Select a choice and press ENTER to continue
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│
│ F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
│
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 74. Member List Commands Pop-Up Window (ISRCMLEP)

C — Compress Data Set
If you select option C, you can specify any partitioned data set. The compress
function is not valid for a PDSE. The compress is accomplished by calling either of
the following:
v The IEBCOPY utility
v An optional compress request exit routine, which can be specified by your
installation.
Using this option can change an existing data set allocation to exclusive.
ISPF allocates the IEBCOPY SYSUT3 and SYSUT4 data sets as one primary
cylinder, one secondary cylinder. If this is not sufficient for your compress request,
these DDNAMES can be preallocated.

X — Print Index Listing
If you select option X, you must specify either a DASD-resident sequential or
partitioned data set. The index listing is recorded in the ISPF list data set. For a
partitioned data set, the index listing includes general information about the data
set followed by a member list. For a sequential data set, the index listing includes
general information only. See the appendix on Listing Formats in z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I for examples of the index listing format for source libraries and load
libraries.
Notes:
1. A volume serial is not allowed for multivolume data sets using option X.
2. If ISPF was entered in TEST mode, the listing also includes TTR data for each
member of the data set. This data is the track and record address, where the
members reside on the volume.

110

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

L — Print Entire Data Set
If you select option L, you must specify either a DASD-resident sequential or
partitioned data set. The allowable data set characteristics are the same as for
Browse, except that data sets with a logical record length greater than 300
characters are not printed. Also, the data should not contain any printer control
characters. Use the Hardcopy utility (option 3.6) to print data sets that contain
printer control characters. A source listing of the complete data set (including all
members of a partitioned data set), preceded by an index listing, is recorded in the
ISPF list data set.
Notes:
1. A volume serial is not allowed for multivolume data sets using option L.
2. The page-numbering format of the ISPF list data set is PAGE: XX of YY. The YY
value is calculated using the data set member’s current size statistic. When the
member’s current size is larger than the actual member size, the result is PAGE:
XX of YY, where YY is a page number greater than the last value of XX. When
the size statistic is smaller than the actual member size, the result is PAGE: XX
of YY, until the actual size number XX exceeds YY. Then the result is PAGE:
XX, until the end of the member is processed.

I — Data Set Information
If you select option I, the location, characteristics, and current space utilization of
the specified data set are displayed. The format ISPF uses to display data set
information when Data Facility Product (DFP) Version 3 Release 2 is not installed
or available, or when the Storage Management Subsystem is not active, is shown in
“U — Uncatalog Data Set” on page 129. See “Information for Managed Data Sets”
on page 113 to see how ISPF displays data set information when these products are
installed, available, and active.
For sequential data sets, options I and S display the same information. For
multivolume data sets, options I and S display current allocation and utilization
values that represent totals from all volumes used. You may not enter a volume
serial when you are requesting information on a multivolume data set.
Notes:
1. The space for data sets allocated in blocks is calculated as if all of the tracks,
including the last one, contain only full blocks of data. Any partial “short”
blocks are ignored.
2. The information shown for current space utilization is the actual data that the
data set contains, based on the number of allocation units (blocks, tracks, bytes,
megabytes, and so on) that have been written. For a data set allocated in units
other than tracks and cylinders, it does not include the unused portion of a
track that is only partially filled.
For example, if a data set allocated in bytes with block size of 600 has one
block written to a device with a track size of 1000, 600 bytes of data are written
and the remaining 400 bytes cannot be used by a different data set. A track is
the smallest possible unit of physical allocation to a data set on DASD. ISPF
reports 600 bytes used while other products (such as ISMF) report 1000 bytes
used. ISPF reports the space occupied by data in the data set. ISMF reports the
space used by this data set that is not available for use by another data set. The
difference is a relative indication of the effectiveness of the block size used
when the data set was created.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

111

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

Data Set Information
Data Set Name . . . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
General Data
Management class . . :
Storage class . . . :
Volume serial . . . :
Device type . . . . :
Data class . . . . . :
Organization . . . :
Record format . . . :
Record length . . . :
Block size . . . . :
1st extent cylinders:
Secondary cylinders :
Data set name type :

STANDARD
BASE
MVS8WF
3390
**None**
PO
FB
80
27920
1
1
PDS

Creation date . . . : 2002/07/08
Expiration date . . : ***None***
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

Current Allocation
Allocated cylinders : 1
Allocated extents . : 1
Maximum dir. blocks : 20
Current Utilization
Used cylinders . .
Used extents . . .
Used dir. blocks .
Number of members .

:
:
:
:

1
1
1
1

Referenced date . . : 2002/07/23

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 75. Data Set Information (ISRUAIP)

If the volume serial is followed by a plus (for example, HSM016+), the data set
spans multiple volumes. Press Enter to display a list of all allocated volumes that
have been used, as shown in Figure 76.

Figure 76. Volume Information for a Multivolume Data Set (ISRUAMVI)

The “Allocated units” and “Used units” fields can vary, depending on the value
that was specified in the “Space units” field when you allocated the data set. For
example, Figure 76 shows what the Data Set Information panel would look like if
the data set was allocated by specifying Cylinders in the “Space units” field.

112

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Library Utility (Option 3.1)
Information for Managed Data Sets: The Library Utility option I (Figure 77)
displays information for data sets that reside on Storage Management Subsystem
Volumes (also called managed data sets) when:
v Data Facility Product (DFP) Version 3 Release 2 or later is installed and
available.
v Storage Management Subsystem is active.
v Directory block information is available.

Figure 77. Data Set Information for Managed Data Sets (ISRUAISE)

If the volume serial is followed by a plus (for example, HSM016+), the data set
spans multiple volumes.
Note: SMS-managed multivolume data sets will not display a plus unless data has
been written past the first volume.
Press Enter to display a list of all allocated volumes as shown in Figure 78 on page
114.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

113

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

RefList

Utilities

Help
Data Set Information

Volume Information
D
More:
G

All allocated volumes:
More:

Allocation
ated tracks . :
ated extents . :

32
32

Utilization
tracks . . . . :
extents . . . :

31
31

HSM017 HSM018 HSM019 HSM020 HSM021

Command ===>
F1=Help
F7=Backward

F2=Split
F8=Forward

F3=Exit
F9=Swap

Secondary tracks . . : 17
Data set name type . : 1
Command ===>
F1=Help
F9=Swap

F2=Split
F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward

F8=Forward

Figure 78. Volume Information for a Managed Multivolume Data Set (ISRUAMVI)

The major difference between this information and the information that is
displayed for data sets on non-managed volumes is the addition of the following
classes:
v Management class
v Storage class
v Data class
If directory block information is not available, the Data Set Information panel
shows a value of 0 * for the “Maximum dir. blocks”, “Used dir. blocks”, and
“Number of members” fields. The asterisk beside the zero refers you to a note on
the panel, which states that the directory is unavailable.
If the data set is a PDSE, the “Data set name type” field is LIBRARY and the
“Maximum dir. blocks” field is NOLIMIT. Because the used blocks, used extents,
and used directory blocks are not applicable to a PDSE, the Data Set Information
panel replaces these values with “Used pages” and “% Utilized” (Figure 79 on
page 115). Other values that can appear in the “Data set name type” field are:
v HFS - MVS Hierarchical File System data set
v EXTENDED - DFP Striped data set
v LARGE - Large format sequential data set

Note: When a PDSE data set is created, it sets aside five pages. This may cause a
significant change to the “% Utilized” value for a small data set.

114

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

Figure 79. Data Set Information for PDSE Managed Data Sets (ISRUAISE)

S — Short Data Set Information
If you select option S, information about the selected data set is displayed. The
information displayed by option S is the same as that displayed by option S of the
Data Set utility (option 3.2), but it differs from option I in two respects.
Information for partitioned data sets, when displayed by option S, lacks the
number of maximum and used directory blocks, and the number of members. For
sequential data sets, options I and S display the same information. You can not
enter a volume serial when you are requesting information on multivolume data
sets.
Notes:
1. The space for data sets allocated in blocks is calculated as if all of the tracks,
including the last one, contain only full blocks of data. Any partial “short”
blocks are ignored.
2. The information shown for current space utilization is the actual data that the
data set contains, based on the number of allocation units (blocks, tracks, bytes,
megabytes, and so on) that have been written. For a data set allocated in units
other than tracks and cylinders, it does not include the unused portion of a
track that is only partially filled.
For example, if a data set allocated in bytes with block size of 600 has one
block written to a device with a track size of 1000, 600 bytes of data are written
and the remaining 400 bytes cannot be used by a different data set. A track is
the smallest possible unit of physical allocation to a data set on DASD. ISPF
reports 600 bytes used while other products (such as ISMF) report 1000 bytes
used. ISPF reports the space occupied by data in the data set. ISMF reports the
space used by this data set that is not available for use by another data set. The
difference is a relative indication of the effectiveness of the block size used
when the data set was created.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

115

Library Utility (Option 3.1)
Figure 80 shows a short format example of data set information for a partitioned
data set. This is the short format ISPF uses to display data set information when
Data Facility Product (DFP) Version 3 Release 2 or later is not installed or
available, or when the Storage Management Subsystem is not active. See “Short
Information for Managed Data Sets” to see how ISPF displays data set information
when these products are installed, available, and active.
Data Set Information
More:

Data Set Name . . . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
General Data
Management class . . :
Storage class . . . :
Volume serial . . . :
Device type . . . . :
Data class . . . . . :
Organization . . . :
Record format . . . :
Record length . . . :
Block size . . . . :
1st extent cylinders:
Secondary cylinders :
Data set name type :

STANDARD
BASE
MVS8WF
3390
**None**
PO
FB
80
27920
1
1
PDS

Creation date . . . : 2002/07/08
Expiration date . . : ***None***
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

Current Allocation
Allocated cylinders : 1
Allocated extents . : 1
Current Utilization
Used cylinders . . : 1
Used extents . . . : 1

Referenced date . . : 2002/07/31

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 80. Short Data Set Information (ISRUAIP)

The “Allocated units” and “Used units” fields can vary, depending on the value
that was specified in the “Space units” field when you allocated the data set. For
example, Figure 80 shows what the short format of the Data Set Information panel
would look like if the data set was allocated by specifying CYLS in the “Space
units” field.
Short Information for Managed Data Sets: The Library Utility option S displays
information (Figure 81 on page 117) for data sets that reside on Storage
Management Subsystem volumes (also called managed data sets) when:
v Data Facility Product (DFP) Version 3 Release 2 or above is installed and
available
v Storage Management Subsystem is active.

116

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

Figure 81. Data Set Information (Short) for Managed Data Sets (ISRUAISE)

If the data set is a PDSE, the “Data set name type” field is LIBRARY. Because the
used blocks and used extents are not applicable to a PDSE, the Data Set
Information panel replaces these values with “Used pages” and “% Utilized”
(Figure 82 on page 118). Other values that can appear in the “Data set name type”
field are:
v HFS - MVS Hierarchical File System data set
v EXTENDED - DFP Striped data set. When the Data Set Name Type is
EXTENDED, the SMS Compressible field indicates if the data set is compressible
or not (YES or NO).
v LARGE - Large format sequential data set

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

117

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

Figure 82. Data Set Information (Short) for a PDSE (ISRUAISE)

Library Utility Options for Members
The following sections describe the options shown on the right side of the Library
Utility panel shown in Figure 73 on page 108. These options are used to work with
members.
Notes:
1. You can chain these commands; that is, you can select multiple members from a
member list for various processing tasks. Use the CANCEL command (from a
View, Browse, or Edit session) to break the chain and return to the member list.
2. With an enhanced member list, you can enter other commands. See “M —
Display Member List” on page 166.

B — Browse Member
If you select option B, you must specify a partitioned data set and a member
name. The specified member is displayed in Browse mode. You can use all the
Browse commands. When you exit Browse, the Library Utility panel reappears.

C — Copy Member
If you select option C, the copy prompt panel appears where you must specify a
partitioned data set and member name for the new member. When you exit Copy,
the Library Utility panel reappears.

D — Delete Members
If you select option D, you must specify a partitioned data set and a member name
or pattern. Option D prevents you from deleting a PDS member that any user is
currently editing.
If you have selected Confirm Member Delete on the Library Utility panel
(ISRUDA1), then you are asked to confirm your intention to delete this member.
Note that Confirm Delete is forced on when deleting members by pattern.

118

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Library Utility (Option 3.1)

E — Edit Member
If you select option E, you must specify a partitioned data set and member name.
The specified member is displayed in Edit mode. You can use all EDIT commands.
When you exit Edit, the Library Utility panel reappears.

G — Reset Member
If you select option G, the reset prompt panel displays, where you enter the data
set and member name. When you exit, the Library Utility panel reappears.

M — Move Member
If you select option M, the move prompt panel displays, where you enter the data
set and member name. When you exit, the Library Utility panel reappears.

P — Print Member
If you select option P, you must specify a partitioned data set and a member name.
A source listing of the member is recorded in the ISPF list data set.
Note: If any members are to be printed, the data set characteristics must conform
to those for the L option.

R — Rename Member
If you select option R, you must specify a partitioned data set and member name.
You must also specify a new member name in the “New name” field. Option R
prevents you from renaming a member that is currently being edited by you or
another user.

T — TSO Command for Member
If you select option T, the TSO command prompt panel appears, where you can
enter the TSO command to be run for the member.

V — View Member
If you select option V, you must specify a partitioned data set and member name.
The specified member is displayed in View mode. You can use all EDIT
commands. When you exit View, the Library Utility panel reappears. For more
information, see chapter on the View (Option 1) in z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

W — WS Command for Member
If you select option W, the WS command prompt panel appears, where you can
enter the WS command to be run for the member.

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 83 on page 120) that
allows you to specify a data set and an action to be performed.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

119

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Data Set Utility
A
R
D
blank

Allocate new data set
Rename entire data set
Delete entire data set
Data set information

ISPF Library:
Project . .
Group . . .
Type . . . .

C
U
S
V

Catalog data set
Uncatalog data set
Short data set information
VSAM Utilities

Enter "/" to select option
/ Confirm Data Set Delete

Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged, required for option "C")
Data Set Password . .
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

(If password protected)

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 83. Data Set Utility Panel (ISRUDA2S)

Data Set Utility Panel Action Bar
The Data Set Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
RefList
For information about referral lists, see the chapter on Using Personal Data
Set Lists and Library Lists in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
Allocating a new partitioned or sequential Data Set
2
Renaming an entire Data Set
3
Deleting an entire Data Set
4
Displaying Data Set information
5
Cataloging a Data Set
6
Uncataloging a Data Set
7
VSAM Utilities
8
Appendices
9
Index

Data Set Utility Panel Fields
All the fields on the Data Set Utility panel are explained in the Libraries and Data
Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I. For option A you can specify any
DASD-resident sequential or partitioned data set. For the other options, you can
specify any DASD-resident data set that is not VSAM. You can get short
information on a VSAM data set.

120

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)

Data Set Utility Options
The following sections describe the options shown on the Data Set Utility panel.

A — Allocate New Data Set
Use option A to allocate a new data set with or without the Storage Management
Subsystem classes (management class, storage class, and data class). A data set that
is allocated on a volume that is managed by the Storage Management Subsystem
(SMS) is called a managed data set. A data set that is allocated on a volume that is
not managed by the SMS is called a non-managed data set.
To use option A you must do the following:
1. Enter one of the following:
v An ISPF library name in the Project, Group, and Type fields
v Another partitioned or sequential data set name in the Data Set Name field.
See the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for
information on how to enter the ISPF library name or the data set name.
2. If you entered an ISPF library name, the value in the Volume Serial field is
ignored. However, if you entered another data set name, you can specify the
volume on which to allocate the data set in the Volume Serial field. You should
not enter a volume serial if you want to do one of the following:
v Use the authorized default volume.
v Enter a generic unit address in the “Generic unit” field on the Allocate New
Data Set panel.
For more information about Volume Serials, see the Libraries and Data Sets
chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
3. If your ISPF libraries and data sets are password-protected, enter the password
in the Data Set Password field.
For more information about Data Set Passwords, see the Libraries and Data
Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Note: You cannot assign a password to a managed data set. Therefore, the Data
Set Password field is ignored when you allocate a managed data set.
4. Press Enter.
The Allocate New Data Set panel is displayed. This panel enables you to specify
data set allocation values. The fields displayed on this panel depend upon the
value of the ALLOWED_ALLOCATION_UNITS keyword in the ISPF configuration
table. When ALLOWED_ALLOCATION_UNITS is not ’A’ the panel shown in
Figure 84 on page 122 is displayed.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

121

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Allocate New Data Set
More:
+
Data Set Name . . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE2
Management class
Storage class .
Volume serial .
Data class . . .
Space units . .

.
.
.
.
.

Average record unit
Primary quantity .
Secondary quantity
Directory blocks .
Record format . . .
Record length . . .
Block size . . . .
Data set name type

|
|

.
.
.
.
.

STANDARD
BASE
MVS8WF
**NONE**

U
. 1
1
. 0
. FB
. 80
.
PDS

Expiration date . . .
Enter "/" to select option
Allocate Multiple Volumes
Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT

(Blank for default management class)
(Blank for default storage class)
(Blank for system default volume)
(Blank for default data class)
(BLKS, TRKS, CYLS, KB, MB, BYTES
or RECORDS)
(M, K, or U)
(In above units)
(In above units)
(Zero for sequential data set) *

(LIBRARY, PDS, LARGE, BASIC, *
EXTREQ, EXTPREF or blank)
(YY/MM/DD, YYYY/MM/DD
YY.DDD, YYYY.DDD in Julian form
DDDD for retention period in days
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

F6=CHANGE

Figure 84. Allocate New Data Set Panel (ISRUAAP2)

Otherwise, this panel is displayed: (Figure 85).
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Allocate New Data Set
More:
+
Data Set Name . . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE2
Management class
Storage class .
Volume serial .
Device type . .
Data class . . .
Space units . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

Average record unit
Primary quantity .
Secondary quantity
Directory blocks .
Record format . . .
Record length . . .
Block size . . . .
Data set name type

|
|

.
.
.
.
.
.

STANDARD
BASE
MVS8WF
CYLINDER

. 1
1
. 0
. FB
. 80
.
PDS

Expiration date . . .
Enter "/" to select option
Allocate Multiple Volumes
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

(Blank for default management class)
(Blank for default storage class)
(Blank for system default volume) **
(Generic unit or device address) **
(Blank for default data class)
(BLKS, TRKS, CYLS, KB, MB, BYTES
or RECORDS)
(M, K, or U)
(In above units)
(In above units)
(Zero for sequential data set) *

(LIBRARY, HFS, PDS, LARGE, BASIC, *
EXTREQ, EXTPREF or blank)
(YY/MM/DD, YYYY/MM/DD
YY.DDD, YYYY.DDD in Julian form
DDDD for retention period in days
F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 85. Allocate New Data Set —Managed Data Set Support Panel (ISRUAASE)

122

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
When you press Enter with this panel displayed, the new data set is allocated and
cataloged. Entering the END command returns you to the previous panel without
allocating the data set.
An optional installation exit, the data set allocation exit, can control all data set
creation, deletion, allocation, and deactivation done directly by ISPF. This does not
include allocations done by ISPF, the TSO ALLOCATE command, or other TSO
commands. Refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more information
about the data set allocation exit.
Your installation must use the Data Facility Product (DFP) or DFSMS/MVS® to
define the values that you enter in the “Management class”, “Storage class”, and
“Data class” fields. If you have no specific requirements, you can leave these fields
blank. However, be aware that your installation may provide default management,
storage, and data classes. These defaults would take effect if you leave any of the
class fields blank and may even override any classes that you specify.
Management class
Used to obtain data management-related information (migration, backup,
and retention criteria, such as expiration date) for the data set allocation.
If you have no specific management class requirements, you can leave this
field blank. However, be aware that your installation may provide a
default management class. This default may even override any
management class that you specify.
Storage class
Used to obtain the storage-related information (volume serial) for the data
set allocation. Any volume serial that you enter in the “ Volume serial”
field is ignored unless the storage class that you use includes the
Guaranteed Space=Yes attribute (useful if you are allocating multivolume
data sets).
Data class
Used to obtain the data-related information (space units, primary quantity,
secondary quantity, directory block, record format, record length, and data
set name type) for the allocation of the data set.
Default values are provided for the fields in Figure 84 on page 122, except for
expiration date, based on which of the following occurred most recently:
v What you last entered on this panel
v The last display data set information request (options 3.1, 3.2, or 3.4).
You can type over the displayed defaults if you want to change them. The
following is a list of the fields on this panel and their definitions:
Volume serial
This field is one that you probably will not need to use very often. It is not
required and is usually ignored by the Storage Management Subsystem.
You should not enter a volume serial if you want to do one of the
following:
v Use the authorized default volume.
v Enter a generic unit address in the Generic unit field.
v Use the volume specified by the storage class you are using.
When a storage class is used, your installation and the SMS assume joint
responsibility for determining the volume on which the data set is
allocated. The SMS enables the installation to select the volumes that are
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

123

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
eligible to contain the data set. It then chooses one of those volumes and
allocates the data set. The SMS’s volume choice is based on:
v storage requirements
v the amount of space a volume has available.
Note: ISPF does not support tape data sets.
Generic unit
The generic unit address for the direct access volume that is to contain the
data set, such as 3380 or 3390. This field overrides the Volume Serial field
on the Data Set Utility panel. Therefore, you should leave this field blank if
you want to do one of the following:
v Use the authorized default volume
v Enter a volume serial in the Volume serial field.
Notes:
1. Leave both the Volume serial and Generic unit fields blank to allow
ISPF to select an eligible volume. Eligibility is determined by the unit
information in your user entry in the TSO User Attribute Data Set
(UADS) or the TSO segment of RACF.
2. At some installations, you are limited to eligible volumes even when an
explicit volume serial is specified. At other installations you can specify
any mounted volume. This is an installation option.
3. To allocate a data set to a 3850 virtual volume, you must also have
MOUNT authority, gained by using the TSO ACCOUNT command or
by using the RACF PERMIT command for the TSO AUTH general
resource class.
4. If you are allocating an SMS data set, you can enter either an
installation defined group name or a generic device type in the Generic
unit field, but not a specific device number.
Space units
Any of the following:
Track

Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and
secondary quantity fields are expressed in tracks.

Cylinder

Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and
secondary quantity fields are expressed in cylinders.

Block

Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and
secondary quantity fields are expressed in blocks.

Megabyte

Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and
secondary quantity fields are expressed in megabytes.

Kilobyte

Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and
secondary quantity fields are expressed in kilobytes.

Byte

Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and
secondary quantity fields are expressed in bytes.

Records

Shows that the amounts entered in the primary and
secondary quantity fields are the average number of
records of the size specified by the block size field.

Note: “Space units” allows the shortest unique abbreviation for each
attribute; for example, T for TRKS, C for CYLS, K for KB, and M for
MB, BY for BYTE, R for RECORDS, and BL for BLKS.

124

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
Average record unit
Shows the unit used when allocating average record length. U specifies
single-record units (bytes). K specifies thousand-record units (kilobytes). M
specifies million-record units (megabytes). The default value is U.
Primary quantity
The primary allocation quantity in tracks, cylinders, blocks, megabytes,
kilobytes, bytes, or records, as shown in the “Space units” field. This
number can be zero for sequential data sets, but must be greater than zero
for PDSs. Also, if the primary quantity is zero, the secondary quantity
must be greater than zero.
Secondary quantity
The secondary allocation quantity in tracks, cylinders, blocks, megabytes,
kilobytes, bytes, or records, as shown in the “Space units” field. This
quantity is allocated when the primary quantity is insufficient.
Directory blocks
Enter one of the following:
v For partitioned data sets, you must specify the number of directory
blocks. Each 256-byte block accommodates the following number of
directory entries:
– Data sets with ISPF statistics: 6
– Data sets without ISPF statistics: 21
– Load module data sets: 4–7, depending on attributes
v For sequential data sets, set this field to zero.
Record format
Any valid combination of the following codes:
F
Fixed-length records.
V
Variable-length records.
U
Undefined format records.
B
Blocked records.
A
ASA printer control characters.
M
Machine code printer control characters.
S
Standard (for F) or spanned (for V); use only with sequential data
sets.
T
Track-overflow feature.
Notes:
1. You must enter either F, V, or U.
2. You can specify S and T, but ISPF does not otherwise support them.
Record length
The logical record length, in bytes, of the records to be stored in the data
set.
Block size
The block size, also called physical record length, of the blocks to be stored
in the data set. Use this field to specify how many bytes of data to put into
each block, based on the record length. For example, if the record length is
80 and the block size is 3120, 39 records can be placed in each block.
Note: The record length and block size are verified to be consistent with
the record format. If you need to use non-standard characteristics,
use the TSO ALLOCATE command.
Expiration date
Allows you to protect valuable data by specifying a date, in your national
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

125

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
language, when the data set may be deleted. If you try to delete an
unexpired data set, ISPF displays two panels: a Confirm Delete panel,
followed by a Confirm Purge panel. See “D — Delete Entire Data Set” on
page 130 for more information about deleting unexpired data sets.
An expiration date is not required, but if you enter one it should be in one
of the following formats:
YYYY/MM/DD
Date shown in year, month, and day, or your equivalent national
format. The maximum expiration date allowed is 2155/12/31.
YYYY.DDD
Date shown in Julian format, such as 2006.066 for March 7, 2006.
The maximum expiration date allowed is 2155.365.
You can specify a DDD value of up to 366 if the YYYY value
represents a leap year.
DDDD
The number of days, starting with the creation date, after which
the data set can be deleted. DDDD has a range of 0 to 9999.
PERM, NOLIMIT, NEVER, 9999
Specifying any of the above values causes ISPF to translate it to a
value of 1999.365. This is treated by ISPF as permanent retention.
Allocate Multiple Volumes
Allows you to allocate sequential data sets that span multiple volumes.
ISPF supports a maximum of 59 volumes. Place a slash in this field and
press enter to display a panel similar to the one shown in Figure 86.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
─ ┌──────────── Multivolume Allocation ─────────────┐ ────────────────────────
│ ISRUAMV
│
│
│
More: - +
│ Enter the number of volumes to allocate or
│ device address) **
D │ the names of one or more volumes and
│ lt data class)
│ press Enter to allocate or enter Cancel
│ S, KB, MB, BYTES
│ command to exit. If a number is entered,
│
│ any volume names will be ignored.
│
│
More:
+ │
│ Number of volumes to allocate:
│
│
│ tial data set) *
│ Volume names:
│
│ 1. MVS8WF 2.
3.
4.
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│ DS, or blank) *
│ F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
│ MM/DD
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ D in Julian form
Enter "/" to select option
DDDD for retention period in days
/ Allocate Multiple Volumes
or blank)
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 86. Multivolume Allocation Panel (ISRUAMV)

This panel allows you to specify up to 59 volumes. Note the following:
v Although the volume input fields are numbered consecutively, you may
enter volume names in any of the fields.

126

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
v The volume that you enter in the “Volume serial” field on the Allocate
New Data Set panel will be placed in the first field of the Multivolume
Allocation panel.
v If you enter only one volume, standard data set allocation is invoked.
v If you enter a number in the “Number of volumes to allocate” field, any
volume names left in the name fields are ignored, and might or might
not be the volumes the data set is allocated to.
v When displaying information about a multivolume data set, depending
on your system setup, all volumes might not be shown until they have
been accessed.

Allocation Errors
ISPF attempts to recognize inconsistent attributes for partitioned and sequential
data sets before allocating them. However, when conditions outside ISPF’s control
result in the allocation of such a data set, the Allocation Error panel (Figure 87) is
displayed. These conditions are caused by:
v A data class that specifies inconsistent attributes
v Attributes entered on the Allocate New Data Set panel that create inconsistency
by overriding other attributes specified by the data class.

----------------------------

Allocation Error

-------------------------------

Data Set Name: SYSTEM.LOAD
Specified data set has zero block size
The data set allocated contains inconsistent attributes as indicated by
the message displayed above. Prior to allocating a managed data set,
PDF cannot always determine if the attributes are inconsistent. The
data class used when allocating the data set may contain inconsistent
attributes, or the attributes you specified on the allocation panel may
conflict with those defined in the data class. This panel gives you the
opportunity to delete this data set. If you keep the data set, other
PDF functions, such as edit, move, copy, or promote, may not be able to
use the data set.
Instructions:
Press the Enter key to DELETE the data set.
Enter the END command to KEEP the data set.
Command ===> _____________________________________________________
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 87. Allocation Error Panel (ISRUADCS)

The term inconsistent attributes refers to incompatible values that have been
specified for one or more of the following: Space units; Primary or Secondary
quantity; Directory blocks; Record format; Record length; Block size.
For example, if you allocate a data set with an undefined record format
(RECFM=U) and a block size of zero (BLOCKSIZE=0), some ISPF functions (such
as Move and Copy) and services (such as LMMOVE, LMCOPY, and LMINIT)
cannot use the data set.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

127

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
However, when either the linkage editor or the IEBCOPY utility has been called,
these functions and services determine the best block size for the data set. Then,
when the data set has a block size greater than zero, the ISPF functions and
services listed above can be used.
The Allocation Error panel gives you the opportunity to delete such a data set
because other ISPF functions, such as View (option 1) and Edit (option 2), may not
be able to use it.
For information about allocation errors and how they affect data set promotion
when using SCLM, refer to z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager
Project Manager’s and Developer’s Guide.

C — Catalog Data Set
If you select option C, the specified data set is cataloged. For this option, you must
specify the volume serial on which the data set resides, regardless of whether the
data set is specified as project, library, and type, or as another data set name. The
data set must reside on the specified volume.
The preceding instructions for cataloging data sets do not apply to data sets that
reside on Storage Management Subsystem volumes. These data sets are
automatically cataloged when you allocate them. They cannot be cataloged by
using option C.

R — Rename Entire Data Set
If you select option R, a panel is displayed to allow you to enter the new data set
name.
Type the new data set name and press Enter to rename, or enter the END
command to cancel. Either action returns you to the previous panel.
If you specify a volume serial for a data set to be renamed, ISPF checks to see
whether the data set is cataloged on that volume. If it is, the Rename panel
prompts you to specify whether to recatalog the data set. The displayed default for
that field is YES. If you specify a volume serial and the data set is not cataloged, it
remains uncataloged after you rename it. If a volume serial is not specified, the
data set is recataloged to the new data set name and the old data set name is
uncataloged.
Notes:
1. ISPF does not rename VSAM data sets or password-indicated data sets.
2. A volume serial is not allowed for multivolume data sets using Rename.
Renaming GDG Data Sets: Generation Data Group (GDG) data sets can only be
renamed to something other than GDG names. Trying to rename GDG data sets to
a different generation or version number can cause deletion of your GDG data set
or group of GDG data sets.
Renaming Managed Data Sets: When you rename a data set that resides on a
Storage Management Subsystem volume, you cannot specify a volume serial in the
Volume Serial field. Both the cataloged entry and the VTOC entry are renamed.
Rename Processing with RACF: The normal order of processing when ISPF is
asked to rename a data set is as follows:
1. The new data set name is cataloged using SVC 26
2. The data set is renamed using SVC 30
3. The old data set name is uncataloged using SVC 26

128

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
There are three occasions, however, when ISPF will deviate from this order of
processing:
v If the data set is a System Managed (SMS) data set, the update of the catalog
(both cataloging the new name and uncataloging the old name) is handled by
the operating system when the SVC 30 is issued. In this case, ISPF does not
issue either of the SVC 26 requests.
v If the data set is an uncataloged data set, no catalog update will be done. The
data set is renamed using the SVC 30 only.
v If the data set is cataloged, but the user specified both the data set name and
volume, panel ISRUARP2 is displayed. The user has the option of specifying
whether the catalog processing should be done. If the user indicates (via a NO
in the “Reply to uncatalog the data set” field) that no catalog processing should
be done, only the SVC 30 is used to rename the data set. If the reply is YES, the
SVC 30 as well as both SVC 26 requests are issued.
If an error is encountered during a rename request, an attempt is made to return
the data set to its original name, and to reset the catalog entries to their original
status (remove the new name from the catalog and leave the old name in the
catalog).
This order of processing is intended to minimize the possibility that an
uncataloged data set will result if an error is encountered during the rename
process. Errors may be encountered due to certain combinations of RACF data set
profiles and user access to the groups under which those data set profiles fall.
When an error occurs, the user receives a message indicating the status of the data
set name, and of the catalog entries.
Refer to the z/OS Security Server RACF Security Administrator’s Guide or equivalent
documentation for your security package, to determine the authorization levels
required for each of these operations. The user will need authorization first to
catalog the new data set name, then to rename the data set, and then to uncatalog
the old data set name. This will require adequate authorization to any discrete or
generic data set profiles involved and to the catalogs involved. Be aware that a
discrete data set profile is renamed when the data set is renamed.
Renaming with Expiration Dates: If the data set has an expiration date in its
catalog entry, the expiration date is not propagated forward to the new catalog
entry. In this case, a confirmation panel is displayed.
As directed by the panel, press Enter if you want to confirm the rename request. If
you want the data set to have an expiration date under its new name, use the TSO
ALTER command or a similar function to update the new catalog entry.

U — Uncatalog Data Set
If you select option U, the specified data set name is uncataloged. There is no need
for the specified data set to be allocated or for the volume on which it resides to be
mounted.
If the catalog entry being removed contains an expiration date in the future, a
confirmation panel is displayed. Press Enter if you want to confirm the uncatalog
request, otherwise press END to cancel the request.
Note: Uncatalog is not allowed for multivolume data sets.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

129

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
You cannot use option U to uncatalog a data set that resides on a Storage
Management Subsystem volume. However, the system uncatalogs these data sets
when you delete them, which is done by using option D of either the Data Set
utility (option 3.2) or the Data Set List utility (option 3.4).

D — Delete Entire Data Set
If you select option D, a confirmation panel is displayed (Figure 88) so you can
make sure you did not select this option by mistake.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────
│
Confirm Delete
│
│
More:
+ │
│ Data Set Name . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
│
│ Volume . . . . : MVS8WF
│
│ Creation date . : 2002/07/08
│
b │
│
│ Enter "/" to select option
│
I │
Set data set delete confirmation off
│
│
│
│ Instructions:
│
│ Press ENTER to confirm delete.
│
│ (The data set will be deleted and uncataloged.)
│
O │
│
│ Press CANCEL or EXIT to cancel delete.
│
│
│ "C")
│ Command ===>
│
D │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===> D
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 88. Confirm Delete Panel (ISRUADC1)

If you specify a volume serial for the data set to be deleted, ISPF checks to see
whether the data set is cataloged on that volume. If so, the Confirm Delete panel
prompts you to specify whether to uncatalog the data set. The displayed default is
YES. If no volume serial is specified, and the data set does not have an expiration
date, the data set is deleted and uncataloged.
Notes:
1. ISPF does not delete password-protected data sets or data sets allocated with
an esoteric device type.
2. A volume serial is not allowed for multivolume data sets using Delete.
As directed on the panel, do one of the following:
v Press Enter to confirm the data set deletion.
v Enter the CANCEL or EXIT command to cancel. This action returns you to the
previous panel.
If the data set has an expiration date that has not expired, ISPF displays a Confirm
Purge panel (Figure 89 on page 131) after the Confirm Delete panel.

130

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
─ ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ─────
│
Confirm Delete
│
│
│
│ Data Set being deleted has an expiration date which has not expired │
│ Data Set Name . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
│
│ Volume . . . . : MVS8WF
│
b │ Creation date . : 2002/07/08
│
│ Expiration Date : 2002/10/01
│
I │
│
│ Enter "/" to select option
│
│
Purge Data Set
│
│
│
│ Instructions:
│
O │ Enter "/" to confirm the purge request.
│
│ (The data set will be deleted and uncataloged.)
│
│
│
│ Press CANCEL or EXIT to cancel the purge request.
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
D │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 89. Confirm Purge Panel (ISRUADC3)

Use a slash to select Purge Data Set if you want ISPF to purge the data set. The
statement that is enclosed in parentheses on the Confirm Purge panel shows
whether the data set to be purged will be uncataloged.
When you delete a data set, the volume name is compared to the volume name in
the configuration table. If the names match, the command specified in the
configuration table is used in place of the ISPF delete processing. This lets you
delete migrated data sets without first causing them to be recalled.
Delete Processing with RACF: If the data set is an SMS data set, it is deleted
using SVC 29. The update of the catalog entry is handled by the operating system.
If the data set is not an SMS data set and either it is not cataloged or the user
indicates on panel ISRUADC2 (panel ISRUADC2 is shown if the volume is
supplied) that it is not to be uncataloged, it is deleted using SVC 29.
If the data set is not an SMS data set and it is cataloged and/or the user indicates
on panel ISRUADC2 (panel ISRUADC2 is shown if the volume is supplied) that it
is to be uncataloged, the following process is followed.
1. The data set is deleted using SVC 29 (SCRATCH).
2. The data set is uncataloged using SVC 26.
This order of processing is intended to minimize the possibility that an
uncataloged data set will result if an error is encountered during the delete
process. Some combinations of RACF generic and discrete data set profiles and
user access to the groups under which those profiles fall can cause this process to
fail. If an error is encountered in this process the user is notified via a message of
the status of the data set and catalog entries.
Refer to the z/OS Security Server RACF Security Administrator’s Guide or equivalent
documentation for your security package, to determine the authorization levels
required for each of these operations. The user will need authorization first to
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

131

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
delete the data set and then to uncatalog the data set name. This will require
adequate authorization to any discrete or generic data set profiles involved and to
the catalogs involved. Be aware that a discrete data set profile is deleted when the
data set is deleted.

S — Data Set Information (Short)
If you select option S, information about the selected data set is displayed. The
information displayed by option S is the same information displayed by option S
on the Library Utility panel (option 3.1). See “S — Short Data Set Information” on
page 115 for more information and Figure 80 on page 116 for an example. To return
to the previous panel, press Enter or enter the END command.
The space for data sets allocated in blocks is calculated as if all of the tracks,
including the last one, contain only full blocks of data. Any partial “short” blocks
are ignored.
Notes:
1. The information shown for current space utilization is the actual data that the
data set contains, based on the number of allocation units (blocks, tracks, bytes,
megabytes, and so on) that have been written. For a data set allocated in units
other than tracks and cylinders, it does not include the unused portion of a
track that is only partially filled.
For example, if a data set allocated in bytes with block size of 600 has one
block written to a device with a track size of 1000, 600 bytes of data are written
and the remaining 400 bytes cannot be used by a different data set. A track is
the smallest possible unit of physical allocation to a data set on DASD. ISPF
reports 600 bytes used while other products (such as ISMF) report 1000 bytes
used. ISPF reports the space occupied by data in the data set. ISMF reports the
space used by this data set that is not available for use by another data set. The
difference is a relative indication of the effectiveness of the block size used
when the data set was created.
2. Space utilization values are not displayed for ISAM, VSAM, or BDAM data
sets.

|
|

See “Short Information for Managed Data Sets” on page 116 to learn more about
the data set information that is displayed for managed data sets.

Blank — (Data Set Information)
If you leave the Option field blank, information about the selected data set is
displayed. The information displayed is the same information displayed by option
I on the Library Utility panel (option 3.1). See “I — Data Set Information” on page
111 for more information and “U — Uncatalog Data Set” on page 129 for an
example. To return to the previous panel, press Enter or enter the END command.
Notes:
1. For multivolume data sets, options I and S display current allocation and
utilization values that represent totals from all volumes used.
2. You can not enter a volume serial when you are requesting information on a
multivolume data set.
3. The space for data sets allocated in blocks is calculated as if all of the tracks,
including the last one, contain only full blocks of data. Any partial “short”
blocks are ignored.
4. The information shown for current space utilization is the actual data that the
data set contains, based on the number of allocation units (blocks, tracks, bytes,

132

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)

|
|

megabytes, and so on) that have been written. For a data set allocated in units
other than tracks and cylinders, it does not include the unused portion of a
track that is only partially filled.
For example, if a data set allocated in bytes with block size of 600 has one
block written to a device with a track size of 1000, 600 bytes of data are written
and the remaining 400 bytes cannot be used by a different data set. A track is
the smallest possible unit of physical allocation to a data set on DASD. ISPF
reports 600 bytes used while other products (such as ISMF) report 1000 bytes
used. ISPF reports the space occupied by data in the data set. ISMF reports the
space used by this data set that is not available for use by another data set. The
difference is a relative indication of the effectiveness of the block size used
when the data set was created.
5. Space utilization values are not displayed for ISAM, VSAM, or BDAM data
sets.
See “Information for Managed Data Sets” on page 113 for information about the
data set information that is displayed for managed data sets.

V — VSAM Utilities
Use option V to create the IDCAMS commands to define, delete, and list catalog
information for VSAM data sets. Before the command is issued, you will be
allowed to edit it in an ISPF Edit session. The command will process in the
foreground.
Note: The VSAM utilities function builds a command that is syntactically correct;
the utility does not do any compatibility checking of the fields used to build
the command.
When you select option V, the panel shown in Figure 90 is displayed.
┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │ Menu Utilities Help
│ ─
│ ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
VSAM Utilities
│
│
More:
+ │
│ Process Request
Data Type
│
│
1. Define
1. Alias
│
b │
2. Delete
2. Alternate Index
│
│
3. Information (Listcat)
3. Cluster
│
I │
4. Generation Data Group
│
│
5. Non-VSAM
│
│
6. Page Space
│
│
7. Path
│
│
8. User Catalog
│
O │
9. Data
*
│
│
10. Index
*
│
│
11. NVR
**
│
│
12. Truename **
│
D │
13. VVR
**
│
│
* Listcat Only
│
│ Command ===>
│
O │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
│
F └────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 90. VSAM Utilities Panel (ISRUVSAM)

VSAM Utilities Panel Action Bar: The VSAM Utilities panel action bar choices
function as follows:

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

133

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
Menu For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Utilities
For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
VSAM Utilities
2
Profile Data Set
3
Get
4
Save
5
Change
6
Appendices
7
Index

VSAM Utilities Panel Fields: There are two fields on the VSAM Utilities panel:
Process Request
Required field. Indicates what is going to be done to the VSAM data set:
1

Define. Process an IDCAMS define request

Delete. Process an IDCAMS delete request against one or more
data sets.

Listcat. Process an IDCAMS list catalog request.

VSAM Data Type
Required field. Indicates what kind of data set is to be defined, deleted or
listed:

134

Alias. Define, delete, or list an alternate name for a non-VSAM
data set or a user catalog

Alternate Index. Specify that an alternate index is to be defined,
deleted, or listed or that an alternate index entry is to be
recataloged

Cluster. Specify that a cluster is to be defined, deleted, or listed or
that a cluster entry is to be recataloged

Generation Data Group. Specify that a generation data group
entry is to be defined, deleted, or listed

Non-Vsam. Specify that a non-VSAM, non-SMS-managed data set
is to be defined, deleted, or listed

Page Space. Specify that a page space is to be defined, deleted, or
listed

Path. Specify that a path is to be defined, deleted, or listed or that
a path entry is to be recataloged

User Catalog. Specify that a catalog is to be defined, deleted, or
listed

Data. List data level information (Listcat request only)

Index. List index level information (Listcat request only)

NVR. Delete an SMS-managed non-VSAM volume record entry
(Delete request only)

Truename. Delete the truename entry for a data or index

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
component of a cluster or alternate index or the name of an
alternate index (Delete request only)
13

VVR. Delete an unrelated VSAM volume record entry (Delete
request only).

Example Usage – Defining a Cluster: To define a cluster, on the VSAM Utilities
panel, type 1 in the Process Request field and 3 in the VSAM Data Type field. The
Define Cluster panel is displayed as shown in Figure 91.
Menu Function Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Define Cluster
Enter "/" to select option
/ Edit IDCAMS command
/ Browse errors only
Cluster Name . . . MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3
More:

Cluster Level Information:
Space Units . . . . . . .

Volumes . . . . . . .
Buffer Space . . . . .
Control Interval Size
Data Class . . . . . .
Management Class . . .
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

.
.
.
.
.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

.
.
.
.
.

Cylinders
Tracks
Records
Kilobytes
Megabytes
. . .

F3=Exit

Primary Quantity . . .
Secondary Quantity . .

. . .

F7=Backward F8=Forward

. . .

F9=Swap

Figure 91. Define Cluster Panel (ISRUVPC3)

Notes:
1. Select the Edit IDCAMS command option to edit the IDCAMS command that
this process generates before the command is issued. If you do not select this
option, the command will be issued when you press Enter.
2. Select the Browse errors only option to browse the output from IDCAMS only
when a nonzero return code is returned by IDCAMS.
Fill in the required fields or use a VSAM profile data set as described in “Building
a VSAM Profile Data Set” on page 136. When you press Enter, the screen shown in
Figure 92 on page 136 is displayed.
Note: If you try to use a profile that was defined for a different request type (for
example, Generation Data Group), you will receive a “Type mismatch” error.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

135

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)

Menu Utilities Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Columns 00001 00072
Instructions:
Enter EXECute command to issue request.
Enter CANcel, END, or RETURN command to cancel request.
****** ***************************** Top of Data ******************************
==MSG> -Warning- The UNDO command is not available until you change
==MSG>
your edit profile using the command RECOVERY ON.
000001 /* IDCAMS COMMAND */
000002 DEFINE CLUSTER (NAME(MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3) 000003
) 000004
DATA (NAME(MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3.DATA) 000005
) 000006
INDEX (NAME(MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3.INDEX) 000007
)
****** **************************** Bottom of Data ****************************
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F8=Down
F9=Swap

F3=Exit
F10=Left

F5=Rfind
F11=Right

Scroll ===> PAGE
F6=Rchange F7=Up
F12=Cancel

Figure 92. Editing the IDCAMS Command (ISRUVEDT)

When you are ready to process the command, type EXEC on the Command line and
press Enter. If the command processes with a nonzero return code, the panel
shown in Figure 93 is displayed.

VSAM Utilities ------------------------------------- LINE 00000000 COL 001 080
********************************* Top of Data *********************************
IDCAMS SYSTEM SERVICES
TIME: 14:49:0
/* IDCAMS COMMAND */
DEFINE CLUSTER (NAME(USERID.PRIVATE.PANELS) CYLINDERS(4 1) VOLUMES(111111 ) ) DATA (NAME(USERID.PRIVATE.PANELS.DATA) ) INDEX (NAME(USERID.PRIVATE.PANELS.INDEX) )
IDC3013I DUPLICATE DATA SET NAME
IDC3009I ** VSAM CATALOG RETURN CODE IS 8 - REASON CODE IS IGG0CLEH-38
IDC3003I FUNCTION TERMINATED. CONDITION CODE IS 12
IDC0002I IDCAMS
***************

IDCAMS has returned a non-zero return code.

12
***************

COMMAND ===> ________________________________________________ SCROLL ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 93. Browsing IDCAMS Errors (ISRUVBRO)

Press Exit (F3) to return to the panel shown in Figure 92, make the necessary
changes, and resubmit the command.
Building a VSAM Profile Data Set: You can build a VSAM profile data set, each
member of which can be used to store input fields on a VSAM input panel for

136

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
later retrieval to the same panel. If you try to use a profile that was defined for a
different request type (for example, Generation Data Group), you will receive a
“Type mismatch” error.
When you have filled in a VSAM input panel, select the Save to Profile choice
from the Functions pull-down on the action bar. ISPF displays the Profile Member
Name panel.
Type in a member name for the profile data set member. When you press Enter,
the data set is created with the attributes RECFM=variable blocked, LRECL=203,
Type=PDS.
Using a VSAM Profile Data Set: When you have displayed a VSAM input panel,
select the Get from Profile choice from the Functions pull-down on the input panel
action bar to display the panel shown in Figure 94.
Menu Functions Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
GET
USERID.VSAM.PROFILE
Row 00001 of 00001
Name
Prompt
Size
Created
Changed
ID
. PMNTEST
78 2002/08/05 2002/08/05 11:56:23
USERID
**End**

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 94. Using a VSAM Profile Data Set (ISRVMLGT)

When you select a profile and press Enter, the fields on the entry panel will fill
with the values stored in the profile data set member.
Changing the VSAM Profile Data Set: To change the name of the active VSAM
profile data set, select the Change Profile Data Set choice from the Functions
pull-down on an input panel action bar to display the panel shown in Figure 95 on
page 138.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

137

Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)

Menu Function Utilities Help
─ ┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ─
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Profile Data Set
│
│
│
│ Profile Data Set . . ’USERID.VSAM.PROFILE’
│
│
│
│
│ +
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
│ F12=Cancel
│
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
3. Records
4. Kilobytes
.
.
.
Figure 95. Panel for Changing the Name of the VSAM Profile Data Set (ISRUVGET)

You can type the name of a different profile data set. When you press Enter, the
data set is created if it does not exist, and this data set becomes the active profile
data set.

Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)
When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 96) that allows you to
specify the “From” data set (and member if it is partitioned) and an option to be
performed. The Move/Copy Utility prevents you from moving or copying a PDS
member that you or another user is currently editing.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Move/Copy Utility
C Copy data set or member(s)
M Move data set or member(s)

CP Copy and print
MP Move and print

Specify "From" Data Set below, then press Enter key
From ISPF Library:
Project . . . ________
(--- Options C and CP only
---)
Group . . . . ________ . . . ________ . . . ________ . . . ________
Type . . . . ________
Member . . . ________
(Blank or pattern for member list,
"*" for all members)
From Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . . . _______________________________________________________
Volume Serial . . . ________ (If not cataloged)
Data Set Password . .
(If password protected)
Option ===> __________________________________________________________________
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 96. Move/Copy Utility Panel (ISRUMC1)

Move/Copy Utility Panel Action Bar
The Move/Copy Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:

138

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

RefList

For information about referral lists, see the chapter on Using
Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
Function of the Move/Copy Utility
3
How to fill in the Move/Copy panel
4
Move/Copy member selection list
5
Allowable Data Set characteristics
6
Move/Copy rules
9
Appendices
10
Index

Move/Copy Utility Panel Fields
All the fields on the Move/Copy Utility panel are explained in the Libraries and
Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I. On this panel, you specify
the data set that you want to copy, move, lock, or promote. This is called the
“From” data set.
If you request a member list or specify an asterisk (*) in the Member field on the
“From” panel, ISPF does not display a Member field on the “To” panel. See the
Member Selection List Commands section of the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for information about primary and line commands
that are available for the Move/Copy utility member list display.
You can copy or move load modules stored in partitioned data sets with undefined
record formats, but you cannot print them.
The deletion of any member because of a move is recorded in your ISPF log data
set, if allocated.
When you complete the panel and press Enter, ISPF displays another panel that is
determined by the option you selected. This panel allows you to specify the “To”
or “Target” data set or controlled library. Both the “From” and “To” or “Target”
data sets must already exist. If the ″Target″ data set does not exist the user is
prompted to see if the data set should be allocated. Choices are to allocate the
″Target″ data set using the characteristics of the ″From″ data set as a model, or to
allocate the new data set by specifying the characteristics for it. This function can
be suppressed through the ISPF Configuration table. If it is suppressed, an allocate
request for a nonexistent data set fails.

Move/Copy Utility Options
The following sections describe the options shown on the Move/Copy Utility
panel.

C and CP — Copying Data Sets
When you use the C and CP options, ISPF supports library concatenation. This
allows you to specify up to four input libraries as the “From” data set. The
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

139

Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)
libraries are searched from left to right as they are entered on the panel. The
member to be copied, which is either specified in the Member field or selected
from a member list, is copied from the first library in which it is found.
If you select C or CP, the panel shown in Figure 97 is displayed. This panel allows
you to specify the “To” data set—the library or data set name that you want the
copied data to be stored under.
Note: The Move/Copy utility does not support the following:
v Supplying a volume serial when attempting to copy a multivolume data
set
v Copying unmovable data sets (data set organization POU or PSU).
C — Copy Data Set or Member(s): Use option C to copy a data set. You can
specify either a DASD-resident sequential or partitioned data set for both the
“From” or “To” data sets. The “From” data set is not deleted.
CP — Copy and Print: Use this option as you would use option C, except that
source listings are recorded in the ISPF list data set, as follows:
v If the “To” data set is partitioned, a listing of each new or replaced member is
recorded.
v If the “To” data set is sequential, a listing of its complete contents is recorded.

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
COPY
From MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
More:
+
Specify "To" Data Set Below
To ISPF Library:
Project . . MYPROJ
Group . . . DEV
Type . . . . SOURCE

Options:
Enter "/" to select option
_ Replace like-named members
/ Process member aliases

To Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . . . _______________________________________________________
Volume Serial . . . ______
(If not cataloged)
Data Set Password . .

(If password protected)

To Data Set Options:
Sequential Disposition
Pack Option
SCLM Setting
_ 1. Mod
3 1. Yes
3 1. SCLM
2. Old
2. No
2. Non-SCLM
Command ===> ________________________________________________________________
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 97. Move/Copy Utility - “To” Panel for Copying (ISRUMC2B)

All the fields on the Move/Copy Utility “To” panels for copying data sets are
explained in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol
I, except the following general Options and To Data Set Options:
Replace like-named PDS members
Select this option to allow replacement of a member in the “To” data set
with a like-named member in the “From” data set.

140

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)
Process member aliases
Select this option to allow the primary member and all alias members to be
copied together.
Sequential Disposition
If the “To” data set is sequential, enter:
1

To add the “From” data set to the end of the “To” data set (Mod).

To replace the “To” data set’s entire contents with the contents of
the “From” data set (Old).

If the “From” data set consists of several members of an ISPF library or a
partitioned data set to be moved or copied to a sequential data set, the
members are written to the “To” data set one after another. The “To” data
set disposition (Old or Mod) controls only the beginning location of the
“To” data set after the copy or move is completed.
Pack Option
To indicate how the data is to be stored in the “To” data set, enter:
1

If you want the data in the “To” data set to be packed.

If you do not want the data in the “To” data set to be packed.

If you want the data to be stored in the same format in the “To”
data set as it is in the “From” data set.
If you are copying data to a sequential data set with disposition of
MOD, you cannot mix packed and unpacked data, nor can you
copy multiple packed members.

The technique used to pack data is an internal algorithm used only by
ISPF. If the data is packed, attempts to access or process the data outside
ISPF can cause unwanted results. Refer to the description of the PACK
primary command in z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros for more information.
SCLM Setting
The SCLM setting is a bit that ISPF uses to determine what type of edit the
file last had performed upon it.
1 SCLM

This bit is ON to specify that the last edit of this file was
under SCLM control.

2 Non-SCLM

This bit is ON to specify that the last edit of this file was
under control of something other than SCLM.

3 As-is

This bit is ON to specify that this operation leaves the
current setting unchanged.

M and MP — Moving Data Sets
When you use the M and MP options, ISPF does not provide library concatenation
support. You can specify up to four input libraries as the “From” data set.
However, only the first library in the sequence is searched. Therefore, the member
to be moved, which is either specified in the Member field or selected from a
member list, is moved only if it is found in the first library. However, the other
three library names remain on the panel and can be used with the C and CP
options.
If you select M or MP, the panel shown in Figure 98 on page 142 is displayed. This
panel allows you to specify the “To” data set—the library or data set name that
you want the moved data stored under.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

141

Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)
Note: The Move/Copy utility does not support the following:
v Supplying a volume serial when attempting to copy a multivolume data
set
v Copying unmovable data sets (data set organization POU or PSU).
M — Move Data Set or Member(s): Use option M to move a data set. You can
specify either a DASD-resident sequential or partitioned data set for both the
“From” or “To” data sets.
Option M causes data sets to be deleted after they have been successfully moved
to the “To” data set, as follows:
v If the “From” data set is partitioned, the selected members are deleted from it.
v If the “From” data set is sequential, the complete “From” data set is deleted.
MP — Move and Print: Same as option M, except source listings are recorded in
the ISPF list data set, as follows:
v If the “To” data set is partitioned, a listing of each new or replaced member is
recorded.
v If the “To” data set is sequential, a listing of its complete contents is recorded.

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
MOVE
From MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
More:
+
Specify "To" Data Set Below
To ISPF Library:
Project . . MYPROJ
Group . . . DEV
Type . . . . SOURCE

Options:
Enter "/" to select option
_ Replace like-named members
/ Process member aliases

To Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . . . ______________________________________________________
Volume Serial . . . ______
(If not cataloged)
Data Set Password . .

(If password protected)

To Data Set Options:
Sequential Disposition
Pack Option
SCLM Setting
1 1. Mod
3 1. Yes
3 1. SCLM
2. Old
2. No
2. Non-SCLM
Command ===> ________________________________________________________________
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 98. Move/Copy Utility - “To” Panel for Moving (ISRUMC2B)

All the fields on the Move/Copy Utility “To” panels for moving data sets are
explained in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol
I, except the following general Options and To Data Set Options:
v Replace like-named PDS members.
v Process member aliases
v Sequential Disposition
v Pack Option
v SCLM Settings
See “C and CP — Copying Data Sets” on page 139 for descriptions of these fields.

142

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)

Using the Move/Copy Utility with Load Modules
For a move or copy of load modules, the following rules apply:
v Both data sets must be partitioned and must have an undefined record format
(RECFM=U).
v Load modules that were created for planned overlay cannot be moved or
copied.
v The print option, if specified, is ignored.
v If the “To” library is LLA-managed, it must be in NOFREEZE mode.
v For Move or Copy, reblocking can be done for load modules only, and is done
by using the IEBCOPY COPYMOD function. Whether the load module is
reblocked depends on the block sizes for the “To” and “From” data sets, as well
as the value of the USE_IEBCOPY_COPY_OR_COPYMOD_OPTION and
WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY keyword settings in the ISPF Configuration table
(see z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more information).
– If the WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY setting is 0, IEBCOPY is only used:
- When copying from a data set with a larger block size to a data set with a
smaller block size.
- When a PDSE has been specified in the ″From″ data set concatenation or as
the ″To″ data set.
– If the WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY setting is 1, IEBCOPY is always used to
copy load modules.
– If the WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY setting is 2, IEBCOPY is only used when a
PDSE has been specified in the ″From″ data set concatenation or as the ″To″
data set.
– If the WHEN_TO_USE_IEBCOPY setting (as described above) indicates that
IEBCOPY should be used, the following rules apply when determining
whether to reblock or not:
- When the USE_IEBCOPY_COPY_OR_COPYMOD_OPTION setting is 1:
v If the “To” and “From” block sizes are the same, no reblocking occurs.
ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPY.
v If the “To” block size is larger than the “From” block size, no reblocking
occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPY.
v If the “To” block size is smaller than the “From” block size, reblocking
occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPYMOD.
- When the USE_IEBCOPY_COPY_OR_COPYMOD_OPTION setting is 2:
v If the “To” and “From” block sizes are the same, no reblocking occurs.
ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPY.
v If the “To” block size is larger than the “From” block size, reblocking
occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPYMOD.
v If the “To” block size is smaller than the “From” block size, reblocking
occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPYMOD.
– When the USE_IEBCOPY_COPY_OR_COPYMOD_OPTION setting is 3:
- Reblocking occurs. ISPF uses IEBCOPY COPYMOD.
v If IEBCOPY is used to process the copy, ISPF allocates the following:
zprefix.zuser.SPFnnn.IEBCOPY
SYSIN
SYSUT3 and SYSUT4

IEBCOPY SYSPRINT data set
IEBCOPY SYSIN data set
IEBCOPY work data sets

The SYSPRINT data set is deleted when the copy ends successfully. If errors are
encountered, it is kept to help you diagnose errors. SYSIN, SYSUT3, and SYSUT4
are temporary data sets that use VIO if available, and are freed upon completion
of the copy. All allocations use the value of ISPF Configuration table keyword
PDF_DEFAULT_UNIT as the unit. The sizes for the SYSUT3 and SYSUT4 data
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

143

Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)
sets are calculated dynamically, based on the number of members to be copied.
If this is not sufficient for your move/copy request, these DDNAMES can be
preallocated. If they are preallocated, ISPF does not free them when the copy is
finished.

Moving or Copying Alias Entries
Alias entries can be moved or copied from one partitioned data set to another
under the following conditions:
v If the ″To″ library is LLA-managed, it must be in NOFREEZE mode
v If the “Process member aliases” option has been selected (ALIAS mode), the
following rules apply:
– Either the Primary member or any alias member may be selected to copy the
primary member and all of its aliases. This will occur even if a single member
is specified or some of the members are not displayed in the current member
selection list.
– Alias members are copied for both load and non-load data sets, as well as for
PDS and PDSE data sets.
– Copying to the same data set is not supported when aliases are automatically
selected, as this would result in the from and to member name being the
same.
v If ISPF is not using IEBCOPY and the “Process member aliases” option has not
been selected (NOALIAS mode):
– After the move or copy is successfully completed for the main member or
members, then the alias entry or entries can be copied.
– From a member list:
- When the main member or members are selected first, are not renamed,
and are successfully moved or copied, then the alias entry or entries can be
copied if they are selected without leaving the member list.
- If the target data set is a PDSE, alias entries cannot be copied.
v If IEBCOPY is being used and NOALIAS is in effect:
– The method described above for copying when not using IEBCOPY will also
work when using IEBCOPY. In addition, if all main members and aliases are
selected at the same time they are processed by the same invocation of
IEBCOPY and are copied correctly.
– If the target data set is a PDSE, alias entries must be selected and processed
together with the main member.
In all other cases for move and copy where NOALIAS is in effect, you can select
alias names, but they are not preserved as aliases in the “To” data set. That is, the
members to which they refer are moved or copied, and the alias entries are stored
in the “To” data set with the alias flags turned off.

Member List Processing When Using IEBCOPY
When copying load modules using the IEBCOPY interface, all selected members
are processed as a group. This means that the processing does not stop on the first
failure but will attempt to process all selected members before the member list is
redisplayed. The Prompt field will be updated to indicate the result for each
individual member.
No error message is displayed if two or more members are not processed
successfully because they may have failed for different reasons. Reselecting a

144

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)
member and processing it individually will display a specific error message if the
processing for that member fails again. The following values can appear in the
Prompt field:
*COPIED

Member was copied or copied/locked successfully

*MOVED

Member was moved successfully

*REPL

Member was replaced in the output library (Moved or Copied)

*NO DATA

Member was not found in the input library or BLDL error

*INUSE-I

ENQ failed on input member

*INUSE-O

ENQ failed on output member

*NO-COPY

Member was not copied successfully

*MIXED

You are attempting to mix load and non-load data

*NO-DEL

The delete step failed on a Move request

*NO-REPL

Member exists in the output library and replace not requested

*NO-LOCK

LMF lock failed on Copy/Lock request

*ALIAS

Member is a PDSE Program Object alias and cannot be copied
individually. It will be copied when the main member is copied.

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
When you select this option, the Data Set List Utility panel (Figure 99) is displayed.
You can either display or print lists of ISPF libraries, data sets, or volume table of
contents (VTOC) information.
Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Data Set List Utility
More:
blank Display data set list
P Print data set list
V Display VTOC information
PV Print VTOC information
Enter one or both of the parameters below:
Dsname Level . . .
____________________________________________________
Volume serial . .
______
Data set list options
Initial View . . . 1 1.
2.
3.
4.

Volume
Space
Attrib
Total

Enter "/" to select option
/ Confirm Data Set Delete
/ Confirm Member Delete
/ Include Additional Qualifiers
/ Display Catalog Name

When the data set list is displayed, enter either:
"/" on the data set list command field for the command prompt pop-up,
an ISPF line command, the name of a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec, or
Option ===>__________________________________________________________________
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 99. Data Set List Utility Panel (ISRUDLP)

Data Set List Utility Panel Action Bar
The Data Set List Utility Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

145

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

RefList

For information about referral lists, see the chapter on Using
Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.
Note: When you use a referral list from within the Data Set List
Utility, the following functions are performed before the
referral list is processed:
v The quotes are removed from the data set name.
v The value in ZPREFIX is added preceding the non-quoted
data set name if the first qualifier is not ZPREFIX.
v The member name is removed.

RefMode

For information about referral list modes, see the Personal List
Modes section in the Using Personal Data Set Lists and Library
Lists chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
Displaying a Data Set list
3
Printing a Data Set list
4
Display/Print VTOC information
5
Appendices
6
Index

Data Set List Utility Panel Fields
The fields on this panel are:

Dsname Level
This field is used to specify the level or levels of any data set that you want ISPF
to list or print for you. An optional installation exit, called the data set list
(DSLIST) exit, can control whether a data set name should appear in the list. Refer
to z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more information about this exit.
Note: ISPF does not support tape data sets.
When you specify the Dsname Level, you are defining the level qualifiers for the
data set names to be included in the list. Therefore, in Figure 99 on page 145, the
value USERID represents the first level of a data set name. For example, an ISPF
library has a three-level name: project, group, and type.
ISPF retains the information you put in this field and displays it the next time you
use this panel.
Except for the first level, you can specify the level qualifiers fully, partially, or use
defaults. Do not enclose the value in the Dsname Level field in quotes.
Asterisks and percent signs may be used to filter the list of data sets that is
displayed. For ICF catalog lists and volume lists, asterisks and percent signs may

146

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
be used in the high-level qualifier. Asterisks may be used anywhere in a qualifier,
not just in the first and last positions. However, one qualifier must be at least
partially qualified.
A single asterisk by itself indicates that at least one qualifier is needed to occupy
that position. A single asterisk within a qualifier indicates that zero or more
characters can occupy that position. A double asterisk by itself indicates that zero
or more qualifiers can occupy that position. A double asterisk is invalid within a
qualifier.
In this example, all data set names with SYS1 as the first qualifier and at least one
other qualifier will be listed.
SYS1.*

In this example, all data set names with SYS1 as the first qualifier will be listed.
SYS1 or SYS1.**

In this example, all data set names that have a qualifier of CLIST and are in
catalogs that you have authority to will be listed. A VTOC list will contain all data
set names that have a qualifier of CLIST.
**.CLIST

Notes:
1. If you enter a high-level qualifier of ’*’ or ’**’, ISPF displays a pop-up window
to warn you that the search will be for all catalogs on the system and will take
time. If there are many catalogs, this search could take a considerable amount
of time. You can press Enter to continue the search, or you can enter Cancel or
End from the pop-up window to cancel the search. Be aware that if you have
mount authority, a catalog search with ’*’ or ’**’ as the high-level qualifier can
require that volumes be mounted for the catalogs to be searched.
2. The ISPF Configuration table contains a selectable option, named
DISALLOW_WILDCARDS_IN_HLQ, to disallow the use of the ’*’ or ’%’ in the
high-level qualifier.
A single percent sign indicates that any one single alphanumeric or national
character can occupy that position. One to eight percent signs can be specified in
each qualifier. The following example is valid for Dsname Level:
AAA%*.B*%%%B.C

In this example, the list will contain all data sets that start with AAA and one or
more other characters, have a second qualifier that starts and ends with B and has
at least three other characters between the B’s, and have a third qualifier of ’C’.
The list will contain entries from catalogs that you have authority to. A VTOC list
will contain entries that match the above characteristics.
In the following example, the list will contain all data sets that start with SYS and
one other character, such as SYS1 or SYS2.
SYS%

If you enter a SYS% alias for a SYS1 data set as the Dsname Level (for example,
SYSP as a single qualifier), you see SYSP as an ALIAS because this single qualifier
is an alias for SYS1. The data set names pointed to by a SYS% alias can be
displayed in a data set list by entering any of the following:
v a Dsname Level of SYS1 and a volume
v a Dsname Level of SYS%
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

147

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
v a Dsname Level of the fully qualified data set name (such as SYSP.PARMLIB)
PRO**CT is not valid as a data set name level because a double asterisk (**) is not
valid in the middle of a qualifier.
Alias names that match the specified Dsname Level will be displayed as the alias
name itself. The volume field for all alias names will contain the characters
’*ALIAS’ to indicate this. Real names that match the Dsname Level will also be
displayed.
If you enter ISPFTEST as a Dsname Level and you have real data set names that
start with ISPFTEST and aliases for those real names that start with ISPFTEST, you
would see a list of this format:
ISPFTEST.BASE.CLIST
ISPFTEST.BASE.CLIST.ALIAS
ISPFTEST.BASE.SOURCE
ISPFTEST.BASE.SOURCE.ALIAS

TSOPK1
*ALIAS
TSOPK1
*ALIAS

A VSAM cluster entry is flagged in the volume field as ’*VSAM*’. A VSAM path
entry is flagged in the volume field as ’*PATH*’. A VSAM alternate index entry is
flagged in the volume field as ’*AIX*’.
Notes:
1. A catalog search may result in the DSLIST containing duplicate names. This can
occur when the definition of usercatalog aliases results in multiple catalogs
being searched when the data set list is built. Line commands against duplicate
data sets in the DSLIST are supported. Selecting the ″Display Catalog Name″
option will display the name of the catalog associated with each data set on the
Total view. This can identify where duplicate data set names where found. The
existence of duplicates may be inconsistent when changing the DSLEVEL
qualifiers. For example, SYS1.PARM.* may have different results than
SYS1.PAR*. Duplicate entries may or may not display in a consistent manner,
however the DSLIST will always be complete, with no omissions.
2. If a VSAM cluster matches the Dsname Level, all parts of the cluster are listed
even if the data and index portions do not match the Dsname Level.
When a multicluster (key-range) data portion of a VSAM cluster is displayed
on a catalog list, no information is shown except for the volume and device.
The information comes from the VTOC and the catalog name does not match
the VTOC name. When using a VTOC list the information is displayed.

Volume Serial
Use this field to specify the volume serial whose VTOC is to be used by ISPF to
display or print a list of data set names or VTOC information. ISPF retains the
information you put in this field and displays it the next time you use this panel.
If you want to display a list of only the data sets that reside on a particular
volume, leave the Dsname Level field blank and enter the volume serial in the
Volume field.
You can enter a single volume name or a generic volume name to list data sets
from more than one volume. The volume name can be partially specified using
asterisks as global volume name characters and percent signs as placeholders in
the volume name. A single asterisk within a volume name indicates that zero or
more characters can occupy that position. A single percent sign indicates that any
one alphanumeric or national character can occupy that position. Examples follow.
*

148

Lists data set names matching the Dsname Level from all volumes

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
PRM* Lists names from all volumes beginning with ’PRM’
M%C*
Lists names from volumes beginning with ’M’, followed by any single
character, a ’C’, and any three other characters
Notes:
1. Specifying a single asterisk as a volume name will require more time to display
of print the VTOC list.
2. A generic volume name can not be used to display VTOC information.

Initial View
Use this field to tell ISPF which view of the data set list you would like to see.
ISPF retains the information you put in this field and displays it the next time you
use this panel.
All the scroll commands are available from these displays and function normally,
except for the LEFT and RIGHT commands. These commands switch from one
view to another, because the panels used to show the different views are
connected, as if they formed a ring. Each time you enter the RIGHT command,
another view is displayed in the sequence shown in Figure 100, starting from the
current view. Each time you enter the LEFT command, another view is displayed
in reverse sequence.

Figure 100. Sequence of Data Set List Display Views

If you enter the RIGHT command with the Total view in the sequence displayed,
ISPF displays the Volume view. If you enter the LEFT command with the Volume
view displayed, ISPF displays the Total view. The available views are:
1. Volume

The Volume view shows a data set list that contains data set names
and the volumes on which they reside. Figure 102 on page 152
shows a typical data set list display using the Volume view.

2. Space

The Space view shows a data set list that contains data set names,
tracks, percentages used, extents, and devices. Figure 103 on page
154 shows a typical data set list display using the Space view.

3. Attrib

The Attributes view shows a data set list that contains data set
names, data set organizations, record formats, logical record
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

149

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
lengths, and block sizes. Figure 104 on page 154 shows a typical
data set list display using the Attributes view.
Note: For each of the above, the list is sorted by data set name.
See the list under Figure 105 on page 155 for descriptions of
the fields shown on this panel.
4. Total

The Total view shows a data set list that contains all the
information displayed by the Volume, Space, and Attributes views,
plus the created, expired, and referred dates. The list is sorted by
data set name and has two lines per data set. Figure 105 on page
155 shows a typical data set list display using the Total view. The
catalog name can also be displayed if the Display Catalog Name
option is selected and no value is entered into the Volume Serial
field. If the ″Display Catalog Name″ option is selected, three lines
per data set are displayed. Figure 106 on page 155 shows a typical
data set list display using the Total view with the Catalog name.
See the list under the figure for descriptions of the fields shown on
this panel.

Confirm Data Set Delete
This field controls whether the Confirm Delete panel appears when
you are using the D (delete data set) line command from the
displayed data set list or the TSO DELETE command. Use a slash
to select this option.
If you select this option, ISPF displays the Confirm Delete panel
(Figure 88 on page 130), giving you an opportunity to change your
mind and keep the data set. If you try to delete an unexpired data
set, the Confirm Purge panel (Figure 89 on page 131) is displayed
following the Confirm Delete panel. Follow the directions on the
panel to either confirm or cancel the data set purge.
Attention:
If you deselect the option and the data set is deleted, it cannot be
retrieved.
See “D — Delete Data Set” on page 168 for more information
about the D line command.
Confirm Member Delete
This field controls whether the Confirm Member Delete panel
appears when you are using the D (delete) command for a member
in displayed data set list. Use a slash to select this option.
If you select this option, ISPF displays the Confirm Member Delete
panel (Figure 101 on page 151), giving you an opportunity to
change your mind and keep the member.

150

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
─ ┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ─────────────────
L │
ISPF Utilities Confirm Member Delete
│ ow 00001 of 00001
│
│
ID
D │ Data Set Name:
│ :32:15
GRAHAMP
│ MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
│
│
│
│ Member to be Deleted:
│
│ TEST
│
│
│
│
Set member delete confirmation off
│
│
│
│ Press ENTER to confirm delete.
│
│ Press CANCEL or EXIT to cancel delete.
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
│
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F5=Rfind

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 101. Confirm Member Delete Panel (ISRUDELC)

Include Additional Qualifiers
This field is used to generate the data set list with all data sets
matching the qualifiers in the Dsname Level field, including data
sets with additional qualifiers.
If this field is not selected, the data set list will be restricted to data
sets that match only the qualifiers entered in the Dsname Level
field.
Display Catalog Name
This option is used to have the Total view display the name of the
catalog in which the data set was located, for each data set in the
list.
The option is only applicable when a catalog search is used to
build the Data Set List, therefore, it is ignored when a value is
entered in the Volume Serial field.

Data Set List Utility Options
The following sections describe the options shown on the Data Set List Utility
panel.

Blank — Display Data Set List
Leave the Option line blank to display a data set list. Also, you must do the
following:
1. Enter one or more data set name level qualifiers in the Dsname Level field. See
“Dsname Level” on page 146 for more information.
2. Enter a volume serial in the Volume field if you want ISPF to create a data set
list from the VTOC. If you leave this field blank, the list is created from the
catalog. See “Volume Serial” on page 148 for more information.
3. In the Initial View field, enter the view of the data set list (Volume, Space,
Attributes, or Total) that you want to see first. Examples of these views are
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

151

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

6.
7.

shown in Figure 102, Figure 103 on page 154, Figure 104 on page 154, and
Figure 105 on page 155, respectively.
Enter a slash (/) in the Confirm Delete field to tell ISPF to display a
confirmation panel if you enter the D (delete data set) line command or the
TSO DELETE command. See ““Confirm Delete Request”” on page 150 for more
information.
Enter a slash (/) in the Confirm Member Delete field to tell ISPF to display a
confirmation panel if you enter the D (delete) command for a member in a data
set list.
Enter a slash (/) in the Display Catalog Name field to tell ISPF to display the
name of the catalog associated with each data set in the Total view.
Press Enter to display the data set list, as shown in Figure 102.

Note: If a plus displays after the volume serial (for example, HSM020+) on a list
obtained from the catalog, the data set spans multiple volumes. Information
displayed about that data set by selecting Information or Short Information
or by using the Space or Total view will represent the total amounts across
all used volumes.
When a VTOC list is displayed and a multivolume data set is included on
that volume, there will not be an indicator that this data set spans multiple
volumes, and the information on a space or total view will be for that
volume only. The information displayed on a VTOC list is only information
obtained from the VTOC of that volume. When the multivolume data set is
selected for information or for short information, the space information will
be for all volumes that the data set spans.
Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching MYPROJ
Row 1 of 12
Command - Enter "/" to select action
Message
Volume
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ
*ALIAS
MYPROJ.DEV.LOAD
MVS8WF
MYPROJ.DEV.PANELS
MVS8WJ
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
MVS8WF
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE2
MVS8WH+
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3
MVS8WP
MYPROJ.PROD.LOAD
MVS8WG
MYPROJ.PROD.PANELS
MVS8WI
MYPROJ.PROD.SOURCE
MVS8WG
MYPROJ.TEST.LOAD
MVS8WD
MYPROJ.TEST.PANELS
MVS8WK
MYPROJ.TEST.SOURCE
MV8W07
***************************** End of Data Set list ****************************
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 102. Data Set List - Volume View (ISRUDSL0)

Data Set List Panel Action Bar: The Data Set List panel action bar choices
function as follows:
Menu For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

152

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
Options
The Options pull-down offers the following choices:
DSLIST Settings
The settings to control the behavior of the data set list display.
Options are:
v Display Edit/View entry panel

v
v
v
v
v
v
v

Note: If this field is selected and a workstation Edit request is
initiated when no valid workstation connection exists,
ISPF indicates on the Edit/View entry panel that no
connection exists and treats the request as a host Edit
request.
Update ON (Reference lists)
List pattern for MO,CO,RS,D actions
Show status for MO,CO,RS,D actions
Confirm Member delete
Confirm Data Set delete
Do not show expanded command
E,V,B enhanced member list
Selecting this choice causes the enhanced member list to be used
when the E,V, or B commands are used. De-selecting this choice
causes traditional member list processing to occur.

Refresh List
Refresh the display of the data set list.
Append to List
Select a Personal data set list to append to the existing DSLIST. The
DSLIST is rebuilt, including the data sets or data set name levels
from the personal list selected.
Note: The APPEND is based on the selected personal data set list.
If an entry in the list is not quoted, your TSO prefix is
added as the first level of the data set name. If the entry
contains a member, the member is ignored. Duplicate
personal list entries are ignored. If the entry contains a
volume and “Include volume on retrieve” is selected on the
Referral List Settings panel, a VTOC search is used instead
of the catalog. A catalog search is recommended for best
performance. A volume should be used only if the data set
is not cataloged.
Enter the DSLIST primary command REFRESH on the DSLIST
display panel to erase all appended personal lists.
Save List
Saves the data set list to a file.
Reset
View

Resets the data set list.

The View pull-down offers the following choices:
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it is
displayed in blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of
the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice
will be grayed).
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

153

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
1
2

Volume Changes the display to the Volume view, as shown in
Figure 102 on page 152.
Space Changes the display to the Space view.

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching MYPROJ
Row 1 of 12
Command - Enter "/" to select action
Tracks %Used XT Device
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ
MYPROJ.DEV.LOAD
15
6 1 3390
MYPROJ.DEV.PANELS
15
6 1 3390
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
15
6 1 3390
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE2
300
0 20 3390
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3
15
0 1 3390
MYPROJ.PROD.LOAD
15
6 1 3390
MYPROJ.PROD.PANELS
15
6 1 3390
MYPROJ.PROD.SOURCE
15
6 1 3390
MYPROJ.TEST.LOAD
15
6 1 3390
MYPROJ.TEST.PANELS
15
6 1 3390
MYPROJ.TEST.SOURCE
15
6 1 3390
***************************** End of Data Set list ****************************
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 103. Data Set List - Space View (ISRUDSL0)

Attributes Changes the display to the Attributes view.

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching MYPROJ
Row 1 of 12
Command - Enter "/" to select action
Dsorg Recfm Lrecl Blksz
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ
MYPROJ.DEV.LOAD
PO
U
0 27998
MYPROJ.DEV.PANELS
PO
FB
80 27920
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
PO
FB
80 27920
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE2
PS
FB
80 27920
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE3
PS
FB
80 27920
MYPROJ.PROD.LOAD
PO
U
0 27998
MYPROJ.PROD.PANELS
PO
FB
80 27920
MYPROJ.PROD.SOURCE
PO
FB
80 27920
MYPROJ.TEST.LOAD
PO
U
0 27998
MYPROJ.TEST.PANELS
PO
FB
80 27920
MYPROJ.TEST.SOURCE
PO
FB
80 27920
***************************** End of Data Set list ****************************
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Figure 104. Data Set List - Attributes View (ISRUDSL0)

154

Total Changes the display to the Total view.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching MYPROJ
Row 1 of 12
Command - Enter "/" to select action
Message
Volume
Tracks % XT Device Dsorg Recfm Lrecl Blksz Created
Expires
Referred
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ
*ALIAS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ.DEV.LOAD
MVS8WF
15 6 1 3390
PO U
0 27998 2002/07/08 ***None*** ***None***
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ.DEV.PANELS
MVS8WJ
15 6 1 3390
PO FB
80 27920 2002/07/08 ***None*** 2002/07/31
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
MVS8WF
15 6 1 3390
PO FB
80 27920 2002/07/08 ***None*** 2002/08/05
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE2
MVS8WH+
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 105. Data Set List - Total View (ISRUDSL0)

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST - Data Sets Matching MYPROJ
Row 1 of 12
Command - Enter "/" to select action
Message
Volume
Tracks % XT Device Dsorg Recfm Lrecl Blksz Created
Expires
Referred
Catalog
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ
*ALIAS
CATALOG.MASTER.S13L8C
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ.DEV.LOAD
MVS8WF
15 6 1 3390
PO U
0 27998 2002/07/08 ***None*** ***None***
CATALOG.UCATAPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------MYPROJ.DEV.PANELS
MVS8WJ
15 6 1 3390
PO FB
80 27920 2002/07/08 ***None*** 2002/07/31
CATALOG.UCATAPC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 106. Data Set List - Total View with Catalog Name (ISRUDSL0)

You can sort the views by focusing on the following fields. These choices
are also available on the View pull-down:
5
By name
6
By Message
7
By Volume
8
By Dsorg
9
By Recfm
10
By Lrecl
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

155

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By

Blksz
Tracks
Percent Used
Extents
Device
Creation date
Expiration date
Referenced date
Volume indicator
Catalog.

Utilities
For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Compilers
The Compilers pull-down offers you the following choices:

Help

Foreground Compilers. Displays the Foreground Selection Panel.

Background Compilers. Displays the Batch Selection Panel.

ISPPREP Panel Utility Displays the Preprocessed Panel Utility
panel.

DTL Compiler Displays the ISPF Dialog Tag Language Conversion
Utility panel.

The
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
General
Description of ISPF-supplied line commands
Using the ″/″ character to represent a quoted Data Set name
Format of the displayed list
Available primary commands when the list is displayed
Appendices
Index

Data Set List Panel Fields: The following fields can appear on the data set list
panels. The fields displayed will vary depending on the view that you select.
Command

Field used to enter a line command, TSO command, CLIST, or
REXX EXEC when displaying a data set list. See “Data Set List
Utility Line Commands” on page 164 for more information.

Name

Data set name, as in the VTOC or catalog.

Message

This field is initially blank. After you perform an operation on a
data set using one of the built-in line commands, one of the
following messages is displayed in this field:
Line
Command
B
C
E
U
D
P
PX
R
I
M

156

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Message
Browsed
Cataloged
Edited
Uncataloged
Deleted
Printed
Index Printed
Renamed
Info - I
Member List

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
S
Z
F
=
V
RA
CO
MO
RS
X
NX
NXF
NXL

Info - S
Compressed
Free Completed
(message shown for last command entered)
Viewed
Refadd
Copied
Moved
Reset
– 1 data set(s) not displayed
(no message)
(no message)
(no message)

If you enter a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC on the
Command line, a default message appears in the Message field.
The message you see depends on the results of the TSO command,
CLIST, or REXX EXEC and has the following format:
XXXXXXXX RC=#

where:
XXXXXXXX

The command entered

The return code.

Note: See “Data Set List Utility Line Commands” on page 164 for
a description of the Data Set List Utility line commands.
Volume

Volume serial number.

Multivol

Indicates more than one volume or a migration level in the
following manner:
+ (plus sign)
More than one volume
1
Migrated to disk
2
Migrated to tape

Tracks

Number of tracks allocated to the data set.

Percentage of allocated tracks used, expressed in whole numbers,
not rounded. If any track is used, the minimum percentage is 1. If
the data set is a PDSE, the % refers to the percentage of allocated
pages used.
See “F — Free Unused Space” on page 170 for information about
freeing track space manually.
Note: Space utilization values are not displayed for ISAM, VSAM,
or BDAM data sets.

|
|
XT

Number of extents allocated to the data set.

Device

Device type on which the volume that contains the data set is
mounted.

Dsorg

One of the following data set organizations. In the definitions of
these data set organizations, unmovable means the data set contains
absolute addresses instead of relative addresses. These data sets are
not moved to any other DASD storage location during read/write
operations.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

157

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
PS
PS-E
PS-L
PSU
PO
POU
PO-E
DA
DAU
HSF
IS
ISU
VS
VS-E
blank

Sequential
Sequential Extended Format
Large Format Sequential
Sequential unmovable
Partitioned
Partitioned unmovable
Partitioned extended (PDSE)
Direct
Direct unmovable
MVS Hierarchical File System
Indexed sequential
Indexed sequential unmovable
VSAM
VSAM Extended Format
None of the preceding data set organizations.

Recfm

Record format specified when the data set was allocated. See “A —
Allocate New Data Set” on page 121 for more information about
record formats.

Lrecl

Logical record length, in bytes, specified when the data set was
allocated.

Blksz

Block size, in bytes, specified when the data set was allocated.

Blksize

Block size, in bytes, specified when the data set was allocated.

Created

Creation date in the national format.

Expires

Expiration date in the national format, specified when the data set
was allocated. If no expiration date was specified, ***None*** is
displayed. If a ″never expire″ date (1999/12/31 or its equivalent) is
specified, ***Perm*** is displayed. See “A — Allocate New Data
Set” on page 121 for more information about expiration dates.

Referred

Date, in the national format, that this data set was last accessed.

Catalog

The name of the catalog in which the data set was located. Only
displayed in the Total view when the Display Catalog Name
option is selected and no value is entered in the Volume Serial
field.

Actions You Can Take from the Data Set List Panel: The following sections
describe actions you can take from the Data Set List panel.
Line Commands: Line commands can be entered in the Command field to the left
of the data set names. See “Data Set List Utility Line Commands” on page 164 for
definitions of these line commands.
TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs: Besides the ISPF-supplied line
commands, you can also enter TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs that use
a fully qualified data set name as an operand. You can type over the field
containing the data set name to enter commands that require more space than is
provided in the Command field. ISPF determines the end of the command by
scanning the Command field and the field containing the data set name from right
to left. The first character found that differs from the original is considered to be
the last character of the command. Therefore, it is best to enter a blank after the
last character of your command if it extends into the field containing the data set
name.

158

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs entered are invoked using the ISPF
SELECT CMD service. Variable names starting with an ampersand (&) are
evaluated by ISPF. If you want the underlying command processor to see the
ampersand you must specify 2 ampersands. For example:
DEF NONVSAM(NAME(/) DEVT(0000) VOLUME(&&SYSR2))

Note: If the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC issues a return code greater
than or equal to 8, processing stops and an error message is displayed.
Using the Slash ( / ) Character: If a command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC requires the
data set name in a position other than the first operand or if other operands are
needed, you can use the slash ( / ) character to represent the quoted data set
name. If no operands are specified after the command, ISPF uses the name of the
data set being acted on as the command’s first operand.
To specify a member of a partitioned data set, enclose the member name or pattern
in parentheses immediately following the / character. You can use this format with
the V (view data set), B (browse data set), D (delete data set), E (edit data set), and
M (display member list) line commands. For information about these line
commands, see “Data Set List Utility Line Commands” on page 164.
You may find it helpful to call the SHOWCMD primary command before using the
slash ( / ) for the first time. After you call SHOWCMD, a special Data Set List
Utility panel appears each time you enter a line command, TSO command, CLIST,
or REXX EXEC on a data set list display. The panel shows you the command you
entered and how ISPF expanded, and thus interpreted, that command. See
“SHOWCMD Command” on page 175 for more information about and an example
of the SHOWCMD primary command.
The following rules apply to substituting the slash ( / ) character for a data set
name. Each rule is followed by one or more examples that prove the rule by using
either a CLIST or a line command.
In each example, the data set being acted on is USER.TEST.DATA, which always
appears, either completely or partially, in uppercase. However, the CLIST or line
command is typed in lowercase to differentiate between the CLIST or line
command and USER.TEST.DATA when this data set name is either completely or
partially typed over.
Each example also shows:
Original

The line as it appears before the CLIST or line command is
entered.

As typed

The line as it appears after the CLIST or line command is typed.

The line as it appears after the CLIST or line command is
expanded to show the placement of quotes and data set name
substitution for the slash (/) character.
1. You can type over the data set name. Expanded commands can contain a
maximum of 255 characters and are converted to uppercase. The following
example shows how rule 1 would apply if you typed %clist1 da(/):
After

(Original)
USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist1 da(/).TEST.DATA
(After)
%CLIST1 DA(’USER.TEST.DATA’)

2. The data set name substitution character (/) is replaced with the quoted, fully
qualified data set name if the character following the / is not a number, letter,
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

159

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
or national character. The following example shows how rule 2 on page 159
would apply if you typed %clist2 / newdate(1986/03/15):
(Original)
USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist2 / newdate(1986/03/15)
(After)
%CLIST2 ’USER.TEST.DATA’ NEWDATE(1986/03/15)

3. If a slash ( / ) is followed immediately by a member name in parentheses, the
ending quote for the data set is placed after the closing parenthesis that follows
the member name. The following example shows how rule 3 would apply if
you typed %clist3 da(/(xyz)):
(Original)
USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist3 da(/(xyz)).DATA
(After)
%CLIST3 DA(’USER.TEST.DATA(XYZ)’)

4. If the first operand is the unquoted data set name as it appears in the list,
quotes are added around it or after a closing parenthesis following a member
name. The following example shows how rule 4 would apply if you typed b
(the B (browse) line command) and added member (abc):
(Original)
USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) b
USER.TEST.DATA(abc)
(After)
B ’USER.TEST.DATA(ABC)’

5. If the line command does not have any operands or if the data set name has
not been substituted as specified by either rule 3 or rule 4, the quoted, fully
qualified data set name is added to the end of the line command. The
following example shows how rule 5 would apply if you typed %clist4
user.test.fortran:
(Original)
USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist4 user.test.fortran
(After)
%CLIST4 USER.TEST.FORTRAN ’USER.TEST.DATA’

The following example shows how rule 5 would apply if you typed %clist4
’user.test.fortran’. The purpose of this example is to show that if you
enclose the CLIST operand in quotes, ISPF still puts quotes around the data set
name being acted on. The results are the same.
(Original)
USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist4 ’user.test.fortran’
(After)
%CLIST4 ’USER.TEST.FORTRAN’ ’USER.TEST.DATA’

The following example shows how rule 5 would apply if you typed %clist5
member1(abc). The purpose of this example is to show that the results do not
change if the CLIST operand contains a member name enclosed in parentheses.
(Original)
USER.TEST.DATA
(As typed) %clist5 member1(abc)ATA
(After)
%CLIST5 MEMBER1(ABC) ’USER.TEST.DATA’

TSO Command/CLIST/REXX EXEC Variables: If you use a TSO command, CLIST,
or REXX EXEC, ISPF puts the variables described in Table 12 in the shared pool for
the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC to use.
Table 12. TSO Command/CLIST/REXX EXEC Variables (Output)

160

Length in
Characters

Variable Name

Description

ZDLCMD

Line command

ZDLXSTAT

Exclude status

ZDLMVOL

Volume indicator

ZDLDSN

Data set name

ZDLVOL

Volume

ZDLDEV

Device type

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
Table 12. TSO Command/CLIST/REXX EXEC Variables (Output) (continued)

Length in
Characters

Variable Name

Description

ZDLDSORG

Data set organization

ZDLRECFM

Data set record format

ZDLLRECL

Data set logical record length

ZDLBLKSZ

Data set block size

ZDLSIZE

Data set size in tracks

ZDLSIZEX

Data set size in tracks, long format

ZDLUSED

Percentage of used tracks

ZDLEXT

Number of extents used

ZDLEXTX

Number of extents used, long format

ZDLDSNTP

Data set name type

ZDLCDATE

Creation date

ZDLEDATE

Expiration date

ZDLRDATE

Date last referenced

ZDLCONF

Delete confirmation (Y | N)

ZDLLCMD

Expanded line command

255

ZDLCAT

Cataloged status; one of the following:

(1)

Data set is cataloged on volume ZDLVOL.

Data set is cataloged on a volume other than
ZDLVOL and is either:
v on volume ZDLCAT but uncataloged
v on volume ZDLCAT and defined in a user
catalog that is connected to the master catalog,
but not in the normal catalog search path
The name of the user catalog is in ZDLCATNM.

ZDLCATNM

|
|
|

Data set is uncataloged on volume ZDLVOL.

Data set is not cataloged on any volume and is
uncataloged on volume ZDLVOL.

Data set is not available on volume ZDLVOL.
This status is returned for data sets that have
been either migrated or deleted.

Name of the catalog in which the data set was located

Note: ISPF cannot calculate reliable space utilization values for ISAM, VSAM, and
BDAM data sets. Therefore, question marks (?) are returned in variables that
report space utilization for these data sets.
A TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC can set the following variables and place
them in the shared pool to communicate with the Data Set List utility (option 3.4).
Table 13. TSO Command/CLIST/REXX EXEC Variables (Input)
Variable Name

Description

ZDLNDSN

New data set name to appear in list

Length in
Characters
44

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

161

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
Table 13. TSO Command/CLIST/REXX EXEC Variables (Input) (continued)
Length in
Characters

Variable Name

Description

ZDLMSG

Message to appear in list

ZDLREF

Refresh data set information; Y | N

P — Print Data Set List
Use option P to print a data set list. You must:
1. Enter one of the following:
v One or more data set name level qualifiers in the Dsname Level field and a
volume serial in the Volume field. The list will contain all data sets for the
specified levels and volume. Only the specified volume is searched. See
“Dsname Level” on page 146 and “Volume Serial” on page 148 for more
information.
v One or more data set name level qualifiers in the Dsname Level field, but
leave the Volume field blank. The list will contain all data sets for the
specified levels that are cataloged.
v A volume serial in the Volume field, but leave the Dsname Level field blank.
The list will contain only the data sets on the specified volume. Only the
specified volume is searched.
Note: All data set lists are formatted the same when they are printed.
Therefore, values entered in the Initial View field have no effect when
you use option P.
2. Press Enter to print the data set list. The data set list is stored in the ISPF list
data set.

V — Display VTOC Information
Use option V to display VTOC (volume table of contents) information. The List
VTOC utility (formerly option 3.7) has been removed from ISPF. Options V and PV
perform the function formerly provided by this utility.
To use option V, you must do the following:
1. In the Volume field, specify the volume serial for which you want ISPF to
display information.
Note: VTOC information is formatted the same, whether displayed or printed.
Therefore, values entered in the Initial Display View field have no effect
when you use option V.
2. Press Enter to display the VTOC information.
Note: The Dsname Level field is not applicable for the V or PV command.
Only the Volume field is relevant.
Figure 107 on page 163 shows an example of a VTOC display.

162

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

Menu RefList RefMode Utilities Help
┌────────────────────────── VTOC Summary Information ──────────────────────────┐
│ Volume . : MVS8WF
│
│
│
│ Unit . . : 3390
│
│
│
│ Volume Data
VTOC Data
Free Space Tracks Cyls
│
│ Tracks . : 50,085
Tracks . :
59
Size . . : 1,146
1 │
│ %Used . :
97
%Used . . :
60
Largest . :
22
0 │
│ Trks/Cyls:
15
Free DSCBS: 1,187
│
│
Free Extents . :
323
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F9=Swap F12=Cancel
│
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
4. Total
/ Include Additional Qualifiers
/ Display Catalog Name
When the data set list is displayed, enter either:
"/" on the data set list command field for the command prompt pop-up,
an ISPF line command, the name of a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec, or
Option ===> V
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 107. VTOC Summary Information Panel (ISRUDSLV)

Track values do not include the remaining alternate tracks for the volume. The free
space track values are the number of tracks for the free cylinders plus any
additional free tracks.
The fields shown on the VTOC Summary Information panel are:
Unit

Shows the type of DASD device the volume is on, such as 3380 or
3390.

Volume Data

Describes general information about the volume:

VTOC Data

Free Space

Free Extents

Tracks

Total tracks on the volume.

%Used

Percentage of total tracks or pages not available for
allocation.

Trks/Cyls

Number of tracks per cylinder for this volume.

Describes general information about the VTOC on the volume:
Tracks

Total tracks allocated to the VTOC.

%Used

Percentage of allocated tracks or pages used by
data set control blocks (DSCBs).

Free DSCBS

Number of unused DSCBs.

Describes the free space available for data set allocation on the
volume under the headings Tracks and Cyls, showing:
Size

Total number of free tracks and cylinders.

Largest

The largest number of contiguous free tracks and
cylinders.

The number of free areas with free cylinders.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

163

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

PV — Print VTOC Information
Use option PV to print VTOC information. The List VTOC utility (formerly option
3.7) has been removed from ISPF. Options V and PV perform the function formerly
provided by this utility.
To use option PV, you must do the following:
1. Blank out the Dsname Level field.
2. In the Volume field, specify the volume serial for which you want ISPF to print
information.
Note: VTOC information is formatted the same, whether displayed or printed.
Therefore, values entered in the Initial View field have no effect when
using option PV.
3. Press Enter to print the VTOC information. The VTOC information is stored in
the ISPF list data set.
Note: The Dsname Level field is not applicable for the PV or V command.
Only the Volume field is relevant.

Data Set List Utility Line Commands
After you display a data set list by leaving the Option field blank, you can enter a
line command to the left of the data set name. You can also enter TSO commands,
CLIST names, or REXX EXEC names. If a ’>’ is used before the CLIST or REXX
EXEC name, the parameters passed to the command are not translated to upper
case. HFS commands ’oget’ and ’oput’ can be entered and the parameters are also
not translated to upper case. The slash ( / ) character, which can be used with TSO
commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs, can also be used with the V (view data set),
B (browse data set), D (delete data set), E (edit data set), and M (display member
list) line commands to specify a member name or a pattern. You can type over the
field containing the data set name to enter commands that require more than the
space provided. For more information about using this symbol, see “Using the
Slash ( / ) Character” on page 159. For more information about member name
patterns, see the section on Displaying Member Lists in the Libraries and Data Sets
chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Line commands that are valid for aliases may be used with any alias data sets that
are listed. Uncatalog, delete, and rename commands are not valid for alias data
sets. A line command such as ’B’ for browse or ’I’ for information will display the
real name of the data set.
The Command field and the field containing the data set name fields make up a
single point-and-shoot field. If you enter a slash in the Command field or if you
select any part of the combined point-and-shoot field, the Data Set List Actions
pop-up shown in Figure 108 on page 165 is displayed so that you can select the
command you want to use.
Note: If a CLIST, REXX EXEC, or program is issued against a data set, ISPF
gathers information on the data set and makes it available through dialog
variables. See Table 12 on page 160 for the list of those variables. If the data
set being processed is an unmounted HFS, a temporary mount is issued,
updating the last referenced date of the HFS.

164

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

Menu Options View Utilities Compilers Help
─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────
D │
Data Set List Actions
│ ow 1 of 12
│
│
C │ Data Set: MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
│
Volume
- │
│ ----------│ DSLIST Action
│
*ALIAS
│
1. Edit
12. Compress
│
MVS8WF
│
2. View
13. Free
│
MVS8WJ
/ │
3. Browse
14. Print Index
│
MVS8WF
│
4. Member List
15. Reset
│
MVS8WH+
│
5. Delete
16. Move
│
MVS8WP
│
6. Rename
17. Copy
│
MVS8WG
│
7. Info
18. Refadd
│
MVS8WI
│
8. Short Info
19. Exclude
│
MVS8WG
│
9. Print
20. Unexclude ’NX’
│
MVS8WD
│
10. Catalog
21. Unexclude first ’NXF’
│
MVS8WK
│
11. Uncatalog
22. Unexclude last ’NXL’
│
MV8W07
* │
│ ***********
│ Select a choice and press ENTER to process data set action. │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
│
C │ F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│ ===> PAGE
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 108. Data Set List Commands Pop-Up (ISRUDABC)

E — Edit Data Set
For the E command, the processing is similar to selecting the Edit option (2) and
entering the library or data set name on the Edit Entry Panel, except that mixed
mode is the assumed operation mode.
Note: Multivolume data sets do not support the Volume Serial field for the Edit
command.
If you select a library or other partitioned data set, an Edit member list is
displayed. For more information about using member selection lists, see the
Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
The E line command uses the values from a prompt panel to specify items
including the initial macro, profile name, panel name, format, mixed mode, and
workstation editing. These values are stored in the profile and are used on
subsequent edits.
To change these values, use the “DSLIST settings” panel on the data set list
Options pull-down. Check both the “E,V,B enhanced member list” and the
“Display Edit/View entry panel” options. The prompt panel is always shown
when you edit a sequential file, or when you directly edit a member of a
partitioned data set. When you are using a member list you can force the display
of the panel by placing a slash mark (/) in the Prompt field next to the member
you select.
If the editor appears to be invoking an unexpected initial macro, or it appears to
be using an unexpected profile, follow the process above to check the values on
the prompt panel.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

165

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

V — View Data Set
For the V command, the processing is similar to selecting the View option (1) and
entering the library or data set name on the View Entry Panel. If you have set your
DSLIST options to not show the edit/view entry panel:
v Mixed mode is the assumed operation mode.
v You cannot specify a data set format, an edit profile, or an initial macro.
Note: Multivolume data sets do not support the Volume Serial field for the View
command.
If you select a library or other partitioned data set, an Edit member list is
displayed. For more information about using member selection lists, see the
Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

B — Browse Data Set
For the B command, processing is the same as if you specify Browse Mode from
View (option 1), except that mixed mode is the assumed operation mode and you
cannot specify a data set format. To browse a data set with mixed mode off, you
must use the View option; deselect Mixed Mode and select Browse Mode on the
View Entry Panel. If you enter the B line command beside an ISPF library or other
partitioned data set, a Browse member list is displayed. For more information
about using member selection lists, see the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the
z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Note: From a catalog list, multivolume data sets do not support the Volume Serial
field for the Browse command.

M — Display Member List
For the M command, a member selection list of a partitioned data set is displayed.
This member list provides an expanded line command field in the area to the left
of the list. The line command field in other member lists has room for only one
character, unless the browse, view, or edit enhanced member list is selected.
From the member list, you can use the same primary commands and line
commands that are valid for Library utility (option 3.1) member selection lists. See
the sections on Using Member Selection Lists and Library and Data Set List Utility
Line Commands in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.
Notes:
1. From a VTOC list, you can browse a single volume of a multivolume non-SMS
data set.
2. You can chain the line commands; that is, you can select multiple members
from a member list for various processing tasks. Use the CANCEL command
(from a View, Browse, or Edit session) to break the chain and return to the
member list.
You can also enter TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs in the Line Command
field. If you enter a line command other than B (browse), D (delete), E (edit), R
(rename), C (copy), M (move), G (reset), J (submit), or P (print), ISPF interprets it
as a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC.
The command is selected with the quoted, fully qualified data set name and
member added to it, such as:
COMMAND ’DSN(MEMBER)’

166

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
See “TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs” on page 158 for more
information.
Note: If the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC issues a return code greater
than or equal to 8, processing stops and an error message is displayed.
Figure 109 shows an example of a member list with statistics and an expanded line
command field.
Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
DSLIST
MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
Row 00001 of 00001
Name
Prompt
Size Created
Changed
ID
_________ TEST
1 2002/07/08 2002/07/08 13:32:15 GRAHAMP
**End**

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 109. Member List Display - Expanded Line Command Field (ISRUDSM)

Figure 110 on page 168 shows load module library statistics with an expanded line
command field.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

167

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

Figure 110. Load Module Library Display - Expanded Line Command Field (ISRUDSM)

D — Delete Data Set
For the D command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option D
from the Data Set utility (option 3.2) without specifying a volume serial. This
command deletes and uncatalogs the entire data set. If a member name or pattern
is supplied then a member delete will occur.
Note: Delete is not allowed for multivolume data sets from a VTOC list.
If you select the Confirm Delete option on the Data Set List Utility panel, the
Confirm Delete panel (Figure 88 on page 130) is displayed to allow you to continue
or cancel the operation. Note that Confirm Delete is forced on when deleting
members by pattern. If you are trying to delete an unexpired data set, the Confirm
Purge panel (Figure 89 on page 131) is also displayed.
When you delete a data set the volume name is compared to the volume name in
the configuration table. If the names match, the command specified in the
configuration table is used in place of the ISPF delete processing. This allows you
to delete migrated data sets without first causing them to be recalled.

R — Rename Data Set
For the R command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option R
from the Data Set utility (option 3.2). The Rename Data Set panel is displayed to
allow you to specify the new name.
Note: Rename is not allowed for multivolume data sets from a VTOC list.
See “R — Rename Entire Data Set” on page 128 and “Renaming Managed Data
Sets” on page 128 for more information.

I — Data Set Information
For the I command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option I from
the Library utility (option 3.1) or left the Option field blank with the Data Set

168

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
utility (option 3.2). See “I — Data Set Information” on page 111 and “Information
for Managed Data Sets” on page 113 for more information.

|
|

Notes:
1. For multivolume data sets, options I and S display current allocation and
utilization values that represent totals from all volumes used.
2. Space utilization values are not displayed for ISAM, VSAM, or BDAM data
sets.

S — Information (Short)
For the S command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option S
from the Library utility (option 3.1) or the Data Set utility (option 3.2). See “S —
Short Data Set Information” on page 115 and “Short Information for Managed Data
Sets” on page 116 for more information.

|
|

P — Print Data Set
For the P command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option L
from the Library utility (option 3.1). This command formats the contents of a
source data set for printing and records the output in the ISPF list data set. It also
produces an index listing, which appears at the beginning of the output.
Note: The Print command is not allowed for multivolume data sets from a VTOC
list.

C — Catalog Data Set
For the C command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option C
from the Data Set utility (option 3.2). See “C — Catalog Data Set” on page 128 for
more information.
Note: Multivolume data sets are always cataloged.

U — Uncatalog Data Set
For the U command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option U
from the Data Set utility (option 3.2). See “U — Uncatalog Data Set” on page 129
for more information.
Note: The U command is not supported for multivolume data sets.

Z — Compress Data Set
For the Z command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option C
from the Library utility (option 3.1). This command recovers wasted space that was
formerly occupied by deleted or updated members and is now available for use
again. You do not need to compress a PDSE. If you use the Z command on a
PDSE, the data is not reorganized.
The Z command calls either the IEBCOPY utility or the compress request exit
routine. Refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more information.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

169

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

F — Free Unused Space
For the F command, space that is not being used by the data set is released. For
example, if a data set is allocated with 100 tracks but is only using 60 tracks, the F
command releases the 40 tracks that are not being used.
Note: The F command is not supported for multivolume data sets.
However, if the data set has been allocated with CYLS (cylinders) specified as the
space units, only the tracks beyond the last cylinder used are freed. For example, if
a data set occupies 1.2 of 3 allocated cylinders, the F command frees all tracks
beyond the last used cylinder, leaving 2 cylinders allocated.

PX — Print Index Listing
For the PX command, the processing is the same as if you had selected option X
from the Library utility (option 3.1). The index listing is recorded in the ISPF list
data set. See “X — Print Index Listing” on page 110 for more information.
Note: The Print command is not allowed for multivolume data sets from a VTOC
list.

RS — Reset
For the RESET command, a panel is displayed that prompts you to reset or delete
ISPF statistics, and to enter a new user ID, version number, or modification level.

MO — Move
For the MOVE command, a panel is displayed that prompts you for a library or
data set name for the to data set.
Note: How aliases are handled by the MO and CO line commands depends on
how the Process member aliases option is set. For more information see
“Moving or Copying Alias Entries” on page 144.

CO — Copy
For the COPY command, a panel is displayed that prompts you for a library or
data set name for the to data set.
Note: How aliases are handled by the MO and CO line commands depends on
how the Process member aliases option is set. For more information see
“Moving or Copying Alias Entries” on page 144.

RA — RefAdd
For the REFADD command, you are provided with an interface to referral lists,
where you can add a data set and a volume to a Personal Data Set List.

X — Exclude Data Set
For the EXCLUDE command, one data set from a data set list is excluded from the
list.

NX — Unexclude Data Set
For the Unexclude command, one data set, or a set of data sets that have been
excluded from a data set list are re-shown.

NXF — Unexclude First Data Set
For the UNEXCLUDE FIRST command, the first of a set of excluded data sets is
re-shown.

170

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

NXL — Unexclude Last Data Set
For the UNEXCLUDE LAST command, the last of a set of excluded data sets is
re-shown.

= — Repeat Last Command
For the = command, the most recently used line command is repeated. This
command is most helpful when the same TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC is
to be called for more than one data set in a data set list. For example, suppose you
have a CLIST named TESTABC and two data sets named USER.DATA1 and
USER.DATA2. To run the CLIST with the two data sets consecutively from a data
set list, you could:
1. Type TESTABC in the Command field beside USER.DATA1.
2. Type = in the Command field beside USER.DATA2.
3. Press Enter.
This procedure saves keystrokes because you type the CLIST name only once and
you press Enter only once.

Data Set List Utility Primary Commands
Primary commands are available when you use the Data Set List utility. These
commands, which you enter on the command line, are:
v APPEND
v CONFIRM
v EXCLUDE
v FIND and RFIND
v LC
v LOCATE
v MEMBER
v REFRESH
v RESET
v SAVE
v SHOWCMD
v SORT
v SRCHFOR
v VA, VS, VT, and VV
The following sections describe these commands, which are shown in alphabetical
order.

APPEND Command
The APPEND primary command appends additional data sets an existing
displayed DSLIST. Use the following format:
APPEND [list name | DSname level]

You can use the APPEND command with no parameters to get a list of your
personal data sets. Then select the one you want to append to the current list.
If you give a list name with the command, the list given is appended.
By specifying DSname level as a parameter, you can use the resulting list to select
which list to append to the current one. For example, entering APPEND Userid.C*
gives you a list of all personal lists that begin with C as the second-level identifier.
Then you can select the one to append.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

171

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
By specifying DSname level in quotes, data sets beginning with the DSname level
are appended to the data set list.

CONFIRM Command
The CONFIRM primary command controls display of the Confirm Delete panel.
Use the following format:
CONFIRM [ON | OFF]

You can use the following operands with the CONFIRM command:
ON

Tells ISPF to display the Confirm Delete panel when you enter the D
(delete data set) line command or TSO DELETE command. This is the
default setting.

OFF

Tells ISPF not to display the Confirm Delete panel.

For example, the following command would tell ISPF not to display the Confirm
Delete panel:
CONFIRM OFF

EXCLUDE Command
The EXCLUDE primary command excludes data sets from a list based on a
character string. Use the following format:
EXCLUDE [character string]
[ALL ] [PREFIX]
[NEXT] [CHARS]
[FIRST] [SUFFIX]
[LAST ] [WORD ]
[PREV ]

You can use the following operands with the EXCLUDE command:
character string
Tells ISPF which data set to exclude from the list.
ALL

Tells ISPF to exclude every data set in the list.

NEXT| FIRST | LAST | PREV
Operands that define the starting point, direction, and extent of the lines to
exclude.
PREFIX | CHARS | SUFFIX | WORD
Operands that set the conditions for a character string match.
For example, the following command tells ISPF to exclude a data set that includes
BILBO3 in the name from a list:
EXCLUDE BILBO3

FIND and RFIND Commands
The FIND primary command finds and displays a character string within the data
set name. Use the following format:
FIND string [NEXT]
[ALL ]
[FIRST]
[LAST ]
[PREV ]

172

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

[CHARS]
[PREFIX] [X]
[SUFFIX] [NX]
[WORD ]

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
For example, the following command would tell ISPF to find all occurrences of the
character string ELSE:
FIND ELSE ALL

The operands X and NX can be used to limit your search to excluded (X) or
unexcluded (NX) data sets.
For more information about the operands used with this command, see
“FIND—Find character strings” on page 91. NEXT and CHARS are the default
operands.
ISPF automatically scrolls to bring the character string to the top of the list. To
repeat the search without reentering the character string, use the RFIND command.
Note: RFIND search starts from the second data set in the list. It is not
cursor-sensitive.

LC Command
The LC primary command invokes the color change utility from the command line
of a data set list display, as shown in Figure 111.
Data Set List Color Change Utility
Change one or more of the Data Set List Field Attributes and press Enter
to immediately see the effect. Clearing a field restores defaults.
More:
+
Field:
Color:
Intens:
Hilite:
Defaults:
Volume . . . . . . BLUE . . . LOW
. . . NONE
Blue
* Data Set Name . . GREEN . . . LOW
. . . NONE
Green
Data Set Stats . . TURQ . . . LOW
. . . NONE
Turquoise
Create,Expire,
Catalog . . . . . YELLOW . . . LOW
. . . NONE
Yellow
Message . . . . . WHITE . . . LOW
. . . NONE
White
Tracks,Device . . WHITE . . . LOW
. . . NONE
White
Marked Data Set . YELLOW . . . HIGH . . . NONE
Yellow
* _ Use Point-and-Shoot field attributes on Data Set Name field
--------------------------------- Example -----------------------------------Command - Enter ’/’ to select action
Message
Volume
Tracks % XT Device Dsorg Recfm Lrecl Blksz
Created Expires Referred
Catalog
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ISR.V5R5M0.ISRLOAD
Browsed
HSM001
Command ===> ____________________________________________________
Defaults
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
Figure 111. Data Set List Color Change Utility Panel (ISRDLCP)

LOCATE Command
The LOCATE primary command scrolls the list of data sets based on the field on
which the data set list is sorted, as described under “SORT Command” on page
176. Use the following format:
LOCATE lparm

You can use the lparm operand with the LOCATE command for either of the
following situations:
v If the list is sorted by data set name, specify a data set name.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

173

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
v If the list is sorted by another field, specify a value for the field by which the list
is sorted.
For example, for a data set list sorted by volume, you could enter the following:
LOCATE TSOPK1

This command locates the first data set in the list on volume TSOPK1. If the value
is not found, the list is displayed starting with the entry before which the specified
value would have occurred.

MEMBER Command
The MEMBER primary command is used to search for a member name or pattern
in all of the partitioned data sets in the data set list. It can be abbreviated as M or
MEM. The parameters, X, EX, NX, RECALL1, and RECALL2 are optional. X and
EX limit the search to excluded data sets. NX limits the search to non-excluded
data sets. RECALL1 includes data sets migrated to DASD in the search. RECALL2
includes all migrated data sets in the search. Use the following format:
MEMBER string [
[
[
[
[

X
EX ]
NX ]
RECALL1 ]
RECALL2 ]

The data set list is scrolled so that the first data set containing the member or
pattern is at the top of the list. The MEMBER command finds any occurrence of
the specified member name or pattern within a partitioned data set.

REFRESH Command
The REFRESH primary command updates the display of the data set list to
whatever the list’s current state is. For example, after deleting several items on the
list, REFRESH causes the list to be displayed without the deleted items. If you
have appended to the list, REFRESH restores the list to its status before the append
operation.

RESET Command
The RESET primary command unexcludes data sets that were excluded from a list,
and removes any pending line commands and messages from the data set list.

SAVE Command
The SAVE primary command writes the data set list to the ISPF list data set or to a
sequential data set. ISPF writes the data set list in its current sort order. If the
Display Catalog Name option is selected and Volume Serial was not entered, the
catalog name associated with each data set is included in the Data Set List written
to the sequential file. Use the following format:
SAVE [list-id]

where list-id is an optional user-specified qualifier of the data set to which the
member list will be written. ISPF names the data set:
prefix.userid.list-id.DATASETS

where:
prefix Your data set prefix, as specified in your TSO user profile. If you have no
prefix set, or if your prefix is the same as your user ID, the prefix is
omitted and the data set name will be: userid.list-id.DATASETS.
userid Your TSO user ID.

174

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
The data set is created if it does not exist, or written over if it exists, and has
compatible attributes. If you omit the list-id operand, the list is written to the ISPF
list data set and includes the list headings.
The following command would tell ISPF to write the list to a sequential data set
named either prefix.userid.MY.DATASETS or userid.MY.DATASETS.
SAVE MY

If the sequential data set already exists, ISPF writes over it; if not, ISPF creates it.
ISPF displays a message, if necessary, when you enter a SAVE or SORT primary
command that shows that the data needed to do the function is being retrieved.
The keyboard locks when this message appears and stays locked until the SAVE or
SORT command is completed.

SHOWCMD Command
The SHOWCMD primary command controls the display of line commands and
their operands as they are called. Use the following format:
SHOWCMD [ON | OFF]

where:
ON

Tells ISPF to display line commands. This is the default setting.

OFF

Tells ISPF not to display line commands. Though the SHOWCMD default
is ON, SHOWCMD is initially set to OFF.

After you enter SHOWCMD ON, a panel (Figure 112 on page 176) is displayed
each time you enter a line command, TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC on a
data set list display.
On this panel, you see the command as you typed it and then, a few lines down,
you see the command as ISPF interpreted it. Seeing these commands displayed can
be especially useful when you use the slash ( / ) character to substitute for the
data set name because the panel shows the line command after expansion occurs.
Therefore, you can tell immediately whether you need to add operands to the
command.
For example, suppose you have a data set list displayed on the screen and decide
to browse member MEMB1 of data set USER.TEST.DATA. To see how ISPF
interprets the B (browse) line command, type SHOWCMD ON on the Command
line and press Enter. Then, enter the following line command in the Line
Command field to the left of USER.TEST.DATA:
B /(MEMB1)

When you press Enter, the panel shown in Figure 112 on page 176 appears.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

175

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)

Data Set List Utility
Data Set Name. : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
Command before expansion:
B /(TEST)
Command after expansion:
===> B ’MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TEST)’

The expanded command field shown above can be modified,
but the data set name field may not be changed for built-in commands.
Press ENTER key to process the command.
Enter END command to return without processing the command.

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F12=Cancel

Figure 112. Data Set List Utility - SHOWCMD Panel (ISRUDSLS)

Notes:
1. The data set name and commands shown in Figure 112 are for illustrative
purposes only. These values are determined by the command you enter and the
data set acted on by that command.
2. SHOWCMD must be entered from a data set list. It is invalid if you use a line
command, such as M, to display a member list before calling it.
When the panel showing the commands is displayed, you can do one of the
following:
v Press Enter to call the command displayed in the “Command after expansion”
field.
v Change the command displayed in the “Command after expansion” field and
then press Enter to call the changed command.
v Enter the END command to return to the data set list display.
For information about using line commands, TSO commands, CLISTs, REXX
EXECs, and the / character on a data set list display, see “Blank — Display Data
Set List” on page 151.

SORT Command
The SORT primary command sorts the data set list by the specified field. Use the
following format:
|

SORT [field1 [A|D] [field2 [A|D]] ]

where:
field1 The major sort field. If only one operand is used, ISPF treats it as field1. If
both operands are used, ISPF sorts the list by field1 first, then by field2
within field1.
field2 The minor sort field.

176

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
|
|

A|D

The direction in which values are sorted for this field (A=ascending,
D=descending).

For example, to sort a data set list by volume and block size within each volume,
use the following command:
SORT VOLUME BLKSZ

If you do not specify a field, ISPF sorts the list by data set name. The keywords
described in Table 14 tell ISPF by which fields to sort the data set list.
Table 14. Sort Fields for Source Libraries

Field

Default Sequence

Description

NAME

Ascending

Data set name

MESSAGE

Ascending

Command completion message

VOLUME

Ascending

Volume serial

DEVICE

Ascending

Device type

DSORG

Ascending

Data set organization

RECFM

Ascending

Record format

LRECL

Descending

Logical record length

BLKSZ

Descending

Block size

TRACKS

Descending

Data set size

%USED

Descending

Percentage used

Descending

Extents used

CREATED

Descending

Creation date

EXPIRES

Ascending

Expiration date

REFERRED

Descending

Last accessed data

MVOL

Ascending

Multivolume or migration level

CATALOG

Ascending

Catalog Name

PROMPT

Descending

Data displayed in PROMPT field

Automatic scrolling is performed, if necessary, to bring the major sort field into
view. ISPF displays a message when you enter a SAVE or SORT primary command
that shows that the data needed to do the function is being retrieved. The
keyboard locks when this message appears and stays locked until the SAVE or
SORT command is completed.

SRCHFOR Command
Use the SRCHFOR primary command to search the data sets in the data set list for
one or more strings of data using the SuperC Utility (see Option 3.14). You may
limit the search to excluded or non-excluded data sets, and control whether
migrated data sets are recalled and searched or not. Use the following format:
SRCHFOR string

The string parameter is optional. If specified it is used to prefill the first search
string on the subsequent DSLIST Srchfor Options panel.
WORD, SUFFIX, and PREFIX are available operands for search string specification.
Note that the search strings are case sensitive and must match exactly as specified.
Consider the ’Any case’ process option if you want to disregard case.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

177

Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4)
You can use the C (continuation) operand to specify that both the current and
previous string must be found on the same line to constitute a match. Otherwise,
lines with either string are treated as matching.
Table 15. SRCHFOR Command Search String Examples
Example Search strings:

Explanation:

===> ABC
===> EFG

Either string ABC or EFG may be found in the search data set.

===> ABC WORD
===> EFG C

The two strings (ABC and EFG) must be found on the same
line. ABC must be a complete word, while EFG (a continuation
definition) can be part of any word.

===> ABcD prefix

The string (ABcD) is detected if the case of each letter matches
and it is a prefix of a word.

===> X’7b00’

The hex string is specified as the search string. The listing must
be browsed with ’HEX ON’.

===> ’AB C’’D’

The string (AB C’D) is specified.

To start the search, press the Enter key from the DSLIST Srchfor Options panel. To
cancel the request and return to the Data Set List, enter END or CANCEL.
Output is in the listing DSN you specify and in the MESSAGE field in the DSLIST.
Sort on this field to consolidate results.

VA, VS, VT, and VV Commands
The VA, VS, VT, and VV commands change the data set list display to the
Attributes, Space, Total, and Volume views, respectively.

Reset ISPF Statistics Utility (Option 3.5)
When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 113 on page 179) to allow
you to create, update, or delete statistics and to reset sequence numbers. The Reset
ISPF Statistics utility handles only partitioned data sets with fixed-length or
variable-length records and logical record length of:
v From 1–32 760, inclusive, for fixed-length records
v From 5–32 756, inclusive, for variable-length records.
For information about ISPF Member Statistics, see the Libraries and Data Sets
chapter in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

178

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Reset ISPF Statistics Utility (Option 3.5)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Reset ISPF Statistics
More:
+
R Reset (create/update) ISPF statistics D Delete ISPF statistics
New Userid . . . . . .
New Version Number . .
SCLM Setting
3 1. SCLM 2. Non-SCLM
ISPF Library:
Project . .
Group . . .
Type . . .
Member . .

. MYPROJ
. DEV
. SOURCE3
.

(If userid is to be changed)
(If version number is to be changed)
3. As is

Enter "/" to select option
/ Reset Mod Level
/ Reset Sequence Numbers
/ Reset Date/Time
/ Reset Number of Lines

(Blank or pattern for member selection
list, "*" for all members)

Other Partitioned Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 113. Reset ISPF Statistics Panel (ISRURSP)

Reset ISPF Statistics Panel Action Bar
The Reset ISPF Statistics panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

RefList

For information about referral lists, see the chapter on Using
Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers the following choices:
1
General
2
Why you might want to Reset ISPF statistics
3
Filling in the reset utility panel
4
Using the Member list
6
ISPF statistics
7
Appendices
8
Index

Reset ISPF Statistics Panel Fields
All the fields on this panel are described in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I, except the following:
New Userid
This field is used to set the ID field in the statistics. Enter a new user ID
here if you want to change the user ID the statistics are recorded under. It
is required if you do not specify a new version number.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

179

Reset ISPF Statistics Utility (Option 3.5)
If you are updating the user ID but not resetting the sequence numbers,
the statistics are updated but the data is not scanned or renumbered.
New Version Number
Enter a number here if you want to change the version number. This field
is required if you do not specify a new user ID when resetting statistics. It
is ignored if you are deleting statistics.
Reset Mod Level
Use a slash to select this option and reset the modification level. Deselect
this option if you do not want to reset the modification level. A new
version number is required to reset the modification level.
Reset Sequence Numbers
Use a slash to select this option and reset the sequence numbers. Deselect
this option if you do not want to reset the sequence numbers. A new
version number is required to reset the sequence numbers. Only standard
(STD) sequence numbers will be reset.
If the data is in packed format, there can be no sequence number
processing. However, statistics for members in packed format can be
created or updated if the sequence numbers are not being reset.
SCLM Settings
The SCLM setting is a bit that ISPF uses to determine what type of edit the
file last had performed upon it.
1 SCLM
This bit is ON to specify that the last edit of this file was under
SCLM control.
2 Non-SCLM
This bit is ON to specify that the last edit of this file was under
control of something other than SCLM.
3 As-is
This bit is ON to specify that this copy operation transfers the
current setting of this file as it already is.
Reset Date/Time
The setting of this field determines whether to reset the Last Modified Date
or Time and the Creation Date of the file.
Reset Number of Lines
The setting of this field determines whether to reset the Current Number
of Lines, the Initial Number of Lines, and the Number of Modified Lines
settings. If this field is set ON, the Current Number of Lines and Initial
Number of Lines settings are set to the actual number of lines of the
member.
The Number of Modified Lines setting is dependent on the Reset Mod
Level and Reset Sequence Numbers fields. If either of those are reset and
the Reset Date/Time field is ON, then the value of the Number of
Modified Lines is set to zero. Otherwise, the Number of Modified Lines
remains as is.

Reset ISPF Statistics Utility Options
The following sections describe the options shown on the Reset ISPF Statistics
panel.

180

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Reset ISPF Statistics Utility (Option 3.5)

R — Reset (Create/Update) ISPF Statistics
Use option R either to create statistics in a library that does not currently have
them, or to update statistics in a library.
The New Userid field is optional for option R. If you specify a user ID, it is placed
in the ID field of the statistics. If you leave the New Userid field blank and select a
member without statistics, the ID field of the statistics is set to the current user ID.
Either a new user ID or a new version number is required when you use this
option. When you specify a version number, the statistics are created or reset as
follows:
Version Number

Set to the specified value.

Modification Level

Set to zero if requested; otherwise, unchanged.

Creation Date

Set to current date in the national format.

Change Date

Set to current date, in the national format, and
time.

Current No. Lines

Set to the current number of data records.

Initial No. Lines

Set to the current number of data records.

No. Modified Lines

Set to zero if the Reset Sequence Numbers field is
selected.

If you have requested updating of the modification level and resetting of the
sequence numbers, the last two digits of each sequence number are set to zeros.
Otherwise, they are not changed.
If you have requested updating of sequence numbers, the data is scanned to
determine if valid, ascending sequence numbers are present in all records. If so, the
data is renumbered. Otherwise, the data is assumed to be unnumbered and
renumbering is not done.

D — Delete ISPF Statistics
Use option D to delete ISPF statistics for an ISPF library or other partitioned data
set. The New Userid and New Version Number fields are ignored when you use
option D.

Results of Resetting Statistics
What you specify for the New Version Number, Reset Mod Level, and Reset
Sequence Numbers fields controls the resetting of the sequence numbers, the
modification flags within the data, and the statistics. A new version number is
required to reset the modification level and sequence numbers. Therefore, if a new
version number is entered and the data is not in packed format, Table 16 shows the
various combinations you can use for the Reset Mod Level and Reset Sequence
Numbers fields and the results of those combinations.
Table 16. Reset Mod Level and Reset Sequence Numbers Combinations
Reset Mod Level Selected

Reset Mod Level Deselected

Reset Sequence Numbers
Selected

RESET

MOD FLAGS=UNCHANGED SEQ
#’s=RESET

Reset Sequence Numbers
Deselected

Unchanged

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

181

Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6)

Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6)
The Hardcopy utility allows you to specify a sequential data set or a member of a
partitioned data set to be printed, and the destination of the output. It also allows
you to specify whether a sequential data set is to be kept or deleted after printing.
Partitioned data set members are always kept.
You can use the Hardcopy utility to print any DASD-resident data set except ISPF
list and log data sets; use the ISPF LIST command to print log and list data sets
during an ISPF session.
An optional print utility exit can be specified by your installation. If this exit is
installed, it may cause the Hardcopy utility’s response to differ from the following
descriptions. Refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more information
about the print utility exit.
Another factor that can affect the Hardcopy utility’s performance is whether the
TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed. If the TSO/E Information Center
Facility is installed, your installation can optionally allow ISPF to display a panel
for submitting TSO/E Information Center Facility information with the print
request. See “Using the TSO/E Information Center Facility” on page 185 for more
information.
If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is not installed, the Hardcopy utility first
displays the panel shown in Figure 114.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Hardcopy Utility
More:
+
Process option
1. Print and keep data set or member
2. Print and delete sequential data sets
Data Set Name . .
Volume Serial . . . .
Data Set Password . .
Print Mode . . . . . . . BATCH
Batch Sysout class . . .
Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . . . .
Local Sysout class . . .

(If not cataloged)
(If password protected)
(Batch or Local)
(BATCH only)
(LOCAL only)
(LOCAL only)

Job statement information: (If not to local printer/external writer, verify
before proceeding)
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 114. Hardcopy Utility Panel - before JCL Generation (ISRUHCP)

Hardcopy Utility Panel Action Bar
The Reset ISPF Statistics panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

182

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6)
RefList

For information about referral lists, see the chapter on Using
Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers the following choices:
1
General
2
Function of the hardcopy utility
3
Selecting a print mode
4
Submitting a background job to print a data set or member
5
Routing a data set to a printer local to your terminal group
6
Printing a data set using TSO/E Information Center
Facility
7
Appendices
8
Index

Hardcopy Utility Panel Fields
The Data Set Name, Volume Serial, Data Set Password, and Job statement
information fields, shown in Figure 114 on page 182, are explained in the Libraries
and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I. The other fields on the
panel are:
Print Mode
Lets you specify one of the following print modes:
BATCH

Submits your print request as a background job.

LOCAL

Routes your data to a local printer, such as an IBM 328x
printer that is connected to your terminal group.

Batch Sysout Class
Destination of printed data set. Used only if the data set is to be printed
and Batch SYSOUT class is specified.
Local Printer ID or Writer name
Destination of printed data set. Used only if the data set is to be printed
and Local Printer ID or external writer name is specified.
Note: If you specify a Local Printer ID or writer name and you have
selected the Edit PRINTDS Command option on the ISPF Settings
panel (option 0), ISPF displays the Local Print Command Edit panel
to allow you to intercept and edit the PRINTDS command before it
is processed. For more information on editing the PRINTDS
command, see the Libraries and Data Sets chapter in the z/OS ISPF
User’s Guide Vol I.
Local Sysout Class
Used in conjunction with the Local Printer ID or Writer Name. Specifies
the output class to use for output processing.

Generating and Submitting JCL
Follow these steps to generate and submit JCL for your print jobs:
1. Choose one of the options listed at the top of the panel and type its code, 1 (for
PK) or 2 (for PD), in the Option field.
2. Specify a fully qualified data set name and member name.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

183

Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6)
This is a required field. If you are entering a fully qualified TSO data set name,
you must enclose the name in quotes. If you omit the quotes, the data set prefix
from your TSO user profile is automatically added to the beginning of the data
set name.
3. If the data set is not cataloged, specify the volume serial.
4. If your data set is password protected, type the password in the Data Set
Password field. For more information on data set passwords, see the Libraries
and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
5. Specify either BATCH or LOCAL in the Print Mode field.
6. Specify one of the following:
v If you chose BATCH in the previous step, type a Batch SYSOUT class and
any job statement information you need.
v If you chose LOCAL in the previous step, type the name of a local printer or
writer name in the Local Printer ID field. Job statement information is
ignored.
7. Press Enter.
What happens next depends on your choice in step 5. If you chose BATCH, see
step 7a. If you chose LOCAL, see step 7b on page 185.
a. If you chose BATCH, ISPF generates the JCL and displays the panel shown
in Figure 115, with the message JCL generated in the upper-right corner.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Hardcopy Utility
JCL generated
More:
+
Process option 1 1. Print and keep data set or member
2. Print and delete sequential data sets
3. Exit without submitting job
Enter End command to submit job.
Data Set Name . . ’MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TESTA)’
Volume Serial . . . .
(If not cataloged)
Data Set Password . .
(If password protected)
Batch Sysout class .
Print Mode . . . . .
Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . .
Local Sysout class .

. . A
. : BATCH

(Batch or Local)

. :
. :

Job statement information:
Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT

F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

F6=CHANGE

Figure 115. Hardcopy Utility Panel - after JCL Generation (ISRUHCJP)

At this point you can either:
v Cancel the job by typing the CANCEL command in the Option field and
pressing Enter.
v Submit the job by typing the END command and pressing Enter. ISPF
displays the following message at the bottom of the panel:
IKJ56250I JOB useridA(JOBnnnnn) SUBMITTED
***

184

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6)
Press Enter. For more information about BATCH printing, see Additional
Batch Printing Information.
v Specify another data set name for printing.
b. If you chose LOCAL, ISPF calls the PRINTDS TSO command processor to
print the data set on the specified local printer.
A message is displayed in the short message area to show that PRINTDS
has accepted the request. At this point, you can:
v Specify another option and press Enter
v Enter the END command
v Enter the CANCEL command
8. If you entered CANCEL or END, ISPF determines the next panel you see as
follows:
v If you entered the Hardcopy utility from the ISPF Primary Option Menu or
through the jump function (=), ISPF displays the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
v If you entered the Hardcopy utility from the Utility Selection Panel, ISPF
returns you to that panel.

Additional Batch Printing Information
When you enter the desired information and press Enter, ISPF generates JCL that
contains the job statement operands and a job step that prints the specified data
set, using the IBM IEBGENER utility.
Notes:
1. IEBGENER does not support packed data. If you try to print packed data, you
may get unwanted results. IEBGENER prints the data set one logical record per
print line. If the logical record length is greater than the printer width, the
logical record is truncated.
2. ISPF does not unpack data automatically before printing it. Therefore, if you
need to unpack data before printing it, edit the data set and enter the PACK
primary command with the OFF operand. Refer to z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit
Macros for more information about the PACK command.
Once the JCL for the first job step is generated, the job statement operands are
shown for information aboutly. They are no longer highlighted and you cannot
type over them, since the job statement has already been generated. You can then
select another data set name to cause another job step to be generated.

Using the TSO/E Information Center Facility
If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can allow
ISPF to display the panel shown in Figure 116 on page 186.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

185

Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6)

Hardcopy Utility
Process option 1 1. Print and keep data set or member
2. Print and delete sequential data set

Data Set Name . . . .
Volume Serial . . . .
Data Set Password . .

(If not cataloged)
(If password protected data set)

Printer location . .
Printer format . . .
Number of copies . .

Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT

F3=END
F11=RIGHT

F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

F6=CHANGE

Figure 116. Hardcopy Utility Panel - with the TSO/E Information Center Facility Installed
(ISRUHCPI)

Follow these steps to use the TSO/E Information Center Facility to submit your
print jobs:
1. Choose one of the options listed at the top of the panel and type its code, PK or
PD, in the Option field.
2. Enter a fully qualified data set name and member name.

3.
4.

7.
8.

186

You must specify at least the low-level qualifier, such as LIST. If you enter your
user prefix as part of the data set name, you must enclose the complete data set
name in quotes. However, if you omit the user prefix and quotes, your user
prefix is automatically added to the beginning of the data set name.
If the data set is not cataloged, enter the volume serial.
If your data set is password-protected, enter the password in the Data Set
Password field. For more information about data set passwords, see the
Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
You can either leave the Printer location field blank or enter the location ID of
the printer to be used. The location ID is assigned by your installation.
You can also enter a partial location name followed by an asterisk (*).
You can either leave the “Printer format” field blank or enter the format ID of
the printer to be used. The format ID is assigned by your installation.
You can also enter a partial format name followed by an asterisk (*). If your
printer location and format entries do not identify a specific printer, a printer
selection list is displayed. From this list, which is similar to a member selection
list, you can select a printer.
Specify the number of copies you want.
Press Enter.
The values entered in the fields on this panel are passed directly to the TSO/E
Information Center Facility for processing.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)

Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)
The Download Data Set to Workstation utility allows you to upload or download
data sets from the host environment to your workstation. This utility is also used
to download the WSA installation files needed to create a workstation connection.

Before you install the Workstation Utility
Review the information in the appendix Installing the Client/Server
Component in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I before you use this utility to
install the WSA for the first time.
When you select option 7 from the Utility Selection Panel, ISPF displays the
Download Data Set to Workstation panel shown in Figure 117.
Menu Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Download Data Set to Workstation
1 ISPF C/S
2 Data Set

Download ISPF C/S component
Download/upload ISPF library, partitioned, or seq data set

Option ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT

F3=END
F11=RIGHT

F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

F6=CHANGE

Figure 117. Download Data Set to Workstation Utility Panel (ISPUDL)

Download ISPF C/S component
This option enables you to download the ISPF Workstation Agent (WSA)
component installation program to your desktop workstation. After downloading
the WSA and installing it, you can use ISPF on a z/OS host through GUI windows
on your workstation and use your workstation connection in distributed editing.
See Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server Component in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I for a description of the download and installation processes.
When you select option 1 from the Download Data Set to Workstation panel, ISPF
displays the ISPF Client/Server Component Download panel shown in Figure 118
on page 188.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

187

Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)

Client/Server Component Download
Download methods
1. FTP (requires workstation FTP server)
2. ISPF C/S (requires workstation connection)
3. Manual
Workstation Type
1. Windows 2000/NT
2. Reserved

3. AIX
4. Solaris

5. HP UX

Directory to copy file to:
Data Set to copy file from:
Enter "/" to select option
Create directory to which the file is to be copied.
Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT

F3=END
F11=RIGHT

F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

F6=CHANGE

Figure 118. ISPF Client/Server Component Download Panel (ISPWSD01)

The Client/Server Component Download panel enables you to choose the
download method and workstation type you want to use to put the WSA
installation program on your desktop.

Client/Server Component Download panel
The Client/Server Component Download panel contains these fields:
Download methods
You have three choices for downloading the WSA installation program.
FTP (requires workstation FTP server)
Download using FTP. ISPF invokes the host FTP client to connect
with the FTP server on your workstation and transfer the WSA
installation program. This option can be used to download the
WSA installation program for the first time. It is described in
Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server component in the z/OS
ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
ISPF C/S (requires existing workstation connection)
Download using ISPF Client/Server. If you already have a
workstation agent installed on your workstation, you can use the
built-in file transfer services to download a new or updated WSA
installation program. The file must be downloaded in binary
format.
Manual
ISPF tells you the name of the file you need to copy. You can copy
it with any method you prefer as long as you maintain the data
integrity of the WSA installation program. The file must be
downloaded in binary format. This option can be used to
download the WSA installation program for the first time. It is
described in Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server component
in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

188

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)
Workstation type
The workstation agent runs on different workstation platforms and you
must indicate which platform you have, so that you receive the correct
version.
1. Windows 2000 or NT
2. Reserved
3. AIX
4. Solaris
5. HP UX
Directory to copy file to
Specify a directory on your workstation where you want to store the WSA
installation program. You can specify a full path name or a relative
directory, or leave this field blank. If you leave it blank, the download is
made to your home directory (in the case of FTP downloads) or the current
directory (in the case of client/server downloads). If you specify a relative
directory (one that does not start with a drive letter or slash character) the
directory is relative to the FTP home directory or the client/server current
directory.
Data set to copy file from
The host data set that contains the WSA installation program. This value
varies depending on the naming convention that was used when ISPF was
installed.
Create directory to which the file is to be copied
If you want ISPF to create the directory on your workstation before
copying the WSA installation program, enter a ″/″ in this field.

ISPF Client/Server (C/S) Download
When you select choice 2 “ISPF C/S (requires workstation connection)” under
Download methods on the ISPF Client/Server Component Download panel, you are
choosing to use the ISPF Client/Server method of downloading. This method is
used to obtain updated versions of the WSA and can only be used if you have
already installed and initiated the WSA and established a workstation connection.
If this is the first time you are downloading the WSA, use the FTP or Manual
methods of downloading, instead.
If you do not already have a workstation connection (with or without GUI display)
established, ISPF displays the ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice panel shown
in Figure 119 on page 190.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

189

Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │ ISPWSD03
Client/Server Installation Notice
│
I │
│
│ A workstation connection is required to download a new Client/Server
│
1 │ component using workstation agent file transfer services.
│
2 │
│
│ Do you wish to start a workstation connection now?
│
│
1. Yes, start workstation connection now and continue with download │
│
2. No, do not start workstation connection
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
O │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
F └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 119. ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice (ISPWSD03)

The field on this panel is:
Do you wish to start a workstation connection now?
This field enables you to start a workstation connection directly from the
panel. This assumes, of course, that you have a previous copy of the WSA
installed on your workstation.
1. Yes, start workstation connection now and continue with download.
Select this option when you know you have a Workstation Agent
installed and you have initiated it on your workstation.
2. No, do not start workstation connection
Select this option when you know that a prerequisite for
establishing a workstation connection has not been met and you
want to return to the Client/Server Component Download panel.
If you have already established a workstation connection (see “Initiate the
Workstation connection” on page 66) and you select this download method, the
Client/Server transfer service is immediately invoked to copy the WSA installation
program to your workstation. A successful transfer results in the following panel.

190

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)

┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │
ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program
│ ──
I │
│
│ The ISPF Client/Server Component workstation install program has been │
1 │ copied to your workstation in directory:
│
2 │
│
│
C:\TEMP
│
│
│
│ in directory:
│
│
│
│ End your workstation connection, close the active workstation agent, │
│ and complete the installation by running the install program ISPFINST │
│ on your workstation in the directory specified. The program is a self │
│ extracting executable that will result in additional files being
│
│ generated on your workstation.
│
│
│
│ Do you wish to end your workstation connection now?
│
│
1. Yes, end workstation connection now
│
│
2. No, do not end workstation connection now
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
O │ F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
│
│ F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
│
F └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 120. ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program Panel (ISPWSD06)

Running the Installation Program (ISPFINST)
After you have downloaded the Workstation Agent Installation program, resume
the installation by running the program called ISPFINST.EXE (ispfinst on UNIX
platforms). This is a self-extracting executable program that generates additional
necessary files on your workstation. See Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server
component in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for a description of the Workstation
Agent installation process.

Download/upload data set
The final option on the Download Data Set to Workstation (Option 3.7) panel is
called “Data Set — Download/upload ISPF library, partitioned, or seq data set”.
This option provides a panel-driven interface to the ISPF FILEXFER service,
enabling you to transfer data between the host and the workstation. This is a
manually controlled alternative to using the Workstation Tool Integration (see
“Workstation Tool Integration” on page 74).
Selecting option 2 causes the following panel to appear:

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

191

Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)

Menu RefList RefMode Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Download/Upload Data Set To/From Workstation
ISPF Library:
Project . .
Group . . .
Type . . .
Member . .

. MYPROJ
. DEV
. SOURCE
.

. . .

(Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Workstation File:
File Name . . . . .
Transfer Option
1. Download to workstation
2. Upload from workstation
Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT

F3=END
F11=RIGHT

Options
Generate statistics on upload
Transfer in text mode
Replace existing member/file
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

F6=CHANGE

Figure 121. ISPF Data Set Panel (ISPUDLDS)

Use the Download or Upload selections to indicate whether you want to download
host data to the workstation, or upload workstation data to the host. Enter 1 for
“download to workstation”. Enter 2 for “upload from workstation”.
You can transfer data from either PDS or sequential host data sets. The host data
set must exist before attempting a transfer, but a PDS member is created if it does
not already exist. Workstation files need not exist before downloading data from
the host, but the specified directory must be there.
For downloading only, you can specify an asterisk (*) character in the workstation
file name. ISPF substitutes the member name of the data being downloaded for the
*. This enables you to select multiple members from the member list to be
downloaded as separate files.
“Generate Statistics on Upload” indicates whether ISPF member statistics should
be generated when a workstation file is uploaded to a member of a PDS. Statistics
are only generated when the host data set is record format F or V.
The “Transfer in Text mode” field determines whether the file transfer is done in
text mode (with ASCII to EBCDIC translation) or in binary mode (without any
translation). When transferring in text Mode, the ispf filexfer service provides a
one-to-one mapping of all 256 code points between the host code page and the
workstation code page. Most other file transfer utilities (for example, ftp) only
provide a one-to-one mapping of displayable characters.

Outlist Utility (Option 3.8)
This utility gives you the ability to browse, print, delete, or requeue job output that
is in a held SYSOUT queue. When you select this option, a panel is displayed
(Figure 122 on page 193) that allows you to select an option and enter the
appropriate operands.

192

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Outlist Utility (Option 3.8)

Menu Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Outlist Utility
More:
+
L List job names/id(s) via the TSO STATUS command
D Delete job output from SYSOUT hold queue
P Print job output and delete from SYSOUT hold queue
R Requeue job output to a new output class
blank Display job output
For Job to be
Jobname .
Class . .
JobID . .

selected:
.
.
.

For Job to be requeued:
New Output class . .
For Job to be printed:
Printer Carriage Control . .
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

(A for ANSI
)
(M for machine )
F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 122. Outlist Utility Panel (ISRUOLP1)

Outlist Utility Panel Action Bar
The Outlist Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
Listing the status of jobs
3
Deleting the output of a held job
4
Printing the output of a held job
5
Requeueing the output of a held job
6
Displaying the Output of a held job
7
Appendices
8
Index

Outlist Utility Panel Fields
The fields on this panel are:
Jobname

The held SYSOUT job. It is required for all options except option L.

Class

The SYSOUT hold queue. If you omit the CLASS operand, all
SYSOUT queues are searched for the specified job.

JobID

Required only if more than one job exists with the same job name.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

193

Outlist Utility (Option 3.8)
New Output class
When requeuing a job (option R), enter the new SYSOUT hold
class here.
Printer Carriage Control
When printing a data set (option P), enter a value here that
corresponds to the type of carriage control characters in the data
set. Valid values are:
A

If the data contains American National Standard Institute
(ANSI) carriage control characters.

If the data contains machine control characters.

Blank If the data contains no carriage control characters.
The record formats for the corresponding data sets are FBA, FBM,
and FB, respectively.

Outlist Utility Options
The following sections explain the options listed at the top of the Outlist Utility
panel.

L — List Job Names/ID(s) via the TSO STATUS Command
If you select option L, a list of job names and job IDs is displayed. If you leave the
job name blank, or if the job name is your user ID plus one identifying character,
the status is listed for all jobs having job names consisting of your user ID
followed by that identifying character. If you supply any other job name, the status
for that exact job is displayed.
The list of job names is displayed on the lower portion of the panel. If the list is
too long to fit on the screen, three asterisks are displayed on the last line of the
screen. You can display the remainder of the list by pressing Enter.

D — Delete Job Output from SYSOUT Hold Queue
If you select option D, the held output for a specific job is deleted from the
specified SYSOUT queue.

P — Print Job Output and Delete from SYSOUT Hold Queue
If you select option P, the held output for a specific job is removed from the
SYSOUT queue and placed in an ISPF-defined data set for printing. You can
choose the record format for this data set by putting an entry in the Printer
Carriage Control field.
An optional print utility exit can be installed by your system programmer. If this
exit is installed, it may cause the Outlist utility’s response to differ from the
following descriptions. Refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more
information about the print utility exit.
Another factor that can affect the performance of the Outlist utility is whether the
TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed. If the TSO/E Information Center
Facility is installed, your installation can optionally allow ISPF to display a panel
for submitting the TSO/E Information Center Facility information with the print
request. See Figure 164 on page 275 for an example of this panel and “Using the
TSO/E Information Center Facility” on page 185 for information about the fields
on this panel.

194

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Outlist Utility (Option 3.8)
If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is not installed, the Outlist utility displays
the panel shown in Figure 163 on page 268 when you press Enter. Use this panel to
tell ISPF how and where the job output is to be printed. This option does not
honor multiple copies for output on hold queue. To print multiple copies use
option R.
ISPF uses temporary data sets named prefix.userid.SPFxxx.OUTLIST (if your data
set prefix in your TSO user profile is different from your TSO userid) or
userid.SPFxxx.OUTLIST (if your prefix and userid are the same), where xxx is a
number between 100 and 999.
Attention: If you keep or use all data sets through 999, ISPF resets to 100 and
uses the existing data sets. Also, ISPF can use the data sets that you allocate using
the temporary data set naming convention.

R — Requeue Job Output to a New Output Class
If you select option R, the held output for a specific job is requeued to another
SYSOUT class from the specified SYSOUT queue. You must enter the new SYSOUT
class on the panel in the “New Output class” field. You can use this option to print
output with multiple copies by requeuing to a SYSOUT class predefined to print
multiple copies.

Blank — Display Job Output
If you leave the Option field blank, the held output for the specified job is
displayed in Browse mode. You can use all Browse commands. The data remains
in the SYSOUT queue. When you enter the END or RETURN command to end
Browse, the Outlist Utility panel is displayed again, and you can then choose to
print, requeue, or delete the job output.

Command Table Utility (Option 3.9)
The Command Table utility (option 3.9) enables you to create or change ISPF
application command tables. When you select this option, a panel is displayed
(Figure 123 on page 196) to prompt you for an application ID. The name of the
command table is then derived by adding CMDS to the application ID. If the table
exists in the table input library, ISPTLIB, it is displayed and can be modified. If the
table does not exist in the table input library, a new table is generated.
The command table displays the search order of commands for a particular logical
screen. The order is from top to bottom of those commands displayed. The “User
table” and “Site table” fields are blank if no values are set for them in the ISPF
Configuration table, or if values have been set but the tables do not exist in the
“ISPTLIB” concatenation.
You cannot use this utility to change a command table that is currently in use.
Command table ISPCMDS, the system command table, is always in use by the
Dialog Manager component. If you enter ISP in the Application ID field, ISPF
displays the ISPCMDS command table in read-only mode.
While you are using this utility to change a command table, the table cannot be
used for other purposes. For example, you cannot use split screen and select a
function with NEWAPPL(XYZ) if you are changing command table XYZCMDS.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

195

Command Table Utility (Option 3.9)

Menu Help
─ ┌─────────────────────────────── Commands ────────────────────────────────┐
I │ ISPUCMA
Command Table Utility
│
│
│
1 │ Specifications
Command table search order
│
│ Application ID . . ISR
Application table . : ISR
│
2 │ Enter "/" to select option
User table 1 . . . . : USER
│
│
Show description field
User table 2 . . . . :
│
3 │
User table 3 . . . . :
│
4 │
Site table 1 . . . . : SITE
│
│
Site table 2 . . . . :
│
5 │
Site table 3 . . . . :
│
6 │
System table . . . . : ISP
│
7 │
│
8 │ If no application ID is specified, the current application ID will be │
9 │ used. The name of the command table to be processed is formed by
│
1 │ prefixing the application id to the string ’CMDS’. For example:
│
1 │ Application ID . . TST results in a command table name of ’TSTCMDS’. │
1 │
│
1 │ Command ===>
│
1 │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
O │ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 123. Command Table Utility Panel (ISPUCMA)

Command Table Utility Panel Fields
The fields on the Command Table Utility panel function as follows:
Application ID
Contains the name of an application for which you want to define
commands.
Show description field
Allows you to display the descriptions as well as the commands and
definitions.
The command table for the named application is displayed on a Command Table
editing panel (Figure 124 on page 197). This panel can be scrolled up and down
using the scroll commands.

196

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Command Table Utility (Option 3.9)

File Menu Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Update TSTCMDS
Row 1 to 4 of 4
Insert (I), delete (D), repeat (R) and edit (E) command entries.
Enter END command to save changes or CANCEL to end without saving.
Verb
T Action
SORT
0 SELECT PGM(PQRSORT) PARM(&ZPARM)
PREPARE 4
QUIT
2 ALIAS END
EXPLAIN 4
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

Scroll ===> PAGE
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

Figure 124. Command Table Editing Panel (ISPUCMD)

The column headings on the panel are:
Verb

The command verb, which is the name of the command you are defining
in the command table. A command verb must be from 2–8 characters long,
inclusive, and must begin with an alphabetic character. The content of this
column is assigned to the ZCTVERB system variable.

T (truncation)
The minimum number of characters that you must enter to find a match
with the command verb. If this number is zero or equal to the length of
the command verb, you must enter the complete command verb. For
example, in Figure 124 the PREPARE command has a truncation value of 4.
Therefore, for the TST application used as the example in the figure, only
the first four letters, PREP, must be entered to call this command. The
content of this column is assigned to the ZCTTRUNC system variable.
Action
The actual coding of the action to be carried out when you enter the
command. The action length must not be greater than 240 characters. The
content of this column is assigned to the ZCTACT system variable.
Notes:
1. Do not use ACTIONS, CANCEL, CRETRIEV, CURSOR, EXIT, PRINT,
PRINTG, PRINTHI, PRINTL, PRINTLHI, RESIZE, RETF, RETP,
RETRIEVE, SPLIT, SPLITV, SWAP, WINDOW, or WS as keywords in
the Action column. These keywords are intended only for use in the
system command table distributed with ISPF. They are not intended for
use in application command tables.
2. Take care with ACTIONs that use ZPARM, as the ISPF parser will add
a matching parenthesis if one appears to be missing. Consider an entry
of ″SELECT CMD(%CMD &ZPARM) NEWAPPL(ISR)″. If ″(XYZ″ is
passed then the command will receive ″(XYZ) NEWAPPL(ISR)″ as a
parameter.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

197

Command Table Utility (Option 3.9)
The valid actions are:
Select

Causes the selected dialog (command, program, or
selection panel) to be given control immediately. Refer to
z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for more
information about the SELECT statement and its keywords.

Alias

Allows one command verb to carry out the action defined
for another. For example, in Figure 124 on page 197, QUIT
is an alias for END. Therefore, for the TST application used
as the example in the figure, entering QUIT causes the
same action to occur as entering END.

Passthru

Causes the command to be passed through to the dialog as
if it had not been found in the command table.

Setverb

Causes the command to be passed through to the dialog,
with the command verb stored separately from the
operands.

NOP

Causes the command to be inoperative. An inactive
command message is displayed.

Blank

Causes the command table entry to be ignored. ISPF
continues to search for additional entries for the same
command verb. If the command is not found in either the
application command table or the system command table,
an invalid command message is displayed.

xxxxx

A variable name, beginning with an ampersand (&), allows
dynamic specification of the command action.

Description

An optional, brief description of the action the command
verb is to perform. Since this column is offset three spaces
under the Action column, the description length must not
be greater than 80 characters. The content of this column is
assigned to the ZCTDESC system variable.

For a new table, this panel initially contains dummy entries with all fields shown
as underscores. The underscores are pad characters and need not be blanked out.
However, any null entries where at least the verb contains all underscores are
automatically deleted when the table is saved.

Scrolling a Command Table
You can scroll the table entries, using the ISPF UP and DOWN scroll commands,
and change one or more entries simply by typing over them.

Saving a Command Table
The END command causes the table to be saved in the table output library,
ISPTABL, and ends the utility.

Canceling a Command Table
The CANCEL command ends the command table display without saving the table.

Using Command Table Line Commands
You can enter the following line commands at the left of any entry by typing over
the four quotation marks. Multiple line commands or changes can be entered in a
single interaction. Line commands followed by a number, such as D3, are repeated

198

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Command Table Utility (Option 3.9)
that number of times. The lines are processed in the order in which they appear on
the screen. Any line commands or changes that are entered concurrently with the
END command are processed before the table is saved.

D — Deleting Lines
The D command deletes one or n lines (D[n]).

E — Editing Lines
The E command edits one or n lines (E[n]). You can modify the action or
description fields of a line.

I — Inserting Lines
The I command inserts one or n lines (I[n]). The inserted lines contain underscores
(pad characters) in all field positions.

R — Repeating Lines
The R command repeats a line one or n times (R[n]). The repeated lines contain
underscores (pad characters) in the Verb and T (truncation) fields, but the Action
and Description fields are copied from the line on which the R command was
entered.

V — Viewing Lines
The V command views one or n lines (V[n]). You can look at the entire command
entry including the command action and description fields, but you cannot change
them.

Format Specifications Utility (Option 3.11)
The Format Specifications utility (option 3.11) is provided to support the IBM 5550
terminal using the Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS). It is used to maintain
formats that are used when viewing, browsing, and editing to display data sets
that contain predefined formatted records.
The purpose of a format is to structure data from a record into fields, and to define
the order these fields are to be physically displayed on the screen when you are
viewing, browsing, and editing.
When you select this option, a panel is displayed (Figure 125 on page 200) that
allows you to add, copy, delete, or update a format. You can also display the
format list.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

199

Format Specifications Utility (Option 3.11)

Menu Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Format Specifications
More:
+
A
Add a new format
C
Copy formats
D
Delete a format
U
Update format
L or BLANK Display format list
Format Name . . .
For COPY operations, specify the following:
From Format . . .

(Blank for format list, * for all formats)

From Table . . .

(Default is "ISRFORM" )

Note: The Format Utility is provided for support of the IBM 5550 terminal
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 125. Format Specifications Panel (ISRFM01)

Format Specifications Panel Action Bar
The Format Specifications panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
Add a new format definition
2
Copy formats
3
Delete a format
4
Update a format
5
Display Format selection list
6
Appendices
7
Index

Format Specifications Panel Fields
The fields on this panel are:
Format Name The name of the format that you want to add, delete, or update.
When copying a format (option C), this is the name you want the
copied format stored under.
From Format

200

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

When copying a format (option C), you can:
v Enter the name of a format you want to copy
v Enter an asterisk (*) to copy all formats
v Leave the field blank to display a copy format selection list.

Format Specifications Utility (Option 3.11)
See Figure 127 on page 203 for an example of a Copy Format
Selection List display.
From Table

When copying a format (option C), you can:
v Enter the name of a table from which you want to copy a format
v Leave the field blank if you want to copy a format from the
ISRFORM table.
Note: The ISRFORM table is the default location in which all of
your user-defined formats are stored. If you have not yet
defined any formats, this table will be empty.

Format Specifications Panel Options
The following sections describe the options shown at the top of the Format
Specifications panel.

A — Add a New Format
If you specify option A and a format name, the Format Definition panel
(Figure 126) is displayed.
Format Definition (FORM01)
More:
Field
Number
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
Field
Start
field
Field

Start Field Field
Column Length Type
00000
00
00000
00
00000
00
00000
00
00000
00
00000
00
00000
00
00000
00
00000
00
00000
00

Number:
Column:
Length:
Type :

Field Start Field Field
Number Column Length Type
2
00000
00
4
00000
00
6
00000
00
8
00000
00
10
00000
00
12
00000
00
14
00000
00
16
00000
00
18
00000
00
20
00000
00

Identifies the field position on the screen.
From 1 to 32760; Specifies column position in the record.
From 1 to 71; Fields must not overlap.
E - single-byte, D - double-byte, M - mixed data

Enter the END command to exit and save the format.
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F9=Swap F12=Cancel
Figure 126. Format Definition Panel (ISRFM02)

A field definition includes:
Field Number The number of the field for which you are defining a format. You
can define up to 20 fields.
Start Column Starting column position in the record.
Field Length

Field length in bytes; the maximum is 71 bytes.

Field Type

The type of data that can be entered in the field. Valid types are:
E
EBCDIC (single-byte)
D
DBCS (double-byte)
M
Mixed data.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

201

Format Specifications Utility (Option 3.11)
Note: All three of these field types can contain extended graphics
characters. CAPS ON processing is not possible because of
context dependencies. Therefore, it is ignored when you are
editing formatted data.
The format definition information applies to both existing records and inserted
records in a data set.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid using STD or COBOL formats with
numbered data. The results can be different from using formats with
unnumbered data. If you must use numbered data, do not define the
columns the sequence numbers will appear in, or define an EBCDIC or
mixed data field for them.

C — Copy Formats
If you specify option C on the Format Specifications panel, the following occurs:
v If you specify both an asterisk (*) in the From Format field and a table name
other than ISRFORM in the From Table field, all formats stored in the “From”
table are copied to ISRFORM.
Note: If you specify a table name in the From Table field, and that table does
not have the same format as ISRFORM, a severe error occurs.
v If you specify both a format name and a “From” format, the format is copied. If
you specified a “From” table (other than ISRFORM), the format is copied from
that table. Otherwise, the format is copied from ISRFORM. The Format
Definition panel for the newly created format, containing the currently defined
fields, is displayed. You can add, delete, and update field definitions. When you
enter the END command, the format definition is stored in ISRFORM under the
format name you specified.
v If you specify a format name but no “From” format, the Copy Format Selection
List panel (Figure 127 on page 203) is displayed.
If you did not specify a “From” table, the formats listed are those stored in
ISRFORM, the default format table. Otherwise, the formats listed are those
stored in the table you specified.
Note: The ISRFORM table is the default location in which all of your
user-defined formats are stored. If you have not yet defined any formats,
the table will be empty and you will receive a ″No formats found″
message.
You can select a format to copy by entering the S line command to the left of
that format name. Other commands you can enter are U (Update), R (Rename),
D (Delete), SELECT (which is similar to S), SORT, and LOCATE. See “Format
Selection List Commands” on page 204 for a description of these commands.
The format is copied, and the Format Definition panel for the newly created
format, containing the currently defined fields, is displayed. You can add, delete,
and update field definitions. When you enter the END command, the format
definition is stored in ISRFORM under the format name you specified on the
Format Specifications panel.
v If you specify neither a format name nor a “From” format, but you do specify a
“From” table (other than ISRFORM), the Copy Format Selection List panel is
displayed. You can select one or more formats to copy by entering the S line
command to the left of the format name(s). Each of these formats is copied
under the same name from the specified “From” table to the ISRFORM table.

202

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Format Specifications Utility (Option 3.11)
Note: If you do not specify option C but specify a name in the From Format field,
the From Format field is ignored.
Copy Format Selection List (ISRFORM)
Row 1 to 4 of 4
Name
Rename
Created Last Modified
ID
COMMON01
02/11/19 02/11/19 11:08
USERID
COMMON02
02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16
USERID
COMMON03
02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16
USERID
COMMON04
02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16
USERID
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

Scroll ===> PAGE
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

Figure 127. Copy Format Selection List Panel (ISRFM04)

D — Delete a Format
If you specify option D and a format name on the Format Specifications panel, the
format is deleted.

U — Update a Format
If you specify option U and a format name on the Format Specification panel, the
Format Definition panel containing the currently defined fields is displayed. You
can add, delete, and update field definitions.

L or BLANK — Display Format List
If you specify option L or leave the Option line blank on the Format Specifications
panel, the Format Selection List panel (Figure 128 on page 204) is displayed.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

203

Format Specifications Utility (Option 3.11)

Format Selection List
Row 1 to 4 of 4
Name
Rename
Created Last Modified
ID
COMMON01
02/11/19 02/11/19 11:08
USERID
COMMON02
02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16
USERID
COMMON03
02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16
USERID
COMMON04
02/11/19 02/11/19 11:16
USERID
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

Scroll ===> PAGE
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

Figure 128. Format Selection List Panel (ISRFM03)

Format Selection List Commands
The following sections describe the commands you can use on a Format Selection
List panel.

Deleting a Format
If you specify the D line command beside a format name, the format is deleted.

Locating Format Names
The LOCATE command is another useful tool, especially if you have a long format
list. To use the LOCATE command, ensure that the list is sorted by name. Next,
enter the LOCATE command on the Command line. The syntax is:
LOCATE name
where:
name

The name of the format you want to find.

For example, the following command would find a format named FORM03:
LOCATE FORM03

If the format exists, the entry for the specified format name appears as the second
line following the header lines. If the specified name is not found, the existing
format name that would immediately precede the specified name appears as the
first line following the header lines.

204

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Format Specifications Utility (Option 3.11)

Renaming a Format
If you specify the R line command beside a format name, you must also specify its
new name in the Rename field before you press Enter. If you do not, the Enter
required field message appears in the upper-right corner of the screen and the
cursor moves to the Rename field.

Sorting Format Names
You can sort the name list on this panel by entering the SORT command on the
Command line. The syntax of the SORT command is:
SORT [NAME | TIME]

where:
NAME
Sort by name.
TIME Sort by time last modified.
For example, the following command would sort a format selection list by time:
SORT TIME

Updating or Selecting a Format
If you specify the U or S line command beside a format name, the Format
Definition panel containing the currently defined fields is displayed. You can add,
delete, and update field definitions.
You can specify that multiple operations be done at the same time. However, if
you specify U or S with other line commands, any commands after the first U or S
are ignored.
The SELECT command provides you with another way to specify a format. This
command is entered on the Command line.
The syntax of the SELECT command is:
SELECT name
where:
name
The name of the format you want to select.
If the format exists, the Format Definition panel containing the currently defined
fields is displayed. You can add, delete, and update field definitions.
If no format exists for that name, a new format is created, and the Format
Definition panel is displayed to allow you to define fields.

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
Note: For an introduction to the SuperC and SuperCE utilities (options 3.12 and
3.13), see Appendix A, “SuperC Reference.”

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

205

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
The SuperC utility (option 3.12) is a dialog that uses the SuperC program to
compare data sets of unlimited size and record length at the file, line, word, or
byte level. The panel shown in Figure 129 is used to specify the name of a new
data set.
Note: In this context, a new data set is an updated version of a previously created
data set, such as a data set in your private library that has been modified
but has not yet been promoted.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SuperC Compare Utility - New Data Set
Specify "New" Data Set to be compared, then press the ENTER key.
More:
Project
Group .
Type .
Member

.
.
.
.

. . .

(Blank or pattern for member selection list,
"*" for all members)

"New" Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Profile DS Name . . .
Data Set Password . .

(If New data set password protected)

Enter "/" to select option
Execution Mode
Output Mode
Mixed Mode
1 1. Foreground
1 1. View
Bypass selection list
2. Batch
2. Browse
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 129. SuperC Utility Panel (ISRSSNEW)

This panel requires only the names of the input data sets and a foreground or
batch mode setting.
Note: For DBCS searches and compares to function properly, ISPF must be
invoked with the JAPANESE keyword, on a terminal that supports DBCS,
and the MIXED process option must be supplied to SuperC.

SuperC Utility Panel Action Bar
The SuperC Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:

206

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

RefList

For information about referral lists, see the chapter on Using
Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Overview of SuperC
Specifying the ″NEW″ data set
Specifying the ″OLD″ data set
Member selection
Setting batch output parameters
Interpreting listings
Interpreting return codes
Appendices
Index

SuperC Utility Panel Fields
All the fields on this panel are explained in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I, except:
Profile DSN
The name of an optional data set that can contain a compare type, listing
type, sequence numbers setting, Browse setting, process options, and
process statements. All these elements, when combined in one data set or
member, are called a profile. See “Profiles and Defaults - Activate Profiles
and Defaults” on page 224 for information about using the SuperCE utility
(option 3.13) to create a profile data set.
The listing type and sequence numbers setting of the profile are copied
onto the panel used to specify the old data set name (Figure 130 on page
208), but can be typed over or blanked out. However, other elements of the
profile are in effect, even though they are not shown on the panel.
Mixed Mode
Select this field to have SuperC scan and parse the input data set lines for
DBCS text strings.
Note: Mixed Mode is not valid for the File or Byte compare.
Bypass Selection List
When a member pattern is entered in the PDS Member List field or the
member name portion of the data set field (such as
MY.DATA.SET(pattern)), selecting this field causes SuperC to process all
members matching that pattern without displaying a member selection list.
Leaving this field blank causes the member list to be displayed.
Execution Mode
The processing mode you want to use when comparing the data sets.
Choose one of the following:
1

Foreground. After the old data set panel and member selection, if
any, are completed, foreground mode compares the new and old
data sets and stores the results in the data set specified in the
Listing DS Name field, which you can browse at the terminal.

Batch. After the old data set panel and the member list, if any, are
completed, batch mode causes the display of the SuperC Utility Submit Batch Jobs panel, so you can specify job card and print
disposition information or edit the JCL. Then, the batch job is
submitted to compare the new and old data sets. See “Submitting a
SuperC Job in Batch Mode” on page 212 for more information.
Note: You cannot specify a data set password in batch mode. If
your data sets are password protected, use foreground
mode.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

207

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
Output Mode
The output mode you want to use when displaying the listing file. Choose
one of the following:
1

View. This enables the listing file to be displayed in view mode. All
View functions are enabled in this mode.

Browse. This enables the listing file to be displayed in the browse
mode. All Browse functions are enabled in this mode.

When you complete the New Data Set panel and press Enter, ISPF displays the
panel shown in Figure 130. Of the five fields shown at the bottom of the panel
(Volume Serial, Listing DS Name, Data Set Password, Listing Type, and Sequence
Numbers), all except Listing Type may not appear, depending on the mode you
choose (foreground or batch) and the contents of the profile data set. Also, if you
request a member list or specify an asterisk (*) in the Member field on the new
data set panel, ISPF does not display a Member field on the old data set panel.
Note: In this context, an old data set is a base version of a data set, such as a data
set in a production library.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SuperC Compare Utility - Old Data Set
Specify "Old" Data Set to be compared, then press the ENTER key to compare to
"New" Data set . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
More:
+
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . TEST
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . .
"Old" other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Listing DS Name . . . SUPERC.LIST
Data Set Password . .
(If Old data set password protected)
Listing Type . . . . 1 1. Delta
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

2. CHNG

3. Long

4. OVSUM

F7=Backward F8=Forward

5. Nolist
F9=Swap

Figure 130. SuperC Utility - Old Data Set Panel (ISRSSOLD)

Specify the name of an old data set. The type of old data set that you can specify
depends on the type of new data set you specified on the previous panel. For
example, you can compare:
v A complete new PDS to a complete old PDS
v A new sequential data set to:
– An old sequential data set
– An old membered PDS
v A new membered PDS to an old sequential data set.
In this context, the term membered PDS refers to a PDS for which a single member
has been specified, such as:

208

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
’USERID.TEST.SCRIPT(NEWDATA)’

SuperC treats a membered PDS as a sequential data set because the comparison is
done on a one-to-one basis. However, SuperC cannot compare a sequential data set
to a complete PDS because it cannot compare one data set to more than one
member of another data set.
When you press Enter, ISPF either displays a member selection list or begins the
comparison. All the fields on this panel are explained in the Libraries and Data
Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I, except the following:
Update DS Name
Tells SuperC the name of the data set that will contain column-oriented
results of the comparison.
Note: This field is not displayed unless your profile data set contains an
update (UPDxxxx) process option.
This data set is normally used as input to post processing programs and
can be specified in addition to the normal listing data set. See the Process
Options selection in “Process Options - Select Process Options” on page
222 for information about the SuperC process options.
If you leave this field blank, SuperC uses the following default name:
prefix.userid.SUPERC.UPDATE

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix
and user ID are identical, only your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have
a prefix, only your user ID is used.
If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified.
Otherwise, SuperC only appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data
set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE NOPREFIX, SuperC uses
the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that
data set are replaced by the new update output.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, SuperC allocates it
for you. The data set is allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a
member name after it, in which case it is allocated as a partitioned data
set.
Note: For the UPDMVS8, UPDCMS8, UPDSEQ0, and UPDPDEL process
options, the update data set contains valid data but only after a
successful compare when differences are detected. The data set is
always empty after a comparison that shows the data sets or
members being compared have no differences.
Listing Type
The type of listing you want SuperC to create when it compares the data
sets. This is a required field, so you must choose one of the following. See
Appendix B, “SuperC Listings” for sample listings.
DELTA

Lists the differences between the source data sets, followed
by the overall summary.

CHNG

Lists the differences between the source data sets, plus up
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

209

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
to 10 matching lines before and after the differences. This
listing is a variation of the DELTA listing; the matching
lines before and after help you recognize changed areas of
the source data sets.
LONG

Lists all the new data set source lines, plus old data set
deleted lines. Both inserted and deleted lines are flagged.

OVSUM

Lists only the overall summary of the comparison.
However, a PDS comparison generates an individual
summary line for each PDS member.

NOLIST

Produces no listing output. In foreground mode, only a
message is returned to show the outcome of the compare.

Listing DS Name
The name of the list data set to which SuperC writes the results of the
comparison. However, if you enter NOLIST in the Listing Type field,
SuperC does not create an output listing, so this name is ignored. Also, if
you chose batch mode, this field does not appear on the panel. The SuperC
Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel is used instead.
If you leave this field blank, SuperC allocates a list data set, using default
data set attributes and the following data set name:
prefix.userid.SUPERC.LIST

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix
and user ID are identical, only your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have
a prefix, only your user ID is used.
If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified.
Otherwise, SuperC only appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data
set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE NOPREFIX, SuperC uses
the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that
data set are replaced by the new output listing. However, if the data set is
sequential, you can add this listing to the data set instead of replacing it by
including the APNDLST process option in your profile data set.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, SuperC allocates it
for you. The data set is allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a
member name after it, in which case it is allocated as a partitioned data
set.
Sequence Numbers
A value that tells SuperC whether to exclude sequence number fields from
its comparison of your data sets. This field is not displayed if the compare
type is FILE or BYTE. You can choose one of the following:
blank

Exclude Sequence Number fields from the comparison if
the data set is F 80 or V 255 and the compare type is
Line

Otherwise, treat as data.
SEQ

210

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Exclude Sequence Number fields from the comparison.
Sequence numbers are assumed in columns 73–80 in F 80
and in columns 1–8 in V 255 data sets.

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
NOSEQ

Treat F 80/V 255 standard sequence number columns as
data.

COBOL

Ignore columns 1–6 in F 80 data sets. Data in columns 1–6
is assumed to be sequence numbers.

SuperC Member Lists
The panel shown in Figure 131 is displayed after you specify the old data set
name, but only if all the following statements are true:
v The new data set is partitioned.
v The Member field, shown on the SuperC Utility panel (see Figure 129 on page
206), or the PDS Member List field, shown on the SuperCE Utility panel (see
Figure 134 on page 216) was left blank or a pattern was used, and Bypass
Selection List was not selected. For more information on Displaying Member
Lists, see the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
v The profile data set or statements data set being used does not contain any
SELECT process statements.

Menu Functions Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
COMPARE
USERID.COPYBOOK
Row 00001 of 00027
Enter END command to process selections or CANCEL to leave the member list.
Enter Old member(Oldmem) name if it is different from New member(Newmem) name.
Newmem Oldmem
Size
Created
Changed
ID
. BIGCHAR
4 2001/06/29 2002/02/25 10:42:27
USERID
. BIGKSDS
3 2001/08/10 2001/08/10 13:15:59
USERID
. CONVT1
24 2001/06/18 2001/06/18 16:04:26
USERID
. COPYCONC
12 2001/07/05 2001/07/05 17:33:41
USERID
. COPYMM
2 2001/06/11 2001/06/11 10:57:01
USERID
. COPY01
9 2001/02/24 2001/06/13 16:09:28
USERID
. COPY0102
15 2000/05/11 2001/06/11 11:08:49
USERID
. COPY02
7 2001/02/24 2001/02/24 17:09:50
USERID
. DITTST1
27 2001/06/13 2001/06/13 10:38:16
USERID
. FLMLDATE
443 2001/12/12 2001/12/12 12:41:44
USERID
. FLMUDU
415 2001/12/10 2001/12/10 20:44:55
USERID
. FMNCCPY1
35 2000/10/18 2002/09/10 17:18:42
USERID
. FMNCCPY2
35 2000/10/18 2002/09/10 17:19:11
USERID
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 131. SuperC Member List Panel (ISRSSML)

The members displayed in this list are members in the new data set. If the
OLDMEM column is blank, SuperC assumes each member in the new data set is to
be compared with a member of the same name in the old data set.
If you enter a member name in the OLDMEM column, SuperC compares this
member to the one listed beside it in the NEWMEM column.
To compare your selections, enter the END command. If you have not selected any
members, ISPF returns you to the previous panel.
To cancel your selections, enter either:
v The RESET command to remove all unprocessed selections without ending the
member list display
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

211

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
v The CANCEL command to end the member list display without processing
selections that are still on the screen.
Note: Both the jump function (=) and the RETURN command cause an implied
cancellation of selections before they are carried out.
For more information about member lists, see the Using Member Selection Lists
section of the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

Submitting a SuperC Job in Batch Mode
If you selected Batch Mode (2) on the SuperC Utility panel, the panel shown in
Figure 132 is displayed before the job is submitted. This panel allows you to
specify one of the following:
v The SYSOUT class, which determines the printer to which your job is sent and
the format used for the printed output
v The name of a listing data set
v Output data definitions that you can use to give the printer additional
instructions, such as an output destination that is not defined by a SYSOUT
class.

SuperC Utility - Submit Batch jobs
More:

Press ENTER to continue submit
Enter "/" to select option
/ Edit JCL before user submit

Generate Output Type:
1 1. SYSOUT Class
2. Data Set Name
3. //OUTDD DD

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 132. SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs Panel (ISRSCSUB)

The “Job statement information” field is explained in the Job Statement
Information section of the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I. The other fields on the panel shown in Figure 132 are:
SYSOUT class
A system output classification defined by your installation, which defines
certain print characteristics, such as the printer and the format that is used
to produce the output. You can enter any valid SYSOUT parameters. This
field is required if you leave the Option field blank.

212

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
If you enter either option 1 or option 2, the “SYSOUT class” field is
ignored. However, for option 2, you can include the SYSOUT= operand in
an OUTDD DD field.
Data Set Name
The name of the listing data set that you want ISPF to store your compare
results in. This data set can be either partitioned or sequential.
The Data Set Name field is required if you use option 1 on this panel. This
field serves the same purpose as the Listing DS Name field, which is used
when running the SuperC utility in foreground mode.
The logical record length (LRECL) of the listing data set is displayed under
the blank OUTDD lines on the SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel.
SuperC creates listings with one of four LRECLs:
132

Standard listing for the NOPRTCC process option; printer control
characters are omitted.

133

Standard listing.

202

Wide listing for the NOPRTCC process option; printer control
characters are omitted.

203

Wide listing.

If you specify an existing sequential data set with an incorrect LRECL,
SuperC overrides the data set specifications. This applies to any listing and
update data sets in both foreground and batch.
A separate operation, such as using the Hardcopy utility (option 3.6), is
needed to print the listing data set.
If you leave the Option field blank or enter option 2, the Data Set Name
field is ignored. Therefore, to specify an output data set in either of these
two situations, you must include the DSN= operand in an OUTDD DD
field.
Specifying Existing Data Sets
The following rules apply when specifying the name of an existing data
set:
v When you submit JCL for processing, the output listing produced by
that JCL usually replaces the contents of the specified data set, if any
exist. Therefore, be careful when specifying the name of an existing data
set.
You can keep a history of changes by using the APNDLST compare
option when you run the comparison. This compare option adds the
new output listing to the specified sequential data set’s contents instead
of replacing it.
Note: Using the APNDLST process option with a packed output listing
file may cause unpredictable results in the output listing file.
v Use standard TSO data set naming conventions.
Specifying Nonexistent Data Sets
The following rules apply when specifying the name of a data set that
does not exist:
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

213

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)
v If you include a member name in the data set specification, ISPF
allocates a partitioned data set with suitable attributes for the listing.
v If you do not specify a member name, ISPF allocates a sequential data
set.
//OUTDD DD
Output data definitions that are used to specify additional printer
instructions in job control language (JCL). This field is required if you use
this panel. Otherwise, it is ignored.
The OUTDD DD fields are provided so you can pass to your printer all the
JCL needed to format special types of output that may not be supported by
your installation’s SYSOUT class definitions. The example shown in
Figure 132 on page 212 specifies a wide format for printing on 14 3/4-inch
forms.
The “SYSOUT class” and Data Set Name fields are ignored. If you need to
specify this information, be sure to include it in your OUTDD DD job card.
If you specify a data set name in your OUTDD DD job card, the output
data set is printed and kept. Otherwise, it is printed and deleted. Here are
some examples:
v To specify a SYSOUT class, enter:
//OUTDD DD SYSOUT=X

where X is the SYSOUT class, such as A, B, or C.
v To specify a data set name, enter:
//OUTDD DD DSN=fully.qualified.name
//
DISP=XXXXX...

where XXXXX... is one of the following:
– For an old data set:
OLD

– For a new sequential data set:
(NEW,CATLG),SPACE=(3325,(50,100),RLSE),UNIT=SYSDA

– For a new partitioned data set
(NEW,CATLG),SPACE=(3325,(50,100,25)),UNIT=SYSDA

– For a sequential data set that will be modified by, instead of replaced
by, the comparison results:
MOD

Note: These three fields are independent of one another. Also, none of them
requires you to provide an OUTDD card in the “Job statement information”
field.

Using the NOLIST Listing Type in Batch Mode
If you enter the NOLIST listing type and choose batch mode, the options on the
SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel shown in Figure 132 on page 212 are not
valid because no listing is produced. Therefore, an alternate panel is displayed,
which blanks out the fields that are not valid but still allows you to submit job
statement JCL. This panel is shown in Figure 133 on page 215.

214

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)

Batch Submit - Nolist
Press ENTER to continue submit job or END to Cancel
Enter "/" to select option
/ Edit JCL before user submit
NOLIST listing type was specified. There will be no output generated.
Job statement information: (Required - Enter/Verify JOB control statement)
===>
===>
===>
===>

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 133. SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs Panel using NOLIST (ISRSCSB1)

When this panel is displayed, you can either:
v Type the job statement JCL and press Enter to submit the job
v Enter the END command to cancel the job.

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
The SuperCE utility (option 3.13) is a dialog that uses the SuperC program to
compare data sets of unlimited size and record length at the file, line, word, or
byte level. It is appropriate if you need more flexibility than the standard SuperC
utility (option 3.12) provides.
Note: For an introduction to the SuperC and SuperCE utilities (options 3.12 and
3.13), see Appendix A, “SuperC Reference,” on page 405.
The panel shown in Figure 134 on page 216 is the first panel of the SuperCE utility.
It requires only the names of the input data sets, which are entered using standard
TSO naming conventions, such as:
New DS Name . . . . ’USERID.TEST2.SCRIPT’

Note: In this context, a new data set is an updated version of a previously created
data set, such as a data set in your private library that has not yet been
promoted.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

215

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)

Menu Utilities Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SuperCE Utility
New DS Name . . .
Old DS Name . . .
PDS Member List
(blank/pattern - member list, * - compare all)
(Leave New/Old DSN "blank" for concatenated-uncataloged-password panel)
Compare Type
Listing Type
Display Output
2 1. File
2 1. OVSUM
1 1. Yes
2. Line
2. Delta
2. No
3. Word
3. CHNG
3. Cond
4. Byte
4. Long
4. UPD
5. Nolist
Listing DSN . . . . SUPERC.LIST
Process Options . .
Statements Dsn . . .
Update DSN . . . . .
Enter "/" to select option
Bypass selection list
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Execution Mode
1 1. Foreground
2. Batch
F3=Exit

Output Mode
1 1. View
2. Browse

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 134. SuperCE Utility Panel (ISRSEPRI)

SuperCE Utility Panel Action Bar
The SuperCE Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Options

The Options pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
Edit Statements
2
Process Options
3
Profiles and Defaults

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
SuperCE functions
3
Appendices
4
Index

SuperCE Utility Panel Fields
A default compare type, listing type, listing data set name, and Browse option are
provided if you choose not to specify your own. The fields on the SuperCE Utility
panel are:
New DS Name and Old DS Name
Specify the name of a sequential data set, PDS, or membered PDS. Use
standard TSO naming conventions, including quotes for fully qualified

216

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
names. Leave either or both of these fields blank to display a panel on
which you can specify concatenated, uncataloged, and password-protected
data sets. These panels are shown in Figure 135 on page 221 (foreground
compare) and Figure 136 on page 222 (batch compare).
PDS Member List
Leave this field blank to display a member selection list for the new data
set. Otherwise, enter one of the following. See “SuperC Member Lists” on
page 211 for more information.
pattern

Entering a pattern causes ISPF to display a list of the
members in the new data set that match the pattern, unless
Bypass Selection List has been specified. For more
information about using patterns, see the Libraries and
Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I. For
example:
PDS Member List . . ISR*

Entering an asterisk causes all the members in the new
data set to be compared to any like-named members in the
old data set. A member list is not displayed. For example:
PDS Member List . . *

Members in either data set not having like-named
members in the other data set are not compared, but are
listed in the output list data set.
When entire data sets are compared by using an asterisk
for a member name pattern, each real member that appears
in both the old and new data sets is compared once. Alias
entries are processed but only to determine if they have
matching alias and/or real entries.
Note: You can also use SELECT process statements in the statements data
set to specify an optional set of PDS members to be searched.
However, the SELECT statement turns off the PDS member list
function.
Compare Type
The type of comparison you want SuperC to perform. Choose one of the
following:
File

Compares source data sets for differences, but does not show what
the differences are. This is the simplest and fastest method with the
least amount of processing overhead. For this compare type,
SuperC prepares summary information only and causes all listing
types to produce the same output, except NOLIST, which does not
produce any output listing. A message is returned to notify you of
the compare results.

Line

Compares source data sets for line differences. Reformatted lines
(that is, lines with blanks inserted or deleted) are automatically
detected for lines ≤ 256 characters. This compare type is the
default. It is most useful for comparisons of program source code
because it is record-oriented and points out inserted or deleted
lines of code. Lines can be of unlimited size.

Word

Compares source data sets for word differences. In this context, a
word is a group of characters that begins and ends with a blank or
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

217

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
other line delimiter. If you use the XWDCMP process option, all
non-alphanumeric characters are considered to be delimiters. Also,
a word cannot be longer than 256 characters.
The Word compare type is most useful for comparing text data
sets. If two data sets contain the same words in the same order,
SuperC considers them to be identical, even if those words are not
on the same lines.
Byte

Compares source data sets for byte differences. The output listing
data set consists of a hexadecimal printout with character
equivalents listed on the right. A BYTE compare with a LONG
listing of a data set against itself results in a hexadecimal dump of
that data set. This compare type is most useful for comparing
machine readable data.

Listing Type
The type of listing you want SuperC to create when it compares the data
sets. Listing Type is not a required field in SuperCE. If you do not specify
a listing type, the default is DELTA. See the appendix on Listing Formats
in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for sample listings.
OVSUM

Lists only the general summary of the comparison.
However, a PDS comparison generates an individual
summary line for each PDS member.

Delta

Lists the differences between the source data sets, followed
by the general summary.

CHNG

Lists the differences between the source data sets, plus up
to 10 matching lines before and after the differences. This
listing is a variation of the DELTA listing; the matching
lines before and after help you recognize changed areas of
the source data sets.

Long

Lists all the new data set source lines, plus old data set
deleted lines. Both inserted and deleted lines are flagged.

Nolist

Produces no listing output. In foreground mode, a message
is returned to show the outcome of the comparison.

Listing Dsn
The name of the list data set to which SuperC writes the results of the
comparison. However, if you enter NOLIST in the Listing Type field,
SuperC does not create an output listing, so this name is ignored.
If you leave this field blank, SuperC allocates a list data set, using default
data set attributes and the following data set name:
prefix.userid.SUPERC.LIST

218

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that
data set are replaced by the new output listing. However, if the data set is
sequential, you can add this listing to the data set instead of replacing it by
using the APNDLST process option.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, SuperC allocates it
for you. The data set is allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a
member name after it, in which case it is allocated as a member of a
partitioned data set.
Process Options
Keywords that tell SuperC how to process the compare operation. You can
type these keywords in the Process Options fields or select them from a
panel. See the Process Options selection in “Process Options - Select
Process Options” on page 222 for a table of keywords.
Statements Dsn
The name of the data set that contains your process statements. All
statements data sets must be fixed block with 80-byte records (FB 80). See
the Edit Statements selection in “Process Options - Select Process Options”
on page 222 for more information.
Update Dsn
Tells SuperC the name of the data set that will contain column-oriented
results of the comparison. This data set is normally used as input to post
processing programs and can be specified besides the normal listing data
set.
If you leave this field blank and use an update (UPDxxxx) option, SuperC
uses the following default name:
prefix.userid.SUPERC.UPDATE

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix
and user ID are identical, only your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have
a prefix, only your user ID is used.
If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified.
Otherwise, SuperC only appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data
set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE NOPREFIX, SuperC uses
the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that
data set are replaced by the new update output. However, if the data set is
sequential, you can add this listing to the data set instead of replacing it by
using the APNDUPD process option.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, SuperC allocates it
for you. The data set is allocated as a sequential data set unless you enter a
member name after it, in which case it is allocated as a partitioned data
set.
Note: For the UPDMVS8, UPDCMS8, UPDSEQ0, and UPDPDEL process
options, the update data set contains valid data, but only after a
successful compare when differences are detected. The data set is
always empty after a comparison that shows the data sets or
members being compared have no differences.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

219

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
Display Output
Tells ISPF whether you want to display the output listing in Browse mode.
Enter one of the following:
Note: The NOLIST listing type overrides Yes, No, and Cond.
Yes

Call Browse to display the listing data set after processing the
comparison. This is the default.

Do not call Browse to display the SuperC listing data set.

Cond

Do not call Browse unless SuperC finds differences between the
data sets.

UPD

Browse the update data set instead of the list data set. This
parameter is not valid unless you create an update data set by
using one or more of the SuperC process options that begin with
UPD (UPDxxxx).

Bypass Selection List
When a member pattern is entered in the PDS Member List field, selecting
this field causes SuperC to process all members matching that pattern
without displaying a member selection list. Leaving this field blank causes
the member list to be displayed.
Output Mode
The output mode for displaying the listing file. Choose one of the
following:
1

View. This enables the listing file to be displayed in view mode. All
View functions are enabled in this mode.

Browse. This enables the listing file to be displayed in the browse
mode. All Browse functions are enabled in this mode.

SuperCE Utility Options
The following sections describe the Execution Mode options shown on the
SuperCE Utility panel.

Foreground Compare Data Sets
If you choose Foreground, SuperC processes the data sets in foreground mode, so
you can browse the results of the compare. This choice locks your keyboard until
SuperC processing is complete.
The panel shown in Figure 135 on page 221 is displayed if you leave the Option
field and the New DS Name or Old DS Name field blank on the SuperCE Utility
panel.

220

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)

SuperCE - Concatenation Foreground Entry
"New" Concatenation
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4

.
.
.
.

Other "New" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Password . . . . .
(Password allowed only in foreground mode)
"Old" Concatenation
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4

.
.
.
.

Data Set Name
Volume Serial
Password . .
Command ===>
F1=Help
F12=Cancel

Other "Old" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set
. . .
. . .
(If not cataloged)
. . .
(Password allowed only in foreground mode)
F2=Split

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 135. SuperCE - Concatenation Interactive Entry Panel (ISRSECAT)

For fields DS1 through DS4, both new and old, use normal TSO naming
conventions. You can specify a series of concatenated data sets, an uncataloged or
password-protected data set, or a cataloged data set.
Up to four data sets can be concatenated for both the new and old input data sets.
Make sure the data sets are concatenated in the proper sequence, as follows:
1. If two or more sequential data sets are concatenated as one input data set, the
data set attributes, such as block size, must be identical.
2. PDS concatenations must have the data set with the largest block size as the
first in any concatenation.
3. The SuperCE dialog uses only the first occurrence of a member in the
concatenated series of PDSs as source input for a compare. Any other
occurrences of the member are ignored.
Other partitioned or sequential data sets, volume serials, and data set passwords
are specified as on any other data entry panel. See the Libraries and Data Sets
chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for more information.
Note: The Password fields apply only to the other partitioned or sequential data
sets. TSO prompts you if any concatenated data sets are password-protected.
The Password field is only enabled in foreground mode.

Batch Submit Batch Data Set Compare
Option B causes SuperC to process the data sets in batch mode. This choice frees
the keyboard, allowing you to continue using ISPF while waiting for SuperC to
compare the data sets. The output listing is sent to the destination specified on the
SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel (Figure 132 on page 212).
The panel shown in Figure 136 on page 222 is displayed if you select option B and
leave the New DS Name or Old DS Name field blank on the SuperCE Utility
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

221

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
panel. You can concatenate up to four data sets that have like attributes. For
example, all must be either sequential or partitioned.
SuperCE - Concatenation Batch Entry
"New" Concatenation
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4

.
.
.
.

Data Set Name
Volume Serial
Password . .
Command ===>
F1=Help
F12=Cancel

Other "Old" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set
. . .
. . .
(If not cataloged)
. . .
(Password allowed only in foreground mode)
F2=Split

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 136. SuperCE - Concatenation Batch Entry Panel (ISRSECAT)

This panel is the same as the panel shown in Figure 135 on page 221, except the
Password field is omitted. If your data sets are password protected, compare the
data sets in foreground mode by leaving the Option field on the SuperCE Utility
panel blank.
Printing a SuperCE Listing in Batch Mode: If you selected option B on the
SuperCE Utility panel, the panel shown in Figure 132 on page 212 is displayed
before the job is submitted. This panel allows you to determine whether to print
your SuperC listing or write it to a list data set.

Process Options - Select Process Options
The compare type that you select determines the available process options, which
are listed in Table 17 on page 223.

222

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
Table 17. SuperCE Process Options
Line Compare:
ALLMEMS
DPACMT
FMVLNS
REFMOVR
UPDSEQ0

ANYC
DPADCMT
GWCBL
SEQ
UPDSUMO

APNDLST
DPBLKCL
LOCS
UPDCMS8
WIDE

APNDUPD CKPACKL
DPCBCMT DPCPCMT
LONGLN MIXED
UPDCNTL UPDLDEL
Y2DTONLY

APNDLST
DPBLKCL
MIXED
UPDREV2

APNDUPD
DPCBCMT
NOPRTCC
UPDSUMO

CNPML
DPFTCMT
NARROW
UPDMVS8

COBOL
DPMACMT
NOPRTCC
UPDPDEL

COVSUM
DPPLCMT
NOSEQ
UPDREV

DLMDUP DLREFM
DPPSCMT
NOSUMS
UPDREV2

Word Compare:
ALLMEMS
DPACMT
GWCBL
UPDCNTL

ANYC
DPADCMT
LOCS
UPDREV

CKPACKL COBOL COVSUM
DPCPCMT DPFTCMT DPMACMT DPPLCMT DPPSCMT
NOSEQ NOSUMS SEQ
XWDCMP

Byte Compare:
ALLMEMS APNDLST APNDUPD COVSUM LOCS
NOPRTCC NOSUMS UPDCNTL UPDSUMO
File Compare:
ALLMEMS APNDLST COVSUM FMSTOP
LMCSFC LOCS
NOPRTCC

To select one or more SuperCE process options, do either of the following:
v Type any nonblank character to the left of the process options you want to
select. If move + or move -+ is shown, use the Backward and Forward keys to
move through the panel. Press Enter when you have finished. This causes the
options you chose to be displayed in the Process Options fields on the SuperCE
Utility panel. If you select two options that cannot be chosen together, or if you
enter an option name incorrectly, an error message is displayed.
v Use the CANCEL command to return to the SuperCE Utility panel without
processing selections.
SuperC process options can affect how the input data is processed, and determine
the format and content of the output listing data set. They can also help you save
processing time by avoiding comments and blank lines. A separate group of
options, called update data set options (UPDxxxx), allow you to create update data
sets, examples of which are shown in “Update Data Set Control Output Examples”
on page 490.
All these options can be chosen from the XXXX Compare Process Options panels,
where XXXX is the compare type (FILE, LINE, WORD, or BYTE) that you are
using. The only exception is that the DPxxxx (do not process) options are not
available from a selection panel when you are conducting a WORD comparison.
However, you can type any of them in the Process Options field on the SuperCE
Utility panel. Errors caused by mistyping process options are detected when you
call the SuperCE utility.
For definitions of the SuperC process options, see “SuperC Compare Process
Options” on page 409.

Edit Statements - Edit Statements Data Set
A statements data set consists of process statements that contain instructions for
the SuperC program. They are similar to the process options, but are composed of
a keyword and one or more operands. See “Process Options - Select Process
Options” on page 222 for information about SuperCE process options.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

223

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
When you select the Edit Statements option from the SuperCE Utility Options
pull-down menu, the SuperCE utility displays the statements data set you specified
in the Statements Dsn field. This data set is always displayed in Edit mode,
allowing you to add, change, or delete SuperC process statements as needed. Only
one process statement can appear on each line of the statements data set.
The size of the Edit window depends on the number of lines your terminal can
display. The sample panel shown in Figure 137 shows how the Edit window
appears on a 24-line display. Examples of some common process statements are
listed below the Edit window so you can easily compose the proper input line.
USERID.SUPERC.STMTS

Columns 00001 00072

Enter or change Process Statements in the EDIT window below:
****** ***************************** Top of Data ******************************
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
****** **************************** Bottom of Data ****************************
Examples
CMPCOLM 5:60 75:90
LSTCOLM 25:90
DPLINE ’PAGE ’
SELECT MEM1,NMEM2:OMEM2
CMPLINE NTOP ’MACRO’
LNCT
66

Explanation
Compare using two column compare ranges
List columns 25:90 from input
Exclude line if "PAGE " found anywhere on line
Compare MEM1 with MEM1 and NMEM2 with OMEM2
Start comparing after string found in new DSN
Set lines per page to 66
- - - - Others: CHNGV
CMPBOFS CMPCOLMN CMPCOLMO CMPSECT DPLINEC NCHGT
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F6=Rchange F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right
F12=Cancel
Figure 137. SuperC Process Statements Panel (ISRSEPRS)

The SuperC program validates process statements at run time. Invalid process
statements are not used and are noted at the bottom of the listing. Unless a higher
return code is required by some other condition, a return code of 4 is generated.
See “SuperC Compare Process Statements” on page 419 for process statement
syntax, definitions, and examples.

Profiles and Defaults - Activate Profiles and Defaults
A SuperC profile is a data set that can contain a compare type, a listing type, a
Browse setting, and various combinations of process options and process
statements that you select.
SuperC profiles are useful for a wide range of users. Beginners can use profiles
created by others as a simple method of running SuperC. Experienced SuperC
users can create profiles for the groups of options they use often so that they do
not have to remember individual process options and statements. Also, profiles
give system programmers a mechanism for setting up complex compare tools that
others can simply call by profile name.
Some other characteristics of profiles are:

224

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
v A profile can be either a sequential data set or a member of a PDS.
v Data set names are not represented in a profile.
v Profiles can be created only with the SuperCE utility (option 3.13). However,
once they are created, they can be used in the standard SuperC utility (option
3.12).
v To change a profile, activate it and make the necessary changes to the
information in the fields on the SuperCE Utility panel. Then select option C and
create a profile, entering in the Activate/Create Profile DS Name field the name
of the profile data set that you want to modify.
v You can modify the SuperC default settings by selecting the Defaults option on
the Profile Manager screen. See Figure 140 on page 228 for an example of the
SuperC - Defaults panel.
v You can display the contents of a profile data set using View, Browse, or Edit.
Figure 138 shows a Browse display of a profile data set.

Menu Utilities Compilers Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
USERID.TESTPROF
Line 00000000 Col 001 080
********************************* Top of Data **********************************
.* PROF PREFIX CTYP=LINE,LTYP=DELTA ,BRW=YES
.* PROF PREFIX PROC1=
* MARGIN*
.* PROF PREFIX PROC2=
* MARGIN*
******************************** Bottom of Data ********************************

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 138. Browse A SuperCE Profile

Selecting option A on the SuperCE Utility panel displays the panel shown in
Figure 139. This panel is used to activate and create profiles.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

225

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)

SUPERCE - Profile Manager
A Activate

Reads the specified input profile data set:
1. Establishes the process and compare options from the
profile prefix lines.
2. Establishes the profile as the process statement data set
if any process statements are detected.

C Create

Creates an output profile data set:
1. Combines process and compare options from the Primary Panel
and any process statements from the Statements Data Set:
2. Rewrites the profile data set (if the data set exists) or
allocates a new data set before generating the profile.

D Defaults

Presents panel for modifying SuperC defaults.

Activate/Create
Profile DS Name . . .

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split

F3=Exit

F9=Swap

F12=Cancel

Figure 139. SuperCE - Profile Manager Panel (ISRSEPMG)

The only field on this panel is:
Activate/Create Profile DS Name
The name of the profile data set that you want to either activate or create.
This field is required.
If you choose option A (Activate), SuperCE copies the compare type, listing
type, Browse setting, and any process options this data set contains. If the
profile also contains process statements, SuperCE displays the name of the
profile data set in the Statements Dsn field on the SuperCE Utility panel.
If you choose option C (Create), SuperCE copies the information that is
saved into one output data set or member.
The following sections describe the options shown at the top of the SuperCE Profile Manager panel.
A — Activate: Option A (Activate) restores the contents of the profile data set
specified in the Activate/Create Profile DS Name field. This data set must be
cataloged. When you press Enter, information that was stored in the profile data
set when it was created is displayed in the corresponding fields on the SuperCE
Utility panel. For example, process options stored in the profile appear in the
Process Options fields. At this point, you can make additional changes or choose
another option.
C — Create: Option C (Create) causes SuperCE to copy data entered on the
SuperCE Utility panel and place it in the profile data set specified in the
Activate/Create Profile DS Name field. Be sure the correct information is displayed
on that panel and that the statements data set, if you specify one, contains the
correct process statements before you create the profile.
If the profile data set that you specify does not already exist, SuperCE allocates it
for you. Data stored in the profile data set can include:

226

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)
v The following values taken from the fields on the SuperCE Utility panel. The
abbreviations in parentheses show how these values are identified in a profile
data set:
– Compare type (CTYP)
– Listing type (LTYP)
– Browse setting (BRW)
– Process options (PROC1 and PROC2).
v Process statements copied from the statements data set that was specified in the
Statements Dsn field. This data set name is displayed and highlighted on the
SuperCE - Profile Manager panel. For example, the sample panel shown in
Figure 139 on page 226 displays the name SUPERC.STMTS.
If you leave the Statements Dsn field blank, the data set name and the words
preceding it are not displayed on the SuperCE - Profile Manager panel and
SuperCE does not include any process statements in your profile. See the
following sections for information about process options and process statements,
respectively:
– “Process Options - Select Process Options” on page 222
– “Edit Statements - Edit Statements Data Set” on page 223.
D — Defaults: Option D (Defaults) brings up an additional panel, shown in
Figure 140 on page 228, that allows you to do the following:
v Specify SuperC output data set default allocation parameters
The first extent and secondary space values are used whenever Options 3.12,
3.13, or 3.14 create a new output data set such as a listing or statements data set.
If you specify a new data set with a member name, the directory space value is
used to create a PDS. If you blank out any of the values, SuperC will supply
defaults.
Space values are applicable only if you select “Invoke SuperC via PROGRAM
interface”.
Note: New data set allocation block size parameters are controlled by the PDF
Configuration Table. See z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for details.
v Specify your own Statements data set initial edit macro name
v Enable or disable a new high performance program interface to SuperC. If you
select “Invoke SuperC via PROGRAM interface”, ISPF invokes SuperC directly.
Otherwise, ISPF invokes SuperC via a CLIST named ISRSFORG (ISRSSRCH for
Search-For). The CLIST interface may be useful if you need to customize the
allocations or wish to post-process the result. The PROGRAM interface is more
efficient and is the default.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

227

Search-For Utility (Option 3.14)

SUPERC - Defaults
Verify entries below. End or Enter to exit.
New List data set allocation in blocks:
1st Extent . . 50
Secondary . . 100

Directory . . 5

New Update data set allocation in blocks:
1st Extent . . 15
Secondary . . 30

Directory . . 5

New Profile data set allocation in blocks:
1st Extent . . 5
Secondary . . 5
Directory . . 5
New Statements data set allocation in blocks:
1st Extent . . 5
Secondary . . 5
Directory . . 5
Statements data set initial edit macro name . . !ISRSMAC
Enter "/" to select option
/ Invoke SuperC via PROGRAM interface
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split

F3=Exit

F9=Swap

F12=Cancel

Figure 140. SuperC - Defaults Panel (ISRSDFLT)

Search-For Utility (Option 3.14)
Note: For an introduction to the Search-For and Extended Search-For utilities
(options 3.14 and 3.13.S), see Appendix A, “SuperC Reference,” on page 405.
The Search-For utility (option 3.14) is a dialog that uses the SuperC program to
search your data sets or PDS members for one or more character strings. The
Search-For Utility panel, shown in Figure 141 on page 229, is the first panel of the
Search-For utility. The only requirements for this panel are:
v A string to be searched for, unless you select “Specify additional search strings”
v A data set to search, along with a volume serial and password if necessary.
A default listing data set name is provided if you choose not to enter your own.

228

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search-For Utility (Option 3.14)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Search-For Utility
More:
+
Search String . .
ISPF Library:
Project . .
Group . . .
Type . . .
Member . .

.
.
.
.

. . .

(Blank or pattern for member selection list,
"*" for all members)
Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set:
Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
(If not cataloged)
Listing Data Set . . . SRCHFOR.LIST
Data Set Password . .
(If Search-For data set password protected)
Enter "/" to select option
Specify additional search strings
Mixed Mode
Bypass selection list
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Execution Mode
1 1. Foreground
2. Batch

Output Mode
1 1. View
2. Browse

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 141. Search-For Utility Panel (ISRSFSPR)

Search-For Utility Panel Action Bar
The Search-For Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

RefList

For information about referral lists, see the chapter on Using
Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
Overview of Search for utility
2
Specifying the search data string
3
Specifying the data set or members to be searched
4
Specifying the data set to contain the results of the search
5
Specifying the execution mode and mixed data mode
6
Selecting members to search
7
Setting batch output parameters
8
Appendices
9
Index

Search-For Utility Panel Fields
All the fields on this panel are explained in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I, except the following:
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

229

Search-For Utility (Option 3.14)
Search String
A string to be searched for. No distinction is made between uppercase and
lowercase characters. Use the Extended Search-For utility (option 3.13.S) to
specify case-sensitive searches.
Four keywords—C, PREFIX, SUFFIX, and WORD—can help you narrow
the scope of a search. See “Search-For Strings and Keywords” on page 232
for information about these keywords and the rules that govern search
string entry.
Specify additional search strings
Select this field to have the Search-For utility search for more than one
string. The Search-For utility displays the panel shown in Figure 142 on
page 231, on which you can specify additional search strings. This panel
precedes a member list request.
If you do not select this option, the Search-For utility searches only for the
string entered in the Search String field.
Mixed Mode
Select this field to have the Search-For utility scan and parse the input data
set lines for DBCS text strings.
Note: The Word, Prefix, and Suffix Search-For qualifiers have no effect on
DBCS strings.
Bypass Selection List
When a member pattern is entered in the PDS Member List field or the
member name portion of the data set field (such as
MY.DATA.SET(pattern)), selecting this field causes SuperC to process all
members matching that pattern without displaying a member selection list.
Leaving this field blank causes the member list to be displayed.
Execution Mode
The processing mode you want to use when searching the data sets.
Specify one of the following:
1

Foreground. Searches the data sets and stores the results in the
data set specified in the Listing Data Set Name field. You can
browse the listing data set at the terminal.

Batch. Causes the display of the Search-For Utility - Submit Batch
Jobs panel so that you can specify job card and print disposition
information or edit the JCL statements. Then, Search-For submits
the batch job to search the data sets. See “Submitting a Search-For
Job in Batch Mode” on page 234 for more information.
Note: You cannot specify a data set password in batch mode. If
your data sets are password protected, use foreground
mode.

Output Mode
The output mode you want to use when displaying the listing file. Choose
one of the following:

230

View. This enables the listing file to be displayed in view mode. All
View functions are enabled in this mode.

Browse. This enables the listing file to be displayed in the browse
mode. All Browse functions are enabled in this mode.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search-For Utility (Option 3.14)
Listing Data Set
The name of the listing data set to which the SuperC program writes the
results of the search. If you leave this field blank, the Search-For utility
allocates a listing data set, using default data set attributes and the
following data set name:
prefix.userid.SRCHFOR.LIST

Specifying Additional Search Strings
The panel shown in Figure 142 is displayed if you select “Specify additional search
strings” on the Search-For Utility panel. You can specify:
v Additional strings to be searched for
v Optional scan-type and continuation keywords.

Menu RefList Utilities Help
─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──
I │
Search-For Strings
│
│
│
S │
Specify 1 or more Search Strings below:
│
│
│
I │ ==>
│
│ ==>
│
│ ==>
│
│ ==>
│
│ ==>
│ ,
│ ==>
│
O │ ==>
│
│ ==>
│
│ ==>
│
│ ==>
│
L │
│
D │
Press ENTER to start search or END command to exit.
│
│ Command ===>
│
E │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
/ │ F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
│
C └───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 142. Additional Search Strings Panel (ISRSFSST)

From this panel, pressing Enter either:
v Displays a member list, if requested
v Runs the search if no member list is needed.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

231

Search-For Utility (Option 3.14)
Entering the END command returns you to the Search-For Utility panel.

Search-For Strings and Keywords
Enter the strings that you want SuperC to find. When you press Enter, SuperC
looks for the strings without regard to whether they appear in uppercase or
lowercase in the original data set. If you are searching a partitioned data set
concatenation, SuperC will inform you (in the CONCAT# field in the listing) in
which group it first found the string. If you want SuperC to search all the groups
for each member, you can use the SDUPM process option of Extended Search-For
(option 3.13.S). If you want the search to distinguish between uppercase and
lowercase, you must use the Extended Search-For utility (option 3.13.S). If any of
the strings are found (string-1 OR string-2 OR string-3) on the line, SuperC
considers the condition met. You can restrict SuperC searches further by using one
of the SuperC Search-for keywords discussed below.

Entering Search Strings
Enclose the string in single quotation marks if it contains embedded blanks or
apostrophes. Two consecutive apostrophes must be entered to specify a single
apostrophe within a search string.
If you need to specify a DBCS string that contains a hexadecimal ’7D’ (x’7D’, the
hexadecimal representation of a single quotation mark) as half of a DBCS pair, you
must use the Enhanced SearchFor option (option 3.15) with the MIXED process
option.
The following example searches for the string IT’S A LIVING.
==> ’IT’S A LIVING’

Using Keywords
The following keywords can help you narrow the range of the search. If you do
not use a keyword, SuperC will find the string wherever it exists, even if that
happens to be in the middle of a word.
PREFIX

Shows the string is preceded by a non-alphanumeric character,
such as a blank space. It cannot be used on the same line with
SUFFIX or WORD. For example, you can do this:
==> ELSE PREFIX
==> ELSE SUFFIX

but not this:
==> ELSE PREFIX SUFFIX

SUFFIX

Shows the string is followed by a non-alphanumeric character. It
cannot be used on the same line with PREFIX or WORD. See the
examples under PREFIX.

WORD

Shows the string is both preceded and followed by a
non-alphanumeric character. It cannot be used on the same line as
PREFIX or SUFFIX. See the examples under PREFIX.

Continuation. Shows continuation of the previous line(s).
Continuation lines generate additional strings, all of which must be
found in the same line of an input data set.
Also, the C keyword can be entered on the same line as one of the
other keywords. The following example tells SuperC to find ELSE
and to also find IF, but only when IF is on the same line as ELSE.

232

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search-For Utility (Option 3.14)
==> ELSE WORD
==> IF WORD C

Search-For Member Lists
A panel similar to the one shown in Figure 143 is displayed only if:
v The search data set is partitioned.
v The Member field on the Search-For Utility panel (Figure 141 on page 229) or the
PDS Member List field on the Extended Search-For Utility panel (Figure 145 on
page 235) was left blank or a pattern was used and Bypass Selection List was
not selected. For more information on Displaying Member Lists, see the Libraries
and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
v For the Extended Search-For utility (option 3.13.S), the statements data set being
used does not contain any SELECT process statements.

Menu Functions Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SEARCH
USERID.DATASET
Row 00001 of 00026
Enter END command to process selections or CANCEL to leave the member list.
Name
Prompt
Size
Created
Changed
ID
. COPY01T
10 2002/09/06 2002/09/17 12:56:47
USERID
. COPY01TM
10 2002/08/26 2002/08/28 18:23:19
USERID
. COPY0102
17 2002/09/05 2002/09/06 09:59:12
USERID
. DCAR
7 2002/08/06 2002/08/06 13:59:01
USERID
. DT1
5 2002/08/08 2002/08/08 17:09:42
USERID
. FMNCCPY1
17 2002/09/12 2002/09/18 14:45:55
USERID
. FMNCCPY2
17 2002/09/12 2002/09/12 15:10:06
USERID
. NEWCPPYT
17 2002/09/05 2002/09/05 18:24:29
USERID
. TEMP0102
17 2002/08/28 2002/08/28 18:38:02
USERID
. TESTMD1
10 2002/08/29 2002/08/29 17:02:17
USERID
. TEST0102
17 2001/03/08 2002/09/02 15:18:53
USERID
. TEST3
17 2002/09/06 2002/09/06 10:04:59
USERID
. TEST4
17 2002/09/06 2002/09/06 11:26:50
USERID
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel
Figure 143. Search Member List Panel (ISRSSML)

To start the search, enter the END command.
To cancel your selections, enter either:
v The RESET command to remove all unprocessed selections without ending the
member list display
v The CANCEL command to end the member list display without processing
selections still on the screen.
Note: Both the jump function (=) and the RETURN command cause an implied
cancellation of selections before they are carried out.
For more information about member lists, see the Using Member Selection Lists
section of the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

233

Search-For Utility (Option 3.14)

Submitting a Search-For Job in Batch Mode
If you selected Batch Mode (2) on the Search-For Utility panel, the panel shown in
Figure 144 is displayed before the job is submitted.
Search-For Utility - Submit Batch jobs
Press ENTER to continue submit
Enter "/" to select option
/ Edit JCL before user submit

Generate Output Type:
1 1. SYSOUT Class
2. Data Set Name
3. //OUTDD DD

SYSOUT Class . . . . A
Data Set Name . . .
//OUTDD DD . . . . .
// . . . . . . . . .
LRECL for the Listing Output will be 133
Job statement information: (Required - Enter/Verify JOB control statement)
===>
===>
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
Figure 144. Search-For Utility - Submit Batch Jobs Panel (ISRSFSUB)

This panel allows you to specify one of the following Generate Output types:
v The SYSOUT class, which determines the printer to which your job is sent and
the format used for the printed output
v The name of a listing data set
v Output data definitions that you can use to give the printer additional
instructions, such as an output destination that is not defined by a SYSOUT
class.
The Job Statement information field is explained under the Job Statement
Information section of the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I. The other fields on this panel, as well as the options listed at the top of
the panel, are described in “Submitting a SuperC Job in Batch Mode” on page 212.

Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15)
Note: For an introduction to the Search-For and Extended Search-For utilities, see
Appendix A, “SuperC Reference.”
If you select option 3.15, the Extended Search-For Utility panel, shown in
Figure 145 on page 235, is displayed. This utility is a dialog that uses the SuperC
program to search your data sets or PDS members for one or more character
strings. It is appropriate if you need more flexibility than the standard Search-For
utility (option 3.14) provides.

234

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15)

Menu Utilities Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Extended Search-For Utility
More:
+
Search DS Name . .
PDS Member List . .
(blank/pattern - member list, * - search all)
(Leave Search DSN "blank" for concatenated-uncataloged-password panel)
Enter Search Strings and Optional operands (WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX,C)
Caps . .
Caps . .
Caps . .
Asis . .
Asis . .
Listing DSN . . . . SRCHFOR.LIST
Process Options . .
Statements Dsn . .
Enter "/" to select option
Execution Mode
Output Mode
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 145. Extended Search-For Utility Panel (ISRSFPRI)

Search-ForE Utility Panel Action Bar
The Search-ForE Utility panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Options
1
2
Help

Edit statements
Process options

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
Extended Search-For functions
2
Appendices
3
Index

Search-ForE Utility Panel Fields
The panel requires only the entry of character string(s). The fields on this panel
are:
Search DS Name
Specify the name of a sequential data set, PDS, or membered PDS.
Use standard TSO naming conventions, including quotes for fully
qualified names. Leave this field blank to display a panel on which
you can specify concatenated, uncataloged, and
password-protected data sets. This panel is shown in Figure 146 on
page 238.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

235

Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15)
PDS Member List
Leave this field blank to display a list of all the members in the
search data set. Otherwise, enter one of the following. See
“Search-For Member Lists” on page 233 for more information.
pattern
Entering a pattern causes ISPF to display a list of the
members in the search data set that match the pattern
unless Bypass Selection List was selected. See the section
on Displaying Member Lists in the Libraries and Data Sets
chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for more
information about using patterns. For example:
PDS Member List . . . ISR*

Entering an asterisk causes all the members in the search
data set to be searched.

You can also use SELECT process statements in the statements data
set to specify an optional set of PDS members to be searched.
However, the SELECT statement turns off the PDS member list
function.
CAPS

A search string that you want the Extended Search-For utility to
find. This search string is converted to uppercase before the search
begins and is found only if it exists in the search data set in
uppercase.
The ANYC process option causes the string to be found in any
case, (uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case) even if you enter the
string in the CAPS field.
You can enter up to three uppercase search strings, one in each
CAPS field. Here are some examples:
example 1
Either of the following strings may be found in the search
data set:
CAPS . . . . THEN
CAPS . . . . IF

example 2
The following two strings must be found on the same line
because of the continuation (C) keyword. THEN must be a
complete word, while ISR must be the prefix of a word.
CAPS . . . . THEN WORD
CAPS . . . . ISR PREFIX C

example 3
In the next example, a hexadecimal string is specified as
the search string. Use this to find unprintable characters.
CAPS . . . . X’7B00’

example 4
The following example searches for the string JOE’S CLIST.
Notice that the string is enclosed in single quotation marks
and the apostrophe following Joe’s name has been
doubled.
CAPS . . . . ’JOE’S CLIST’

ASIS

236

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

A search string that you want the Extended Search-For utility to
find. This search string is searched for as it is when you enter it in

Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15)
the ASIS field. Therefore, the Extended Search-For utility does not
find the string unless it exists in the data set exactly as you enter it
in an ASIS field. You can enter one search string in each ASIS field.
The examples following the CAPS field definition apply to the
ASIS field as well.
See “Search-For Strings and Keywords” on page 232 for a list of
rules that determine the format required for entering search strings
and for definitions of the keywords that are shown in the examples
below.
The SRCHFOR and SRCHFORC process statements override any
strings entered in the CAPS and ASIS fields.
Listing DS Name
The name of the list data set to which the Extended Search-For utility
writes the listing information. If you leave this field blank, Extended
Search-For allocates a list data set, using default data set attributes and the
following data set name:
prefix.userid.SRCHFOR.LIST

where prefix is your TSO prefix and userid is your user ID. If your prefix
and user ID are identical, only your prefix is used. Also, if you do not have
a prefix, only your user ID is used.
If you enter a fully qualified data set name SuperC uses it as specified.
Otherwise, SuperC only appends your TSO prefix to the front of the data
set name specified. If you run with TSO PROFILE NOPREFIX, SuperC uses
the name as you entered it, which can result in an attempt to catalog the
name in the master catalog.
If you enter the name of a data set that already exists, the contents of that
data set are replaced by the new listing output. However, if the data set is
sequential, you can add this listing to the data set instead of replacing it by
using the APNDLST process option.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, Search-For allocates
it for you. The data set is allocated as a sequential data set unless you
enter a member name after it, in which case it is allocated as a partitioned
data set.
Process Options
Keywords that tell SuperC how to process the search-for operation. You
can type these keywords in the Process Options field or select them from a
panel. See “SuperC Compare Process Options” on page 409 for tables of
keywords.
Bypass Selection List
When a member pattern is entered in the PDS Member List field, selecting
this field causes SuperC to process all members matching that pattern
without displaying a member selection list. Leaving this field blank causes
the member list to be displayed.
Statements Dsn
The name of the data set that contains your search-for process statements,
which you can create or change by using option E on the Extended

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

237

Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15)
Search-For Utility panel. SuperC reads these process statements before
conducting the search. All statements data sets must be fixed block with
80-byte records (FB 80).
Execution Mode
Foreground
If you choose option 1, Foreground, and you leave the Search DS
Name field blank, the Extended Search-For - Concatenation Data
Set Entry panel, shown in Figure 146, is displayed.
Extended Search-For Concatenation Foreground Entry
"Search" Concatenation
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
Other "Search" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
Password . . . . .

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel

(If not cataloged)
(Password allowed only in foreground mode)

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 146. Extended Search-For - Concatenation Data Set Entry Panel (ISRSFCON)

For fields DS1 through DS4, use normal TSO naming conventions.
You can specify a series of concatenated data sets, an uncataloged
or password-protected data set, or a cataloged data set name.
Up to four data sets can be concatenated. Make sure the data sets
are concatenated in the proper sequence, as follows:
1. If two or more sequential data sets are concatenated as one
input data set, the data set attributes, such as block size, must
be identical.
2. PDS concatenations must have the data set with the largest
block size as the first in any concatenation.
3. Search-For uses only the first occurrence of a member in the
concatenated series of PDSs as source input for a search. Any
other occurrences of the member are ignored. You may specify
the SDUPM process option to cause SuperC to search for and
report all occurrences of the string for the entire concatenated
series of PDS members.

238

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15)
Other partitioned or sequential data sets, volume serials, and data
set passwords are specified as on any other data entry panel. For
more information, see the Libraries and Data Sets chapter in the
z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Note: The Password field applies only to the other partitioned or
sequential data set. TSO prompts you if any concatenated
data sets are password-protected.
Batch

Option 2 causes SuperC to process the data sets in batch mode.
This choice frees the keyboard, allowing you to continue using
ISPF while waiting for SuperC to search the data sets. The output
listing is sent to the destination specified on the Search-For Utility Submit Batch jobs panel (Figure 144 on page 234).
The panel shown in Figure 147 is displayed if you select option 2
and leave the Search DS Name field blank on the Extended
Search-For Utility panel. You can concatenate up to four data sets
that have like attributes. For example, all must be either sequential
or partitioned.
Extended Search-For Concatenation Batch Entry
"Search" Concatenation

DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
Other "Search" Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set

Data Set Name . . .
Volume Serial . . .
Password . . . . .

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel

(If not cataloged)
(Password allowed only in foreground mode)

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 147. Extended Search-For - Concatenation Batch Entry Panel (ISRSFCON)

This panel is the same as the panel shown in Figure 146 on page
238, except the Password field is omitted. If your data sets are
password-protected, search the data sets in foreground mode by
leaving the Option field on the Extended Search-For Utility panel
blank.
Printing an Extended Search-For Listing in Batch Mode
If you selected the Batch option on the Extended Search-For Utility
panel, the panel shown in Figure 144 on page 234 is displayed

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

239

Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15)
before the job is submitted. This panel allows you to determine
whether to print your Search-For listing or write it to a list data
set.
Output Mode
The output mode you want to use when displaying the listing file. Choose
one of the following:
View

This enables the listing file to be displayed in view mode. All View
functions are enabled in this mode.

Browse
This enables the listing file to be displayed in the browse mode. All
Browse functions are enabled in this mode.

Select Search-For Process Options
Table 18 lists all of the process options for Search-For.
Table 18. Search-For Process Options
ALLMEMS
DPCBCMT
IDPFX
MIXED

ANYC
DPCPCMT
LMTO
NOPRTCC

APNDLST
DPFTCMT
LNFMTO
NOSEQ

CKPACKL
DPMACMT
LONGLN
NOSUMS

COBOL
DPPLCMT
LPSF
SDUPM

DPACMT DPADCMT DPBLKCL
DPPSCMT FMSTOP
LTO
SEQ
XREF

The following rules govern the selection of Search-For process options:
v Type any nonblank character to the left of one or more process options. Then
press Enter. This causes the options you specify to be displayed in the Process
Options field on the Extended Search-For Utility panel. If you select two options
that cannot be specified together, or if you enter an option name incorrectly, an
error message is displayed. If more + or more -+ is shown, use your Backward
and Forward keys to move through the panel.
v Use the CANCEL command to return to the Extended Search-For Utility panel
without processing selections.
Search-For process options can affect how the input data is processed, and
determine the format and content of the output listing data set. They can also help
you save processing time by avoiding comments and blank lines.
All these options except the DPxxxx (do not process) options can be chosen from
the Search-For Process Options panel. However, you can type any of them in the
Process Options field on the Extended Search-For Utility panel. Errors caused by
mistyping process options are detected when you call the Extended Search-For
utility.
For definitions of the Search-For process options, see “SuperC Compare Process
Options” on page 409.

Edit Search-For Statements Data Set
A statements data set consists of process statements that contain instructions for
the SuperC program. They are similar to the process options, but are composed of
a keyword and one or more operands. See “Select Search-For Process Options” for
information about Search-For process options.
When you select 1 from the Options menu on the Extended Search-For Utility
panel, the Extended Search-For utility displays the statements data set you

240

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15)
specified in the Statements Dsn field. This data set is always displayed in Edit
mode, allowing you to add, change, or delete search-for process statements as
needed.
The size of the Edit window depends on the number of lines your terminal can
display. The sample panel shown in Figure 148 shows how the Edit window
appears on a 24-line display. Examples of some common process statements are
listed below the Edit window so you can easily compose the proper input line.
USERID.SRCHFOR.STMTS

Columns 00001 00072

Enter or change Process Statements in the EDIT window below:
****** ***************************** Top of Data ******************************
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
’’’’’’
****** **************************** Bottom of Data ****************************
Examples
Explanation
SRCHFOR ’ABCD’,W
Search for the word "ABCD"
SRCHFORC ’DEFG’
"DEFG" must be on same line as word "ABCD"
CMPCOLM 1:60 75:90
Search columns 1:60 and 75:90 for string(s)
DPLINE ’PAGE ’,87:95
Exclude line if "PAGE " found in columns 87:99
DPLINE ’PAGE ’
Exclude if "PAGE " found anywhere on line
SELECT MEM1,MEM2
Search only members MEM1 and MEM2 of PDS
- - - - Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F6=Rchange F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right
F12=Cancel
Figure 148. Search-For Process Statements Panel (ISRSFPRS)

The SuperC program validates the process statements at run time. Invalid process
statements are not used and are noted at the bottom of the listing. Unless a higher
return code is required by some other condition, a return code of 4 is returned.
For the syntax and examples of the Search-For process statements, see “SuperC
Search-For Process Statements” on page 452.
|

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)

|
|
|
|

The ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16) provides functions for processing ISPF tables.
When you select this option, the ISPF Table Utility entry panel is displayed. This
panel allows you to specify a table data set or DD, a table name, and an option to
be performed.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

The Edit and Browse functions allow you to view the data in the rows of an ISPF
table in full-screen mode (that is, multiple rows are displayed on a screen). Line
commands allow you to work with individual or multiple table rows. Primary
commands are provided to support processing against the entire table, including
changing the format of the displayed data. Table data can be scrolled in any
direction (up, down, left, or right). All table column values are displayed in
scrollable fields, allowing columns to be scrolled left or right, and individual

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

241

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|

column values to be expanded and displayed in a popup window. The values for
any extension variables associated with a particular table row can be displayed.

|
|
|
|

The Edit function allows you to change the data in a table simply by overtyping
the displayed value. Edit function line commands are available to insert new table
rows, repeat rows, and delete rows. Extension variables for a table row can be
created, modified, or deleted.

|
|
|

The Export function writes the data in an ISPF table to a sequential file so that it
can be browsed or edited. You can customize the format of the data written to the
sequential file.

|
|
|
|

The Import function uses the data in a sequential file to either create a new ISPF
table or replace an existing table. The data in the sequential file is required to be in
a special format generated by the ISPF Table Utility Export function.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Menu RefList Utilities Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Table Utility
Option ===>
blank Display table list
B Browse table

E Edit table
I Import table data

Enter one of the parameters below:
Table Data Set . . TBUTIL.TABLES
or Table DD . . . ________ (Default is ISPTLIB)
Table Name . . . . ________ (Blank or pattern for table selection list)
Import Data Set

______________________________________________

Enter "/" to select option
_ Open table in SHARE mode

F1=Help
F17=Rfind

F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F18=Rchange F22=Left

F13=Help
F23=Right

F15=End
F16=Return
F24=Cretriev

Figure 149. ISPF Table Utility Panel (ISRUTBP0)

Table Utility Panel Action Bar

The Table Utility Panel action bar choices function as follows:

|
|
|

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

|
|
|

RefList

For information about referral lists, see the chapter on Using
Personal Data Set Lists and Library Lists in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

|
|
|

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Options

The Options pull-down offers the following choices:

Table Utilities Options

Export Report Options

Export Data Set Attributes

242

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|
|
|

Help

The Help pull-down provides general information about Table
Utility topics as well as information about each of the main panels
and options.

Table Utility Panel Fields

The fields on the ISPF Table Utility panel are:

|
|

Table Data Set
The name of the data set containing the table you wish to process.

|
|
|

Table DD
The name of the DD allocated to your ISPF session which contains the
table you wish to process.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

The default is the ISPTLIB DD if you do not enter data for either the Table
Data Set or Table DD. If you enter data in both the Table Data Set and
Table DD fields, the Table Data Set takes precedence.
Table Name
The name of the table you wish to process.
If you leave this field blank or supply a pattern the table selection list will
be displayed showing the matching tables in the table data set or DD.

|
|
|

Import Data Set
The name of the sequential data set containing the data used to create or
replace a table through the Import function.

|
|
|
|

Open table in SHARE mode
Select this option if the table you choose to process is already open on
another logical screen, or if you might need to share the table with another
logical screen.

Table Utility Entry Panel Options

|
|

The following sections describe the options shown on the ISPF Table Utility entry
panel:

|
|
|
|
|

Blank - (Display Table List)
If you leave the Option field blank, a list of tables for the Table Data Set or
Table DD is displayed when the Table Name is either blank or contains a
pattern. If a valid Table Name is entered, the table list is bypassed and the
Edit/Browse panel is displayed.

|
|
|
|
|

B - (Browse Table)
If a valid Table Name for the Table Data Set or Table DD is entered, the
Browse Table panel is displayed. If the Table Name is either blank or
contains a pattern, the table list is displayed allowing you to select the
table to be browsed.

|
|
|
|
|

E - (Edit Table)
If a valid Table Name for the Table Data Set or Table DD is entered, the
Edit Table Display panel is displayed. If the Table Name is either blank or
contains a pattern, the table list is displayed allowing you to select the
table to be edited.

|
|
|

I - (Import Table Data)
The Import function uses data from a sequential data set to create a new
ISPF table or update an existing ISPF table. You must supply a Table Data

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

243

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
Set and Table Name for the new or updated table. The sequential data set
containing the data that will be used to create or update the table must be
specified in the Import Data Set field.

|
|
|

Table Data Set Selection List

This selection list is displayed when you enter a table data set name and either no
table name or a table name pattern on the table utility entry panel.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Menu Utilities Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Table List
Row 1 to 12 of 29
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR
List of tables in table library PDFTOOL.COMMON.TABLES
Name
-------_ BLG0CMDS
_ BLG0KEYS
_ BLG0PROF
_ BLSGEDIT
_ BLSGEDRT
_ BLSGPROF
_ BLSLPROF
_ DAFCMDS
_ ECXPDFPC
_ HSOCMDS
_ MOSCMDS
_ MVS8CMDS
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 150. Table Data Set Selection List Panel (ISRUTBP1)

If no table name is supplied, all members in the table data set are shown in the
selection list. If a table name pattern is supplied, all members in the table data set
that have a name matching the pattern are shown in the selection list.

|
|

The following line commands are available on the table data set selection list
panel:

|
|

The Edit line command displays the EDIT table panel. It is available if you
did not enter an option on the table utility entry panel.

|
|

The Browse line command displays the BROWSE table panel. It is available if
you did not enter an option on the table utility entry panel.

|
|
|
|

When you use the Select line command against a table, either the BROWSE
table or EDIT table panel is displayed:
v BROWSE table is displayed if you entered option B on the entry panel.
v EDIT table is displayed if you entered option E on the entry panel.
v If you did not enter option B or E on the entry panel, the panel is
determined by how the option “Use EDIT as default to process selected
table” is set. To set this option, select Table Utility Options panel from the
Options pull-down.

|
|

The following primary commands are available on the table data set selection list
panel:

|
|
|

L string

244

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

The Locate command scrolls the selection list and positions at the
top of the display the entry which either matches or precedes (in
alphabetic sequence) the value of string.

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|
|
|

S tblname

The Select command searches the selection list for an entry that
matches tblname. If a matching entry is found the table is displayed
in either the BROWSE table or EDIT table panel, following the
same rules as for the Select line command.

|
|
|
|

E tblname

The Edit command is available if you did not enter an option on
the table utility entry panel. The selection list is searched for an
entry that matches tblname. If a matching entry is found the EDIT
table panel is displayed.

|
|
|
|

B tblname

The Browse command is available if you did not enter an option
on the table utility entry panel. The selection list is searched for an
entry that matches tblname. If a matching entry is found the
BROWSE table panel is displayed.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
|
|

Table DD Selection List
This selection list is displayed when you enter a table DD and either no table name
or a table name pattern on the table utility entry panel.
Menu Utilities Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Table List
Row 1 to 12 of 443
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR
List of tables in data sets allocated to DD ISPTLIB
Concat.
Name
Number Table Data Set
-------- ------- ---------------------------------------------_ $ISRPROF
1 PDFTDEV.LSACKV.TABLES
_ #ISRPROF
1 PDFTDEV.LSACKV.TABLES
_ ABCPROF
7 LSACKV.ISPF.ISPPROF
_ ACBKEYS
17 SYS1.DGTTLIB
_ ADB2DB2D
9 SYS2.TABLES.SYSPLEXD
_ ADB2PARM
23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21D
23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21DI2
23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21S
23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21SP
23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21T
23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
_ ADB21X
23 DB2.ADMIN.V2R1M0.SADBTLIB
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 151. Table DD Selection List Panel (ISRUTBP2)

If no table name was supplied, all members in the data sets allocated to the table
DD are shown in the selection list. If a table name pattern was supplied, all
members in the data sets allocated to the table DD which have a name matching
the pattern are shown in the selection list.

|
|
|
|

The table DD selection list is sorted in member name order. Along with the
member name, the selection list displays the name of the table data set where the
member was found, and the concatenation number for that data set within the
table DD.

The following line commands are available on the table DD selection list panel:

|
|

The Edit line command displays the EDIT table panel. It is available if you
did not enter an option on the table utility entry panel.

|
|

The Browse line command displays the BROWSE table panel. It is available if
you did not enter an option on the table utility entry panel.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

245

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
When you use the Select line command against a table, either the BROWSE
table or EDIT table panel is displayed:
v BROWSE table is displayed if you entered option B on the entry panel.
v EDIT table is displayed if you entered option E on the entry panel.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|

The following primary commands are available on the table data set selection list
panel:

|
|
|

L string

The Locate command scrolls the selection list and positions at the
top of the display the entry which either matches or precedes (in
alphabetic sequence) the value of string.

|
|
|
|

S tblname

|
|
|
|

E tblname

|
|
|
|

B tblname

v If you did not enter option B or E on the entry panel, the panel is
determined by how the option “Use EDIT as default to process selected
table” is set. To set this option, select Table Utility Options panel from the
Options pull-down.

Edit/Browse Table Panel

The table display panel used for the Edit and Browse functions of the table utility
shows multiple rows on the one screen. Each row occupies one line on the screen.
The UP and DOWN primary commands allow you to scroll through the rows in a
table.

|
|
|
|
|

246

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
BROWSE
ISPF Table BLSGEDIT
Row 1 to 15 of 17
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR
Shift ===> PAGE
ZEDPTYPE ZEDPLRCL ZEDPRCFM ZEDPFLAG
ZEDPBNDL ZEDPBNDR
----+--- ----+--- ----+--- ----+----1----+----2---- ----+--- ----+--__ TRACE
128
F
000000101000000000010000 0
0
__ CLIST
251
V
010000000000100000010000 0
0
__ PANELS 80
F
000000101000100000010000 0
0
__ TRACE
72
F
000000101000000000010000 0
0
__ CNTL
80
F
000000001000100000010000 0
0
__ JCL
80
F
010000000000100000010000 0
0
__ VCALL
80
F
000000001000000000000000 0
0
__ TRACE
121
V
000000001000000000000000 0
0
__ F02
80
F
000000001000000000000000 0
0
__ F03
121
V
000000001000000000000000 0
0
__ PRINT1 129
V
000000001000000000000000 0
0
__ TEXT
251
V
010000000000000000000000 0
0
__ ISPVCALL 80
V
000000000000000000000000 0
0
__ TRACE
80
F
000000000000000000000000 0
0
__ LOG
121
V
000000000000000000000000 0
0
F1=Help
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
F12=Cancel F13=Help
F15=End
F16=Return F17=Rfind
F22=Left
F23=Right
F24=Cretriev

Figure 152. Table Display Panel, EDIT mode (ISRUTBP3)

The dialog variables for the table rows are displayed in columns across the screen,
with the dialog variable names shown as column headings. The RIGHT and LEFT
primary commands allow you to view any columns that are not currently visible.

|
|
|
|
|
|

Two options on the Table Utility Options panel control how key values are
displayed:
v “Color used to display table key values” specifies the color (BLUE, RED, PINK,
GREEN, TURQ, YELLOW, or WHITE).
v “Intensity used to display table key values” specifies the intensity (HIGH or
LOW).

|
|
|

The default color is GREEN and the default intensity is HIGH. For the Edit
function, key values are always underscored. For the Browse function, key values
are not underscored.

|
|
|
|
|
|

To determine the width required for each column field, the table utility must scan
the table rows and check the length of the table variable values. While the utility
uses an efficient method to scan a table, this process can be time consuming for a
table with an extremely large number of rows. You can limit the number of rows
scanned through the “Maximum rows searched to determine column width”
option on the Table Utility Options panel available from the Options pull-down.

|
|
|
|
|
|

All table variables are displayed in scrollable fields, with a scale indicator
displayed below each column heading. Using scrollable fields allows the EXPAND
primary command to be used to display the value of a table variable in a popup
window. This popup window can display and edit data in HEX mode. The
scrollable fields also allow you to use the RIGHT and LEFT primary commands to
horizontally scroll column values.

|
|
|

For the Browse function, all the fields displaying table variable values are
protected. For the Edit function, all these fields are unprotected and you can make
changes to the table variable values by overtyping the displayed data.

|
|

For the Edit function, when you press Exit (F3) the changes are saved to a table
output library. Normally the changes would be saved to the originating data set.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

247

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|
|
|

If you specified the table name and a Table DD on the ISPF Table Utility panel,
and the “Always save table in originating data set” check box on the Table Utility
Options panel is not selected, ISPF prompts you to specify the output data set. See
“Table Output Data Set Selection” on page 258 for more information.

|
|

Line Commands

|
|
|
|

Extension Variables. Use this command to display the extension variables for
the table row. When using the Edit function, the values of the extension
variables can be changed, new extension variables can be created, and
existing extension variables can be deleted. See “Extension Variables Panel.”

|
|
|

Insert Row After. Use this command to insert one or more rows after the row
where the line command was entered. The table variable values for an
inserted row are initialized with blanks.

|
|
|

Insert Row Before. Use this command to insert one or more rows before the
row where the line command was entered. The table variable values for an
inserted row are initialized with blanks.

|
|
|
|
|

Repeat Row. Use this command to create one or more copies of the table row.
The copied rows are inserted after the row where the line command was
entered. For the copied rows, all variables excluding keys are initialized
using the values from the corresponding variables in the row where the line
command was entered. Key variables are initialized with blanks.

Delete Row. Use this command to delete one or more table rows.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Notes:
1. The E command is available in both the Edit and Browse functions. The I, B, R,
and D commands are only available in the Edit function.
2. For all line commands except E, an optional number from 1 to 9 can be entered
as a suffix to the line command character. This causes the command to operate
on multiple rows starting with the row on which the command was entered.
3. When processing a keyed table, the optional number is ignored for the line
commands I, B, and R.

|
|
|
|
|

Extension Variables Panel: The Extension Variables panel shows the names and
values of the extension variables defined for a table row. To display the extension
variables panel, enter the E line command against a table row on the table display
screen.

This section describes the line commands available on the Edit/Browse panel.

248

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
BLSGEDIT Extension Variables for Row 1
Row 1 to 3 of 3
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR
Extension variable values scrollable width:
65
S Name
Value
-- -------- --------------------------------------------------------------------+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+
__ ZEDPIMAC
__ ZEDPFLG2 01000011
__ ZEDPFLG3 00000001
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

F1=Help
F9=Swap

F2=Split F3=Exit
F4=Expand F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

F8=Down

Figure 153. Extension Variables Panel (ISRUTBP4)

When you edit a table, the extension variable names and their values and the
“Extension variable values scrollable width” are displayed in unprotected fields.
You can change the extension variable names and values by overtyping the
displayed data. You can use the selection field to enter a line command against an
extension variable. When you browse a table, the extension variable names and
values are protected, and the selection field is unavailable.

|
|
|
|
|
|

The extension variable values are displayed in scrollable fields with a scale
indicator displayed below the column heading. You can use the RIGHT and LEFT
primary commands to horizontally scroll through one of the values. You can enter
the EXPAND primary command to display the value of an extension variable in a
popup window. This popup window also enables you to display and edit data in
HEX mode.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

The “Extension variable values scrollable width” field initially displays the length
of the scrollable width of the field that displays the extension variable values. This
length will be the maximum of either:
v The length of the field displaying the values. This length depends on the width
of the screen. For example, if the screen has a width of 80 characters the field
will have a length of 65 characters. For a screen with a width of 132 characters
the field will have a length of 117 characters.
v The length of the largest value for the extension variables displayed.

|
|
|
|

If you need to lengthen the value for an extension variable beyond the scrollable
limit, you can use this field to enter a numeric value to increase the scrollable
width of the field. You can then use the EXPAND primary command (F4) to
update the value of the extension variable.

|
|

Line Commands: This section describes the line commands available on the
Extension Variables panel.

|
|
|
|

Insert Extension Variable After. Use this command to insert one or more
extension variables after the row where the line command was entered.
The name and value for the inserted extension variable are initialized with
blanks.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

249

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|
|
|

Insert Extension Variable Before. Use this command to insert one or more
extension variables before the row where the line command was entered.
The name and value for an inserted extension variable are initialized with
blanks.

|
|
|
|
|

Repeat Extension Variable. Use this command to create one or more copies
of the extension variable. The extension variables are inserted after the row
where the line command was entered. For the new extension variables, the
names and values are copied from the extension variable where the line
command was entered.

|
|

Delete Extension Variable. Use this command to delete one or more
extension variables.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Notes:
1. Line commands on the extension variables panel are only available when using
the Edit function.
2. For all line commands, an optional number from 1 to 9 can be entered as a
suffix to the line command character. This causes the command to operate on
multiple extension variables starting with the extension variable against which
the command was entered.

|
|
|

Primary Commands

||
|
|
|

Navigating through the table:
Changing the data or how it is displayed:
Saving or exporting table data:

|
|
|

Browse and Edit primary commands are entered in the Command field. All the
primary commands except SAVE are available in both the Edit and Browse
functions. The SAVE command is only available in Edit.

|
|
|
|

CANCEL
Terminate Edit without Saving Changes. The CANCEL command (F12)
terminates table editing without saving the table data to the output data
set.

CAN can be used as an abbreviation for the CANCEL command.

This section describes the primary commands available on the Table Utility
Edit/Browse panel:
UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FIND/RFIND
INSERT, EXPAND, SORT/STATS/STRUCT
SAVE/CANCEL, EXPORT/FEXPORT

DOWN

|
|
|

Scroll Down. The standard ISPF DOWN command (F8|F20) can be used to
vertically scroll the table display towards the bottom of the table.
ISPF supported scroll amount values used for the DOWN command can be
entered in the Scroll field. You can also enter a valid scroll amount in the
Command field.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXPAND
Expand Display of Scrollable Field. The standard ISPF EXPAND command
(F4) can be used to display a table variable value in a popup window
containing a scrollable dynamic area. To do this, enter EXPAND while the
cursor is placed on the field displaying a table variable value.

|
|
|
|

EXPORT
Display Table Export Layout. The Export Layout panel is displayed when
the EXPORT primary command is entered on the Edit/Browse panel. This
panel shows the structure used to format the table data written to the

250

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

export output data set. You can make changes to the structure to alter the
format of the data written to the output data set.
Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Table BLG0CMDS Export Layout
Row 1 to 9 of 9
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR
Overtype the Order column and press ENTER to rearrange the fields into the
order in which you would like them to be dumped. Change Width as required.
Only fields with an Order value less than 999 will be dumped.
Use the FILE primary command to write the table data to the export data set.
Cumulative
Order
Name
Field Heading
Width
Width
------------ ---------------------------------- ------- ---------001
ZEDPTYPE ZEDPTYPE
8
9
002
ZEDPLRCL ZEDPLRCL
8
18
003
ZEDPRCFM ZEDPRCFM
8
27
004
ZEDPFLAG ZEDPFLAG
24
52
005
ZEDPBNDL ZEDPBNDL
8
61
006
ZEDPBNDR ZEDPBNDR
8
70
007
ZEDPTABC ZEDPTABC
8
79
008
ZEDPMASK ZEDPMASK
8
88
009
ZEDPTABS ZEDPTABS
8
97
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 154. Table Export Layout Panel (ISRUTBP7)

The screen shows the current structure used to format the table data
written to the export data set. This is a list containing the following fields:
Order This input field allows you to enter a number which defines the
sequence in which the table variables for each row are placed in
the export data set. For example, assigning an Order of 001 to a
table variable makes it the first to be written to each table data
record in the export data set.
Note: Only table variables that have an Order value less than 999
are written to the export data set.

Name The name of the table variable.

|
|
|
|

Field Heading
This input field allows you to define a heading for each table
variable written to the export data set. It is initialized with the
name of the associated table variable.

|
|
|
|

Width This input field allows you to define the number of characters
allocated to the column used to print a table variable value. This
field is initialized to the display length of the table variable value
on the table display screen.

|
|
|
|

Cumulative Width
This field shows the total number of characters required in the
export data set record to accommodate this variable and all the
preceding table variables.

|
|

When you are happy you have the correct format defined, use the FILE
primary command to write the table data to the export data set.

The following abbreviations can be used for the EXPORT command:

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

251

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|
|
|

EX
EXP
EXPO
EXPOR

FILE

|
|

The FILE command causes the table data to be written to the
export data set in the format defined on the export layout panel.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

The name of the export output data set can be specified as a
parameter to the FILE command. You can enter any fully qualified
data set name by enclosing it in apostrophes. If you omit the
apostrophes, your TSO prefix is added to the beginning of the data
set name. For example, if a user whose TSO prefix is LSACKV
issues the command FILE TAB1.DATA, the table data report is
written to the export data set LSACKV.TAB1.DATA.

|
|
|
|

If you do not specify a data set name on the FILE command, the
export data set name defaults to tsopref.tblname.TBLDUMP, where
tsopref is your TSO prefix and tblname is the name of the table you
are processing.

|
|
|
|
|

A warning message might be displayed if the export data set
already exists. You then have the option of terminating the
command to avoid overwriting the data set. If you don’t want to
receive these warnings in future, clear the “Warn if export data set
exists” check box on the Table Utility Options panel.

|
|
|
|

When the FILE command has finished, the export data set is
displayed. The “Display mode for export data set” option on the
Table Utility Options panel allows you to choose either the ISPF
Browse, View, or Edit functions to display the export data set.

|
|
|

The following abbreviations can be used for the FILE command:
FI
FIL

|
|
|

FEXPORT
Fast EXPORT Command. The FEXPORT command writes the table data to
the export output data set without displaying the export layout panel.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

The name of the export output data set can be specified as a parameter to
the FEXPORT command. You can enter any fully qualified data set name
by enclosing it in apostrophes. If you omit the apostrophes, your TSO
prefix is added to the beginning of the data set name. For example, if a
user whose TSO prefix is LSACKV issues the command
FEXPORT TAB1.DATA, the table data report is written to the export data set
LSACKV.TAB1.DATA.

|
|
|

If you do not specify a data set name on the FEXPORT command, the
export data set name defaults to tsopref.tblname.TBLDUMP, where tsopref is
your TSO prefix and tblname is the name of the table you are processing.

|
|
|
|
|

If the export data set exists when the FEXPORT command is issued and
you have selected “Warn if export data set exists” on the Table Utility
Options panel available from the Options pull-down, a warning popup
panel is displayed. You then have the option of terminating the command
to avoid overwriting the data set.

|
|

When the FEXPORT command has finished, the export data set is
displayed. The “Display mode for export data set” option on the Table

252

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|
|

Utility Options panel available from the Options pull-down allows you to
choose either the ISPF Browse, View, or Edit functions to display the
export data set.

|
|
|
|
|
|

The following abbreviations can be used for the FEXPORT command:

|
|
|
|

FE
FEX
FEXP
FEXPO
FEXPOR

FIND Search for String in Table. The FIND command can be used to search for
the occurrence of a character string in a specified column in the table. If
the string is found, the row in which it is found is positioned at the top of
the display.

|
|
|

The FIND command has the following formats:

where:

varname

The name of any of the table variables.

|
|

The ordinal number of any column displayed on the
current screen.

|
|

string

The character string to be searched for. The search is not
case sensitive.

|
|
|
|

The following abbreviations can be used for the FIND command:

|
|
|
|

INSERT
Insert a Blank Row at the Top of the Table. Use the INSERT command to
create a new blank row as the first row in the table. This command allows
you to create a row in an empty table.

|
|

LEFT

FIND varname string
FIND n string

F
FI
FIN

Scroll Left. The LEFT command (F10|F22) can be used to scroll the table
display horizontally towards the first table column.

|
|
|

The scroll amount values used for the LEFT command can be entered in
the Shift field. You can also enter one of the following valid scroll amounts
in the Command field:

PAGE

Causes the display to scroll left by the width of the screen.

|
|

MAX

Causes the display to scroll left so that the first column for
the table is the leftmost displayed.

|
|

0 to 9999

Causes the display to scroll left the specified number of
columns.

|
|
|
|

Note: Table variable values are displayed in scrollable fields. Therefore if
the cursor is placed in a field displaying a table variable value, the
LEFT command operates on that field, not on the whole table
display.

|
|
|
|

RFIND
Repeat Last FIND Command. The RFIND command (F5|F17) is used to
repeat the last FIND command. It is most useful when assigned to a
function key.
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

253

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
R can be used as an abbreviation for the RFIND command.

|
RIGHT

|
|
|

Scroll Right. The RIGHT command (F11|F23) can be used to scroll the
table display horizontally towards the last table column.

|
|
|

The scroll amount values used for the RIGHT command can be entered in
the Shift field. You can also enter one of the following valid scroll amounts
in the Command field:

|
|

PAGE

Causes the display to scroll right by the width of the
screen.

|
|

MAX

Causes the display to scroll right so that the last column
for the table is the rightmost displayed.

|
|

0 to 9999

Causes the display to scroll right the specified number of
columns.

|
|
|
|

Note: Table variable values are displayed in scrollable fields. Therefore if
the cursor is placed in a field displaying a table variable value, the
RIGHT command operates on that field, not on the whole table
display.
SAVE Save Table Changes. The SAVE command causes the changes to the table
data to be written to the table output library. Normally the changes would
be saved to the originating data set.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

If you specified the table name and a Table DD on the ISPF Table Utility
panel, and the “Always save table in originating data set” check box on the
Table Utility Options panel is not selected, ISPF prompts you to specify the
output data set. See “Table Output Data Set Selection” on page 258 for
more information.

SAV can be used as an abbreviation for the SAVE command.
SORT Display Table Sort Definition. The Sort Specification panel is displayed
when the SORT primary command is entered on the Edit/Browse panel.
This panel allows you to sort the table according to the values of one or
more table variables.

|
|
|
|
|

254

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Table BLSGEDIT Sort Specification
Row 1 to 9 of 9
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR
Overtype the Order column and press ENTER to rearrange the table variables
into the order in which you would like them to be sorted. Change Sequence to A
(Ascending) or D (Descending) as required. Table BLSGEDIT will only be sorted
using table variable with an Order less than 999.
Order
Name
Sequence (A/D)
------------------------999
ZEDPTYPE
A
999
ZEDPLRCL
A
999
ZEDPRCFM
A
999
ZEDPFLAG
A
999
ZEDPBNDL
A
999
ZEDPBNDR
A
999
ZEDPTABC
A
999
ZEDPMASK
A
999
ZEDPTABS
A
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F9=Swap

Figure 155. Table Sort Specification Panel (ISRUTBP8)

The screen displays a list of the table variables and contains the following
fields:
Order This input field allows you to enter a number which defines the
sort priority for the associated table variable. For example,
assigning an Order of 001 makes the associated table variable the
primary sort key.

|
|
|
|

Note: The table will only be sorted on those variables that have an
Order value less than 999.

|
|
|

Name The name of the table variable.

|
|
|

Sequence (A/D)
This input field allows you to define whether to sort in ascending
(A) or descending (D) sequence for the associated table variable.

|
|

When you press Exit (F3) to return to the Edit/Browse panel it is sorted
based on changes made on the table sort display.

|
|

Note: If you are using Edit, the sort criteria entered on this screen are
saved with the table.

|
|
|

The following abbreviations can be used for the SORT command:

|
|
|
|
|

SO
SOR

STATS
Display Table Statistics. The table statistics display is invoked when the
STATS primary command is entered on the browse/edit table display. This
screen shows the statistical information that ISPF maintains for the table.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

255

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│
Statistics for Table BLG0CMDS
│
│ Command ===> __________________________________________________________
│
│ The following information is returned by the TBSTATS service:
│
│
│
│ Created on . . . : 1997/01/14 at 13:26:23
│
│ Last updated on : 2004/08/27 at 09:37:02 by LSACKV
│
│
│
│ Initial number of rows when created . . . . . . : 101
│
│ Current number of rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 101
│
│ Number of existing rows which have been updated : 2
│
│ Number of times table has been updated . . . . . : 7
│
│ Virtual storage size (bytes) . . . . . . . . . . : 8,072
│
│
│
│ Last TABLE SERVICES command . . . . . . . . . . : TBTOP
│
│ Return code from above service . . . . . . . . . : 0
│
│
│
│ Status 1 : 1 - table exists in input library chain
│
│ Status 2 : 3 - table is open in WRITE mode in this logical screen
│
│ Status 3 : 2 - table is not available for WRITE mode
│
│
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 156. Table Statistics Panel (ISRUTBP6)

The screen shows the following fields:

|
|

Created on
The date and time the table was originally created.

|
|

Last updated on
The date and time the table was last modified.

|
|
|

Initial number of rows when created
Number of rows that were added during the session when the
table was first created and then closed.

|
|

Current number of rows
Number of rows currently in the table.

|
|
|
|

Number of existing rows which have been updated
Number of rows that have been modified in the table at least once.
A row that is added to an existing table is considered a modified
row.

|
|
|
|

Number of times table has been updated
Number of editing sessions during which the table has been
modified. Opening a table, then making one or more updates, then
closing and saving the table increments this count by one.

|
|

Virtual storage size (bytes)
Number of bytes of virtual storage required by the table.

|
|

Last TABLE SERVICES command
The name of the last table service called.

|
|

Return code from above service
The return code issued by the last table service called.

|
|

Status 1
The status of the table in the table input library chain.

|
|

Status 2
The status of the table in this logical screen.

256

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

User ID of the last user who modified the table.

Status 3
The availability of the table to be used in WRITE mode.
STRUCT
Display Table Structure. The table structure panel is invoked when the
STRUCT primary command is entered on the Edit/Browse panel. This
panel shows the structure used to format the browse/edit table display.
You can change the data displayed on this screen to alter the format of the
table display.
Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Structure of Table BLSGEDIT
Row 1 to 7 of 9
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR
Rows scanned to produce
Number of Rows . . : 17
structure . . . . . . . . . . : 17
Number of Keys . . : 0
Number of Names . : 9
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ZEDPTYPE ZEDPLRCL ZEDPRCFM ZEDPFLAG
ZEDPBNDL ZEDPBNDR
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Column Name
Type Length Display Area
------ -------- ---- ------ -----------------------------001
ZEDPTYPE Name
8
<= start of display
002
ZEDPLRCL Name
8
<= displayed
003
ZEDPRCFM Name
8
<= displayed
004
ZEDPFLAG Name
24
<= displayed
005
ZEDPBNDL Name
8
<= displayed
006
ZEDPBNDR Name
8
<= end of display
007
ZEDPTABC Name
8
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F9=Swap

Figure 157. Table Structure Panel (ISRUTBP5)

The top area of this screen shows the following information about the
table:
v Number of Rows
v Number of Keys
v Number of Names
v Rows scanned to produce structure

|
|
|

Note: This value is controlled by the “Maximum rows searched to
determine column width” option on the Table Utility Options
panel available from the Options pull-down.

|
|

The next area of the screen shows the current column headings for the
table display.

|
|

The bottom area of the screen shows the current structure used to format
the table display. This is a list containing the following fields:

|
|
|
|

Column

This input field shows a number representing the relative
position of the associated table variable in the table display.
You can change the position of a variable in the table
display by altering this number.

Name

The name of the table variable.

|
|

Type

Shows a value of Key if the associated variable is defined
as a key for the table. Otherwise shows a value of Name.

|
|

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

257

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
Length

|
|
|
|

This input field shows the number of characters used to
display the table variable value. The table utility calculates
this number by scanning the table rows and finding the
largest length value for each table variable.
Note: If you have specified a value for the “Maximum
rows searched to determine column width” option
on the Table Utility Options panel, the table utility
might not scan all the table rows and therefore the
calculated length value might not be large enough
for all variable values.

|
|
|
|
|
|

Identifies the table variables currently shown on the table
display screen.

|
|

Display Area

|
|

When you press Exit (F3) to return to the Edit/Browse panel it is
reformatted based on changes made on the table structure display.

|
|
|
|

The following abbreviations can be used for the STRUCT command:
STR
STRU
STRUC

|
|

Scroll Up. The standard ISPF UP command (F7|F19) can be used to
vertically scroll the table display towards the top of the table.
ISPF supported scroll amount values used for the UP command can be
entered in the Scroll field. You can also enter a valid scroll amount in the
Command field.

|
|
|

Table Output Data Set Selection

This panel is displayed when either the first SAVE command is issued or the EXIT
command (F3) is issued, and the following conditions are all true:
v the table you have modified was specified on the Table Utility Entry panel
v you did not select “Always save table in originating data set” on the Table
Utility Options panel
v you specified a Table DD rather than a Table Data Set on the Table Utility Entry
panel

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

258

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Table Output Data Set Selection
Row 1 to 7 of 2
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> CSR
No table data set was originally specified, only a table DD. Since there was
more than one table data set allocated to this DD, please select which data
set should receive the updated table. All future SAVE requests will
automatically use the selected table data set. Use END or CANCEL to return
without saving the table.
S
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Table Data Set
---------------------------------------------PDFTDEV.LSACKV.TABLES
PDFTOOL.COMMON.TABLES
PDFTDEV.STG.TABLES
PDFTDEV.INT.TABLES
PDFTDEV.SVT.TABLES
ISPFTEST.TABLES
LSACKV.ISPF.ISPPROF
MBURNS.ISPF.ISPPROF
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F9=Swap

Figure 158. Table Output Data Set Selection Panel (ISRUTBP9)

This panel lists the data sets allocated to the table DD specified on the table utility
entry panel. Enter an S in the selection field for the data set in which you would
like the updated table to be saved. If you press Enter without selecting a data set,
the table update is canceled.

Table Utility Options

|
|
|

To display the Table Utility Options panel, select Table Utility Options from the
Options menu on the action bar. This panel allows you to set options that control
certain behaviors within the ISPF Table Utility.

These options on the first section of the panel affect the Edit and Browse functions:

|
|
|
|

Open table in SHARE mode
Select this option if the table you are to process is already open on another
logical screen or if you might need to share the table with another logical
screen.

|
|
|
|
|

Use EDIT as default to process selected table
When you select this option, you will default to Edit mode if you do not
specify either the Edit or Browse functions on the table utility entry panel
or the table selection panel. You will default to browse mode when this
option is not selected.

|
|
|
|

Always save table in originating data set
When this option is selected: If the table you are editing was specified on the
table utility entry panel but the Table data set was not specified, the table
is automatically saved in the original data set.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

When this option is cleared: When you first attempt to save the table, the
table output data set selection panel will be displayed. This panel allows
you to choose within the table DD the data set where the table will be
saved.
Maximum rows searched to determine column width
To determine the width required to display each column field, the table
utility scans the table rows and checks the length of the table variable
Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

259

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|
|

values. This option allows you to specify a number which acts as the limit
for the number of rows scanned in this process. If you leave this value
blank, all rows will be scanned.

|
|

Note: Because the table utility uses an efficient method to scan a table, you
can leave this option blank for all but extremely large tables.

|
|
|
|

Color used to display table key values
Use this option to specify the color (BLUE, RED, PINK, GREEN, TURQ,
YELLOW, or WHITE) used to display the values for the key variable in the
table. The default is GREEN.

|
|
|

Intensity used to display table key values
Use this option to specify the intensity (HIGH or LOW) used to display the
values for the key variables in the table. The default is HIGH.

These options on the second section of the panel affect the Import function:

|
|
|
|
|
|

Warn if table exists in the output library
When this option is selected, a warning message will be displayed if you
try to import data into a table that already exists in the specified output
data set. You can then choose either to overwrite the existing table or to
cancel the import process. If you don’t want to receive warning messages
in this situation, clear this option.

|
|
|
|

Use Edit to view the imported table
When this option is selected, the table utility uses the Edit function to
display the table that was created or updated by the Import function. If
this option is not set, the Browse function will be used to display the table.

These options on the final section of the panel affect the Export function:

|
|
|
|
|
|

Warn if export data set exists
When this option is selected, a warning message will be displayed if the
data set you are exporting table data into already exists. You can then
choose either to overwrite the data set or to cancel the export process. If
you don’t want to receive warning messages in this situation, clear this
option.

|
|
|
|

Display mode for export data set
This option allows you to choose whether to use either the ISPF Browse,
View, or Edit function to display the export data set after the export
process has completed.

Table Export Report Options

To display the Table Export Reports Options panel, select Export Report Options
from the Options menu on the action bar. This panel allows you to set options
which control the format of the report written to the output data set by the table
utility Export function.

|
|
|
|
|

260

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
|

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│
Table Export Report Options
│
│ Command ===> _____________________________________________________________ │
│
│
│
│
│ Enter "/" to select option
│
│
Set options to match IMPORT format report
│
│
│
│ / Generate headings
│
│ / Underline headings
│
│
│
│ Heading, column and page spacing:
│
│
│
│ Blank lines after heading . . . . . 0 (0 - 9)
│
│
│
│ Number of spaces between columns . . 1 (0 - 99)
│
│
│
│ Number of lines per page . . . . . . 0 (0 - 99)
│
│
(0 if no paging is required)
│
│
│
│ Number of blank lines between pages 0 (0 - 99)
│
│
(ignored if lines/page = 0)
│
│
│
│ Enter END to save changes.
│
│ Enter CANCEL to cancel changes.
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 159. Table Export Report Options Panel (ISRUTBO2)

The panel provides the following options:

|
|
|
|
|

Set options for IMPORT format report
Select this option if you want to write the export report in the same format
that is used by the table utility Import function. Selecting this option
causes other options on the panel to be set so as to produce the export
report in the appropriate format.

|
|
|

Generate headings
Select this option if you want the export report to have headings for the
columns showing the table variable values.

|
|
|
|
|

Underline headings (in export report)
Select this option if you want the column headings to be underlined.
Column headings for key variables are underlined with plus signs
(++++++++). Column headings for non-key variables are underlined with
dashes (--------).

|
|
|

Blank lines after heading
This option allows you to specify the number of blank lines printed after
the column headings. The number must be between 0 and 9.

|
|
|
|

Number of spaces between columns
This option allows you to specify the number of spaces printed between
the columns showing the table variable values. The number must be
between 0 and 99.

|
|
|
|

Number of lines per page
This option allows you to specify the maximum number of lines printed on
each page of the report. The number must be between 0 and 99. If you
specify 0, no page breaks will be generated.

|
|

Number of blank lines between pages
This option allows you to specify the number of blank lines printed at the

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

261

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
end of a page to separate it from the following page. The number must be
between 0 and 99. This option is ignored if you specify 0 for the “Number
of lines per page” option.

|
|
|

Export Data Set Attributes

To display the Export Data Set Attributes panel, select Export Data Set Attributes
from the Options menu on the action bar. This panel allows you to set various
attributes for the output data set created by the table utility Export function.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│
Export Data Set Attributes
│
│ Command ===> ____________________________________________________________ │
│
│
│ Management class . . .
(Blank for default management class) │
│ Storage class . . . .
(Blank for default storage class)
│
│ Volume serial . . . .
(Blank for system default volume) ** │
│ Device type . . . . . SYSALLDA
(Generic unit or device address) ** │
│ Data class . . . . . .
(Blank for default data class)
│
│ Space units . . . . . TRACK
(BLKS, TRKS, or CYLS)
│
│ Primary quantity . . 5
(In above units)
│
│ Secondary quantity
5
(In above units)
│
│
│
│ ( ** Only one of these fields may be specified)
│
│
│
│ Enter END to save changes.
│
│ Enter CANCEL to cancel changes.
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 160. Table Export Data Set Attributes Panel (ISRUTBO3)

The panel provides the following options:

|
|
|
|

Management class
Specify the SMS management class for the data set. The management class
is used to obtain data management-related information for the data set,
such as migration, backup, and retention criteria.

|
|
|

Storage class
Specify the SMS storage class for the data set. The storage class is used to
obtain storage-related information (volume serial) for the data set.

|
|
|

Volume serial
For a non-SMS data set, specify the volume serial of the direct-access
volume you wish to contain the data set.

|
|
|

Device type
For a non-SMS data set, specify the generic unit address for the direct
access volume you wish to contain the data set.

|
|
|
|
|

Data class
Specify the SMS data class for the data set. The data class is used to obtain
data-related information (space units, primary quantity, secondary quantity,
directory block, record format, record length, and data set name type) for
the data set.

|
|

Space units
Specify the disk space units (TRACK, CYLINDER, or BLOCK).

262

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|

Primary quantity
Enter a number for the primary allocation in space units.

|
|

Secondary quantity
Enter a number for the secondary allocation in space units.

Importing Data into a Table

|
|
|

The ISPF Table Utility supports an Import function, where data in a sequential data
set is used to load an ISPF table. The import function is invoked by entering
option I (Import table data) on the ISPF Table Utility entry panel.

|
|

When you use the Import function, enter the following fields on the table utility
entry panel:

|
|
|

Table Data Set
This identifies the data set where the table that will be created or updated
by the Import function is saved.

|
|
|

Table Name
The name of the table that will be created or updated by the Import
function.

|
|
|

Import Data Set
The name of the data set containing the data used as input to the Import
function.

|
|
|

|
|

The Import function requires the Import Data Set to contain a report in a specific
format. This format is generated by the ISPF table utility Export function and has
the following features:
v The variable name is used as a heading for each column showing the values for
the table variables.
v The headings are underlined. Column headings for key variables are underlined
with plus signs (++++++++). Column headings for non-key variables are
underlined with dashes (--------).
v There are no blank lines after headings.
v There is only 1 space between columns.
v There is no paging.

|
|
|
|
|

A warning message might be displayed if the table you specify already exists in
the Table Data Set. You then have the option of terminating the command to avoid
overwriting the table. If you don’t want to receive these warnings in future, clear
the “Warn if table exists in the output library” check box on the Table Utility
Options panel.

|
|
|
|

When the import process has finished, the table that was created or updated is
displayed. The “Use Edit to view the imported table” option on the Table Utility
Options panel allows you to choose either the table utility Edit or Browse function
to display the imported table. The default is Browse.

|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|

Exporting Data from a Table
The ISPF Table Utility supports an Export function, where data in an ISPF table is
used to write a customizable report to a sequential file. The Export function is
invoked by using either the EXPORT or FEXPORT primary commands from the
table display screen for the table utility Edit and Browse functions.

Chapter 5. Utilities (Option 3)

263

ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
|
|

Note: The report does not show the values for extension variables defined for
table rows.

|
|

The EXPORT primary command displays the Export Layout panel, where you can
control the layout of the table data in the following ways:
v Exclude table variables from the report
v Change the order in which the table variables appear in the report
v Change the column headings

|
|
|
|
|

The Table Export Report Options panel allows you to change the format of the
report. Selecting the “Set options for IMPORT format report” option ensures the
generated report is in a format that can be processed by the table utility Import
function. The Export Data Set Attributes panel allows you to define the allocation
attributes for the export data set.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Figure 161 shows an example of the export report in a format suitable for the
Import function:

|
|

********************************* Top of Data **********************************
SUBSYS SERVER DESCRIPT
BSECEXIT BCATOWN BJCLASS BJS
+++++++ ------- ----------------------------------- -------- ------- ------- --DB2D
DB2 Version 5
A
DB26
DB2 Version 6 - Subsystem 1
A
DB62
DB2 Version 6 - Subsystem 2
A
DB27
DB2 Version 7
A
DBT5
DB2 Version 5.1 for FM/DB2 FVT only
A
DBT6
DB2 Version 6.1 for FM/DB2 FVT only
A
DBT7
DB2 Version 6.1 for FM/DB2 FVT only
A
******************************** Bottom of Data ********************************

|
|
|

Figure 161. Export report example

264

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)
The Foreground option (4) allows ISPF to run the foreground processors shown on
the Foreground Selection panel, Figure 162. All these processors except for COBOL
interactive debug, SCRIPT/VS, and FORTRAN interactive debug are also available
with the Batch option (5).
When you run a foreground processor, you must wait until the processor ends
before doing anything else with ISPF. If you want to use ISPF while waiting for the
processor to end, submit the input as a batch job. You can do this by using the
Batch option if the processor you need is listed on the Batch Selection panel,
Figure 181 on page 299.
Menu Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground Selection Panel
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
10
10A

Assembler
COBOL
VS FORTRAN
PL/I
VS PASCAL
*Binder/Link editor
SCRIPT/VS
*VS COBOL II debug
*OS/VS COBOL debug

11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19

Enter "/" to select option
Source Data Packed

* No packed data support

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

*FORTRAN debug
Member Parts List
*C/370
*REXX/370
*ADA/370
*AD/Cycle C/370
ISPDTLC
*OS/390 C/C++

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 162. Foreground Selection Panel (ISRFPA)

The names of the foreground processors on this panel are point-and-shoot fields.
For more information, see the Point-and-Shoot Text Fields section of the ISPF User
Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

Foreground Selection Panel Action Bar
The Foreground Selection Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down provides general information about

265

Foreground (Option 4)
foreground processing as well as information about each available
choice on the Foreground Selection Panel.

Foreground Processing Sequence
This topic describes the main sequence for foreground processing.
1. If you do not know whether the source data is in packed format, find out by
editing the data set and entering the PROFILE command. If the source data is
in packed format, the profile shows PACK ON.
If the data is packed, select the Source Data Packed option. If the data is not
packed, deselect this option.
Also, you should read “Expanding Packed Data” on page 269, paying close
attention to:
v Information that applies to the foreground processor you plan to use
v The difference between expanding a sequential data set and expanding
members of a partitioned data set.
When you are satisfied that the data set is ready to be processed, continue
with the next step.
2. Select one of the foreground processors listed at the top of the Foreground
Selection panel shown in Figure 162 on page 265.
Note: A region size of 2 megabytes or more will probably be required to run
the VS FORTRAN compiler in the foreground.
3. Select the Source Data Packed option to tell ISPF if it needs to expand the
source data.
Note: The Source Data Packed option has no effect on the Member parts list
option (4.12). Member parts list can read both packed and unpacked
data sets, so no expansion is needed.
4. When the Session Manager licensed program, 5740-XE2, is installed, you can
select the Session Manager mode option on the ISPF Settings panel so that
you enter Session Manager mode when you call any of the foreground
processors. Once you call Session Manager, it stays in effect for all logical
screens until you turn it off. For example, if you call Session Manager and
then split the screen, Session Manager will be in effect on both logical screens.
Note: If graphics interface mode is active, Session Manager does not get
control of the screen. Graphics interface mode is started when a
GRINIT service has been issued, but a GRTERM service has not been
issued. Refer to z/OS ISPF Services Guide for more information about
these two services.
5. Press Enter. ISPF displays the data entry panel for the processor you selected.
The remainder of this processing sequence applies to all foreground
processors except SCRIPT/VS, VS COBOL II interactive debug, COBOL
interactive debug, and Member Parts List. For these processors, use the
sequence referred to in the following list:

266

Processor

Reference

SCRIPT/VS

“SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9)” on page 282

VS COBOL II interactive
debug

“VS COBOL II Interactive Debug (Option 4.10)” on page
289

COBOL interactive debug

“OS/VS COBOL Debug (Option 4.10A)” on page 289

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—Processing Sequence
Processor

Reference

Member parts list

“Member Parts List (Option 4.12)” on page 293

6. Enter the appropriate ISPF library and concatenation sequence or data set
name. If the input data set is partitioned, you can leave the member name
blank or use a pattern to display a member list. If you need help, see:
v the Naming ISPF Libraries and Data Sets section of the Libraries and Data
Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for help in entering library
or data set names
v the Displaying Member Lists section of the Libraries and Data Sets chapter
of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for information about patterns and
displaying member lists
v “Input Data Sets” on page 272 for information about the regular
concatenation sequence
v “Object Data Sets” on page 274 for information about object modules
v “Linkage Editor Concatenation Sequence” on page 282 for help with the
linkage editor concatenation sequence
VS FORTRAN has no LIB option, which some foreground processors use to
specify the input data set concatenation sequence. Therefore, the concatenation
sequence specified in the Group fields is used to find the member to be
compiled.
For FORTRAN interactive debug, the TYPE, or last qualifier, must be either
OBJ or LOAD. However, if you specify an OBJ data set as your input data set,
you must include a load library or data set in the input search sequence (see
step 11).
7. This step applies to FORTRAN interactive debug only. Use the Source Type
field to tell ISPF the Type, or last qualifier, of the data set used to create the
input object module or load module.
8. Use the List ID field to tell ISPF what to name the output listing. See “List
Data Sets” on page 273 for more information.
9. Enter your password in the Password field if your input data set is
password-protected. See “Password Protection” on page 274 for more
information.
10. The Option field, whether ASSEMBLER, COMPILER, LINKAGE EDITOR, or
DEBUG, is remembered from one session to another. Therefore, you do not
need to change this field unless the options you need are not displayed.
Be careful not to enter any options that ISPF generates automatically. These
options are listed on the data entry panel. For more information about the
options available for your processor, refer to the documentation supplied with
that processor.
11. Enter any additional input libraries you need. For FORTRAN interactive
debug, enter any input LOAD libraries that you need to complete the search
sequence. These libraries must be LOAD libraries only. See “Input Data Sets”
on page 272 if you need help.
12. Once all the input fields have been specified, press Enter to call the
foreground processor.
If the Session Manager is installed and you selected Session Manager mode on
the ISPF Settings panel, the foreground processor and all function keys and
PA keys are under the control of the Session Manager. When foreground
processing is complete, you are prompted to enter a null line to return to ISPF
control.
Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

267

Foreground—Processing Sequence
If the Session Manager is not called, the PA and function keys have their usual
TSO-defined meanings; generally, the function keys are treated the same as
the Enter key.
13. Communication with foreground processors is in line-I/O mode. Whenever
you see three asterisks, press Enter.
14. If the foreground processor generated an output listing, the listing is
displayed automatically in Browse mode.
Note: If a Foreground processing program ends abnormally, ISPF displays a
message in the upper-right corner of the screen and does not enter
Browse mode. The list data set is retained, but the Foreground Print
Options panel (see step 15) is not displayed.
You can scroll the output up or down using the scroll commands. All the
Browse commands are available to you. When you finish browsing the listing,
enter the END command.
15. An optional print utility exit routine can be installed by your system
programmer. If this exit routine is installed, it may cause the Foreground
option’s response to differ from the following descriptions. Refer to z/OS ISPF
Planning and Customizing for more information about the print utility exit.
Another factor that can affect the performance of the Foreground option is
whether the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed. If the TSO/E
Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can optionally allow
ISPF to display a panel for submitting TSO/E Information Center Facility
information with the print request. See Figure 164 on page 275 for an example
of this panel and “Using the TSO/E Information Center Facility” on page 185
for information about the fields on this panel. If the TSO/E Information
Center Facility is not installed, the Foreground option displays the panel
shown in Figure 163 to allow you to print, keep, or delete the output.
Foreground Print Options
PK Print data set and keep
PD Print data set and delete

K Keep data set (without printing)
D Delete data set (without printing)

If END command is entered, data set is kept without printing.
Data set name . :
Print mode . . . BATCH
Batch SYSOUT class . .
Local Printer id or
writer-name. . .
Local SYSOUT class . .

(Batch or Local)

(For local printer)

Job statement information:
(Required for system printer)
===>
===>
===>
===>
Option ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
Figure 163. Foreground Print Options Panel (ISRFPPRT)

On this panel, the “Data set name” field shows the name of the list data set
that contains the output generated by the processor you selected. In the

268

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—Processing Sequence
Option field, enter one of the options shown at the top of the panel. The
“Print mode”, “Batch SYSOUT class”, “Local Printer id or writer name”, and
Local SYSOUT Class fields on this panel are described under “Hardcopy
Utility (Option 3.6)” on page 182. The “Job statement information” field is
described under the Job Statement Information section of the Libraries and
Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
When you press Enter, the processor entry panel is displayed again. A
message indicating completion of the process is displayed in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
16. You can do one of the following:
v Enter other parameters and call the same processor.
v Enter the END command to return to the Foreground Selection panel and
select another processor.
v Enter the RETURN command to go to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
v Use the jump function (=) to choose any primary option.

Expanding Packed Data
Packed data is data in which ISPF has replaced any repeating characters with a
sequence showing how many times the character is repeated. Packing data allows
you to use direct access storage devices (DASD) more efficiently because the stored
data occupies less space than it would otherwise.
If the source data that you want to process is packed, it must be expanded before
it can be successfully processed by any of the language processors. The expansion
method you should use depends on whether your source data is:
v A sequential data set that contains expansion triggers
An expansion trigger is a keyword that tells ISPF to expand additional data before
copying, including, or imbedding it in the source data. Examples are INCLUDE
and COPY statements, and SCRIPT .IM (imbed) control words. For information
about defining your own expansion triggers, refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and
Customizing.
ISPF does not recognize expansion triggers in data stored as a sequential data
set. Therefore, for this type of data, you should follow these steps:
1. Manually expand the data that is to be copied, included, or imbedded in
your source data. To do this, edit the source data, enter the PACK OFF
command, and then save the data. When you have finished processing the
data, you can repack it by editing it again and entering PACK ON.
2. Select the Source Data Packed option before calling one of the language
processors.
v Either of the following:
– A sequential data set that does not contain expansion triggers
– Any member of a partitioned data set, either with or without expansion
triggers.
ISPF does recognize expansion triggers in data stored as members of a
partitioned data set. Also, if your source data does not contain expansion
triggers, you do not have to be concerned with them. Therefore, for these two
types of data, select the Source Data Packed option before calling one of the
language processors.
In each of the preceding situations, selecting the Source Data Packed option causes
ISPF to expand packed source data before it is processed. For partitioned data sets,
Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

269

Foreground—Expanding Packed Data
any included members are also expanded inline where the INCLUDE or COPY
statements, .IM SCRIPT control words, or other user-defined trigger statements are
found.

Member Expansion (ISRLEMX)
Member expansion uses simple language scanners to find expansion triggers. If
you specify that the source data is not packed, the ISRSCAN program is used.
However, if you specify that the source data is packed, member expansion uses the
ISRLEMX program.
These scanners do not have all the sophistication of the actual language processors.
Therefore, unusual code or code that does not compile cannot be successfully
processed by member expansion. Examples are trigger statements:
v With comments that extend onto the next line
v That have compiler instructions to change the content of the code to be
included.
Compiler control statements and symbolic substitution are not considered during
member expansion. Instead, ISRLEMX creates a temporary data set to be used as
input to the language processor. All members to be processed, including members
imbedded with COPY, INCLUDE, or .IM statements, are copied into this data set,
expanded, and passed on to the language processor. The temporary data set will
have the same block size as the input data set that contains your source data.
When using languages that allow multiple compilations, such as VS FORTRAN,
you must put the source statement that ends the program in your original, or
top-level, program. This statement cannot be in an included member.
Table 19 shows the languages processed by member expansion, their expansion
triggers, syntax, and the input columns processed for fixed-record data and
variable-record data.
Table 19. Expansion Triggers and Syntax

Language

Expansion
Trigger

Syntax

Input Columns Input Columns
Processed for
Processed for
F/FB Format
V/VB Format

Assembler

COPY

COPY name

1 - 80

PL/I

%INCLUDE

%INCLUDE DDNAME(name); 2 - 72
%INCLUDE name;

COBOL

COPY

COPY name.

7 - 72

N/A

VS FORTRAN INCLUDE

INCLUDE (name)

1 - 72

N/A

Pascal

%INCLUDE

%INCLUDE name;
1 - 72
%INCLUDE DDNAME(name);

SCRIPT

.IM

.IM name
.IM (name)
.IM (’name’)

1-reclength or
9-reclength

1-reclength or
1-(reclength-8)

All languages

User-trigger

User-trigger name

N/A

N/A
10 - 100

1 - 100

Restrictions on Member Expansion and Member Parts Lists
The following restrictions apply only to the member expansion and member parts
listing functions:
v The following restrictions apply to all languages:

270

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—Member Expansion (ISRLEMX)
– Expansion triggers must follow their respective language coding conventions
unless otherwise noted.
– Multiple names and preprocessor variables on trigger statements are not
permitted.
– User triggers and their start column are specified at installation time and
must be:
- No more than 20 characters long
- Uppercase with no imbedded blanks.

v
v
v
v

No part of the user trigger can be in a comment or continuation field.
– Macros cannot be in packed form.
– The trigger statement must be the only statement in the logical record. No
continuation is allowed into or from a trigger statement. Also, the trigger
keyword must be the first character on the trigger statement that is not a
blank and can be followed by only one statement delimiter.
– For compilers that allow names longer than 8 characters, the name is
truncated at 8.
– For compilers that allow uppercase and lowercase names, all referenced
names are converted to uppercase.
This restriction applies to assembler only:
– The user trigger cannot start in column 1.
This restriction applies to FORTRAN only:
– The member expansion function allows only the fixed form of coding.
This restriction applies to PL/I, Pascal, and COBOL:
– Free form coding is allowed except in trigger statements.
The following are other COBOL restrictions:
– The name is truncated at 8 characters or the first hyphen (-), whichever comes
first.
– The first statement in the COBOL program must be either an expansion
trigger, a valid COBOL division header, a TITLE, a PROCESS, or a CBL
statement. The expansion trigger can precede all other statements, but it must
start in FIELD B.
If an expansion trigger is the first statement, it must eventually resolve
(through multiple expansion triggers if needed) to a valid COBOL division
header, TITLE, PROCESS, or CBL statement.
– In the COPY statement, the text-name is the only value processed. The
statement must end on the same line as the COPY keyword with a period
followed by a space. If any option is found, the COPY statement is not
expanded.
– In the IDENTIFICATION DIVISION, the division header or paragraph header
statements must be blank except for the division or paragraph name. The
trigger statement must be on the next line that is neither blank nor a
comment.
– In all other divisions, the trigger statement (line) can be on any line in the
division.
– If the WITH DEBUGGING MODE clause is not found in the SOURCE
COMPUTER paragraph, all debug lines are passed to the compiler without
being scanned for expansion triggers, as if they were comment lines. If the
clause is found, valid trigger statements found on debug lines are expanded
and a D is inserted in column 7 of all the non-comment, non-continuation
lines included.
Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

271

Foreground—Member Expansion (ISRLEMX)
– Any character found in FIELD A that is not a blank causes the end of the
paragraph form of the NOTE statement.
v The following are SCRIPT/VS restrictions:
– The .im statement must be the only statement in the logical record and must
start in the first valid column. The first logical record is tested for line
numbers, as follows:
- For fixed-length records, if the last 8 characters are all numeric, they are
skipped for the complete library.
- For variable-length records, if the first 8 characters are all numeric,
processing begins with column 9.
The statements can be in either uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case.
– Because ISPF creates a sequential data set from the imbedded members, use
of the .EF control word will cause all statements in the sequential data set
following the .EF to be ignored. The use of .EF is not recommended with
packed data.

Member Expansion ISRLEMX Return Codes
Table 20 describes the ISRLEMX return codes.
Table 20. ISRSCAN and ISRLEMX Return Codes
ISRSCAN
12

Member not found.

OPEN error on DDNAME=IN.

I/O error on DDNAME=IN.

OPEN error on DDNAME=OUT.

I/O error on DDNAME=OUT.

ISRLEMX
1–15 Parameter n was too long, where n = 1
to 15.
16

Too many parameters.

Too few parameters.

Severe error in expand module. An
error message should be printed in the
ISRLMSG data set.

Trigger Statement Errors
Some of the more common errors that occur are:
v Restricted option
v Statement on more than one line
v Referenced member name not found.
If an error occurs, the trigger statement is not expanded and is passed to the
language processor.
In SCRIPT/VS, if the error was found in a user trigger, one blank line is inserted
before and after the statement in question.

Input Data Sets
Input to a foreground processor is one of the following:
v A member of an ISPF library or other partitioned data set. If you do not specify
a member name, ISPF displays a member list.
v A sequential data set.
If an ISPF library is the input source, the member can be in any library in the
concatenation sequence. You can include additional input by using:

272

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—Input Data Sets
v
v
v
v
v

The COPY statement for assembler and COBOL
The INCLUDE statement for PL/I, FORTRAN, and Pascal
The SCRIPT/VS imbed control word (.im)
Macros
Additional input libraries.

Whenever the input source is partitioned, you can specify additional input
libraries. They must be partitioned data sets that are not password protected. You
cannot specify additional input libraries if the input source is sequential. Specify
the fully qualified data set names, enclosed in apostrophes, such as:
Additional input libraries:
===> ’ABC.MACROS’

For example, in Figure 165 on page 276, a concatenation sequence of three ISPF
data sets and one additional input library has been specified. The concatenation
order is:
ISPFDEMO.XXX.ASM
ISPFDEMO.A.ASM
ISPFDEMO.MASTER.ASM
ISPFTEST.FLAG.ASM

The last data set in the concatenation sequence, ISPFTEST.FLAG.ASM, is entered as
an additional input library at the bottom of the panel. Additional input libraries
are always last in the sequence.
Before calling a foreground processor, ISPF scans the concatenated sequence of
libraries to find the member to be processed. For this example, the member name
is TOP. If member TOP first appears in data set ISPFDEMO.A.ASM, the following
prompter command would be generated by Assembler XF.
ASM ’ISPFDEMO.A.ASM(TOP)’
LIB(’SYS1.MACLIB’,
’ISPFDEMO.XXX.ASM’,
’ISPFDEMO.A.ASM’,
’ISPFDEMO.MASTER.ASM’,
’ISPFTEST.FLAG.ASM’)
LOAD(’ISPFDEMO.XXX.OBJ(TOP)’)
PRINT(LISTASM)
LIST,TEST,TERM,RENT

The processor options are passed to the prompter exactly as you specify them.
Note: The macro library SYS1.MACLIB is included in the concatenation sequence
for Assembler only. When included, as the preceding prompter command
example shows, it is always first in the sequence because of its large block
size.

List Data Sets
In the List ID field, you can enter the name you want ISPF to use to identify the
list data set that will contain the foreground processor output. This name is passed
to the foreground processor by either the LIST or PRINT option. The following
rules apply:
v If the input data set is partitioned the List ID field is optional:
– Leave the List ID field blank if you want ISPF to use the input member name
to identify the output list data set.
– Enter a LIST ID if you want to use a name other than the input member
name to identify the output list data set.
Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

273

Foreground—List Data Sets
v If the input data set is sequential, you must enter a LIST ID.
For best results, if you plan to debug your program later using COBOL interactive
debug:
v Enter the name of the member being compiled in the List ID field if the input
data set is partitioned.
v If the input data set is sequential, enter the name of the sequential data set.
Then, when you debug your program, use these same names in the PROG ID
fields on the COBOL Interactive Debug panel.
ISPF names the listing:
prefix.userid.listid.LIST

where
prefix

is the data set prefix in your TSO profile, if you have one and if it is different from
your user ID,
userid

is your user ID, and
listid

is the member name or the value in the List ID field.
If you are using the same list data set for multiple job steps, be aware that the
DCB information can differ between the language processors and the linkage
editor, causing an I/O error when trying to read the list data set. We suggest that
you use a different list ID for each job step.

Password Protection
Input, object, interpretable text (ITEXT), and symbolic debug data sets can be
password-protected. You can specify the password in the Password field on the
foreground processor data entry panel. The password does not appear on the
screen when you enter it, but ISPF remembers it.
Since foreground processor panels have only one Password field, ISPF prompts
you if all data sets do not have the same password.

Object Data Sets
The following information about object data sets applies to all foreground
assemblers and compilers. However, if you are using the VS FORTRAN compiler,
you must enter OBJECT in the Other field to generate an output object module.
The two assemblers and the other compilers generate object modules automatically.
If you specify an ISPF library as the input source, ISPF writes object output from
the foreground assembler or compiler to a partitioned data set. This data set has
the same name as the first library in the concatenation sequence, but has a type of
OBJ. For example, if you specify PROJECT.LIB1.ASM as the first library name, the
object output is placed in data set PROJECT.LIB1.OBJ. The member name of the
object module is the same as the input member.

274

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—Object Data Sets
If you specify another data set, the object output is placed in a data set of the same
name, but with the last qualifier replaced by OBJ. If the data set name has only
one qualifier, OBJ is appended as the last qualifier. For example, if you specify an
input data set named OTHER.ASM or OTHER, the object output is placed in a
data set named OTHER.OBJ. For partitioned data sets, the object output is stored
in a member with the same name as the input member. For sequential data sets,
the object output is stored in a sequential data set.
Note: The object data set must exist before invoking a foreground or batch option
that creates an object module.

Foreground—TSO/E Information Center Facility
If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can
optionally allow ISPF to substitute the panel shown in Figure 164 for the panel
shown in Figure 163 on page 268. This panel is valid for all foreground processors
except SCRIPT/VS and member parts list. See “Using the TSO/E Information
Center Facility” on page 185 for information about the fields on this panel.
Foreground Print Options
PK Print data set and keep
PD Print data set and delete

K Keep data set (without printing)
D Delete data set (without printing)

If END command is entered, data set is kept without printing.
Data set name . . .:
Printer Location . .
Printer Format . . .
Number of copies . .

Option ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT

F3=END
F11=RIGHT

F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

F6=CHANGE

Figure 164. Foreground Print Options Panel With TSO/E Information Center Facility
(ISRFPPRI)

Assembler (Option 4.1)
Foreground Assembler enables you to use either High Level Assembler or
Assembler H. Both are called from the Foreground Assembler panel, shown in
Figure 165 on page 276. For information about Assembler data sets, see the
appendix on Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

275

Foreground—Assembler (Option 4.1)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground Assembler
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . .
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . .
Password . .

Assembler
1 1. High Level Assembler 2. Assembler H

Assembler Options: (Options OBJECT and LIST generated automatically)
===>
Additional input libraries:
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 165. Foreground Assembler Panel (ISRFP01)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I, except List ID, which is explained in “List Data
Sets” on page 273, “Additional input libraries”, which is explained in “Input Data
Sets” on page 272, and the following:
Assembler Options
Be careful not to enter the OBJECT and LIST options in this field. ISPF
generates these options automatically. OBJECT writes the output object
module to a partitioned data set. LIST writes the output listing to a list
data set. See “Object Data Sets” on page 274 and “List Data Sets” on page
273 for more information.
Assembler
Enables you to specify whether to use High Level Assembler or Assembler
H. Specify 1 for High Level Assembler or 2 for Assembler H.

COBOL (Option 4.2)
ISPF generates an ISPEXEC SELECT PGM(IGYCRCTL) statement to invoke a
COBOL compiler using the values you enter on the Foreground COBOL Compile
panel, shown in Figure 166 on page 277. For information about COBOL allocation
data sets, see the appendix on Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide
Vol I.

276

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—COBOL (Option 4.2)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground COBOL Compile
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . .
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . . . .

Password . .

Compiler options: (Options LIB and OBJECT generated automatically)
Test . . . NOTEST (TEST or NOTEST)
Other . . .
Additional input libraries:
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 166. Foreground COBOL Compile Panel (ISRFP02)

If you plan to run interactive debug after you compile your program, enter
TEST in the Test field. Otherwise, enter NOTEST.

Other If you plan to run VS COBOL II interactive debug after you compile your
program, enter RESIDENT in the Other field. Otherwise, just enter any
other options you need.
Be careful not to enter the LIB and OBJECT options in the Other field. ISPF
generates these options automatically. LIB specifies the input data set
concatenation sequence. OBJECT writes the output object module to a
partitioned data set. See “Input Data Sets” on page 272 and “Object Data
Sets” on page 274 for more information.

VS FORTRAN Compile (Option 4.3)
The Foreground VS FORTRAN Compile panel is shown in Figure 167 on page 278.

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

277

Foreground—VS FORTRAN Compile (Option 4.3)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground VS FORTRAN Compile
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . .
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . . . .
Compiler options:
Object . .
Other . . .

Password . .
(OBJECT or NOOBJECT)

Additional input libraries:
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 167. Foreground VS FORTRAN Compile Panel (ISRFP03)

PL/I (Option 4.5)
The Foreground PL/I option enables you to invoke either OS PL/I Version 2 or
PL/I for MVS and VM, using the values specified on the Foreground PL/I
Compile panel shown in Figure 168 on page 279.

278

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—PL/I Compile (Option 4.5)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground PL/I Compile
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . .
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . .
Compiler
Password . .
1. OS PL/I Version 2

2. PLI for MVS and VM

Compiler options: (Options LIB, OBJECT, and PRINT generated automatically)
===>
Additional input libraries:
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 168. Foreground PL/I Optimizing Compile Panel (ISRFP05)

VS Pascal Compile (Option 4.6)
The Foreground VS Pascal Compile panel is shown in Figure 169 on page 280.

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

279

Foreground—VS Pascal Compile (Option 4.6)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground VS PASCAL Compile
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . .
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . . . .

Password . .

Compiler options: (Options LIB, OBJECT, and PRINT generated automatically)
===>
Additional input libraries:
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 169. Foreground VS Pascal Compile Panel (ISRFP06)

Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 4.7)
The Foreground Binder/Linkage Editor is called from the Foreground
Binder/Linkage Edit panel, shown in Figure 170 on page 281.

280

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 4.7)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground Binder/Linkage Editor
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . .
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . .
Password . . . .

Processor
1 1. Binder
2. Linkage Editor

Linkage editor/binder options: (Options LOAD, LIB, and PRINT generated
automatically)
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 170. Foreground Binder/Linkage Editor Panel (ISRFP07B)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List Data
Sets” on page 273, “Additional input libraries”, which is explained in “Input Data
Sets” on page 272, and the following:
Linkage editor/binder options
Enter any options you need, except LOAD, LIB, or PRINT. ISPF generates
these options automatically. LOAD writes the output object module to a
partitioned data set.
Note: Sequential data sets are invalid when using the Linkage Editor.
LIB specifies the input data set concatenation sequence. PRINT writes the
output listing to a list data set. See “List Data Sets” on page 273 and
“Object Data Sets” on page 274 for more information.
Binder
Determines whether the Linkage Editor (NOBINDER) or Binder (BINDER)
is invoked.
Note: The binder is available only if DFSMS 1.1, or later, is installed.
SYSLIB
The name of the data set that is to contain the ISPF library concatenation
sequence used to resolve any copy statements specified in your program.
See “Input Data Sets” on page 272 and the SYSLIB Data Set section in the
appendix on Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for
more information.
SYSLIN
The name of the data set that is to contain the object module. The SYSLIN
field is provided to accommodate the VS Pascal XA and NOXA processing
options. See “Input Data Sets” on page 272 and the SYSLIB Data Set
section in the appendix on Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I for more information.
Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

281

Foreground—Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 4.7)

Linkage Editor Concatenation Sequence
The concatenation sequence used by ISPF to find the member for input to the
Linkage Editor is:
project-name.lib1-name.type
project-name.lib2-name.type
(and so forth)

where type is whatever you specify on the panel. For example, it can be OBJ or
some other type containing Linkage Editor language (LEL) control statements. If
the type is not OBJ, an OBJECT DDNAME is automatically allocated to ease the
use of the following Linkage Editor control statements:
INCLUDE OBJECT(member-name)

For example:
Project
Group .
Type .
Member

.
.
.
.

XYZ
MYLIB
LEL
TOP

. . . MASTER . . .

. . .

In this example, ISPF searches data sets XYZ.MYLIB.LEL and XYZ.MASTER.LEL to
find member TOP, which should contain LEL control statements. Also, ISPF
allocates to DDNAME OBJECT (DISP=SHR) the following concatenated sequence
of object libraries:
XYZ.MYLIB.OBJ
XYZ.MASTER.OBJ

This concatenated sequence is searched by the Linkage Editor if member TOP
contains INCLUDE OBJECT(member-name) statements. The concatenation
sequence passed to the Linkage Editor by way of the LIB parameter has a type
qualifier of LOAD and includes the system libraries you specify, as follows:
LIB(’project-name.lib1-name.LOAD’,
’project-name.lib2-name.LOAD’,
.
.
.
and so forth,
.
.
.
’syslib1-name’,
.
.
.
and so forth)

This concatenation sequence is used by the Linkage Editor to resolve automatic call
references.

SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9)
Use of this facility requires the installation of the Document Composition Facility
(DCF) program product and its component text processing program, SCRIPT/VS,
with the Foreground Environment Feature.
Note: DCF requires the TSO profile prefix to be set. For additional information,
refer to DCF documentation.

282

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9)
When you select the SCRIPT/VS option, the first panel displayed is the
SCRIPT/VS Processor panel shown in Figure 171.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SCRIPT/VS Processor
More:
+
Enter "/" to select option
Style . . . .
/ Display Style Options
/ Browse Output
ISPF Library:
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . SOURCE
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . . . .
Script Command . . . SCRIPT

Password . .
(SCRIPT or SCRIPTDB)

Additional input libraries:
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 171. SCRIPT/VS Processor Panel (ISRFP09)

SCRIPT/VS Processing Sequence
A style contains options that tell SCRIPT/VS how to format a document for display
or printing. These options include the use of fonts, white space, line lengths, and
so forth.
The value you put in the Style field and whether or not you select the Display
Style Options and Browse Output options determine the following SCRIPT/VS
processing sequence:
1. For the Style field, you can do one of the following:
v Enter the name of an existing style.
You can enter the name of a style you have created or one of the styles
SCRIPT/VS creates for you: DRAFT and FINAL. These two styles
correspond to the formatting options available in the previous release of
SCRIPT/VS Foreground Processing. If you have not defined these options
before or if this is your first release of ISPF, the default values for the
SCRIPT/VS formatting options are set for you.
If you enter the name of an existing style in the Style field, that style is
used for formatting.
v Enter the name of a new style you want to define.

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

283

Foreground—SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9)
If you enter a new style name, the name is added to your style list. The
new style uses SCRIPT/VS formatting options that are equal to the
formatting options of the last style. Step 2 explains what to do to change
these options.
v Leave the Style field blank.
If you leave the Style field blank, ISPF displays the Select SCRIPT/VS
Formatting Style panel. This panel displays a list of the available styles. See
“Selecting a Formatting Style” on page 287 for more information.
2. Use a slash to select Display Style Options. ISPF displays the SCRIPT/VS
Options for Style panel, which shows the options that are currently being
used and allows you to change them. See “Changing Style Options” on page
287 for more information.
If you do not select Display Style Options, ISPF does not display the
SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel.
3. Enter the appropriate ISPF library and concatenation sequence or data set
names. You can display a member list by omitting the member name or by
using a pattern. See the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User’s Guide Vol I if you need help entering library or data set names, “Input
Data Sets” on page 272 for more information about the concatenation
sequence, and the Displaying Member Lists section of the Libraries and Data
Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for more information about
displaying member lists.
4. Enter your password in the Password field if your input data set is
password-protected. See “Password Protection” on page 274 for more
information.
5. Use the List ID field to tell ISPF what to name the output SCRIPT/VS listing.
See “List Data Sets” on page 273 for more information.
6. Use a slash to select the Browse Output option. ISPF displays your output in
Browse mode after it has formatted.
If you do not select the Browse Output option, ISPF skips Browse mode and
displays a Foreground Print Options for Style panel, shown in Figure 172 on
page 286.
7. Once all the input parameters have been specified, press Enter to call
SCRIPT/VS.
8. Communication with SCRIPT/VS is in line-I/O mode. Each time you see
three asterisks, press Enter. These asterisks, which usually appear at the
bottom of the screen, show that TSO is waiting for you to clear the screen
before it can proceed.
If the Session Manager is installed and you selected the Session Manager
mode option on the ISPF Settings panel, SCRIPT/VS and all PF and PA keys
are under control of the Session Manager. When formatting is complete, you
are prompted to enter a null line to return to ISPF control.
If the Session Manager is not called, the PA and function keys have their usual
TSO-defined meanings; generally, the function keys are treated the same as
Enter.
9. One or both of the following panels may appear, depending on your
treatment of the Style and Display Style Options fields. If both appear, they
will be in the following sequence:
a. Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style
b. SCRIPT/VS Options for Style

284

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9)
See “Selecting a Formatting Style” on page 287 and “Changing Style Options”
on page 287 if you need information about using these panels. When you are
finished with each panel, press Enter.
10. If SCRIPT/VS generated an output listing and you selected the Browse
Output option, the output is displayed automatically in Browse mode.
Otherwise, continue with the next step.
Note: If SCRIPT/VS formatting ends abnormally, ISPF displays a message in
the upper-right corner of the screen and does not enter Browse mode.
The list data set is retained, but the Foreground Print Options for Style
panel (see step 11) is not displayed.
You can scroll the output up or down using the scroll commands. All the
Browse commands are available to you. When you finish browsing the listing,
enter the END command.
11. An optional print utility exit can be installed by your system programmer. If
this exit is installed, it may cause SCRIPT/VS’s response to differ from the
following descriptions. Refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more
information about the print utility exit.
Another factor that can affect the performance of SCRIPT/VS is whether the
TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed. If the TSO/E Information
Center Facility is installed, your installation can optionally allow ISPF to
display a panel for submitting the TSO/E Information Center Facility
information with the print request. See Figure 175 on page 289 for an example
of this panel and “Using the TSO/E Information Center Facility” on page 185
for information about the fields on this panel.
If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is not installed, SCRIPT/VS displays
the panel shown in Figure 172 on page 286.
The Foreground Print Options for Style panel allows you to optionally print
the formatted document and specify its disposition. On this panel, the Data
Set Name field shows the name of the list data set that contains the
SCRIPT/VS output. On the Command line, enter one of the options shown at
the top of the panel.

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

285

Foreground—SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9)

Foreground Print Options for Style:
PK Print data set and keep
PD Print data set and delete

K Keep data set (without printing)
D Delete data set (without printing)

If END command is entered, data set is kept without printing.
Data Set Name :
Print mode . . . BATCH
Batch SYSOUT class . .
Local Printer ID or
writer-name. . .
Local SYSOUT class . .

(Batch or Local)

(For local printer)

Job statement information:
(Required for system printer)
===>
===>
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
Figure 172. Foreground Print Options for Style Panel (ISRFP09P)

In the Print mode field, enter either of the following commands:
v BATCH to submit your print request as a background job.
If you choose BATCH, specify a valid Batch SYSOUT CLASS and job
statement information. Specifying BATCH causes SCRIPT/VS to ignore the
“Local Printer ID or Writer Name” field, and the Local SYSOUT Class field.
SCRIPT/VS list data sets are formatted DCB=RECFM=VBM. Unless the line
count is altered, the formatted page length may exceed the JES line count
and cause duplicate page ejects. Therefore, specify the following job
statement information to prevent JES line counting:
/*JOBPARM LINECT=0

v LOCAL to print the output on a local printer.
If you choose LOCAL, specify the Local Printer ID or writer name of a
local printer and optional Local SYSOUT Class. Specifying LOCAL causes
SCRIPT/VS to ignore the Batch SYSOUT class field. Job statement
information is ignored.
Page spacing will probably vary from the expected format because of
differences between 328x printers and 1403 or 3800 printers used as a
formatting guide.
See “Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6)” on page 182 if you need information
about the “Print mode”, “Batch SYSOUT class”, “Local Printer ID or Writer
Name”, and “Local SYSOUT Class” fields. For information about the “Job
statement information” fields, see the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the
z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
When you press Enter, the SCRIPT/VS Processor panel is displayed again. A
message indicating completion of the process is displayed in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
12. You can do one of the following:
v Enter other parameters and call SCRIPT/VS again.

286

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9)
v Enter the END command to return to the Foreground Selection panel and
select another processor.
v Enter the RETURN command to go to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
v Use the jump function (=) to choose any primary option.

Selecting a Formatting Style
Use the Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel shown in Figure 173 to see
which styles are available and to select or delete styles as necessary.
Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style

Row 1 to 2 of 2

Valid Line Commands: S - Use this STYLE for formatting
D - Delete
Line
Cmd Style

Description

’
DRAFT
Draft SCRIPT/VS document options
’
FINAL
Final SCRIPT/VS document options
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

Scroll ===> PAGE
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

Figure 173. Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style Panel (ISRFP09T)

The Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel is a list that can be scrolled and
contains all the styles available to you. Each style is a set of predefined formatting
options.
Type either S or D in the Line Cmd field and press Enter to select or delete a style,
respectively. You can only select one style at a time for formatting. However, one
or more styles can be deleted at the same time.
The display fields on the Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style panel contain the
following information:
Style

The names of styles that you can either select or delete.

Description

A reminder of the purpose of each style. Type over the description
to change it.

Changing Style Options
Use the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel to:
v See which options are currently being used for the style you chose
v Change the options as needed.
Figure 174 on page 288 shows the options available for the DRAFT style.
Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

287

Foreground—SCRIPT/VS Processor (Option 4.9)

SCRIPT/VS Options for Style: DRAFT
More:

Profile data set . .
FONTLIB data set . .
SEGLIB data set . . .
User macro data set . . .
System macro data set . .
Bind:

#Odd . .
#Even . .

Device type .
Chars (Fonts)
SYSVAR . . .
Page . . . .

.
.
.
.

Other script parms . . .
Enter "/" to select option
Twopass
/ Spelling
Index
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit

/ Uppercase only
Unformat
Condensed Text
F9=Swap

F12=Cancel

Figure 174. SCRIPT/VS Options for Style: DRAFT Panel (ISRFP09O)

The fields on the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel represent SCRIPT/VS
formatting options, all of which are optional. For a complete description of these
options, refer to Document Composition Facility: Generalized Markup Language Starter
Set User’s Guide.
If you enter the END command from the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel,
changes on this panel are not saved. If the style is new, it is saved with default
formatting options.
If you press Enter from the SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel, SCRIPT/VS
processes the data set, and then one of the following occurs:
v A Browse panel is displayed if you selected the Browse Output option on the
SCRIPT/VS Processor panel. When you finish browsing the SCRIPT/VS
formatted output, a Foreground Print Options for Style panel is displayed.
Note: If you enter the PRINT parameter in the Other script parms field, the
Browse panel is not displayed.
v A Foreground Print Options for Style panel is displayed if you did not select the
Browse Output option on the Script/VS Processor panel.
See step 11 on page 285 for more information about printing SCRIPT/VS output.

Using SCRIPT/VS with the TSO/E Information Center Facility
If the TSO/E Information Center Facility is installed, your installation can
optionally allow ISPF to substitute the panel shown in Figure 175 on page 289 for
the panel shown in Figure 172 on page 286. See “Using the TSO/E Information
Center Facility” on page 185 for information about the fields on this panel.

288

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—VS COBOL II Interactive Debug (Option 4.10)

Foreground Print Options for Style:
PK Print data set and keep
PD Print data set and delete

K Keep data set (without printing)
D Delete data set (without printing)

If END command is entered, data set is kept without printing.
Data Set Name . . . :
Printer location . .
Printer Format . . .
Number of copies . .

Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT

F3=END
F11=RIGHT

F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

F6=CHANGE

Figure 175. Foreground Print Options for Style Panel with the TSO/E Information Center
Facility (ISRFP09I)

VS COBOL II Interactive Debug (Option 4.10)
To run VS COBOL II interactive debug in foreground, the VS COBOL II compiler,
Release 2, must be both installed and accessible, for the following reasons:
v You must compile your program by using the VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2
or option 5.2) with the TEST and RESIDENT options before running VS COBOL
II interactive debug. Debug output from the compilation is stored in the object
module, which ISPF generates automatically.
v The VS COBOL II compiler contains the Debug Productivity Aid (DPA) facility,
which ISPF accesses when you run VS COBOL II interactive debug in the
foreground.
All VS COBOL II interactive debug processing in the foreground is under DPA’s
control. DPA displays a series of interactive panels. When processing is complete,
return to step 12 on page 267.

OS/VS COBOL Debug (Option 4.10A)
Before you can run COBOL interactive debug, you must first do the following, in
the order shown:
1. Allocate a symbolic debug data set and, optionally, a print output data set by
using the Data Set utility (option 3.2). See “Symbolic Debug Data Sets” on page
291 and “Print Output Data Sets” on page 291 for more information.
2. Compile the program by using the OS/VS COBOL compiler (option 4.2A or
option 5.2A) with the TEST option.
3. Use the linkage editor (option 4.7 or option 5.7) to generate an output load
module, which COBOL interactive debug will use as input.
The COBOL Debug panel is shown in Figure 176 on page 290.

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

289

Foreground—OS/VS COBOL Debug (Option 4.10A)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
COBOL Interactive Debug
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . .
Group . . . .
(Type = LOAD assumed)
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
Prog ID . . . . . . .
Print ID . . . . . .

. . .

Password . .

Enter "/" to select option
/ Source
Execution Parms:
===>
Additional input libraries:
===>
===>
===>
Note: 1. PREFIX.PRINTID.TESTLIST must exist if Print ID is specified.
2. PREFIX.PROGID.LIST must exist for each program specified if / is
specified in Source field.
Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
Figure 176. COBOL Debug Panel (ISRFP10A)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I, except Prog ID, Print ID, Source, and Execution
Parms, which are explained in the following sections.

COBOL Debug Processing Sequence
Fill in the fields on the COBOL Debug panel as follows:
1. Enter the ISPF library or data set name that contains the input load module
generated by the linkage editor. You can display a member list by omitting the
member name or by using a pattern. See the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I if you need help entering library or data set
names, “Object Data Sets” on page 274 for more information about object
modules, and the Displaying Member Lists section of the Libraries and Data
Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for more information about
displaying member lists.
2. The Prog ID field tells ISPF the names of the sequential list data sets generated
by the OS/VS COBOL compiler. You can enter up to four Prog ID names if
you compiled a partitioned data set member or a sequential data set for each
name. See “List Data Sets” on page 273 for more information.
3. The Print ID field is optional. This field tells ISPF the name of a sequential data
set to which it writes the print output from the debug session. This data set
must be preallocated. See “Print Output Data Sets” on page 291 for more
information.

290

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—OS/VS COBOL Debug (Option 4.10A)
4. Enter your password in the Password field if your input data set is
password-protected. See “Password Protection” on page 274 for more
information.
5. The Source option tells ISPF whether to allocate the list data sets specified in
the Prog ID field. If you select Source, these data sets must already exist.
6. The Execution Parms field is remembered from one session to another.
Therefore, you do not need to change this field unless the parameters you need
are not displayed. Enter any parameters that you want ISPF to pass to the
program being debugged.
7. To continue COBOL interactive debug, return to step 12 on page 267.

Symbolic Debug Data Sets
If you want to run COBOL interactive debug on a program compiled with the
OS/VS COBOL compiler, you must use the Data Set utility (option 3.2) to allocate
a symbolic debug data set before compiling the program. Then, when you compile
the program, enter TEST in the Test field on the Foreground OS/VS COBOL
Compile panel. The TEST parameter generates the debug output, which ISPF stores
in the symbolic debug data set you allocated.
Note: You do not need to allocate a symbolic debug data set for programs
compiled with VS COBOL II because the debug output, if requested, is
stored in the OBJECT module, which ISPF generates automatically.
When you allocate the data set, specify the same name as the data set that contains
your COBOL program, but:
v For an ISPF library, enter:
– The Group name you will specify in the first Group field on the Foreground
OS/VS COBOL Compile panel
– SYM in the Type field.
v For another partitioned or sequential data set, use SYM to replace the last
qualifier. For example, if COBOL.INPUT or COBOL is the input data set name,
allocate COBOL.SYM as the symbolic debug data set.
Use the following values to allocate symbolic debug data sets:
Record format . . . . . F
Record length . . . . . 512
Block size . . . . . . 512

For partitioned data sets, including ISPF libraries, the debug output is stored in a
member with the same name as the input member. For sequential data sets, the
debug output is stored in a sequential data set.
When you run COBOL interactive debug, the names you put in the Prog ID field
on the COBOL Interactive Debug panel must be the same as the input member
names if you are to create a correct SYM data set.

Print Output Data Sets
ISPF writes the print output from a debug session to a sequential data set, if you:
v Allocate the data set, using the Data Set utility (option 3.2), before you run
COBOL interactive debug
v Enter, in the Print ID field on the COBOL Interactive Debug panel, the name of
the data set you allocated.

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

291

Foreground—OS/VS COBOL Debug (Option 4.10A)
You can avoid generating the print output by leaving the Print ID field blank,
even if you allocated the data set.
The last qualifier in the name of the data set you allocate must be TESTLIST. For
example, if you allocate a sequential data set named DEBUG1.TESTLIST and then
specify the Print ID as:
Print ID . . DEBUG1

ISPF writes the print output to a sequential data set named:
’prefix.userid.DEBUG1.TESTLIST’

where prefix is your TSO data set prefix, if you have one and if it is different from
your user ID, and userid is your TSO user ID. Use the following values to allocate
print output data sets:
Record format . . . . . FBA
Record length . . . . . 121
Block size . . . . . . 3146

The value you put in the Block Size field should be a multiple of 121, the record
length. Therefore, if your print output data is too large to fit within the
recommended block size (3146), increase this amount by using a multiple of 121,
such as 3267 or 3388.

FORTRAN Debug (Option 4.11)
Before you can run FORTRAN interactive debug, you must first compile the
program using the VS FORTRAN compiler (option 4.3 or option 5.3) with the
OBJECT and TEST options.
The FORTRAN interactive debug option supports both FORTRAN Interactive
Debug Version 2 (5668-903) and FORTRAN Interactive Debug Version 1 (5734-F05).
ISPF looks for Version 2 first, then Version 1, and finally its own Debug Dialog,
which displays the panel shown in Figure 177 on page 293.

292

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—FORTRAN Debug (Option 4.11)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
FORTRAN Interactive Debug
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . .
Group . . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . OBJ
(OBJ or LOAD)
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Source Type . .
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . . . .

Password . .

Debug Options: (Options LIB, SOURCE, and PRINT generated automatically)
===>
Additional input libraries:
===>
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 177. FORTRAN Debug Panel (ISRFP11)

Member Parts List (Option 4.12)
The member parts list uses the program ISRLEMX to show the following
information for each source program module specified:
v The names of the modules it calls or includes.
v The names of the modules that call or include it.
The languages permitted in the member expansion function also are permitted in
the member parts list function, and the expansion triggers have the same
restrictions. See “Member Expansion (ISRLEMX)” on page 270. Besides the
expansion triggers, the member parts list also uses the CALL statements in
assembler, PL/I, COBOL, and VS FORTRAN. The format of the CALL statement
is:
CALL name

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

293

Foreground—Member Parts List (Option 4.12)
where the delimiter after the name can be either a left parenthesis, a blank, or a
valid statement delimiter. In COBOL, the CALL statement is valid only in the
PROCEDURE DIVISION, and the CALL PGMA and CALL ’PGMA’ statements both result in
a reference to the member name PGMA.
When you select the Foreground Member parts list option (4.12), the panel shown
in Figure 178 is displayed.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Foreground Member Parts List
1 Browse/Print member parts
2 Write member parts data set
ISPF Library:
Project . .
Group . . .
Type . . .
Member . .

.
.
.
.

Language . . . .

. . .

(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
(Defaults to Type value)

Groups for Primary members . . . 1 (1, 2, 3, or 4)
Output Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

(Option 2 only)

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 178. Foreground Member Parts List Panel (ISRFP12)

The member parts list does not use the Source Data Packed option on the
Foreground Selection panel; both packed and unpacked data sets can be read.
Fill in the fields on the Foreground Member Parts List panel as follows:
1. Select one of the options listed at the top of the panel by typing its number in
the Option field.
2. Enter the appropriate ISPF library and concatenation sequence or data set
names. A blank member name results in a member list being displayed. You
can select only one member from this list. A pattern results in the processing of
all member names matching the pattern; an asterisk results in all members
being processed.
See the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I if
you need help entering library or data set names, the Displaying Member Lists
section of the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol
I for information about using patterns and displaying member lists, and “Input
Data Sets” on page 272 for more information about the concatenation sequence.
3. The Language field is optional. It is used to specify the language in which the
source code is written. If you leave this field blank, ISPF uses the value in the
Type field as the default. However, the language must be one of the following:
v Assembler
v COBOL
v FORTRAN
v Pascal

294

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—Member Parts List (Option 4.12)

v PLI
v SCRIPT.
In the “Groups For Primary members” field, enter a number from 1–4. This
number tells ISPF how many libraries in the concatenation sequence are to be
used in locating primary members. For example, if you enter 2, the first and
second libraries specified in the Group field are used to find primary members.
If you selected option 2 (write member parts data set), use the Data Set Name
field to tell ISPF where to write the output data set. The name you enter:
v Can be a sequential data set or a member of a partitioned data set
v Must follow standard TSO data set naming conventions.
If you enter the name of a data set that does not exist, ISPF allocates it for you.
Once all the input parameters have been specified, press Enter to call the
Foreground Member Parts List processor.
If the Session Manager is installed and if you specified Session Manager mode
on the Foreground Selection panel, the Foreground Member Parts List
processor and all function keys and PA keys are under control of the Session
Manager. When processing is complete, you are prompted to enter a null line
to return to ISPF control.
If the Session Manager is not called, the PA and function keys have their usual
TSO-defined meanings; generally, the function keys are treated the same as
Enter.
Communication with the Foreground Member Parts List processor is in
line-I/O mode. Each time you see three asterisks, press Enter. These asterisks,
which usually appear at the bottom of the screen, show that TSO is waiting for
you to clear the screen before it can proceed.
The option you chose in step 1 on page 294 determines what happens next.
Note: If the Foreground Member Parts List processing program ends
abnormally, ISPF displays a message in the upper-right corner of the
screen and does not enter Browse mode. The list data set is retained, but
the Foreground Print Options panel (see step 15 on page 268) is not
displayed.
Option 1 (Browse/print member parts) creates the member parts list and
displays it in Browse mode. Figure 179 shows an example.

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

295

Foreground—Member Parts List (Option 4.12)

BROWSE - Parts List for ISPFPROJ.ABL.PLI(*) ---------------------------------From Via
From Via
Member
------- ---------- ---------********************************* Top of Data
(MEMBERA )
(MEMBERB )
MEMBERB C
(MEMBERC )
(MEMBERD
(MEMBERE
(MEMBERF
******************************** Bottom of
MEMBERC I

MEMBERC C
MEMBERD I

To
Via
To
Via
-------- ---------- --**********************************

MEMBERC C
MEMBERD C
MEMBERE I
MEMBERG C*
) MEMBERE I
)
)
Data ********************************

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 179. Member Parts List Display (ISRFP12B)

The figure shows that:
v Library ISPFPROJ.ABL.PLI contains these members:
MEMBERA

Has no calls or includes.

MEMBERB

Calls MEMBERC.

MEMBERC

Calls MEMBERD and MEMBERG, and includes MEMBERE.
The asterisk (*) beside the C in the third VIA column means
that MEMBERG was not found in the input library.

MEMBERD

Includes MEMBERE.

MEMBERE

Has no calls or includes.

MEMBERF
Has no calls or includes.
v A parts list is requested for all members in the first data set.
You can scroll the output up or down using the scroll commands. All the
Browse commands are available to you. When you finish browsing the listing,
enter the END command and continue with step 15 on page 268.
Option 2 (Write member parts data set) produces an intermediate sequential
member parts list in the data set you named in step 5 on page 295. This data
set can be either a sequential data set or a member of a partitioned data set.
If the data set has not been allocated, option 2 allocates it with a logical record
length (LRECL) of 17, a block size (BLKSIZE) of 3009, and a record format
(RECFM) of FB. The format of the records is shown in Table 21:
Table 21. Foreground Member Parts List Record Formats

296

Field Name

Format

Description

Member name

CHAR(8)

Subject member.

Called by or calls
member name

CHAR(8)

Referenced member.

Call flag

BIT(1)

Found on a CALL statement.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Foreground—Member Parts List (Option 4.12)
Table 21. Foreground Member Parts List Record Formats (continued)
Field Name

Format

Description

Include flag

BIT(1)

Found by INCLUDE or COPY.

Not found flag

BIT(1)

Referenced member not found.

From flag

BIT(1)

Subject member called from referenced member.

To flag

BIT(1)

Referenced member called from subject member.

COBOL flag

BIT(1)

Member referenced outside valid COBOL division.

Reserved

BIT(2)

Field that is reserved.

9. You can do one of the following:
v Enter other parameters and call the same processor.
v Enter the END command to return to the Foreground Selection panel and
select another processor.
v Enter the RETURN command to go to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
v Use the jump function (=) to choose any primary option.

Member Not Found
A primary library is one of the number of libraries specified in the Groups For
Primary members field. A primary member is a member that starts the member
parts explosion chain. An explosion chain is the order in which members are nested,
starting with the primary member and continuing through each member that it
includes, calls, or copies.
The chain is broken when a member cannot be found in the set of concatenated
libraries or no more members are referenced. If a member cannot be found, the
name is flagged with an asterisk (*) and processing continues. For instance,
internally called routines are not found.
When no more primary members can be found, the listing is printed, written, or
browsed. Calls to internal routines or variable names result in the member not
found flag being set.

C/370 Compile (Option 4.13)
ISPF supports the C/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the C/370
compiler (5688-040). Refer to C Compiler User’s Guide for MVS, SC09-1129 for
additional information.

REXX/370 Compile (Option 4.14)
ISPF supports the REXX/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the
REXX/370 compiler (5695-013). Refer to IBM Compiler and Library for REXX/370
User’s Guide and Reference, SH19-8160, for additional information.

Ada/370 Compile (Option 4.15)
ISPF supports the Ada/370 compiler and its tools through dialogs supplied with
the Ada/370 compiler (5706-292). Refer to IBM Ada/370 User’s Guide SC09-1415, for
additional information.

Chapter 6. Foreground (Option 4)

297

Foreground—AD/Cycle C/370 Compile (Option 4.16)

AD/Cycle C/370 Compile (Option 4.16)
ISPF supports the AD/Cycle™ C/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the
AD/Cycle C/370 compiler (5688-216). Refer to IBM SAA AD/Cycle C/370
Programming Guide SC09-1356, for additional information.

ISPDTLC (Option 4.18)
ISPF supports the ISPF Dialog Tag Language compiler by running the ISPDTLC
function. Refer to z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference for more
information about DTL.
The first ISPDTLC interface panel appears as shown in Figure 180.
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Commands Language Options Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
ISPF Dialog Tag Language Conversion Utility - 5.5
│
│
│
│ Click here: Go to DTL input names 5-16
Reset DTL input names 2-16 │
│ Enter requested information:
Current Language: ENGLISH
│
│
More:
+ │
│ Member name . . . . . . . .
(Blank or pattern for member list)
│
│ DTL Source data set - 1 . . ’USERID.GML’
│
│ DTL Source data set - 2 . .
│
│ DTL Source data set - 3 . .
│
│ DTL Source data set - 4 . .
│
│ Panel data set . . . . . . ’USERID.PANELS’
│
│ Message data set . . . . . ’USERID.MSGS’
│
│ Log data set . . . . . . .
│
│ Log File Member name . .
(Required when log file is a PDS)
│
│ List data set . . . . . . .
│
│ List File Member name . .
(Required when list file is a PDS)
│
│ SCRIPT data set . . . . . .
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 180. Foreground ISPDTLC Compile Panel (ISPCP01) Screen 1

The fields on this panel are explained in the chapter “Using the Conversion
Utility” in z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference.

OS/390 C/C++ Compile (Option 4.19)
ISPF supports the OS/390 C/C++ compiler and its tools through dialogs supplied
with the OS/390 C/C++ compiler (5647-A01). For information about OS/390
C/C++, refer to the OS/390 C/C++ User’s Guide.

298

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 7. Batch (Option 5)
The Batch option (5) allows ISPF to run the batch processors shown on the Batch
Selection panel, Figure 181, as batch jobs. ISPF generates job control language (JCL)
for the job, based on information you enter on the batch processing panels, and
then submits the job for processing. All these processors, plus SCRIPT/VS, COBOL
interactive debug, and FORTRAN interactive debug, are also available with the
Foreground option (4).
When you run a batch processor, you can continue using ISPF while the program
is running. However, if you run these processors by using the Foreground option,
you must wait for processing to end before doing anything else with ISPF. The
Foreground Selection panel is shown in Figure 162 on page 265.
Menu Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Selection Panel
1
2
3
5
6

Assembler
COBOL
VS FORTRAN
PLI
VS PASCAL

7
10
12
13
14

*Binder/Link editor
*VS COBOL II debug
Member Parts List
*C/370
*REXX/370

Enter "/" to select option
/ Source data online
Source data packed

15
16
18
19

*ADA/370
*AD/Cycle C/370
ISPDTLC
*OS/390 C/C++

* No packed data support

Job Statement Information: Verify before proceeding
===>
===>
===>
===>

//LSACKV1 JOB (ACCT),CLASS=A
//*
//*
//*

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 181. Batch Selection Panel (ISRJPA)

The names of the batch processors on this panel are point-and-shoot fields. See the
section on Point-and-Shoot Text Fields in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the
z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for more information.

Batch Selection Panel Action Bar
The Batch Selection Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

See the section on Menu Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User
Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for more
information about the Menu pull-down.

Utilities

See the section on the Utilities Action Bar Choice in the ISPF User
Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for more
information about the Utilities pull-down.

299

Batch (Option 5)
Help

The Help pull-down provides general information about
foreground processing as well as information about each available
choice on the Batch Selection Panel.

Batch Processing Sequence
This topic describes the main sequence for batch processing.
1. If you do not know whether the source data is in packed format, find out by
editing the data set and entering the PROFILE command. If the source data is
in packed format, the profile shows PACK ON.
If the data is not packed, continue with the next step.
If the data is packed, you should read “Expanding Packed Data” on page 269,
paying close attention to information that applies to the batch processor you
plan to use. When you are satisfied that the data set is ready to be processed,
save the data set if you are in Edit and continue with the next step.
2. Select a batch processor. If you bypass the Batch Selection panel, you cannot
verify or change the job statement parameters, or generate multiple
compilations (multiple job steps) or link-edits within the same job.
3. Select the Source data online option to tell ISPF that the data to be processed
resides on a currently mounted volume. ISPF checks the data set information
that you entered on the Batch Selection panel and allows you to display a
member list. If you do not select this option, ISPF assumes that the data
cannot be accessed except by the batch job and does not verify the existence
or validity of the specified data set.
4. Select the Source data packed option to tell ISPF that it needs to expand the
source data. This option has no effect on the member parts list option (5.12).
Member parts list can read both packed and unpacked data sets, so no
expansion is needed.
5. Enter any job statement information you need. See the section on Job
Statement Information in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF
User’s Guide Vol I for more information.
6. Press Enter. ISPF displays the data entry panel for the processor you selected.
Note: The remainder of this processing sequence applies to all batch
processors except Member Parts List. See “Member Parts List (Option
5.12)” on page 311 for more information.
7. Enter the appropriate ISPF library and concatenation sequence or data set
names.
For VS COBOL II interactive debug, enter the name of the input object
module or load module. The TYPE, or last qualifier, must be either OBJ or
LOAD. However, if you specify an OBJ data set as your input data set, you
must include a load library or data set in the input search sequence (see step
11 on page 301).
ISPF displays a member list if you omit the member name or use a pattern.
See the section on Naming ISPF Libraries and Data Sets in the Libraries and
Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I if you need help entering
library or data set names, “Input Data Sets” on page 272 for more information
about the concatenation sequence, and the Displaying Member Lists section of
the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for
more information about displaying member lists.

300

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Batch—Processing Sequence

9.
10.

11.

12.

Notes:
a. VS FORTRAN has no LIB option. However, the concatenation sequence is
still used to find the member to be compiled.
b. Password protection is not supported from the Batch option. Therefore, if
your input or output data sets are password-protected, use the Foreground
option, which does support passwords.
If you submit a job requiring a password-protected data set, the system
operator will be requested to enter the required password.
The List ID field tells ISPF what to name the output listing. Leave this field
blank and enter a SYSOUT class to send the listing to a printer. See “List Data
Sets” on page 273 for more information.
Enter a SYSOUT class to generate hardcopy of the listing. You can enter any
valid SYSOUT parameter. If a List ID is entered, this field is ignored.
The Options field, whether ASSEMBLER, COMPILER, or LINKAGE EDITOR,
is remembered from one session to another. Therefore, you do not need to
change these fields unless the options or parameters you need are not
displayed.
If you need information about the options available for your processor, refer
to the documentation that shipped with the processor.
Enter any additional input libraries you need. For VS COBOL II interactive
debug, enter any input LOAD libraries that you need to complete the search.
These libraries must be LOAD libraries only. See “Input Data Sets” on page
272 if you need help.
Once all the input fields have been specified, press Enter to call the batch
processor. ISPF generates the appropriate JCL statements. See “JCL
Generation—Compilers” on page 302 and “JCL Generation—Assemblers and
Linkage Editor” on page 303 for more information.

Note: You can leave the entry panel without generating any JCL by entering
the END command instead of pressing Enter.
13. One of the following occurs:
v If you used the jump function to bypass the Batch Selection panel, ISPF
submits the generated JCL and returns directly to the ISPF Primary Option
Menu.
ISPF calls the TSO SUBMIT command to submit a job. The SUBMIT
command displays the following message:
JOB useridA(JOB nnnnn) SUBMITTED
***

When you press Enter or any other interrupt key, ISPF returns to the
previous panel.
v Otherwise, ISPF returns to the Batch Selection panel with the message Job
step generated displayed in the short message area on line 1, as shown in
Figure 182 on page 302.

Chapter 7. Batch (Option 5)

301

Batch—Processing Sequence

Menu Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Selection Panel
Job step generated
More:
+
1 Assembler
7 *Binder/Link editor
15 *ADA/370
2 COBOL
10 *VS COBOL II debug
16 *AD/Cycle C/370
3 VS FORTRAN
12 Member Parts List
18 ISPDTLC
5 PLI
13 *C/370
19 *OS/390 C/C++
6 VS PASCAL
14 *REXX/370
Enter "/" to select option
/ Source data online
Source data packed

* No packed data support

Job Statement Information:
===>
===>
===>
===>

//LSACKV1 JOB (ACCT),CLASS=A
//*
//*
//*

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 182. Batch Selection Panel with JCL Generated (ISRJPB)

The job statement parameters are shown for information only. They are no
longer intensified, and you cannot type over them because the JOB
statement has already been generated. At this point, you can:
– Select the same or another processor to cause more JCL to be generated.
– Go to the ISPF Primary Option Menu by:
- Canceling the batch job by entering the CANCEL command
- Entering the END or RETURN command to cause the generated JCL to
be submitted for processing.
– Use the jump function (=) to choose any primary option. If any JCL has
been generated, it is submitted for batch processing.

JCL Generation—Compilers
Figure 186 on page 307 shows an example for the PL/I optimizing compiler. This
panel is typical of the batch compiler entry panels. After you fill in an entry panel
and press Enter, ISPF generates the appropriate JCL statements. The JCL that
would be generated for the PL/I example is:
//SCAN EXEC PGM=ISRLEMX,COND=(12,LE),
// PARM=(’PLI,TOPSEG,B,N,E,4, ,00,ENU,4,7’,
//
’1,/,VIO’)
//*
//* INSERT STEPLIB DD CARDS HERE FOR ISRLEMX AND THE NATIONAL
//* LANGUAGE LITERAL LOAD MODULE IF THEY ARE NOT IN YOUR SYSTEM
//* LIBRARY
//*
//ISRLCODE DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.XXX.PLIO,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.A.PLIO,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.MASTER.PLIO,DISP=SHR
//ISRLEXPD DD UNIT=SYSDA,DISP=(NEW,PASS),SPACE=(CYL,(2,2)),
//
DSN=&&TEMP1
//ISRLMSG DD SYSOUT=(A)
//PLIO EXEC PGM=IEL0AA,REGION=1024K,COND=(12,LE),
//
PARM=’MACRO,XREF’

302

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Batch—JCL Generation for Compilers
//SYSPRINT
//
//
//SYSIN
//SYSLIB
//
//
//
//SYSUT1
//SYSLIN

DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.LISTPLIO.LIST,UNIT=SYSDA,
SPACE=(CYL,(2,2)),DISP=(MOD,CATLG),
DCB=(RECFM=VBA,LRECL=125,BLKSIZE=3129)
DD DSN=&&TEMP1,DISP=(OLD,DELETE)
DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.XXX.PLIO,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.A.PLIO,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.MASTER.PLIO,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=ISPFTEST.FLAG.PLIO,DISP=SHR
DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(2,2))
DD DSN=ISPFDEMO.XXX.OBJ(TOPSEG),DISP=OLD\

The JCL is generated in two steps:
1. The first step processes one of the following scan programs, which are
distributed as part of ISPF:
ISRSCAN

Copies one member.

Copies the primary member, expands any included members,
and unpacks any packed members.
The selected scan program searches the user-specified sequence of concatenated
libraries to find the designated member. If the scan program finds the member,
it copies the member to a temporary sequential data set that is shown by
&&TEMP1 and generated by the system. The scan program then exits with a
return code of zero, if no errors are found. If any errors are found, the scan
program exits with one of the following return codes, which prevents the
processing of the second job step. Table 22 describes ISRLEMX return codes.
ISRLEMX

Table 22. ISRSCAN and ISRLEMX Return Codes
ISRSCAN
12

Member not found.

OPEN error on DDNAME=IN.

I/O error on DDNAME=IN.

OPEN error on DDNAME=OUT.

I/O error on DDNAME=OUT.

ISRLEMX
1–15 Parameter n was too long, where n =
1 to 15.
16

Too many parameters.

Too few parameters.

Severe error in expand module. An
error message should be printed in
the ISRLMSG data set.

2. In this example, the second step calls the PL/I optimizing compiler by using
the temporary data set designated by &&TEMP1 as the input data set. The
concatenation sequence is passed to the compiler through SYSLIB DD
statements, to allow inclusion of subsidiary members referenced by
%INCLUDE statements in the source text.
The object module is directed to a partitioned data set with a three-level name
composed of the project name, the first library name, and a type qualifier of
OBJ. The member name for the object module is the same as the primary
member to be compiled.
The compiler listing is directed to SYSOUT class A, as specified.

JCL Generation—Assemblers and Linkage Editor
For batch assembly and link-edit, an optional SYSTERM DD statement is
generated (if you specify TERM) besides the JCL shown in “JCL
Generation—Compilers” on page 302, as follows:
//SYSTERM DD DSN=prefix.member.TERM,DISP=(MOD,CATLG)

Chapter 7. Batch (Option 5)

303

Batch—JCL Generation for Assemblers and Linkage Editor
where:
prefix

The data set prefix in your TSO user profile

member

For members of partitioned data sets, this is the same member
name specified on the entry panel. For sequential data sets, this
name is TEMPNAME.

Assembler (Option 5.1)
Batch Assembler enables you to invoke either High Level Assembler or Assembler
H. Both are called from the Batch Assembler panel, shown in Figure 183. For
information about Assembler allocation data sets, see the appendix on Allocation
Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Assembler
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . ASM
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
Assembler
(Blank for hardcopy) 1 1. High Level Assembler
(For hardcopy)
2. Assembler H

List ID . . . . .
SYSOUT class . . .
Assembler options:
Term . . .
Other . . .

(TERM or NOTERM)

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 183. Batch Assembler Panel (ISRJP01)

In the Term field, enter TERM if you want ISPF to generate a terminal data
set. A terminal data set contains a synopsis of the error messages produced
by the Assembler. If the input data set is partitioned, the terminal data set
name is:
prefix.member.TERM

where prefix is the data set name prefix in your TSO user profile, if you
have one, and member is the name of the member being assembled.
However, if the input data set is sequential, the terminal data set name is:
prefix.TEMPNAME.TERM

Enter NOTERM in the Term field to avoid generating the terminal data set.
This is a required field.

304

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Batch—Assembler (Option 5.1)
Other Enter any other options you need in the Other field.

COBOL Compile (Option 5.2)
ISPF generates an ISPEXEC SELECT PGM(IGYCRCTL) statement to invoke a
COBOL compiler using the values you enter on the Batch COBOL Compile panel,
shown in Figure 184. For information about COBOL allocation data sets, see the
appendix on Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch COBOL Compile
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . COBOL
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . . . .
SYSOUT class . . . .
Compiler options:
Term . . . NOTERM
Other . . .

(Blank for hardcopy)
(If hardcopy requested)
(TERM or NOTERM)

Additional input libraries:
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 184. Batch COBOL Compile Panel (ISRJP02)

In the Term field, enter TERM if you want ISPF to generate a terminal data
set. A terminal data set contains a synopsis of the error messages produced
by the COBOL compiler. If the input data set is partitioned, the terminal
data set name is:
prefix.member.TERM

Enter NOTERM in the Term field to avoid generating the terminal data set.
This is a required field.
Other If you plan to run VS COBOL II interactive debug after you compile your
program, enter TEST, RESIDENT, and any other options you need in the
Other field.

Chapter 7. Batch (Option 5)

305

Batch—VS FORTRAN Compile (Option 5.3)

VS FORTRAN Compile (Option 5.3)
The Batch VS FORTRAN Compile panel is shown in Figure 185.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch VS FORTRAN Compile
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . FORT
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . . . .
SYSOUT class . . . .
Compiler options:
Term . . . NOTERM
Other . . .

(Blank for hardcopy)
(If hardcopy requested)
(TERM or NOTERM)

Additional input libraries:
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 185. Batch VS FORTRAN Compile Panel (ISRJP03)

In the Term field, enter TERM if you want ISPF to generate a terminal data
set. A terminal data set contains a synopsis of the error messages produced
by the VS FORTRAN compiler. If the input data set is partitioned, the
terminal data set name is:
prefix.member.TERM

Enter NOTERM in the Term field to avoid generating the terminal data set.
This is a required field.
Other If you plan to run FORTRAN interactive debug after you compile your
program, enter TEST in the Other field, along with any other options you
need.

PL/I Compile (Option 5.5)
The Batch PL/I Compile option enables you to invoke either OS PL/I Version 2 or
PL/I for MVS and VM, using the values specified on the Batch PL/I compile panel
shown in Figure 186 on page 307.

306

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Batch—PL/I Compile (Option 5.5)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch PL/I Compile
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . PLI
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . .
SYSOUT class . . .

Compiler
(Blank for hardcopy) 1 1. OS PL/I V2R3
(For hardcopy)
2. PL/I for MVS and VM
3. VA PL/I for OS/390

Compiler options:
===>
Additional input libraries:
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 186. Batch PL/I Compile Panel (ISRJP05)

VS Pascal Compile (Option 5.6)
The Batch VS Pascal Compile panel is shown in Figure 187 on page 308.

Chapter 7. Batch (Option 5)

307

Batch—VS Pascal Compile (Option 5.6)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch VS PASCAL Compile
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . LSACKV . . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . PASCAL
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . . . .
SYSOUT class . . . .

(Blank for hardcopy)
(If hardcopy requested)

Compiler options:
===>
Additional input libraries:
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 187. Batch VS Pascal Compile Panel (ISRJP06)

Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 5.7)
The Batch Binder or Linkage Editor is called from the Batch Binder/Linkage editor
panel. The panel in Figure 188 on page 309 shows entries you might make when
link-editing a VS Pascal program.

308

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Batch—Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 5.7)

Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Binder/Linkage Editor
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . PDFTDEV
Group . . . . COMMON . . .
. . .
. . .
Type . . . . LEL
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . .
SYSOUT class . .

(Blank for hardcopy)
(For hardcopy)

Processor
1. Binder
2. Linkage Editor

Linkage editor/binder options:
Term . . .
(TERM or blank)
Other . . .
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 188. Batch Binder Linkage/Editor Panel (ISRJP07B)

All the fields on this panel are explained in the Libraries and Data Sets chapter of
the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I except List ID, which is explained in “List Data
Sets” on page 273, and the following:
Binder
Determines whether the Linkage Editor (NOBINDER) or Binder (BINDER)
is invoked.
Note: The binder is available only if DFSMS 1.1, or later, is installed.
Term

In the Term field, enter TERM if you want ISPF to generate a terminal data
set. A terminal data set contains a synopsis of the error messages produced
by the linkage editor. If the input data set is partitioned, the terminal data
set name is:
prefix.member.TERM

where prefix is the data set name prefix in your TSO user profile, if you
have one, and member is the name of the member being assembled.
Note: Sequential data sets are invalid when using the Linkage Editor.
Leave the Term field blank to avoid generating the terminal data set.
Other Enter any other options you need in the Other field.
SYSLIB
The name of the data set that is to contain the ISPF library concatenation
sequence used to resolve any copy statements specified in your program.
See “Input Data Sets” on page 272 and the SYSLIB Data Set section of the
appendix on Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for
more information.
SYSLIN
The name of the data set that is to contain the object module. The SYSLIN
field is provided to accommodate the VS Pascal XA and NOXA processing
Chapter 7. Batch (Option 5)

309

Batch—Binder/Linkage Editor (Option 5.7)
options. See “Input Data Sets” on page 272 and the SYSLIN Data Set
section of the appendix on Allocation Data Sets in the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I for more information.

VS COBOL II Interactive Debug (Option 5.10)
Before you can run VS COBOL II interactive debug in batch, you must first do the
following, in the order shown:
1. Compile the program using the VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2 or option
5.2) with the TEST and RESIDENT options.
2. Use the linkage editor (option 4.7 or option 5.7) to generate an output load
module, which VS COBOL II interactive debug will use as input.
The VS COBOL II Interactive Debug panel is shown in Figure 189.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
VS COBOL II Interactive Debug
More:
+
ISPF Library:
Project . . . LSACKV
Group . . . . PRIVATE (Type = LOAD assumed)
Member . . .
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
List ID . . . . . . .
SYSOUT class . . . . A

(Blank for hardcopy)
(If hardcopy requested)

Debug command data set:
===>
Additional input libraries:
===>
===>
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 189. VS COBOL II Interactive Debug Panel (ISRJP10)

310

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Batch—Member Parts List (Option 5.12)

Member Parts List (Option 5.12)
When you select the Batch Member Parts List option (5.12), the panel shown in
Figure 190 is displayed.
The only difference between this panel and the Foreground Member Parts List
panel is that option 1 (print member parts) is called Browse/Print member parts list
in foreground. The foreground version does not print your member parts list
unless you use the Foreground Print Options panel to do so.
Otherwise, this version operates the same as the foreground version. See “Member
Parts List (Option 4.12)” on page 293 for more information about using the
member parts list function.
The listing is 120 characters wide and uses ANSI printer controls.
Menu RefList Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Batch Member Parts List
1 Print member parts
2 Write member parts data set
ISPF Library:
Project . .
Group . . .
Type . . .
Member . .

. LSACKV
. PRIVATE . . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
(Blank or pattern for member selection list)

Language . . . . COB

(Defaults to Type value)

Groups for Primary members . . . 1 (1, 2, 3, or 4)
SYSOUT class . . .
Output Data Set:
Data Set Name . .
Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

(Defaults to A )
(Option 2 only)
F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 190. Batch Member Parts List Panel (ISRJP12)

C/370 Compile (Option 5.13)
ISPF supports the C/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the C/370
compiler (5688-040). Refer to C Compiler User’s Guide for MVS, SC09-1129 for
additional information.

REXX/370 Compile (Option 5.14)
ISPF supports the REXX/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the
REXX/370 compiler (5695-013). Refer to IBM Compiler and Library for REXX/370
User’s Guide and Reference, SH19-8160, for additional information.

Chapter 7. Batch (Option 5)

311

Batch Ada/370 Compile (Option 5.15)

Ada/370 Compile (Option 5.15)
ISPF supports the Ada/370 compiler and its tools through dialogs supplied with
the Ada/370 compiler (5706-292). Refer to IBM Ada/370 User’s Guide, SC09-1415, for
additional information.

AD/Cycle C/370 Compile (Option 5.16)
ISPF supports the AD/Cycle C/370 compiler through dialogs supplied with the
AD/Cycle C/370 compiler (5688-216). Refer to IBM SAA AD/Cycle C/370
Programming Guide SC09-1356, for additional information.

ISPDTLC Compile (Option 5.18)
ISPF supports the ISPF Dialog Tag Language compiler by running the ISPDTLC
function. Refer to z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference for additional
information.
The ISPDTLC interface panels are identical to those in the Foreground option. The
first panel can be seen in Figure 180 on page 298.
The fields on this panel are explained in the chapter “Using the Conversion
Utility” in z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference.

OS/390 C/C++ Compile (Option 5.19)
ISPF supports the OS/390 C/C++ compiler and its tools through dialogs supplied
with the OS/390 C/C++ compiler (5647-A01). For information about OS/390
C/C++, refer to the OS/390 C/C++ User’s Guide.

312

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 8. Command (Option 6)
When you select this option, the ISPF Command Shell panel shown in Figure 191 is
displayed. You can enter TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs on the
Command line of any panel and in the Line Command field on data set list
displays (option 3.4). However, the ISPF Command Shell panel provides additional
capabilities:
v You can enter TSO commands, ISPF commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs in a
separate, but optional, ISPF Command field. This field is displayed only if your
installation chooses to do so. The default panel shown in Figure 191 does not
display this field. When you use this field, commands that are typed in the TSO
Command Entry field (==>) are not blanked out when you enter the SPLIT
command to split the screen.
Note: If you use this field, you will not have access to the saved command area
(see “The Saved Command Area” on page 315).
v You can enter Session Manager mode, but only if this licensed program is
installed. See “Using the Session Manager” on page 316 for more information.
v You can enter a long command that continues on the following two lines.

Menu List Mode Functions Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Command Shell
Enter TSO or Workstation commands below:
===>

Place cursor on choice and press enter to Retrieve command
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 191. ISPF Command Shell Panel (ISRTSO)

ISPF Command Shell Panel Action Bar
The ISPF Command Shell panel action bar choices function as follows:
Note: The ISPF Command Shell panel action bar contains three pull-down choices
that let you control the saved command area.
v List
v Mode
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2005

313

Command (Option 6)
v Functions
Menu For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
List

The List pull-down offers you the following choices:
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it is
displayed in blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of
the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice
will be grayed).
Update On

Makes the list of commands in the saved command area
live; that is, new commands are appended to the list
automatically.

Update Off

Makes the list of commands in the saved command area
static; that is, new commands are not appended to the list
automatically.

Mode The Mode pull-down offers you the following choices:
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it is
displayed in blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of
the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice
will be grayed).
Retrieve

Allows commands to be retrieved from the saved
command area and placed on the TSO Command Entry
field (==>) so that you can edit them before they are
executed. This mode is the default.

Execute

Allows commands to be retrieved from the saved
command area and executed in one step.

Delete

Allows you to delete commands from the saved command
area without executing the commands. Place the cursor on
the command to be deleted and press Enter. The command
will be blanked out. This process allows you to delete a
command if you are running with Update mode set off.

Functions
The Functions pull-down offers you the following choice:
Compress List Removes duplicate entries and blank spaces in the saved
command area if you are running with Update mode set
off. Entries are compressed automatically in Update mode.
TSO command
Sets the command shell to route commands to TSO
Workstation command
Sets the command shell to route commands to your
workstation.
Notes:
1. Workstation command is available only if you are
running the ISPF Client Server.
2. Any command may be prefixed with either TSO or WS to
override the command function setting.

314

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Command (Option 6)
Utilities
For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
TSO Command processor panel
3
Restrictions
4
Line I/O mode
5
Session Manager mode
6
Appendices
7
Index

Help

The Saved Command Area
The ISPF Command Shell panel has a saved command area (the bottom portion of
the screen) that contains a list of up to 10 commands that you have saved; see
Figure 192 for an example. These commands are point-and-shoot fields. What
happens when you select a command depends on the mode you specify from the
Mode pull-down menu on the action bar.
Menu List Mode Functions Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Command Shell
Enter TSO or Workstation commands below:
===>

Place cursor on choice and press enter to Retrieve command
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>

status
xmit carvm3.userid da(’userid.private.clist(types)’)seq
TIME
RECEIVE
XMIT CARVM3.SCOTT DA(’USERID.PROJ.PANELS(ISAJP10)’) SEQ
PERMIT ’BOB.*’ GENERIC ACCESS(READ) ID(*)
rexec -1 SQUIRT -p SPARKY p:\acI13\samples\isr prim\os213\isr_prim
XMIT CARVM3.userid DA(’USERID.BUILD.LIST77’)
ssdf
XMIT CARVM3.userid DA(’USERID.trace’)

F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 192. ISPF Command Shell Panel with Saved Commands (ISRTSO)

Entering TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs
You do not need to enter TSO before the command on this panel as you do on
other panels, unless the command exists in both ISPF and TSO and you want to
process the TSO command. If you use TSO, your processed command is blanked
out when the ISPF Command Shell panel is displayed again.
TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs entered are invoked using the ISPF
SELECT CMD service. Variable names starting with an ampersand (&) are
evaluated by ISPF. If you want the underlying command processor to see the
ampersand you must specify 2 ampersands. For example:
Chapter 8. Command (Option 6)

315

Command (Option 6)
DEF NONVSAM(NAME(’MY.DATASET’) DEVT(0000) VOLUME(&&SYSR2))

For example, the HELP, PRINT, and CANCEL commands are interpreted as the
ISPF HELP, PRINT, and CANCEL commands, unless you precede them with TSO.
Therefore, to get TSO HELP information, enter:
===> TSO HELP xxx

Rules for Entering TSO Commands
Do not enter the following commands under ISPF:
v LOGON and LOGOFF
v ISPF, PDF, or ISPSTART
v TEST
v Commands that are restricted by TSO or ISPF
v Commands that call a program authorized by the Authorized Program Facility
(APF), except for the TSO CALL command
v ISPEXEC service calls.

Rules for Entering CLISTs and REXX EXECs
You can enter a CLIST name or REXX EXEC name on this panel, but the following
restrictions apply:
v The CLIST or REXX EXEC cannot call the restricted commands shown in the
preceding list. However, this does not apply to ISPEXEC, which can be called in
a CLIST or REXX EXEC.
v CLIST error exits are not entered for ABENDs.
v CLIST TERMIN command procedure statements may cause unwanted results.
Note: Remember that a command issued through an alias may contain some of the
characteristics listed here and thus may cause unwanted results.

Using the Session Manager
If the Session Manager licensed program is installed and available, you can use it
by selecting Session Manager mode on the ISPF Settings panel.
Note: Refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for information on altering the
PDF configuration table to allow you to enter Session Manager mode.
If you select this option, any display output is displayed in the Session Manager
TSOOUT stream.
Note: If GDDM/ISPF mode is active, Session Manager does not get control of the
screen. GDDM/ISPF mode is started when a GRINIT service has been
issued, but a GRTERM service has not been issued. Refer to z/OS ISPF
Services Guide for more information about these two services.
The function key definitions are not transferred to the Session Manager from ISPF.
When the command ends, the Session Manager prompts you to enter a null line to
return to ISPF control and displays the TSO Command Processor panel again when
you do so.
If you do not select Session Manager mode, terminal I/O occurs as though the
Session Manager were not installed. The terminal operates in normal TSO fashion.
Any communication with the command is in line-I/O mode. When the command

316

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Command (Option 6)
ends, three asterisks (***) are displayed. Press Enter to display the TSO Command
Processor panel again in full screen mode.
To interrupt a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX EXEC, press the PA1 key. The TSO
command ends and the TSO Command Processor panel is displayed again. If
terminal input is inhibited, press the Reset key before pressing the PA1 key. If you
are in Session Manager mode, enter a null line to return to ISPF full-screen mode.
When the TSO Command Processor panel is displayed again, the command that
was just processed is displayed to the right of the arrow. Enter another command
or the END command to return to the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
For terminals with primary and alternate screen sizes, ISPF does not check to make
sure the same screen settings are in effect when a command, CLIST, or REXX
EXEC ends. If you call a CLIST, REXX EXEC, or command that changes the screen
settings, you are responsible for saving and restoring them before control is
returned to ISPF.

Chapter 8. Command (Option 6)

317

318

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)
This chapter describes Dialog Test, option 7 on the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
Dialog Test (option 7) provides you with facilities for testing both complete ISPF
applications and ISPF dialog parts, including functions, panels, variables,
messages, tables, and skeletons. The Dialog Test option allows you to:
v Call selection panels, command procedures, and programs
v Display panels
v Add new variables and change variable values
v Display a table’s structure and status
v Display, add, modify, and delete table rows
v Browse the ISPF log
v Process dialog services
v Add, modify, and delete function and variable trace definitions
v Add, modify, and delete breakpoint definitions.
You can use TSO TEST to complement this option if you want to examine and
manipulate non-ISPF storage areas.
You usually test a dialog in one of two ways:
v Test individual dialog parts, including panels, skeletons, and messages, without
calling a function or a selection panel. Eventually, you end your test session by
entering the END command on the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel.
v Test dialog functions, including programs, commands, and selection panels,
using the Functions option (7.1). You can define traces and breakpoints before
calling the function.
Any requested traces for variable usage and dialog service calls are written to the
ISPF log. You can browse the log using the Log option (7.5).
If you define a breakpoint and the function gets to it, dialog processing is
suspended, and Dialog Test displays the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel
(Figure 215 on page 364). At this point, you can access and manipulate dialog
parts, such as variables, tables, and so forth. Then, if you select the Go option from
the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel, the dialog resumes processing.
When the processing is complete, you are returned to the Functions option (7.1). If
you select the Cancel option from the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel, the dialog
is canceled and the first primary option panel that you were shown during your
terminal session is displayed again. For example, if the first screen displayed when
you began your session was a master application panel that is different from the
ISPF Primary Option Menu, that master application panel is displayed again.

The Dialog Test Environment
The Dialog Test Primary Option Panel, shown in Figure 193 on page 320, follows
the conventions for a primary option panel. If you use the RETURN command
from one of the selected Dialog Test options, the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel
is displayed again. If you use the END command from this panel, you return to
the ISPF Primary Option Menu.

319

Dialog Test (Option 7)
When you enter Dialog Test from the ISPF Primary Option Menu, you enter a new
user application with an ID of ISR. When you enter Dialog Test from the ISPF
primary option panel, you enter a new user application with an ID of ISP. All
options listed on the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel operate in this context. If
you call a new function using the Functions options (7.1), a SELECT service call is
performed, and the rules for the SELECT service are followed.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
┌───────────────────────────── Dialog Test ──────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities View Help
│
│ ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Primary Option Panel
│
│
│
│ 1 Functions
Invoke dialog functions/selection panel
│
│ 2 Panels
Display panels
│
│ 3 Variables
Display/set variable information
│
│ 4 Tables
Display/modify table information
│
│ 5 Log
Browse ISPF log
│
│ 6 Dialog Services Invoke dialog services
│
│ 7 Traces
Specify trace definitions
│
│ 8 Breakpoints
Specify breakpoint definitions
│
│ T Tutorial
Display information about Dialog Test
│
│ X Exit
Terminate dialog testing
│
│ Option ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===> 7
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

────
RN

SH
RN
A
5.5

F9=Swap

Figure 193. Dialog Test Primary Option Panel (ISPYXD1)

Note: You can set the application ID under which you enter the Dialog Test
function using the Dialog Test appl ID choice from the Options pull-down
on the ISPF Primary Option Menu or using the Dialog Test appl ID choice
from the Test pull-down on an Edit panel.
After you begin an application under Dialog Test, you can enter the DTEST
command with one of its parameters as a quicker way to start a dialog test
function. For example, if you enter DTEST 8 on the command line, the Option 7.8
Breakpoints panel is displayed. The other parameters of the DTEST command also
match the dialog test function they perform:

320

invoke Functions panel

invoke Display Panel panel

invoke Variables panel

invoke Tables panel

display Browse Log panel

invoke Dialog Services panel

invoke Traces selection panel

invoke Breakpoint panel

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Dialog Test (Option 7)
You must use a parameter with the DTEST command, otherwise an error message
appears. After you complete the entries on whichever dialog test panel you invoke,
leaving the panel returns you to the application you were running with the new
entries in place.
Dialog Test is itself a dialog and, therefore, uses dialog variables. Because it is
important to allow your dialog to operate without interference, as though in a
production environment, Dialog Test accesses and updates variables independently
of your dialog variables.
All breakpoints and traces that you set in Dialog Test exist only while you remain
within the Dialog Test option.
You should always allocate the ISPF log when using Dialog Test. Do not suppress
its generation by typing 0 in the “Primary pages” field that appears on the Log
Data set defaults... and List Data set defaults... choices from the Log/List
pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel. Dialog Test writes trace data to the log when
you request it. Also, if Dialog Test finds an unexpected condition, it writes problem
data to the log.
When you enter Dialog Test, you are given the following ISPF facilities:
v All functions you normally get by specifying the TEST parameter on the
ISPSTART command
v The logging of all severe errors, both from user dialogs and Dialog Test. This is
normally done when you specify TRACE or TRACEX on the ISPSTART
command.
v The suspension of the logging of all ISPEXEC dialog service requests. Such
logging normally occurs when you specify TRACE or TRACEX on the ISPSTART
command. You should use the Traces option (7.7).
These facilities become active for all logical screens when you are using split-screen
mode. At the completion of the last dialog test session (dialog test is no longer
active in any logical screen), these options will be restored to the original values
established during dialog manager start-up. Optionally, by making the appropriate
selection on the ISPF Settings panel, the facilities established by dialog test will
remain in effect after the last dialog test session terminates.

Dialog Test Primary Option Panel Action Bar
The Dialog Test Primary Option Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

View

Allows you to select whether the Add row, Modify row, and
Display row panels are displayed in pop-up windows and whether
Dialog Services (option 7.6) are displayed in a pop-up. By
displaying the panel in a pop-up window, you can see the panel
underneath and move the window. By displaying the panel as a
full-screen display, you can see more data. The setting you choose
will remain until you change it.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

321

Dialog Test (Option 7)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

General Dialog Test
General Information
Functions
Panels
Variables
Tables
Log
Dialog Services
Traces
Breakpoints
View Action Bar
Exit

Using Variables
When you select the Dialog Test option from the ISPF Primary Option Menu, you
are given a new function pool, a new shared pool, and the profile pool for the
application ID under which you entered Dialog Test. When you select Dialog Test
from the ISPF Primary Option Menu, you are given a new function pool, a new
shared pool, and the ISPPROF profile pool. These pools are used if you set a
variable, display a panel, call an ISPF service, and so forth. When you call a new
dialog, Dialog Test uses the SELECT service, and follows the rules for the creation
of new variable pools. For example, if you call a new dialog using the NEWPOOL
option, Dialog Test creates new shared and function variable pools for you. The
profile variable pool, ISRPROF or ISPPROF, remains as it was.
If you set a dialog variable in the shared pool from a dialog running under Dialog
Test and then call the dialog again from the Command line, you cannot retrieve the
value of that variable.
Dialog variables should be initialized and set in the context of the dialog’s
processing. A dialog’s function variable pools are created when it is called; that is,
when the SELECT is done. Therefore, to set function variables in newly created
pools, you must define a breakpoint early in your dialog’s processing, at a point
before the function is called.
For example, if you call a dialog with the NEWPOOL parameter, you must define
a breakpoint in the dialog before the first function is called to access that dialog’s
function and shared variable pools. You can change the dialog’s profile variable
pool before calling the dialog, since a new profile variable pool is not created.
When your dialog ends, all variable pools that were created when the dialog was
called are deleted.
Note: ISPF does not support TSO global variables. You can find a severe dialog
test error when testing a dialog that refers to a global variable.

Severe Error Handling
If your dialog finds a severe error when it calls a dialog service, the error is
handled as requested by the dialog. The current CONTROL service ERRORS
setting, CANCEL or RETURN, determines what is done. If CANCEL is in effect,
you can choose whether to continue dialog testing when the Error Message panel
is displayed.

322

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Dialog Test (Option 7)
Note: If you choose not to continue dialog testing, you return to the ISPF Primary
Option Menu. The TEST and TRACE options set by dialog test are restored
to the values originally established during dialog manager start-up.
Optionally, by making the appropriate selection on the ISPF Settings panel,
the facilities established by dialog test will remain in effect after the last
dialog test session terminates.
If you find a severe error when manipulating your dialog at a breakpoint, Dialog
Test assumes that the CONTROL service ERRORS setting is CANCEL. For
example, if you display a panel at a breakpoint and that panel is not found, the
Error Message panel is displayed. This occurs even if your current dialog has an
ERRORS setting of RETURN.
Regardless of the ERRORS setting, all your severe errors are logged.
If Dialog Test finds a severe error during its processing, the details are logged and
the following message is shown to you on an error message display:
Test severe error
Details precede this message in the ISPF log

Dialog Test errors can occur because:
v Proper ISPF libraries are not being used.
v A programming problem has been found.
v You have attempted to process Dialog Test.
v You have called a Dialog Test option without being in test mode or without
calling Dialog Test first.
You should browse the ISPF log to find the problem; see “Log (Option 7.5)” on
page 350 for more information.

Commands
You can enter ISPF primary commands on Dialog Test panels. Seven commands
have special meaning during Dialog Test operations. You enter them in the
Command line of the applicable Dialog Test option panel. These commands, and
the Dialog Test options with which they function, are:
Primary Command

Valid Options

CANCEL
v
v
v
v

Variables (option 7.3)
Tables (option 7.4)1
Traces (option 7.7)2
Breakpoints (option 7.8)

v
v
v
v

Variables (option 7.3)
Tables (option 7.4)3
Traces (option 7.7) 2
Breakpoints (option 7.8)

END

1. Valid only with Tables options 3 and 4.
2. Valid only with Traces options 1 and 2.
3. Valid only with Tables options 1, 3, and 4.
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

323

Dialog Test (Option 7)
LOCATE
v
v
v
v

Variables (option 7.3)
Tables (option 7.4)4
Traces (option 7.7) 2
Breakpoints (option 7.8)

NEXT/PREV
v Tables (option 7.4)4
QUAL
v Breakpoints (option 7.8)
RESUME
v Breakpoints (option 7.8)
SORT
v Variable (option 7.3)
Dialog Test has three line commands that have special meaning during testing
operations. These commands, and the options with which they function, are:
Line Command

Valid Options

D (delete)
v
v
v
v

Variables (option 7.3)
Tables (option 7.4) 1
Traces (option 7.7) 2
Breakpoints (option 7.8)

v
v
v
v

Variables (option 7.3)
Tables (option 7.4) 1
Traces (option 7.7) 2
Breakpoints (option 7.8)

I (insert)

R (repeat)
v Tables (option 7.4) 1
v Traces (option 7.7) 2
v Breakpoints (option 7.8)
When using the Dialog Test primary and line commands, you should be aware of
the following:
v You can specify both a primary command and line commands before you press
the Enter key.
v You can enter multiple line commands on the display.
v You cannot carry out a deletion if one of the included lines contains another line
command.
v You can delete lines that contain an input error.
v The line commands are processed in row order when you press the Enter key.
Any fields changed in the row are handled before a line command is processed.

4. Valid only with Tables options 1 and 3.

324

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Dialog Test (Option 7)
v A primary command is handled after processing for all line commands is
complete.
v As in the ISPF editor, you can specify a number with each line command to
denote repetitive operation, unless you are using the Variables option (7.3). To
avoid conflict with the I (insert) line command, the Variables option does not
allow you to type a number along with the D command to delete more than one
line simultaneously. Therefore, enter a single D line command on each line you
want to delete. Unlike the ISPF editor, the Variables option does not support
block deletes; however, you can enter this command on more than one line
before pressing the Enter key.

Ending the Current Option without Saving Changes
The CANCEL command ends the current option. Any changes made to the data
are ignored.

Saving Changes
The END command ends the current option. Any changes made to the data now
take effect.

Finding a Character String
The LOCATE command searches for a character string and positions a scrollable
display to the next row that contains the string. The scan starts at the end of the
first row currently being displayed. A message is displayed indicating the result of
the scan.
LOCATE string
where:
string
The character string you are trying to find. If the string ends in an asterisk (*),
a scan for the characters preceding the asterisk is done. The asterisk is optional
in the Variables option (option 7.3).

Displaying Breakpoint Qualification Data
The QUAL command can only be entered from the Breakpoints pop-up window. It
displays the breakpoint qualification data.
The same breakpoint qualification data can be obtained using the Qualifications
choice on the Qualify pull-down.

Restoring the Format of the Breakpoints Panel
The RESUME command is entered on the Breakpoints panel when qualification
parameter values are shown. It restores the format of the Breakpoints panel. Each
breakpoint that has qualification is flagged by the characters *QUAL* in columns 75
to 80 on that line of the Breakpoints panel.

Dialog Test Line Commands
The following line commands have special meaning during testing operations:

D – Deleting Lines
The D command deletes one line or n lines starting with this line. The syntax is:
D[n]
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

325

Dialog Test (Option 7)
If you are using the Variables option (7.3), the n operand does not apply. To avoid
conflict with the I (insert) line command, the Variables option does not allow you
to type a number along with the D command to delete more than one line
simultaneously. Therefore, enter a single D line command on each line you want to
delete. You can enter this command on more than one line before pressing the
Enter key.

I – Inserting Lines
The I command inserts one line or n lines directly after this line, with underscores
and quotation marks in the appropriate fields. The syntax is:
I[n]

R – Repeating Lines
The R command repeats this line once or n times. The syntax is:
R[n]

Setting a Keylist for Dialog Test
Depending on your needs and preferences, you may wish to set a dialog
test-specific keylist to enhance productivity. To modify the default function key
settings, go to the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel, type KEYS on the Command
line, and press Enter to display the pop-up window shown in Figure 194. Or, you
may perform the following steps to display the pop-up:
1. Select Option 0 from the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
2. Select Keylist settings from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings
panel action bar.
3. Use a slash to select the ISPTEST Keylist; then select Change from the
Functions pull-down.

┌────────────────────────────── Keylist Utility ──────────────────────────────┐
│ File
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
ISR Keylist ISRTEST Change
Row 1 to 9 of 24 │
│
│
│ Make changes and then select File action bar.
│
│
│
│ Keylist Help Panel Name . . . ISRTESTH
│
│
│
│ Key
Definition
Format Label
│
│ F1 . . . HELP
SHORT Help
│
│ F2 . . . SPLIT
LONG
Split
│
│ F3 . . . EXIT
SHORT Exit
│
│ F4 . . . EXPAND
SHORT Expand
│
│ F5 . . . RFIND
SHORT Rfind
│
│ F6 . . . RESIZE
SHORT Resize
│
│ F7 . . . UP
LONG
Backward
│
│ F8 . . . DOWN
LONG
Forward
│
│ F9 . . . SWAP
LONG
Swap
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 194. Keylist Change Panel (ISPKLUCH)

On the Keylist Change panel, you can reassign existing function keys by typing
over the information in the data fields, or create a new function key assignment to

326

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Dialog Test (Option 7)
suit your needs. For example, you could assign the GO command to F4 if you
typically issue GO many times during a dialog test.
If you press F3 or select Save and Exit from the File pull-down, the values that you
have assigned will be valid when you return to Dialog Test. If you select Cancel
from the File pull-down, the fields return to their original values.

Functions (Option 7.1)
The Functions option (7.1) allows you to test a dialog function without having to
build supporting code or panels. Dialog functions include panels, command
procedures, and programs. The name of the dialog function and the parameters
you can pass are the same as those that you can specify from a dialog function
when you call the SELECT service. When you press the Enter key, a SELECT
service is called.
If you call a new function or selection panel at a breakpoint, the previous function
or selection panel is suspended and the new one is processed. When the new
activity finishes, the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel is displayed. The old
activity resumes when you enter the END command. When the function that was
called originally finishes processing, the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel is
displayed again.
When you select the Functions option, the scrollable panel shown in Figure 195 is
displayed to allow you to specify the dialog function that you want to test. Press
F8=Forward to display the rest of the panel.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
┌─────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Save Utilities Help
│
│ ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel
│
│
More:
+ │
│ Invoke selection panel:
│
│
PANEL . .
│
│
OPT . . .
│
│
│
│
│
│ Invoke command:
│
│
CMD . . .
│
│
│
│
LANG . . .
(APL, CREX, or blank)
│
│
MODE . . .
(LINE, FSCR, or blank)
│
│
│
│ Invoke program:
│
│
PGM . . .
│
│
PARM . . .
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 195. Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel (ISPYFP)

There are two alternate Invoke Dialog Function/Selection panels, ISPYFPA and
ISPYFPB. ISPYFPA is formatted with the most often used fields at the top of the
scrollable area. ISPYFPB is similar, but it has a selection field for panel, command,

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

327

Functions (Option 7.1)
program, or request selection. Unlike panel ISPYFP and ISPYFPA, when you use
ISPYFPB the panel, command, program, and request selection fields can all contain
values.
You can specify one of the alternate panels using the ISPF Configuration utility.
Refer to z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing for more information.
One of the advantages of placing dialog panels in pop-up windows is that you can
move the pop-up within the 3270 physical display area to reveal portions of the
underlying panel.
See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for instructions on how to
move a pop-up window.

Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel Action Bar
The Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Save

Allows you to specify that you want to save or clear input field
information when you exit this panel.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
Invoke Function Panel
3
Usage Notes
4
General Dialog Test

Invoke Dialog Panel Fields
To call a function, you must specify a value for either the PANEL, CMD, or PGM
field. You cannot specify more than one of these fields.
The fields on the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel function as follows:
Invoke selection panel:
Use the following fields to call a selection panel:
PANEL
The name of the selection panel to be displayed.
OPT

An optional parameter indicating the first selection option that
must be valid from the specified selection panel. This input field
continues onto the next line on the panel.

Invoke command:
Use the following fields to call a command:
CMD

The name of a command procedure written in CLIST or REXX, or
any TSO command, to be called as a dialog function. You can
include command parameters.
Use the percent sign (%) as a prefix symbol to tell ISPF to remove
the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel and use the full screen
to display the results of a CLIST or REXX EXEC call. A complete

328

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Functions (Option 7.1)
CLIST or REXX EXEC call is indicated by three asterisks. Press the
Enter key to return to the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel.
If you omit the % prefix, ISPF interprets the command as a TSO
command, using line mode to display the command results at the
bottom of the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel.
LANG
An optional parameter used to specify APL or CREX.
Type APL in this field to specify the use of the APL® language. If
this is your first APL request during the session, the command
specified in the CMD keyword is called and an APL2 environment
is established. If this is not your first APL request during this
session, the string specified after the CMD keyword is passed to
the APL2 workspace and processed.
Type CREX in this field to specify that the command specified in the
CMD keyword is a REXX EXEC that has been compiled and
link-edited into a load module, and that a CLIST/REXX function
pool is to be used rather than an ISPF module function pool.
LANG(CREX) is optional if the compiled REXX has been
link-edited to include any of the stubs EAGSTCE, EAGSTCPP, or
EAGSTMP.
See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference for more
information about Compiled REXX processing.
To specify any language other than APL or Compiled REXX, leave
this field blank.
MODE
An optional parameter that overrides:
v Automatic line mode entry, caused when a TSO command is
entered.
v Automatic full-screen display caused by the % CLIST or REXX
EXEC prefix. However, it does not prevent ISPF from calling the
command as a CLIST or REXX EXEC.
If you leave this field blank, the % prefix has its normal effect. The
valid values for this field are:
LINE

Used to enter line mode when calling a CLIST or REXX
EXEC.

FSCR Used to enter full-screen mode when calling a TSO
command.
Invoke program:
Use the following fields to call a program:
PGM

The name of a program to be called as a dialog function.

PARM Optional parameters to be passed to the program. This input field
continues onto the next line on the panel.
MODE
An optional parameter used to tell ISPF whether to display the
program results in line mode or full-screen mode. If you leave this
field blank, ISPF uses line mode as the default. The valid values
for this field are:
LINE

Used to enter line mode when calling a program. Results
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

329

Functions (Option 7.1)
of the program are displayed at the bottom of the Invoke
Dialog Function/Selection Panel.
FSCR Used to enter full-screen mode when calling a program.
ISPF removes the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection Panel
and uses the full screen to display the program results.
Three asterisks show program completion. Press the Enter
key to return to the Invoke Dialog Function/Selection
Panel.
Invoke request:
Use the following field to call a workstation command:
WSCMD

A fully qualified workstation command with any of its
parameters.

Options:
Use a slash to select the following options:
NEWAPPL

Indication of whether a new application is being called.
Select this option if the function is a new application.

A 1- to 4-character ID for a new application. If you call a
new application and leave the ID field blank, the default
ID of ISP is used. Note that the ID determines the names
of the profile and the command table to be used for the
application.

NEWPOOL

Indication of whether a new shared variable pool is to be
created. Select this option if you want to create a new
shared variable pool; however, the selection is ignored if
NEWAPPL is selected.

PASSLIB

Shows that the current set of application-level ISPF
libraries, if any sets exist, is to be used by the application
being selected. You can select PASSLIB only if you also
select NEWAPPL.
Note: For more information about the PASSLIB field, see
the description of the SELECT service in z/OS ISPF
Services Guide.

Panels (Option 7.2)
When you are developing panels, you can use the Panels option (7.2) to test newly
created or changed panels and messages without having to build supporting code
to display them. Any variables referred to and set during panel processing are
written to the current function variable pool.
When you select the Panels option (7.2), the panel in Figure 196 on page 331 is
displayed.

330

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Panels (Option 7.2)

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
┌───────────────────── Dialog Test ─────────────────────┐
│ Menu Save Utilities Help
│
│ ──────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Display Panel
│
│
│
│ Panel name . . . . . . .
│
│ Message id . . . . . . .
(Optional)
│
│ Cursor field . . . . . .
(Optional)
│
│ Cursor position . . . . .
(Optional)
│
│ Message pop-up field . .
(Optional)
│
│
│
│ Enter "/" to select option
│
│
Display in window
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
│
│ F5=Rfind
F6=Resize
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===> 7
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

───────────────────
er ID . :
me. . . :
rminal. :
reen. . :
nguage. :
pl ID . :
O logon :
O prefix:
stem ID :
S acct. :
lease . :

F7=Backward F8=Forward

USERID
17:23
3278
1
ENGLISH
ISR
ISPF
USERID
MVS8
IBMGSA
ISPF 5.5

F9=Swap

Figure 196. Display Panel (ISPYP1)

Display Panel Action Bar
The Display Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Save

Allows you to specify that you want to save or clear input field
information when you exit this panel.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
Display Panel
3
Usage Notes
4
General Dialog Test

Display Panel Fields
The fields on the Display Panel function as follows:
Panel name
The name of the panel to be displayed.
Message id
The identifier of a message to be displayed on the panel.
Cursor field
The name of the field on the panel where the cursor is to be positioned.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

331

Panels (Option 7.2)
Cursor position
An integer specifying the position in the field where the cursor is to be
placed.
Message pop-up field
The name of a panel field the pop-up message window should be placed
adjacent to. Note that the message definition determines if the message
will appear in a pop-up window.
Display in window
A slash ( /) specifies that the panel is to be displayed in a pop-up window.
If you specify a panel name, entries in “Message id”, “Cursor field”, “Cursor
Position”, “Message pop-up field”, and the Display in window option are optional.
With the exception of the Display in window option, these are the same
parameters that a dialog function can specify when calling the DISPLAY service.
Selecting the Display in window field is the functional equivalent to the dialog
issuing an ADDPOP service before the DISPLAY service.
When the panel is displayed, the )INIT and )PROC sections of the panel are
processed in the same way the DISPLAY service would process them.
If you want to set variables before you display the panel, you can use the Variables
option (7.3) to do so. When you display the panel, you can type in new data or
type over existing data, and then verify the variables by using the Variables option
(7.3) again. Data that you type on the panel is retained until you change it, leave
Dialog Test, or reset the function pool.
Figure 197 on page 333 shows the panel that is displayed if you specify
message ID ISPD241 and, optionally, a cursor position without identifying a panel
name. The long message portion of the identified message is displayed when you
enter the HELP command on that panel.

332

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Panels (Option 7.2)

Invalid option
This panel is used to display your specified message.

┌────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ The option that was entered was not valid. │
└────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT

F3=END
F11=RIGHT

F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

F6=CHANGE

Figure 197. Message Display Panel (ISPYP2)

When you enter the END command from the panel being tested, the Display Panel
reappears on the screen.

Variables (Option 7.3)
The Variables option (7.3) allows you to:
v Display all the ISPF variables defined in the dialog application you are testing.
v Change the value of a variable by typing over it, unless the variable has an N
(non-modifiable) attribute.
v Define new variables by inserting lines or by changing the name or pool of a
listed variable.
v Delete variable names and blank lines.
When you select this option, you can scroll a display showing all the current
variables for the dialog being tested, as shown in Figure 198 on page 334.
In addition to scrolling capability, you can also increase the size of the Variables
pop-up window to fill the entire 3270 physical display area using the RESIZE
command. The initial RESIZE command increases the pop-up window to its
maximum size, and the following RESIZE reduces the window to its original size.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

333

Variables (Option 7.3)

Menu Utilities Help
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Variables - Application: ISR
Row 1 to 9 of 707
Add, delete, and change variables. Underscores need not be blanked.
Enter END command to finalize changes, CANCEL command to end without
changes.
Current scrollable width of variables is: 57
Variable P A Value
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+-Z
S N
ZACCTNUM S N IBMGSA
ZAPLCNT S N 0000
ZAPPLID S N ISR
ZBDMXCNT S N 000000000
ZCFGCMPD S N 2001/11/22
ZCFGCMPT S N
ZCFGKSRC S N
ZCFGLVL S N 480R8001
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F7=Backward F8=Forward

F3=Exit
F9=Swap

Scroll ===> PAGE
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
F6=Resize
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 198. Variables Panel (ISPYVPN)

The Variables display is controlled by the selection you make in the View
pull-down on the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel action bar:
1
Display Variables in window. Variables are displayed in a pop-up
window.
2
Display Variables full-screen. Variables are displayed full-screen.
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it is
displayed in blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of
the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice is
grayed).

Variables Panel Action Bar
The Variables Panel action bar choices function as follows:

334

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General Variables
2
Definitions
3
Variables Panel
4
Manipulating Variables
5
Primary Commands
6
Line Commands
7
Usage Notes
8
General Dialog Test

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Variables (Option 7.3)

Variables Panel Fields
Each line of the display represents a variable and contains a line command area.
The fields on the Variables panel function as follows:
Variable
Name of the variable. The variable name is alphanumeric, with the first
character being either alphabetic or one of the special characters $, #, or @.
The variable name cannot be longer than eight characters. All alphabetic
characters are converted to uppercase when you press the Enter key. The
Variable field is required.
P

Pool that contains the variable; a required 1-character field, where:
V

Function pool; the variable was defined with the VDEFINE service.

Function pool; a variable that was created by a CLIST or REXX
EXEC, or by using the Variables option. This is an implicit variable,
which was not explicitly defined by using the VDEFINE service.

Shared variable pool.

Profile variable pool.

Attributes of the variable, a non-modifiable 1-character field, where:
N

Non-modifiable variable. Some system-reserved variables are not
modifiable.

Non-modifiable variable containing hexadecimal data. Some
system-reserved variables are not modifiable.

Variable containing hexadecimal data.

Truncated variable value. The actual value is longer than the 2048
characters that you can display on the expanded panel.
If you change a line showing a truncated value, only the data
shown on the display is stored as the new value.

Value Value of the variable. The value can be up to 2048 characters in length.
Each value is scrollable, by placing the cursor over the value and using the
LEFT and RIGHT functions keys. The EXPAND function key can be used
to display a full screen of data and display hexadecimal values.

Variables Commands
The Variables option (7.3) uses the CANCEL, END, and LOCATE commands, and
the I (insert) and D (delete) Dialog Test line commands described in “Commands”
on page 323. You can change the displayed sort order using the SORT command.
SORT with no operands sorts the list by variable pools then by variable name.
SORT NAME sorts the list by variable name and then by variable pool. SORT
VALUE sorts the list by the displayed Value field. The LOCATE command can be
used to search for a specific variable. LOCATE accepts as an operand the name, or
first letters of the name of a variable. If the name is not found, the list is positioned
near the closest match. You can use the RFIND key to continue searching other
variable pools.
Normally, the variable pools are updated with the data from the display when you
use the END command to leave the option.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

335

Variables (Option 7.3)

Manipulating Variables
The rows of the display are sorted in the following order:
1. By pool (function, then shared, then profile)
2. By function pool type (V, then I)
3. Alphabetically by variable name within each pool.
Insertions are left where they are typed on the display. Changes to the display are
processed when you press the Enter key. Updating of the variable pools occurs
when you enter the END command.

Creating New Variables
You can create new dialog variables, but you cannot create two variables with the
same name in the same variable pool.
To create a new variable, you can do one of two things:
v Use the I line command to insert a new row, and then type the variable name,
pool, and value on the new line. For each field, move the cursor to the start of
the field and type new information. The underscores are pad characters; you do
not need to blank them out.
v Type over the name of an existing variable, its pool indicator, or both. This
creates a new variable and resets the old variable’s value to nulls.
If you change a truncated value, the portion that is not displayed is lost. The
new variable value consists only of the visible portion on the screen.
New function pool variables are given an I (implicit) attribute and a CHAR format.
If you type F in the attribute field, ISPF changes it to I.
By using the second method, you can interchange the values of two or more
variables by simply changing their names. For example, you can interchange the
values for variables A and B by changing the variable name A to B and name B to
A, and then pressing the Enter key.

Deleting Variables
Any dialog variable in the shared and profile pools can be deleted, unless it has an
N attribute. Though you cannot delete a variable from the function pool, you can
set its value to blanks.
To delete a variable, use the D line command. However, to avoid conflict with the I
(insert) line command, the Variables option does not allow you to type a number
along with the D command to delete more than one line simultaneously. Therefore,
enter a single D line command on each line you want to delete. You can type this
command on more than one line before pressing the Enter key.

Variables Usage Notes
When using the Variables option (7.3), you should be aware of the following:
Input errors
Correct any errors before leaving a display. If you cannot correct the errors,
use the CANCEL command.
Length and format errors in variables defined with the VDEFINE service
are detected when you enter the END command. If ISPF finds such an
error, it prompts you to fix the variable value.
Test mode
Variable manipulations carried out under Dialog Test at a breakpoint are

336

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Variables (Option 7.3)
considered an extension of your dialog and, as such, are handled in user
mode. Dialog variables, table data, and service return codes that you
introduce, delete, or change are treated as though your dialog had made
those changes.
Variable life
Profile variables that you create remain in your profile pool from one
Dialog Test session to another. Shared and function variables exist only for
the duration of Dialog Test.
Split-screen mode
In split-screen mode, two logical screens can share a profile variable pool.
Since the Variables option (7.3) takes a snapshot of the variables, any
change to a profile variable on one screen is not immediately reflected on
the other screen. To get the latest changes, select the Variables option (7.3)
again. Also, when one profile variable is changed on two logical screens
using split-screen mode, the changed profile variable on the screen where
the last END command was entered takes precedence.
Variable value
Variables defined with the VDEFINE service as non-character are displayed
in converted form. Any changes made to the variable’s value should
conform to the defined format.
Do not change them using the hexadecimal representation. A format or
length error causes a message to be displayed when you use the END
command. When a VDEFINE error occurs, a panel identifies the data and
its value and describes the error. You must then correct the error and press
the Enter key. If you create a new variable by changing the pool indicator
of an existing variable defined as non-character, the new variable has
character (CHAR) format.
Hexadecimal data
Hexadecimal data that cannot be displayed is converted to displayable
characters or typed using the form:
X’nnnnnnnn’

where:
n

An integer 0 through 9 or an alphabetic character A through F.
There must be an even number of characters within the quotation
marks.

DBCS data
A variable defined as DBCS by the VDEFINE service or displayed through
the field with FORMAT(DBCS) specified in the test environment is
displayed using the form:
’¬[DBDBDB]’

where:
[ and ] Represent the SO (shift-out) and SI (shift-in) characters,
respectively.
If you type a DBCS value in this format on the Variables panel, only the
DBCS characters are stored.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

337

Tables (Option 7.4)

Tables (Option 7.4)
The Tables option (7.4) allows you to examine and manipulate the rows of a table,
and to display table structure and status. When you select this option, the panel in
Figure 199 is displayed, on which you show the table function you want and the
parameters needed to identify the table.
┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities View Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Tables
│
│
More:
+ │
│ 1 Display row
3 Modify row
5 Display structure
│
│ 2 Delete row
4 Add row
6 Display status
│
│
│
│ Table Name . .
Open tables . .
(NOWRITE or WRITE or
│
│
blank for no TBOPEN) │
│ Row identification:
Current row . :
│
│ By row number . . *
(* = current row)
│
│ Variable Value
(Search for row if row number blank)
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ DBCS column specification:
│
│ Option ===>
│
│ F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS
F5=FIND
│
│ F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 199. Tables Panel (ISPYTPI)

Tables Panel Action Bar
The Tables panel action bar choices function as follows:

338

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

View

Allows you to select whether the Add row, Modify row, and
Display row panels are displayed in pop-up windows. By
displaying the panel in a pop-up window, you can see the panel
underneath and move the window. By displaying the panel as a
full-screen display, you can see more data. The setting you choose
will remain in effect until you change it.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General Tables
2
Definitions
3
Tables Panel
4
Display Row
5
Delete Row
6
Modify Row
7
Add Row
8
Display Structure

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Tables (Option 7.4)
9
10
11
12

Display Status
Usage Notes
View Action Bar
General Dialog Test

Tables Panel Fields
The fields on the Tables panel function as follows:
Table Name

The name of the table in which you are interested. The table must
be open for all, except the Display Status option (6) of the Tables
option (7.4). The table can be opened using the Dialog Services
option (7.6) or can be opened automatically by specifying the Open
tables field WRITE/NOWRITE option.

Open tables

The table must be open for all but the Display Status option (6) of
the Tables option (7.4). Specifying WRITE or NOWRITE will cause
Tables option to automatically open the table in the respective
mode. A blank field directs Tables to bypass the automatic open. If
Tables automatically opens the table, it will be closed automatically
when the Tables option is terminated. This is done with a
TBCLOSE service which will cause any table changes to be
preserved if the table were automatically opened with the WRITE
option.
This field is ignored if the table has been opened outside of the
Tables (7.4) option.

Row identification
Identify a row, either directly by row number or indirectly by
specifying table variable names and their values as search
operands.
Current row

The position number of the current row after you have identified a
table. This field is not modifiable.

By row number
The position number of the table row that you want, or, if you are
adding a row, you can use:
TOP
Makes the new row first in the table.
BOTTOM
Makes the new row last in the table.
Variable

The names of variables whose values are to be used to search the
table for a row with matching contents. You insert them by typing
over the underscores beneath this heading.

Value

The value to be used in the search, up to 54 characters. For an
abbreviated search, type the beginning characters followed by an
asterisk.
You can specify a DBCS value in the form:
¬[DBDBDB]

where:
[ and ] Represent the SO (shift-out) and SI (shift-in) characters,
respectively. For an abbreviated search, type a 2-byte
asterisk (*) at the end of the DBCS value. For example:
¬[DBDB**]

where:
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

339

Tables (Option 7.4)
**

Represents the 2-byte asterisk character.

DBCS column specification
The variable names of the values that are DBCS data. The value of
the variable is displayed using the form:
¬[DBDBDB]

If you type a DBCS value in this format on the Modify Row panel
or the Add Row panel, only the DBCS characters are stored,
regardless of the DBCS column specification.
Option

The number of one of the functions displayed on the Tables panel.
Note: The option names (for example, Display row) are
point-and-shoot fields; however, if an option is already
specified at the Option prompt, it takes precedence over
your point-and-shoot selection.

Once you specify a table name, it is retained until you change it or until you leave
Dialog Test.
For the Display row (1), Delete row (2), Modify row (3), and Add row (4) options
of the Tables option (7.4), you must identify the row you want to display, delete,
modify, or add. To do this, you can specify a row number in the “By row number”
field, or you can use the Variable and Value fields to specify a list of search
operands. To show the current row, leave the asterisk in the “By row number”
field. If you specify both a row number and a search operand, the row number is
used and the search operand is ignored.
The current row pointer in the table can be changed only at your request or by
your dialog.
The list of search operands consists of variable names and values that allow you to
specify the values that specific variables have in a row. You can specify the
complete value, abbreviate the value with an asterisk to find a row containing a
variable beginning with specified characters, or leave the row blank. The search
begins with the row following the current row. If a row matching the search
operand is not found, the current row pointer is set to the top. You can repeat the
search, if necessary.

Tables Panel Options
The following sections describe the options at the top of the Tables panel.

1—Display row
You can use the Display row option to display the contents of an existing row in
an open table. When you select the Display row option, do the following on the
Tables panel:
v Specify the name of a table in the Table Name field. If the table is not open,
specify NOWRITE or WRITE in the “Open tables” field.
v Specify a row number or a search operand list to identify a row.
Note: Use the View action bar choice on the Tables panel to specify whether this
display is to be in a pop-up or full-screen.

340

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Tables (Option 7.4)
When you press Enter, you are shown the table row data on a display that you can
scroll (Figure 200). The pop-up window can also be resized using the RESIZE
command. In the figure, the variables constitute one table row.
┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Display row Table ISPKEYS row 1
Row 1 to 13 of 74 │
│
│
│ Variable T A Value
│
│ KEYLISTN K
ISPTEST
│
│ KEY1DEF
N
HELP
│
│ KEY1LAB
N
Help
│
│ KEY1ATR
N
SHORT
│
│ KEY2DEF
N
SPLIT
│
│ KEY2LAB
N
Split
│
│ KEY2ATR
N
LONG
│
│ KEY3DEF
N
EXIT
│
│ KEY3LAB
N
Exit
│
│ KEY3ATR
N
SHORT
│
│ KEY4DEF
N
│
│ KEY4LAB
N
│
│ KEY4ATR
N
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 200. Display Row Panel (ISPYTPD)

Each line on the display shows:
Variable

Variable name

Type of variable:
K
Key variable.
N
Name variable; non-key.
S
Save (extension) variable.

Attribute of each variable:
T

Value

Truncated to 58 characters for display.

The first 58 characters of the variable value.

Display Row Commands: The Display Row option uses the END and LOCATE
commands described in “Commands” on page 323.

2—Delete row
You can use the Delete row option to remove an existing row from an open table.
When you select the Delete row option, do the following on the Tables panel:
v Specify the name of a table in the Table Name field. If the table is not open,
specify NOWRITE or WRITE in the “Open tables” field.
v Specify a row number or a search operand list to identify a row.
When you press Enter, a panel is displayed (Figure 201 on page 342) to allow you
to confirm the delete request.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

341

Tables (Option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities View Help
│
│ ─ ┌─────────────── Confirm Table Row Delete ────────────────┐ ──────────── │
│ I │ ISPYTPCD
│
│
│ │
│ More:
+ │
│ 1 │ Table name : ISPKEYS
│ ructure
│
│ 2 │
│ atus
│
│ │ Row number : 1
│
│
│ T │
│ r WRITE or
│
│ │
│ no TBOPEN) │
│ R │
Press ENTER key to confirm delete.
│
│
│ B │
│
│
│ │
Press END key to cancel delete.
│ lank)
│
│ │ Command ===>
│
│
│ │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward │
│
│ │ F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
│
│ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
│
│
│
│
│
│ DBCS column specification:
│
│ Option ===> 2
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 201. Confirm Table Row Delete Panel (ISPYTPCD)

The fields on the panel are:
Table name
Name of an open table
Row number Number of the row to be deleted.
Press Enter to delete the row, or enter the END or CANCEL command to cancel
the deletion.

3—Modify row
You can use the Modify row option to change the contents of an existing row of an
open table. When you select the Modify row option, do the following on the Tables
panel:
v Specify the name of a table in the Table Name field. If the table is not open,
specify NOWRITE or WRITE in the “Open tables” field.
v Specify a row number or a search operand list to identify a row.
Note: Use the View action bar choice on the Tables panel to specify whether this
display is to be in a pop-up or full-screen.
When you press Enter, a display that you can scroll (Figure 202 on page 343) is
shown. The pop-up window can also be resized using the RESIZE command.

342

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Tables (Option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Modify row Table ISPKEYS row 1
Row 1 to 10 of 74 │
│
│
│ Modify variable values and savenames. Underscores need not be blanked.
│
│ Enter END command to finalize changes.
│
│
│
│
Variable T A Value
│
│
KEYLISTN K ISPTEST
│
│
KEY1DEF N HELP
│
│
KEY1LAB N Help
│
│
KEY1ATR N SHORT
│
│
KEY2DEF N SPLIT
│
│
KEY2LAB N Split
│
│
KEY2ATR N LONG
│
│
KEY3DEF N EXIT
│
│
KEY3LAB N Exit
│
│
KEY3ATR N SHORT
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 202. Modify Row Panel (ISPYTPM)

Each line on the panel represents a variable in row 6 of the table and contains a
line command field and the following fields:
Variable

Variable name, modifiable only for save variables.

Type of variable, non-modifiable:
K
Key variable.
N
Name variable; non-key.
S
Save (extension) variable.

Attribute of each variable, non-modifiable:
T

Value

Truncated to 2048 characters for display.

Value of the variable, up to 2048 characters.

Type in new values or change the current values for the key, name, and save
variables in the Value column. Enter new save variables by typing over the
underscores in the Name column with the variable names and specifying the
desired values. The underscores are pad characters; you do not need to blank them
out.
When using the Modify row option, be aware of the following:
v If the table has keys, the values for the keys in the added row must be different
from those in the existing rows when you leave the Modify row option.
Otherwise, a message is displayed and the row is displayed again so you can
change the keys.
v If the table was sorted using the TBSORT dialog service and a sort field is
modified, the row’s position in the table can change to preserve the search order.
v You cannot change the variable name for a key variable or name variable; if you
do, an error message is displayed and the original name is restored.
v You cannot delete a key or name variable and its value from the display or table
row.
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

343

Tables (Option 7.4)
v If you delete a save variable, assume that the variable no longer exists in this
row.
v If more than one variable entry has the same name, all instances of that variable
are assigned the value of the last occurrence of the variable; that is, the
occurrence closest to the bottom of a display that you can scroll.
v Blank save names are ignored and do not need to be deleted, even if data is left
in the value.
v Hexadecimal data that usually cannot be displayed is converted to characters
that can be displayed or is typed by using the form:
X’nnnnnnnn’

where:
An integer 0–9 or an alphabetic character A–F. There must be an even
number of characters within the quotation marks.
v Variables defined with the VDEFINE service as non-character are shown in
converted form; do not change them by using the hexadecimal representation. A
format or length error causes a message to be displayed when you use the END
command.
v When you leave the Modify row option by using the END command, the row is
replaced, and the message Row modified is issued.
n

Modify Row Commands: The Modify row option uses the CANCEL, END, and
LOCATE commands, and the D (delete), I (insert), and R (repeat) Dialog Test line
commands described in “Commands” on page 323. Inserted and repeated lines
always have a type of S, because you can add only save variables to a row of an
existing table. also, you can delete only save variables.

4—Add row
You can use the Add row option to add a new row after a selected row of an
opened table. When you select the Add row option, do the following on the Tables
panel:
v Specify the name of a table in the Table Name field. If the table is not open,
specify NOWRITE or WRITE in the “Open tables” field.
v Specify a row number or a search operand list to identify a row.
Note: Use the View action bar choice on the Tables panel to specify whether this
display is to be in a pop-up or full-screen.

344

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Tables (Option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Add row Table ISPKEYS after row 1
Row 1 to 10 of 73 │
│
│
│ Add variable values and savenames. Underscores need not be blanked.
│
│ Enter END command to finalize changes.
│
│
│
│
Variable T A Value
│
│
KEYLISTN K
│
│
KEY1DEF N
│
│
KEY1LAB N
│
│
KEY1ATR N
│
│
KEY2DEF N
│
│
KEY2LAB N
│
│
KEY2ATR N
│
│
KEY3DEF N
│
│
KEY3LAB N
│
│
KEY3ATR N
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 203. Add Row Panel (ISPYTPA)

When you press Enter, a display that you can scroll is shown (Figure 203),
containing all the key and name variables in the table. The pop-up window can
also be resized using the RESIZE command.
Each row of the display contains a line command field and the following fields:
Variable

Variable name.

Type of variable, non-modifiable:
K
Key variable.
N
Name variable; non-key.
S
Save (extension) variable.

Attribute of each variable. This attribute is non-modifiable and is
not used for this option.

Value

Space for the variable value to be added, up to 2048 characters.

Type the values for the key and name variables in the Value column, which is
originally initialized to all nulls. You cannot change the names of the key and
name variables because they were established when the table was created.
You can enter save variables, identified as TYPE S, by typing over the underscores
with the save variable names and specifying the desired values. The underscores
are pad characters; you do not need to blank them out.
You can add a row with no values to the table, but you are asked to confirm such
an action to guard against inadvertent use of the END command.
When using the Add row option, be aware of the following points:
v The position of the new row in the table depends on whether the table was
previously sorted using the TBSORT dialog service. If the table was sorted, the
new row is placed in sort order; if it has not been sorted, the new row is placed
after the row you specified.
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

345

Tables (Option 7.4)
v You cannot delete a key or name variable and its value from the display or table
row.
v You cannot change the variable name for a key or name variable; if you do, an
error message is displayed and the original name is restored.
v If more than one variable entry has the same name, all instances of that variable
are assigned the value of the last occurrence of the variable; that is, the
occurrence closest to the bottom of the display that you can scroll.
v If the table has keys, the values for the keys in the added row must be different
from those in all the existing rows when you leave the Add Row option.
Otherwise, a message is displayed and the row is displayed again so you can
change the keys.
v Blank save names are ignored and do not need to be deleted, even if data is left
in the value.
v Hexadecimal data that usually cannot be displayed is converted to characters
that can be displayed or is typed by using the form:
X’nnnnnnnn’

where:
An integer 0–9 or an alphabetic character A–F. There must be an even
number of characters within the quotation marks.
v Variables defined with the VDEFINE service as non-character are shown in
converted form; do not change them by using the hexadecimal representation. A
format or length error causes an error message to be displayed when you use
the END command.
n

Add Row Commands: The Add row option uses the CANCEL, END, and
LOCATE commands, and the D (delete), I (insert), and R (repeat) Dialog Test line
commands described in “Commands” on page 323. Inserted and repeated lines
always have a type of S because you can add only save variables to a row of an
existing table. Also, you can delete only save variables.

5—Display structure
When you select the Display structure option on the Tables panel, you are shown a
display of the table structure for the table specified in the Table Name field. You
can scroll this display (Figure 204 on page 347) using the scroll commands. The
table name appears in the panel header.

346

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Tables (Option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│ ISPYTPSR
Structure of Table ISPKEYS
Row 1 to 8 of 17 │
│
│
│ Number of keys . . : 1
Number of rows . . . : 7
│
│ Number of names . : 72
Current row pointer . : 1
│
│ KEYS:
KEYLISTN
│
│
│
│ NAMES:
KEY1DEF
KEY1LAB
KEY1ATR
KEY2DEF
KEY2LAB
│
│
KEY2ATR
KEY3DEF
KEY3LAB
KEY3ATR
KEY4DEF
│
│
KEY4LAB
KEY4ATR
KEY5DEF
KEY5LAB
KEY5ATR
│
│
KEY6DEF
KEY6LAB
KEY6ATR
KEY7DEF
KEY7LAB
│
│
KEY7ATR
KEY8DEF
KEY8LAB
KEY8ATR
KEY9DEF
│
│
KEY9LAB
KEY9ATR
KEY10DEF
KEY10LAB
KEY10ATR
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS
F5=FIND
│
│ F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===> 7
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 204. Structure of Table Panel (ISPYTPSR)

The display contains the following fields:
Number of keys

Number of key variables in a row.

Number of names

Number of name variables in a row.

Number of rows

Number of rows currently in the table.

Current row pointer

Current row pointer value.

KEYS

A list of the names of all the key variables.

NAMES

A list of the names of all the name variables.

Display Structure Command: The KEYS and NAMES lists can be scrolled, and
you can use the LOCATE command to find a specific variable name. See “Finding
a Character String” on page 325 for information about its use.

6—Display status
If you select the Display status option from the Tables panel, one of two data
information panels is displayed for the table specified in the Table Name field. The
information reflects all operations using the specified table, including those done at
your request by the Tables options under Dialog Test.
Table Not Open: If the table is not open for your user ID, you are shown a Status
of Table panel (Figure 205 on page 348) with the value NOT OPEN in the “Status
for this screen” field.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

347

Tables (Option 7.4)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Status of Table ISPKEYS
│
│
More:
+ │
│ Status for this screen : NOT OPEN
Date created
: 1995/01/17
│
│ Table available
: YES
Time created
: 13:47:06
│
│
Last date modified : 2002/06/03
│
│
Last time modified : 22:10:26
│
│
Last modified by
: JPHILP
│
│
Original row count : 1
│
│
Current row count : 7
│
│
Modified row count : 7
│
│
Update count
: 83
│
│
│
│
Virtual storage
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===> 7
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 205. Status of Table Panel with Table Not Open (ISPYTPS1)

The panel contains the following fields:

348

Status for this screen

Shows that the table is NOT OPEN for this logical
screen.

Table available

YES or NO; whether you can open the table.

Date created

Date the table was created; shown in national
format.

Time created

Time the table was created.

Last date modified

Date the table was last modified; shown in national
format.

Last time modified

Time the table was last modified.

Last modified by

User ID of the user who last changed the table.

Original row count

The number of rows that were added to a newly
created table before closing the table for the first
time.

Current row count

The number of rows currently in the table.

Modified row count

The number of rows in the table that have been
changed at least once. A row that has been added
to an existing table is also considered a changed
row.

Update count

Number of times the table has been modified. One
or more updates during any table open or close
sequence increments this counter by one.

Virtual storage

The number of bytes of virtual storage required by
the table when it is open.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Tables (Option 7.4)
The Modify row option on the Tables panel allows you to change a key of a keyed
table by adding the new row and deleting the old row. The row counts thus reflect
this processing when changing a key value.
Table Open: If the table is open for your user ID, you are shown a Status of
Table panel (Figure 206) with the value OPEN in the Status for this screen field.
┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Status of Table ISPKEYS
│
│
More:
+ │
│ Status for this screen : OPEN
Date created . . . : 1995/01/17 │
│ Open option . . . . . . : NOWRITE
Time created . . . : 13:47:06
│
│ Table on disk . . . . . : YES
Last date modified. : 2002/06/03 │
│ Last table service . . : TBQUERY
Last time modified. : 22:10:26
│
│ Last service return code: 00
Last modified by . : JPHILP
│
│ Current row pointer . . : TOP
Original row count. : 1
│
│
Current row count . : 7
│
│
Modified row count. : 7
│
│
Update count . . . : 83
│
│
│
│
Virtual storage
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===> 7
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 206. Status of Table Panel with Table Open (ISPYTPS1)

This panel contains the following fields:
Status for this screen
Shows that the table is OPEN for this logical screen.
Open option

Option used to open the table; this value can be WRITE,
NOWRITE, SHR WRITE, or SHR NOWRITE.

Table on disk Whether the table has been saved on disk; this value can be YES or
NO.
Last table service
Name of the last table service called.
Last service return code
Last table services return code.
Current row pointer
Current position in the table.
Date created

Date the table was created; shown in national format.

Time created

Time the table was created.

Last date modified
Date the table was last modified; shown in national format.
Last time modified
Time the table was last modified.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

349

Tables (Option 7.4)
Last modified by
User ID of the user who last changed the table.
Original row count
The number of rows that were added to a newly created table
before closing the table for the first time.
Current row count
The number of rows currently in the table.
Modified row count
The number of rows in the table that have been changed at least
once. A row that has been added to an existing table is also
considered a changed row.
Update count Number of times the table has been modified. One or more
updates during any table open or close sequence increments this
counter by one.
Virtual storage
The number of bytes of virtual storage required by the table.
The Modify row option on the Tables panel allows you to change a key of a keyed
table by adding the new row and deleting the old row. The row counts thus reflect
this processing when changing a key value.

Log (Option 7.5)
The Log option (7.5) allows you to display and browse data recorded in the ISPF
transaction log, as shown in Figure 207.
Browse log - USERID.SPFLOG2.LIST
Line 00000000 Col 007 086
********************************* Top of Data **********************************
Time
*** ISPF transaction log ***
Userid:
09:03 Start of ISPF Log - - 10:15
TSO
- Command 10:37 ***** Dialog Error *****
10:37
Line from panel:
10:37
Panel ’ISPYLP1’ error
********************************

Command ===>
F1=HELP
F2=
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT

- Session # 16 -------------------------------- SUBMIT NOTIFY
- Application(ISR); Function Module (ISR@USER);
- )BODY EXPAND(//) WIDTH(&ZWIDTH) CMD(ZCMD)
- Invalid WIDTH value, (must be numeric chars,
Bottom of Data ********************************

F3=END
F11=RIGHT

F4=DATASETS F5=FIND
F12=SUBMIT

Scroll ===> PAGE
F6=CHANGE

Figure 207. ISPF Transaction Log (ISPYLP1)

You can use all the Browse commands, except BROWSE, while looking at the ISPF
log.

350

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Log (Option 7.5)

ISPF Transaction Log Not Available
Sometimes the log is not available for browsing. This can occur when:
v The log data set is empty.
v The log data set was not created for this session because 0 was entered in the
“Primary pages” field on the Log Set Defaults and List Set Defaults pop-ups,
which can be reached by selecting Option 0 from the ISPF Primary Option Menu
and then selecting the Log Data set defaults and List Data set defaults choices
from the Log/List pull-down.
v No data has been written to the log during this session, and although the log
data set exists and is not empty, you did not end the last ISPF session normally;
for example, an abend can have ended the session. You can browse the log if
you take an action that causes a log entry to be written.
v The log data set was previously allocated with a disposition of OLD. It must be
allocated with a disposition of MOD.
v The log data set has been previously allocated to SYSOUT.

Trace Output in ISPF Log
The following trace output is written to the ISPF log:
v Trace header entries
v Function trace entries
v Variable trace entries.
Each type of entry follows the format of other log entries: a short summary on the
left, and a detailed entry on the right.

Trace Header Entries
The first line of trace data is a trace header that identifies the trace and shows the
current application ID, the current function, and the current screen. For split-screen
mode, the original screen is 1 and the screen generated by the SPLIT command is
2. The summary section of the header entry identifies the entry as a dialog trace.
The trace header entry is written during the test session whenever a function or
variable trace entry is to be written for an application, function, or screen that
differs from the last.
For example, a trace of logical screen 1 of function TESTF1 in application ISR
would place the following line in the ISPF log:
DIALOG TRACE ---- - APPLICATION(ISR) FUNCTION(TESTF1) SCREEN(1)

Function Trace Entries
A pair of function trace entries, a BEGIN entry and an END entry, is generated
during a function trace for each traced dialog service that is called. A service can
be called from a user dialog that is currently processing, or from a Dialog Test
action for the user. The summary portion of each of these entries shows the name
of the dialog service, whether it is the beginning or the end of its processing, and
whether it was called indirectly from a Dialog Test panel. If the word TEST does
not appear, the user dialog called the service directly. For END entries, the service
return code is shown on a second line.
The detailed section of the log entries contains an image of the service call and the
parameters used to call that service, using two lines if necessary. For example:
DISPLAY
.. BEGIN ... TEST - DISPLAY PANEL(XYZ)
.
.
.
DISPLAY .. END.. ... TEST - DISPLAY PANEL(XYZ)
..RETURN CODE (0)
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

351

Log (Option 7.5)
There can be many log entries between the begin and end entries. For example,
any active variable traces can cause log entries during a SELECT trace.
You should note the following about the service call image:
v The image is truncated after the second line.
v ISPEXEC calls are shown as typed in the dialog.
v ISPLINK and ISPLNK calls (except for the ISREDIT service) are displayed with
their parameter values separated by commas. Name-lists are shown as typed in
the dialog, in either string or structure format. Structure format includes the
count, element length, and list of names. For a variable services parameter
whose context is defined by the name-list parameter on the service call, the first
four bytes of the parameter value are displayed in hexadecimal format
(X’nnnnnnnn’).
v Dialog Test calls are shown using the command call format without the
ISPEXEC prefix.

Variable Trace Entries
Two variable trace entry lines are generated for each variable trace log entry. The
variable can be referred to or set by a user dialog directly or indirectly by a dialog
service, or explicitly set by a Dialog Test option for a user. The summary parts of
these entry lines identify the trace. Line one shows the name of the variable, the
pool that contains it (F for function, S for shared, P for profile), and an indicator
(TEST) if a Dialog Test option set the value. Line two shows the operation done for
the variable (GET, PUT, or CHG) and the name of the dialog service that did the
operation for non-TEST entries.
The current value of the variable is printed in the detail section of the log entry
and can span two lines. For example:
LIB1.... POOL(P) .... - VALUE(FLAG)
...GET by EDIT
-

The value is truncated after the second line.
If the variable value contains characters that cannot be displayed, the value is
displayed in hexadecimal format (X’nnnnnnnn’).

Dialog Services (Option 7.6)
The Dialog Services option (7.6) allows you to call a dialog service by entering the
service call with or without the ISPEXEC characters.
Figure 208 on page 353 shows the Invoke Dialog Service panel.

352

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Dialog Services (Option 7.6)

Menu List Mode Functions Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Invoke Dialog Service
Enter dialog service and its parameters:
===>
Place cursor on choice and press enter to RETRIEVE command.
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>

rempop
addpop
ispexec display
ispexec display panel(sample)

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F7=Backward F8=Forward

F3=Exit
F9=Swap

F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F6=Resize

Figure 208. Invoke Dialog Service Panel (ISPYS1)

On this panel, if you want to display panel XYZ, enter:
===> DISPLAY PANEL(XYZ)

or
===> ISPEXEC DISPLAY PANEL(XYZ)

The service is called when you press the Enter key. You are informed of the
service’s completion and return code.
You can call any dialog service that is valid in the command environment except
CONTROL at a breakpoint or before calling a function.
The Invoke Dialog Service panel has a saved command area (the bottom portion of
the screen) that contains a list of up to 10 commands that you have saved. These
commands are point-and-shoot fields. The mode you specify from the Mode
pull-down menu on the action bar determines what happens when you select a
command.

Invoke Dialog Service Panel Action Bar
The Invoke Dialog Service panel action bar choices function as follows:
Note: The Invoke Dialog Service panel action bar contains three pull-down choices
that let you control the saved command area.
v List
v Mode
v Functions.
Menu For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
List

The List pull-down offers you the following choices:

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

353

Dialog Services (Option 7.6)
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it is
displayed in blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of
the selection number (if you are running in GUI mode, the choice
will be grayed).
Update On

Makes the list of commands in the saved command area
live; that is, new commands are appended to the list
automatically.

Update Off

Makes the list of commands in the saved command area
static; that is, new commands are not appended to the list
automatically.

Allows commands to be retrieved from the saved
command area and placed on the TSO Command Entry
field (==>) so that you can edit them before they are
executed. This mode is the default.

Execute

Allows commands to be retrieved from the saved
command area and executed in one step.

Delete

Allows you to delete commands from the saved command
area without executing the commands. Place the cursor on
the command to be deleted and press Enter. The command
will be blanked out.

Functions
The Functions pull-down offers you the following choice:
Note: The choice is unavailable when you initially enter the panel and
after you compress the list; that is, it will display in blue (the
default) with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number (if
you are running in GUI mode, the choice will be grayed).
Compress List Compresses the saved command area by removing deleted
entries.
Utilities
For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar Choice in
the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.
Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
General Dialog Test

Special Display Panel
If you issue the DISPLAY service call with only a message parameter, or with no
parameter at all, the Special Display Panel is shown (Figure 209 on page 355).

354

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Traces (Option 7.7)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│
Special Display Panel
│
│
│
│ This panel is used for two special DISPLAY conditions:
│
│
│
│ 1. When DISPLAY is invoked without a panel name.
│
│
│
│ 2. When TBDISPL is invoked without a panel name. All of the other
│
│
parameters are ignored.
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 209. Special Display Panel (ISPYS2)

Traces (Option 7.7)
The Traces option (7.7) allows you to define, change, and delete trace
specifications. You can trace processed dialog services, except for the VPUT or
VGET service issued from a panel, and dialog variables to which are referred
during dialog processing. Trace data is placed in the transaction log, where you
can browse it by using the Log option (7.5) or print it when you leave ISPF. You
can also print the log data set during an ISPF session by using the ISPF LOG
command.
Since tracing can degrade dialog performance and create large amounts of output,
you should be careful in setting the scope of trace definitions.
When you select this option, a selection panel is displayed (Figure 210 on page
356) on which you can show the type of trace you want to define.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

355

Traces (Option 7.7)

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
─ ┌──────────────────────── Dialog Test ─────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
0 │
Traces
│
1 │
│
2 │ 1 Function Traces Monitor dialog service calls
│
3 │ 2 Variable Traces Monitor dialog variable usage
│
4 │
│
5 │ Option ===>
│
6 │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
│
7 │ F5=Rfind
F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
9 └──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
10 SCLM
SW Configuration Library Manager
MVS acct.
11 Workplace
ISPF Object/Action Workplace
Release .
12 OS/390 System OS/390 system programmer applications
13 OS/390 User OS/390 user applications
14 IBMGSA
IBMGSA Development and Service Apps
P PDF Tools
PDF development tools
S SDSF
Spool Display and Search Facility
Option ===> 7
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

───────────
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

SUEBURN
11:00
3278
1
ENGLISH
ISR
ISPF
SUEBURN
MVS8
IBMGSA
ISPF 5.5

F9=Swap

Figure 210. Traces Panel (ISPYRI1)

The following sections describe the options shown at the top of the Traces panel.

1—Function Traces
The Function Traces option on the Traces panel is used to establish criteria for
recording the names of dialog service calls, the service parameters, and return code
in the ISPF log. If either a dialog or Dialog Test processing causes a service call,
that call is recorded in the trace. An example of Dialog Test processing that causes
a service call is the use of the Panels option (7.2) to display a panel. Whenever a
new application or function causes data to be recorded, a header is placed in the
trace.
When you select the Function Traces option, you are shown a panel that you can
scroll (Figure 211 on page 357). The pop-up window can also be resized using the
RESIZE command. The panel lists all currently defined function traces.
You can add, delete, and change function trace definitions by using this panel,
either before calling a function or at a breakpoint.

356

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Traces (Option 7.7)

┌────────────────────────────── Function Traces ──────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Row 1 to 7 of 13 │
│
│
│ Add, delete, and change traces. Underscores need not be blanked.
│
│ Enter END command to finalize changes.
│
│
│
│
Function
Active
Dialog services to be traced
│
│
(Required) (YES,NO)
(No entry=all)
│
│
(No entry=YES) ("OR" is assumed between names)
│
│
│
│
ALL
NO
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 211. Function Traces Panel (ISPYRFP)

Each line defines a function trace, showing a line command area and the following
fields:
Function
The name of the user function that should contain the trace, or ALL to
trace every dialog function. Initially, ALL is presented on the display but is
not started. Change the NO to a YES in the Active column to start such a
trace. If you want to trace a function whose name is ALL, enclose the
name in single quotes to distinguish it; that is, type ’ALL’, not ALL.
Active Whether the trace is to be active now:
YES
The trace is currently active.
NO
The trace is currently not active.
Blank The trace is currently active.
Dialog services to be traced
Names of dialog services to be traced. No entry in this field shows all calls
to dialog services for the function are to be traced.
All function traces exist until you leave Dialog Test, or until you delete them from
this panel. Enter new information by typing over the existing data. The
underscores are pad characters to show the starting and ending positions for each
field; you do not need to blank them out. You can create several function traces
before you press the Enter key.
During dialog processing, to determine whether the criteria for a function trace
have been met, Dialog Test processes a logical AND of the Function, Active, and
Dialog services fields specified for that function trace. Dialog Test also processes a
logical OR within the Dialog services field to determine whether a particular
dialog service has been matched. Therefore, if you want more than one trace for a
function, you should create multiple rows.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

357

Traces (Option 7.7)

Function Traces Commands
The Function Traces option uses the CANCEL, END, and LOCATE commands, and
the D (delete), I (insert), and R (repeat) Dialog Test line commands described in
“Commands” on page 323.

2—Variable Traces
The Variable Traces option on the Traces panel is used to establish criteria for
recording variable usage. A variable’s usage is recorded if an ISPF service is
directly asked to operate on the variable (such as VGET, VPUT, and VCOPY), or if
an ISPF service is indirectly asked to operate on the variable (such as DISPLAY).
Variables changed under the Variables option (7.3) are also recorded if the trace
specifications are met.
When you select the Variable Traces option, you are shown a display that you can
scroll (Figure 212). The pop-up window can also be resized using the RESIZE
command. The display lists all currently defined variable traces. You can add,
delete, and change variable trace definitions at a breakpoint, or by using this panel
before calling a function.
┌────────────────────────────── Variable Traces ──────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Row 1 to 8 of 13 │
│
│
│ Add, delete, and change traces. Underscores need not be blanked.
│
│ Enter END command to finalize changes.
│
│
│
│
Variable
Pool
Operation
Function
Active
│
│
(Required) (No entry=all) (GET,PUT,CHG) (No entry=all) (YES,NO)
│
│
(No entry=all)
(No entry=YES) │
│
ALL
NO
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 212. Variable Traces Panel (ISPYRVP)

Each line defines a variable trace, showing a line command area and the following
fields:

358

Variable

Name of the variable to be traced, or ALL to show tracing of all
variables. Initially, ALL is presented on the display but is not
started. Change the NO in the Active column to YES to start such a
trace. If you want to trace a variable whose name is ALL, enclose
that name in single quotes to distinguish it; that is, type ’ALL’, not
ALL.

Pool

Pool of interest for variable tracing:
F
Function variable pool.
S
Shared variable pool.
P
Profile variable pool.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Traces (Option 7.7)
Blank All pools.
Operation

Type of variable reference to trace:
GET Accesses to the variable’s value.
PUT
Stores to the variable’s value.
CHG Changes to the variable’s value.
Blank All references to variable are traced.

Function

If there is no entry, this variable is traced for all functions.

Active

Indication of whether the trace is to be active:
YES
The trace is currently active.
NO
The trace is currently not active.
Blank The trace is currently active.

All variable trace definitions exist until you leave Dialog Test, or until you delete
them from this panel. Enter new information by typing over the existing data. The
underscores are pad characters to show the start and end of each field; you do not
need to blank them out. You can create several variable traces before you press the
Enter key.
During dialog processing, to determine whether the criteria for a variable trace
have been met, Dialog Test processes a logical AND of the Variable, Pool,
Operation, Function, and Active fields specified for that variable trace. Therefore, if
you want more than one trace for a variable, you should create multiple rows.

Variable Traces Commands
The Variable Traces option uses the CANCEL, END, and LOCATE commands, and
the D (delete), I (insert), and R (repeat) Dialog Test line commands described in
“Commands” on page 323.

Breakpoints (Option 7.8)
A breakpoint is a location at which the processing of your dialog is suspended so
that you can use Dialog Test facilities. The Breakpoints option (7.8) allows you to
show where such temporary suspensions should occur. At a breakpoint, you can
examine and manipulate dialog data such as tables and variables. You can also
specify new test conditions, such as traces and other breakpoints.
Breakpoints are located immediately before a dialog service receives control or
after it relinquishes control. Breakpoint definitions cause special handling within
the ISPLINK, ISPLNK, or ISPEXEC interfaces to dialog services; no user dialog
code is modified. When the criteria for a breakpoint are satisfied, your dialog is
suspended. You can then do any of the functions shown on the Breakpoint Primary
Option Panel. You cannot use as a breakpoint the VPUT or VGET service issued
from a panel, nor will breakpoints occur for selections from a menu (selection)
panel. Breakpoints occur only for dialog service calls that use the ISPLINK,
ISPLNK, or ISPEXEC interfaces.
Along with several menu bar items common across ISPF Version 4.1, the
Breakpoints panel has added the Qualify pull-down. You can now display the
qualification parameter values from the Breakpoints panel in two ways:
v Enter the QUAL primary command
v Select the Qualifications choice from the Qualify pull-down.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

359

Breakpoints (Option 7.8)
The Function and Active columns are overlaid with a column of data titled
Qualification Parameter Values; this column was logically off the screen to the right
of the first Breakpoints panel. To resume the format of the Breakpoints panel, you
can do one of the following:
v Enter the RESUME primary command
v Select the Breakpoints choice from the Qualify pull-down.

Specifying Breakpoints
When you select the Breakpoints option, you are shown a display that you can
scroll (Figure 213). The pop-up window can also be resized using the RESIZE
command. The display lists all currently defined breakpoints for this session. You
can use this panel to add, delete, or change breakpoint definitions, either before
calling a function or at a breakpoint.
┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Qualify Utilities Help
│
│ ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Breakpoints
Row 1 to 5 of 13 │
│
│
│ Add, delete, and change breakpoints. Underscores need not be blanked.
│
│ Enter END command to finalize changes.
│
│
│
│
Service
When
Function
Active
│
│
(Required) (BEFORE,AFTER,Rnn) (No entry=all)
(YES,NO)
│
│
(No entry=all)
(No entry=YES)
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 213. Breakpoints Panel (ISPYBP1)

Breakpoints Panel Action Bar
The Breakpoints panel action bar choices function as follows:

360

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Qualify

Displays the Qualification parameter values field on the
Breakpoints panel so that you can further constrain the conditions
under which a breakpoint is to occur.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Help

The Help pull-down offers you the following choices:
1
General
2
Definitions
3
Breakpoints Panel

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Breakpoints (Option 7.8)
4
5
6
7
8

Qualification Panel
Line Commands
Primary Commands
Usage Notes
General Dialog Test

Breakpoints Panel Fields
Each line defines a breakpoint and includes a line command area and the
following fields:
Service

Name of the dialog service at which to interrupt dialog processing.
This field is required.

When

Indication of when the breakpoint should occur:
BEFORE

Before the service receives control.

AFTER

After the service finishes processing.

Rnn

After the service finishes processing, but only if the
return code is the integer nn.

Blank

Before and after service processing.

Function

The program function or command function that must be
processing for the breakpoint to be taken. No entry in this field
shows that the breakpoint can occur for all functions.

Active

Indication of whether the breakpoint is to be active now:
YES
It is currently active.
NO
It is currently not active.
Blank It is currently active.

*QUAL*

If present at the end of a row, shows that qualification data exists
for the breakpoint. This field is non-modifiable. See “Qualification
Parameter Values” for additional information.

All input fields contain underscores. Empty lines are added to the first display to
fill up the screen. If you delete all the lines used for defining breakpoints, the
display is automatically refreshed with enough empty lines to fill the screen again.
All breakpoints exist until you end or cancel your Dialog Test session, or until you
delete them from this panel. Enter new information by typing over the existing
data. The underscores are pad characters to show the starting and ending positions
for each field; you do not need to blank them out. You can create several
breakpoints before you press the Enter key.

Breakpoints Commands
From the Breakpoints panel, you can use the CANCEL, END, LOCATE, QUAL,
and RESUME commands, and the D (delete), I (insert), and R (repeat) Dialog Test
line commands described in “Commands” on page 323.

Qualification Parameter Values
A different part of the Breakpoints panel allows you to further constrain the
conditions under which a breakpoint is to occur by entering qualification
parameter values. On this part of the panel, you can list parameter data with
which the named service must have been called.
The Breakpoints panel with the Qualification parameter values field is displayed
(Figure 214 on page 362) if you enter the QUAL primary command on the first part
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

361

Breakpoints (Option 7.8)
of the Breakpoints panel or if you select the Qualifications choice from the Qualify
pull-down. The Function and Active columns are overlaid with a column of data
titled Qualification parameter values; this column was logically off the screen to
the right of the first Breakpoints panel. To resume the format of the Breakpoints
panel, use the RESUME primary command or select the Breakpoints choice from
the Qualify pull-down.
┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Qualify Utilities Help
│
│ ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Breakpoints
Row 1 to 5 of 13 │
│
│
│ Add, delete, and change breakpoints. Underscores need not be blanked.
│
│ Enter END command to finalize changes.
│
│
│
│
Service
When
Qualification parameter values │
│
(Required) (BEFORE,AFTER,Rnn)
(No entry=none)
│
│
(No entry=all)
("AND" is assumed between values) │
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Expand
F5=Rfind
│
│ F6=Resize
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
F10=Actions
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
Figure 214. Breakpoints Panel with Qualification Parameter Values (ISPYBP2)

The lines on the Breakpoints panel with qualification parameter values correspond
to the lines on the first Breakpoints panel; “Specifying Breakpoints” on page 360
describes the Service and When fields. In the Qualification parameter values field,
you can enter any combination of the following for all services except SELECT:
v One or more parameter values, separated by blanks, that the dialog passes to the
service. No order is implied by the specification of the parameter values.
For example, if you want a breakpoint to occur when message ABC0001 is
included on a DISPLAY service request, specify ABC0001. If the breakpoint
should occur only when message ABC0001 and panel XYZ are both included,
specify ABC0001 XYZ.
v One or more command call keywords, separated by blanks, that have values that
are not blank when a dialog calls the service. For ISPLINK or ISPLNK calls, the
keywords matching the calling sequence parameter positions are used.
For example, if you want a breakpoint to occur whenever the DISPLAY service
is called with a message, then specify MSG.
For ISPF’s SELECT and ISREDIT services, you can enter one or more parameter
strings that would be entered on these two service calls. A parameter string is a
series of characters delimited by a blank, a comma, a single quotation mark, or a
left or right parenthesis.
For example, if a SELECT call is:
SELECT PGM(ABC) PARM(1 2 3 5 ’6’),

362

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Breakpoints (Option 7.8)
then all or any of the following strings can be used: SELECT, PGM, ABC, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6.
For a breakpoint to be taken, all qualification data listed must be matched.
All line commands and change capabilities are still available on the Breakpoints
panel with qualification parameter values.
During dialog processing, to determine whether the criteria for a breakpoint have
been met, Dialog Test processes a logical AND of the Service, When, Function,
Active, and Qualification fields specified for that breakpoint. Therefore, if you
want more than one breakpoint for an ISPF service, you should create multiple
rows.
When you use the Breakpoints option (7.8), be aware of the following items:
Qualification
If you plan to qualify several breakpoints, it can be more efficient to
specify all breakpoint data on the Breakpoints panel with qualification
parameter values.
END command
You can use the END primary command from either the first Breakpoints
panel or the Breakpoints panel with qualification parameter values.
Input errors
You must correct input errors before leaving any display using the END,
QUAL, or RESUME command. You can use the CANCEL command to end
the Breakpoints option, even if input errors remain on the display.
Syntax checking
A dialog service call must pass a basic syntax check before a breakpoint is
honored.
Control display
If any CONTROL service settings for DISPLAY LINE or DISPLAY SM
(Session Manager) were in effect before the breakpoint, such settings are
lost.

Finding a Breakpoint
If you call a dialog function or selection panel and find a breakpoint, the
Breakpoint Primary Option Panel is displayed. Figure 215 on page 364 shows this
selection panel at a breakpoint just after the ISPF DISPLAY service was called
while processing the TEST function in application PAY.

Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

363

Breakpoints (Option 7.8)

┌──────────────────────────────── Dialog Test ────────────────────────────────┐
│ Menu Utilities Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
Breakpoint Primary Option Panel - BEFORE VDEFINE End of field │
│
│
│ 1 Functions
Invoke dialog functions/selection panel
│
│ 2 Panels
Display panels
│
│ 3 Variables
Display/set variable information
│
│ 4 Tables
Display/modify table information
│
│ 5 Log
Browse ISPF log
│
│ 6 Dialog Services Invoke dialog services
│
│ 7 Traces
Specify trace definitions
│
│ 8 Breakpoints
Specify breakpoint definitions
│
│ T Tutorial
Display information about Dialog Test
│
│ G Go
Continue execution from breakpoint
│
│ C Cancel
Cancel dialog testing
│
│
│
│ Current status:
│
│ Application . : PAY
Function . : TEST
Return Code . . 8
│
│ Breakpoint:
│
│ FVR96 ISPFVR97 ISPFVR98 ISPFVR99 ISPFVR00,X’C1C2C3C4’,X’C3C8C1D9’,4,LIST ) │
│ <
│
│ Option ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE │
│ F1=HELP
F2=
F3=END
F4=DATASETS
F5=FIND
│
│ F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP
F10=LEFT
F11=RIGHT
F12=SUBMIT
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 215. Breakpoint Primary Option Panel (ISPYXM1)

Like the Dialog Test Primary Option Panel, the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel
allows you to use the RETURN command from any one of the selected test options
to display the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel again. At the Breakpoint Primary
Option Panel, the END and RETURN commands have no effect. You must use the
Go option (G) to end processing at this breakpoint and continue processing the
dialog being tested, or the Cancel option (C) to cancel the Dialog Test option (7).
This protects against inadvertent loss of data.
The Breakpoint Primary Option Panel contains all the options of the Dialog Test
Primary Option Panel except Exit (7.x) and, as such, presents all but one of the
Dialog Test functions to you.
This panel also contains two options not shown on the Dialog Test Primary Option
Panel: Go (G) and Cancel (C). When a breakpoint occurs, these options allow you
to continue processing or stop processing, respectively:
G

The Go option continues dialog processing from a breakpoint. The user
dialog resumes processing from the point at which it was suspended.

The Cancel option ends dialog testing and displays the first primary option
panel you displayed at the beginning of your ISPF session again. All trace
and breakpoint definitions are lost when you leave Dialog Test.

When a user dialog finds a breakpoint, the current dialog environment is saved.
When you select the Go option, the environment is restored, except for the
following:
v If you change variable, table, and file tailoring data at a breakpoint, these actions
are an extension of the suspended dialog; it is as though the dialog had taken all
the actions itself during processing.

364

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Breakpoints (Option 7.8)
v If you change the service return code on the Breakpoint Primary Option Panel,
the new return code is passed back to the dialog as though the service had set
the new return code itself.
v If you process the PANELID command at the breakpoint, the last setting for
displaying panel identifiers is retained.
v If any CONTROL service settings for DISPLAY LINE or DISPLAY SM (Session
Manager) were in effect before the breakpoint, such settings are lost.
Note that the manipulation of one dialog part can cause a change to another dialog
part. For example, if a panel is displayed, variables can be set.
All trace and breakpoint definitions are lost if you select the Cancel option.
The Breakpoint Primary Option Panel also displays the following information:
AFTER or BEFORE
An indication of whether the dialog has been suspended after or before the
service has processed.
Service Name
The name of the service at which the dialog has been suspended. In
Figure 215 on page 364, the service name is DISPLAY.
Current status:
The application’s current status when the breakpoint occurred. The
following fields show this status:
Application
The application identifier of the suspended user dialog.
Function
The program or command name of the suspended user dialog.
Return code
The dialog service return code. This field is displayed only if the
breakpoint occurs after the dialog service has processed. The
Return code field is modifiable; its value is passed back to the
dialog (as the service’s) when you select the Go option. This helps
test dialog error handling.
Breakpoint
One scrollable line showing an image of the dialog service call.
Place the cursor over the image and use LEFT, RIGHT, and
EXPAND functions to scroll the area. < and > appear below the
line to indicate in which direction more data may be available. A
maximum of 2048 characters may be displayed.
ISPEXEC calls are shown as typed.
ISPLINK (ISPLNK) calls are displayed with their parameter values
separated by commas. Name-lists are shown as typed in the dialog,
in string format or in structure format. Structure format includes
the count, element length, and list of names. For variable services
parameters whose context is defined by the name-list parameter on
the service call (for example, the variable value areas for a
VDEFINE), the first four bytes of the parameter value are
displayed in hexadecimal format (X’nnnnnnnn’).
ISPEXEC calls from a program are the same as ISPEXEC calls from
a command except that ISPEXEC is not displayed.
Chapter 9. Dialog Test (Option 7)

365

Tutorial (Option 7.T)

Tutorial (Option 7.T)
The Tutorial option (7.T) allows you to display information about the Dialog Test
facilities. Figure 216 shows the first panel displayed when you select the Tutorial
option.
Tutorial ------------------- Dialog Test Tutorial ------------------- Tutorial
────────────────────────────
│
ISPF Dialog Test
│
────────────────────────────
This tutorial provides information about the features and operation of Dialog
Test.
The Dialog Test tutorial consists of two parts: one describes the Dialog Test
option, as selected from the ISPF Primary Option Panel, and the other
describes the Dialog Test facilities available when a user dialog encounters a
"breakpoint" in its processing.
Beginning users should review the Dialog Test Option topic first.
The following topics are presented in sequence, or can be selected by number:
1 - Dialog Test Option
2 - At A User Dialog Breakpoint
------ Cur panel = ISP70000 Prev panel = ISPYXD1 Last msg = ISPYP014 -----Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F4=Resize
F5=Exhelp
F6=Keyshelp
F7=PrvTopic F8=NxtTopic F9=Swap
F10=PrvPage F11=NxtPage F12=Cancel
Figure 216. Dialog Test Tutorial - First Panel (ISP70000)

The default function key command assignments for a terminal with 12 function
keys are shown at the bottom of the screen if you enter the PFSHOW command.

Exit (Option 7.X)
The Exit option (7.X) ends your Dialog Test session. All trace and breakpoint
definitions are lost.

366

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 10. IBM Products (Option 9)
Option 9 provides an interface to other IBM program development products. It
displays a panel that lists other IBM products that are supported as ISPF dialogs,
as shown in Figure 217.
Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│
Additional IBM Program Development Products
│
│ Option ===>
│
│
│
│ 3 INFOMAN Tivoli Information Management for z/OS
│
│ 4 COBOL/SF COBOL Structuring Facility
│
│ 6 SDF II
Screen Definition Facility II - Editors and Utilities
│
│ 7 SDF II-P Screen Definition Facility II - Prototype
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions
F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 217. Additional IBM Program Development Products Panel (ISRDIIS)

When you select one of these products, ISPF tries to call it. However, the only way
ISPF can determine whether a product is installed and available is to check for the
existence of a single product-related panel in the panel library concatenation. No
other check is made to ensure that the product is correctly installed or that it is
completely available to you.
If the product is not installed or is unavailable, ISPF displays an informational
panel that describes the product and shows how to obtain more information.
The names of the products on this panel are point-and-shoot fields. For more
information on point-and-shoot fields, see the ISPF User Interface chapter in the
z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I.

367

368

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 11. SCLM (Option 10)
Option 10 gives you access to the Software Configuration and Library Manager
(SCLM), which is an extension of the ISPF library concept. You call SCLM
functions by entering one of the options shown on the panel in Figure 218.
If SCLM does not appear on any of your menu panels or on the Menu pull-down,
enter TSO SCLM on any ISPF command line. If SCLM is available to your terminal
session, the SCLM Main Menu is displayed.
For more information about SCLM, refer to the ISPF SCLM manuals.
Menu Utilities Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SCLM Main Menu
Enter option
Enter one of the following options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
6A
7
X

View
Edit
Utilities
Build
Promote
Command
Easy Cmds
Sample
Exit

SCLM Project
Project .
Alternate
Group . .

ISPF View or Browse data
Create or change source data in SCLM databases
Perform SCLM database utility/reporting functions
Construct SCLM-controlled components
Move components into SCLM hierarchy
Enter TSO or SCLM commands
Easy SCLM commands via prompts
Create or delete sample SCLM project
Terminate SCLM

Control Information:
. . .
(Project high-level qualifier)
. . .
(Project definition: defaults to project)
. . .
(Defaults to TSO prefix)

Option ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 218. SCLM Main Menu (FLMDMN)

The option names on this panel are point-and-shoot fields. See the Point-and-Shoot
Text Fields section of the ISPF User Interface chapter in the z/OS ISPF User’s Guide
Vol I for more information.

SCLM Main Menu Action Bar
The SCLM Main Menu panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu

For more information, see the section on the Menu Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

Utilities

For more information, see the section on the Utilities Action Bar
Choice in the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I.

369

SCLM (Option 10)
Help

The Help pull-down provides general information about SCLM
topics as well as information about each available choice on the
SCLM Main Menu.

SCLM Overview
SCLM is a library facility that supports projects in developing complex software
applications. It does this by providing software configuration and library
management support. SCLM supports the software development cycle of an
application from the program design phase to release of the final product.
SCLM allows designers and programmers to define the architecture of an
application (how the components fit together) and ensures that the architecture
definition is followed by automatically controlling, maintaining, and tracking
software components. By automatically enforcing guidelines and procedures for
developing software, SCLM enhances software quality and improves programmer
productivity. For complete information on using SCLM, refer to z/OS ISPF Software
Configuration and Library Manager Project Manager’s and Developer’s Guide.
SCLM addresses the following software configuration and library management
issues:
v Ensures that two programmers are not working on the same component at the
same time.
v Allows users to integrate components only at the correct time and only by using
the correct procedure.
v Logs and tracks software changes.
v Provides application integrity; all of the software components used to produce
the final product are available, but controlled.
v Documents the interfaces between the software components.
SCLM provides the following facilities for automating software configuration and
library management tasks:
Project Definition

Establishes the database.

Edit

Uses the ISPF editor to create and modify the
software components.

Build

Integrates the software components.

Promote

Moves software components through the library
hierarchy.

Utilities

Maintain the database.

Reports

Generate information about the build and promote
activities, and about the contents of the database.

Interactive dialogs, batch interfaces, and callable services provide access to the
functions and capabilities of SCLM. These functions support the routine use of
SCLM by:
v Allowing programmers to use the ISPF editor to create and modify software
components
v Providing automated draw down and lockout functions without requiring
special customizing to suit a particular installation.

370

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)
Option 11 gives you access to the ISPF Object/Action Workplace. The Workplace
combines many of the ISPF functions onto one object-action interface. The idea of
object-action is to specify an object (such as an ISPF library, data set name, or
workstation file) and then specify an action to perform upon it. You can specify any
of the following objects:
v An ISPF Library—a cataloged partitioned data set (PDS) with a three-level data
set name in the project.group.type format.
v A partitioned or sequential data set.
v A VSAM data set for use with the data set actions allocate, delete, or
information.
v A DSLIST level for data set list actions, for example, ’YOURID.*’ for all data sets
beginning with YOURID.
v A workstation file name for use with the actions edit or view.
v A volume serial number for uncataloged data sets to use with actions to retrieve
volume information, print volume information, build a DSLIST based on a
volume serial number, or as a filter for a DSLIST level.
v Personal data set lists or reference lists for use with action DL (DSLIST) only.
Additionally, Workplace provides ISPF Referral list fields to enable object selection
through retrieval from personal lists (pre-packaged lists of data sets which you
create) or reference lists (lists of recently referenced data sets which ISPF creates).
You can select an action by making a choice on an action bar or by using a
command. Eighty-five ISPF functions are available as workplace actions.
There is a fast path system command for starting the Workplace. Type ISPFWORK
on any ISPF command line and you are taken to the Workplace entry panel.
You can display the Workplace in GUI mode as well as standard mode. See
“Workstation Connection” on page 66 for information about how to start GUI
mode for ISPF. All of the screens that appear in this chapter are shown in their
standard mode.

Selecting Objects
The first step in using the Workplace to perform ISPF functions is to specify the
particular object that you want to perform an action on, for example, a sequential
data set ’YOURID.SOURCE.DATA’. Object specification takes place on the
Workplace entry panel.

Workplace Entry Panel
When you first enter the Workplace, the entry panel that appears is called ISPF
Workplace. It is possible to display this panel in two distinct modes, called views:
the Library View or the Data Set View.
The Library View panel has the words “Library View” as a heading just above the
referral lists in the lower portion of the screen. This view enables you to work with
ISPF library concatenations and library lists.
The Data Set View panel has the words “Data Set View” as a heading just above
the referral lists in the lower portion of the screen. This view enables you to work
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2005

371

Workplace (Option 11)
with data set lists, sequential files, or single partitioned data sets. You can choose
to work with either entry panel view by using the command LISTVIEW, or the
function key ChgView (F11) to toggle between the two panels.

Library View
You use the Library View to work with a ISPF library concatenations. The panel
that appears in Figure 219 is the Library View entry panel for the Workplace.
File View Options Space SuperC Test Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Smart Action
ISPF Workplace
ISPF Library
Project .
Group . .
Type . . .
Member . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
. SOURCE
.

. . .

(Blank or pattern for member action list)

┌───────────────── ISPF Referral lists for object selection ─────────────────┐
│ Library View
Action
#1-8=Retrieve Entry DL=DSLIST /=Open List │
│ MYLIST . . .
MANUAL DUMMY DATA
02/07/08 11:36 │
│ REFLIST . . .
Last 8 referenced libraries
-------- ----- │
************************* End of ISPF Referral lists *************************

Action ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F7=Backward F8=Forward

F3=Exit
F9=Swap

Scroll ===> PAGE
F4=Settings F5=PrvObj
F6=PrvAct
F10=Actions F11=ChgView F12=Cancel

Figure 219. Workplace Entry Panel - Library View (ISRWORK1)

When using this Workplace entry panel, you can select a data set or a group of
data sets to work with in one of the following ways:
v Fill in the ISPF Library fields. These fields are used the same way as they are on
other ISPF panels. You can use the traditional method of selecting a data set by
entering its Project, Group, Type, and Member names in the ISPF Library fields.
Omitting the Member name gives you a list of members to choose from.
v Select an object or list of objects using “ISPF Referral lists for object retrieval”.
See “ISPF Referral Lists for Object Retrieval” on page 373 for more information.
You can access personal and reference lists, and then select libraries from these
lists.

Data Set View
You use the Data Set View to work with a single data set, a list of data sets, a
workstation file, or any action that requires a volume serial.
Note: Catalog, DSLIST, Volume information, Print volume, and Workstation file
actions, are only available from the Data Set View.
The panel that appears in Figure 220 on page 373 is the Data Set View entry panel
for the Workplace.

372

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)

File View Options Space SuperC Test Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Smart Action
ISPF Workplace
Data Set, DSLIST Level, or Workstation File
Object Name . . . ’MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE’
Volume Serial . .
(For actions that require a volume serial)
┌───────────────── ISPF Referral lists for object selection ─────────────────┐
│ Data Set View Action
#1-30=Retrieve Entry DL=DSLIST /=Open List │
│ REFLIST . . .
Last 30 referenced data sets -------- ----- │
│ TEST
. . .
Test list
02/10/01 12:06 │
│ TEST2
. . .
Second Test List
02/10/01 12:05 │
************************* End of ISPF Referral lists *************************

Action ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F7=Backward F8=Forward

F3=Exit
F9=Swap

Scroll ===> PAGE
F4=Settings F5=PrvObj
F6=PrvAct
F10=Actions F11=ChgView F12=Cancel

Figure 220. Workplace Entry Panel - Data Set View (ISRWORK)

When using this Workplace entry panel, you can select a data set or a group of
data sets to work with in one of the following ways:
v You can use the traditional method of selecting a data set by entering its name
in the Object Name field. For example, enter ’YOURID.SOURCE.DATA’ to act
upon a data set on the host, or D:\YOUR.FIL to act upon a workstation file
(perhaps to edit it using the PDF editor).
v Select an object or list of objects using “ISPF Referral lists for object retrieval”.
You can access personal and reference lists, and select data sets, libraries,
workstation files, VSAM files, and data set levels from each list.

ISPF Referral Lists for Object Retrieval
Both views of the ISPF Workplace entry panel enable you to use referral lists. The
bottom of the ISPF Workplace panel contains a reference list entry field (REFLIST),
followed by a list of personal lists. You can display either referral library lists or
referral data set lists, depending on the view you choose.
All data sets and libraries referenced during an ISPF session are appended to the
reference lists. You can use the input fields next to the referral lists to access a
referral data set in one of the following ways:
v Entering a slash (/) in this field causes the personal data set list or library list
(depending on the selected view) to be displayed.
v Type DL in the input field and press Enter. This builds a DSLIST based on entries
in the personal data set list, personal library lists, or Reflists.
v Enter a library entry number (from 1 to 8). If you know the list numbers of your
libraries, for example, your panels library is number 1, you can type the number
in this field and press Enter. ISPF retrieves the respective library entry from the
library reference list.
v Enter a data set entry number (from 1 to 30). If you know the order of your data
sets, you can type the number in this field and press Enter. ISPF retrieves the
respective data set entry from the data set reference list.

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

373

Workplace (Option 11)

Specifying Actions
After you select the object you want to work with, choose the action to perform on
it. You can select an action by making a choice on an action bar or by using a
command.

Choices on the Workplace Action Bar
The Workplace action bar makes available the following choices.

File
The File action bar choice enables you to manipulate files. The pull-down choices
for File are:
Choice Description
List

Displays a pop-up menu that enables you to choose either a member list, a
data set list list, a list of personal data set lists or a list of personal library lists.
You can perform any of the File actions except DSLIST against the
resulting member list.
Member list
Displays a list of members for a partitioned data set. To display a
member list:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate
fields of the Workplace entry panel (library view).
2. Specify blank or a pattern for the member name to display a
member list.
3. Select the List action from the File action bar choice.
4. Select “Member list” from the List Action prompt panel.
Note: All member lists displayed by the ISPF Workplace are
enhanced member lists, all supported member list actions
and commands are available on any member list display.
Data Set list
Displays a list of data sets based on a DSLIST level and, optionally,
a volume serial number. The data set list initial view can be set
from the Workplace Settings panel. To create a data set list:
1. Type the data set level in the Object name field on the
Workplace entry panel (data set view). If you do not full
qualify the data set level (by enclosing it in single quotes), your
TSO prefix is set as the first level. Optionally, you can enter a
volume to view just the data sets that match the DSLIST level
on the volume entered. You can also optionally enter just a
volume name to list all data sets on the volume entered.
2. Select the List action from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Data Set List from the List Action prompt panel.
Personal Data Set lists
Displays a list of your personal data set lists. All valid personal list
actions can be performed against any selected personal list. The
personal data set list you used most recently is the current active
list. The currently active list cannot be directly deleted from the list
dialog, however all other list actions are valid. To list your
personal data set lists:
1. Select the List action from the File action bar choice.

374

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
2. Select Personal Data Set List from the List Action prompt panel.
You can perform this action from either view of the Workplace
entry panel.
Personal Library lists
Displays a list of your personal library lists. All valid personal list
actions can be performed against any selected personal list. The
personal library list you used most recently is the current active
list. The currently active list cannot be directly deleted from the list
dialog, however all other list actions are valid. To list your
personal library lists:
1. Select the List action from the File action bar choice.
2. Select Personal Library List from the List Action prompt panel.
You can perform this action from either view of the Workplace
entry panel.
Edit

Starts Edit action for a member or a sequential file. The Edit action prompt
panel is presented when you choose the Edit pull-down choice on the
action bar. Select a file type and an editor and press Enter. The Edit
function is used to edit a member of a partitioned data set, a sequential
data set, or a workstation file.
Type of File
Select the type of file you want to edit.
1. Host File
Edit a host file using ISPF Edit or a workstation-defined
editor. The selection of host or workstation editors is based
on the Editor Choice option setting on the Edit Entry
panel. To start the member list function, enter a pattern or
leave the member field blank on the Workplace entry
panel. To edit a single member on the host:
1. Type the library or data set information in the
appropriate fields of the Workplace entry panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for library
view) or in parentheses after the data set name (for
data set view).
3. Select Edit under the File action bar choice.
4. Select Host File and ISPF Editor on the Edit Action
prompt panel.
To edit a single member on the workstation:
1. Type the library or data set information in the
appropriate fields of the Workplace entry panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for library
view) or in parentheses after the data set name (for
data set view).
3. Select Edit under the File action bar choice.
4. Select Host File and Workstation Editor on the Edit
Action prompt panel.
2. Workstation File
To edit a workstation file using the ISPF editor:
1. Type the file path and name in the Object name field on
the Workstation entry panel (data set view).
2. Select Edit from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Workstation File and ISPF Editor from the Edit
Action prompt panel.

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

375

Workplace (Option 11)
To edit a workstation file using a workstation editor:
1. Type the file path and name in the Object name field on
the Workstation entry panel (data set view).
2. Select Edit from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Workstation File and Workstation Editor from the
Edit Action prompt panel.
Editor Choice
1. ISPF Editor
Selects the ISPF editor.
2. Workstation Editor
Selects the workstation editor.
View

Starts View action for a member or a sequential file. The View prompt
panel is presented when you choose the View pull-down choice on the File
action bar. The View function is used to view a member of a partitioned
data set, a sequential data set, or a workstation file.
Type of File
Select the type of file you want to view.
1. Host File
View a host file using ISPF View or a workstation-defined
editor/browser. The view mechanism used is based on the
View Choice setting found on the View entry panel. To enter
the member list function, type a pattern or leave the
member field blank on the Workstation entry panel. To
view a single member on the host:
1. Type the library or data set information in the
appropriate fields on the Workplace entry panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF
library view) or in parentheses after the data set name
(for data set view).
3. Select View from the File action bar choice.
4. Select Host File and ISPF View from the View Action
prompt panel.
To view a single member on the workstation:
1. Type the library or data set information in the
appropriate fields on the Workplace entry panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF
library view) or in parentheses after the data set name
(for data set view).
3. Select View from the File action bar choice.
4. Select Host File and Workstation View from the View
Action prompt panel.
2. Workstation File
To view a workstation file using ISPF View:
1. Type the file path and name in the Object name field of
the Workstation entry panel (data set view).
2. Select View from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Workstation File and ISPF View from the View
Action prompt panel.
To view a workstation file using a workstation editor or
browser:

376

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
1. Type the file path and name in the Object name field of
the Workstation entry panel (data set view).
2. Select View from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Workstation File and Workstation View from the
View Action prompt panel.
View Choice
1. ISPF View
Selects the ISPF view function.
2. Workstation View
Selects the workstation editor or browser.
Browse
Starts Browse action for a member or a sequential file.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the
specified data set is a PDS, a member list is displayed. Select a member to
Browse by typing s next to the member name.
To browse a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the
ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or
in parentheses after the data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Browse from the File action bar choice.
Delete Displays a pop-up prompt window with member or data set as the choices.
If you specify an asterisk (*) as the member name, all members of the PDS
are deleted without a member list being displayed.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the
specified data set is a PDS, a member list is displayed. Select members to
delete by typing s next to the member name.
Note: You can change how member name patterns are handled in your
Workplace Settings. See “Show status for M,C,D,G actions” on page
396 for more information.
To delete a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the
ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or
in parentheses after the data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Delete under the File action bar choice for member delete.
To delete a PDS or a sequential data set:
1. Enter the data set name in the Object name field, or enter a library in
the ISPF Library field on the Workplace panel.
2. Select Delete under the File action bar choice for data set delete.
Rename
Displays a pop-up prompt window with member or data set as the choices.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the
specified data set is a PDS, a member list is displayed. Select a member to
Rename by typing s next to the member name.
To rename a single member:

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

377

Workplace (Option 11)
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the
ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or
in parentheses after the data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Rename under the File action bar choice for member rename.
To rename a PDS or a sequential data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field, or type a library in the
ISPF Library field on the Workplace panel.
2. Select Rename under the File action bar choice for data set rename.
For more information, see “Rename” on page 391.
Move Starts the move action for a member or a sequential file. A Move entry
panel is presented.
If you specify an asterisk (*) as the member name, all members of the PDS
are moved without a member list being displayed.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the
specified data set is a PDS, a member list is displayed. Select members to
move by typing s next to the member name.
Note: You can change how member name patterns are handled in your
Workplace Settings. See “Show status for M,C,D,G actions” on page
396 for more information.
To move a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the
ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or
in parentheses after the data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Move from the File action bar choice.
For more information, see “Move or Copy” on page 390.
Copy

Starts the copy action for a member or a sequential file. A Copy entry
panel is presented.
If you specify an asterisk (*) as the member name, all members of the PDS
are copied without a member list being displayed.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the
specified data set is a PDS, a member list is displayed. Select members to
copy by typing s next to the member name.
Note: You can change how member name patterns are handled in your
Workplace Settings. See “Show status for M,C,D,G actions” on page
396 for more information.
To copy a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the
ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or
in parentheses after the data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Copy from the File action bar choice.
For more information, see “Move or Copy” on page 390.

378

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
Reset

Starts reset action for a member. A Reset prompt panel is presented for the
member.
If you specify an asterisk (*) as the member name, all members of the PDS
are reset without a member list being displayed.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the
specified data set is a PDS, a member list is displayed. Select members to
reset by typing s next to the member name.
Note: You can change how member name patterns are handled in your
Workplace Settings. See “Show status for M,C,D,G actions” on page
396 for more information.
To reset a single member:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields of the
ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or
in parentheses after the data set name (for data set view).
3. Select Reset from the File action bar choice.
For more information, see “Resetting Member Statistics” on page 385.

Open

Is defined on the Workplace Settings panel, making it a user customizable
action. After you set this action, it is performed automatically each time
you open a member. The Open action can be set to the following actions:
User Any TSO command, REXX exec, or CLIST set by the Open
Command field on the Workplace Settings panel.
E
Edit
V
View
B
Browse
D
Delete member
R
Rename member
M
Move
C
Copy
G
Reset
P
Print member
J
Submit
T
TSO command action
To open a single member:
1. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or
in parentheses after the data set name (for data set view).
2. Select Open from the File action bar choice. When you press the
ENTER key, the action for open runs against the member, or a member
list is displayed. See “Changing Workplace Settings” on page 395 for
more information.

Submit
Submits the member or sequential file to TSO for job execution.
If you do not specify a member name or if you specify a pattern and the
specified data set is a PDS, a member list is displayed. Select a member to
submit by typing s next to the member name.
To submit a single member, fill in the following fields of the ISPF
Workplace panel:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate fields.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library view) or
in parentheses after data set name (for data set view).
Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

379

Workplace (Option 11)
3. Select Submit from the File action bar choice.
Print

The Print selection enables you to print information. The pull-down
choices on the Print action prompt panel are:
Data Set
Prints the entire data set. To print a data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field (for the data
set view) or enter an ISPF library name in the ISPF Library
fields (for the library view).
2. Select the Print action from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Data Set from the Print Action prompt panel.
Data Set index
Prints the data set index for the selected data set. To print a data
set index:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an
ISPF library name in the ISPF Library fields.
2. Select the Print action from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Data Set Index from the Print Action prompt panel.
Data Set List
Prints the list of data sets for the selected data set name level. To
print a data set list:
1. Type a data set level, or optionally a volume serial, in the
appropriate fields on the ISPF Workplace panel.
2. Select Print from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Data set List from the Print Action prompt prompt panel.
VTOC Prints the VTOC information for the selected volume. To print a
VTOC summary:
1. Type a volume serial in the proper field on the ISPF Workplace
panel.
2. Select Print from the File action bar choice.
3. Select VTOC from the Print Action prompt panel.
Member
Prints the selected member. To print a member:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an
ISPF library name in the ISPF Library fields.
2. Select the Print action from the File action bar choice.
3. Select Member from the Print Action prompt panel.

Command
Enables you to enter TSO, Workstation, or ISPF commands. You are
prompted to choose between types of commands. The pull-down choices
on the Command prompt are:
TSO Cmd
The TSO Cmd action is used to run a TSO command, passing the
data set and member name and any additional parameters to the
TSO command entered. To run a TSO command against a single
member, fill in the following fields of the ISPF Workplace panel:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate
fields.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library
view) or in parentheses after the data set name (for data set
view).
3. Select Command from the File action bar choice.
4. Select TSO from the Command Action prompt panel.

380

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
WS Cmd
The WS Cmd action is used to run a WS command, passing the
data set and member name and any additional parameters to the
WS command entered.
To run a WS command against a single member, fill in the
following fields of the ISPF Workplace panel:
1. Type the library or data set information in the appropriate
fields.
2. Type the member name in the member field (for ISPF library
view) or in parentheses after the data set name (for data set
view).
3. Select Command from the File action bar choice.
4. Select WS command from the Command Action prompt panel.
Note: The ISPF Client/Server must be connected to run the WS
command.
ISPF Command Shell
The ISPF command shell option enables TSO commands, CLISTs,
and REXX execs to be run under ISPF. You can enter the TSO
commands, CLISTs, and REXX execs in the command input field of
any panel.
ISPF also enables Workstation commands to be entered in the
command input field of any panel.
You can enter a long command that wraps to the next line if you
want to. For more information about the ISPF Command Shell, see
“ISPF Command Shell” on page 388.
ISPF Command Table
The command table utility allows you to create or change
application command tables.
A command table contains the specification of general commands
that can be entered from any panel during the execution of an
application. Command tables are identified by application id, and
are maintained in the ISPF table input library.
Exit

Ends the Workplace, returning to the primary option panel.

View
The View action bar choice displays the object views that are available to you. The
currently selected view is unavailable.
The pull-down choices for View are:
Choice

Description

Data Set View
Changes the current view to reference data set list, personal data
set lists, and Object name view.
To change to the data set view:
1. Select the View action bar choice.
2. Select Data Set View from the pull-down menu.
Library View

Changes the current view to reference library list, personal library
lists, and ISPF Library view.
To change to the ISPF Library view:
Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

381

Workplace (Option 11)
1. Select the View action bar choice.
2. Select Library View from the pull-down menu.
By name

Changes the current view of the personal list by sorting on the
name field.

By description
Changes the current view of the personal list by sorting on the
description field.
By created

Changes the current view of the personal list by sorting on the
created field.

By referenced Changes the current view of the personal list by sorting on the
referenced field.

Options
The Options action bar choice displays the settings available. The pull-down
choices for Options are:
Choice

Description

Workplace Settings
Displays the Workplace Settings panel. See “Changing Workplace
Settings” on page 395 for more information.
ISPF Settings Displays the ISPF Settings panel. See Chapter 2, “Settings (Option
0),” on page 25 for more information.
CUA Attributes
Starts the ISPF CUA Attribute Change Utility dialog. See “CUA
Attributes” on page 61 for more information.
Keylists

Starts the ISPF Keylist Utility dialog. See “Working with Function
Keys and Keylists (The Function Keys Action Bar Choice)” on page
41 for more information.

Point-and-Shoot
Starts the ISPF CUA Attribute Change Utility dialog indexed to the
point-and-shoot entry. See “CUA Attributes” on page 61 for more
information.
Colors

Starts the ISPF Global Color Change Utility dialog. See “Changing
Default Colors (The Colors Action Bar Choice)” on page 57 for
more information.

Space
The Space action bar choice enables you to create and maintain data sets. The
pull-down choices available for Space are:

382

Choice

Description

Allocate

Displays a pop-up menu for the allocate action. The choices on the
prompt are:
Data Set
The allocate action is used to allocate a partitioned or
sequential data set. To allocate a data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type
an ISPF library name in the ISPF Library fields.
2. Select the Allocate action from the Space action bar
choice.
3. Select Data Set from the Allocate Action prompt panel.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
Enhanced Data Set
The enhanced allocate action is used to allocate an
SMS-managed partitioned or sequential data set. To
allocate an SMS data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or
enter an ISPF library name in the ISPF Library fields.
2. Select the Allocate action from the Space action bar
choice.
3. Select Enhanced Data Set from the Allocate Action
prompt panel.
VSAM Data Set
The VSAM action is used to define, delete, or retrieve
information for a VSAM data set. To define, delete, or
retrieve information for a VSAM data set:
1. Type the VSAM data set name in the Object name field
or enter an ISPF library name in the ISPF Library fields.
2. Select the Allocate action from the Space action bar
choice.
3. Select VSAM Data Set from the Allocate Action prompt
panel.
Compress

The Compress action is used to recover unused space in a
partitioned or sequential data set. To compress a data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an
ISPF library name in the ISPF Library fields.
2. Select the Compress action from the Space action bar choice.

Catalog

The Catalog action is used to catalog a partitioned or sequential
data set on a direct access device. To catalog a data set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field.
2. Type the volume name in the volume field.
3. Select the Catalog action from the Space action bar choice.
Note: You cannot catalog an SMS managed data set.

Uncatalog

The Uncatalog action is used to uncatalog a partitioned or
sequential data set from a direct access device. To uncatalog a data
set:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field.
2. Select the Uncatalog action from the Space action bar choice.
Note: You cannot uncatalog an SMS managed data set.
A confirmation dialog appears if specified in the Workplace
Settings panel. See “Changing Workplace Settings” on page 395 for
more information.

Information

The Data Set Information action is used to retrieve information
about a partitioned or sequential data set. To retrieve data set
information:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an
ISPF library name in the ISPF Library fields.
2. Select Information from the Space action bar choice.
3. Select one of the following choices from the Information Action
prompt panel:
Data Set Long
Displays information about the selected data set.

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

383

Workplace (Option 11)
Data Set Short
Displays a subset of information about the selected data
set.
VTOC summary
Displays VTOC information about the selected volume.
You must type the volume serial of the VTOC in the
volume serial field of the Workplace entry panel.

SuperC
The SuperC action bar choice gives you access to SuperC compare and search
dialogs for your data sets. The data set you specify on the Workplace panel is
automatically filled in for you in the Superc dialog you choose. For more
information, see “SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)” on page 205.
The SuperC pull-down choices are:
Choice

Description

SuperC

Compare two data sets. To SuperC compare two data sets:
1. Type the first data set name in the Object name field or type an
ISPF library name in the ISPF Library fields.
2. Select the SuperC action from the SuperC action bar choice. The
SuperC Compare Utility— New Data Set Specification panel
appears with the data set information entered in it. Make sure
the panel is filled in the way you want it to be.
3. Press Enter to display the Old SuperC comparison panel, and
fill in the panel.
4. Press Enter again to submit the comparison.
For more information, see “SuperC Utility (Option 3.12)” on page
205.

SuperCE

Compare two data sets using extended options. For more
information, see “SuperCE Utility (Option 3.13)” on page 215.

Search-For

Search data sets for strings of data. To SuperC search for strings of
data:
1. Type the data set name in the Object name field or type an
ISPF library name in the ISPF Library fields.
2. Select the Search-For action from the SuperC action bar choice.
The Search-For Utility panel appears with the data set
information entered in it. Make sure the panel is filled in the
way you want it to be.
For more information, see “Search-For Utility (Option 3.14)” on
page 228.

Search-ForE

Search a data set using extended options. For more information,
see “Search-ForE Utility (Option 3.15)” on page 234.

Test
The Test action bar choice gives you access to the ISPF services that help you test
dialogs, such as Chapter 9, “Dialog Test (Option 7),” on page 319. For more
information, refer to the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference, and the
z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros manual.
The Test pull-down choices are:

384

Choice

Description

Functions

Displays the Dialog Test Function/Selection panel. Select the

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
Functions action from the Test action bar choice. For more
information, see “Functions (Option 7.1)” on page 327.
Panels

Displays the Dialog Test Display panel. Select the Panels action
from the Test action bar choice. For more information, see “Panels
(Option 7.2)” on page 330.

Variables

Displays the Dialog Test Variables panel. Select the Variables action
from the Test action bar choice. For more information, see
“Variables (Option 7.3)” on page 333.

Tables

Displays the Dialog Test Tables panel. Select the Tables action from
the Test action bar choice. For more information, see “Tables
(Option 7.4)” on page 338.

Log

Displays the ISPF Transaction Log panel. Select the Log action from
the Test action bar choice. For more information, see “Log (Option
7.5)” on page 350.

Services

Displays the Invoke Dialog Service panel. Select the Services action
from the Test action bar choice. For more information, see “Dialog
Services (Option 7.6)” on page 352.

Traces

Displays the Dialog Test Traces panel. Select the Traces action from
the Test action bar choice. For more information, see “Traces
(Option 7.7)” on page 355.

Break Points

Displays the Dialog Test Breakpoints panel. Select the Break Points
action from the Test action bar choice. For more information, see
“Breakpoints (Option 7.8)” on page 359.

Dialog Test

Displays the Dialog Test Primary Option panel. Select the Dialog
Test action from the Test action bar choice. For more information,
see Chapter 9, “Dialog Test (Option 7),” on page 319.

Dialog Test appl ID
Displays the Dialog Test Application ID panel for changing the
Dialog Test application ID. Select the Dialog Test appl ID action
from the Test action bar choice.

Help
The Help action bar choice provides access to the program tutorials.

Actions That Require Prompt Windows for More Information
Some actions that you call from the Workplace require additional information. You
provide this information through the use of pop-up prompt windows. Some
common actions of this type are:
v Resetting member statistics
v Using TSO commands
v Using WS commands
v Using the ISPF command shell
v Moving or copying data
v Renaming data sets
Following are the actions and the pop-up windows that accompany each one.

Resetting Member Statistics
Figure 221 on page 386 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you
choose Reset from the File action bar, after you choose a member to work with.

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

385

Workplace (Option 11)

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──
I │
Reset Member Statistics
│ 01
│
│
S │ Data Set Name:
│ MP
│ ’MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TEST)’
│
│
│
│ Options
│
│
1. Reset ISPF statistics
│
│
2. Delete ISPF statistics
│
│
│
│ New Userid . . .
(If userid is to be changed)
│
│ New Version . . .
(If version number is to be changed)
│
│ New Mod . . . . .
(If mod number is to be changed)
│
│
│
│ Press ENTER to process action. Press CANCEL to cancel reset.
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward │
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 221. Reset Statistics panel (ISRURSET)

For more information about how the Reset statistics option works, see “Reset ISPF
Statistics Utility (Option 3.5)” on page 178. You can set the following items from
this window:
Options
Select 1 to Reset ISPF statistics, or 2 to Delete ISPF statistics.
New Userid
Sets the ID field in the statistics. If you want to change the ID the statistics
are kept under, enter the new ID here. If you do not specify a new version
number, this field is required to be filled in.
New Version
Enter a number here is you want to change the version number. This field
is required if you do not enter a new userid. It is ignored if you have
chosen the delete action.
New Mod
Use a slash (/) to select this option. Deselect this option if you do not want
to reset the modification level. A new version number is required to reset
the modification level.

TSO Command
Figure 222 on page 387 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you
choose Command, from the File action bar choice, then select TSO Command from
the Command Action prompt panel.

386

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│
TSO Command Action
│
│
│
│ The "/" character can be used within the command string to represent the
│
│ following fully qualified and quoted data set name:
│
│ ’MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TEST)’
│
│
│
│ Enter TSO Command and any additional parameters as needed:
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Press ENTER to execute command, press CANCEL to cancel action.
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 222. TSO Command panel (ISRUTCES)

You can set the following items from this window:
TSO Command
The name of the TSO command you want to use. The command name can
be followed by command parameters with the / character appearing
anywhere within the parameter string.

WS Command
Figure 223 on page 388 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you
choose Command, from the File action bar choice, then select WS Command from
the Command Action prompt panel. You must have a workstation connection in
place in order to use WS commands.

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

387

Workplace (Option 11)

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│
WS Command Action
│
│
│
│ The "/" character can be used within the command string to represent the
│
│ following fully qualified, unquoted data set name:
│
│ MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TEST)
│
│ * No workstation connection
│
│ Enter Workstation Command and any additional parameters as needed:
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Press ENTER to execute command, press CANCEL to cancel action.
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward
F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
│
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Figure 223. WS Command panel (ISRUWCES)

You can set the following items from this window:
WS Command
The name of the WS command you want to use. The command name can
be followed by command parameters with the / character appearing
anywhere within the parameter string.

ISPF Command Shell
Figure 224 on page 389 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you
enter the ISPF command shell. To get to this window, choose Command from the
File action bar choice, then choose ISPF Command Shell on the Command Action
prompt panel.

388

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)

Place cursor on choice and press enter to Retrieve command
=> xmit carvm3.userid da(’userid.private.clist(types)’)seq
=> status
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
F1=Help
F2=Split
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

F3=Exit

F7=Backward F8=Forward

F9=Swap

Figure 224. ISPF Command Shell panel (ISRTSO)

The ISPF Command Shell option enables you to run TSO commands, CLISTs, and
REXX execs under ISPF. This panel has one input field. Type the command and its
parameters into the input field, leaving at least one space between the command
name and the first parameter. The input field continues for two full lines below the
start of the input field. The maximum number of characters that you can enter is
234. For example:
Enter TSO or Work Station commands below
===> SEND ’THIS MESSAGE DEMONSTRATES THAT A TSO COMMAND ENTERED UNDER
ISPF CAN EXCEED ONE LINE ON THE 3270’ USER(ALICE)

You can also enter ISPF commands, such as END or RETURN, in this field.
Note: If you enter HELP or CANCEL, it is interpreted as the ISPF Help or Cancel
command. To issue TSO Help, enter:
===> TSO HELP xxxxx

To issue TSO Cancel, enter:
===> TSO CANCEL xxxxx

The ISPF command shell option enables you to enter most TSO commands under
ISPF. Following is a list of commands that are not supported:
v LOGON
v LOGOFF
v ISPSTART, PDF, and ISPF
v TEST
v Commands that you are restricted from using by TSO or PCF
v Commands requiring large parameter lists (234 characters is the maximum
allowed, including command name)
You can run command procedures under ISPF, subject to the following restrictions:
v CLISTs and execs must not invoke restricted commands listed previously.
Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

389

Workplace (Option 11)
v TERMIN command procedure statements are not supported.
These restrictions also apply to commands entered from other panels.
After you type a command in the input field, press ENTER to start the command.
If you are not operating in Session Manager mode, the cursor is positioned below
the command input field. Line-at-a-time I/O from the command, if any, starts at
the cursor position. When the command finishes, three asterisks (***) may appear
on the screen. To return to ISPF full-screen mode, press ENTER.
The ISPF command shell panel is then redisplayed with the command you entered
displayed in the command list (unless you entered the TSO or WS prefix, or List
mode is set to update off).

Move or Copy
Figure 225 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you choose Move
from the File action bar, after you choose a member to work with. The panel that
appears when you choose Copy is similar to this one.
RefList Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
MOVE Entry Panel
More:
+
CURRENT from data set: ’MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE(TEST)’
To Library
Project . . . MYPROJ
Group . . . . DEV
Type . . . . SOURCE

Options:
Enter "/" to select option
_ Replace like-named members
/ Process member aliases

To Other Data Set Name
Data Set Name . . . _____________________________________________
Volume Serial . . . ______
(If not cataloged)
NEW member name . . . ________ (Blank unless member to be renamed)
Options
Sequential Disposition
Pack Option
SCLM Setting
2 1. Mod
1 1. Default
3 1. SCLM
2. Old
2. Pack
2. Non-SCLM
Command ===> ________________________________________________________________
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel
Figure 225. Move panel (ISRUMVC)

For more information about the Move/Copy utility, see “Move/Copy Utility
(Option 3.3)” on page 138. You can set the following items from this window:
To Library
The library to which you want to move or copy the selected data.
To Other Data Set Name
The data set to which you want to move or copy the selected data.
NEW member name
If the “To” and “From” data sets are the same, you can rename the
member here.

390

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
Replace like-named members
Select this option to allow replacement of a member in the ″To″ data set
with a like-named member in the ″From″ data set.
Process member aliases
Select this option to allow the primary member and all alias members to be
moved together.
Sequential disposition
Select 1 if Mod, 2 if Old
1
Mod adds new data at the end of data currently contained in the
data set.
2
Old begins placing new data at the beginning of the data set,
writing over existing data.
Pack option
Indicates how you want the data to be stored in the “To” data set.
1
Data set is packed according to your default settings.
2
Data set is packed.
SCLM setting
Indicates how you want the data to be stored in the “To” data set.
1
SCLM
2
Non-SCLM
3
As is

Rename
Figure 226 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you choose
Rename from the File action bar, after you choose a member to work with.
File View Options Space SuperC Test Help
─ ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────┐ ──────────────────────────
│
Workplace Rename Action Prompt
│
│
│
D │ Rename . .
1. Data Set
│
│
2. Member
│
│
│ re a volume serial)
│ Select a choice and press ENTER to continue │
┌ │
│ lection ─────────────────┐
│ │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
│ DL=DSLIST /=Open List │
│ │ F7=Backward
F8=Forward
F9=Swap
│ ta sets -------- ----- │
│ └───────────────────────────────────────────────┘
02/10/01 12:06 │
│ TEST2
. . .
Second Test List
02/10/01 12:05 │
************************* End of ISPF Referral lists *************************

Action ===> RP
F1=Help
F2=Split
F7=Backward F8=Forward

F3=Exit
F9=Swap

Scroll ===> PAGE
F4=Settings F5=PrvObj
F6=PrvAct
F10=Actions F11=ChgView F12=Cancel

Figure 226. Rename prompt panel (ISRURNAM)

You choose to rename either a data set or a member from this panel. If you choose
data set, the panel in Figure 227 on page 392 appears.

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

391

Workplace (Option 11)

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │
Rename Data Set
│
I │
│
│ Data Set Name . . : MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE
│
D │ Volume Serial . . : MVS8WF
│
│
│
│ Enter new name below: (The data set will be recataloged.)
│
│
│
┌ │ ISPF Library:
│
│ │
Project . .
│
│ │
Group . . .
│
│ │
Type . . . . SOURCE
│
│ │
│
* │ Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:
│
│
Data Set Name . . . ’MYPROJ.DEV.SOURCE’
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ Command ===>
│
A │ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 227. Rename data set panel (ISRUARP1)

You can set the following items from this window:
New name
The name that you want to use for the renamed data set.
If you choose member, the panel in Figure 228 appears.
Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help
─ ┌─────────────────────────────────────┐ ────────────────────────────────────
I │
Member Rename
│
Row 00001 of 00001
│
│ d
Changed
ID
S │ Enter a new member name:
│ /08 2002/07/08 13:32:15
GRAHAMP
│
│
│ Old Name . . : TEST
│
│
│
│ New Name . . .
│
│
│
│
│
│ Press ENTER to rename member.
│
│ Press CANCEL to cancel rename.
│
│
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
│
│ F3=Exit
F7=Backward
│
└─────────────────────────────────────┘

Command ===>
F1=Help
F2=Split F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

F7=Up

Figure 228. Rename member panel (ISRUREN)

You can set the following items from this window:

392

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Scroll ===> PAGE
F8=Down
F9=Swap

Workplace (Option 11)
New name
The name that you want to use for the renamed member.

Commands
You can use primary commands in the command area (Action line) of the
Workplace entry panels.
You must be connected to the workstation to use any workstation file actions. You
can configure your workstation editor choice by selecting the Workstation action bar
from the Edit or View entry prompt panel or from the Workplace Settings panel.
Table 23. Workstation Commands
Command

Description

Valid For:

Allocate

Data sets

ACTBAR or
NOACTBAR

Display or do not display action bar
on panel

Action prompt

Allocate

Action prompt

Browse

Members and non-PDS data sets

Copy

Members and non-PDS data sets

COLOR

Global color change

Action prompt

Command

Action prompt

CUAATTR

CUA attributes

Action prompt

Delete

Members and non-PDS data sets

Delete

Data sets

DSLIST

Data set name level

Delete

Action prompt

DVT

VTOC summary

Data summary

Edit

Members and non-PDS data sets

Edit

Action prompt

Reset member statistics

Members

Full information

Data sets

ICS

ISPF command shell

Action prompt

ICT

ISPF command table

Action prompt

Information

Action prompt

Submit

Members and non-PDS data sets

Catalog

Data sets

KEYLIST

Keylist utility

Action prompt

Print data set

Data sets

LOCATE, LOC, or L

Find a specified referral list in the
scrollable display of referral lists

Referral lists

List

Action prompt

LV or LISTVIEW

List view

Action prompt

Move

Members and non-PDS data sets

Member list

Partitioned data sets

Rename

Data sets

Open

Members and non-PDS data sets

OPD

Personal data set lists

Referral lists

OPL

Personal library lists

Referral lists

Members and non-PDS data sets

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

393

Workplace (Option 11)
Table 23. Workstation Commands (continued)
Command

Description

Valid For:

PDL

Print data set list

Data sets

Action prompt

PSCOLOR

Point and shoot

Action prompt

PVT

Print VTOC information

Data sets

VSAM

Data sets

Rename

Members and non-PDS data sets

Rename

Action prompt

Short information

Data sets

SuperC

Data sets

SCE

SuperC extended

Data sets

SELECT, SEL, or S

Select a specified referral list in the
scrollable display of referral lists

Referral lists

SETTINGS

ISPF settings

Action prompt

SearchFor

Data sets

SFE

SearchFor extended

Data sets

TSO command

Members and non-PDS data sets

Uncatalog

Data sets

View

Members and non-PDS data sets

View

Action prompt

WS command

Members and non-PDS data sets

Workstation file, edit on host

Workstation files

WEW

Workstation file, edit on workstation

Workstation file

WPSET

Workplace settings

Action prompt

Workstation file, view on host

Workstation files

WVW

Workstation file, view on workstation

Workstation files

Print data set index

Data sets

Allocate SMS (enhanced)

Data sets

Compress

Data sets

= (equal sign)

Repeat last command. If no previous
action, view is the default.

Members and non-PDS data sets

Default CUA Function Key Settings
Table 24 shows how the function keys are defined for the main Workplace panel
when the mode is set to keylist ON and function keys are set to primary LOWER.
Table 24. Workplace Function Key Settings

394

Key

Action

Description:

Help

Workplace help

Split

Split screen

Exit

Exit Workplace

Settings

ISPF Workplace settings

PrvObj

Recall last object

PrvAct

Repeat last action

Backward

Scroll up Reflist

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
Table 24. Workplace Function Key Settings (continued)
Key

Action

Description:

Forward

Scroll down Reflist

Swap

Swap screen

F10

Actions

Cursor to action bar

F11

ChgView

Change Workplace view

F12

Cancel

Exit Workplace

F13

Help

F14

Split

F15

End

F16

Return

F17

Rfind

Repeat find

F18

Rchange

Repeat change

F19

Up (Scroll up)

F20

Down

Down (Scroll down)

F21

Swap

F22

Left

Left (Scroll left)

F23

Right

Right (Scroll right)

F24

Cretriev

Cursor/retrieve

Changing Workplace Settings
Figure 229 on page 396 shows the pop-up prompt window that appears when you
choose the Workplace Settings pull-down from the Options choice on the
Workplace action bar. You can also start this function by entering WPSET on the
command line. The workplace settings determine how your particular workplace
behaves for various functions.

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

395

Workplace (Option 11)

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ File Defaults Colors Workstation Help
│
│ ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── │
│
ISPF Workplace Settings Main
│
│
│
│ General Options
View Options
│
│
Enter "/" to select option
Data Set List View
│
│
/ Display Edit/View entry panel
1 1. Volume
│
│
/ Automatically Update reference lists
2. Space
│
│
/ Keep member field value
3. Attrib
│
│
/ Member List for M,C,D,G actions
4. Total
│
│
/ Show status for M,C,D,G actions
│
│
/ Confirm Member delete
Member List View
│
│
/ Confirm Data Set delete
1 1. Standard
│
│
/ Show Workplace Action bar
2. Extended
│
│
/ Frame ISPF Personal list area
│
│
/ Smart Action Retrieve Entry
Reflist Frame Char
│
│
/ Display Catalog Name
1 1. | (X"6A")
│
│
2. | (X"4F")
│
│
│
│ Press EXIT to save settings. Press CANCEL to cancel any changes.
│
│ F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F7=Backward F8=Forward
│
│ F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 229. Workplace Settings panel (ISRUSETM)

You can set the following items from this window:
Display Edit/View entry panel
When selected, causes the Edit/View prompt panel to appear before you
can start an edit or view action for a sequential data set. If you want to
display a member list, the prompt panel is only displayed if a slash (/) is
entered in the Prompt field of the member list.
The default for this setting is selected.
Automatically Update reference lists
When selected, specifies that any data set or library, or both, is added to
the respective reference list.
The default for this setting is selected.
Keep member field value
When selected, specifies that the member name field for ISPF Library is not
to be cleared upon return from a library action.
The default for this setting is selected.
Member List for M,C,D,G actions
When selected, specifies that the actions Move, Copy, Delete, and Reset
result in a member list. When not selected, these actions act upon all
members that match the pattern without displaying a member list.
The default for this setting is selected.
Show status for M,C,D,G actions
When selected, displays a status panel for the actions Move, Copy, Delete,
and Reset. When not selected, no status panel is displayed.
The default for this setting is selected.
Confirm Member delete
When selected, specifies that the delete confirmation panel is displayed
before a member is deleted.

396

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
The default for this setting is selected.
Confirm Data Set delete
When selected, specifies that the delete confirmation panel is displayed
before a data set is deleted.
The default for this setting is selected.
Show Workplace Action bar
When selected, specifies that the action bar appears on the workplace
panels.
The default for this setting is selected.
Frame ISPF Referral list area
When selected, specifies that the ISPF referral list area be framed, using the
character specified in the Reflist Frame Char field.
Smart Action Retrieve Entry
When selected, specifies that ISPF executes the smart action option against
the retrieved data set.
Display Catalog Name
When selected, specifies that the Total view of a Data Set List will display
the catalog name in which the data set was located.
View Options
Specifies how to display the data set list.
volume
Displays data set list with a volume view.
space

Displays data set list with a space view.

attrib

Displays data set list with an attribute view.

total

Displays data set list in total view.

Member List View
Specifies how to display the member list
standard
Displays a member list with a 1-character command entry field.
extended
Displays a member list with an 8-character command entry field.
Reflist Frame Char
The character used to frame the ISPF referral list area on your workstation
panels.

Workplace Settings Panel Action Bar
The following action bar choices appear on the Workplace Settings panel.
File

The file pull-downs give you the options to either cancel or exit the current
file.

Defaults
You can choose the default enter or open actions from these pull- downs:
Default Enter action
You can select a default action to perform automatically whenever
you do an Enter action. The available actions are:
v Smart Action

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

397

Workplace (Option 11)
The Smart Action enables ISPF to choose the action needed
based on the characteristics of the object you are using. ISPF
chooses the appropriate action according to the following rules:

v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v

Object type
Action selected by ISPF
ISPF Library
Member list
Partitioned Data Set
Member list
Pattern containing ″*″ or ″%″ Data Set List
Volume (with no object name)
Data Set List
Member Object
User selectable *
Sequential Data Set
User selectable *
Workstation File
User selectable *
* Use the Smart Action action bar choice to select the action for
member objects, sequential data sets and workstation files.
Member List
Data Set List
Edit
View
Browse
Rename member
Move
Copy
Reset Stats
Open
Repeat action

Default Open action
You can select a default action to perform automatically whenever
you do an Open action from the Workplace or workplace member
lists. The available actions are:
v User command (a user defined command)
v Edit
v View
v Browse
v Delete member
v Rename member
v Move
v Copy
v Reset member
v Print member
v WS Cmd
v TSO Cmd
Colors You can choose the colors for the member list or the data set list from this
action bar.
Workstation
You can connect your host and workstation with these choices:
1. Configure ISPF Workstation Tool Integration
2. ISPF C/S Install
Help

398

Provides general workplace settings help, and default enter and open help.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)

Workplace Example Scenario
The following scenario illustrates some of the advantages provided by the ISPF
Workplace function. To provide you with a reference point of view, the scenario
includes points on how you can accomplish the same task using ISPF in the
traditional way.
For this example, say that your task is to:
1. Copy a sequential data set into a member of a concatenated ISPF Library.
2. SuperC compare it to another member.
3. Rename the member.
4. Change the Version number in the ISPF statistics.

Subtask 1
Your first step is to copy a sequential data set into a member of a concatenated
PDS.
Traditional ISPF: Use the 3.3 Move/Copy Utility.
Workplace: Use the Copy Action against the sequential data set object.
Choose the Workplace option (Option 11) on the main menu. Use the PF11 key to
toggle to the data set view. In the Workplace you have a choice of working from a
data set list or issuing commands against a single data set.
If you are list-oriented you can specify a wildcard character in the Object Name
field (such as, ’USERID.*’) to generate a data set list containing the sequential data
set.
If you prefer to specify the sequential data set directly you can type it into the
Object Name field either with or without single quotes (that is, SEQ.FILE or
’USERID.SEQ.FILE’).
In either case the following accelerated methods can be alternatives to
remembering and typing the input:
v You might be able to retrieve a recently referenced data set name or pattern from
the REFLIST in the bottom half of the Workplace.
v You might be able to retrieve a recently referenced data set name or pattern
using the recall key PF5.
v You might be able to retrieve a data set name or pattern from a personal list you
previously created. These also appear in the bottom half of the Workplace.
Now that the Object has been specified you must specify the Action. In this
example, the action is COPY. You can do this several ways, depending on your
preferences.
v If you are in a list, you can use the CO line command to copy the data set, or
you can put a slash (/) in the line command field to be prompted with a list of
available commands to select.
v If you specified the ″from″ data set directly (not from a list) you can use the
Copy option from the File action bar choice, or you can type the C fast path
command in the Action ==> field to copy the data set.
In either case, a pop-up panel prompts you for the target data set, member name,
and other parameters.
Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

399

Workplace (Option 11)

Subtask 2
The second step is to SuperC compare one member of a concatenated PDS to
another.
Traditional ISPF: Use the 3.13 SuperC compare utility.
Workplace: Use the Workplace-to-SuperC Interface.
Using PF11, toggle back to the Workplace ISPF Library View.
Specify the ISPF library concatenation and member name of the new member you
just created by the COPY action. The following accelerated methods can be used as
alternatives to remembering and typing the input:
v You might be able to retrieve a recently referenced ISPF Library concatenation
from the REFLIST in the bottom half of the Workplace.
v You might be able to retrieve a recently referenced ISPF Library concatenation
using the recall key PF5.
v You might be able to retrieve an ISPF Library concatenation from a personal list
you previously created. These also appear in the bottom half of the Workplace.
Now that the Object has been specified you must specify the Action. The action at
this point is SuperCE. Again, specifying this action can be done several ways
depending on your preferences.
v You can use the SuperCE option from the SuperC action bar.
v You can type the ″SCE″ fast path command in the Action ==> field and press
Enter.
In either case, Workplace enters the SuperCE dialog. Note that your ISPF Library
concatenation is transferred to the correct New DSN fields in the SuperCE
concatenation panel, so you do not have to type it yourself.
After running your compare, exit the SuperC Utility to return to Workplace.

Subtask 3
The next step is to rename a member of an ISPF Library.
Traditional ISPF: Use the 3.1 Library Utility.
Workplace: Use the Rename member Action.
The ISPF library concatenation and member name of the new member you just
compared remains on the Workplace panel. Now you must specify the Rename
Action.
How do you prefer to do this?
v You can use the Rename option from the File action bar.
v You can type the ″R″ fast path command in the Action ==> field, then press
Enter.
v You can work from a member list and issue the ″R″ line command to rename the
member.
Member lists can be created a number of ways in Workplace:

400

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Workplace (Option 11)
v Just press Enter if your default enter action is Smart Action, a mode that
analyzes the object and selects an appropriate action. Select the Workplace
Settings option from the Options action bar to view or change your defaults.
v Enter the List option from the File action bar.
v Enter the ″ML″ fast path command.
In any case, Workplace displays a pop-up panel to prompt you for the new
member name.

Subtask 4
The final step in this scenario is to change a member’s Version number in the ISPF
statistics.
Traditional ISPF: Use the 3.5 Reset Statistics Utility.
Workplace: Use the Reset Action.
The ISPF library concatenation and member name of the new member you just
compared remains on the Workplace panel. Now you must specify the Reset
Action.
Again you have a choice about how to do this:
v You can use the Reset option from the File action bar.
v You can type the ″G″ fast path command in the Action ==> field and press
Enter.
v You can work from a member list and issue the ″G″ line command to rename
the member or specify the ″/″ line command to be prompted with an action
selection list.
In all cases, Workplace displays a pop-up panel to prompt you for Reset
parameters.

Chapter 12. ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11)

401

402

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Part 2. Appendixes

403

404

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Appendix A. SuperC Reference
This appendix provides information about the SuperC return codes, process
options, update data set control options, and process statements.
ISPF contains two utilities, SuperC (option 3.12) and SuperCE (option 3.13), that
allow you to compare data sets for differences. Also, ISPF contains two other
utilities, Search-For (option 3.14) and Search-ForE (option 3.15), that allow you to
search data sets for strings of data.
All four of these utilities combine two major components to do their respective
functions. The first component is a dialog that provides the data entry panels,
selection panels, and messages. The second component is the program module,
ISRSUPC. The CPI interface is through a standard parameter list.
You can use the SuperC program without the ISPF utilities. To do this, however,
your installation must customize a CLIST or REXX EXEC (for interactive use), or a
PROCLIB procedure (for batch processing of a catalog procedure). A sample CLIST
has been provided to show line command processing. A sample PROCLIB JCL
catalog procedure has also been provided to show batch submission. The sample
CLIST and PROCLIB JCL are located in the SAMPLIB data set as members
ISRSCLST and ISRSPROC, respectively.

Utility Differences
The standard utilities, SuperC (option 3.12) and Search-For (option 3.14), are easy
to use with somewhat reduced function. The extended utilities, SuperCE (option
3.13) and Search-ForE (option 3.15), fully exploit the SuperC program’s capabilities.

Standard Utilities
The standard utilities are useful for ordinary comparisons and searches. The
SuperC utility (option 3.12) uses a two-panel sequence: you specify the new input
data set on the first panel and the old input data set on the second. The Search-For
utility (option 3.14) uses an optional two-panel sequence: you can specify the input
data set and one search string on the first panel, and use the second panel if you
need to specify more than one search string.
You can enter additional information on these panels as they are displayed. If you
are using the SuperC utility, you can enter the name of a previously prepared
profile data set that contains additional information to specify the comparison.
Search-For does not use a profile data set. Also, Search-For finds all occurrences
without case distinction when searching for a data string.

Extended Utilities
The primary intent of the extended utilities is to provide maximum flexibility and
access to all SuperC functions. Input fields are provided to allow you to use
process options and statements. Also, the Search-ForE utility’s ASIS fields allow
you to specify mixed-case search strings.
The input data set name fields differ from standard ISPF format because Project,
Group, Type, and Member fields are not provided. Instead, you can enter input
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2005

405

SuperC - Utility Differences
data set names horizontally using standard TSO naming conventions. This includes
the use of a PDS member name, if desired, as part of a data set name.
The concatenation of input data sets is also different. Up to four data set names, as
opposed to the standard four ISPF library groups, can be entered as new or old
data sets. This allows data sets with the same attributes to be concatenated. For
example, PANELS and MSGS data sets could be concatenated for searching.
Besides compare functions, the SuperCE Utility panel provides access to the
Search-ForE utility (option 3.15). This gives you the added advantage of the ability
to search for a data string without having to leave SuperCE, in addition to access
to more functions than Search-For (option 3.14) provides.

Program Description
The SuperC program is a fast and versatile program that can process:
v Two sequential data sets
v Two complete partitioned data sets
v Members of two partitioned data sets
v Concatenated data sets.
In fact, any data set that can be processed by ISPF can be processed by the SuperC
program.
Note: ISPF does not support tape data sets.
SuperC can compare data sets even when there are many differences and
redundant data. Some examples of redundant data are blank lines, duplicate
words, and binary data with many duplicate characters.
Unlike many compare programs, SuperC is not limited to comparing data sets on a
line-by-line basis. Instead, it allows you to choose between the following four
comparison levels. The compare type you select determines which kinds of data
differences are presented by SuperC. See “Why Compare Types May Produce
Different Comparison Results” on page 473 for more information about
comparison results.
v File comparisons produce summary information about the differences between
the data sets being compared.
v Line comparisons are record-oriented and show matching, inserted, deleted, and
reformatted lines. This level is most useful for comparing lines of program
source code. It provides the least output difference information and is least
sensitive to resynchronization.
v Word comparisons show differences between data strings that are delimited by
blanks or nonalphanumeric characters, such as commas. Matching words are
found, even if they are not on the same line. This level is most useful for
comparing text data sets.
v Byte comparisons determine byte differences. It is most useful for comparing
unformatted and machine-readable data.
The SuperC program requires only the names of the input data sets. However, the
utility you are using may require other information, such as a listing type. Also,
you can enter the following types of processing information and options on the
utility data entry panels:
v Compare type
v Listing data set name or destination

406

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC - Program Description
v Process options
v Statements or profile data set name
v Browse output choice.
The SuperC program allows you to create two kinds of output:
v A listing that shows the results of the comparison or search and
v A structured data set that contains update information.
Within these two categories, you can create many kinds of output that make it easy
to see where your data differs. To see your comparison results, you can generate
listings that show:
v An overall summary of total changes
v The actual source code where deltas (differences) were found
v The deltas plus up to 10 (the default) matching lines before and after
v The deltas plus all matching lines.
You can format the listings to show differences either sequentially or side-by-side.
In an update data set, output lines are identified and results are put in specific
columns. An update data set is especially useful as input to a user-written
application program. It allows a program to customize what you see, changing
generalized output to information that is specific to a particular application.
The SuperC utility (options 3.12, 3.13, and 3.14) CLISTs allocate or free space under
the following DDNAMEs: SYSIN, SYSIN2, OLDDD, NEWDD, OUTDD, and
DELDD.

SuperC Features for the Year 2000 Transition
SuperC includes features designed to help manage the Year 2000 transition:
v Specify a 100-year period (or “year window”) so that, for dates that have only a
2-digit year, the century can be determined. This can be based on either:
– A “fixed” year window (with a fixed starting year), or
– A “sliding” year window (starting at a specified number of years before the
current year).
v Compare 2-digit year values in one data set with 4-digit year values in another
data set.
v Compare compressed year values in one data set with uncompressed year
values in another data set.
v Filter cosmetic differences caused by adding century digits to 2-digit years, so
that you can more easily identify real differences in content.

Applications
You can use the SuperC program for many applications other than comparing two
source data sets. This section lists some specific applications for general users,
writers and editors, and programmers and systems administrators.
General users can:
v Compare two data sets that have been reformatted. Reformatted data sets
contain such differences as indentation level changes, spaces inserted or deleted,
or lines that have been reformatted and moved to other parts of the data set.
SuperC detects and classifies reformatted lines as special changes. You can list
these lines in the output, along with the normal insert/delete changes, or
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

407

SuperC - Applications
eliminate them from the listing. Reducing the number of flagged lines may help
you focus on real, rather than cosmetic, changes.
v Determine whether two PDSs, or a concatenation of PDSs, have corresponding
like-named members.
Members absent from one data set but present in the other are listed, as is all
change activity between like-named members. The comparison can show
changes caused by creating or deleting PDS members.
Writers and editors can:
v Detect word changes within documents.
SuperC finds word differences even if the words have been moved to different
lines.
v Verify that only designated areas are changed.
SuperC comparison results show all areas affected. Changes made to restricted
areas may be invalid. Therefore, unintended changes can be detected so that a
complete document need not be checked for errors again.
v Create a utility that automatically inserts SCRIPT revision codes.
You could write a program that uses Word compare to find where words in the
new data set are different, makes a copy of the new data set, and then inserts
SCRIPT revision codes (.RC) before and after the changed words. This utility
could eliminate the need to insert SCRIPT revision codes manually.
Programmers and systems administrators can:
v Generate management reports that show the quantity and type of changes in
program source code.
SuperC can count the changed and unchanged lines of code in an application
program. Therefore, comparison results could be used to summarize the changes
between different versions of a program.
v Retain a record of change activity.
Listing data sets can be collected and retained as a permanent record of the
changes made before a new program is released. Source code differences can
help detect regressions or validate the appropriateness of any code
modifications.
v Rewrite a listing data set, including additional headers or change delimiters.
Some SuperC listings may need to be rewritten before you accept the results. For
example, some installations may require security classifications. Others may
require a listing created using the WIDE process option to have box delimiters
surrounding changed sections.
v Compare data sets across nonconnected systems.
SuperC can generate a 32-bit hash sum per data set or member using the File
compare type. Data sets compared on a nonconnected processor, using SuperC,
should have the same hash sums if they are identical. A File comparison of any
data set to determine a hash sum can be done by specifying the same data set as
both new and old.
v Develop additional uses for update data sets.
SuperC produces general results with generalized reports. However, your
installation may have additional requirements. There are many specialized
update formats that you can use to produce listings that match these
requirements. Normal SuperC listings may not fit this type of application, but
the update data sets are more structured and should be easier to use as data

408

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC - Applications
input. See “Update Data Set Control Output Examples” on page 490 for
explanations and examples of the update data sets.

SuperC Compare Process Options
Option P on either the SuperCE Utility panel or the Search-ForE Utility panel
provides one or more panels from which you can select process options. For
SuperCE, the options displayed are compatible with the compare type (File, Line,
Word, or Byte) that you specified in the Compare Type field. The compare type
that you select determines the available process options (Table 25).
Table 25. Summary of Process Options for Search and Compare
Valid For
Process Option

Compare Type

Keyword

Description

FILE

LINE

WORD

BYTE

ALLMEMS

All members

ANYC

Any case

APNDLST

Append listing output

APNDUPD

Append update

CKPACKL

Check for packed format

Count non-paired member/file lines

For COBOL source files

CNPML
COBOL

1
2

COVSUM

Conditional summary

DLMDUP

Do not list matching duplicate lines

DLREFM

Do not list reformatted lines

DPACMT

Do not process asterisk (*) comment lines

DPADCMT

Do not process ADA-type comments

DPBLKCL

Do not process blank comparison lines

DPCBCMT

Do not process COBOL-type comment lines

DPCPCMT

Do not process C++ -type comment lines

DPFTCMT

Do not process FORTRAN-type comment lines

DPMACMT

Do not process PC Assembly-type comment
lines

DPPLCMT

Do not process PL/I-type comments

DPPSCMT

Do not process Pascal-type comments

FINDALL

Require all strings found for return code 1

FMSTOP

Stop on first mismatch or first string found

FMVLNS

Flag moved lines

GWCBL

Generate WORD/LINE comparison change
bar listing

IDPFX
3

LNFMTO
LOCS

U
U

Identifier-prefixed listing lines

LMCSFC
LMTO

Load Module CSECT file compare list

U
U

List group member totals

List not-found member totals only

List only changed entries in summary

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

409

Compare - Process Options
Table 25. Summary of Process Options for Search and Compare (continued)
Valid For
Process Option
Keyword

Description
5

LONGLN
LPSF
LTO

Compare Type

Long lines

MIXED
5

NARROW

FILE

NOPRTCC

LINE

WORD

U
U

List totals only

Mixed input (single-byte/double-byte) text

Narrow (side-by-side) listing

U
U

No sequence numbers

NOSUMS

No summary section

REFMOVR

Reformat override

SDUPM

Search duplicate members

SEQ

NOSEQ

Ignore standard sequence number columns

UPDCMS8

Update CMS8 format

UPDCNTL

Update control

UPDLDEL

Update long control

UPDMVS8

Update MVS8 format

UPDPDEL

Update prefixed delta lines

Update revision

Update revision (2)

Update sequence 0

Update summary only

Wide (side -by -side) listing

UPDREV

UPDREV2

UPDSEQ0

UPDSUMO

WIDE
XREF

Cross reference strings

XWDCMP

Extended word comparison

Y2DTONLY

U
U

List previous -search -following lines

No printer control columns

BYTE

Year 2000 Compare Dates Only

U
U

Notes:
1. Valid for group LINE comparisons only.
2. COBOL, SEQ, and NOSEQ are mutually exclusive.
3. Not supported for PDSE data sets.
4. LMTO, LNFMTO, LPSF, and LTO are mutually exclusive.
5. LONGLN, NARROW, and WIDE are mutually exclusive.
6. All update (UPD) process options are mutually exclusive. Also, they cannot be used with the process option
Y2DTONLY.
7. Y2DTONLY is not supported for change bar listing (process option GWCBL).

The SuperC Compare process options are listed alphabetically and defined below:

410

ALLMEMS

All members. Compare all members including alias entries. This
functions as though all directory entries were selected from a
member list.

ANYC

Any case. SuperC converts the lowercase alphabetic characters (a-z)

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Options
in source data sets to uppercase (A-Z) before comparing the data
sets (the actual input data sets are not modified). Use this option to
cause strings such as “ABC”, “Abc”, “ABc”, ... to compare equally.
Notes:
1. ANYC has the lowest priority operation affecting the SuperC
process. For example, it does not affect any of the strings used
in SuperC compare process statements (except SRCHFOR).
2. The ANYC process option does not apply to characters in
DBCS text strings.
See Figure 230 on page 470 for more information.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.
APNDLST

Append the listing output to the specified or default listing data
set. If the data set does not exist, it is allocated as new. Some data
sets cannot be appended because of the append listing attributes
and new compare listing attribute requirements. SuperC returns an
error code for this condition without adding to the output data set.
Normally, APNDLST allows you to collect listings from separate
comparisons into one named listing data set (a MOD function).
You can sometimes do this without using the APNDLST option by
using the SELECT process statement. This allows you to identify
any number of members. This produces a single composite listing
of a complete or partial PDS with a single SuperC invocation.
This option is valid for all compare types.

APNDUPD

Append the update output to the specified or default update data
set. If the data set does not exist, it is allocated as new.
APNDUPD allows you to collect updates from multiple
comparisons into one update data set. You can also do this without
using the APNDUPD option by using the SELECT process
statement that identifies different members and produces a single
composite update data set.
This option is valid for Line, Word, or Byte Compare.

CKPACKL

Check for packed format. This option determines if the member or
sequential data set has the standard ISPF packed header format. If
required, SuperC unpacks the input data set or member during the
comparison.
This option is valid for Line and Word compare types.

CNPML

Count non-paired PDS member lines for the group summary
listing section. This option is useful for totaling the overall number
of lines processed, “don’t process” lines, and changed lines.
Otherwise, only the paired members are processed and included in
the overall statistics. Members (with CNPML) always count as
changes (inserted or deleted) to the total number of lines.
Only valid for a PDS group Line compare.

COBOL

Ignore columns 1–6 in both F 80 data sets. Data changes in
columns 1–6 are ignored.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.

COVSUM

Conditional summary section. List the final summary section
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

411

Compare - Process Options
and/or the update file for the option UPDSUMO only if there are
differences. This is useful when used in combination with
APNDLST or APNDUPD.
Valid for File, Line, Word, and Byte compare types.
DLMDUP

Don’t list matching duplicate lines. SuperC omits the old data set
source lines and new data set source lines that match from the
side-by-side output listing. This reduces the redundant lines in the
side-by-side old data set source lines columns. It puts more
emphasis on the old data set changed lines and sections of
changes.
This option is valid for the Line compare type in combination with
the WIDE or NARROW process option.

DLREFM

Don’t list old data set reformatted lines. This option omits
reformatted old data set lines from the output listing. They usually
appear as separate lines under new reformatted lines. Only the
new reformatted lines are listed in the output.
Note: DLREFM should not be confused with two other related
process options: REFMOVR and DLMDUP. REFMOVR
temporarily changes the reformatted line status so that lines
can be listed (or excluded) as matched lines. DLMDUP
pertains only to duplicate matched lines for the Wide or
Narrow listing types.
This option is valid only for the Line compare type.

DPACMT

Don’t process asterisk (*) comment lines. Lines with an asterisk in
column 1 are excluded from the compare set. Other forms of
assembler or macro comments are unaffected. SuperC does not
filter out assembler comments appearing on the same line as an
assembler statement or directive.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.

DPADCMT

Don’t process ADA-type comments. ADA comments are whole or
partial lines that appear after the special “--” sequence. Blank lines
are also considered part of the comment set. This option produces
a comparison listing with all comments removed and blanked. The
DPADCMT process option does not recognize comments within
DBCS text strings.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.

DPBLKCL

Don’t process blank compare lines. Source lines in which all of the
compare columns are blank are excluded from the compare set. It
is redundant, but not incorrect, to use this option with DPADCMT,
DPPLCMT, and DPPSCMT.
Note: The CMPCOLM process statement can be used to control
the compare columns inspected. It is possible for the
DPBLKCL option to exclude a line that contains nonblank
data when you use the CMPCOLM statement to limit the
column range of the comparison.

412

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Options
Do not assume that DPBLKCL only excludes complete input blank
lines. For example, a blank line could have sequence numbers in
columns 73-80 and you could compare the data sets with the SEQ
process option.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.
DPCBCMT

Don’t process COBOL-type comment lines. COBOL source lines
with an asterisk in column 7 are excluded from the compare set.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.

DPCPCMT

Don’t process C++ end-of-line type compiler comments. These are
“//” delimited comments. DPPLCMT may also be used with
DPCPCMT when the source file contains “/* ... */” comments
delimiters.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types.

DPFTCMT

Don’t process FORTRAN-type comment lines. FORTRAN source
lines with a “C” in column 1 are excluded from the compare set.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.

DPMACMT

Do not process PC Assembly-type comments. Lines with an “*” in
column 1 are excluded.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types.

DPPLCMT

Don’t process PL/I-type comments. PL/I, C, and REXX comments
(that is, /* ... */ and blank lines) are excluded from the compare
set. This option produces a listing with comments removed and
part comments blanked. Blank lines are defined as lines with
blanks in all compare column positions.
Notes:
1. The SuperC program detects most cases including multiline,
statement embedded, and most quote dependency comments.
However, SuperC may exclude some lines that are not
comments or include comment lines that should have been
excluded. For instance, lines that contain comment delimiters
enclosed within quotes appearing on separate lines are difficult
to parse and may present recognition problems.
2. The DPPLCMT process option does not recognize comments
within DBCS text strings.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.

DPPSCMT

Don’t process PASCAL-type comments. PASCAL-type comments of
the type “(* . . . *)” are filtered and excluded from the compare set
as are blank compare lines. This option produces a comparison
listing with comments removed and part comments blanked. The
DPPSCMT process option does not recognize comments within
DBCS text strings.
Note: Both DPPSCMT and DPPLCMT may be a required
combination for filtering certain nonstandard PASCAL
compiler comments. The combination is allowed. Either may
start a comment but only the starting delimiters type may
terminate the comment.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

413

Compare - Process Options
FMSTOP

Stop the compare on the first mismatch in the data set or PDS
member. This option is valid only for a file compare.

FMVLNS

Flag moved lines. Identifies inserted lines from the new data set
that match deleted lines from the old data set. Inserted-moved
lines are noted with “IM-” and deleted-moved lines are noted with
“DM-” in the listing. These lines are special cases of inserted or
deleted paired lines.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.

GWCBL

Generates Word or Line compare change bar listings. SuperC lists
new data set lines with change bars (“|”) in column 1 for lines that
differ between the new and old data sets. Most deleted lines are
indicated by flagging the lines following the deletion (if possible).
Line compare and Word compare may give slightly different
results. It is a recommended process option to use on text data sets.
GWCBL allows you to see which lines have changes without the
distraction of seeing deleted text lines. Blank lines in the listing
should never be flagged.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.

LMCSFC

Load Module CSECT file compare list. This option lists the name,
number of bytes, and hash sum for each PDS load module CSECT.
Unchanged paired CSECTS are omitted when you specify the
LOCS process option.
This option is only valid for a File compare.

LOCS

List only changed entries in the MEMBER SUMMARY LISTING
section. Unchanged paired entries and non-paired new and old
data set entries are omitted. Preceding the names of these pairs is a
CHNG field to indicate whether they compare the same or
differently.
This option is valid for all compare types.

LONGLN

LONGLN causes SuperC to create a listing with 203 columns,
reflecting up to 176 columns from the source lines. The output data
set may require special print handling as it might exceed the
maximum number of columns handled unless special setup is
arranged.
LONGLN and WIDE both generate wide listings. LONGLN is for
the normal listing format while WIDE is for a side-by-side listing.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.

MIXED

This option indicates that the input text may be a mixture of both
single-byte and double-byte (DBCS) text. Double-byte strings are
recognized and handled differently than if MIXED were not
specified. For instance, single-byte characters are not valid within
double-byte strings. Special terminals (for example, 5520) allow
entry of DBCS characters.
If an input string starts with a shift-out character then MIXED
removes the character from the string. If an input string ends with
a shift-in character then MIXED removes the character from the
string. Leading SO and trailing SI characters are not removed from
strings specified on COLHEAD, NTITLE, or OTITLE process
statements.

|
|
|
|
|
|

414

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Options
This option is valid for the Line and Word compare types.
NARROW

Narrow side-by-side listing. Creates a 132/133 variable listing data
set with only 55 columns from each source data set. Inserted and
deleted lines are flagged and appear side-by-side in the listing
output.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.

NOPRTCC

No printer control columns. SuperC generates “normal” or
NARROW listing data sets with record lengths of 133 columns, or
WIDE or LONGLN listing data sets with 203 columns. These
listings contain printer control columns and page separators.
NOPRTCC eliminates both the page separators and the control
column 1. With NOPRTCC, “normal” and NARROW listings are
132 columns, and WIDE and LONGLN listings are 202 columns.
However, initial title lines and section separators are still
generated.
This option produces a data set that is better for online “browsing”
because it does not have interspersed page separator title lines.
Note: It is possible to use a high LNCT value to achieve the same
purpose as NOPRTCC. However, NOPRTCC is a process
option, is easier to specify, and does not require a separate
LNCT process statement in a process statement data set.
This option is valid for all compare types.

NOSEQ

No sequence numbers. SuperC Processes F 80 standard sequence
number columns as data. This option is extraneous for variable
length records and non-F 80 attribute data sets.
This option is valid for all compare types.

NOSUMS

No summary listing section. This option omits the summary
section including the statistics, options, warning, and error
messages from the listing output.
This option is valid for the Line, Word, and Byte compare types.

REFMOVR

Reformat override. Reformatted lines are not flagged in the output
listing. They are, however, counted for the overall summary
statistics and influence the return code since they are a special case
of an insert/delete pair.
This is an important output filter option. You may wish to accept
formatted lines as changes but not want to browse a change listing
with formatted lines annotated. The option is also useful when
used in combination with some higher level language “don’t
process” comment filter such as DPPLCMT.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.

SEQ

Sequence numbers. Ignore F 80 standard sequence number
columns. Sequence number column changes in columns 73-80 are
ignored with F 80 and columns 1-8 in V 255 records. This is the
SuperC default for F 80/V 255 data sets when the compare type is
Line. It is not the default for Word compare. SEQ is not valid for
any data set that does not have an attribute of F 80/V 255.
This option is valid for the Line or Word compare types.
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

415

Compare - Process Options
UPDCMS8

Update CMS Sequenced 8. Produces a data set that contains both
control records and new data set source lines. Columns 73-80 from
the old DS lines are used as references. Only fixed 80 data sets are
allowed.
SuperC may change the status of matched lines to insert/delete
pairs, enlarging the sequence number gaps of the old data set. The
CMS update data set (when properly named) can be used as input
to CMS XEDIT. For information and an example of this update
data set, see Figure 243 on page 491.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.

UPDCNTL

Update control. Produces a control data set which relates matches,
inserts, deletes, reformats, and “don't process” lines (Line compare
only) using relative line numbers (for Line compare), relative word
positions (for Word compare), or relative byte offsets (for Byte
compare) within the new and old data sets. No source or data from
either input data set is included in the output data set. For
information and an example of this update data set, see
“UPDCNTL—Update Control” on page 491.
Note: UPDCNTL is the only output to directly display “don’t
process” line numbers and lengths from each DP (don’t
process) or MOVED line span. Top inserts or deletes
reference line 1. Bottom inserts or deletes reference the
maximum line value plus 1. Normal compare listings do not
directly indicate DP lines since they have been excluded
from the compare set. They may be indirectly detected
because most line number reference columns (normally on
the extreme right of a listing) refer to the actual line number.
You may detect a “don’t process” gap in the reported line
number values.
This option is valid for the Byte, Line, or Word compare types.

UPDLDEL

Source data set with delta changes. UPDLDEL produces a control
data set that combines new source matched lines and changes from
the new and old source data sets. The control lines are titled as
follows:
Title
Control line
*HDR1, *HDR2, and *HDR3
Header titles and data
*MMatched line sequence header
*IInserted line sequence header
*I-RP
Inserted line sequence header for replacement lines
*I-RF
Inserted line sequence header for reformatted lines
*DDeleted line sequence header
*D-RP
Deleted line sequence header for replacement lines
*D-RF
Deleted line sequence header for reformatted lines.
Header control records delimit the copied data set lines. This
allows you to quickly find changed areas. The lines are full length
records. The lines appear similar to the information on a LONG
listing. The two input data sets must have the same fixed LRECL
or each have a variable RECFM.
You should be able to edit this data set to obtain a final composite
source data set including all the change activity of two different

416

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Options
developers. For information and an example of this update data
set, see “UPDLDEL—Update Long Source and Delta Data Set” on
page 495.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.
UPDPDEL

Update prefixed delta lines. This option produces a control data set
containing header records and complete (up to 32K line length
limit) delta lines from the input source data sets. Each output
record is prefixed with identification and information. The update
data set is a variable length data set reflecting the input source
data set characteristics. For information and an example of this
update data set, see “UPDPDEL—Prefixed Delta Lines” on page
496.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.

UPDMVS8

Update MVS Sequenced 8. Produces a data set that contains both
control and new data set source lines. New data set sequence
numbers columns 73-80 are used (when possible) as insert
references while deletes are from old line columns 73-80. The
format is compatible for MVS IEBUPDTE input. Only fixed 80 DS
are allowed. For information and an example of this update data
set, see Figure 247 on page 495.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.

UPDREV

Update Revision. UPDREV produces a copy of the new data set
with SCRIPT/VS .rc on/off or BookMaster® :rev/:erev revision codes
delimiting most script lines that contain changes.
You may wish to contrast the source lines delimited by the
UPDREV option and a similar flagging of the lines with changes
from the output listing data set as produced by the GWCBL
process.
Note: The revision character used is controlled by using the
REVREF process statement. For details, see
“REVREF—Revision Code Reference” on page 444.
A REVREF process statement (for example, REVREF REFID=ABC or
REVREF RCVAL=1) is used to define the revision level (SCRIPT/VS
tags) or reference ID (BookMaster tags). Alternatively, SCRIPT/VS
.rc delimiters may be controlled by the first record in the new data
set. (For example, .rc 2 ¦ as the first record causes level 2 to be
used).
Note: BookMaster requires the REFID value to be defined with a
:revision tag and “RUN=YES” attribute to have the change
character inserted in the processed document.
For information and an example of this update data set, see
“UPDREV—Update Revision” on page 497.
Valid for LINE and WORD compare types.

UPDREV2

Update Revision (2). UPDREV2 is identical to UPDREV with the
exception that data between the following BookMaster tags are not
deleted in the update data set:

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

417

Compare - Process Options
:cgraphic.
:ecgraphic.
:fig.
:efig.
:lblbox.
:elblbox.
:nt.
:ent.
:screen.
:escreen.
:xmp.
:exmp.

Valid for Line and Word compare types.
UPDSEQ0

Update data set using no column number (zero) references.
UPDSEQ0 produces a control data set that relates inserts and
deletes to the relative line numbers of the old data set. Both control
records and new data set source lines are included in the output
data set. This option is similar to UPDCMS8 except it uses relative
line numbers (starting with zero) instead of sequence numbers
from columns 73-80. Both fixed and variable record length lines are
allowed. Fixed LRECL < 80 are padded to 80 characters. Insert
lines are full fixed- or variable-length copies of the new input data
set lines. Fixed-length record data sets with an LRECL <=80
produce a fixed-length data set with the same record length. For
information and an example of this update data set, see Figure 252
on page 499.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.

UPDSUMO

Update Summary only. UPDSUMO produces an Update data set of
four lines (New-dataset-id, Old-dataset-id, totals header, single
summary line). The summary line is tagged with a “T” in column
1 and the summary statistics are located at fixed offsets in the
output line. The data set has an LRECL of 132. For information and
an example of this update data set, see “UPDSUMO—Update
Summary Only” on page 500.
This option is valid for the Line, Word, or Byte compare types.

WIDE

Wide side-by-side listing. Creates a 202/203 listing data set with
up to 80 columns from each source data set line. Inserted and
deleted lines are flagged and appear side-by-side in the listing
output.
This option is valid for the Line compare type.

XWDCMP

Extended Word compare. The “word” character set contains all
letters, numbers and the national characters (“$”, “#”, and “@”).
SuperC interprets all other characters as word delimiters. For
example:
“ ABCD(EFGH) JKL ”
would be two words using normal word compare, but five (three
words and two delimiters) with the XWDCMP process option.
Consecutive delimiters are interpreted as part of the same
pseudo-word.
This option is valid for the Word compare type.

Y2DTONLY

418

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Year 2000 Compare Dates Only. Indicates that the comparison

Compare - Process Options
process is to be performed only on the dates defined by the Year
2000 Date Definition process statements. That is, all data in the
input files will be ignored in the comparison process apart from
that defined by NY2C, NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C, OY2Z, OY2D,
and OY2P process statements. For further details on these process
statements, see “NY2C, NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C, OY2Z, OY2D,
OY2P —Year 2000 Date Definitions” on page 441.
Notes:
1. Y2DTONLY causes a “record-for-record” comparison to be
performed between the two input files, whereby dates are
simply checked for being equal or unequal. (The “high/low”
comparison logic that SuperC normally uses is not applied in
the case of Y2DTONLY and, as such, the relative values of the
dates have no bearing on the result of the comparison.)
2. Y2DTONLY is not supported for the process option GWCBL
(change bar listing).
Valid for LINE compare type.

SuperC Compare Process Statements
This section lists the process statements in alphabetical order, showing their syntax,
operand definitions, and examples. All process statements that are shown with a
Compare syntax can be:
v Used in a profile data set with the SuperC utility (option 3.12).
v Entered in a statements data set with the SuperCE utility (option 3.13).
All process statements that are shown with a Search syntax can be entered in a
statements data set and used with the Search-ForE utility (option 3.15), but not
with the Search-For utility (option 3.14).
Each process statement description contains the following information:
Description

A description of function and operation of the statement. This
description may also refer to other statements that can be used
with or affected by this statement.

Examples

Sample usage of the statements.

Syntax

Diagrams for coding the statement, using either Compare syntax,
Search syntax, or both if applicable, according to the conventions
listed in “Process Statement Notation Conventions.”

Operands

A description of any required or optional keywords or operands.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

419

Compare - Process Statements
v Stacked operands shown in braces ({ }) are required operands from which you
must select one.
v Syntax diagrams that end with an ellipsis (...) allow you to repeat operands
more than once.
v If a statement contains a KYWD operand, this keyword must precede any
repetition of the operands that follow.
The compare type that you select determines the process statements available
(Table 26).
Table 26. Summary of Process Statements for Compare and Search
Valid For
Process Statement

Compare Type

Keyword

Description

CHNGV

Change listing value

CMPBOFS

Compare byte offsets

CMPCOLM

Compare (search) columns: new, old, search
files

CMPCOLMN

Compare columns: new file

CMPCOLMO

Compare columns: old file

CMPLINE

Compare lines

Compare sections

Define column headings

DPLINE

Do not process lines (containing a string)

DPLINEC

Do not process lines—continuation

LNCT

Line count

LPSFV

List previous -search -following value

LSTCOLM

List columns

Change text: new or search file

CMPSECT
COLHEAD

NCHGT
NEXCLUDE

FILE

LINE

WORD

BYTE

U
U

Focus on data: new file

NTITLE

Alternative listing title: new file

NY2AGE

Year 2000 aging option: new file

NY2C

Year 2000 date definition: new file, character
format

NY2Z

Year 2000 date definition: new file, zoned
decimal format

NY2D

Year 2000 date definition: new file, unsigned
packed decimal format

NY2P

Year 2000 date definition: new file, packed
decimal format

Change text: old file

NFOCUS

OCHGT
OEXCLUDE

Exclude data: old file

Focus on data: old file

OTITLE

Alternative listing title: old file

OY2AGE

Year 2000 aging option: old file

OFOCUS

420

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

U
U

Exclude data: new file

U
U

Compare - Process Statements
Table 26. Summary of Process Statements for Compare and Search (continued)
Valid For
Process Statement

Compare Type

Keyword

Description

FILE

LINE

WORD

BYTE

OY2C

Year 2000 date definition: old file, character
format

OY2Z

Year 2000 date definition: old file, zoned
decimal format

OY2D

Year 2000 date definition: old file, unsigned
packed decimal format

OY2P

Year 2000 date definition: old file, packed
decimal format

REVREF

Revision code reference

SELECT

Select PDS members (MVS)

SLIST

Statements listing option

SRCHFOR

Search for a string

SRCHFORC

Search for a string—continuation

Y2PAST

Year 2000 global date option

Process Statement comment to be printed

Process Statement comment not to be
printed

Note:
1. Valid only for listing types DELTA and LONG.
2. FILE compare type is valid only with ROWS option of NEXCLUDE, OEXCLUDE, NFOCUS and OFOCUS.

You must include these statements in an input control data set. The process
statements data set can be fixed or variable, and its record length can be large, but
you must enter process statements only in columns 1 through 72. Only one process
statement can be entered per line. SuperC checks process statements and required
operands for completeness before beginning a comparison. Comments are not
allowed at the end of the line after the statement has been completed. Comment
lines should be separate statements. Some statements cause an error message if
comments are included on the same line.
You can enter some process statements several times in the statements data set
(DPLINE or CMPLINE) as they define independent actions to be taken in the
comparison. Others redefine their process scope after their first inclusion (LNCT).
Including more than one redefining statement is not recommended but is not
reported as an error. There is also no specific rule concerning which statement
definition (or re-definition) prevails—the first (least often) or last (most often).
Note: It is best to retain and inactivate old process statements rather than deleting
them from the statement data set. This can be easily done by putting a
period and an asterisk (.*) in the first two character positions. These
statements are ignored and not listed by the SuperC program when the data
set is used as a statement data set.
The SuperC Compare Process Statements are listed alphabetically and defined in
the following sections.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

421

Compare - Process Statements

CHNGV - CHNG (Compare Type) Line Value
Specifies the maximum number of match lines to precede or follow changed lines
in the output listing. This process statement has no formatting effect if you do not
use the CHNG listing type. The default value is 10.
Compare Types – Line, Word, and Byte

Examples
SuperC includes up to 5 match lines before
and after a changed line in the output listing.

CHNGV 5

Syntax
CHNGV num

Operand Description
num

422

A decimal number between 1 and 1000.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Statements

CMPBOFS - Compare Byte Offsets
Compares a data set between byte limits. The start/stop reference values must be
hexadecimal values without quotes. Zero (0) is the lowest hexadecimal offset value
that you can specify. The statement may be specified on one complete line or may
have separate CMPBOFS statements enabling the limits to be fully specified within
the 72-character statement line. There are keyword operands: TOP, BTM, NTOP,
NBTM, OTOP, and OBTM.
Compare Types – Byte

Examples
CMPBOFS NTOP 1000 OTOP 5E00

CMPBOFS NTOP 1000 CMPBOFS OTOP 5E00

SuperC interprets the two CMPBOFS
statement sequences as compare from hex
offset 1000 to the last byte of the new data
set and from hex offset 5E00 to the last byte
of the old data set.
Performs the same function as the statement
in the previous example but it is specified as
two separate statements.

Syntax
CMPBOFS KYWD hex-offset [ ...]

Operand Description
KYWD
The keyword may be one of the following:
TOP New Top and Old Top specification. Defines the byte offset (zero
based) to start the Byte compare for both data sets or members.
BTM New Bottom and Old Bottom specification. Defines the byte offset
(zero based) to end the Byte compare for both data sets or
members. This value may be greater than the data set size but the
omission of the BTM specification accomplishes the same objective.
NTOP New Top. Defines the byte offset (zero based) to start the Byte
compare for the new data set or member.
OTOP Old Top. Same as NTOP but refers to the old data set or member.
NBTM
New Bottom. Defines the last byte position to end the Byte
compare in the new data set or members.
OBTM
Old Bottom. Same as NBTM but refers to the old data set or
member.
Hex offset
A hexadecimal value without quotes. Maximum size: 8 hexadecimal digits.
Note: If you do not specify “TOP”, “NTOP”, or “OTOP”, SuperC defaults to the
top of the data set. If you do not specify “BTM”, “NBTM”, or “OBTM”,
SuperC defaults to the last byte of the data set.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

423

Compare - Process Statements

CMPCOLM, CMPCOLMN, CMPCOLMO - Compare Columns
CMPCOLM

Applies to the columns in both the new (or search) data set and
old data set

CMPCOLMN Applies to the columns only in the new data set
CMPCOLMO Applies to the columns only in the old data set.
SuperC compares the data from the columns of the input data set. Up to 15
compare ranges/individual-columns are allowed and may be entered on additional
CMPCOLM, CMPCOLMN, or CMPCOLMO statements. The column values and
ranges must be in ascending order.
Notes:
1. Some process options (SEQ, NOSEQ, and COBOL) also define CMPCOLMS.
The CMPCOLMS statement overrides all of these options.
2. CMPCOLM, CMPCOLMN and CMPCOLMO cannot be used for WORD
compare type or Search if the input contains a mixture of DBCS and non-DBCS
data.
3. CMPCOLM, CMPCOLMN and CMPCOLMO cannot be used when using
FOCUS COLS or EXCLUDE COLS.
4. Do not use the CMPCOLM, CMPCOLMN and CMPCOLMO process statements
if the Y2DTONLY process option has been specified.
Compare Types — Line and Word

Examples
CMPCOLM 25:75
CMPCOLM 30:60,75
CMPCOLM 30:60 75

CMPCOLMN 1:72 CMPCOLMO 9:80

Compares columns 25 through 75 in both
data sets.
Compares columns 30 through 60 and
column 75 in both data sets.
Performs the same function as the previous
example. Notice that the comma and space
are equivalent.
Compare different columns from each data
set.

Syntax
CMPCOLM start-colm[:stop-colm][,...]
CMPCOLMN start-colm[:stop-colm][,...]
CMPCOLMO start-colm[:stop-colm][,...]

Operand Description

424

start-colm

A number that identifies the column in which SuperC begins the
comparison.

stop-colm

A number that identifies the column in which SuperC ends the
comparison. This number is separated from the start-colm value by
a colon (:).

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Statements

CMPLINE - Compare Lines
Compares two data sets between line limits. The reference values may be line
numbers or data patterns. The statement may be specified on one complete line or
may have separate CMPLINE statements for each of the keyword operands: TOP,
BTM, NTOP, NBTM, OTOP, and OBTM.
Compare Types — Line and Word

Examples
CMPLINE TOP 55 BTM 99
CMPLINE NTOP 55 NBTM 99
CMPLINE NTOP ’ABCD’,5:66
CMPLINE OTOP ’ABCD’

Compares lines 55 through 99 in both data
sets.
Limits the comparison to lines 55 through 99
in the new data set.
Starts the comparison when the first ″ABCD″
is detected in columns 5 through 69.
Starts the comparison when SuperC detects
the first “ABCD” in any column of the old
data set.

Syntax
CMPLINE KYWD {rel-line-#
{,’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]}

}[ ...]

Operand Description
KYWD
The keyword may be one of the following:
TOP New and Old Top. Defines the beginning line in both data sets or
members.
BTM New and Old Bottom. Defines the ending line in both data sets or
members.
NTOP New Top. Defines the beginning line in the new data set.
NBTM
New Bottom. Defines the ending line in the new data set.
OTOP Old Top. Defines the beginning line in the old data set.
OBTM
Old Bottom. Defines the ending line in the old data set.
rel-line-#
The relative number of the record in the data set or member. Valid range =
1 to 999999.
string Character string enclosed within single quotes. For embedded single
quotes, use two consecutive quotes (''). For example, enter 'don''t' for the
string “don’t”.
start-colm
A number that identifies the column in which SuperC begins its search for
string. All columns to the left of this column are ignored.
stop-colm
A number that identifies the column in which SuperC ends its search for
string, but only for that record. If the data set contains more records, the
search continues with the next record, beginning with the column specified
as the start-colm.
This number is separated from the start-colm value by a colon (:). All
columns to the right of this column are ignored. If the colon and stop-colm
are not entered, only the start-colm value is used. For example, if you
specify ’ABCD’ as a string that must exist between columns 5 and 69, the

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

425

Compare - Process Statements
search really includes columns 5 to 72. Therefore, the string can be found
even if the first character is in column 69, with the others in columns 70,
71, and 72.
Notes:
1. If SuperC does not find the “top” condition you specify (for example, a pattern
is incorrect), the compare continues but usually reports zero lines processed for
this data set.
2. If you do not specify “TOP”, “NTOP”, or “OTOP”, SuperC defaults to the top
of the data set. If you do not specify “BTM”, “NBTM”, or “OBTM”, SuperC
defaults to the end of the data set.

426

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Statements

CMPSECT - Compare Sections
Compares multiple sections from one sequential or PDS member to another
sequential or PDS member. It is not valid for a PDS group compare of more than
one member. It is functionally similar to CMPLINE but requires a section ID name
to associate all keyword operands to a particular compare section.
Compare Types — Line and Word

Examples
CMPSECT SECT01 TOP 25 BTM 50
CMPSECT SECT02 NTOP 60 NBTM 70 CMPSECT
SECT02 OTOP 65 OBTM 75
CMPSECT SECTX TOP ’PART1:’,2:10 CMPSECT
SECTX BTM ’END PART1:’,2:10

CMPSECT SECTY NTOP ’PART2:’,2:10 CMPSECT
SECTY OTOP ’PART2:’,6:20 CMPSECT SECTY
BTM ’END PART2:’,2:10

Compares lines 25 through 50 in both data
sets or members.
Compares lines 60 through 70 in the new
data set to lines 65 through 75 in the old data
set.
Starts the comparison of both data sets when
SuperC detects the string “PART1:” in
columns 2 through 10 and ends the
comparison when SuperC detects the string
“END PART1:” in columns 2 through 10.
Compares a section in the new data set to a
section in the old data set. The section in the
new data set begins with the string “PART2:”
in columns 2 through 10 and ends with the
string “END PART2:” in columns 2 through
10. The section in the old data set begins
with the string “PART2:” in columns 6
through 20 and ends with the string “END
PART2:” in columns 2 through 10.

Note: All of the previous statements could be combined to compare multiple
sections of the new and old data sets.

Syntax
CMPSECT KYWD {section-id
}[...
{,’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]}[...]

]

Operand Description
KYWD
The keyword may be one of the following:
TOP New and Old Top. Defines the beginning line in both compare
sections.
BTM New and Old Bottom. Defines the ending line in both compare
sections.
NTOP New Top. Defines the beginning line in the new compare section.
NBTM
New Bottom. Defines the ending line in the new compare section.
OTOP Old Top. Defines the beginning line in the old compare section.
OBTM
Old Bottom. Defines the ending line in the old compare section.
section-id
The relative number of the record in the data set or member. Valid range =
1 to 999999.
string Character string enclosed within single quotes. For embedded single
quotes, use two consecutive quotes (''). For example, enter 'don''t' for the
string “don’t”.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

427

Compare - Process Statements
start-colm
A number that identifies the column in which SuperC begins its search for
string. All columns to the left of this column are ignored.
stop-colm
A number that identifies the column in which SuperC ends its search for
string, but only for that record. If the data set contains more records, the
search continues with the next record, beginning with the column specified
as the start-colm.
This number is separated from the start-colm value by a colon (:). All
columns to the right of this column are ignored. If the colon and stop-colm
are not entered, only the start-colm value is used. For example, if you
specify ’ABCD’ as a string that must exist between columns 5 and 69, the
search really includes columns 5 to 72. Therefore, the string can be found
even if the first character is in column 69, with the others in columns 70,
71, and 72.
Note: If a “top” condition is not found (for example, a pattern is incorrect), the
compare continues but will usually report zero lines processed for this data
set.

428

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Statements

COLHEAD—Define Column Headings
Defines column headings and specifies the location and format of the
corresponding data to be displayed. For an example of a listing with column
headings, see Figure 236 on page 481.
Note: COLHEAD is not available for side-by-side listings. (See “Side-By-Side
Listings” on page 486).

Compare Types
LINE only.

Syntax
COLHEAD heading1, heading2, start-print-column:end-print-column,
N start-column:end-column data-format-indicator,
O start-column:end-column data-format-indicator

Operand Description
heading1

The heading to appear on the first line for the print
column.

heading2

The heading to appear on the second line for the
print column.

start-print-column

The starting print column for the heading
specified.

end-print-column

The ending print column for the heading specified.
(Must be separated from the start-print-column by a
colon.)
Note: If the print-column range is shorter than the
heading specified, the heading will be
truncated.

Indicates the operands following relate to the new
data set.

start-column

The starting position in the new data set of the data
to be displayed.

end-column

The ending position in the new data set of the data
to be displayed. (Must be separated from the
start-column by a colon.)

Data Format Indicator

The format of the data in the new data set to be
displayed:
C
Character
B
Binary
D
Unsigned packed decimal
P
Packed decimal
Z
Zoned decimal

Indicates the operands following relate to the old
data set.

start-column

The starting position in the old data set of the data
to be displayed.

end-column

The ending position in the old data set of the data
to be displayed. (Must be separated from the
start-column by a colon.)
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

429

Compare - Process Statements
Data Format Indicator

The format of the data in the old data set to be
displayed (as for the new data set).

Examples
COLHEAD ’START’,’DATE’,1:7,N 1:6 P,O 11:16

430

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Defines a print column with a heading of
“START” in the first line and “DATE” in
the second heading line, headings to start
in print column 1. The data to be
displayed from the new data set is in
positions 1 through 6 and is in packed
format. The data to be displayed from the
old data set is in positions 11 through 16
and is in (the default) character format.

Compare - Process Statements

DPLINE, DPLINEC - Don’t Process Lines
DPLINE
DPLINEC

Don’t Process Lines
Don’t Process Lines Continuation Condition.

The Don’t Process Line statement removes from the compare set lines that can be
recognized by either a unique character string or a combination of related strings.
DPLINEC is the continuation of the immediately preceding DPLINE or DPLINEC
process statement. All the strings in a DPLINE/DPLINEC sequence must be found
on the same input line for the line to be excluded.
A start-column or range can also be used to restrict the columns scanned. Relative
start-columns and relative stop-columns are valid only on DPLINEC statements.
This allows you to specify a relative start position depending on the end of the
previous DPLINE/DPLINEC in the sequence relationship. Normal scanning starts
at the beginning of the input line (resulting in the first found string) unless
restricted by user column specifications or the relative operator.
Notes:
1. DPLINE and DPLINEC columns are not restricted by compare columns. The
data patterns are also not affected by the ANYC process option. See Figure 230
on page 470 for more information.
2. The relative start operator “+” introduces another important capability of
backtrack and retry by advancing the starting scan position. Backtrack allows
you to identify a string through a sequence of DPLINE/DPLINEC statements
and have a number of similar strings (all on the same line) be examined until
the correct sequence is found. This contrasts to the “first found”
DPLINE/DPLINEC string and a non-relative DPLINEC rejection when the
DPLINEC condition is not met.
Compare Types — Line and Word

Examples
DPLINE ’ABCDE’ DPLINE ’ABCDE’,1:99999

DPLINE ’AbCde’,2 DPLINE ’AbCde’,2:2

DPLINE ’ABCDE’ DPLINEC ’BDEF ’
DPLINE ’ABCDE’,2:50
DPLINE ’AB’CD’,2:50
DPLINE X’C1C27BF1’,2:50
DPLINE ’ABC’ DPLINEC ’BDEF’,+

DPLINE ’ABC’s DPLINEC ’BDEF’,+5

Each of the following two statements exclude
lines containing the string “ABCDE” from
the compare set.
Each of the following two statements exclude
lines where the string “ABCDE” starts in
column 2.
Both statements exclude lines that contain
the strings “ABCDE” and “BDEF ”.
Excludes lines where the string “ABCDE”
starts in columns 2 through 50.
Excludes lines where the string “AB'CDE”
starts in columns 2 through 50.
Excludes lines where the string “AB,1” starts
in columns 2 through 50.
Exclude lines containing the string “ABC”
followed in the same line by the string
“BDEF”.
Exclude lines containing the string “ABC”
and “BDEF” when the string “BDEF” starts
in the same line 5 columns after the end of
the string “ABC”.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

431

Compare - Process Statements

Syntax
DPLINE ’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]
DPLINEC ’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]
[,+start-colm[:+stop-colm]]
[,+]

Operand Description
string

Character string enclosed within single quotes. For embedded
single quotes, use two consecutive quotes ('').

start-colm

A number that identifies the column in which SuperC begins its
search for string. All columns to the left of this column are ignored.

stop-colm

A number that identifies the column in which SuperC ends its
search for string, but only for that record. If the data set contains
more records, the search continues with the next record, beginning
with the column specified as the start-colm.
This number is separated from the start-colm value by a colon (:).
All columns to the right of this column are ignored. If the colon
and stop-colm are not entered, only the start-colm value is used.
This causes a search of a single column for the first character of
string.
All columns to the right of the column that the last character of
string can occupy are ignored. For example, if you specify ’ABCD’
as a string that must exist between columns 5 and 69, the search
really includes columns 5 to 72. Therefore, the string can be found
even if the first character is in column 69, with the others in
columns 70, 71, and 72.

432

+start-colm

The relative column following the end of the previous “Don’t
process” string in which this string must start.

+stop-colm

The relative column following the end of the previous “Don’t
process” string in which SuperC ends the search for string.

Following the previous “Don’t process” string, scan to the end of
the line for string (same as + 1:99999).

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Statements

LNCT - Line Count
Specifies the number of lines per page in the listing output. Ignored if the
NOPRTCC process option is specified. The default value is 55 lines.
Compare Types — File, Line, Word, and Byte

Examples
Lists up to 66 lines per page.

LNCT 66

Syntax
LNCT num

Operand Description
num

A decimal number between 15 and 999999.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

433

Compare - Process Statements

LSTCOLM - List Columns
Selects a range of columns to be listed in the output. This statement overrides the
SuperC convention of generating a listing starting with column 1 from the input
source data set.
LSTCOLM column selections must be contiguous and can be no wider than the
output listing line without truncation.
Compare Types — Line only

Examples
LSTCOLM 20:90

Lists columns 20 through 90 in the output
listing.

Syntax
LSTCOLM range

Operand Description
range

434

Two column numbers separated by a single colon (:). Do not leave blanks
on either side of the colon.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Statements

NCHGT, OCHGT - Change Text
NCHGT
OCHGT

Change new input text string
Change old input text string.

Change the input source image before performing the comparison. More than one
change text statement can be contained in the statements data set.
The find-mask and replacement string need not be the same length. The
replacement string may even indicate a null string. Unequal replacements result in
either blank insertions on short replacements (at the end of the found word) or
downstream blank deletions to accommodate larger replacements (deleted blanks
are selected from downstream blank pairs). The net effect of a longer string
replacement of a shorter string shows as a reformat of the original line. The
replaced text line appears in the output instead of the input text.
One or more question marks (“?”) can be used as “wildcard” characters in the
find-mask or string. A wildcard in the output string stores the input character
“as is”.
Compare Types — Line and Word

Examples
NCHGT ’ABCD’,’XXXX’
OCHGT ’ABCD’,’XXXX’,1:50
OCHGT ’ABCD’,’,1:50
NCHGT X’7B01’,’:1’,6
NCHGT ’PREF???’,’NPREF’
NCHGT ’PREF???’,’NPREF??’

Changes all “ABCD”s to “XXXX” (exclude)
in the new data set.
Restricts the mask search to columns 1
through 50 in the old data set.
Changes string “ABCD” to a null string in
columns 1 through 50 in the old data set.
Uses the hexadecimal string change
convention.
Changes the string “PREF” and the wildcard
characters to the string “NPREF”.
Changes the string “PREF” and the first
wildcard character to the string “NPREF”.
The second and third wildcard characters are
not changed.

Syntax
NCHGT ’find-mask’,’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]
OCHGT ’find-mask’,’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]

Operand Description
find-mask

The change text string to be replaced. The find-mask must be in
single quotes. Use two consecutive single quotes for quotes within
the find-mask.

string

A character string that replaces the contents of find-mask before a
comparison or search. Single quotation marks are required. If the
character string contains a single quotation mark, you must enter it
in the process statement as two single quotation marks.
You can include one or more question marks in the string. It shows
that the position it occupies can be filled by any character, one
character per question mark.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

435

Compare - Process Statements
If there is not enough space for the string to be substituted, the
substitution does not occur. Instead, a warning message is printed
at the bottom of the listing.
start-colm

A number that identifies the column in which SuperC begins its
search for string. All columns to the left of this column are ignored.

stop-colm

Notes:
1. Having a string replacement that is longer than the replaced string is not
always possible with some lines. A warning message signals when this happens
and the problem change-text statement will be designated in the summary
section.
2. A string replacement using the “null” character notation does not always work
as first envisioned. Nulling a character string only shifts following characters
up through the next blank character. One or more blank pad characters are
applied to take up the null positions of the original string. Entire lines are not
shifted—only nonblank character strings.
NCHGT ’ ’,’
blank insertion.
NCHGT ’???’,’

436

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Statements

NEXCLUDE, OEXCLUDE —Exclude Data:
NEXCLUDE—Exclude applies to the new data set
OEXCLUDE—Exclude applies to the old data set
Excludes rows or columns of data from the comparison. Up to 254 “exclude”
statements can be entered for each data set.
Notes:
1. NEXCLUDE and OEXCLUDE statements are mutually exclusive to NFOCUS
and OFOCUS statements respectively if using the same operand keyword
(ROWS or COLS).
2. Do not use the NEXCLUDE or OEXCLUDE process option if the Y2DTONLY
process option has been specified.
3. Valid row range = 1 to 999999.
4. FOCUS COLS and EXCLUDE COLS cannot be used when using CMPCOLM,
CMPCOLMN or CMPCOLMO.

Compare Types
FILE (ROWS option only) and LINE.

Syntax
xEXCLUDE KYWD start-position:end-position

where xEXCLUDE can be either NEXCLUDE (new data set) or OEXCLUDE (old
data set), and KYWD can be either ROWS or COLS. COLS is not valid for a FILE
compare.

Operand Description
start-position

If ROWS operand used, the first row (record) to be
excluded from the comparison. If COLS operand
used, the first column to be excluded from the
comparison.

end-position

If ROWS operand used, the last row (record) to be
excluded from the comparison. If COLS operand
used, the last column to be excluded from the
comparison. (Must be separated from the
start-position by a colon.)

Examples
NEXCLUDE ROWS 5:900
OEXCLUDE ROWS 1:900
OEXCLUDE COLS 100:199

Excludes rows (records) 5 through 900 on the new data set.
Excludes rows (records) 1 through 900 on the old data set.
Excludes columns 100 through 199 on the old data set.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

437

Compare - Process Statements

NFOCUS, OFOCUS— Focus on Data
NFOCUS—Focus applies to the new data set
OFOCUS—Focus applies to the old data set
Selects (or “focuses on”) rows or columns of data to be compared. In other words,
only these rows or columns are considered when performing the comparison (or
search) process and all other rows or columns are ignored. Up to 254 “focus”
statements can be entered for each data set.
Notes:
1. NFOCUS and OFOCUS statements are mutually exclusive to NEXCLUDE and
OEXCLUDE statements respectively if using the same operand keyword
(ROWS or COLS).
2. Do not use the NFOCUS or OFOCUS process statement if the Y2DTONLY
process statement has been specified.
3. Valid row range = 1 to 999999.

Compare Types
FILE (ROWS option only) and LINE.

Syntax
xFOCUS KYWD start-position:end-position

where xFOCUS can be either NFOCUS (new data set) or OFOCUS (old data set),
and KYWD can be either ROWS or COLS. COLS is not valid for a FILE compare.

Operand Description
start-position

If ROWS operand used, the first row (record) to be
selected for the comparison. If COLS operand used,
the first column to be selected for the comparison.

end-position

If ROWS operand used, the last row (record) to be
selected for the comparison. If COLS operand used,
the last column to be selected for the comparison.
(Must be separated from the start-position by a
colon.)

Examples
NFOCUS ROWS 28:90
OFOCUS ROWS 150:165
OFOCUS COLS 10:18

438

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Selects rows (records) 28 through 90 on the new data set.
Selects rows (records) 150 through 165 on the old data set.
Selects columns 10 through 18 on the old data set.

Compare - Process Statements

NTITLE, OTITLE - Alternate Listing Title
NTITLE
OTITLE

New listing data set title identification
Old listing data set title identification.

Allows you to specify an alternate data set identification in the output listing
(54-character limit for each title identifier). This replaces the data set and library
names used in the compare.
Note: This option is most useful when a single non-group compare is done on a
temporary data set. The NTITLE/OTITLE identification may be more
meaningful than the actual data set names used in the compare. This is only
allowed for single members or sequential data sets.

Compare Types
File, Line, Word, and Byte

Examples
NTITLE ’New Substitution Name’
OTITLE ’Old Substitution Name’

Change the titles in the output listing of the
new and old data set.

Syntax
NTITLE ’string’
OTITLE ’string’

Operand Description
string The string can be up to 54 characters and must be delimited by single
quotes. Use two consecutive single quotes for each embedded quote. The
string is not checked for valid MVS data set name characters.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

439

Compare - Process Statements

NY2AGE, OY2AGE —Year 2000 Aging Option
NY2AGE—Aging applies to the new data set
OY2AGE—Aging applies to the old data set
Ages all of the defined dates in either the new or old data set. That is, the number
of years specified is added to the “year” portion of each defined date in the data
set concerned.
Note: Dates are defined by the Year 2000 Date Definition process statements NY2C,
NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C, OY2Z, OY2D and OY2P; see “NY2C, NY2Z,
NY2D, NY2P, OY2C, OY2Z, OY2D, OY2P —Year 2000 Date Definitions” on
page 441.

Compare Types
LINE

Syntax
NY2AGE years
OY2AGE years

Operand Description
years

A number (0 to 999) indicating the number of years by which all defined
dates in the data set are to be aged.

Examples
OY2AGE 28

440

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Ages all defined dates in the “old” data set by 28 years
before being compared. The listing will show the original
date. For example, a defined date in the “old” data set with
a value equating to March 1, 1997, would be aged to March
1, 2025 before being compared to its equivalent in the “new”
data set.

Compare - Process Statements

NY2C, NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C, OY2Z, OY2D, OY2P —Year
2000 Date Definitions
NY2C—New
NY2Z—New
NY2D—New
NY2P—New
OY2C—Old
OY2Z—Old
OY2D—Old
OY2P—Old

data
data
data
data

set,
set,
set,
set,

date
date
date
date

in
in
in
in

character format
zoned decimal format
unsigned packed decimal format
packed decimal format

Notes:
1. If any Year 2000 Date Definition process statements are used, a Y2PAST process
statement should also be used so that the “century” portion of the date can be
determined where necessary. (If a Y2PAST process statement is not present, a
default fixed window based on the current year is used.)
2. For a description of each date format (character, zone, decimal and packed), see
“” on page 443.
3. If any Year 2000 Date Definition process statements are used, an information line
is generated on the listing output.
4. Do not use any Year 2000 Date Definition process statements if using the
COLHEAD process statement.
Defines the location and format of a date field on the input data set. Up to 254
date definition statements can be entered for each data set. The matching of the
new to the old dates is performed according to the sequence that the statements
are entered. That is, the first defined old date is matched to the first defined new
date.
If the number of date definition statements for one data set differ to the number of
date definition statements for the other data set, the location and format details for
the “missing” date definition statements are assumed to be the same as their
counterpart date definition statements for the other data set.

Compare Types
LINE

Syntax
xY2y start-column:end-column date-format EMPTY

where xY2y can be either NY2y (new data set) or OY2y (old data set), and y can
be either C (character format), Z (zoned decimal format), D (unsigned packed
decimal format), or P (packed decimal format).
Note: The EMPTY keyword, when used, must be preceded by a space.

Operand Description
start-column

The first position of the date in the input data set.

end-column

The last position of the date in the input data set.
(Must be separated from the start-column by a
colon.)

date-format

A mask representing the format of the date.
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

441

Compare - Process Statements
For a Julian date, the mask must be either YYDDD
or YYYYDDD.
For date formats other than Julian, the mask must
contain 2 “D”s (representing the day part of the
date field), 2 “M”s (representing the month), and
either 2 or 4 “Y”s (representing the year) or, if the
date contains a year only, it must contain either 2
or 4 “Y”s.
If the date is character, there may also be a
separator between the different parts. In this case,
you can represent the position of the separators by
one of the following:
S
. (period)
/ (forward slash)
: (colon)
Note: The length of the date-format mask must
correspond to the length of the date in the
input data set as indicated by the values of
start-column and end-column.
EMPTY

This keyword is optional. If it is entered, the
defined date field is checked for containing zeros,
spaces, low-values, or high-values before
commencing the comparison process. If any of
these values are found, the date will not be
converted according to the Y2PAST criteria but will
instead be converted to an extended format with
the initial value. For example, a date defined by
the process statement OY2C YYMMDD which contains
all zeros will be compared as “YYYYMMDD” with
a value of zeros.

Examples
NY2C 1:8 MMDDYYYY 9:16 MMDDYYYY 21:28
YYYYMMDD
OY2P 5:8 YYMMDD 9:12 YYMMDD
OY2P 101:104 MMDDYY
NY2Z 101:108 YYYYMMDD
NY2C 101:110 YYYY.MM.DD

OY2C 93:98 DDMMYY EMPTY

442

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

The new data set has dates in character
format in columns 1 to 8, 9 to 16 and 21 to
28.
The old data set has dates in packed decimal
format in columns 5 to 8 and 9 to 12.
The old data set has a date in packed
decimal format in columns 101 to 104,
The new data set has a date in zoned
decimal format in columns 101 to 108.
The new data set has a date in character
format (with separators) in columns 101 to
110.
The old data set has a date in character
format in columns 93 to 98. If the date field
contains zeros, spaces, low-values, or
high-values, the date in the old data set is
converted before being compared to an
extended format (DDMMYYYY) with a value
of all zeros, spaces, low-values, or
high-values respectively.

Compare - Process Statements
Date Formats (Keyword suffixes: C, Z, D, P)
C

Character date data.
Examples:
'96' is represented as hexadecimal X'F9F6'
If using a MMDDYY format, March 21, 1996 is represented as
hexadecimal X'F0F3F2F1F9F6'

Zoned decimal date data. The date can be represented as follows:
X'xyxy' to X'xyxyxyxyxyxyxyxy'
y is hexadecimal 0–9 and represents a date digit. x is hexadecimal
0–F and is ignored.
Examples:
'96' is represented as hexadecimal X'F9C6' or X'0906'
'03211996' is represented as hexadecimal X'F0F3F2F1F1F9F9C6'
or X'0003020101090906'

Packed decimal date data. The date can be represented as follows:
X'zyyx' to X'zyyyyyyyyx'
y is hexadecimal 0–9 and represents a date digit. x is hexadecimal
A–F and is ignored. The z part is normally zero but will not be
ignored.
Examples:
'96' is represented as hexadecimal X'z96F' or X'z96C'
'1996' is represented as hexadecimal X'z1996C'
'03211996' is represented as hexadecimal X'z03211996x' (the x
part is ignored).
'96203' (a Julian date) is represented as hexadecimal X'96203C'

Unsigned packed decimal date data. The date can be represented
as follows:
'yy' to 'yyyyyyyy'
y is hexadecimal 0–9 and represents a date digit.
Examples:
'96' is represented as hexadecimal X'96'
'03211996' is represented as hexadecimal X'03211996'

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

443

Compare - Process Statements

REVREF—Revision Code Reference
Identifies the revision type (BookMaster or SCRIPT/VS) and level-ID for delimiting
UPDREV and UPDREV2 output changes. The revision delimiter may, alternatively,
be specified or indicated by using a SCRIPT/VS .rc definition statement as the
first line of the new input data set.
If either the UPDREV or UPDREV2 process option is specified and no REVREF
process statement is in the statements data set, or the first new data set source line
is not a .rc script definition statement, SuperC defaults the revision definition to a
SCRIPT/VS specification of .rc 1 ¦.
Note: BookMaster requires the REFID value to be defined with a :revision tag.
Do not forget the “RUN=YES” attribute if you want your document to have
the change-bar inserted in the processed document.

Compare Types
LINE, WORD

Syntax
REVREF REFID=name
RCVAL=number

Operand Description
REFID=name

Name of the revision identifier for the BookMaster :rev/:erev. tags.

RCVAL=number
Numeric revision code for SCRIPT/VS revision tags.

Examples
REVREF REFID=ABC
REVREF RCVAL=5

444

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

BookMaster example— :rev refid=ABC. and :erev refid=ABC.
tags.
SCRIPT/VS example—.rc 5 on/off delimiters.

Compare - Process Statements

SELECT - Select PDS Members
This process statement allows you to specify members to select from a PDS. You
can specify as many member names as will fit on one line. Therefore, if you need
to select additional members, enter a new SELECT statement.
For comparisons, the new members are normally compared with old members that
have the same names. Use the colon character (:) to compare members that are not
named alike. SELECT is valid with all compare types.

Compare Types
File, Line, Word, and Byte

Examples
SELECT PROG1,NEWPROG2:OLDPROG2,PROG3

Tells SuperC to make the following
one-to-one comparisons:
NEW MEMBER
---------PROG1
⇒
NEWPROG2
⇒
PROG3
⇒

OLD MEMBER
---------PROG1
OLDPROG2
PROG3

Syntax
SELECT new-member[:old-member],...

Operand Description
new-member

The name of a new PDS member that is to be compared to an old
PDS member.

old-member

The name of an old PDS member that does not have a like-named
member in the new PDS. This member name, if entered, must be
separated from the new-member name by a colon (:).
If the old-member name is not used, SuperC attempts to compare
the new-member to a like-named member of the old PDS.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

445

Compare - Process Statements

SLIST - Statements File Listing Control
Turns on or off the printing of process statements in the output listing. The initial
state of the control is “on”.
This statement is useful when there are many process statements and the listing of
these statements in the summary section is not required for problem determination.
For example, a large number of data set selections via SELECT statements would
already be indirectly indicated in the group summary listing section. The SELECT
statement list would then be redundant and generate extra lines in the listing.

Compare Types
File, Line, Word, and Byte

Examples
SLIST OFF

Does not list the process statements that
follow this statement.

Syntax
SLIST {ON }
{OFF}

Operand Description

446

Causes the lines in the process statements data set following the SLIST
statement to be listed in the output listing.

OFF

Causes the lines in the process statements data set following the SLIST
statement to be suppressed in the output listing.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Compare - Process Statements

Y2PAST—Year 2000 Global Date Option
Specifies a 100-year period (used for determining the century-part of a date when
only a 2-digit year has been specified). The Y2PAST process statement uses either a
fixed or sliding window.
Note: The Y2PAST process statement should always be used if any of the Year
2000 Date Definition process statements (NY2C, NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C,
OY2Z, OY2D, OY2P) have also been used.

Compare Types
LINE

Syntax
Y2PAST fixed
sliding

Operand Description
fixed A 4-digit number indicating a fixed window.
sliding
A 1-digit or 2-digit number indicating a sliding window.

Examples
Y2PAST 1986
Y2PAST 70

Y2PAST 5

A fixed window specifying a 100-year period from 1986 to
2085.
A sliding window specifying (based on the current year
being 1997) a 100-year period from 1927 (70 years in the
past) to 2026.
A sliding window specifying (based on the current year
being 1997) a 100-year period from 1992 (5 years in the past)
to 2091.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

447

Compare - Process Statements

and

- Comment Lines (SuperC Listing)

An asterisk as the first character on a process statement line begins a printable
comment line. A period-asterisk (.*) as the first 2 characters on a process statement
line begins a comment that is not printed in the SuperC listing.
Note: Embedding comments as separate lines in the statements data set is a good
programming practice. Period-asterisk comments are useful for inactivating
but retaining old statements in a standard statements data set. These
statements do not get lost, will not appear in the summary section, and can
be reactivated simply by blanking out the period-asterisk characters in
columns 1 and 2.
Compare Types: File, Line, Word, and Byte

Examples
* This comment prints in the Search-For listing.
.* This comment does not print in the Search-For listing.

Syntax
{* } comment
{.*}

Operand Description

448

Must be in column 1.

Must be in columns 1 and 2.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search–For Process Options

SuperC Search-For Process Options
Table 27 lists all of the process options for Search-For.
Table 27. Search-For Process Options
ALLMEMS
DPCBCMT
IDPFX
MIXED

ANYC
DPCPCMT
LMTO
NOPRTCC

APNDLST
DPFTCMT
LNFMTO
NOSEQ

CKPACKL
DPMACMT
LONGLN
NOSUMS

COBOL
DPACMT DPADCMT DPBLKCL
DPPLCMT DPPSCMT FINDALL FMSTOP
LPSF
LTO
SDUPM
SEQ
XREF

You can enter process options in the Process Options field of the Search-For Utility
panel or select them from one of two Search-For process options panels.
ALLMEMS

All members. Search all members including alias entries. This
functions as though all directory entries were selected from a
member list.

ANYC

Any case. Lowercase alphabetic characters (a-z) in source data sets
are translated to uppercase (A-Z) before Search-For processing (the
actual input data sets are not modified).
Notes:
1. ANYC has the lowest priority operation affecting the SuperC
process. For example, it does not affect any of the strings used
in SuperC compare process statements (except SRCHFOR).
2. The ANYC process option does not apply to characters in
DBCS text strings.
Use this option to find all strings such as “ABC”, “Abc”, “ABc”.

APNDLST

The APNDLST process option appends the listing output to the
specified or default listing data set. If the data set does not exist, it
is allocated as new. Some data sets cannot be appended because of
the append listing attributes and Search-For listing attribute
requirements. There is an error notification for this condition.
Normally, APNDLST allows you to collect listings from separate
searches into one named listing data set (that is, a MOD function).
This objective can sometimes be done without using the APNDLST
option by using multiple SELECT process statements. This allows
you to identify any number of members. It produces a single
composite listing with a single Search-For invocation.

CKPACKL

Check for packed format. This option determines if the member or
sequential data set has the standard ISPF packed expansion trigger
format. If required, Search-For unpacks the input data set or
member during the search.

COBOL

Ignore columns 1-6 in F 80 data sets. Data in columns 1-6 are
excluded from the search set.

DPACMT

Don’t process asterisk (*) comment lines. Lines with an asterisk in
column 1 are excluded from the search set. Other forms of
assembler comments are unaffected. Hence, it is not possible to
have Search-For filter out assembler comments appearing on the
same line as an assembler statement or directive.

DPADCMT

Don’t process ADA-type comments. ADA comments are whole or
part lines that appear after the special “--” sequence. Blank lines
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

449

Search–For Process Options
are also considered part of the comment set. This option produces
a listing with all comments removed and blanked.
DPBLKCL

Don’t process blank lines. Source lines in which all of the search
columns are blank are excluded from the Search-For set. It is
redundant, but not incorrect, to use this option with DPADCMT,
DPPLCMT, and DPPSCMT.
Note: The CMPCOLM process statement can be used to control
the columns inspected. It is possible to have a line with
nonblank data but filtered by the DPBLKCL option due to
the column range values specified on the CMPCOLM
statement. This may contradict the user assumption that
DPBLKCL only excludes complete input blank lines.
Another example of this would be a blank line that has
sequence numbers in columns 73-80 and the Search-For run
with the SEQ process option.

DPCBCMT

Don’t process COBOL type comment lines. COBOL source lines
with an asterisk in column 7 are excluded from the search set.

DPCPCMT

Don’t process C++ end-of-line type compiler comments. These are
“//” delimited comments. DPPLCMT may also be used with
DPCPCMT when the source file contains “/* ... */” comments
delimiters.

DPFTCMT

Don’t process FORTRAN type comment lines. FORTRAN source
lines with a “C” in column 1 are filtered and excluded from the
search set.

DPMACMT

Don’t process PC Assembly-type comments. Lines with an “*” in
column 1 are excluded.

DPPLCMT

Don’t process PL/I-type comments. PL/I, C and REXX comments
(that is, /* ... */ and blank lines) are filtered and excluded from the
search set. This option produces a listing with all comments
removed and partial comments blanked.
Notes:
1. The Search-For program detects most cases including multiline,
statement embedded, and most quote dependency comments.
However, Search-For may exclude some lines that are not
comments. For instance, lines that contain comment delimiters
that are enclosed in quotes.
2. The DPPLCMT process option does not recognize comments
within DBCS text strings.

DPPSCMT

Don’t process PASCAL-type comments. PASCAL-type comments of
the type “(* . . . *)” are filtered and excluded from the Search-For
set as are blank compare lines. This option will produce a listing
with comments removed and part comments blanked. The
DPPSCMT process option does not recognize comments within
DBCS text strings.
Note: DPPSCMT and DPPLCMT may be required to filter certain
non-standard PASCAL compiler comments. The combination
is allowed. Either may start a comment but only the starting
delimiters type may terminate the comment.

450

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search–For Process Options
FINDALL

All strings must be satisfied for the search to be considered
successful, whereupon the return code is set to one.
Notes:
1. If all searches are not satisfied, there is NO message to indicate
this, other than RC=0. To find which searches failed, specify the
XREF process option.
2. If the FMSTOP option is specified, the search will stop once it
has satisfied all search strings.

FMSTOP

Stop the search on the first occurrence of the search string in the
data set or PDS member.

IDPFX

Identifier prefixed. ID or member-name is prefixed to the search
string lines of the listing.

LMTO

List group member totals only. Lists only the member summary
totals and the overall summary totals for the entire data set or
group.

LNFMTO

List not-found member or data set totals only. This is a tabular list
of members or data sets where the string was not found. It shows
the total lines searched.

LONGLN

Long lines. LONGLN causes the Search-For program to create a
listing with up to 203 columns, reflecting up to 176 columns from
the source data sets. This data set may exceed the maximum
number of columns handled by many printers.

LPSF

List previous Search-For following lines. Lists the matched string
line and up to six preceding and six following lines for context.
The LPSFV process statement can be used to change the default
value of six preceding and following lines to any value from 1 to
50.

LTO

List totals only. Lists the overall summary totals for the entire data
set group. Does not list member totals.

MIXED

No printer control columns. Search-For generates a “normal”
listing data set with record lengths of 133 columns, or a LONGLN
listing with 203 columns. These listings contain printer control
columns and page separators. NOPRTCC eliminates both the page
separators and control column 1. With NOPRTCC, “normal”
listings are 132 columns, and LONGLN listings are 202. Section
separators and title lines are still generated. This data set may be
better for online browsing. It is easier to browse listings without
interspersed page separator titles.
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

451

Search–For Process Options
NOSEQ

No sequence numbers. Search-For processes F 80 standard
sequence number columns as data. This option is extraneous for
variable length records and non-fixed F 80 attribute data sets.

NOSUMS

No summary listing section. This option omits the summary
section including the statistics, options, warning, and error
messages from the listing output.

SDUPM

Search duplicate members. Searches all members found in
concatenated PDS data sets, even if the members have the same
name and are at a higher level. Search duplicate names even if the
search is for a single member or if members are specified using the
SELECT process statement.

SEQ

XREF

Cross reference strings. Creates a cross reference index listing by
search string. You can use XREF with IDPFX, LMTO, LNFMTO,
and LTO.
The XREF option can be useful when more than one search string
(or search condition) is specified. The XREF listing is implemented
using a multiple pass operation for listing the “lines found” for
each individual string. Note that XREF adds some additional
processing overhead to the normal search process.

SuperC Search-For Process Statements
Table 28 lists all of the Search-For utility process statements.
Table 28. Summary of Search-For Process Statements
CMPCOLM CMPLINE DPLINE
NCHGT
NTITLE SELECT
*

DPLINEC LNCT
SLIST
SRCHFOR

LPSFV
LSTCOLM
SRCHFORC .*

You must include these statements in an input control data set. The process
statements data set can be fixed or variable, and its record length can be large, but
you must enter process statements only in columns 1 through 72. Only one process
statement can be entered per line. Search-For checks process statements and
required operands for completeness before beginning a comparison. Comments are
not allowed at the end of the line after the statement has been completed.
Comment lines must be separate statements.
You can enter process statements in the statements data set more than once (for
example, DPLINE, SELECT, or CMPLINE) as they define independent actions to be
taken. Others redefine their process scope after their first inclusion (for example,
LNCT). Including more than one redefining statement is not recommended but is
not reported as an error. There is also no specific rule concerning which statement
definition (or redefinition) prevails—the first (least often) or last (most often).
Note: It is best to inactivate old process statements that you do not need rather
than deleting them from the statement data set. This can be easily done by

452

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search–For Process Statements
putting a period and an asterisk (.*) in the first 2 character positions. These
statements will be ignored by the Search-For program when the data set is
used as a statement data set.

Process Statement Notation Conventions
This section uses the following notation conventions to describe the syntax of the
process statements:
v Process statements and keywords are shown in uppercase to help you
differentiate between them and their operands, which are shown in lowercase.
However, you can enter them in any case you like.
v Operands shown in brackets ([ ]) are optional.
v Stacked operands shown in brackets indicate the optional operands from which
you can select one or none.
v Stacked operands shown in braces ({ }) are required operands from which you
must select one.
v Syntax diagrams that end with an ellipsis (...) allow you to repeat operands
more than once.
v If a statement contains a KYWD operand, this keyword must precede any
repetition of the operands that follow.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

453

Search–For Process Statements

CMPCOLM - Compare (Search) Columns
Causes a search of the data between column limits of the input data set. Up to 15
search ranges or individual columns are allowed and may be entered on additional
CMPCOLM statements. The column values and ranges must be in ascending order.

Examples
Searches columns 25 through 75.
Searches columns 30 through 60 and column
75.
Performs the same function as the previous
statement.

CMPCOLM 25:75
CMPCOLM 30:60,75
CMPCOLM 30:60 75

Syntax
CMPCOLM start-colm[:stop-colm][,...]

Operand Description
start-colm

A number that identifies the column in which Search-For begins
the search. All columns to the left of this column are ignored.

stop-colm

A number that identifies the column in which Search-For ends its
search. If the data set contains more records, the search continues
with the next record, beginning with the column specified as the
start-colm.
This number is separated from the start-colm value by a colon (:).
All columns to the right of this column are ignored. If the colon
and stop-colm are not entered, only the start-colm value is used.

Note: CMPCOLM is an overall limit value for selecting a range of columns to be
searched. SRCHFOR and SRCHFORC statements have optional column
limits that override the CMPCOLM process statement, SEQ process option,
NOSEQ process option, and COBOL process option limits.

454

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search–For Process Statements

CMPLINE - Compare (Search-For) Lines
Searches a data set between line limits. The reference values may be line numbers
or data patterns. The statement can be specified on one complete line or have
separate CMPLINE statements for each of the two keyword operands NTOP or
NBTM.

Examples
CMPLINE NTOP 55 NBTM 99
CMPLINE NTOP ’ABCD’,5:66

CMPLINE NBTM ’ABCD’

Search new data set between lines 55
through 99.
Start new data set search when SuperC
detects the first “ABCD” in columns 5
through 69.
End new data set search on first “ABCD”
found in any column.

Syntax
CMPLINE KYWD {rel-line-#
{,’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]}

}[ ...]

Operand Description
KYWD

The keyword may be one of the following:
NTOP New Top. Defines the beginning line in the new (search)
data set.
NBTM
New Bottom. Defines the ending line in the new (search)
data set.

rel-line-#

The relative number of the record in the data set or member. Valid
range = 1 to 999999.

string

Character string enclosed within single quotes. For embedded
single quotes, use two consecutive quotes (''). For example, enter
’don’t’ for the string “don’t”.

start-colm

A number that identifies the column in which Search-For begins
looking for string. All columns to the left of this column are
ignored.

stop-colm

A number that identifies the column in which Search-For ends its
search for string, but only for that record. If the data set contains
more records, the search continues with the next record, beginning
with the column specified as the start-colm.
This number is separated from the start-colm value by a colon (:).
All columns to the right of this column are ignored. If the colon
and stop-colm are not entered, only the start-colm value is used.
This causes a search of a single column for the first character of
string.
All columns to the right of the column that the last character of
string can occupy are ignored. For example, if you specify ’ABCD’
as a string that must exist between columns 5 and 69, the search
really includes columns 5 to 72. Therefore, the string can be found
even if the first character is in column 69, with the others in
columns 70, 71, and 72.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

455

Search–For Process Statements

DPLINE, DPLINEC - Don’t Process Lines
DPLINE
DPLINEC

Don’t Process Lines
Don’t Process Lines Continuation Condition.

Removes from the search set a line that can be recognized by either a unique
character string or combination of related strings all appearing on the same input
line. DPLINEC is the continuation of the immediately preceding DPLINE or
DPLINEC process statement. All the strings in a DPLINE/DPLINEC sequence
must be found on the same input line for the line to be excluded.
A start-column or stop-column can also be used to restrict the columns scanned.
Relative start-columns and relative stop-columns are valid only on DPLINEC
statements. You can specify a relative start position depending on the ending of the
previous DPLINE/DPLINEC in the sequence relationship. Normal scanning starts
at the beginning of the input line (resulting in the first found string) unless
restricted by user column specifications or the relative operator.

Examples
DPLINE ’ABCDE’ DPLINE ’ABCDE’,1:99999
DPLINE ’AbCde’,2 DPLINE ’AbCde’,2:2
DPLINE ’ABCDE’ DPLINEC ’BDEF ’
DPLINE ’ABCDE’,2:50
DPLINE ’AB’CD’,2:50
DPLINE X’C1C27BF1’,2:50
DPLINE ’ABC’ DPLINEC ’BDEF’,+

DPLINE ’ABC’s DPLINEC ’BDEF’,+5
.

Both statements exclude lines containing the
string “ABCDE” from the compare set.
Both statements exclude lines where the
string “ABCDE” starts in column 2.
Exclude lines that contain the strings
“ABCDE” and “BDEF ”.
Excludes lines where the string “ABCDE”
starts in columns 2 through 50.
Excludes lines where the string “AB'CDE”
starts in columns 2 through 50.
Excludes lines where the string “AB,1” starts
in columns 2 through 50.
Exclude lines containing the string “ABC”
followed in the same line by the string
“BDEF”.
Exclude lines containing the string “ABC”
and “BDEF” when the string “BDEF” starts
in the same line 5 column positions after the
end of the string “ABC”.

Syntax
DPLINE ’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]
DPLINEC ’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]
[,+start-colm[:+stop-colm]]
[,+]

Operand Description

456

string

Character string enclosed within single quotes. For embedded
single quotes, use two consecutive quotes (’’).

start-colm

A number that identifies the column in which Search-For begins
looking for string. All columns to the left of this column are
ignored.

stop-colm

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search–For Process Statements
This number is separated from the start-colm value by a colon (:).
All columns to the right of this column are ignored. If the colon
and stop-colm are not entered, only the start-colm value is used.
This causes a search of a single column for the first character of
string.
All columns to the right of the column that the last character of
string can occupy are ignored. For example, if you specify ’ABCD’
as a string that must exist between columns 5 and 69, the search
really includes columns 5 to 72. Therefore, the string can be found
even if the first character is in column 69, with the others in
columns 70, 71, and 72.
+start-colm

The relative column following the previous “Don’t process” string
in which Search-For begins the search for string.

+stop-colm

The relative column following the previous “Don’t process” string
in which Search-For ends the search for string.

Following the previous “Don’t process” string, scans to the end of
the line for string (same as + 1:99999).

Notes:
1. DPLINE and DPLINEC columns are not restricted by search columns. The data
patterns are also not affected by the ANYC process option.
2. The relative start operator “+” introduces another important capability of
backtrack and retry by advancing the retry starting scan position. Backtrack
allows you to identify a string through a sequence of DPLINE/DPLINEC
statements and to search a number of similar strings (all on the same line) until
the correct sequence is found. This contrasts to the “first found”
DPLINE/DPLINEC string and a non-relative DPLINEC rejection when the
DPLINEC condition is not met.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

457

Search–For Process Statements

LNCT - Line Count
Specifies the number of lines per page in the listing output. This process option is
ignored if NOPRTCC process option is specified. The default value is 55 lines.

Examples
Lists up to 66 lines per page.

LNCT 66

Syntax
LNCT num

Operand Description
num

458

A decimal number between 15–999 999.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search–For Process Statements

LPSFV - LPSF Count Value
Specifies the maximum number of lines to be used with the process option LPSF.
This number replaces the default value of up to six lines before and six lines after
the line containing the search string. This process statement has no formatting
effect if you do not use the LPSF process option.

Examples
Lists up to 2 lines before and after the line
where Search-For finds the search string.

LPSFV 2

Syntax
LPSFV num

Operand Description
num

A decimal number between 1 and 50.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

459

Search–For Process Statements

LSTCOLM - List Columns
Selects a range of columns to be listed in the output. This statement overrides the
Search-For convention of listing lines starting with column 1 from the input source
data set.
LSTCOLM column selections must be contiguous and can be no wider than the
output listing line without truncation.

Examples
LSTCOLM 20:90

Lists columns 20 through 90 in the output
listing.

Syntax
LSTCOLM range

Operand Description
range

460

Two column numbers separated by a single colon (:). Do not leave blanks
on either side of the colon.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search–For Process Statements

NCHGT - Change Text of New (Search) Text String
Changes the input source image before performing the search. More than one
change text statement may be contained in the statements data set.
The find-mask and replacement string need not be the same length. The
replacement string may even indicate a null string. Unequal replacements result in
either blank insertions on short replacements (at the end of the found word) or
downstream blank deletions to accommodate larger replacements (deleted blanks
are selected from downstream blank pairs). The net effect of a longer string
replacement of a shorter string shows as a reformat of the original line. The
replaced text line appears in the output instead of the input text.
One or more question marks (“?”) can be used as “wildcard” characters in the
find-mask or string. A wildcard character in the output string stores the input
character as is.

Examples
NCHGT ’ABCD’,’XXXX’
NCHGT ’ABCD’,’XXXX’,1:50
NCHGT ’ABCD’,’,1:50
NCHGT X’7B01’,’:1’,6
NCHGT ’PREF???’,’NPREF’
NCHGT ’PREF???’,’NPREF??’

Changes all “ABCD”s to “XXXX”s (exclude)
in the new data set.
Restricts the mask search to columns 1
through 50.
Changes string “ABCD” to a null string in
columns 1 through 50.
Uses the hexadecimal string change
convention.
Changes the string “PREF” and the wildcard
characters to the string “NPREF”.
Changes the string “PREF” and the first
wildcard character to the string “NPREF”.
The second and third wildcard characters are
not changed.

Syntax
NCHGT ’find-mask’,’string’[,start-colm[:stop-colm]]

Operand Description
find-mask

The change text string to be replaced. The find-mask must be in
single quotes. Use two consecutive single quotes for quote
characters within the find-mask.

string

A character string that is to replace the contents of find-mask before
a comparison or search. Single quotation marks are required. If the
character string contains a single quotation mark, you must enter it
in the process statement as two single quotation marks.
You can include one or more question marks in the string. It
indicates that the position it occupies can be filled by any
character, one character per question mark.
If there is not enough space for the string to be substituted, the
substitution does not occur. Instead, a warning message is printed
at the bottom of the listing.

start-colm

A number that identifies the column in which Search-For begins
looking for string. All columns to the left of this column are
ignored.
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

461

Search–For Process Statements
stop-colm

Notes:
1. Replacing a string with a longer string is not always possible with some lines.
A warning message appears when this happens and the problem change-text
statement is designated in the summary section.
2. A string replacement using the “null” character notation does not always work
as first envisioned. Nulling a character string only shifts following characters
up through the next blank character. One or more blank pad characters are
applied to take up the null positions of the original string. Only nonblank
character strings are shifted, not entire lines.
NCHGT ’ ’,’
blank insertion.
NCHGT ’???’,’

462

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search–For Process Statements

NTITLE - Alternate Listing Title
NTITLE — listing data set title identification.
Allows you to specify an alternate data set identification in the output listing
(54-character limit for each title identifier). This replaces the data set and library
names used in the search.
Note: This option is most useful when a single non-group search is done on a
temporary data set. The NTITLE identification may be more meaningful
than the actual data set names used in the search.

Examples
NTITLE ’New Substitution Name’

Change the titles in the output listing of the
data set.

Syntax
NTITLE ’string’

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

463

Search–For Process Statements

Examples
SELECT PROG1,NEWPROG2,PROG3

Selects PDS members PROG1, NEWPROG2,
and PROG3 to be searched.

Syntax
SELECT new-member[...]

Operand Description
new-member

464

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

The name of the PDS member that is to be searched.

Search–For Process Statements

SLIST - Statements File Listing Control
Turns on or off the printing of process statements in an output listing. The initial
state of the control is “on”.
This statement is useful when there are many process statements and the listing of
these statements in the summary section is not required for problem determination.

Examples
SLIST OFF

Does not list the process statements that
follow this statement.

Syntax
SLIST {ON }
{OFF}

Operand Description
ON

Causes the lines in the process statements data set following the SLIST
statement to be listed in the output listing.

OFF

Causes the lines in the process statements data set following the SLIST
statement to be suppressed in the output listing.

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

465

Search–For Process Statements

SRCHFOR, SRCHFORC - Search for Strings in the Input Files
SRCHFOR
SRCHFORC

Searches for a text string in the input data set
Searches for a text string continuation condition.

Specifies the string and the string type (P - prefix, W - word, S - suffix, or blank for any occurrence of the string). SRCHFORC is the continuation of the
immediately preceding SRCHFOR or SRCHFORC process statement. All the strings
in a SRCHFOR/SRCHFORC group must be found on the same input line.
A start-column or start-range can also be used to restrict the columns. Relative
start-columns and start-ranges are valid only on SRCHFORC statements.

Examples
SRCHFOR ’ABC’
SRCHFOR ’ABC’,W
SRCHFOR X’4004’
SRCHFOR
SRCHFOR
SRCHFOR
SRCHFOR

’A’bc’
’ABC’,5:10
’ABC’,W,5
’ABC’ SRCHFORC

SRCHFOR ’ABC’ SRCHFORC
SRCHFOR ’ABC’ SRCHFORC
SRCHFOR ’ABC’ SRCHFORC
SRCHFOR ’ABC’ SRCHFORC
SRCHFOR ’ABC’ SRCHFORC
’GKL’

Searches for string “ABC” within search
columns.
Searches for “ABC” as word string.
Searches for hex string within search
columns.
Searches for string “A'bc”.
“ABC” starts within 5:12 of search columns.
Word “ABC” starts in column 5.
’DEF’
Finds “ABC” and “DEF” on same line within
the search columns.
’DEF’,+
Finds “DEF” to the right of first “ABC”
string.
’DEF’,+1:9999
Same as above example.
’DEF’,W,+
Same as above, but “DEF” must be a word.
’DEF’,+5
Same as above, but “DEF” must start in fifth
column after “ABC”.
’DEF’,+5 SRCHFORC Same as above, but “GKL” must also be
found on the same line.

Syntax
SRCHFOR ’string’[,P][,start-colm[:stop-colm]]
[,S]
[,W]
SRCHFORC ’string’[,P][,start-colm[:stop-colm]]
[,S][,+start-colm[:+stop-colm]]
[,W][,+]

Operand Description

466

string

Character string enclosed within single quotes. For embedded
single quotes, use two consecutive single quotes ('').

Prefix. String begins a word, but is not the complete word
(Example: string “abc” is a prefix to the word “abcdef”).

Suffix. String ends a word, but is not the complete word (Example:
string “def” is a suffix to the word “abcdef”).

Word. String is a complete word. Words are delimited by blanks, or
end-of-line characters.

start-colm

A number that identifies the column in which Search-For begins
looking for string. All columns to the left of this column are
ignored.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Search–For Process Statements
stop-colm

+start-colm

The relative column (starting from the column where the string of
SRCHFOR/SRCHFORC ended) in which the string must start for
the multiple statement relation to be met. Only SRCHFORC
statements can contain relative start-columns.

+stop-colm

The number that identifies the relative column (starting from the
column where the string of the last SRCHFOR/SRCHFORC ended)
in which Search-For ends its search for string. Only SRCHFORC
statements can contain a relative stop-colm.

Continues the scan after the pattern to the end of the line (same as
+1:99999).

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

467

Search–For Process Statements

and

- Comment Lines (Search-For Listing)

An asterisk as the first character on a process statement line begins a printable
comment line. A period-asterisk (.*) as the first two characters on a process
statement line begins a comment that is not printed in the Search-For listing.
Note: Embedding comments as separate lines in the statements data set is a good
programming practice. Period-asterisk comments are useful for inactivating
but retaining old statements in a standard statements data set. These
statements do not get lost, will not appear in the summary section, and can
be reactivated simply by blanking out the period-asterisk characters in
columns 1 and 2.

Examples
* This comment prints in the Search-For listing.
.* This comment does not print in the Search-For listing.

Syntax
{* } comment
{.*}

Operand Description

468

Must be in column 1.

Must be in columns 1 and 2.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC - Return Codes

Return Codes
Results from calling the SuperC program are returned as condition codes from
SuperC. The SuperC and SuperCE utilities generate a short message and a long
message to interpret the results for you. However, only the long message displays
the return codes, which are:
0

Normal completion. No differences were found in the input data sets.

Normal completion. Differences were found in the input data sets.

Warning. Erroneous or conflicting input options were detected by the
SuperC program. Data sets were compared, but should be checked for
results consistent with those expected. Check listing for more details.

Warning. The old data set did not contain proper sequence numbers, or the
sequence number intervals were not large enough to contain insert activity.
This return code applies only to results from the UPDCMS8, UPDMVS8,
and UPDSEQ0 process options.

Error. Error on old input data set. The data sets were not compared. Check
output for more information.

Error. Inconsistent data set organizations. The new and old data sets are
not both PDSs or sequential data sets. The compare was not run.

Error. Error on new input data set. The data sets were not compared.
Check output for more information.

Warning. Error on update data set; one of the following:
v Missing DELDD
v I/O error
v Append to PDS
v Incorrect attributes on an append or PDS output operation.
Processing was completed with the update options reset and ignored. The
error can also be returned if an update data set is being used
simultaneously as the listing data set.

Error. Error occurred during open or during writing to the listing data set.
The error can also be returned because of a new or old input data set
simultaneously being used as the listing data set. No additional
information is generated to better define the error condition.

Error. The listing data set was not allocated because of a conflict with the
logical record length (LRECL), record format (RECFM), or data set
organization. A listing can be saved only in a PDS that has the same
LRECL or RECFM; a listing can never be appended to a PDS by using the
APNDLST process option; a listing can be appended by using the
APNDLST process option only to a sequential data set that has the same
LRECL or RECFM. No output was generated.
SCLM Version Compare considerations
This return code is expected if the listing data set is partitioned but the
member name is omitted. Correct the specification and try again.

Error. The listing data set could not be extended and is full
(E37 condition). The results are truncated and incomplete.

Error. No data was compared because the old and new data sets were
empty. Member names were invalid or there was nothing left to compare
after input filtering. See the listing for more information.
Appendix A. SuperC Reference

469

SuperC - Return Codes
32

Error. Insufficient storage was available for the SuperC program to run.
The user region size was either too small or storage was too fragmented.

SuperC and Search-For Technical Overview
This section describes the following SuperC and Search-For processes:
v How SuperC and Search-For filter input file lines
v How SuperC matches input file lines
v How SuperC partitions and processes large files
v Why SuperC compare types may produce different results
v How to directly invoke the SuperC and Search-For programs.

How SuperC and Search-For Filter Input File Lines
The SuperC and Search-For utilities apply process options and process statements
to the input file or files in a specific order. Figure 230 shows schematically the
effects, in the order that they occur, of the various “filtering” process options and
process statements, on the compare and Search-For input lines. The options and
statements nearer the top affect the input line before options or statements nearer
the bottom.

Figure 230. Priority for Filtering Input Lines

470

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC/Search-For Technical Overview

How SuperC Matches Input Files
When SuperC compares files, it determines matching and missing lines or words
based only on the data content of the input files. It does not use any
synchronization data, such as column or sequence numbers, to find matching file
sections. It does not use the common “start at the top”, then look-ahead or
look-back method to determine large sections of matching data. Neither does it
sort the data before comparing.
SuperC is unique in that, except for files that are identical, it does not determine
matching sections until it has completely read both files. Missing data units are
units that are out of sequence, as opposed to units that have been deleted from a
file. During a comparison, SuperC finds all matches, locates the largest set of
matching data units, and recursively allows this compare set to divide the file into
additional partitioned subsections. All new subsections are processed for
corresponding matches. The subprocess ends when no more matches can be found
within corresponding new and old file partitioned subsections. Sections classified as
inserted or deleted are corresponding areas for which SuperC could not find a
match.
Figure 231 shows an example of a comparison of two files that are identified as
having lines represented by A, B, C, ... F. The SuperC algorithm attempts to find
the best match set from the input lines. Notice how the match set requires
consideration of duplicate lines.

Figure 231. Find Match Example

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

471

SuperC/Search-For Technical Overview

How SuperC Corrects False Matches
Occasionally, SuperC reports that it has detected a false line or word match and
has corrected the results in the listing and summary report. Any affected matched
pair has been reclassified as an insert/delete pair. Any resulting error might be in
the masking of potential matches that would be overlooked due to the early false
match coupling. That is an equivalent yet undiscovered match may be overlooked
due to the premature false matching. The condition should be of minor importance
since it happens so rarely and the masking effect has a low probability of affecting
the final results.
An equally important SuperC concern would be whether it finds the best match set
and whether it finds all matches. Unfortunately, the match-finding algorithm is not
perfect. Ignoring the false match masking problem, and the large number of
duplicate source lines obscuring the match set possibilities, occasional matches can
be overlooked.
Many Artificial Intelligence (AI) computer programs, like SuperC, only
approximate the human intellect that can sometimes make a better match set
selection. Furthermore, these same computer programs are designed for speed and
efficiency. They necessarily make certain simplifying assumptions and contain
additional operational weaknesses. SuperC , however, does not fail to correctly
classify mismatches and does not incorrectly classify a mismatch as a match.

How SuperC Partitions and Processes Large Files
In SuperC, there is no limit on the size of files processed in terms of lines, words
or bytes. Yet it had an internal methodology based upon a maximum field size for
each work area storage structure (for example, array size and precision of
variables). A method was developed to do the overall comparison process by
breaking very large files into smaller comparison partitions and combining the
intermediate results into one overall result. The process had to be done carefully so
that it did not look as if the file partitioning was determined after some arbitrary
limit was reached. That could affect the results on either side of the break point.
The partitioning had to be done heuristically based upon the comparison results
from the previously inspected intermediate process.
A fixed partitioning size of 32K lines/words/bytes was selected that was based on
some test studies. The compare processes up to this limit and iteratively adjusts the
intermediate ending break point of the pass by an adaptive method. Continuation
from the adjusted end point is the basis for the next pass. That end point might
even be adjusted to some previous records that had already been processed. The
objective is to achieve the next best compare set for future unprocessed records.
The overall process ends when both files reach the End-of-File during a pass. The
results from the intermediate passes are combined into one user end result. Most
large compares are never suspected to have been partitioned and recombined.
The unlimited file size solution may appear, at first, unnecessary for Line compare
using a virtual address space that is nearly unlimited. Yet there often has to be
some limit—even if it is a high value. Programs need to store data with
predetermined precision limits and programs work better with limits that are
reasonable. Word compare and Byte compare eventually needed a partitioning
limit for the compare as the number of words and bytes become large even for
small file sizes.

472

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC/Search-For Technical Overview
Because of this partitioning process, comparisons of large files may take a long
time.

Why Compare Types May Produce Different Comparison
Results
Different comparison types often give you slightly different results. Here are some
of the reasons:
v File comparisons inspect the complete data set (every byte) for differences. Line
and Word comparisons use designated columns that are either the user
specifications or SuperC defaults—possibly excluding sequence number columns
73–80.
v Line comparisons pad records with blanks when lines with different lengths are
compared. However, Byte comparisons can find blank characters only if they are
included in the input data sets.
v For data sets with input line lengths <= 256, Line comparison is done after the
lines are padded with blanks to the longest line length. Lines originally of
unequal length can compare equally if the blanks at the end of the longer line
coincide with the shorter line’s blank padding.
v For data sets with input line lengths > 256, Line comparison is done on the lines
without blank padding. Lines of unequal length are always mismatches.
v Different comparison types have different sensitivity to being resynchronized.
Line comparison synchronization begins at the beginning of a line and ends at
the end of a line. Word comparison synchronization begins anywhere on a line
on any word boundary and ends at the end of a word. Byte comparison
synchronizes after each character.
Word comparisons at the end of a line might change the size of the word
comparison set but would have no effect on a Line comparison. The output
reports could look very different.
v Line comparisons may produce different results because SuperC detects lines
that have been reformatted. Reformatted lines have no effect on Word
comparisons because Word comparisons ignore blank characters and blank lines.
v Results may differ depending on which compared data set is specified as new
and which is specified as old. The matching algorithm is sensitive to the largest
matched set it finds between data sets. There may be occasions where this set
has alternatives of equal lengths. The rules for deciding which set to choose
among the equals depend upon the actual content in the data set; therefore, data
set dependencies do exist.

Comparing and Searching Alias Members
When you compare or search all of the members of two partitioned data sets using
the command S * (to select all entries in the directory) on the member list, any
members that have alias entries are processed once for the real name, and once for
each alias entry. For compare, unpaired aliases appear in the same list as unpaired
real members as “NON-PAIRED NEW FILE MEMBERS” or “NON-PAIRED OLD
FILE MEMBERS”.
When you compare or search entire data sets by using an asterisk (*) for a member
name pattern, only real members, not aliases, are processed. For compare, all
directory entries (for both real members and aliases) are analyzed. Messages
appear at the end of the SuperC output listing that give information about
unpaired alias entries for paired real members as follows:

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

473

SuperC/Search-For Technical Overview
"NEW" PAIRED MEMBERS WITH "NEW" ALIAS MEMBERS NOT PAIRED FOLLOW:
MEMBER1/ALIAS1 MEMBER1/ALIAS2 MEMBER2/ALIAS1 ...
or
"OLD" PAIRED MEMBERS WITH "OLD" ALIAS MEMBERS NOT PAIRED FOLLOW:
MEMBER1/ALIAS1 MEMBER1/ALIAS2 MEMBER2/ALIAS1 ...

followed by a listing of the unpaired member/alias entries.
Notes:
1. Consider the ALLMEMS process option if you want to compare all directory
entries, including aliases, but do not want to select them from a member list.
This is useful for batch comparisons of entire load modules.
2. This listing section is not created for non-load module data sets containing alias
entries.

Comparing Load Modules
SuperC compare of load module data might show unexpected differences. This is
because SuperC compares all the data in the load module as it is found on DASD,
and does not attempt to decode which portions are executable, and which might
contain uninitialized storage.
The complex data format on DASD is dependent on the load module data set
block size, and defined storage definitions which are controlled by the linkage
editor. The size stored by the linkage editor in the PDS directory may differ from
the DASD data byte count reported by SuperC and Browse depending on the
characteristics of the load module.
If load modules are exact copies of each other, SuperC should find no differences.
If load modules have been link-edited from the same object but with different
block sizes, SuperC will probably report they are different.
Because of the relative DASD addresses (TTRs) in load modules, the recommended
procedure for comparing load modules which have not been reblocked is to use
the AMBLIST utility with LISTLOAD OUTPUT=MODLIST against both load
modules, then use SuperC to compare the two AMBLIST outputs. There is no easy
way to compare load modules with different internal record sizes such as occurs
when COPYMOD or LINKEDIT processes them.

Comparing CSECTs
SuperC compare of PDS Load Module Csects (using the LMCSFC Process Option)
can return unexpected differences. SuperC looks at the length of the Csect from the
control record immediately preceding the Csect data record in the load module.
This physical data length can differ from the logical Csect data length in the load
module header that the AMBLIST utility uses to report the length of the Csect.
SuperC always compares all of the physical data in each Csect. You can use
SuperC Byte compare to examine the Csect data content in detail.
Note: This option is only valid for PDS load modules.

How to Directly Invoke SuperC and Search-For
You can run the SuperC and Search-For programs directly without using the
ISPF-provided utilities (Options 3.12, 3.13, 3.14, or 3.15). This requires an
installation (or system programmer) to customize a CLIST (for interactive usage) or
a PROCLIB procedure (for batch execution of a catalog procedure). Although these

474

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC/Search-For Technical Overview
methods are not warranted by the ISPF product, a sample CLIST and a sample
PROCLIB procedure are distributed as an aid in the SAMPLIB data set as members
ISRSCLST and ISRSPROC.
The sample CLIST allows a TSO user to enter a line command to communicate the
operational parameters directly to the SuperC program without displaying the ISPF
panels. The sample CLIST will request entry of a search pattern or string. A sample
SuperC call as entered on the terminal might look like:
superc newfile(.newdata.file) oldfile(ludlow.olddata.file)

or
exec clist(superc) ’new(.newdata.file) old(ludlow.olddata.file)’

where superc is the command and newfile and oldfile are the keywords for the input
files.
The SuperC load module may be supported using a private library or a
concatenated system library. The installation is responsible for making the
corresponding changes to the sample CLIST.
The sample CLIST uses the following format:
SUPERC NEW(dsn) OLD(dsn) {keyword(parameter) .... }

The keywords and parameters are:
CTYPE

Specifies the compare type. The parameter can be one of the
SuperC compare types (File, Line, Word, or Byte). To call the
Search-For program, use CTYPE(SRCH).

LISTING

Specifies the listing type. The parameter can be one of the SuperC
listing types.

OUTDD

Specifies the name of the Listing Data Set. Use a fully qualified dsn
or use a period (.) to precede the dsn with SYSPREF. The use of the
period is a compromise because fully qualified names enclosed in
quotes are difficult to pass in CLISTs.

BROWSE

Specifies the auto display program.

SYSIN

Specifies whether SuperC prompts the user for the process
statements or uses a statements data set. The parameters can be
PROMPT or the name of the statements data set.

DELDD

Specifies the name of the update data set.

PROCESS

Specifies the process options. The parameter can be a SuperC or
Search-For process option. Not all options are allowed with each
compare type (for example, GWCBL is valid only with Line and
Word compare) or with other options (for example, you cannot use
SEQ with COBOL). Refer to “SuperC Compare Process Options”
on page 409 and “SuperC Search-For Process Options” on page 449
for additional information.

Examples
The following example shows a SuperC compare JCL sequence:

Appendix A. SuperC Reference

475

SuperC/Search-For Technical Overview
//COMPARE
//STEPLIB
//NEWDD
//OLDDD
//OUTDD
//DELDD
//SYSIN
CMPCOLM
/*

EXEC
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
2:72

PGM=ISRSUPC,PARM=(’LINECMP,CHNGL,UPDCNTL’)
DSN=ISPF.LOAD,DISP=SHR
DSN=DLUDLOW.PDS(TEST1),DISP=SHR
DSN=DLUDLOW.PDS(TEST2),DISP=SHR
SYSOUT=A
DSN=DLUDLOW.UCTL1,DISP=OLD
*

The sequence allows the SuperC program to compare two input data sets and
generates a line compare CHANGE type listing to the spool output queue and a
separate UPDCNTL update control data set output using source columns 2
through 72.
A catalog procedure is a set of “canned” JCL statements that you can invoke as an
extension of your own JCL. A simplified JCL sequence appears below:
//SUPERC
//
//
//
//

JOB
EXEC SUPERC,
NEWFILE=’DLUDLOW.GROUP.DATA1’,
OLDFILE=’MFRAME.GROUP.DATA2’,
LISTING=DELTA

The keywords NEWFILE, OLDFILE, and LISTING cause symbolic substitution
before the job submittal.
Note: A sample catalog procedure is contained in the SAMPLIB member
ISRSPROC.
A simplified Search-For JCL sequence follows. The SRCHFOR process statement
used in the search is part of the JCL instead of a separate SYSIN data set.
Concatenated data sets are also shown as part of the JCL.
//
JOB
//SEARCH EXEC PGM=ISRSUPC,PARM=(’SRCHCMP,ANYC’)
//STEPLIB DD DSN=ISPF330.LOAD,DISP=SHR
//NEWDD
DD DSN=USERID.PDS,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=USERID.PDS2,DISP=SHR
//OUTDD
DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSIN
DD
*
SRCHFOR ’NEEDLE’,W,10:20
/*
//

A very simplified Search-For sample CLIST follows:
PROC 0
FREE FI(NEWDD,SYSIN,OUTDD,SYSIN2)
ALLOC FI(NEWDD) DA(’USERID.PDS(TEST1)’)
REUSE SHR
ALLOC FI(SYSIN) DA(’USERID.SYSIN.DATA(STMTS)’) REUSE SHR
DELETE
’USERID.USER.PDS’
ALLOC FI(OUTDD) DA(’USERID.USER.LIST’) SPACE(10,20) RECFM(F B) +
REUSE TRACKS RELEASE
CALL ’USERID.ISPF.LOAD(ISRSUPC)’ ’SRCHCMP,ANYC’
/******************************************************/
/* SIMPLE CLIST WITH MINIMUM STATEMENTS.
*/
/* “USERID.SYSIN.DATA(STMTS)” MUST CONTAIN SRCH STMTS.*/
/******************************************************/

476

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Appendix B. SuperC Listings
The SuperC program allows you to produce four kinds of listings, differing
generally depending on the compare type, process options, and process statements
used. They range from OVSUM, which shows none of the source data, to LONG,
which shows all of it.
Note: Listing types are not applicable for the File compare type. For information
about File compare listings, see “Effect of File Compare Type on SuperC
Listings” on page 487.
OVSUM

Lists only an overall summary of the results of the comparison
without showing the differences themselves.
For example, an OVSUM listing of a Line comparison shows how
many lines matched, how many were reformatted, how many were
inserted, and so forth.

DELTA

Lists only the differences between the source data sets or members
being compared, followed by overall summary results. Differences
are flagged to the left of each output line.
For example, a DELTA listing of a Line comparison shows only the
individual lines in each data set or member that are different.

CHNG

Same as the DELTA listing, plus up to 10 matching lines, words, or
bytes before and after the differences. This shows the differences
within the context of the surrounding lines.
For example, suppose a comparison of two data sets shows that
each has 15 lines that match, followed by one or more lines that
are different, followed by 15 more lines that match. A CHNG
listing of a Line comparison of these data sets would show the
lines in each data set or member that are different, plus 10 of the
15 lines that match, both before and after.

LONG

Same as the CHNG listing, except that this listing shows the entire
new data set, plus any data from the old, or original, data set that
is not in the new, or changed, data set.
If we borrow the example used in the CHNG listing definition, a
LONG listing would include all 15 matching lines, not just 10.

The following sections begin by explaining the information displayed in the titles
lines and at the bottom of the listings. Then, each listing type is discussed in more
detail, with examples of listings and descriptions of the listing sections.
The examples were created by comparing two PDSs. The first,
USERID.TEST1.SCRIPT, is considered the old data set and contains members
DATA, ABEOLD, and WORDSOLD. USERID.TEST2.SCRIPT, the new data set,
contains members DATA, ABENEW, and WORDSNEW.
DATA, as the only member name common to both data sets, is the only member
compared. Figure 232 on page 478 shows the source data for both the old and new
versions of DATA. Figure 233 on page 478 shows the results of an OVSUM
comparison of the two versions.

477

SuperC Listings

File Edit Confirm Menu Utilities Compilers Test Help
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------EDIT
USERID.TEST1.SCRIPT(DATA) - 01.02
Columns 00001 00072
****** ***************************** Top of Data *****************************
000100 This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" member differs.
000200 This line is the same in both members.
000300 This line differs from the text in the "new" member.
000400 This line is the same in both members.
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F6=Rchange
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right
F12=Cancel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Edit Confirm Menu Utilities Compilers Test Help
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------EDIT
USERID.TEST2.SCRIPT(DATA) - 01.02
Columns 00001 00072
****** ***************************** Top of Data *****************************
000100 This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" member differs.
000200 This line is the same in both members.
000300 This line is different from the text in the "old" member.
000400 This line is the same in both members.
000500 This line is in the "new" member, but not in the "old".
****** **************************** Bottom of Data ***************************
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F6=Rchange
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right
F12=Cancel

Figure 232. Split Screen Showing Source Data for SuperC Listings

Figure 233. OVSUM Listing of a LINE Comparison of Two PDS Members

478

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings

Figure 234. DELTA Listing of a LINE Comparison of Two PDSs (Part 1 of 2)

Figure 234. DELTA Listing of a LINE Comparison of Two PDSs (Part 2 of 2)

Appendix B. SuperC Listings

479

SuperC Listings

Figure 235. LONG Listing of a Word Comparison of Two PDSs (Part 1 of 2)

Figure 235. LONG Listing of a Word Comparison of Two PDSs (Part 2 of 2)

480

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings

Figure 236. Comparison Listing with Column Headings (Using COLHEAD)

Figure 236 shows how COLHEAD process statements have been used to generate
column headings (Account Number, Birth Date, and Surname) for the corresponding
input data. For more information, see “COLHEAD—Define Column Headings” on
page 429.

SuperC Listing Title Lines
SuperC listings contain two title lines. Figure 234 on page 479 shows an example.
The first title line shows the following information:
v The name of the SuperC program, which is described as a
file/line/word/byte/s for the compare utility for ISPF for OS/390.
v The date and time the listing was produced. The date is shown according to the
format used by your country. The time is shown in 24-hour format, with the
hours and minutes separated by a period.
v The page number.
The second title line shows you the names of the new and old data sets that were
compared when the listing was created.

Listing Output Section
The Listing Output Section shows any lines, words, or bytes that were found to be
different, depending on the compare type being used. For a Word comparison, the
source lines that appear in the listing show only the columns of data that were
really compared. See Figure 235 on page 480 for an example and “CMPCOLM,
CMPCOLMN, CMPCOLMO - Compare Columns” on page 424 for more
information.
The Listing Output Section flags changes by using:
v Listing prefix codes
v Type-of-difference codes.
Appendix B. SuperC Listings

481

SuperC Listings

Listing Prefix Codes
SuperC output lines are flagged with the following prefix codes listed under the ID
column:
blank Match—No prefix code means the data is the same in both data sets.
I

Insert—Data that is in the new data set, but not in the old data set.

Delete—Data that is in the old data set, but not in the new data set.

Delete Replace—For Byte compare listings only. A byte(s) in the old data set
that was replaced by the byte(s) shown in the preceding insert (I) line.

Match Compose—For Word compare listings only.A line containing words
that match. The line may also contain spaces to show the relationship
between the matching words and any inserted or deleted words. Inserted
and deleted words are shown in following insert compose (IC) and delete
compose (DC) lines.

Insert Compose—For Word compare listings only. A line containing words
from the new data set that are not in the old data set. This line usually
follows a match compose (MC) line.

Delete Compose—For Word compare listings only. A line containing words
from the old data set that are not in the new data set. This line usually
follows a match compose (MC) or insert compose (IC) line.

Insert Matching—For compare listings created by using the FMVLNS (flag
moved lines) process option. A line in the new data set that also appears in
the old data set, but has been moved. If the line was reformatted, this is
shown by a flag to the right of the listing.

Delete Matching—For compare listings created by using the FMVLNS (flag
moved lines) process option. A line in the old data set that also appears in
the new data set, but has been moved. If the line was reformatted, this is
shown by a flag to the right of the listing.

Reformat New—For Line compare listings only. A reformatted line in the
new data set. This line contains the same data as the old data set line, but
with different spacing.

Reformat Old—For Line compare listings only. A line in the old data set that
has been reformatted in the new data set. To keep this line out of your
output listing, use the DLREFM (delete reformatted line) process option.

Change Bar—For compare listings created by using the GWCBL (generate
Word change bar listing) process option. A change bar showing that words
were either inserted or deleted. Figure 237 on page 483 provides an
example.

Type-of-Difference Codes
At the far right of some listings are headings that provide additional information
about the types of differences SuperC has found. Headings you may see are:
TYPE

An abbreviation that identifies the type of difference:
MAT= Matched lines.
RFM= Reformatted lines.

482

RPL=

Replaced lines.

INS=

Lines that are in the new data set, but not in the old data set.

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings
DEL= Lines that are in the old data set, but not in the new data set.
IMR= Lines in the new data set that have been moved from where they
were in the old data set and reformatted. Listing should show a
matching DMR= flag for a line in the old data set.
DMR=
Lines in the old data set that have been moved and reformatted in
the new data set. Listing should show a matching IMR= flag for a
line in the new data set.
IMV= Lines in the new data set that have been moved from where they
were in the old data set. Listing should show a matching DMV=
flag for a line in the old data set.
DMV=
Lines in the old data set that have been moved in the new data set.
Listing should show a matching IMV= flag for a line in the new
data set.
LEN

The number of consecutive lines flagged by one of the TYPE abbreviations.

N-LN# and O-LN#
The line number(s) where the flagged line appears in either or both data
sets. For insertions, the O-LN# column shows where the line would have
appeared in the old data set. For deletions, the N-LN# column shows
where the line would have appeared in the new data set.

Figure 237. Word Comparison of Two PDSs Using Change Bar to Show Differences (Part 1 of 2)

Appendix B. SuperC Listings

483

SuperC Listings

Figure 237. Word Comparison of Two PDSs Using Change Bar to Show Differences (Part 2 of 2)

Member Summary Listing
The information shown in the Member Summary Listing depends on the compare
type used. For example, PAGE 2 of the listing in Figure 237 on page 483 shows the
number of words that were processed, matched, inserted, deleted, reformatted, and
excluded from processing by a process option or statement, such as the DPLINE
process option.
This part also shows how many members were processed, had changes, had no
changes, and were not paired, with the last category provided for both new and
old members.
As the sample listing shows, one member was processed and had changes. It also
shows that both PDSs contain two non-paired members. The non-paired heading
means that these members were not included in the comparison because they were
not paired with members in the other PDS. The names of these members are
shown in the second part of the Member Summary Listing, PAGE 3 of Figure 237.

Summary and Statistics/PDS Overall Totals
Many SuperC listings contain an overall summary showing totals that are
compiled for the compare type being used. For comparisons of sequential data sets
or membered PDSs, this summary is called:
XXXX COMPARE SUMMARY AND STATISTICS

However, for comparisons of complete PDSs, as PAGE 4 of Figure 237 on page 483
shows, the summary is called:
PDS XXXX OVERALL TOTALS

484

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings
In both headings, the XXXX is replaced by the compare type being used, such as
WORD. As the sample listing shows, the left side of a LONG listing of a Word
comparison shows how many words were matched, inserted, deleted, and
processed. Several of these categories are related. For instance, the number of lines
processed in the new data set should be equal to the number of line matches, the
reformatted lines, and the new file line insertions. The number of processed lines
does not include lines that were excluded from processing by a process option or
statement, such as the DPLINE process option.
The left side of the sample listing also shows that the SuperC program corrected a
false match, which it occasionally may detect on the first pass and reclassify as an
insert/delete pair. The new classification is correct, but may have caused the
process to overlook an alternate match. However, this condition should not occur
frequently, which means your comparison results probably will not be affected. The
SuperC program never incorrectly calls a data unit (file, line, word, or byte) a
match when it should be a mismatch.
On the right side, the listing shows the total number of changes, the number of
lines classified as changed/inserted and changed/deleted, and the number of lines
processed. In a Line comparison listing, as shown in Figure 234 on page 479, these
are called paired changes. Paired changes show, for example, that a line inserted in
the new data set corresponds to a line deleted from the old data set. The opposite
would be true for non-paired insertions or deletions.
The number given as total changes should be the sum of the paired changes,
non-paired insertions, and non-paired deletions. For example, in Figure 234 on
page 479, the right-side totals are the equivalent of the following:
2
1
+ 0
-3

PAIRED CHANGES
NON-PAIRED INSERTS
NON-PAIRED DELETES
TOTAL CHANGES

Bottom-of-Listing Information
The following list describes information that may appear at the bottom of your
SuperC listings. Figure 237 on page 483 shows an example.
v The LISTING-TYPE generated: OVSUM, DELTA, CHNG, or LONG
v The COMPARE-COLUMNS, or the range of columns compared, expressed as
two numbers separated by a colon. For example, 1:76 means SuperC compared
columns 1 to 76 in both data sets. If two column ranges are shown, the first is
the range compared in the new data set or member and the second is the range
compared in the old data set or member.
v The length in bytes of the LONGEST-LINE found in any data set or member
compared
v A list of the PROCESS OPTIONS USED
v A list of the PROCESS STATEMENTS USED
v Warnings and error messages.
Note: For Byte comparisons, the COMPARE-COLUMNS information is not shown
because column ranges are not applicable during Byte comparisons.

Appendix B. SuperC Listings

485

SuperC Listings

Y2K Comparison

Figure 238. Comparison Listing with Y2000 Dates Being Compared

Figure 238 shows how the two Year 2000 date definition process statements have
each caused an information (INFO) line to be generated. The information line
shows:
v the position of the defined date in the record
v the contents of the defined date field
v the date as it was actually compared. In the second information line, you can see
the defined date has a 2-digit year portion (″97″) but has actually been compared
using a 4-digit year portion (″1997″).
For more information, see “NY2C, NY2Z, NY2D, NY2P, OY2C, OY2Z, OY2D, OY2P
—Year 2000 Date Definitions” on page 441.
Note: Occasionally, you might see some ″unusual″ characters on the inserted (I)
and deleted (D) lines. These characters simply represent data that is in a
non-character (and therefore not directly printable) format in the input
record. You can ignore them.

Side-By-Side Listings
Two process options, NARROW and WIDE, let you produce listings that show
source data side-by-side (Figure 239 on page 487) instead of interspersed
(Figure 234 on page 479). The NARROW process option shows up to 55 columns
from each member, while the WIDE process option shows up to 80. The listing is
truncated if it exceeds the line length of the process option being used.

486

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings

Figure 239. Side-By-Side LINE Comparison Using the NARROW Process Option (Part 1 of 2)

Figure 239. Side-By-Side LINE Comparison Using the NARROW Process Option (Part 2 of 2)

Effect of File Compare Type on SuperC Listings
Listing types are not applicable for the File compare type. The information
included in a File compare listing depends on whether the data sets being
compared are sequential/membered or partitioned, and on the process options or
statements used, if any.

Appendix B. SuperC Listings

487

SuperC Listings

File Comparison of a Sequential Data Set or Membered PDS
This type of comparison is usually the fastest because it shows you only the most
basic information about two data sets or members. As Figure 240 shows, this
information includes the following for the new and old data sets or members:
v Whether the data sets or members are different (DIFF) or the same (SAME),
shown by asterisks
v The number of bytes (N-BYTES, O-BYTES) and lines (N-LINES, O-LINES)
v The hash sum values (N-HASH-SUM, O-HASH-SUM). These values are 32-bit
numeric representations of the contents of the new and old data sets,
respectively. The values shown in these fields provide a general indication of
whether two data sets on two different systems are different. If the values are
different, the two data sets are different. If the values are the same, the two data
sets may be identical, but not necessarily.

Figure 240. File Comparison of a Membered PDS

File Comparison of a Complete PDS
This type of comparison includes the Member Summary Listing section. As the
Function Keys section of the ISPF User Interface chapter of the z/OS ISPF User’s
Guide Vol I shows, the first information is the same as for a sequential/membered
data set comparison, except the totals and hash sums are separated according to
member name. Additional totals show how many members were:
v Processed and, of those, how many had changes
v Paired
v Not paired.
The names of the paired and non-paired members are listed at the bottom.

488

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings

Figure 241. File Comparison of a Complete PDS

Search-For Listings
You can also produce listings by using the Search-For utility (option 3.14) and the
Extended Search-For utility (option 3.13.S). A sample listing is shown in Figure 242.

Figure 242. Search-For Listing

Appendix B. SuperC Listings

489

SuperC Listings
This listing was produced by searching all the members of a PDS named
USERID.TEST.SCRIPT and by using the ASIS fields on the Extended Search-For
Utility panel, as follows:
ASIS . . . . ’This line is’
ASIS . . . . ’both members’ c

PAGE 1 of the listing shows that both strings were found in lines 3 and 5 of
member DATA. However, instead of just showing the strings that were being
searched for, the listing shows each line in its entirety.
PAGE 2 shows the following information:
v Two lines were found.
v One member of the PDS had lines that contained the search string.
v Three members of the PDS were searched and 60 of the lines those members
contained were processed.
v In each member, columns 1 to 80 were searched.
v The longest line in any member was 80 bytes.
No process options were specified on the Extended Search-For Utility panel.
However, the bottom of PAGE 2 shows that the SuperC program automatically
used the SRCHFOR process option because a search was requested. The
SRCHFORC process option also was used because the C (continuation) keyword
was specified at the end of the second ASIS field.

Update Data Set Control Output Examples
This section provides examples of the process options that are used to create
update data sets. You cannot enter two different process options that begin with
UPD. These options are compare options only, for use with the SuperCE utility
(option 3.13).
Each description except APNDUPD is accompanied by at least one sample update
data set. All the samples were created by comparing member DATA, a PDS
member common to both USERID.TEST1.SCRIPT and USERID.TEST2.SCRIPT.
Figure 232 on page 478 shows the contents of this member in both PDSs.
Notes:
1. An update compare using the process options UPDCMS8 or UPDMVS8, that
results in no differences found, creates an empty update output data set.
2. All “don’t process” options, and DPLINE or CMPLINE process statements are
invalid when used with the process options UPDCMS8, UPDMVS8, UPDSEQ0,
UPDLDEL, and UPDPDEL. The “don’t process” options are canceled with an
error notification.

APNDUPD—Append Update Data Set
This process option appends the incremental results of the current compare to an
existing update report. It allows you to collect multiple update results under one
data set name. However, the width of the update data set being appended must be
the same as the width of the original listing. Therefore, update options (UPDxxxx)
that would change the width cannot be used with APNDUPD unless the original
listing was produced by the same options.
The APNDUPD process option is available with the Line, Word, and Byte compare
types.

490

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings

UPDCMS8—Update CMS Sequenced 8
This process option produces a data set that contains both control statements and
new data set source lines using sequence numbers from old data set columns
73-80. It is available with the Line compare type only.
All UPDCMS8 control statements are identified by the characters “./” in columns 1
and 2 of the 80-byte record, followed by one or more blanks and additional
blank-delimited fields. The control statements are sequence (S), insert (I), delete
(D), replace (R), and comment (*).
Data sets created with the UPDCMS8 process option can be used as input to the
CMS UPDATE command, as described in z/VM CMS Command and Utility Reference
and z/VM CMS Macros and Functions Reference. Figure 243 shows an example of an
UPDCMS8 update data set.

Figure 243. UPDCMS8 Update Data Set

The record attributes for both input data sets must be F 80. They must also contain
sequence numbers.

UPDCNTL—Update Control
This process option produces a control data set that relates matches, insertions,
deletions, and reformats to:
v The relative line numbers of the old and new data sets (Line compare)
v The relative word position of the old data set (Word compare)
v The relative byte offset (Byte compare).
No source or data from either input data set is included. The following panels
show the format used with each of these compare types.

Appendix B. SuperC Listings

491

SuperC Listings

UPDCNTL Data Set Using Line Compare

Figure 244. UPDCNTL Data Set Using Line Compare

The top of Figure 244 shows the names of the new and old input data sets, along
with the date and time the update data set was created. Table 29 shows the column
numbers used to display the update information:
Table 29. UPDCNTL Format Using Line Compare
Column Numbers

492

Data Item

4–11

New line number

13–20

Old line number

22–29

Match length

31–38

Insert length

40–47

Delete length

49–56

Reformat length

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings

UPDCNTL Data Set Using Word Compare

Figure 245. UPDCNTL Listing Using Word Compare

The top of Figure 245 shows the names of the new and old input data sets, along
with the date and time the update data set was created. Table 30 shows the column
numbers used to display the update information:
Table 30. UPDCNTL Format Using Word Compare
Column Numbers

Data Item

4–11

Beginning new line number

13–20

Number of lines

22–26

New column number (beginning of word)

28–35

Number of matching words

37–44

Number of new inserted words

46–53

Number of old deleted words

55–62

Beginning old line number

64–71

Number of old lines

73–77

Old column number

Appendix B. SuperC Listings

493

SuperC Listings

UPDCNTL Data Set Using Byte Compare

Menu Utilities Compilers Help
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------BROWSE
USERID.UPDATE.CNTL(BYTE) - 01.00
Line 00000000 Col 001 080
********************************* Top of Data *********************************
00000089 0000003F 00000009
00000092 00000048
00000006
00000098 00000048 00000003
0000009B 0000004B
00000001 00000001
0000009C 0000004C 0000004F
000000EB 0000009B
00000001 00000001
000000EC 0000009C 0000002C
00000118 000000C8
00000003 00000003
0000011B 000000CB 00000020
0000013B 000000EB
00000001 00000001
0000013C 000000EC 0000004F
0000018B 0000013B
00000050
0000018B 0000018B 00000005
* END
******************************** Bottom of Data *******************************
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 246. UPDCNTL Listing Using Byte Compare

The top of the first panel in Figure 246 shows the names of the new and old input
data sets, along with the date and time the update data set was created. The
second panel shows the result of scrolling down to see the remainder of the data
set.
Table 31 on page 495 shows the column numbers used to display the update
information:

494

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings
Table 31. UPDCNTL Format Using Byte Compare
Column Numbers

Data Item

4–11

New byte offset

13–20

Old byte offset

22–29

Number of matching bytes

31–38

Number of inserted bytes

40–47

Number of deleted bytes

UPDMVS8—Update MVS Sequenced 8
This process option produces a data set that contains both control statements and
new data set source lines using sequence numbers from old data set columns
73-80. This process option is available for the Line compare type only.
The format of the generated data may be suitable as input to the IEBUPDTE utility.
Refer to z/OS DFSMSdfp Utilities for information about the contents of this data set.
Figure 247 shows an example of an UPDMVS8 update data set.

Menu Utilities Compilers Help
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------BROWSE
USERID.UPDATE.MVS8(LINE) - 01.00
Line 00000000 Col 001 080
********************************* Top of Data *********************************
./ CHANGE LIST=ALL,NAME=DATA
OLD:USERID.TEST1.SCRIPT
This line is in the new member, but not in the old.
00010000
This line is reformatted; the spacing in the new member differs.
00015000
This line differs from the text in the old member.
00030000
./ DELETE SEQ1=00050000,SEQ2=00050000

******************************** Bottom of Data *******************************
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 247. UPDMVS8 Update Data Set Listing

The data sets to be compared must have a record format of F 80. They must also
contain sequence numbers.

UPDLDEL—Update Long Source and Delta Data Set
This process option produces a data set that contains both control statements,
matching new data set source lines, inserted new data set source lines, and deleted
old data set source lines. This process option is available for the Line compare type
only.
The format of the generated data may be suitable for direct editing. Figure 248 on
page 496 shows an example of an UPDLDEL update data set.
Appendix B. SuperC Listings

495

SuperC Listings

Menu Utilities Compilers Help
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------BROWSE
USERID.UPDATE.CNTL(LINE) - 01.00
Line 00000000 Col 001 080
********************************* Top of Data *********************************
*HDR1 NEW3.TEST.LIB
NEWMEM
*HDR2 LUDLOW.MACLIB.LIB
OLDMEM
TYPE = UPDLDEL
*DDEL#= 2
N-REF#=000000 O-REF#=000001 *****SUPERC CHANGE HEADER*****
This is line 1 in the old data set. It is not in the new data set.
This is line 2 in the old data set. It is not in the new data set.
*MMAT#= 2
N-REF#=000001 O-REF#=000003 *****SUPERC CHANGE HEADER*****
This is a line in both data sets.
This is a line in both data sets.
*I-RP INS#= 1
N-REF#=000003 O-REF#=000005 *****SUPERC CHANGE HEADER*****
This is a line only in the new data set.
*D-RP DEL#= 1
N-REF#=000003 O-REF#=000005 *****SUPERC CHANGE HEADER*****
This is a line in both data sets.
*MMAT#= 1
N-REF#=000004 O-REF#=000006 *****SUPERC CHANGE HEADER*****
This is a line in both data sets.
*I-RF INS#= 1
N-REF#=000005 O-REF#=000007 *****SUPERC CHANGE HEADER*****
This is a line in both data sets but reformatted.
******************************** Bottom of Data *******************************
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help
F2=Split
F3=Exit
F5=Rfind
F7=Up
F8=Down
F9=Swap
F10=Left
F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 248. UPDLDEL Update Control Data Set

UPDPDEL—Prefixed Delta Lines
This process option produces a data set that contains header records and complete
delta lines from the input source data sets, up to a maximum of 32K columns in
each output line. It is available for the Line compare type only.
The data set produced is a variable length data set that reflects the characteristics
of the input source data set. Prefix codes, such as I for insert, and the line number
precede lines from the source data sets. Abbreviations show the total number of
consecutive lines flagged as changed, such as INS#= for the number of consecutive
inserted lines. The number of replaced lines (RPL#=) always refers to consecutive
pairs of inserted and deleted lines. Figure 249 on page 497 shows an example of an
UPDPDEL update data set. The first panel shows only the first 80 columns; the
second panel shows the result of scrolling right to see the remainder of the
member.

496

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings

Figure 249. UPDPDEL Update Data Set Listing

UPDREV—Update Revision
This process option produces an update file containing a copy of the new source
text with revision tags delimiting the changed text lines.
The UPDREV process option supports two different types of revision tags: one for
SCRIPT/VS data sets and one for BookMaster data sets. You use the REVREF
process statement to specify which type of revision tag you want (see
“REVREF—Revision Code Reference” on page 444). UPDREV is available for LINE
and WORD compare types.
Appendix B. SuperC Listings

497

SuperC Listings
Figure 250 shows a SuperC UPDREV data set with SCRIPT/VS revision tags (.rc
on/off).
.rc 1 ¦
.rc 1 on
This line
.rc 1 off
This line
.rc 1 on
This line
.rc 1 off
This line
.rc 1 on
This line
.rc 1 off

is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs.
is the same in both files.
differs from the text in the "old" file.
is the same in both files.
is in the "new" file, but not in the "old".

Figure 250. Example of a UPDREV Update File for SCRIPT/VS Documents

When the UPDREV update file in Figure 250 is subsequently processed by
SCRIPT/VS, the final scripted output will have “¦” revision characters in the left
margin of the output document identifying the changed lines (those between the
SCRIPT/VS revision tags .rc 1 on and .rc 1 off).
Note: The revision character (“¦” in the example in Figure 250) can be specified
either by using a REVREF process statement (see “REVREF—Revision Code
Reference” on page 444) or by having a SCRIPT/VS .rc revision tag as the
first record in the new data set. Subsequent changes to the source can
therefore be separately identified by using different revision characters.
Figure 251 shows a SuperC UPDREV data set with BookMaster revision tags
(:rev/:erev).
:rev refid=ABC.
This line is reformatted; the spacing in the "new" file differs.
:erev.
:rev refid=ABC.
This line is the same in both files.
:erev.
:rev refid=ABC.
This line differs from the text in the "old" file.
:erev.
:rev refid=ABC.
This line is the same in both files.
:erev.
:rev refid=ABC.
This line is in the "new" file, but not in the "old".
:erev.
Figure 251. Example of a UPDREV Update Data Set for BookMaster Documents

When the UPDREV update data set in Figure 251 is subsequently processed by
BookMaster, the final formatted output will have the revision character associated
with the revision ID abc (as specified by a :revision. BookMaster tag in the new
input data set) in the left margin of the output document identifying the changed
lines (those between the BookMaster revision tags :rev and :erev).
Note: The revision ID is controlled by the REVREF process statement (see
“REVREF—Revision Code Reference” on page 444). Subsequent changes to
the source can therefore be separately identified by using different revision
IDs (which are associated with unique revision characters).

498

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings

UPDREV2 - Update Revision (2)
UPDREV2 is identical to UPDREV with the exception that data between the
following BookMaster tags are not deleted in the update data set:
:cgraphic.
:ecgraphic.
:fig.
:efig.
:lblbox.
:elblbox.
:nt.
:ent.
:screen.
:escreen.
:xmp.
:exmp.

UPDSEQ0—Update Sequenced 0
This process option produces a control data set that relates insertions and deletions
to the relative line numbers of the old data set. It is available for the Line compare
type only. UPDSEQ0 is similar to UPDCMS8, but uses relative line numbers
instead of sequence number columns from the old data set.
This update data set is characterized by control statements followed by source lines
from the new data set. All UPDSEQ0 control statements are identified by the
characters ./ in columns 1 and 2 of the 80-byte record, followed by one or more
blanks and additional blank-delimited fields. The control statements are insert (I),
delete (D), replace (R), and comment (*). Control statement data does not extend
beyond column 50. Figure 252 shows an example of a UPDSEQ0 update data set
listing.

Figure 252. UPDSEQ0 Update Data Set

Appendix B. SuperC Listings

499

SuperC Listings

UPDSUMO—Update Summary Only
This process option produces an update data set of four lines: new data set name,
old data set name, column headers, and a summary totals line. It is available for
the Line, Word, and Byte compare types.
The summary totals line has a T in column 1. The summary statistics are located at
fixed offsets in the output line. The data set has a line length of 132 bytes.

UPDSUMO Data Set Using Line Compare

Figure 253. UPDSUMO Data Set Using Line Compare

In Figure 253, the member is shown in split screen mode. The bottom half of the
screen shows the result of scrolling right to see the remainder of the member.
Table 32 shows the column numbers used to display the update information:
Table 32. UPDSUMO Format Using Line Compare
Column Numbers

500

Data Item

4–11

Number of new lines processed

13–20

Number of old lines processed

22–29

Number of new line insertions

31–38

Number of old line deletions

40–47

Total number of line changes

49–56

Total number of reformats

58–65

Total number of members processed

67–74

Total number of members different

76–83

Total new members not processed

85–92

Total old members not processed

94–101

Total number of new lines that are not to be processed

103–110

Total number of old lines that are not to be processed

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC Listings

UPDSUMO Data Set Using Word Compare

Figure 254. UPDSUMO Data Set Using Word Compare

In Figure 254, the member is shown in split screen mode. The bottom half of the
screen shows the result of scrolling right to see the remainder of the member.
Table 33 shows the column numbers used to display the update information:
Table 33. UPDSUMO Format Using Word Compare
Column Numbers

Data Item

4–11

Number of new words processed

13–20

Number of old words processed

22–29

Number of new word insertions

31–38

Number of old word deletions

40–47

Total number of word changes

49–56

Blank space. No reformat columns are represented in Word compare.

58–65

Total number of members processed

67–74

Total number of members different

76–83

Total new members not processed

85–92

Total old members not processed

Appendix B. SuperC Listings

501

SuperC Listings

UPDSUMO Data Set Using Byte Compare

Figure 255. UPDSUMO Data Set Using Byte Compare

In Figure 255, the member is shown in split screen mode. The bottom half of the
screen shows the result of scrolling right to see the remainder of the member.
Table 34 shows the column numbers used to display the update information:
Table 34. UPDSUMO Format Using Byte Compare
Column Numbers

502

Data Item

4–11

Number of new bytes processed

13–20

Number of old bytes processed

22–29

Number of new byte insertions

31–38

Number of old byte deletions

40–47

Total number of byte changes

49–56

Blank space. No reformat columns are represented in Byte compare.

58–65

Total number of members processed

67–74

Total number of members different

76–83

Total new members not processed

85–92

Total old members not processed

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Appendix C. Accessibility
Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted
mobility or limited vision, to use software products successfully. The major
accessibility features in z/OS enable users to:
v Use assistive technologies such as screen readers and screen magnifier software
v Operate specific or equivalent features using only the keyboard
v Customize display attributes such as color, contrast, and font size

Using assistive technologies
Assistive technology products, such as screen readers, function with the user
interfaces found in z/OS. Consult the assistive technology documentation for
specific information when using such products to access z/OS interfaces.

Keyboard navigation of the user interface
Users can access z/OS user interfaces using TSO/E or ISPF. Refer to z/OS TSO/E
Primer, z/OS TSO/E User’s Guide, and z/OS ISPF User’s Guide Vol I for information
about accessing TSO/E and ISPF interfaces. These guides describe how to use
TSO/E and ISPF, including the use of keyboard shortcuts or function keys (PF
keys). Each guide includes the default settings for the PF keys and explains how to
modify their functions.

z/OS information
z/OS information is accessible using screen readers with the BookServer/Library
Server versions of z/OS books in the Internet library at:
www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/

503

504

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the USA.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
USA
For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM
Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM World Trade Asia Corporation
Licensing
2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku
Tokyo 106, Japan
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web
sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2005

505

Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose
of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created
programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the
information which has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM Corporation
Mail Station P300
2455 South Road
Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400
USA
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,
including in some cases, payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this information and all licensed material
available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement,
IBM International Program License Agreement, or any equivalent agreement
between us.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color
illustrations may not appear.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business
operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the
names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are
fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which
illustrates programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating
platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not
been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or
imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM for the purposes of developing, using, marketing, or distributing application
programs conforming to IBM’s application programming interfaces.

Programming Interface Information
This publication primarily documents information that is NOT intended to be used
as Programming Interfaces of ISPF.
This publication also documents intended Programming Interfaces that allow the
customer to write programs to obtain the services of ISPF. This information is
identified where it occurs, either by an introductory statement to a chapter or
section or by the following marking:
+---------------------Programming Interface information----------------------+
+------------------End of Programming Interface information------------------+

506

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both:
AD/Cycle
APL2
BookManager
BookMaster
C++/MVS
COBOL/370
Common User Access
CUA
DFSMSrmm
DFSMS/MVS
DFSORT
FFST

GDDM
IBM
Language Environment
MVS
MVS/XA
OS/390
RACF
SAA
Systems Application Architecture
Tivoli
VTAM
z/OS

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks
of others.

Notices

507

508

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Index
Special characters
: (colon), using with function key
definition 45
/ (data set name character), Data Set List
utility (option 3.4) 159
.* Search-For process statement 448, 468
.IM control word 270
* Search-For process statement 448, 468
*AIX* entry in Volume field 148
*PATH* entry in Volume field 148
*VSAM* entry in Volume field 148
% field, Data Set List utility 157
%Used field, VTOC Summary
Information panel 163
%USED keyword, SORT command 177
> (greater than)
using with function key definition 45
|, defined for SuperC 482
&xxxxx action, ACTION column 198
= (repeat last command) line command,
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 171
= workstation command 394
“To” panel for copying 140
“To” panel for moving 142

Numerics
3850 virtual volumes
allocating a data set to 124
5550 terminal 199

A
A (ANSI) parameter, Printer Carriage
Control field 194
A (ASA printer characters) record
format 125
accessibility 503
ACCOUNT command, TSO 124
ACCOUNT, TSO 104
ACTBAR workstation command 393
Action column 197
Activate/Create Profile DS Name field,
SuperCE Profile Manager panel 226
AD/Cycle C/370 compiler
batch processing 312
batch processing (option 5.15) 312
foreground processing 298
foreground processing (option
4.15) 297
Additional IBM Program Development
Products panel 367
Additional Input Libraries field,
Foreground Print Options panel 273
address, APPC 68
address, TCP/IP 68
AFTER parameter
Breakpoint Primary Option
Menu 365
When field 361
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2005

AIX entry in Volume field 148
Alias action, Action column 198
Alias members, searching 473
Alias members, SuperC compare 473
ALL parameter
FIND command 92
Function field 357
Variable field 358
ALLMEMS 410, 449
allocate action prompt workstation
command 393
ALLOCATE command, TSO 123
allocate SMS workstation command 394
allocate workstation command 393
Allocation Error panel 127
Always save table in originating data
set 247, 259
American National Standard
Institute 194
ANYC Search-For process option 449
ANYC SuperCE process option 410
APNDLST Search-For process
option 449
APNDLST SuperCE process option 411
APNDUPD SuperCE process option 411
APPC address
definition 68
APPEND command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 171
parameters 171
Application ID field, Command Table
Utility panel 196
ASCII 93
aspect ratio parameter for PRINTG 31
Assembler concatenation sequence 273
Assembler H (option 4.1) allocation data
sets
overview 275
Assembler H (option 5.1) 304
Assembler Options field
Foreground Assembler H (option
4.1) 276
Attrib display view, Initial View
field 149

B
B (batch) parameter, Mode field
Search-For Utility panel 230
SuperC Utility panel 207
B (blocked) record format, Record Format
field 125
B (browse) line command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 166
Batch (option 5)
AD/Cycle C/370 compiler (option
5.16) 312
Assembler H (option 5.1) 304
C/370 compiler (option 5.13) 311
JCL generation for Assembler and
Linkage Editor 303

Batch (option 5) (continued)
JCL generation for compilers 302
Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 308
Member Parts List (option 5.12) 311
overview 6
password protection, lack of 301
PL/I optimizing compiler (option
5.5) 306
processing sequence 300
VS COBOL II compiler (option
5.2) 305
VS COBOL II interactive debug
(option 5.10) 310
VS FORTRAN compiler (option
5.3) 306
VS Pascal compiler (option 5.6) 307
Batch Assembler H panel 304
Batch Linkage Edit panel 309
Batch Member Parts List panel 311
Batch options
ISPDTLC 312
OS/390 C/C++ 312
BATCH parameter, Print Mode field 183
Batch PL/I Optimizing Compile
panel 307
Batch Selection panel 299
Batch Selection panel with JCL
generated 302
Batch VS COBOL II Compile panel 305
Batch VS FORTRAN Compile panel 306
Batch VS Pascal Compile panel 308
BEFORE parameter
Breakpoint Primary Option
Menu 365
When field 361
Blank action, Action column 198
Blank lines after headings (in export
report) 261
blank parameter
Active field
breakpoints 361
function traces 357
variable traces 359
DSORG field 158
Operation field 359
Pool field 359
Printer Carriage Control field 194
Select Pack option for “To” data set
field 141
Sequence Numbers field 210
Specify additional search strings
field 230
When field 361
blank, SuperC prefix code 482
BLKS parameter, Space Units field 124
BLKSZ
field 158
keyword 177
SORT command 177
Block size field, Allocate New Data Set
panel 125

509

bottom-of-listing information,
SuperC 485
breakpoints
defined 359
with qualification parameter
values 362
Breakpoints (option 7.8)
Cancel (option C) 364
CANCEL primary command 361
control display 363
D (delete) line command 361
END primary command 361, 363
finding a breakpoint 364
Go (option G) 364
I (insert) line command 361
input errors 363
LOCATE primary command 361
primary command 361
QUAL primary command 361
qualification 363
qualification parameter values 361
R (repeat) line command 361
specifying breakpoints 360
syntax checking 363
Breakpoints panel 360
Browse
providing Unicode support 86
BROWSE command
BROWSE 87
COLUMNS 88
DISPLAY 88
displaying after processing 87
FIND 91
HEX 95
LOCATE 97
overview 87
parameter member 87
RESET 98
SUBMIT 87, 98
Browse Command - Entry Panel 87
Browse data display panel 86
Browse field, SCRIPT/VS Processor
panel 284
Browse hexadecimal display
data 97
vertical 96
Browse Mode
Browse data display 85
current position in data set 97
ending Browse 86
overview 5, 87
selecting Browse 85
valid logical record length 84
valid record format 83
BROWSE Output field, SuperCE Utility
panel 220
browse output mode 208, 220, 230, 240
Browse table command 245
browse table panel 246
Browse workstation command 393
Byte parameter, Compare Type field 218

C
C (catalog data set) line command, Data
Set List Utility (option 3.4) 169

510

C (continuation) keyword, Search-For
utility (option 3.14) 232
C/370 compiler
batch processing (option 5.13) 311
foreground processing (option
4.13) 297
C/C++ for OS/390 (Option 4.19) 298
CALL statement format 293
CANCEL command
Breakpoints (option 7.8) 361
Command Table utility (option
3.9) 198
Dialog Test (option 7) 325
table utility 250
Tables (option 7.4) 344, 346
Traces (option 7.7) 358
Variables (option 7.3) 335
CANCEL, Traces (option 7.7) 359
catalog workstation command 393
CATALOG, Sort command field 177
CC parameter, DISPLAY command 89
CCSID
Unicode support in Browse 86
CCSID parameter, DISPLAY
command 90
change bar, defined for SuperC 482
char parameter, DISPLAY command 89
character string 93
character string, LOCATE 325
character, DBCS 105
CHARS parameter, FIND command 91
CHG operation 359
CHNG parameter, Listing Type
field 209, 218
CHNG SuperC process statement 422
CHNGV SuperC process statement 422
CKPACKL Search-For process
option 449
CKPACKL SuperCE process option 411
Class field, Outlist Utility panel 193
Client/Server component download
option 187
Client/Server download 189
CLIST
error exits 316
CLIST TERMIN command procedure
statements 316
closing a data set 86
CMD field 328
CMPBOFS process statement
operands 423
CMPCOLM Search-For process
statement 454
CMPCOLM SuperC process
statement 424
CMPCOLMN SuperC process
statement 424
CMPCOLMO SuperC process
statement 424
CMPLINE Search-For process
statement 455
CMPLINE SuperC process
statement 425
CMPSECT SuperC process
statement 427
CNPML SuperCE process option 411

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

COBOL Interactive debug (option 4.10A)
overview 289
print output data sets 291
processing sequence 290
symbolic debug data sets 291
COBOL Interactive Debug panel 290
COBOL parameter, Sequence Numbers
field 211
COBOL Search-for process option 449
COBOL SuperCE process option 411
col-1 and col-2 parameters, FIND
command 91
COLOR
change defaults 58
Color used to display table key
values 247, 260
COLS parameter, DISPLAY command 89
column limitations 94
column-identification line
defined 88
removing with RESET command 98
COLUMNS command, Browse 88
Command (option 6)
interrupting a TSO command, CLIST,
or REXX EXEC 317
overview 6
restrictions for entering a CLIST or
REXX EXEC 316
Session Manager, using 316
terminal settings 317
TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX
EXECs, entering 315
command action prompt workstation
command 393
Command field, display view
panels 156
command line placement, specifying 27
command prefix (&), displaying
commands after processing 87
command stacking
specifying delimiter 33
Command Table Editing panel 197
command table line commands
edit 199
view 199
Command Table utility (option 3.9)
line commands
D (delete) 199
I (insert) 199
R (repeat) 199
primary commands
CANCEL 198
END 198
Command Table Utility panel 196
commands
Dialog Test 323
displaying after processing 87
entering long commands 313
ISPF command shell 388
line 6
primary 6
TSO command 386
Workplace 393
WS command 387
Compare Type field, SuperCE Utility
panel 217

Compare types, SuperC
Byte 218
File 217
Line 217
Word 217
compress request exit 110, 169
compress workstation command 394
Cond parameter, Browse Output
field 220
CONFIRM command 172
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 172
parameters
OFF 172
ON 172
Confirm Delete field, Data Set List Utility
panel 150
Confirm Delete panel 130
confirm member delete 150
Confirm Purge panel 131
COPY command 170
Copy Format Selection List panel 203
copy member 118
COPY statement 270
Copy workstation command 393
Created field
Data Set List utility 158
CREATED keyword, SORT
command 177
CSECT compare, Superc 474
CUA
defaults
function key settings 394
CUA attributes workstation
command 393
CUA attributes... 61
CUA panel element default values 61
CUA panel element values
(changing) 61
CUAATTR option, Change Utility 61
CYLS parameter, Space Units field 124

D
D (DBCS) parameter, Field Type
field 201
D (delete lines)
Command Table utility (option
3.9) 199
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 168
Dialog Test (option 7) 325
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 204
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) 287
D (delete) line command
Breakpoints (option 7.8) 361
Tables (option 7.4) 344, 346
Variables (option 7.3) 335
D, defined for SuperC 482
DA data set organization, DSORG
field 158
DASD volume 104
Data class field, Allocate New Data Set
panel 123
DATA parameter
HEX command 95
data set allocation exit 123
data set control blocks 163

Data Set download 191
Data Set Information panel
long format 112
long format for managed data
sets 113
short format 116
short format for managed data
sets 117
data set list primary commands
CONFIRM 172
EXCLUDE 172
FIND and RFIND 172
LOCATE 173
MEMBER 174
REFRESH 174
RESET 174
SAVE 174
SHOWCMD 175
SORT 176
SRCHFOR 177
VA,VS,VT,VV 178
Data Set List utility (option 3.4)
data set list exit 146
display views and panels
Attrib 149, 154
sequence of display views 149
Space 149, 154
Total 150, 155
Volume 149, 152
line commands
= (repeat last command) 171
B (browse data set) 166
C (catalog data set) 155, 169
D (delete data set) 168
E (edit data set) 165
F (free unused space) 170
I (data set information) 168
M (display member list) 166
P (print data set) 169
R (rename data set) 168
S (information (short)) 169
U (uncatalog data set) 169
V (view data set) 166
X (print index listing) 170
Z (compress data set) 169
line commands that do not support
managed data sets
C (catalog data set) 169
U (uncatalog data set) 169
line commands that support managed
data sets
I (data set information) 168
R (rename data set) 168
S (information (short)) 169
X (print index listing) 170
list data set 174
options
blank - display data set list 151
P - Print data set list 162
PV - Print VTOC information 164
V - Display VTOC
information 162
primary commands
CONFIRM 172
FIND 172
LOCATE 173
RFIND 173

Data Set List utility (option 3.4)
(continued)
primary commands (continued)
SAVE 174
SHOWCMD 175
SORT 176
data set list utility line commands
copy 170
exclude data set 170
move 170
RefAdd 170
reset 170
unexclude data set 170
unexclude first data set 170
unexclude last data set 171
Data Set List Utility panel 145
Data Set List Utility Primary
Commands 171
Data Set List Utility SHOWCMD
panel 176
Data Set Name field
Foreground Member Parts List
panel 295
SuperC Submit Batch Jobs panel 213
data set organization 157
Data Set Password 104
Data Set utility (option 3.2)
options
A - Allocate new data set 121
blank - data set information 132
C - Catalog data set 128
D - Delete entire data set 130
R - Rename entire data set 128
S - Data set information
(short) 132
U - Uncatalog data set 129
options that do not support managed
data sets
C - Catalog data set 128
U - Uncatalog data set 129
options that support managed data
sets
blank - Data set information 132
R - Rename entire data set 128
S - Data set information
(short) 132
processing with RACF
D - Delete 131
R - Rename 128
R - rename entire data set (GDG) 128
DAU data set organization, DSORG
field 158
DBCS character 105
DBCS considerations, SuperC 206
DC, defined for SuperC 482
DDDD format, Expiration Date field 126
Debug command data set field 310
Debug Options field, Foreground
FORTRAN interactive debug (option
4.11) 293
default keylist for Help Panels 42
delete action prompt workstation
command 393
DELETE command, TSO 150, 172
delete compose, defined for SuperC 482
delete matching, defined for SuperC 482
delete replace, defined for SuperC 482
Index

511

Delete workstation command 393
delete, defined for SuperC 482
DELETE, Traces (option 7.7) 358, 359
Delta parameter, Listing Type field 209,
218
Description column 198
Description field, SCRIPT/VS Formatting
Style panel 287
Device field, Data Set List utility 157
DEVICE keyword, SORT command 177
device name parameter for PRINTG 31
Dialog Function/Selection Panel,
invoking 327
Dialog Services (option 7.6), calling a
dialog service 352
dialog test
accessing and updating variables 321
available ISPF facilities 321
breakpoint cancel (option C) 319
environment 319
ISPF log generation 321
message displayed for severe
errors 323
NEWPOOL option 322
severe error found at breakpoint 323
Dialog Test
DBCS value format 339
log entry for current value of
variable 352
modifying a table row 343
reasons errors occur 323
variable usage 322
Dialog Test (option 7)
Breakpoints (option 7.8) 359
commands 323
D (delete lines) 325
Dialog Services (option 7.6) 352
environment 364
exceptions to restoration when using
Go (option G) 364
Exit (option 7.X) 366
Functions (option 7.1) 327
I (insert lines) 326
Log (option 7.5) 350
overview 6
Panels (option 7.2) 330
R (repeat lines) 326
severe error handling 322
Traces (option 7.7) 355
Tutorial (option 7.T) 366
variable usage 322
Variables (option 7.3) 333
Dialog Test Primary Option Panel 320
Directory blocks field, Allocate New Data
Set panel 125
disability 503
DISALLOW_WILDCARDS_IN_HLQ
option 147
Display Area field 258
DISPLAY command
Browse 88
parameters 89
Display mode for export data set 260
Display Style Options field, SCRIPT/VS
Processor panel 284
distributed editing 74
DLMDUP SuperCE process option 412

512

DLREFM SuperCE process option 412
DM, defined for SuperC 482
Document Composition Facility
(DCF) 283
double-byte character set (DBCS)
column specification in dialog
test 340
defining data type 201
Dialog Test variables format 337
finding a 1-byte hexadecimal
string 95
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 199
DPACMT Search-For process option 449
DPACMT SuperCE process option 412
DPADCMT Search-For process
option 449
DPADCMT SuperCE process option 412
DPBLKCL Search-For process
option 450
DPBLKCL SuperCE process option 412
DPCBCMT Search-For process
option 450
DPCBCMT SuperCE process option 413
DPFTCMT Search-For process
option 450
DPFTCMT SuperCE process option 413
DPLINE Search-for process
statement 456
DPLINE SuperC process statement 431
DPLINEC Search-For process
statement 456
DPLINEC SuperCE process
statement 431
DPPLCMT Search-For process
option 450
DPPLCMT SuperCE process option 413
DPPSCMT Search-For process
option 450
DPPSCMT SuperCE process option 413
DR, defined for SuperC 482
DS1-DS4 fields
Extended Search-For - Concatenation
Data Set Entry panel 238
SuperCE - Concatenation Interactive
Entry panel 221
DSLIST exit 146
DSLIST workstation command 393
Dsname Level field, Data Set List Utility
panel 146
Dsorg field, Data Set List utility 157
DSORG keyword, SORT command 177
DTEST system command 320

E
E (EBCDIC) parameter, Field Type
field 201
E (edit data set) line command, Data Set
List utility (option 3.4) 165
Edit (option 2)
editing a data set 102
overview 6
valid logical record length 101
valid record format 101
edit action prompt workstation
command 393

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

EDIT command, Browse 90
Edit Entry Panel 102
Edit table command 245
edit table panel 246
Edit workstation command 393
edit, command table line command 199
edit, distributed 74
editing a member 119
END
Traces (option 7.7) 358, 359
END command
Breakpoints (option 7.8) 361, 363
Command Table utility (option
3.9) 198
Dialog Test (option 7) 325
Variables (option 7.3) 335
Enter Session Manager Mode field 316
Environ settings 64
ENVIRON system command 64
environment, Dialog Test 319
errors
message displayed during dialog test
processing 323
reasons for occurring during Dialog
Test 323
trigger statement 272
EXCLUDE command 172
Exclude Data Set command 170
Execution Parms field
COBOL interactive debug 291
Exit (option 7.X) ending Dialog Test 366
Exit (option X)
overview 6
EXPAND primary command 247
Expanding Packed Data 269
expansion trigger, defined 269
Expiration data field, Allocate New Data
Set panel 125
Expires field, Data Set List utility 158
EXPIRES keyword, SORT command 177
explosion chain, defined 297
EXPORT command 250
export table to data set 263
data set attributes 262
export data set 252
Export Layout panel 250
export report options 260, 264
extended binary coded decimal
interchange code (EBCDIC)
defining data type 201
using numbered data 202
Extended Search-For - Concatenation
Batch Entry panel 239
Extended Search-For - Concatenation
Data Set Entry panel 238
Extended Search-For Compare utility
applications 407
options
B - submit batch search-for 239
Blank - search-for strings 238
E - edit Search-For statements data
set 240
P - select Search-For process
options 240
overview 234
process options 409
process statements 419

Extended Search-For Compare utility
(continued)
return codes 469
SuperC program description 406
utility differences 405
Extended Search-For process statements,
notation conventions 453
Extended Search-For Utility panel 235
extended utilities 405
extension variables 248

F
F (foreground) parameter, Mode
field 207
F (foreground) parameter, Mode field,
Search-For Utility panel 230
F (free unused space) line command,
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 170
F (function) pool, Pool field 358
F record format, Record Format
field 125
false match, correcting in SuperC 472
false match, defined for SuperC 485
family printer type parameter for
PRINTG 31
FEXPORT command 252
field 361
Active 357, 359, 361
AFTER 365
Application 365
BEFORE 365
Breakpoint 365
by row number 339
BY ROW NUMBER 339
current row 339
Current row count 348, 350
Current row pointer 347, 349
Current status 365
Cursor field 331
Cursor position 332
Date created 348, 349
DBCS column specification 340
Dialog services to be traced 357
Display in window 332
Function 357, 359, 361, 365
ID 330
KEYS 347
LANG 329
Last date modified 348, 349
Last modified by 348, 350
Last service return code 349
Last table service 349
Last time modified 348, 349
Message id 331
Message pop-up field 332
MODE 329
Modified row count 348, 350
NAMES 347
NEWAPPL 330
NEWPOOL 330
Number of keys 347
Number of names 347
Number of rows 347
Open option 349
Open tables 339
Operation 359

field (continued)
Original row count 348, 350
P (pool) 335
PANEL 328
Panel name 331
PASSLIB 330
PGM 329
Pool 358
Qual 361
Qualification parameter values 362
Return code 365
row identification 339
Row number 342
Service 361
Service Name 365
specifying a DBCS value 339
Status for this screen 348, 349
Table available 348
table name 339
Table name 342
Table on disk 349
Time created 348, 349
Update count 348, 350
using the Value field 339
variable 339
Variable 335, 343
Virtual storage size 348, 350
When 361
WSCMD 330
Field Heading field, table utility 251
Field Length field, Format Definition
panel 201
Field Number field, Format Definition
panel 201
Field Type field, Format Definition
panel 201
field1 parameter, SORT command 176
field2 parameter, SORT command 176
FILE command, table utility 252
File comparison of a complete PDS 488
File comparison of a sequential data set
or membered PDS 488
File parameter, Compare Type field 217
FILEXFER service 191
FIND command 172
ASCII strings 93
Browse
1-byte hexadecimal strings 95
character strings, use of 93
column limitations 94
conditions for character string
matches 93
displaying column numbers
searched 92
omitting string delimiters 92
picture strings, use of 94
rules for using col-1 and col-2 94
specifying FIND strings 91
starting point, direction, and extent
of search 92
string not found actions 93
text strings, use of 93
using RFIND 95
using string delimiters 92
search operands 91, 92
string matching operands 91
table utility 253

FIND command (continued)
USASCII strings 93
UTF8 strings 93
FIRST parameter, FIND command 92
FMVLNS SuperCE process option 414
Foreground (option 4)
AD/Cycle C/370 compiler (option
4.15) 297
AD/Cycle C/370 compiler (option
4.16) 298
Assembler H (option 4.1) 275
C/370 compiler (option 4.13) 297
COBOL interactive debug (option
4.10A) 289
defined 265
expanding packed data 269
FORTRAN interactive debug (option
4.11) 292
input data sets 272
Linkage Editor (option 4.7) 280
list data sets 273
Members Parts List (option 4.12) 293
object data sets 274
overview 6
password protection 274
PL/I optimizing compiler (option
4.5) 278
processing sequence 266
REXX/370 compiler (option 4.14) 297
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) 282
using the TSO/E Information Center
Facility 275
VS COBOL II compiler (option
4.2) 276
VS COBOL II interactive debug
(option 4.10) 289
VS FORTRAN compiler (option
4.3) 277
VS Pascal compiler (option 4.6) 279
Foreground Assembler H panel 276
Foreground Environment Feature 283
Foreground Linkage Edit panel 281
Foreground Members Parts List
panel 294
Foreground Options
C/C++ for OS/390 298
ISPDTLC 298
Foreground PL/I Optimizing Compile
panel 279
Foreground Print Options for Style
panel 286
Foreground Print Options panel 268,
275
Foreground Selection panel 265
Foreground VS COBOL II Compile
panel 277
Foreground VS FORTRAN Compile
panel 278
Foreground VS Pascal Compile
panel 280
Format Definition panel 201
Format Name field
Format Specification panel 200
Format Selection List panel 204
Format Specification panel 200

Index

513

Format Specification utility (option 3.11)
line commands
D (deleting a format) 204
R (renaming a format) 205
S (selecting a format) 205
U (updating a format) 205
options
A - add a new format 201
C - copy formats 202
D - delete a format 203
L or Blank - display format
list 203
U - update a format 203
primary commands
LOCATE 204
SORT 205
FORTRAN interactive debug (option
4.11) 292
FORTRAN Interactive Debug panel 293
Free DSCBS field, VTOC Information
Display 163
Free Extents field, VTOC Information
Display 163
From Format field, Format Specification
panel 200
From Table field, Format Specification
panel 163, 201
FSCR parameter, MODE field 329, 330
full information workstation
command 393
function key defaults, workplace 394,
395
function key settings, workplace 394
function keys
defining functions 43
specifying labels 43
specifying number 55
Functions (option 7.1), testing a dialog
function 327

G
Generate headings (in export report) 261
generic unit address 124
GET operation 359
global color change utility 58
global color change workstation
command 393
global GUI color change utility 59
graphics interface mode, effect on Session
Manager 266
graphics, settings parameters for
PRINTG 31
Groups For Primary Members field
Foreground Member Parts List
panel 295
Member Parts List Display 297
GUI Installation, ISPF C/S Install
Utility 187
GUI parameters, specifying 64
GWCBL SuperCE process option 414

514

H
Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)
additional batch printing
information 185
using the TSO/E Information Center
Facility 185
Hardcopy Utility panel
after JCL generation 184
before JCL generation 182
with the TSO/E Information Center
Facility installed 186
hashsum, defined 488
HELP command
displaying column numbers
searched 92
HEX command
Browse 95
operands
DATA 95
OFF 95
ON 95
VERT 95
hexadecimal data, Dialog Test variables
format 337
high-level qualifier
wildcards in 147

I
I (data set information) line command,
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 168
I (implicit) variable, P (pool) field 335
I (insert lines), Dialog Test (option
7) 326
I (insert) line command
Breakpoints (option 7.8) 361
Tables (option 7.4) 344, 346
Variables (option 7.3) 335
I (insert) line command, Command Table
utility (option 3.9) 199
I, defined for SuperC 482
IBM Products (option 9)
overview 6
IC, defined for SuperC 482
IDPFX Search-For process option 451
IEBCOPY utility 110, 169
IEBGENER utility 185
If Partitioned, Replace Like-Named
Members field 140
If Sequential, “To” Data Set Disposition
field 141
IM, defined for SuperC 482
image path 73
implicit variable 335
import table from data set 263
Include Additional Qualifiers (in data set
list) 151
INCLUDE statement 270
inconsistent attributes, defined 127
information action prompt workstation
command 393
Information Center Facility
foreground processing sequence 268
Hardcopy utility 182
Outlist utility 194
information, bottom-of-listing 485

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Initial Macro field, Edit Entry panel 84
Initial View field
defined 149
views
Attrib 149
sequence of views 149
Space 149
Total 150
Volume 149
input data sets 272
INSERT command 253
insert compose, defined for SuperC 482
insert matching, defined for SuperC 482
insert, defined for SuperC 482
INSERT, Traces (option 7.7) 358, 359
Installation
Download Data Set to
Workstation 187
installation exits
compress request 110, 169
data set allocation 123
data set list (DSLIST) 146
print utility 182, 194, 268
Installation program
Workstation agent 191
integration program, workstation
tool 74
Intensity used to display table key
values 247, 260
IS data set organization, DSORG
field 158
ISPCMDS 195
ISPDTLC (Option 4.18) 298
ISPDTLC compile, batch 312
ISPDTLC interface panel 298
ISPF
default keylist 42
restrictions
multivolume data sets 124, 146
tape 124, 146
ISPF C/S download 189
ISPF C/S Download Utility
C/S method 189
ISPF C/S Install option 187
ISPF C/S Install Utility
ISPFINST.EXE 191
ISPF C/S Installation 187
ISPF Command field 313
ISPF command shell 388
ISPF Command Shell panel 313
ISPF command shell workstation
command 393
ISPF command table workstation
command 393
ISPF Primary Option Menu - status
area 8
ISPF referral list
Workplace (Option 11) 373
ISPF restrictions
multivolume data sets 124, 146
tape 124, 146
ISPF Settings (option 0 ), overview 5
ISPF Table Utility 241
ISPFINST.EXE 191
ISPTLIB 195
ISRFORM table 202

ISRLEMX
description 270
member parts list 293
return codes 272
ISRSCAN
description 270
member parts list 303
return codes 272
ISU data set organization, DSORG
field 158

J
JCL generation
Assembler and Linkage Editor 303
compilers 302
job control language, generating and
submitting print jobs 183
job statement information
preventing JES line counting 286
job stream, submitting a 87, 98
JobID field, Outlist Utility panel 193
Jobname field, Outlist Utility panel 193
jump function, from leader dots 29

K
K (key) variable 341, 343, 345
KB parameter, Space Units field 124
keyboard 503
keylist
defaults for Help Panels 42
help panel name 51
modification choices 48
keylist utility 42
keylist workstation command 393
keys 42
PA1 317
Reset 317

L
label fields
defining 45
using PFSHOW command 45
label parameter, LOCATE command 97
Language field, Foreground Member
Parts List panel 294
large files, partitioning and processing in
SuperC 472
Largest field, VTOC Information
Display 163
LAST parameter, FIND command 92
LC command 173
LC command, Data Set List utility
(option 3.4) 173
leader dots, and jump function 29
Library utility (option 3.1)
options
B - browse member 118
Blank - display member list 109
C - compress data set 110
D - delete member 118
E - edit member 119
I - data set information 111
L - print entire data set 111

Library utility (option 3.1) (continued)
options (continued)
P - print member 119
R - rename member 119
S - data set information
(short) 115
V - view member 119
X - print index listing 110
options that support managed data
sets
I - data set information 113
S - data set information
(short) 116
X - print index listing 110
Library Utility panel 108
LINE - Dialog Test (option 7) 325
Line Cmd field, SCRIPT/VS Formatting
Style panel 287
line commands
Command Table utility (option
3.9) 198
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 158,
164
defined 6
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 205
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) 287
Line parameter, Compare Type field 217
LINE parameter, DISPLAY command 89
LINE parameter, MODE field 329
line-number operand, LOCATE
command 97
Linkage Editor (option 4.7)
concatenation sequence 282
LEL control statements 282
overview 280
Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 308
Linkage Editor concatenation
sequence 282
Linkage Editor language 282
Linkage Editor Options field, Foreground
Linkage Editor (option 4.7) 281
list action prompt workstation
command 393
list data set
list-id 174
prefix 174
specifying characteristics 39
specifying defaults 35
List ID field
Batch Selection Panel 301
Foreground Print Options panel 273
Foreground Selection panel 267
list view workstation command 393
list-id parameter
SAVE command 174
Listing DS Name field
Extended Search-For Utility
panel 237
SuperC Utility-Old Data Set Name
panel 210
Listing Dsn field, SuperCE Utility
panel 218
Listing DSNAME field, Search-For Utility
panel 231
listing title lines, SuperC 481

Listing Type field
SuperC Utility-Old Data Set Name
panel 209
SuperCE Utility panel 218
listing, SuperC member summary 484
listings, Search-for 489
listings, side-by-side 486
LMCSFC SuperCE process option 414
LMTO Search-For process option 451
LNCT Search-For process statement 458
LNCT SuperC process statement 433
LNFMTO Search-For process
statement 451
load module library display
expanded line command field 168
Local parameter, Print Mode field 183
Local Printer ID field, Hardcopy Utility
panel 183
LOCATE
Dialog Test (option 7) 325
Traces (option 7.7) 358, 359
LOCATE character string 325
LOCATE command 173
Breakpoints (option 7.8) 361
Browse 97
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 173
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 204
parameters
label 97
line-number 97
lparm 173
name 204
Variables (option 7.3) 335
Locate table command 244, 246
locate workstation command 393
LOCS SuperCE process option 414
Log (option 7.5)
displaying the ISPF log 350
logged trace output 351
reasons log is not available 351
log data set
specifying defaults 35
Log/List (option 0)
changing defaults 6
long message
line placement 28
specifying 28
long message areas, displaying in a
pop-up 28
LONG parameter, Listing Type
field 210, 218
LONGLN Search-For process option 451
LONGLN SuperCE process option 414
LookAt message retrieval tool xiv
lparm parameter, LOCATE
command 173
LPSF Search-For process option 451
LPSFV Search-For process statement 459
Lrecl field, Data Set List utility 158
LRECL keyword, SORT command 177
LSTCOLM Search-For process
statement 460
LSTCOLM SuperC process
statement 434
LTO Search-For process option 451

Index

515

M
M (display member list) line command,
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 166
M (machine) parameter, Printer Carriage
Control field 194
M (mixed ) parameter, Field Type
field 201
M record format, Record Format
field 125
managed data set
displaying information for 113
Management class field, Allocate New
Data Set panel 123
match compose, defined for SuperC 482
match, defined for SuperC 482
matching input files, SuperC 471
Maximum rows searched to determine
column width 247, 259
MB parameter, Space Units field 124
MC, defined for SuperC 482
MEMBER command
description 174
member expansion return codes 272
member list display
expanded line command field 167
Member list workstation command 393
member not found 297
member parameter
BROWSE command 87
SYSTERM DD statement 304
Member Parts List (option 4.12)
CALL statement format 293
member not found 297
options
1 - browse/print member parts
list 295
2 - write member parts data
set 296
overview 293
Procedure Division 294
record format 296
Member Parts List (option 5.12) 311
member parts list display 296
member summary listing, SuperC 484
membered PDS, defined 208
Message field, display view panels 156
MESSAGE keyword, SORT
command 177
message retrieval tool, LookAt xiv
mixed data
B (browse data set) line
command 166
defining data type 201
E (edit data set) line command 165
using numbered data 202
V (view data set) line command 166
Mixed Mode 105
MIXED Search-For process option 451
MIXED SuperCE process option 414
Mod parameter, “To” Data Set
Disposition field 141
Mode field
Search-For Utility panel 230
SuperC Utility panel 207
Mode, Mixed 105
MOUNT authority 124
MOVE command 170

516

move member 119
Move workstation command 393
move/copy 390
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)
alias entries 144
options
C and CP - copying data sets 139
M and MP - moving data
sets 141
with load modules 143
Move/Copy Utility panel 138
Multiple Search Strings panel 231
multiple search strings, entering 231
multivol indicator 157
multivolume data sets 124, 146
MVOL, Sort command field 177

N
Name field
display view panels 156
NAME keyword
LOCATE command 204
SORT command 177, 205
name, Writer 183
NARROW Super CE process option 415
NCHGT Search-For process
statement 461
NCHGT SuperC process statement 435
new data set, defined for SuperC
description 206
examples 477
used with SuperCE 215
New DS Name field, SuperCE Utility
panel 216
New Output Class field, Outlist Utility
panel 194
New UserID field, Reset ISPF Statistics
panel 179
New Version Number field, Reset ISPF
Statistics panel 180
NEWAPPL field 330
NEWPOOL field 330
NEXT parameter, FIND command 92
NO parameter
Active field
breakpoints 361
function traces 357
variable traces 359
Browse Output field 220
Confirm Delete Request field,
deselect 150
Replace like-named PDS members
field 140
Select pack option For “To” data set
field 141
Specify additional search strings field,
deselect 230
Table available field 348
Table on disk field 349
NOACTBAR workstation command 393
NOCC parameter, DISPLAY
command 89
Nolist parameter, Listing Type field 210,
218
non-paired change, defined for
SuperC 485

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

non-paired members, defined for
SuperC 484
NOP action, ACTION column 198
NOPRTCC Search-For process
option 451
NOPRTCC SuperCE process option 415
NOSEQ parameter, Sequence Numbers
field 211
NOSEQ Search-For process option 452
NOSEQ SuperCE process option 415
NOSUMS Search-For process option 452
NOSUMS SuperCE process option 415
NOT OPEN parameter 348, 349
Notices 505
NOWRITE parameter 349
NTITLE SuperC process statement 439,
463
Number of Copies field, Hardcopy Utility
panel 186

O
object data sets 274
Object field
Foreground VS FORTRAN compiler
(option 4.3) 278
OCHGT SuperC process statement 435
OFF parameter
CONFIRM command 172
HEX command 95
SHOWCMD command 175
old data set, defined for SuperC 477
Old DS Name field, SuperCE Utility
panel 216
Old parameter, “To” Data Set Disposition
file 141
ON parameter
CONFIRM command 172
HEX command 95
SHOWCMD command 175
Open option field
NOWRITE parameter 349
SHR NOWRITE parameter 349
SHR WRITE parameter 349
WRITE parameter 349
OPEN parameter 348, 349
Open table in SHARE mode 259
Open workstation command 393
OPT field 328
option
Cancel (option C) 364
Go (option G) 364
option selection
0 - ISPF Settings 5
1 - View 5
10 - SCLM 6
2 - Edit 6
3 - Utilities 6
4 - Foreground 6
5 - Batch 6
6 - Command 6
7 - Dialog Test 6
9 - IBM Products 6
X - Exit 6
options, table utility 259
Order field, table utility 251, 255
OS/390 C/C++ compile, batch 312

Other field
Batch Assembler H (option 5.1) 305
Batch Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 309
Batch VS COBOL II compiler (option
5.2) 305
Batch VS FORTRAN compiler (option
5.3) 306
Foreground PL/I optimizing compiler
(option 4.5) 279
Foreground VS COBOL II compiler
(option 4.2) 277
Foreground VS FORTRAN compiler
(option 4.3) 278
Foreground VS Pascal compiler
(option 4.6) 280
OTITLE SuperC process statement 439,
463
OUTDD DD field, SuperC Submit Batch
Jobs panel 214
Outlist utility (option 3.8)
options
Blank - display job output 195
D - delete job output from
SYSOUT hold queue 194
L - list job names/IDs via the TSO
STATUS command 194
P - print job output and delete
from SYSOUT hold queue 194
R - requeue job output to a new
output class 195
Outlist Utility panel 193
overview of ISPF
ISPF primary options 5
OVSUM listing type
File comparison of a complete
PDS 488
File comparison of a sequential data
set or membered PDS 488
OVSUM parameter, Listing Type
field 210, 218

P
P (print) line command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 169
P (profile) pool, Pool field 358
P (profile) variable, P (pool) field 335
PA1 key 317
packed data
defined 269
packing data, Foreground (option 4) 266
pad characters for panel input fields 33
paired change, defined for SuperC 485
paired members, defined for
SuperC 485
panel
Add Row 345
confirm table row delete 342
Dialog Test Tutorial 366
Display 331
display row 341
Function Traces 357
Invoke Dialog Service 353
Message Display 333
modify row 343
Table Structure 347
Traces 356

panel (continued)
Variable Traces 358
Variables 334
Panel
Breakpoint Primary Option 363
Special Display 355
panels
data set list display view panels
ATTRIB view panel 154
Space view panel 154
Total view panel 155
VOLUME view panel 152
load module library display
expanded line command field 168
member list display
expanded line command field 167
Tables 338
working with dialog tables 338
Panels (option 7.2), testing dialog
panels 330
parameter
parenthesis added to 197
parameter string 362
parenthesis, added to command
parameter 197
PARM field 329
partitioning and processing in SuperC,
large files 472
PASSLIB field 330
Passthru action
Action column 198
Password field
Foreground Data Entry panel 274
Foreground Selection panel 267
password protection 274
Password, Data Set 104
PATH entry in Volume field 148
patterns
Dsname Level field 147
PDS Member List field
defined 217
parameters 236
personal data set lists command 393
personal library lists command 393
physical record length, defined 125
picture strings, use of 94
PL/I optimizing compiler (option
4.5) 278
PL/I optimizing compiler (option
5.5) 306
PO data set organization, DSORG
field 158
point and shoot workstation
command 394
POU data set organization, Dsorg
field 158
prefix parameter
data set list to ISPF list data set 174
FIND command 91
SYSTERM DD statement 304
PREFIX parameter, FIND command 91
PREV parameter, FIND command 92
primary commands
Browse 87
CANCEL 325
Command Table utility (option
3.9) 198

primary commands (continued)
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 171
defined 6
END 325
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 204
LOCATE 325
QUAL 325
RESUME 325
Primary Commands, Data Set List
Utility 171
primary library, defined 297
primary member, defined 297
Primary quantity field, Allocate New
Data Set panel 125
print action prompt workstation
command 394
print data set command 393
print data set index workstation
command 394
Print data set list workstation
command 394
Print ID field, COBOL Interactive Debug
panel 290, 291
Print Mode field
parameters
BATCH parameter 183
LOCAL parameter 183
SCRIPT/VS Processor panel 286
print output data sets 291
print utility exit
foreground processing sequence 268
Hardcopy utility 182
Outlist utility 194
Print VTOC information workstation
command 394
Print workstation command 393
Printer Carriage Control field, Outlist
Utility panel 194
Printer Format field, Hardcopy Utility
panel 186
Printer Location field, Hardcopy Utility
panel 186
PRINTG
parameters 31
specifying printer output 31
printing
Extended Search-For listing in batch
mode 239
output 182
SuperCE listing in batch mode 222
Procedure Division 294
Process Options field
Extended Search-For Utility
panel 237
SuperCE Utility panel 219
process options, Search-For 449
process statements, Search-For 452
Profile DSN field, SuperC Utility
panel 207
Profile Name field, Edit Entry Panel 85
profile, defined for SuperCE 207
Prog ID field, COBOL Interactive Debug
panel 290
PROMPT, Sort command field 177
PS data set organization, DSORG
field 158
Index

517

PS-E 158
PS-L 158
PSU data set organization, Dsorg
field 158
Purge Data Set field, Confirm Purge
panel 131
PUT operation 359

Q
QUAL
command - Breakpoints (option
7.8) 361
Dialog Test (option 7) 325
qualification parameter values
Qualify action bar pull-down
Breakpoints... choice 361
Qualifications... choice 361

R
R (rename) line command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 168
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 205
R (repeat lines), Dialog Test (option
7) 326
R (repeat) line command
Breakpoints (option 7.8) 361
Command Table utility 199
Tables (option 7.4) 344, 346
R (repeat) line command, Command
Table utility 199
RACF, processing with
D - delete 131
R - rename 128
Recfm field, Data Set List utility 158
RECFM keyword, SORT command 177
Record format field, Allocate New Data
Set panel 125
Record length field, Allocate New Data
Set panel 125
RefAdd command 170
Referred field, Data Set List utility 158
REFERRED keyword, SORT
command 177
REFMOVR SuperCE process option 415
reformat new, defined for SuperC 482
reformat old, defined for SuperC 482
REFRESH command 174
rename 391
rename action prompt workstation
command 394
rename data set with expiration
date 129
rename processing with RACF 128
rename workstation command 393
Rename workstation command 394
renaming data sets
with expiration date 129
REPEAT, Traces (option 7.7) 358, 359
reset action prompt workstation
command 393
RESET command 170, 174
Browse 98
Reset ISPF Statistics panel 179

518

Reset ISPF Statistics utility (option 3.5)
options
D - delete ISPF statistics 181
R - reset (create/update) ISPF
statistics 181
results of resetting statistics 181
valid logical record lengths 178
RESET key
restriction 45
reset member 119
Reset Mod Level field, Reset ISPF
Statistics panel 180
RESET parameter, DISPLAY
command 90
Reset Seq Numbers field, Reset ISPF
Statistics panel 180
reset statistics 385
restrictions on member expansion and
member parts lists
all programming languages 270
assembler 271
COBOL 271
FORTRAN 271
Pascal 271
PL/I 271
SCRIPT/VS 272
RESUME - Dialog Test (option 7) 325
return codes
Batch JCL generation 272, 303
member expansion 272
SuperC 469
REXX error exits 316
REXX/370 compiler
batch processing 311
foreground processing 297
RFIND command 172
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 173
table utility 253
using 95
RN, defined for SuperC 482
Rnn parameter 361
RO, defined for SuperC 482
rules
for substituting slash (/) for data set
name 159
for using the col-1 and col-2
operands 94
service call image for function trace
entries 352
using the add row option 345
using the Dialog Test Breakpoints
option 363
using the Modify Row option 343

S
S (information (short)) line command,
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 169
S (select) line command
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 205
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) 287
S (shared) pool, Pool field 358
S (shared) variable, P (pool) field 335
S record format, Record Format
field 125
SAVE command 174

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SAVE command (continued)
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 174
parameters
list-id 174
name 205
table utility 254
SCLM (option 10)
overview 6, 369
SCLM Primary Option Menu 369
SCLM Setting 141
SCLM Settings 180
screen format, specifying 30
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) 283
changing style options 287
line commands
D (delete) 287
S (select) 287
selecting a formatting style 287
using the TSO/E Information Center
Facility 288, 289
SCRIPT/VS Options for Style panel 288
SCRIPT/VS Processor panel 283
scrollable fields, in Table Utility 250
Scrollable fields, in Table Utility 247
SDUPM Search-For process option 452
Search DS Name field, Extended
Search-For Utility panel 235
Search Member List panel 233
Search String field, Search-For Utility
panel 230
search strings, multiple 231
Search-For listings, SuperC 489
Search-For process options 449
Search-For process statements 452
Search-For Process Statements panel 241
Search-For Utility - Submit Batch Jobs
panel 234
Search-For utility (option 3.14)
applications 407
invoking directly 474
process options
ANYC (any case) 449
APNDLST (appends the listing to
a data set) 449
CKPACKL 449
COBOL (ignore columns 1–6) 449
DPACMT (ignore comment
lines) 449
DPADCMT (ignore ADA type
comments) 449
DPBLKCL (ignore blank
lines) 450
DPCBCMT (ignore COBOL type
comments) 450
DPFTCMT (ignore FORTRAN type
comments) 450
DPPLCMT (ignore PL/I type
comments) 450
DPPSCMT (ignore PASCAL type
comments) 450
IDPFX (identifier prefixed) 451
LMTO (list group members totals
only) 451
LNFMTO (list not found
member/data set totals
only) 451
LONGLN (long lines) 451

Search-For utility (option 3.14) (continued)
process options (continued)
LPSF (list previous Search-For
following lines) 451
LTO (list totals only) 451
MIXED 451
NOPRTCC (no printer control
columns) 451
NOSEQ (no sequence numbers they do not exist) 452
NOSUMS (no summary listing
section) 452
SDUPM (search duplicate
members) 452
SEQ (sequence numbers - ignore
columns 73-80) 452
XREF (cross reference strings) 452
process statements
CMPCOLM (compare
columns) 454
CMPLINE (compare lines) 455
DPLINE (don’t process lines) 456
DPLINEC (continuation condition
of DPLINE) 456
LNCT (line count) 458
LPSFV (count value) 459
LSTCOLM (list columns) 460
NCHGT (change text of new text
string) 461
SELECT (select members/data sets
to be searched) 464
SLIST (statements data set listing
control) 465
SRCHFOR (Search-For strings in
the input data sets) 466
SRCHFORC (continuation
condition of SRCHFOR) 466
return codes 469
selecting members from a member
list 233
SuperC program description 406
utility differences 405
Search-For Utility panel 229
SearchFor extended workstation
command 394
SearchFor workstation command 394
Secondary quantity field, Allocate New
Data Set panel 125
Select action, Action column 198
SELECT command
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 205
Select SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style
panel 287
SELECT Search-For process
statement 464
SELECT service 320
SELECT SuperC process statement 445
select workstation command 394
SEQ parameter, Sequence Numbers
field 210
SEQ Search-For process option 452
SEQ SuperCE process option 415
Sequence field, table utility 255
Sequence Numbers field, SuperC Utility Old Data Set Name panel 210
Serial, Volume 104

Session Manager
Command (option 6) 316
Foreground (option 4) 266
Member Parts List (option 4.12) 295
SCRIPT/VS 284
using 316
Set options for IMPORT format
report 261
Settings option 25
Settings workstation command 394
SETVERB action
Action column 198
shift-in characters
in Dialog Test variables 337
using the Value field 339
shift-out characters
in Dialog Test variables 337
using the Value field 339
short information command 394
shortcut keys 503
SHOWCMD command 175
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 175
parameters
OFF 175
ON 175
SHR NOWRITE parameter 349
SHR WRITE parameter 349
side-by-side listings, SuperC 486
Size field
VTOC Information Display 163
SLIST process statement
Search-For 465
SuperC 446
smart action 397
Software Configuration and Library
Manager (SCLM) 369
SORT command 176
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 176
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 205
keywords
%USED 177
BLKSZ 177
CREATED 177
DEVICE 177
DSORG 177
EXPIRES 177
LRECL 177
MESSAGE 177
NAME 177
RECFM 177
REFERRED 177
TRACKS 177
VOLUME 177
XT 177
parameters
field1 176
field2 176
NAME 205
TIME 205
table utility 254
source data for SuperC listings 478
Source Data Online field, Batch Selection
panel 300
Source Data Packed field
Batch Selection panel 300
Foreground Print Options panel 269

Source Data Packed field (continued)
Foreground Selection panel 266
Source field, COBOL Interactive Debug
panel 291
Source Type field, Foreground Selection
panel 267
Space display view, Initial View
field 149
Space units field, Allocate New Data Set
panel 124
Specify additional strings field,
Search-For Utility panel 230
Specify Pack option for “To” Data Set
field 141
split-screen mode
command line placement 28
SRCHFOR command, Data Set List utility
(option 3.4) 177
SRCHFOR Search-For process
statement 466
SRCHFORC Search-For process
statement 466
standard Search-For utility, entering
multiple search strings 231
standard utilities 405
Start Column field 201
starting a GUI session
from Settings (option 0) 66
Statements Dsn field
Extended Search-For Utility
panel 237
SuperCE Utility panel 219
statistics
creating or resetting 181
STATS command 255
status area - ISPF Primary Option
Menu 8
status area - Primary Option Menu
calendar view 13
Defining 16
function key view 12
No view selected 16
point-and-shoot view 15
session view 9
user view 15
Status for Table panel
table not open 348
table open 349
Storage class field, Allocate New Data Set
panel 123
string parameter
FIND command 91
STRUCT command 257
Style field
SCRIPT/VS Formatting Style
panel 287
SCRIPT/VS Processor panel 283
style, defined for SCRIPT/VS 283
SUBMIT command, BROWSE 87, 98
Submit workstation command 393
submitting a job stream 87, 98
SUFFIX parameter, FIND command 93
Superc
CSECT compare 474
SuperC Activate/Create Profile options
A - activate 226
C - create 226
Index

519

SuperC Activate/Create Profile options
(continued)
D - default 227
SuperC alias members 473
SuperC CLIST interface 227
SuperC compare types
Byte 218
different comparison results 473
File 217
Line 217
Word 217
SuperC Compare utility
correcting false matches 472
different comparison results 473
filtering priority for input lines 470
find match example 471
invoking directly 474
partitioning and processing large
files 472
process statements
allowed by compare type,
table 421
CHNG 422
CHNGV 422
CMPBOFS 423
CMPCOLM 424
CMPCOLMN 424
CMPCOLMO 424
CMPLINE 425
CMPSECT 427
DPLINE 431
DPLINEC 431
LNCT 433
LSTCOLM 434
NCHGT 435
NTITLE 439, 463
OCHGT 435
OTITLE 439, 463
SELECT 445
SLIST 446
SuperC comparison process options
COVSUM 411
DPCPCMT 413, 450
DPMACMT 413, 450
FINDALL 451
FMSTOP 414, 451
UPDREV 417
UPDREV2 417
Y2DTONLY 418
SuperC comparison process statements
end-position (NEXCLUDE
operand) 437
end-position (NFOCUS operand) 438
end-position (OEXCLUDE
operand) 437
end-position (OFOCUS operand) 438
fixed (Y2PAST operand) 447
RCVAL=number (REVREF
operand) 444
REFID=name (REVREF operand) 444
sliding (Y2PAST operand) 447
start-position (NEXCLUDE
operand) 437
start-position (NFOCUS
operand) 438
start-position (OEXCLUDE
operand) 437

520

SuperC comparison process statements
(continued)
start-position (OFOCUS
operand) 438
SuperC Defaults panel 228
SuperC extended workstation
command 394
SuperC listing prefix codes
| 482
blank 482
D 482
DC 482
DM 482
DR 482
I 482
IC 482
IM 482
MC 482
RN 482
RO 482
SuperC listing source data 478
SuperC listing types
CHNG 209, 218
Delta 209, 218
Long 210, 218
Nolist 210, 218
OVSUM 210, 218
SuperC listings
overview 477
prefix codes 482
source and index listings 477
SuperC load module compares 474
SuperC Member List panel 211
SuperC process options
APNDUPD 490
UPDCMS8 491
UPDCNTL 491
UPDMVS8 495
UPDPDEL 496
UPDSEQ0 499
UPDSUMO 500
SuperC Process Statements panel 224
SuperC program, requirements for 406
SuperC programming interface 227
SuperC search process options
DPCPCMT 413, 450
DPMACMT 413, 450
FINDALL 451
FMSTOP 414, 451
SuperC type-of-difference codes
LEN 483
N-LN# and O-LN# 483
types 482
SuperC update files
UPDREV 497, 498
UPDREV2 Revision File (2) 499
SuperC Utility - Submit Batch Jobs panel
overview 212
using NOLIST 215
SuperC utility (option 3.12)
applications 407
new data set 206
old data set 208
printing a Search-For listing in batch
mode 234
printing a SuperC listing in batch
mode 212

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

SuperC utility (option 3.12) (continued)
process options 409
process statements 419
program description 406
return codes 469
specifying members on a member
list 211
submit options
1 - generate output listing in
DATA SET NAME 213
2 - generate output listing using
completed //OUTDD DD 214
blank - generate output listing to
SYSOUT CLASS 212
utility differences 405
SuperC Utility panel 206
SuperC utility, requirements for 406
SuperC workstation command 394
SuperC, DBCS considerations 206
SuperCE - Concatenation Batch Entry
panel 222
SuperCE - Concatenation Interactive
Entry panel 221
SuperCE - Profile Manager panel
option A - Activate 226
option C - Create 226
option D - Defaults 227
SuperCE Compare utility
CKPACKL 411
UPDLDEL Long source and Delta
data set 495
UPDLDEL prefixed Delta data
set 496
SuperCE process statements, notation
conventions 419
SuperCE Profile Browse Display
panel 225
SuperCE utility (option 3.13)
applications 407
options
A - activate profiles and
defaults 224
B - submit batch data set
compare 221
Blank - compare data sets 220
E - edit SuperCE statements data
set 223
P - select process options 409
P - select SuperCE process
options 222
S - Extended Search-For
utility 234
process options
ANYC (any case) 410
APNDLST (appends the listing to
a data set) 411
APNDUPD (append update
output) 411
CKPACKL (check for packed
data) 411
CNPML (count non-paired
member lines) 411
COBOL (ignore columns 1-6) 411
DLMDUP (don’t list matching
duplicate lines) 412
DLREFM (don’t list old data set
reformatted lines) 412

SuperCE utility (option 3.13) (continued)
process options (continued)
DPACMT (ignore comment
lines) 412
DPADCMT (ignore ADA type
comments) 412
DPBLKCL (ignore blank
lines) 412
DPCBCMT (ignore COBOL type
comments) 413
DPFTCMT (ignore FORTRAN type
comments) 413
DPPLCMT (ignore PL/I type
comments) 413
DPPSCMT (ignore PASCAL type
comments) 413
FMVLNS (flagged moved
lines) 414
GWCBL (generate change
bars) 414
LMCSFC (list name, number of
bytes, and hash sum) 414
LOCS (list only changed members
or data sets) 414
LONGLN (create listing with 203
columns) 414
MIXED 414
NARROW (create listing with 132
columns) 415
NOPRTCC (no printer control
columns) 415
NOSEQ (no sequence
numbers--they do not exist) 415
NOSUMS (no summary listing
section) 415
overview 409
REFMOVR (reformat
override) 415
SEQ (sequence numbers--ignore
columns 73-80) 415
UPDCMS8 (update CMS 8
format) 416
UPDCNTL (update control) 416
UPDLDEL (source data set with
delta changes) 416
UPDMVS8 (update MVS 8
format) 417
UPDPDEL (update prefix delta
lines) 417
UPDSEQ0 (update sequence
0) 418
UPDSUMO (update summary
only) 418
WIDE (side-by-side list with 202
columns) 418
XWDCMP (extended word
compare) 418
process statements 419
return codes 469
SuperC program description 406
SuperCE utility 215
utility differences 405
SuperCE Utility panel 216
symbolic debug data sets 291
SYSLIB field
Batch Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 309

SYSLIB field (continued)
Foreground Linkage Editor (option
4.7) 281
SYSLIN field
Batch Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 309
Foreground Linkage Editor (option
4.7) 281
SYSOUT Class field
Batch Selection panel 301
Hardcopy Utility panel 183
SuperC - Submit Batch Jobs
panel 212
system command table 195
system commands
DTEST 320
SYSTERM DD statement, parameters
member 304
prefix 304

T
T (truncation) column 197
T (variable types) field
K (key) variable
add row 345
delete row 343
display row 341
N (name) variable
add row 345
delete row 343
display row 341
S (save) variable
add row 345
delete row 343
display row 341
T record format, Allocate New Data Set
panel 125
table
date created/modified 256
editing/browsing
See ISPF Table Utility
export to data set 250, 263
find string in 253
import from data set 263
insert blank row 253
saving changes 247, 254
size (virtual storage required) 256
sorting rows 254
status 256
structure, displaying 257
table input library 195
Table List panel 244, 245
Table statistics, displaying 255
Table structure, displaying 257
Table Utility (option 3.16)
Browse command 245
CANCEL (table changes)
command 250
Edit command 245
EXPORT command 250
export report 260, 264
export to data set 263
extension variables 248
FEXPORT command 252
FILE command 252
find string in table 253
import from data set 263

Table Utility (option 3.16) (continued)
INSERT command 253
options 259
output data set 258
overview 241
panel fields 243
performance 247
SAVE (table changes) command 254
saving changes 247
scrollable fields 247, 250
scrolling 247
select table from DD list 245
select table from library 244
sorting rows 254
STATS command 255
table structure, displaying 257
Table Utility Options panel 259
Tables (option 7.4)
1—display row 340
2—delete row options 341
3—modify row 342
4—add row 344
5—display structure 346
6—display status 347
add row line command 346
CANCEL add row primary
command 346
CANCEL modify row primary
command 344
D (delete) add row line
command 346
D (delete) modify row line
command 344
END add row primary
command 346
END display row command 341
END modify row primary
command 344
I (insert) add row line command 346
I (insert) modify row line
command 344
LOCATE add row primary
command 346
LOCATE display row command 341
LOCATE display structure
command 347
LOCATE modify row primary
command 344
R (repeat) add row line
command 346
R (repeat) modify row line
command 344
tape 124, 146
TCP/IP address
definition 68
TERMIN command procedure
statements 316
terminal characteristics, specifying 30
terminal data set, defined 304
terminal type, specifying 30
terminals
Batch Assembler H (option 5.1) 304
Batch Linkage Editor (option 5.7) 309
Batch VS COBOL II compiler (option
5.2) 305
Batch VS FORTRAN compiler (option
5.3) 306
Index

521

Test field
Foreground VS COBOL II compiler
(option 4.2) 277
testing
dialogs 319
TSO 319
usual test methods for dialog 319
text strings, use of 93
TIME parameter, SORT command 205
tool integration program 74
Total display view, Initial View field 150
trace output in ISPF log
function trace entries 351
trace header entries 351
variable trace entries 352
Traces (option 7.7)
1—function traces 356
2—variable traces 358
CANCEL Function Traces primary
command 358
CANCEL Variable Traces primary
command 359
D (delete) Function Traces line
command 358
D (delete) Variable Traces line
command 359
END Function Traces primary
command 358
END Variable Traces primary
command 359
I (insert) Function Traces line
command 358
I (insert) Variable Traces line
command 359
LOCATE Function Traces primary
command 358
LOCATE Variable Traces primary
command 359
R (repeat) Function Traces line
command 358
R (repeat) Variable Traces line
command 359
working with trace specifications 355
Tracks field
Data Set List utility 157
VTOC Information Display 163
TRACKS keyword, SORT command 177
trigger statement errors 272
triggers
expansion trigger, definition 269
statement errors 272
user-defined 270
TRKS parameter, Space Units field 124
Trks/Cyls field, VTOC Information
Display 163
TSO
CLISTs and REXX EXECs
Data Set List utility (option
3.4) 158
entering 315
variables 160
commands
ACCOUNT 124
ALLOCATE 123
DELETE 172
TEST 319
TSO ACCOUNT 104

522

TSO command 386
TSO command for member 119
TSO workstation command 394
TTR data 110
Tutorial (option 7.T), displaying 366
type-of-difference codes, SuperC 482

U
U (uncatalog data set) line command,
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 169
U (updating a format) line command,
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 205
U record format, Record Format
field 125
uncatalog workstation command 394
Underline headings (in export
report) 261
Unexclude Data Set command 170
Unexclude First Data Set command 170
Unexclude Last Data Set command 171
Unicode
FIND command 91
viewing in Browse 86, 88
Unit field, VTOC Information
Display 163
unmovable data set, defined 157
UPD parameter, BROWSE Output
field 220
update data set control output examples,
SuperC 490
Update DS Name field, SuperC Utility Old Data Set Name panel 209
Update Dsn field, SuperCE Utility
panel 219
UPDCMS8 SuperCE process option 416,
491
UPDCMS8 update data set 491
UPDCNTL SuperCE process option 416,
491
UPDCNTL update data set and
formats 491
UPDLDEL SuperCE process option 416
UPDMVS8 SuperCE process option 417,
495
UPDPDEL SuperCE process option 417,
496
UPDPDEL update data set 496
UPDSEQ0 SuperCE process option 418,
499
UPDSEQ0 update data set 499
UPDSUMO SuperCE process
option 418, 500
UPDSUMO update data set 500
USASCII 93
Use EDIT as default to process selected
table option 259
Use Edit to view the imported table 260
user-defined trigger 270
UTF8 93
Utilities (option 3)
Command Table utility (option
3.9) 195
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 145
Data Set utility (option 3.2) 119

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Utilities (option 3) (continued)
Format Specification utility (option
3.11) 199
Hardcopy utility (option 3.6) 182
ISPF C/S Install (option 3.7) 187
Library utility (option 3.1) 107
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) 138
Outlist utility (option 3.8) 192
overview 6
Reset ISPF Statistics utility (option
3.5) 178
Search-For utility (option 3.14) 228
SuperC utility (option 3.12) 205
SuperCE utility (option 3.13) 215
Utility Selection Panel 107
utility differences
extended 405
standard 405
Utility Selection Panel 107

V
V (VDEFINE) variable, P (pool)
field 335
V (view data set) line command, Data Set
List utility (option 3.4) 166
V record format, Record Format
field 125
VA command, Data Set List utility
(option 3.4) 178
Variables (option 7.3)
CANCEL primary command 335
creating new variables 336
D (delete) line command 335
DBCS data 337
deleting variables 336
END primary command 335
hexadecimal data 337
I (insert) line command 335
input errors 336
LOCATE primary command 335
manipulating variables 336
primary commands 335
split-screen mode 337
test mode 336
usage notes 336, 337
variable life 337
variable value 337
working with dialog variables 333
Verb column 197
VERT parameter, HEX command 95
View (option 1)
description 83
View Entry Panel 83
view action prompt workstation
command 394
VIEW command, Browse 98
view output mode 208, 220, 230, 240
View workstation command 394
view, command table line command 199
viewing a member 119
Volume DATA field, VTOC Information
Display 163
Volume display view, Initial View
field 149
Volume field
Data Set List utility 157

Volume field (continued)
Data Set List Utility panel 148
VOLUME keyword, SORT
command 177
Volume Serial 104
Volume Serial field
Allocate New Data Set panel 123
volume, DASD 104
VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2)
overview 276
VS COBOL II compiler (option 5.2) 305
VS COBOL II interactive debug (option
4.10) 289
VS COBOL II interactive debug (option
5.10) 310
VS COBOL II Interactive Debug
panel 310
VS command, Data Set List utility (option
3.4) 178
VS data set organization, DSORG
field 158
VS FORTRAN compiler (option 4.3) 277
VS FORTRAN compiler (option 5.3) 306
VS Pascal compiler (option 4.6) 279
VS Pascal compiler (option 5.6) 307
VS-E 158
VSAM entry in Volume field 148
VSAM workstation command 394
VT command, Data Set List utility
(option 3.4) 178
VTOC Data field, VTOC Information
Display 163
VTOC information display 163
VTOC summary workstation
command 393
VV command, Data Set List utility
(option 3.4) 178

W
Warn if export data set exists 260
Warn if table exists in the output
library 260
WE workstation command 394
WEW workstation command 394
WIDE SuperCE process option 418
wildcard characters 147
Word parameter
Compare Type field 217
FIND command 91
word, defined for SuperC 218
Workplace (Option 11)
action bar choices 374
file 374
options 382
space 382
SuperC 384
test 384
view 381
actions that require prompt
windows 385
ISPF command shell 388
move/copy 390
rename 391
reset statistics 385
TSO command 386
WS command 387

Workplace (Option 11) (continued)
commands 393
entry panels 371
data set view 372
library view 372
example scenario 399
ISPF Library field 372
ISPF referral lists 373
Object Name field 373
overview 371
specifying actions 374
Workplace example 399
workplace function keys 394, 395
Workplace option description 6
workplace settings 395
workplace settings command 394
Workstation agent 191
installation program 191
Workstation Commands
= 394
ACTBAR action prompt 393
allocate 393
allocate action prompt 393
allocate SMS 394
Browse 393
catalog 393
command action prompt 393
compress 394
Copy 393
CUA attributes 393
delete 393
Delete 393
delete action prompt 393
DSLIST 393
Edit 393
edit action prompt 393
full information action prompt 393
global color change 393
information action prompt 393
ISPF command shell 393
ISPF command table 393
keylist 393
list action prompt 393
list view 393
locate 393
Member list 393
Move 393
NOACTBAR action prompt 393
Open 393
personal data set lists 393
personal library lists 393
point and shoot 394
Print 393
print action prompt 394
print data set 393
print data set index 394
Print data set list 394
Print VTOC information 394
rename 393
Rename 394
rename action prompt 394
reset action prompt 393
SearchFor 394
SearchFor extended 394
select 394
Settings 394
short information 394

Workstation Commands (continued)
Submit 393
SuperC 394
SuperC extended 394
TSO 394
uncatalog 394
View 394
view action prompt 394
VSAM 394
VTOC summary 393
WE 394
WEW 394
WS 394
WV 394
WVW 394
workstation connection 66
workstation tool integration program
action bar choices 75
description 74
editing 76
extension mapping 77
startup 74
updating 76
WPSET command 394
WRITE parameter 349
Writer name 183
writing a list to a list data set
data set list 174
WS command 387
WS command for member 119
WS workstation command 394
WV workstation command 394
WVW workstation command 394

X
X (print index listing) line command,
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 170
XREF Search-For process option 452
XT field, Data Set list utility 157
XT keyword, SORT command 177
XWDCMP SuperCE process option 418

Y
YES parameter
Active field 357, 359, 361
BROWSE Output field 220
Confirm Delete Request field,
select 150
Replace like-named members field,
select 140
Select pack option for “To” data set
field 141
Specify additional search strings field,
select 230
Table available field 348
Table on disk field 349
YYYY/MM/DD format, Expiration Date
field 126
YYYY.DDD format, Expiration Date
field 126

Index

523

Z
Z (compress data set) line command,
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 169
ZDLBLKSZ variable 161
ZDLCAT variable 161
ZDLCDATE variable 161
ZDLCONF variable 161
ZDLDEV variable 160
ZDLDSN variable 160
ZDLDSNTP variable 161
ZDLDSORG variable 161
ZDLEDATE variable 161
ZDLEXT variable 161
ZDLEXTX variable 161
ZDLLCMD variable 161
ZDLLRECL variable 161
ZDLMSG variable 162
ZDLNDSN variable 161
ZDLRDATE variable 161
ZDLRECFM variable 161
ZDLREF variable 162
ZDLSIZE variable 161
ZDLSIZEX variable 161
ZDLUSED variable 161
ZDLVOL variable 160
ZPARM system variable
parenthesis added to 197

524

z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User’s Guide Vol II

Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You
Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)
User’s Guide Volume II
z/OS Version 1 Release 7.0
Publication No. SC34-4823-04
Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?

Overall satisfaction

Very Satisfied

Satisfied

Neutral

Dissatisfied

Very
Dissatisfied
h

How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:

Accurate
Complete
Easy to find
Easy to understand
Well organized
Applicable to your tasks

Very Satisfied

Satisfied

Neutral

Dissatisfied

h
h
h
h
h
h

Very
Dissatisfied
h
h
h
h
h
h

Please tell us how we can improve this book:

Thank you for your responses. May we contact you?

h Yes

h No

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Name
Company or Organization
Phone No.

Address

SC34-4823-04

___________________________________________________________________________________________________

Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You

Cut or Fold
Along Line

_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ _do
_ _not
_ _ staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST-CLASS MAIL

PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

IBM Corporation
Department J87/D325
555 Bailey Avenue
San Jose, CA
U.S.A. 95141-9989

_________________________________________________________________________________________
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
Fold and Tape

SC34-4823-04

Cut or Fold
Along Line

File Number: S370/4300-39
Program Number: 5694-A01

Printed in USA

SC34-4823-04

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
Linearized                      : No
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
PDF Version                     : 1.4
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
Create Date                     : 2005:07:13 10:46:01Z
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Modify Date                     : 2005:08:17 10:12:57-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2005:08:17 10:12:57-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Description                     : 
Creator                         : IBM
Title                           : z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User's Guide Vol II
Keywords                        : 
Producer                        : IBM (ID Workbench)
Identifier                      : SC34-4823-04
Document ID                     : uuid:92bec2d0-1bc2-469a-9b96-1f99bbf680dd
Instance ID                     : uuid:7c6b9516-6da8-4aa4-9f0c-145ea739f6c1
Page Count                      : 548
Subject                         : 
Author                          : IBM

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Z/OS V1R7.0 ISPF User's Guide Vol II User S Volume 2

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation